Db2016 Wdib en

Draft General Budget
of the European Union

for the financial year 2016
Working Document Part I

Programme Statements of operational expenditure
COM(2015) 300 June 2015
Budget
DB 2016 Working Document Part I Programme Statements of

operational expenditure
Draft General Budget

of the European Union
for the Financial Year 2016
Working Document Part I

Programme Statements of operational expenditure
COM(2015) 300 - June 2015
Draft Budget Working Documents

The 2016 Draft Budget is accompanied by eleven Working Documents, as follows:
Part I: Programme Statements of operational expenditure
Working Document I contains Programme Statements, which constitute the main instrument for justifying the operational
appropriations requested by the Commission in the Draft Budget. These Statements are coherent with the corresponding
legal bases and provide details on the resources which are dedicated to each spending Programme.
Part II: Human Resources
Working Document II presents information on Commission human resources, both for the establishment plans and for
external personnel, across all headings of the multiannual financial framework. Moreover, pursuant to Article 38(3)(b)(v) of
the Financial Regulation, it provides a summary table for the period 2014 2016 which shows the number of full-time
equivalents for each category of staff and the related appropriations for all institutions and bodies referred to in Article 208 of
the Financial Regulation.
Part III: Bodies set up by the European Union and having legal personality and Public-private partnership
Working Document III presents detailed information relating to all decentralised agencies, executive agencies and PublicPrivate Partnerships (joint undertakings and joint technology initiatives), with a transparent presentation of revenue,
expenditure and staff levels of various Union bodies, pursuant to Articles 208 and 209 of the Financial Regulation.
Part IV: Pilot projects and preparatory actions
Working Document IV presents information on all pilot projects and preparatory actions which have budget appropriations
(commitments and/or payments) in the 2016 Draft Budget, pursuant to Article 38(3)(c) of the Financial Regulation.
Part V: Budget implementation and assigned revenue
Working Document V presents the budget implementation forecast for 2015, information on assigned revenue
implementation in 2014, and a progress report on outstanding commitments (RAL) and managing potentially abnormal RAL
(PAR) for 2014.
Part VI: Administrative expenditure under Heading 5
This document encompasses administrative expenditure under all budgets to be implemented by the Commission in
accordance with Article 317 of the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union, as well as the budgets of the Offices
(OP, OLAF, EPSO, OIB, OIL and PMO).
Part VII: Commission buildings (Section III)
Working Document VII presents information on buildings under Section III - Commission, pursuant to Article 203(3) of the
Financial Regulation.
Part VIII: Expenditure related to the external action of the European Union
Working Document VIII presents information on human resources and expenditure related to the external action of the
European Union.
Part IX: Funding to international organisations
Working Document IX presents funding provided to international organisations, across all MFF headings, pursuant to Article
38(3)(d) of the Financial Regulation.
Part X: Financial Instruments
Working Document X presents the use made of financial instruments, pursuant to Article 38(5) of the Financial Regulation.
Part XI: Payment schedules (on-line publication only)
Working Document XI presents summary statements of the schedule of payments due in subsequent years to meet budgetary
commitments entered into in previous years, pursuant to Article 38(3)(f) of the Financial Regulation.
Table of Contents
I. INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 6
II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM .................................................................... 7
III. PROGRAMMES' STATEMENTS ..................................................................... 36
HEADING 1A - COMPETITIVENESS FOR GROWTH AND JOBS ..................................... 37
Implementation and exploitation of European satellite navigation systems (EGNOS and Galileo) ........................... 38
International Thermonuclear Experimental Reactor (ITER)........................................................................................ 43
European Earth Observation Programme (Copernicus) ............................................................................................. 46
Nuclear decommissioning assistance programmes in Bulgaria and Slovakia ............................................................. 52
Nuclear decommissioning assistance programme in Lithuania .................................................................................. 56
The Framework Programme for Research and Innovation (Horizon 2020) ................................................................ 59
Euratom Research and Training Programme .............................................................................................................. 86
Programme for the Competitiveness of Enterprises and small and medium-sized enterprises (COSME) ................. 94
The Union Programme for Education, Training, Youth and Sport (Erasmus+) ......................................................... 105
European Union Programme for Employment and Social Innovation (EaSI) ............................................................ 117
Action programme for customs in the European Union (Customs 2020)................................................................. 124
Action programme for taxation in the European Union (Fiscalis 2020) ................................................................... 128
Programme to promote activities in the field of the protection of the financial interests of the European Union
(Hercule III) ............................................................................................................................................................... 131
Exchange, assistance and training programme for the protection of the euro against counterfeiting (Pericles 2020)
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 133
Anti-Fraud Information System (AFIS) ...................................................................................................................... 136
Connecting Europe Facility (CEF) .............................................................................................................................. 139
Interoperability Solutions for European public administrations, businesses and citizens (ISA2) ............................. 154
European statistical programme (ESP) ..................................................................................................................... 157
Statement on Financial Intervention of the European Fund for Strategic Investments (EFSI) ................................. 162
HEADING 1B ECONOMIC, SOCIAL AND TERRITORIAL COHESION...................... 165

European Social Fund (ESF)....................................................................................................................................... 166
European Regional Development Fund (ERDF) ........................................................................................................ 173
Cohesion Fund (CF) ................................................................................................................................................... 188
Fund for European Aid to the Most Deprived .......................................................................................................... 198
HEADING 2 SUSTAINABLE GROWTH: NATURAL RESOURCES .............................. 201

Common Agricultural Policy (CAP) including European Agricultural Guarantee Fund (EAGF) and European
Agricultural Fund for Rural Development (EAFRD) ................................................................................................... 202
European Maritime and Fisheries Fund (EMFF) ....................................................................................................... 232
Compulsory contributions to Regional Fisheries Management Organisations (RFMOs) and other international
organisations and Sustainable Fisheries Agreements (SFAs) .................................................................................... 243
Programme for the Environment and Climate Action (LIFE) .................................................................................... 247
HEADING 3 SECURITY AND CITIZENSHIP..................................................................... 264

Asylum, Migration and Integration Fund (AMIF) ...................................................................................................... 265
Internal Security Fund (ISF) ....................................................................................................................................... 276
Justice Programme ................................................................................................................................................... 288
Rights, Equality and Citizenship programme (REC)................................................................................................... 295
Union Civil Protection Mechanism (UCPM) .............................................................................................................. 310
Europe for Citizens .................................................................................................................................................... 315
Food and Feed .......................................................................................................................................................... 321
Union action in the field of health (Health Programme) .......................................................................................... 329
Consumer Programme .............................................................................................................................................. 334
Creative Europe Programme .................................................................................................................................... 341
Statement on Financial Intervention of the Communication Policy Area ................................................................ 352
HEADING 4 GLOBAL EUROPE ........................................................................................... 360

Instrument for Pre-accession Assistance (IPA II) ...................................................................................................... 361
Instrument of financial support for encouraging the economic development of the Turkish Cypriot community and
amending Council Regulation (EC) No 2667/2000 on the European Agency for Reconstruction ............................ 369
European Neighbourhood Instrument (ENI)............................................................................................................. 372
Development Cooperation Instrument (DCI)............................................................................................................ 383
Partnership instrument for cooperation with third countries (PI) ........................................................................... 397
European Instrument for Democracy and Human Rights (EIDHR) ........................................................................... 404
Instrument contributing to Stability and Peace (IcSP) .............................................................................................. 412
Humanitarian aid ...................................................................................................................................................... 419
Common foreign and security policy (CFSP) ............................................................................................................. 424
Instrument for Nuclear Safety Cooperation (INSC) .................................................................................................. 435
Macro Financial Assistance (MFA) ............................................................................................................................ 440
Union Civil Protection Mechanism - Heading 4 ........................................................................................................ 444
EU Aid Volunteers initiative (EUAV) .......................................................................................................................... 448
Cooperation with Greenland .................................................................................................................................... 453
SPECIAL INSTRUMENTS......................................................................................................... 458

European Globalisation Adjustment Fund (EGF) ...................................................................................................... 459
European Union Solidarity Fund (EUSF).................................................................................................................... 462
I. INTRODUCTION
Over the years, the Commission has introduced performance reporting mechanisms designed to explain spending
programmes operations and demonstrate how EU funds are being used to achieve policy goals. With the objective to
make sure every Euro is spent effectively and serves the intended political purpose the performance framework have seen
a conceptual shift from an approach that was heavily oriented to inputs, to a model designed to provide EU decision
makers and citizens with a clearer picture of the progress towards expected results to be achieved with the money spend
at EU level. Internal working groups and external feedback from the Budgetary Authority and the European Court of
Auditors have contributed to this process and new requirements embedded in the Financial Regulation1.
All the legal acts and implementing acts of the spending programmes under the 2014-2020 Multi-annual Financial
Framework (MFF) contain performance frameworks defining objectives and setting out indicators which measure
progress as well as monitoring, reporting and evaluation arrangements2. Performance measurement, and the use of
performance indicators (PIs), is thus an integral part of the new performance framework, providing feedback to inform
and improve effectiveness of delivery and promoting accountability.
The performance information per programme is compiled in the working document "Programme Statements of
operational expenditure" accompanying the draft budget. It is further developed in the Directorates'-General management
plans, and reported on in their annual activity reports, the synthesis report of the Commission's management
achievements and the consolidated Art. 318 report on the Union's finances based on the results achieved. Finally, the
MFF programmes provide for interim evaluations in 2017/2018 to address implementation issues and deliver first global
indications on performance. Final and ex-post evaluations, addressing results and impacts of funding, will be carried out
in 2020 2025.
Given that the improvement of the performance systems is an overarching goal of the new Commission ("Every action
we take must deliver maximum performance and value added3"), efforts will continue to enhance the performance of the
budget. Referred to as EU Budget Focused on Results, the Commission initiatives specifically addressing budget
performance are steered at the highest political level by members of the College. These initiatives cover the entire budget
cycle and aim, inter alia, at improving performance information to support and inform budgetary allocation decisions.
An overview of the main programmes is provided in the following section 'programmes memorandum' while information
on the programmes contribution to the Europe 2020, biodiversity and climate mainstreaming are described in the
subsequent sections 3 and 4. Finally the full overview of performance indicators is included in the detailed programmes
statements organised per budgetary heading.
1
2
3
Articles 30(3) and 38(3)e) which requires the Commission to manage its activities covered by the budget by SMART objectives and to provide
performance information with regard to the financial interventions annually, during the budgetary procedure.
This framework has been described and has been communicated to the other EU institutions through SWD (2014)200, which was attached to last
year's Art. 318 report to the Discharge.
President Juncker Mission letter to Vice-President Georgieva
I. INTRODUCTION /6
II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM

1. Programme Statements purpose, structure and link with budgetary nomenclature
1.1
Purpose
The purpose of Programme Statements (PS) is to substantiate the draft budget with available performance information
supporting the Commission's requests for the annual budget allocations for the operational expenditure. It informs on the
purpose of each programme ('why and on what do we spend?'), the resources spread among the programmes and the
progress toward achieving its objectives ('is the programme progressing toward its targets?'). The Programme
Statements document includes all EU spending programmes and present statements on financial intervention for
activities that are not supported by a particular programme but have significant budgetary impact4.
1.2
Structure
The programmes are classified per budgetary heading and summarize performance framework designed in the
programmes legal bases and/or the relevant implementing acts. Each Programme Statement follows the same structure:
section 1:
provides information on the programme legal base and financial programming;
section 2:
gives implementation rates;
section 3:
specifies programme' general objective(s) with the associated indicator(s), the EU added value5
including contribution to Europe 2020, mainstreaming of climate action and biodiversity financing;
section 4:
provides overview of programme' specific objectives, their related performance indicators as well
asexpected expenditure related outputs.
Whenever required, justifications are given for changes to the financial programming and /or to the baseline, targets and
milestones of specific indicators.
1.3
Link with the budgetary nomenclature
The budget nomenclature of spending activities corresponds to operational chapters and each spending programme is
placed within one operational chapter (for its operational expenditure) under one or more Policy Areas (budget Titles).
There is a direct link established between the programme objective(s) and budget line (articles or items) with the amounts
allocated to the objective(s).
In the PS, the link with budgetary nomenclature is ensured by providing next to the description and number of the
outputs, the information on budget line(s) which finance these outputs.
2. Overview of the programmes' performance

2016 will be the third year of the implementation of the 2014-2020 programmes. Since programmes are in the early stage
of implementation (launching of the activities) the performance information is still very limited.
The mitigating measures in relation to the payment backlog led, as a side-effect, to a slow-down of the implementation of
the new programmes in 2014. However, most of the programmes under direct management kicked off, with calls for
proposals and procurements being launched allowing all the commitment appropriations to have been committed and
showing the start of the implementation. It is expected that in 2015, contracting will return to a normal level of
implementation for most of the programmes implemented in direct management.
Programmes under shared management have been delayed due to the late adoption of the 2014-2020 MFF Regulation
and of legislative acts laying down provisions for implementing of European Structural and Investment Funds (ESIF).
This led to the subsequent delay in submission and approval of operational programmes (OP) and accreditation of
national management authorities. Whilst working under high time pressure in order to catch up to the extent possible the
delay caused by the late adoption of the legal bases, the Commission is determined to ensure that the OPs will keep a
focus on the definition of adequate performance indicators. In line with the regulatory framework annual reporting on the
implementation of these programmes will only start as of 2016.
Finally, negotiations of the new framework agreements with the EIB and International Organisations (UN family, WB
group, OECD, Council of Europe and IMF) has been delayed due to lengthy discussions on the issues of cost eligibility
4
5
For activities that are not supported by a particular programme but have significant budgetary impact (e.g. task resulting from the Commission
prerogatives at institutional level)
The European Added Value (EAV) is defined as: "the value resulting from an EU intervention which is additional to the value that would have
been otherwise created by Member State action alone." For a fuller definition of EU added value, see Box 10.2 of the Courts 2011 annual report.
II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 7
conditions and remuneration which has resulted in important delays in the execution. So far, agreements have been
signed with the EIB/EIF and the WB while negotiations are reaching their final stage with other International
Organisations. It is however expected that the implementation by the partner organisations will start in the second part of
2015.
The following section provides an overview of the current status of programmes' implementation, highlights outputs
planned for 2016 and whenever possible some examples of programme achievements are also presented.
2.1
Heading 1a competitiveness for growth and jobs
The main programmes under the budget heading 'Competiveness for growth and employment' are Horizon 2020, large
infrastructure projects (Galileo, ITER, Copernicus), the Connecting Europe Facility (CEF), and the Erasmus+ programme
funding education, training, youth and sport actions. Although smaller in absolute budgetary terms, the actions funded
under the COSME programme are significant for European SMEs. The remaining smaller programmes account for
around 7% of funding and focus on specific areas where pan-European coordination is needed, such as the cooperation
between tax and customs authorities (Fiscalis), the cooperation to fight fraud or counterfeiting (Pericles), the compilation
of statistics by national statistical agencies to ensure consistency and comparability (ESP) or nuclear decommissioning in
Bulgaria, Slovakia and Lithuania6.
Commitment appropriations for Competitiveness for growth and jobs are set at EUR 18 618,4 million. This is an increase
of 6,1 % compared to the 2015 budget, which is mostly due to the European Fund for Strategic Investments (EFSI), the
Connecting Europe Facility (CEF) and Erasmus+.
2.1.1 GALILEO / EGNOS Implementation and exploitation of European satellite systems
Galileo is one of the European large infrastructure projects and is entirely financed by the EU budget. While European
independence has been a key goal behind the creation of the new system, Galileo is a navigation system 100%
interoperable with GPS and Glonass, making it a fully integrated new element in the worldwide global navigation
satellite system (GNSS), a powerful cornerstone that will
allow more accurate and more reliable positioning, even in
high-rise cities where buildings can obscure signals. Galileo
system will consist of an array of 30 satellites and the
About 65% of all existing satellite navigation
necessary ground infrastructure to control the satellites and
receiver models are already EGNOS-enabled,
enable the provision of positioning, navigation and timing
meaning that these receivers can use the EGNOS
services. Galileo is creating a range of new business
message. In Europe, more than 170 EGNOSopportunities for equipment manufacturers, application
based landing approaches are currently available
developers and providers of reliability-critical' services.
at more than 110 airports in 15 countries, which
In 2014, the deployment of the Galileo infrastructure has
continued. The development and validation phase of the
programme was successfully concluded and the Galileo
satellite navigation system was validated in orbit. The
deployment phase of the programme started with the launch of
two Galileo satellites in August 2014. Due to a launch
anomaly, these satellites were placed into an incorrect orbit.
An independent investigation identified the root cause of the
anomaly and made recommendations for corrective measures.
The two satellites have now been moved to an orbit and are
being tested with very positive results. Their future use will be
decided in the course of 2015. The launches of Galileo
satellites will resume in 2015, putting the overall plan for the
deployment of the Galileo constellation back on-track.
allow navigating vertically when landing at an

airport with reduced visibility conditions.
The Airbus A350 is the first large commercial
aircraft providing an option to land with EGNOS.
From the 750 firm orders, most of them
contracted the EGNOS option.
EGNOS is also used for inland maritime
navigation in the 400km-long Hungarian Danube
stretch.
Other programmes are: EaSI, Customs, Hercule III, AFIS, ISA and specific activities in the field of financial reporting and auditing
EGNOS augments the GPS signal over the European territory and makes it suitable for safety applications such as flying
aircraft or navigating ships. Its operation has been on track in the course of 2014 and more than 120 airports in Europe
now use EGNOS for their approach procedures.
In order to secure a European launcher for sending off Galileo satellites to space, a EUR 511 million contract was signed
with Arianespace for the acquisition of three Ariane-5 launchers. Each Ariane-5 launcher will have a capacity to carry
four Galileo satellites into orbit per launch - as soon as technical adaptation to Galileo satellites is completed.
Preparations for the provision of Galileo services have continued, and it is expected that the Galileo early services will be
provided in the course of 2016.
Galileo and EGNOS will face in 2016 the challenge to promote the increase in the uptake and commercial exploitation by
user communities and commercial players for building their business cases. It is early days as yet but progress in planned
implementation is on-track and on-time and the outlook remains positive that the range of services to be provided can
continue to expand as planned and the commercial take-up of the services offered will be satisfactory.
2.1.2 ITER International Thermonuclear Experimental reactor
ITER aims to demonstrate fusion as a viable and
sustainable source of energy. The project brings
together seven parties that represent half of the
The completion of the ITER foundations: The concrete
worlds population the European Union, Russia,
basemat (~15,000 m3) that will host the complex Tokamak
Japan, China, India, South Korea and the United
was completed. Design and construction of a complex
States. ITER is being built in Cadarache, France.
basemat required a close collaboration with the French
Nuclear Safety Authority (ASN) to demonstrate that it can
The programme covers the contributions to the
withstand earthquakes or other major accidents. The last
construction of the ITER facility, procurement of
quarter of 2014 has also seen the start of construction of
equipment and installations and general technical
the Tokamak assembly building as well as of the
and administrative support for the project during
surrounding buildings of the Tokamak complex.
construction, and participation in commissioning
Achievement of major technological milestone in ITER
and initial operation, as well as other ITER related
TF coils manufacturing: The Poloidal Field coils building
was completed and is ready now to receive the companies
activities, such as those under the Broader Approach
that will manufacture on site 4 Poloidal Field coil system.
Agreement
with
Japan.
The
programme
The beginning of a new phase of ITER construction:
implementation is progressing with some delays.
Significant progress was achieved in the on-going contracts
Although good progress can be observed on the
for manufacturing the Toroidal Field Coils and the Vacuum
ITER site in Saint Paul-Lez-Durance, the project is
Vessel and progress has been achieved in the testing of the
facing difficult and complex challenges. Many of
First Wall panels being developed by F4E to protect the
Vacuum Vessel from the hot plasma. This has allowed F4E
these challenges are linked to the beyond-state-ofto complete Stage 1 of ITERs pre-qualification progress
the-art state of the technology of this ambitious
and to award contracts for manufacturing full-scale
experimental project and the complex international
prototypes.
management and governance structure. This
situation is affecting the current schedule adopted in
2010. For this reason, work to develop a more
realistic schedule for the ITER construction phase
has started and it is expected that a new revised schedule be presented to the ITER Council by June 2015. A revised
schedule for the project should be adopted in spring 2016 by the ITER Council. As of 31 October 2014, the European
Joint Undertaking for ITER "Fusion for Energy" (F4E) has signed 329 operational procurement contracts and 113 grants
for a total of more than EUR 3,050 million. F4E has now placed most of the large value contracts (more than EUR 100
million) needed for the construction of ITER.
For 2016, it is projected that F4E will achieve 27% of Euratom's obligations discharged by the ITER Organization (IO).
F4E will continue its activities of following up the on-going contracts, placed during the previous years (with a total
value of running contract of about EUR 3.1 billion (2008 value) forecasted by the end of 2015). The main deliverables
expected by F4E in 2016 are the following: i) completion of Toroidal and Poloidal Field conductor fabrication, ii)
delivery of almost all EU cryoplant components, iii) delivery of first components for the Emergency Power Supply
System, iv) delivery of Steady State Electrical Network components, v) various buildings (non-Tokamak complex) are
expected to be ready to host the equipment.
More concretely, the construction of Tokamak complex will be in full execution. Furthermore, significant progress is
expected to be achieved in the on-going contracts for manufacturing of the Toroidal and Poloidal Field Coils. The
fabrication of the first 3 Vacuum Vessel sectors should be positively advanced to allow placing the order for the
remaining 4 sectors. New contracts will be placed for the divertor target, remote handling system, manufacturing of
components related to Vacuum Pumping and Fuelling and the Cryoplant, Plasma Heating systems and the development
of diagnostics, for completion of some Buildings.
2.1.3 COPERNICUS European Earth Observation Programme
The Copernicus new regulation was adopted in April 2014 with a financial envelope of EUR 4,3 billion. The delegation
agreements were signed with the European Space Agency and EUMETSAT for the space infrastructure and with the
European Environment Agency, the European Medium-Range Weather Forecasting Centre (ECMWF) and MercatorOcan for the service provision. The programme is now well on track to achieve all of its targets, both as regards
infrastructure and the provision of services.
The launch in April 2014 of a Copernicus satellite was a major milestone for the EUs Earth observation programme.
Thanks to Sentinel 1A, the first of a constellation of satellites, data will be provided to enable considerable progress in
improving maritime security, climate change monitoring and providing support in emergency and crisis situations. For
example, the Copernicus emergency management service was used for providing flood delineation information to
national civil protection agencies in Serbia, Bosnia-Herzegovina, and Croatia during the Western Balkan Floods in May
2014. Such data proved extremely useful for Emergency Mapping (e.g. the radar satellite). Three months later, Sentinel1A data have been used to map the rupture caused by the biggest earthquake that has shaken northern California in 25
years. Copernicus information also helped mitigate the risk of oil spills during the removal of the wrecked Costa
Concordia ship in Italy. This opens possibilities for further commercial use. Copernicus is also used to monitor
biodiversity and map land cover and vegetation changes, providing essential information to the environmental and
agricultural policies of the EU.
The schedule of launches foresees three launches of Sentinels and the launch of a precursor satellite mission in 2015. To
achieve the economic benefits from Copernicus in the period 2015-2020 and longer term, it essential that the user uptake
is actively fostered and dissemination of the Copernicus data and information is further enabled to be effective and in line
with user needs. A framework contract to enhance user uptake and to study data dissemination, in particular with respect
to Big Data7 aspects have been put in place. Implementation of the recommendations in the study will form a focus for
2015 and future years.
2.1.4 Horizon 2020 research programme
In the area of research and development support, the economic impact of the EU budget has been estimated to be
considerable, due to the economies of scale that pooling resources for research at EU level can generate. The increasing
collaboration with industry, which fosters a better link between research results and commercialisation, is also promising.
The 2014 was the first year of implementation of Horizon 2020 which is progressing smoothly but somewhat slower than
expected. Indeed, the low level of payment appropriations in 2014 has obliged the Commission to postpone calls for
proposals deadlines and to sign many grant agreements in 2015 instead of 2014 as initially planned8. Nevertheless, the
launch of the Work Programme 2014-2015, with a budget of EUR 15,5 billion, was a great success with 46 097 proposals
received by 25 February 2015. For the 79 calls concluded by that same date, 25 903 proposals were eligible, 3 765 were
retained for funding and 1 410 grant agreements were signed. The calls published took full account of the key elements
and novelties of Horizon 2020 embedded in the Work Programme (e.g. the societal challenge-based, cross-disciplinary
approach).
The volume of data and information produced by Copernicus will continually grow in the coming years as Sentinels are progressively launched
and the full set of services become operational. This started in 2014 with two services already operational and with the launch of Sentinel-1A.
Within another year or so all six Copernicus services will be operational and over the next 2-3 years three constellations of two Sentinels each will
be flying, observing the earth and delivering approximately 8 TB of data per day. Through the timely and efficient dissemination of data and
information, the Commission will support different user communities to increase scientific knowledge, support public authorities, and stimulate
economic growth, both in the Earth observation downstream sector and in any other activities that will exploit Copernicus data and information.
The challenge presented by ensuring access to this "Big Data" must be tackled now in order that we can plan for the increasing data volume with
confidence.
The Commission estimates that in a normal implementation scenario, without limitations on payment appropriations, by the end of 2014, around 1
billion EUR would have been spent more under H2020
The following H2020 novelties have been kicked

off:
In 2014, 800 top researchers were selected by the European
a) Launch of a new generation of EU
Research Council (ERC) to pursue their best ideas. A total of
financial instruments: A new generation
EUR 1,25 billion will be allocated in the form of grants. This
of EU financial instruments and advisory
funding will enable them to consolidate their research teams
services was launched by the European
and to develop their most innovative ideas. 50 000 researchers
of 136 different nationalities working in more than 81 countries
Commission
and
the
European
have been supported under Marie Skodowska-Curie actions
Investment Bank Group (EIB) to help
(MSCA).
innovative firms access finance more
Over 275 European small and medium-sized enterprises
easily. Over the next seven years, it is
(SMEs) were selected to receive new grants of EUR 117
expected that the "InnovFin EU
million in total to finance innovation activities and the
Finance for Innovators" products will
development of their business plans, or feasibility studies for
their projects. All of these grants are awarded under the
make available more than EUR 24
Horizon 2020 SME Instrument.
billion of financing for research and
Two new Knowledge and Innovation Communities (KICs)
innovation (R&I) by small, medium and
were selected by the European Institute of Innovation and
large companies and the promoters of
Technology (EIT) in the areas of innovation for healthy living
research infrastructures. This finance is
and active ageing, and on raw materials - sustainable
exploration, extraction processing, recycling and substitution.
expected to support up to EUR 48 billion
These topics respond to actual challenges faced by the EU:
of final R&I investments.
ageing population in Europe; fall in raw material prices
b) Investment in partnerships in research
worldwide.
and innovation: In 2014, the Council
and the European Parliament adopted the
legal acts for a new generation of publicpublic and public-private partnerships
built on the FP7 experience that will allow large-scale, long-term innovation projects to be carried out under the
umbrella of Horizon 2020. It consists of four
public-public partnerships set up under Article
185 of the TFEU (i.e. Active and Assisted
Fighting Ebola with EU-supported knowledge and financial
Living AAL, European & Developing
resources and partners:
Countries Clinical Trials Partnership
In September 2014, the World Health Organisation (WHO)
EDCTP2, European Metrology Research
called on the international community to find ways to accelerate
Programme EMPIR, Eurostars-2) and seven
the evaluation and use of new treatments for Ebola. Based on its
public-private partnerships established under
unique added value situated in its ability to quickly bring
Article 187 of the TFEU (i.e. Bio-based
together dispersed knowledge and financial resources through
inter-disciplinary, cross-border and cross-sectoral research and
industries - BBI, Clean Sky 2, ECSEL, Fuel
innovation consortia- the Commission's response was fast.
Cells and Hydrogen FCH2, Innovative
Exploiting to the fullest Horizon 2020's far-reaching
Medicines Initiative - IMI2, SESAR and
administrative simplification and streamlined implementation,
two fast-track procedures were completed in an unprecedentedly
Shift2Rail). Pooling research and innovation
short timeframe while following all Horizon 2020 rules. These
investments of more than EUR 22 billion in
fast-track procedures were planned during September and
the next seven years in sectors facing major
successfully
evaluated
projects started in
October.
societal challenges and for industrial
EUR 2,.4 million from Horizon 2020 were mobilised.
leadership these partnerships will contribute to
In parallel, the Commission leveraged its role in the Innovative
support Europe's industrial competitiveness,
Medicines Initiative (IMI) and started planning, together with its
partner, the European Federation of Pharmaceutical Industries
economic growth and job creation. The first
and Associations (EFPIA), the IMI Ebola+ call. This call was
calls were launched in July 2014. The seven
launched on 6 November; the procedure has been completed in
public-private partnerships are complemented
record time taking into consideration the dual public-private
nature of IMI. With a total of EUR 140 million being mobilised
by
nine
contractual
Public-Private
from Horizon 2020, which, in turn, leveraged a further
Partnerships (cPPP) (i.e Factories of the
EUR 101 million from the pharmaceutical industry, these efforts
Future (FoF), Energy-efficient Buildings
are already delivering, with trials on the ground in West Africa
(EeB), European Green Vehicles Initiative
currently underway and with the first indication of results.
(EGVI), Sustainable Process Industry
(SPIRE), Advanced 5G network infrastructure
c)
for the Future Internet (5G), High Performance Computing (HPC), Robotics, Photonics and Big Data Value)
established with industry under article 25 of Horizon 2020 Regulation, with an indicative budget of EUR 6,7
billion for the whole duration of the programme. Projects are selected through competitive calls which are fully
open to companies (including SMEs), universities, research organisations and others types of beneficiaries.
Launch of the Fast Track to Innovation (FTI) pilot initiative: The recently launched FTI pilot initiative will be
implemented in 2015-2016 as a new initiative under Horizon 2020. It has a budget of EUR 200 million across
the Horizon 2020 priority Societal Challenges and the specific objective Leadership in Enabling and
Industrial Technologies (LEITs), without further restrictions to topics. It aims to support mature innovative
concepts that have been tested in an operational environment and to promote innovation by reducing the time it
takes to bring innovative ideas to market. The pilot will be implemented through one common call with 6
deadlines in 2016-2017. The continuation of Fast Track to Innovation beyond 2016 will depend on the results of
an in-depth evaluation of the scheme.
Finally, the three Horizon 2020 work programmes for 2016 and 2017 are under preparation in view of their adoption in
the course of the second semester of 2015. Consultations with the Horizon 2020 Advisory Groups and Programme
Committees are ongoing.
Given the time lag between the implementation of Horizon 2020 projects and the results they are expected to deliver, the
latter cannot be measured in the first years following the launch of the programme.
2.1.5 COSME Competitiveness of enterprises and SMEs
COSME is the sole Union programme specifically dedicated to competitiveness and SMEs, with a total budget of
EUR 2,3 billion over 2014-2020. The programme was successfully rolled out in 2014. Its implementation has been
entrusted to the Executive Agency for SMEs (EASME) for grants management and to the European Investment Fund
(EIF) as regards the financial instruments. The Commission and the EIF signed the delegation agreement on the COSME
financial instruments in July 2014, and shortly thereafter, the EIF published two continuous calls for expression of
interest open to eligible financial institutions, e.g. banks, guarantee institutions, funds.
The first COSME Work Programme was adopted in January 2014, with a budget of EUR 260 million focusing on
specific actions to promote entrepreneurship, facilitate access to finance for SMEs, help SMEs benefit better from the
Single Market, and improve the framework conditions under which SMEs operate. More than EUR 95 million were
implemented by EASME in 2014 through approximately 75 actions.
The financial instruments under the COSME programme (Competitiveness of Enterprises and Small and Medium-sized
Enterprises) have been launched in 2014. In this area, COSME is the direct successor of the CIP (Competitiveness and
Innovation Programme). With a budget of EUR 1,1 billion, the CIP financial instruments mobilised more than EUR 18
billion of loans and EUR 2,9 billion of venture capital to over 346 000 SMEs in Europe (with a leverage effect of loan
guarantee 1:30). In other words, each euro of EU budget generated EUR 68 in loans and more than EUR 6 of venture
capital for SMEs9.
The calls for the financial instruments have generated a strong interest from financial intermediaries across the EU and
third countries participating in COSME, especially for the Loan Guarantee Facility (LGF). The European Investment
Fund received numerous applications and during 2014 signed agreements for loan guarantees with three different
financial intermediaries located in Spain, Germany and the United Kingdom.
COSME actions also seek to optimise synergies with other programmes such as Horizon 2020, the Partnership
Instrument and the European Structural and Investment Funds (ESIF), in particular as regards: internationalisation,
entrepreneurship, the economic exploitation of new ideas, the creation of new firms, new business models, advanced
capacities for product and service development, the capacity of SMEs to engage in growth in regional, national and
international markets, developing ICT products and services, e-commerce, e-skills, investment in innovation and
research, technology transfer, networking, clusters and Key Enabling Technologies.
Finance
for
Europe
Entrepreneurs
http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/flipbook/finance_for_europe_entrepreneurs/files/cip_brochure_final_version%20(2).pdf
2011:
2.1.6 ERASMUS+ the EU programme for Education, Training, Youth and Sport
The programme ERASMUS+ integrates and expands previous funding streams for education, training, youth, Jean
Monnet activities10 and sport, including the new masters student loan guarantee facility and the international dimension
of higher education and youth cooperation. It has a 40 % increase in its budget for the 201420 period compared with the
last budgetary period, up to well over EUR 16
billion.
The implementation of Erasmus+ programme is
progressing in accordance to the timeline
defined in the 2014 and 2015 work programme.
For 2014, the programme budget was executed
fully with 100% of the annual appropriations
committed without any significant deviation
from planning.
All indicators linked to Europe 2020 headline
targets, namely higher education attainment
and early school leaving showed progress,
targets remain within reach if efforts are
sustained by all. In accordance with data
published in 2014 there has been a strong
expansion in the attainment of tertiary
education, from 23,6 % in 2002 to 36,9 % in
2013 (target for 2020: at least 40 %). The share
of early school leavers has been decreasing
slowly but steadily, from 17 % in 2002 to 12 %
in 2013 (target for 2020: below 10 %).
Launched in October 2014 of Online Linguistic Support (OLS)

has now reached over 30 000 Erasmus+ mobility participants.
Erasmus+ OLS helps make sure that people make the most of
their time abroad picking up useful skills for the job market and
getting fully immersed into another culture through languages.
As of April 2015, the Electronic Platform for Adult Learning
in Europe (EPALE) is available. It offers a place to meet and
discuss important adult learning topics, as well as to exchange
ideas and materials to support professional practice. This type of
community platform is the first of its kind for the sector of adult
learning.
The new Eurydice website that described European education
systems in detail was launched in April 2015 integrating Eurydice
with Eurypedia and the European Encyclopaedia on national
education systems. The main aim of the new website is to reach
out to a wider audience within the educational field, as well as to
harmonise the presentation and make the new website more userfriendly.
Furthermore, the level of basic skills, the share

of pupils studying at least two foreign
languages, the share of adults taking part in
lifelong learning or the share of non-EU
students have increased in the recent past. Whereas one out of two European graduates who studies or trains abroad
benefits from Erasmus+ (3 million students since its inception), Erasmus+ increases their employability advantage over
non-mobiles by 45 % in total. More specifically, the unemployment rate of Erasmus students is 23 % lower than of nonmobile students five years after graduation. Furthermore, EU funded mobility widens the scope of mobility across all
Member States and has a ripple effect on student mobility at large.
Similarly in the area of international mobility, the joint masters and doctoral programmes funded offered overall
considerable added value by facilitating the success of graduates when looking for work and/or further research positions.
International experiences and intercultural competence are indeed considered in the mid-term evaluation as the most
important assets that distinguish Erasmus+ beneficiaries from other graduates.
Compared to previous years, in 2016, the Commission proposes to maintain a high-level of continuity, although some
priorities have been revised and complemented in order to take into account recent policy developments.
2.1.7 CEF - Connecting Europe Facility
The Connecting Europe Facility (CEF) targets investments11 in key infrastructures in order to enable the preparation and
implementation of projects within the framework of the trans-European networks policy in the sectors of energy,
transport and telecommunications. The CEF has an overall budget of EUR 33,242 billion12 to invest in those fields: EUR
26 billion for transport, EUR 5,8 billion for energy and EUR 1,1 for telecommunications. It is expected that EUR 1
million spent at European level will generate EUR 5 million from Member States and EUR 20 million from the private
10
11
12
The Jean Monnet Actions aim at promoting excellence in teaching and research in the field of European Union studies worldwide. These Actions
also aim at fostering the dialogue between the academic world and policy-makers, in particular with the aim of enhancing governance of EU
policies.
It has been estimated that the level of investment that needs to be raised in order to complete the core trans-European networks amounts to EUR
1,8 trillion.
In current prices, Regulation No 1316/2013 of 11 December 2013 establishing the CEF
sector.13 CEF investments will have a significant economic impact through its focus on increasing accessibility and
improving the efficiency of network industries. Transport costs, for example, amount to between 2% and 10% of
businesses total costs, while households in the EU spend about 13% of their income on transport-related goods and
services. Improved infrastructure connections will contribute to reducing these costs, with a significant effect on
competitiveness and wealth. Improved energy transmission infrastructure by 2020 will translate into at least 0,42% of
GDP increase in the EU. For transport, an impact analysis estimated a socio-economic benefit worth 1.6 times the
investment size.14 The deployment of eProcurement, an EU-wide digital service, could lead to an estimated minimum of
EUR 50 billion in savings15.
CEF- transport: As a result of the first call for
proposals under the multi-annual work programme
2014-2020, a total amount of EUR 11.93 billion in
grants is expected to be awarded in 2015. The bulk of
Europeana platform is a Europes digital library,
this amount has been allocated to actions
museum and archive, contains millions of books,
paintings, films, museum objects and archival records
contributing to removing bottlenecks, enhancing rail
that have been digitised throughout Europe. To realise
interoperability, bridging missing links, and in
its full potential CEF has supported the development of
particular improving cross-border sections, including
innovative added-value products or services based on
in Cohesion Member States. Further financial
Europeana content. Currently there are two Application
assistance to the projects of common interest in
Program Interfaces (APIs) for use available through the
Europeana Labs: they allow to search and retrieve the
transport sector will be provided through calls for
contents of the Europeana database for use in end-users
proposals to be launched in 2015 with a total
applications.
indicative volume of EUR 8 billion (EUR 7.3 billion
available exclusively to Cohesion Member States and
Open Data Portal: In 2014 the deployment of a
comprehensive Open Data core platform started. The
approximately EUR 700 million for the SESAR
portal aims at providing access to open, freely reusable
deployment priority) .
datasets from local, regional and national public bodies
The grant agreements with the beneficiaries of the first
across Europe. Work on this portal takes into account
call for proposals are currently being awarded. As the
the previous work undertaken on a prototype developed
in the context of Framework Programme 7, currently
minimum duration of an action is around 2 years, the
operational at http://publicdata.eu. This pilot panfirst results for simple actions (studies) can only be
European data portal shows an impressive number of
expected in 2017 while partial results for complex
referenced datasets (47864 sets from 28 different
actions (works) in 2018. Progress will however be
national and regional open data catalogues) and it keeps
on growing. It received a total of around 70.000 visits
measured based on the Annual Status Reports the
in 2014 (an increase of 64% compared to 2013). On 19
beneficiaries have to deliver each year first reports
December a 3 year contract was signed within the CEF
foreseen in March of 2016.
programme in order to turn the pilot into a stable
service fully integrated with the other CEF DSIs.
Safer Internet Platform: The overall objective of the
Safer Internet DSI is to deploy services that help make
the internet a trusted environment for children by
providing a platform to share resources, services and
practices between Safer Internet Centres and to provide
services to their users. In 2014 Safer Internet Centres
were present in 27 Member States and in some
associated countries. Moreover in 2014, 107 countries
organised SID events reaching 52,2 million people
worldwide. CEF continues to support the centres and
allow a fully interoperable network between them.
CEF- Energy: As a result of the first call for proposals

under the multi-annual work programme 2014-2020, a
total amount of EUR 674,3 million in grants has been
awarded to 34 actions. The bulk of this amount has
been allocated to actions contributing to ending the
energy isolation of the Baltic States and to improving
the security of supply in the region. Further financial
assistance to the projects of common interest in
electricity and gas will be provided through two calls
for proposals to be launched in 2015 with a total
indicative volume of EUR 65 million.
CEF- Information and Communication Technology (ICT): In 2014 the implementation of the building blocks supporting
the entire digital service infrastructure (DSI) has started. In particular, the deployment and operation of the core service
platforms for the following infrastructures: Europeana, Safer Internet for Children, eID/eSignature, eDelivery,
eInvoicing, Open Data, Automated Translation and Cyber Security as well as the generic services associated with Safer
13
14
15
http://ec.europa.eu/transport/infrastructure/tentec/tentecportal/site/en/connectingeurope.html
Report prepared by ECORYS (2007), Ex ante evaluation of the TEN-T Multi Annual Programme 2007-2013
Connecting Europe Facility Investing in Europes growth brochure of European Commission, 2013
Internet and eId. The deployment and operation of the digital infrastructure for the eHealth, Online Dispute Resolution,
and eProcurement continue in 2015 as well as support to the generic services for the building blocks deployed in 2014.
The support of the generic services should encourage Member States to promote the take up of the CEF DSIs. In 2016
the Commission will continue the deployment/operation of other infrastructures listed in the Regulation 283/2014.
Activities implemented under indirect management: The implementation of the financial instruments part of the CEF
has not yet stared pending the signature of the Delegation Agreement with the EIB (expected in first semester 2015).
Same applies to the technical assistance facility to be implemented by the Word Bank, the expected benefit of which
will include the provision of know-how and the sharing of best practices, in particular to project promoters identified
under the Connected Communities Initiative. Finally, the Pilot Project Bond Initiative launched in 2012 is intended to
be shortly merged into the CEF in accordance with Article 14.3 of Regulation EU/1316/2013.
2.1.8 Other programmes and initiatives
Nuclear Decommissioning Assistance Programme in Bulgaria, Slovakia and Lithuania: The continuing support of the
EU to the decommissioning programmes in Kozloduy, Bohunice and Ignalina has permitted to see all programmes
evolving in a short time from the shut-down of the
facilities to an irreversible stage of decommissioning.
The significant progress made in preparatory work (issue
of the final decommissioning licence in Bulgaria and
Planned results for 2016:
Slovakia, setting up of waste management facilities in all
In Kozloduy (BG): Dismantling of building DGS-1,
three countries) has been followed since 2014 in visible
dismantling of 30% of turbine hall metal and start of
removal of building and equipment. As detailed in the
dismantling activities in reactor building.
three decommissioning plans the emphasis is moving
In Bohunice (SK): dismantling in the turbine hall and
gradually from work of a preparatory nature to
auxiliary buildings of reactor V1 completed and
dismantling and treatment of related waste. Currently, the
primary Circuit Equipment Insulation dismantled.
facilities necessary for decommissioning, treatment and
In Ignalina (LT): 50% of equipment in the turbine
storage of radioactive waste and spent nuclear fuel are
hall and other auxiliary buildings dismantled.
under construction. The licensing documentation is
prepared and dismantling has started. In Bulgaria and
Slovakia the full decommissioning licences are expected
shortly.
Although
delays
occurred
in
some
decommissioning projects, these are actively addressed to minimise their impact on the decommissioning end date,
though in Lithuania delays to the overall timeline could not be avoided.
Visible progress has been achieved on all sites, especially for turbine hall dismantling activities. Significant amounts of
materials were generated that could mostly be released from regulatory control, i.e. be declared non-radioactive.
European Fund for Strategic Investments (EFSI): The proposed Investment Plan for Europe (EFSI) aims to revive
investment in strategic projects around Europe to ensure that money reaches the real economy. The EFSI is the main
channel to mobilise at least EUR 315 billion in additional investment in the real economy over the next three years. It
will finance projects with a higher risk profile, thereby maximising the impact of public spending and unlocking private
investments. The Fund will be established within the European Investment Bank (EIB), with which the Commission will
work as strategic partner. EFSI will take funding to sound projects where needed and where it adds value, increasing risk
profile where necessary. It will focus its financing on sectors of key importance where the EIB Group has proven
expertise and capacity to deliver a positive impact on the European economy, including:
-
Strategic infrastructure including digital, transport and energy in particular energy interconnections and urban
development,
Education, research and innovation,
Environmentally sustainable projects, expansion of renewable energy and resource efficiency,
Smaller businesses.
In line with the Commission proposal, the resources allocated to the EFSI will considerably increase in 2016, with a view
to speeding up the constitution of the targeted EUR 8 billion guarantee to financing and investment operations which will
be reached in 2020. The EU Guarantee Fund provides a liquidity buffer for the Union budget against potential calls on
the EU Guarantee to cover losses incurred on investments supported by EFSI. In terms of payment appropriations, the
amount allocated in 2016 is in line with the progressive phasing-in of the operations. EUR 20,0 million will help cover
the costs of the European Investment Advisory Hub, which should provide strengthened support for project development
and preparation across the EU by establishing a single point of entry for questions related to technical assistance for
investments within the Union.
Although EFSI proposal include direct reporting from EIB to the European Parliament and the Council the enclosed
statement of financial intervention summarise main performance elements of the initiative. They will be monitored and
updated on the basis of the information provided by EIB.
2.2.
Heading 1B economic, social and territorial cohesion
Heading 1b covers the European Regional Development Fund (ERDF), the European Social Fund (ESF) including
the Youth Employment Initiative (YEI) specific top-up allocation, the Cohesion Fund (CF) and the Fund for
European Aid to the Most Deprived (FEAD). It also covers the financial contribution of CF to the Connecting Europe
Facility (CEF-Transport). All the programmes under heading 1B are delivered under shared management. The ERDF, CF
and ESF constitute the Cohesion Policy of the EU.
Its principal objective is to strengthen economic, social and territorial cohesion between regions and Member States of
the EU, by concentrating resources on less developed regions and Member States. Cohesion policy is also a major tool
for investment, growth and job creation at EU level and for structural reforms at national level. It accounts for an
important share of public investment in the EU, contributes to the deepening of the internal market and thus plays an
important role in boosting economic growth, employment and competitiveness.
For the programming period 2014-2020, the Cohesion policy is refocused to achieve maximum impact on growth and
jobs. Furthermore, some new features are introduced, notably to focus the policy on performance (performance reserve)
and attainment of the objectives of the Europe 2020 strategy as well as to create a closer link between cohesion policy
and the economic governance of the Union (macro-economic conditionality).
Based on information provided in the respective Programme Statements the support from the 2014-2020 allocation for
ERDF, CF, ESF, YEI and FEAD is expected to lead to the following selection of results:
- 2 million deprived people are foreseen to receive assistance from FEAD in 2016;
- 15,5 million young people (15-24 years old) benefiting from ESF intervention cumulatively between 2014-2018. The
cumulative number between 2014 and 2023 is expected to reach 23,1 million;
- 894 000 unemployed participants are expected to complete a YEI supported intervention in 2016 of which 420 000
are expected to gain a qualification or get into employment;
- 4 000 enterprises are cooperating with research institutions by 2018;
- 419 MW additional capacity of renewable energy production by 2018;
- 483 000 additional population served by improved water supply and 1,65 million served by improved wastewater
treatment by 2018; and
- 300 000 additional energy users connected to smart grids by 2018.
Following the adoption of 28 Partnership Agreements and the largest share of the operational programmes (OP) in 2014,
the adoption of the remaining OPs will be finalised in 2015. The Commission and the Member States made every effort
to adopt as many operational programmes as possible at the same time abiding to the increased standards in terms of
ensuring quality of spending. Even if the accumulated delays have resulted in significant financial reprogramming for
ESF (YEI), ERDF, CF, EAFRD and EMFF, the unused allocations from 2014 for sub-heading 1b will be almost entirely
reprogrammed in 201516.
16
In order to maximise the impact of the policy in delivering EU priorities and ensure European added value and quality of spending the strategic
programming process has been reinforced. This involves the introduction of the Common Strategic Framework (CSF) , a menu of thematic
objectives in line with the Europe 2020 strategy and its integrated guidelines, translated at national level into Partnership Agreements. The CSF
sets out key actions to address EU priorities, provides guidance on programming applicable to all Funds, including the European Agricultural
Fund for Rural Development (EAFRD) and the European Maritime and Fisheries Fund (EMFF) under heading 2, and promotes a better
coordination of the various EU structural instruments. Partnership Agreements, agreed between the Commission and Member States, set out the
Delays in the ESIF programmes' start-up phase have however, direct impact on the completion of the performance
information framework and timely availability of ex-ante performance information: the level of milestones and targets is
still partial at this stage. This is also due to the difficulties encountered in the aggregation of the performance information
provided at national level.17 Once all OPs are adopted and on the basis of the first reporting by all MS on common
indicators (2016), the related figures on targets and milestones will be updated in so far as possible.
In terms of commitment appropriations EUR 50 821,7 million are proposed to be allocated to the programmes under
heading 1b for 2016.
2.2.1 ESF European Social Fund
In 2014, the Commission has adopted all Partnership Agreements. At the date of 20 May 2015, 152 out of 187 OPs were
adopted for which all related pre-financing has been paid. This number includes 33 out of the 34 OPs in which the YEI
resources are programmed. All the remaining OPs will be adopted within the 6 month deadline foreseen in the
Regulation.
ESF value added - period 2007-2013

Volume effects - ESF played an important role to tackle the economic crisis in several MS as, without the additional
funding, important measures would not have been developed and the mitigation of the crisis would not have been possible.
Of the 27 country reports, 20 reported positive volume effects. In the UK, the volume effects identified include: (1)
Increasing and complementing mainstream employment and training provision, including providing earlier access than
would otherwise be the case; (2) Increasing the number of unemployed claimants that are able to access support (e.g. to
cater for individuals not eligible for mainstream provision); and (3) Getting more claimants into employment and
increasing the qualifications and skills of claimants and the existing workforce. A key element of the volume effects was
the ability of the ESF to boost provision in relation to changing needs, with a substantial increase in support for shorter
term unemployed people who became unemployed at the onset of the recession;
Scope effects ESF action broadens existing action by supporting groups or policy areas that would not otherwise receive
support. Out of the 27 country reports, 22 reported scope effects. The country examples provided suggest that the ESF
guidelines help tackling gender equality, focussing on target groups which would not otherwise be supported (such as older
people (50+), ethnic minorities, prisoners, Roma people). The AIR 2012 for OP England and Gibraltar argues that ESF
funding is broadening the scope of provision by: (1) Targeting groups that are not eligible for mainstream provision or
are eligible but currently have low levels of take-up; (2) Broadening the range of activities and interventions available; (3)
Providing more intensive support to those individuals with the most severe barriers; (4) Providing ongoing support to
enable individuals to sustain employment;
Process effects ESF action influences MS administrations and organisations involved in the programmes. Of the 27
country reports: 20 generated evidence of process effects and 7 could find no or only limited evidence. Several examples
suggest improved services (more client-centred), greater use of monitoring and evaluation, the influencing of
administrative reforms or strengthened networks and partnerships.
Role effects ESF action supports local/regional innovations that are taken up at national level or national innovative
actions that are then mainstreamed. Out of the 27 country reports, 13 reported evidence of role effects. An example is
Ireland where the experience of the Labour Market Activation Fund (LMAF), co-financed by the ESF, is being rolled out
more widely in current and new active labour market interventions. Another example is Belgium where the MA has
established a transnational exchange project to identify effective labour market interventions which are then used to
develop a series of tools and models that can be mainstreamed by companies and organisations to respond to labour market
issues.
17
overall contribution, at national level, to the thematic objectives and the commitments to concrete actions to deliver Europe 2020 objectives. Clear
and measurable targets are defined in a performance framework.
Member States are not obliged to use strictly pre-defined programme performance framework indicators but are allowed to replace or complement
them according to their programmes. In order to aggregate performance information at programme level in a meaningful way, there is a need to
build methodology's to consolidate information from national programmes. This cannot however be accomplished without a comprehensive
overview of all operational programmes. Consequently the following approach has been applied to the 2016 Programme Statements: unless stated
otherwise, the target for 2023 expressed in percentages in the relevant tables derive from the information on common indicators encoded by the
Member States, following a first plausibility check. These estimates should be treated with caution, as they still often related to a limited number
of operational programmes.
Programme achievements 2007-2013 and planned results for 2016 are on course to meet the multiannual objective with
an average number of participants per year of EUR 11,2 million. Evaluations are underway. Examples of concrete addedvalue of projects for citizens will be available in 2015 once the ex-post evaluations are finalised. The "ESF achievements
2007-2012 - Final Synthesis Report (2014)"18 provide with some useful elements regarding the added value of the ESF in
the period 2007-2013.
2.2.2 ERDF- European Regional Development Fund and CF Cohesion Fund
ERDF - period 2007-2013

Spain: more than 6 000 large projects were co-financed up
to the end of 2013 to support the R&D carried out in the
public sector, these representing a significant proportion of
the projects initiated under the National RTDI Plan. Major
support was also given to computerisation in public
administration, education, healthcare and legal services as
well as to the spread of ICT in SMEs.
Portugal: The roads constructed as a result of ERDF and
Cohesion Fund support include the last section of the
Internal Regional Belt (i.e. the ring-road) in Lisbon, which
carries an average of 50 000 vehicles a day and which has
reduced the traffic on the main roads in the capital by 40%,
so improving the urban environment.
Bulgaria: Thanks to JEREMIE's First Loss Portfolio
Guarantee (FLPG), SMEs managed to increase sales,
provide higher quality products to clients and better
working conditions for employees, all during the height of
the financial crisis. From 2011 until 2014, this scheme
reached nearly 4 000 SMEs in a market traditionally
reluctant to support micro-enterprises, high-risk projects or
innovative solutions.
Italy: In the South of the country, the ERDF co-financed
the upgrading of 80% of all primary and secondary schools
in Convergence regions in terms of ICT and science
teaching.
By the end of 2014, the Commission has adopted

all Partnership Agreements (PAs). It has also
adopted 130 Investment for Growth and Jobs
(IfGJ) programmes out of the expected 205 as well
as 18 European Territorial Cooperation (ETC)19
programmes out of 76. In addition, another 34 IfGJ
and 6 ETC programmes were adopted in February
2015 as soon as the 2014 amounts were carried
over to the 2015 budget. Overall 80% of IfGJ and
a third of the ETC programmes are adopted. By
the end of 2015 all programmes should be adopted
and implementation on the ground will have
started for the majority of the programmes.
With relation to the previous 2007-2013 period it
is expected that all targets will be reached or
exceeded. The cohesion policy plays the role of
catalysing EU MS actions by aligning spending to
EU priorities, promotion of transparency and good
governance, building managerial capacity,
developing interregional links and the exchange of
experience. The ex-post evaluations are underway
(to be finalised in 2015) and will provide
additional evidence.
CF - period 2007-2013
Poland: During the 2007-2013 programming period
more than 650 investments in renewable energy have
been financed by structural funds, contributing to the
sound progress toward the 15% target for 2020. The
share of renewables in energy production increased to
10,4% in 2013 compared to 2,7% in 2006.
Hungary: As a result of supported projects in the field
of environment protection, 338 km2 of land have been
rehabilitated and over 1,3 million people benefit from
improved flood protection measures up to 2013.
Bulgaria: EU funds have supported the rehabilitation of
242 km of railway lines of Trans-European and major
National transport along with 141 km of highways and
30,8 km I-class roads.
18
19
http://ec.europa.eu/social/main.jsp?catId=701&langId=en&moreDocuments=yes
European Territorial Cooperation is one of the two goals of cohesion policy and provides a framework for the implementation of joint actions and
policy exchanges between national, regional and local actors from different Member States.
2.3
Heading 2 sustainable growth: natural resources
Sustainable growth: natural resources heading covers the two pillars of the Common Agricultural Policy (CAP): Pillar I
consisting of the market related expenditure and the direct payments financed by the European Agricultural Guarantee
Fund (EAGF) and Pillar II comprising the rural development support financed by the European Agricultural Fund for
Rural Development (EAFRD).
The CAP is delivered under shared management. The heading also covers the European Maritime and Fisheries Fund
(EMFF) (combining shared and direct management) and an envelope for the international dimension of the Common
Fisheries Policy (CFP), as well as activities in the fields of climate and environment covered by the Programme for the
Environment and Climate Action (LIFE) implemented in direct management.
The CAP general objectives for 2014-2020 are: (a) the promotion of a viable food production, (b) the sustainable
management of natural resources and (c) the balanced territorial development of rural areas across the EU. The 2013
CAP reform adapted the legal texts to the new policy
objectives and budgetary ceilings under the MFF. While the
new Common Market Organisation (CMO) Regulation
presents rather gradual changes starting from the year 2014,
In 2014, the agricultural sector was influenced by
the significant impact of the Russian ban on
the new Regulation for direct payments substantially
certain EU food products. As Russia is an
modifies the system of direct support to farmers. The main
important export market for the food products, this
modifications of the reform of direct payments are
increased uncertainty and price volatility on the
introduced as of 2015, with impact on budget year 2016.
markets and created expectations of higher
availabilities on the internal market and large price
The EAGF aims at improving the competitiveness of the

drops. The Commission acted to increase market
stability by adopting various measures to support
agricultural sector and enhancing its value share in the food
the fruit and vegetable and dairy markets, and
chain, fostering market stability as well as better reflecting
announced additional support for development of
consumer expectations. Direct payments support and stabilise
new, alternative markets by means of additional
the incomes of farmers and contribute to the provision of
information and promotion measures
environmental public goods, while market measures allow
for a safety-net in times of market disturbances or crisis,
maintaining market stability and meeting consumer
expectations. In addition, cross-compliance ensures applied minimum standards in the field of the environment, food
safety, animal and plant health as well as animal welfare throughout the EU.
The rural development policy (EAFRD) integrates the major policy objectives of the Europe 2020 strategy for smart,
sustainable and inclusive growth, focusing on a limited number of core priorities to ensure sustainable development of
rural areas. The EAFRD is one of the five European Structural and Investment (ESI) Funds and the Common Strategic
Framework (CSF) therefore also establishes guiding principles to facilitate the programming process of the EAFRD,
which is implemented through programmes covering the programming period in accordance with Partnership
Agreements with Member States. Following the adoption of all Partnership Agreements and around one third of the
programmes in terms of value in 2014, the priority in 2015 is to adopt the remainder of the programmes in view of full
deployment in 2016.
Like for cohesion, delays in the EAFRD programmes' start-up phase also have direct impact on the completion of the
performance information framework and timely availability of ex-ante performance information: the level of milestones
and targets is still partial at this stage. This is also due to the difficulties encountered in the aggregation of the
performance information provided at national level.
With regard to commitment appropriations EUR 63 104,4 million are proposed to be allocated to the programmes under
heading 2 for 2016.
2.3.1 EAGF European Agricultural Guarantee Fund

The EAGF annual type of measures (direct payments to farmers and market expenditure which are not programmed
expenditure) has been implemented in accordance to schedule. The 2015 is the first year of full implementation of the
reform of the direct payments to farmers, with impact on budget 2016. The Commission is assisting the Member States in
their preparation for the implementation of the new schemes, such as greening, young farmers' scheme and small farmers'
scheme. Expenditure for the new schemes shall be for the first time reflected in the budgetary execution of 2016. The
implementation of the new CAP information and promotion policy, as agreed in 2013, is on-going, with preparatory
work undertaken in 2014 and 2015 (externalisation to the executive agency CHAFEA) and the first contracts foreseen to
be awarded in 2016.
2.3.2 EAFRD European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development
In 2014 solid preparatory work was carried out to set the grounds for the implementation of the new generation of Rural
Development Programmes (RDPs). Out of a total of 118 RDPs, 117 programmes have been submitted to the European
Commission progressively over the year 2014. 9 RDPs were approved in December 2014 and a further 18 in February
2015, with the remainder to be adopted in the course of 2015. The assessment of the RDPs went hand in hand with the
treatment of 28 national Partnership Agreements (covering the 5 European Structural and Investment Funds (ESIF)), all
of them formally received and approved in 2014.
The take up of investment-related support in the RDPs

2007-2013 was considerably high, in terms of financial
indicators and supported farms. The enhanced viability
of the farms is being scrutinized through a number of
studies and pilot project that will feed coming policy
strategies. The combination of investment operations
with business plan development support has a big
potential to boost the setting-up of young farmers in the
agricultural sector.
As regards Improving the quality of life and creation
of jobs, the achievements of RDPs 2007-2013 are
relatively lower than in the case of other policy
objectives. This is mainly due to initial difficulties in the
launching of relevant projects at the beginning of the
programming period (especially in the case of
LEADER). However, the observed positive development
of the indicators over the last years is likely to lead to
final values closer to the planned results.
The main challenge for 2016 is to offer continuous

guidance to Member States for the smooth and
effective implementation of the programmes on the
ground, following their approval in 2015. This to
contribute to the Commission's priority actions, as
rural development is indeed a key component of
"boosting jobs, growth and investment" by ensuring
that rural development spending is well integrated
into jobs- and growth-generating investment
strategies at national and regional level.
Concerning the performance information, the 20142020 Common Monitoring and Evaluation System
(CMES) provides a comprehensive set of common
'result-type' target indicators to be quantified in the
national and/or regional rural development
programmes (RDPs) for each of the 18 Focus Areas
(FAs) included therein. They are highly performance
oriented
and
are
mandatory
(complete
representativeness). However, the horizontal CAP
regulation (1305/2013) does not oblige Member
States to establish milestones at the year 2018 for
those target indicators. Therefore, whenever possible
only estimate (proxies) 2018 milestones could be
provided so in the EAFRD programme statement20.
With relation to the previous 2007-2013 period, the approaching end has triggered acceleration in the implementation of
the programmes during the year 2014. The results reported at the end of 2014 are meeting the corresponding targets for
the whole programming period.
20
Although in many cases it is possible to extrapolate milestones at the year 2018 for the CMES indicators, based on the values of the corresponding
indicators in the PF, there are some limitations which do not allow the definition of proxy milestones for all the CMES Targets Indicators. Even in
those cases for which a correspondence between PF indicators and CMES Target Indicators could be established, the estimated milestones are not
100% applicable due to differences in the definition of the two types of indicators. As this could also lead to discrepancies in the respective levels
of actual achievements in the year 2018, relevant disclaimers need to be added to the Programme Statement 2016 to duly explain the limitations of
the extrapolations done and therefore of the figures provided
2.3.3 EMFF European Maritime and Fisheries Fund

The EMFF regulation21 was only adopted in May 2014 and
consequently causes delays in the implementation of the
fund, both in shared and in direct management. The EMFF
pursues the following priorities:
- promoting competitive, environmentally
sustainable, economically viable and socially
responsible fisheries and aquaculture;
- fostering the development and implementation of
the Integrated Maritime Policy;
- Sustainable and Inclusive Territorial Development
of fisheries and aquaculture areas;
- fostering the implementation of the Common
Fisheries Policy, with accompanying measures in
the areas of fisheries data collection and scientific
advice, fisheries control, governance, fisheries
markets, and voluntary contributions to Regional
Fisheries Management Organisations.
For the part of the EMFF implemented under shared
management, much effort was dedicated to the informal
and formal negotiations with the Member States to
accelerate the drafting and adoption of their operational
programmes. By the end of 2014, one programme (Latvia)
had been formally agreed. Four other programmes (the
Netherlands, Austria, Malta and Finland) were approved in
February-March 2015. For the part of the EMFF managed
in direct management, implementation started mid-2014.
The 2016 is expected to be a transitional year when mostly
pre-financing will be made in addition to interim payments
for certain measures with annual character (data collection,
fisheries markets as well as control and enforcement).
Given the delayed start of the EMFF, programme
achievements are limited at this stage. The first results
The European Market Observatory for fisheries

and aquaculture (EUMOFA) was launched in
December 2014. The establishment of EUMOFA
will facilitate the producer organisations' planning
by providing reliable economic knowledge on fish
markets. It will also allow operators and
administrations to anticipate and tackle with
market changes.
In the area of marine knowledge, the European
Atlas of the Seas (MARATLAS) will be refined
even further, allowing completing the first
comprehensive digital seabed map of Europe's
seas. It will be built from surveys, observations
and samples from over 100 universities, research
institutes, public agencies and navies and provide
water depth with sixteen times better resolution
than was previously possible, as well as sediments,
underlying strata and habitats using and, for the
first time, a common seamless classification.
Chemical pollution and marine species abundance
will be mapped out together with human activities
such as fishing areas, shipping routes and energy
platforms. All data layers will be freely available
for downloading.
Every year grants are provided to Regional
Fisheries Management Organisations (16 in
2014). The EMFF co-finances activities which
uphold the interests of the Union in international
organisations and strengthen cooperation with its
partners in these organisations (e.g.: support
provided to the International Commission for the
Conservation of Atlantic Tunas, for developing a
wide and complete research programme to
improve knowledge of Bluefin tuna, biology and
migrations and undertake accurate evaluation of
this key species).
European Fisheries Fund - 2007-2013 period

Based on a survey undertaken in September 2013 at the Commissions
initiative, the study on the implementation of Axis 4 showed that the
Fisheries Local Action Groups (FLAGs) have supported over 8 500
projects, creating an estimated 8 000 jobs, whilst a further 12 500 jobs
are reported to have been maintained. The study also estimates that the
support from the European Fisheries Fund through this innovative
approach has contributed to the creation of 220 SMEs and
microenterprises. These figures are likely to increase once the
programming period has ended, given that implementation on the
ground has progressed steadily since the survey was done.
Furthermore, FLAGs expect that 61% of projects will continue once
EFF support stops.
21
concern actions in direct management.

Concerning previous programming
period, despite the unfavourable context
(rising energy costs and the economic
and financial crisis), the economic
results of the fisheries sector and of
most target groups have either improved
or been maintained. Although it is
difficult to ascertain to what extent the
recent evolution of the fisheries sector is
due to the impact of the European
Fisheries Fund (EFF, the EMFF
processor for the programming period
2007-2013) the EFF has supported for
Regulation (EU) no 508/2014 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 may 2014 on the European Maritime and Fisheries Fund and
repealing Council Regulations (EC) No 2328/2003, (EC) No 861/2006, (EC) No 1198/2006 and (EC) No 791/2007 and Regulation (EU) No
1255/2011 of the European Parliament and of the Council.
instance the shift to more fuel-efficient fishing gear and the decommissioning of the least energy efficient vessels. In
addition, the EFF supported investments in aquaculture and in the EU fish processing sector. In the area of sustainable
development of fisheries and aquaculture areas, supported actions delivered promising, positive results (cf. example of
FLAGs below).
2.3.4 LIFE Programme for the Environment and Climate Action
The programme implementation is on track: the first projects22 will be starting in 2015. The 2016 will be focused on the
implementation of the 2015 call for proposals as well as on the continued implementation of the financial instruments
under the new LIFE programme 2014-2020.
However, only very few projects are expected to be finished before 2017. This is the reason only expenditure related
outputs can be provided for 2016.
In 2016, the programme will contribute with an amount of EUR 217,5 million to mainstreaming climate action and with
EUR 230,9 million to financing biodiversity. It is expected that 330 action grant projects and 400 financial instruments'
operations will be on-going by the end of 2016.
The first projects starting in 2015, no actual examples are available at the time of DB presentation. However, for
'traditional' pilot, demonstrative, and best practice projects, the same type of policy relevant projects are expected as in
the past under LIFE+, like testing new technique for getting to grips with ammoniac pollution from pig farming
(MANEV), considerably improving the conservation status of critically endangered species like the Iberian lynx
(IBERLINCE) and demonstrating better farming techniques to tackle climate change adaptation and mitigation
(AgriClimateChange). The new Integrated Projects (IPs) will ensure the implementation on a large scale of core Union
environmental and climate change legislation such as the Prioritised Action Frameworks for Natura 2000, Waste, River
basin, and Air quality management plans, and Climate Change adaptation and mitigation plans and strategies. They will
do this mainly by building capacity, involving stakeholders, and mobilising additional funds.
From the 37 proposals for Integrated Projects received, 19 fulfilled the basic requirements of IPs. It is expected that 6-7
proposals will be retained and will receive about EUR 10 million LIFE-funding each. Judging from the proposals, the
projects are expected to start the process of fully implementing core legislation and to leverage several times the amount
contributed by LIFE through the mobilisation of other funds.
2.4
Heading 3 security and citizenship
Heading 3 groups various policies whose common objective is to strengthen the concept of European citizenship by
creating an area of freedom, justice, security, without internal frontiers. Citizens and businesses want to fully enjoy the
freedoms guaranteed by the Treaties and make full use of their rights to live, study, work and do business in any Member
State. They want a dynamic access to basic public goods and services.
This heading is composed mainly by the Asylum, Migration and Integration Fund and the Internal Security Fund, which
provide for essential help on implementing the Common European Asylum System, achieving an effective management
of migration flows, supporting the integration of legal migrants, combating illegal immigration, and also to ensure a high
level of security in the Union and an effective management of the EUs external borders.
The programmes under heading 3 aim also at improving the health of EU citizens, to protect consumers, and to promote
culture and dialogue with citizens.
Programmes implemented by shared management (e.g. the Asylum Migration and Integration Fund (AMIF) and the
Internal Security Fund (ISF)) have suffered from a delay in the adoption of national programmes. For the programmes
being directly managed by the Commission, a majority delivered first outputs in 2014. The Creative Europe Programme
for instance was rolled out almost as planned and fed VALOR (an IT system for disseminating results) with first projects
in the fourth quarter of the year. Other programmes, such as the Justice Programme and the Rights, Equality and
Citizenship Programme are being signing first grant agreements. In view of the above state of implementation, there is
not yet much evidence of performance available.
In the aftermath of a recent tragic event in the Mediterranean, which caused an estimated death toll of 700 persons, both
the Council and Parliament agreed that the European Union should take action. In order to support the frontline Member
States in receiving an increased number of migrants, the Commission proposed to reinforce 2015 and 2016
appropriations for the emergency measures of the Asylum, Migration and Integration Fund (AMIF) and the Internal
Security Fund Borders and Visa (ISF-B).
22
Projects are the bulk of the Programme: according to the LIFE Regulation about 80% of the overall amount will be used to finance projects.
In terms of commitment appropriations EUR 2 670,0 million are proposed to be allocated to the programmes under
heading 3 for 2016.
2.4.1 AMIF - Asylum Migration and Integration Fund
The EU support under this Fund is mainly implemented in shared management with Member States on the basis of
multiannual national programmes. In 2014 there were no significant outputs because no national programme was adopted
under the Asylum, Migration and Integration Fund. As of March 2015, 17 national programmes (NP) were adopted, and
10 NPs are expected to be adopted by summer 2015. The pre-financing for the NP adopted started to be processed as of
April 2015.
In response to the recent tragic events in the Mediterranean, appropriations for AMIF were substantially reinforced. This
will, amongst others, strengthen the emergency assistance provided by the Commission to support frontline Member
States in receiving the increased number of migrants arriving/rescued as a result of the reinforced Triton and Poseidon
operations. Throughout the period 2014-2020, Member States expect to provide assistance, with the help of AMIF, to up
to 1 million asylum seekers, integration assistance to up to 1,8 million third-country nationals, and voluntary return for up
to 400 000 third-country nationals.
Finally, in 2016, it is envisaged to support the resettlement23 of up to 8 500 persons with the AMIF and to continue the
launch of regional protection programmes in North Africa and the Horn of Africa. Additionally, AMIF will finance for 2
years the relocation scheme of 40 000 persons in clear need of international protection.
2.4.2 ISF- Internal Security Fund
This Fund is mostly implemented in shared management with Member States, on the basis of multiannual national
programmes. At the beginning of 2015, no national programme had been adopted, therefore, achievements were limited
to Union action in 2014 and to a phased start-up of all national programs in 2015. Nevertheless, a substantial number (25
out of 30) of ISF national programmes have been submitted, 5 national programs (NP) were adopted in March 2015, and
22 NPs are expected to be adopted by summer 2015. The pre-financing for 1 NP was completed.
In 2015 and 2016 emergency assistance for the surveillance activities conducted in the context of Triton and Poseidon
was reinforced. This will strengthen the first reception activities such as identification, first medical aid, purchase of
equipment for border checks, and transportation of migrants.
Throughout the period 2014-2020 it is estimated that ISF will support the acquisition and functioning of up to 100 ABC
gates at international airports, and trainings for 2000 staff on visa related issues. The ISF is a responsive and flexible tool
to address the most crucial security challenges to 2020. If should focus on updating national sections of the Schengen
Information System, to strengthen cross-border operational cooperation and to develop "exit strategies" for radicalised
persons.
2.4.3 Food and Feed
Food and Feed programme24 general objective is to contribute to a high level of health for humans, animals and plants
along the food chain and in related areas, by preventing and eradicating diseases and pests and by ensuring a high level of
protection for consumers and the environment, while enhancing the competitiveness of the Union food and feed industry
and favouring the creation of jobs.
All outputs planned for 2014 were implemented according to schedule. However, there were no national survey programs
approved in 2014 due to the late adoption of the legal base; nevertheless, there are already 17 national survey programs
approved by the Commission for 2015.
23
24
For the purpose of AMIF regulation the resettlement means the process whereby, on a request from the United Nations High Commissioner for
Refugees (UNHCR) based on a persons need for international protection, third-country nationals are transferred from a third country and
established in a Member State where they are permitted to reside with one of the following statuses:
(i) refugee status within the meaning of point (e) of Article 2 of Directive 2011/95/EU;
(ii) subsidiary protection status within the meaning of point (g) of Article 2 of Directive 2011/95/EU; or
(iii) any other status which offers similar rights and benefits under national and Union law as those referred to in points (i) and (ii);
Covered by Common Financial Framework, Regulation (EU) No 652/2014
In 2014, the Food Fraud Network has enabled Member States to exchange data and information on 40 cases of crossborder non-compliances, thus reducing the risk of sub-optimal enforcement due to the cross-border nature of the
fraudulent activity. Both consumers and businesses benefit of a more compliant environment along the food chain.
The new interactive and high performance IT platform iRASFF has improved the process by which the control
authorities notify the Commission about measures taken to deal with serious risks detected in relation to food or feed.
The increase in follow-up of almost 15% compared to 2013 indicates an intensified use of RASFF by Member States.
Financial support for emergency measures with relation to containing animal disease and plant pest outbreaks is also on
track. In that respect, number of outputs produced for the EU reference laboratories, the Better Training for Safer Food
(BTSF) programme and the data collection follows closely the number of outputs planned indicating good
implementation. In 2016, 133 veterinary programs, 20 survey programs and funding for 43 EU reference laboratories are
planned.
2.4.4 Creative Europe
The Creative Europe programme was implemented according to the schedule of the 2014 and 2015 work programme. For
2014, the programme budget was executed fully with 100% of the annual appropriations committed without any
significant deviation from planning. Cooperation projects, networks, literary translations and platforms have been
supported, as well as special actions (European Capitals of Culture, prizes and the European Heritage Label). The latest
available results include 80 cooperation projects selected (2015), 23 networks, 74 literary translations and 5 platforms (all
in 2014).
Funded organisations got a chance to increase their capacity to work across borders, cultural professionals involved in
supported activities reinforced their skills and ultimately the cultural sectors as such increased their professional profile.
Beneficiaries also widened their audiences beyond their domestic borders and got additional market opportunities for
their works of art and cultural products.
The European Capitals of Culture were instrumental in reinforcing intercultural dialogue and brought about economic
benefits such as an increase in tourism and additional investments in infrastructure.
The prizes sought to help highlight the wealth of Europe's culture in particular in 4 sectors (heritage, architecture,
literature and contemporary music) and stimulate greater circulation of best practice within the EU.
A total of 20 sites (4 in 2014 and 16 in 2015) have received the European Heritage Label for their importance in the
European integration process, and this will help them increase their profile and attract more visitors, with significant
economic benefits.
The MEDIA Sub-programme supported inter alia the development, the distribution and the promotion of roughly 800
European audio-visual works with potential for large distribution. In order to complement the supply approach, 88
Festival stimulating interest in and improving access to European audio-visual works have been funded and a new
support to audience development has been introduced in 2014 with 19 projects funded.
59 training actions have been proposed for funding including with a view to improving financial management and digital
skills so as to ensure adaptation to market developments, testing new approaches to audience development and testing of
new business models.
Significant simplifications have been introduced in the administration/implementation of the programme, such as
electronic applications (E-Forms) with E Reporting to follow.
In 2016 a Creative Sectors Guarantee Facility will be fully operational and will provide the first guarantees to financial
intermediaries providing loans to SMEs and to micro, small and medium-sized organizations in the cultural and creative
sectors.
More information on ongoing projects can be found at: http://ec.europa.eu/programmes/creative-europe/projects/
2.5.
Heading 4 Global Europe
The programmes of the Global Europe finance the different dimensions of the Union's external policies. Part of the
funding under heading 4 is indirectly managed and implemented by third parties, such as UN agencies or the beneficiary
countries, while the remaining part is directly managed by the Commission (grants and budget support) and a very small
portion through shared management (cross-border cooperation). The most important programmes in financial terms
contribute to the EU's primary development aid objective 'to reduce and in the longer term to eradicate poverty' (Article
208 TFEU). These are the Development Cooperation Instrument (DCI) and the European Neighbourhood Instrument
(ENI)25. Other financially important programmes are: Humanitarian Aid which gives ad-hoc support to the most
vulnerable people in the aftermath of disasters or crises; the Instrument for Pre-Accession (IPA) supporting pre-accession
countries to prepare them for EU membership; and the instruments supporting the prevention of and reaction to conflicts
and the strengthening of international security (Instrument contributing to Stability and Peace (IcSP) and the Common
Foreign and Security Policy operations (CFSP)).
In the area of external relations, budget management is often more complex as beneficiary countries may not have the
same administrative capacity as EU Member States and as the external crisis instruments (Humanitarian Aid, Civil
Protection Mechanism, Instrument contributing to Stability and Peace) cannot be programmed by definition and have to
allow for fast reaction to a changing environment.
More generally, heading 4 is very sensitive to the evolution of the international situation, which can cause frequent
reallocation between the objectives of a programme, such as reallocation in the European Neighbourhood Instrument to
take into account the crises in Ukraine or Syria.
The implementation of some programmes and actions was delayed in 2014 due to the fact that relevant strategy papers,
programmes, work programmes and multiannual indicative programmes could be adopted only after the formal adoption
of the legal bases. It is expected that in 2015, contracting will return to a normal level of implementation.
In commitment appropriations EUR 8 881,7 million are proposed to be allocated to the programmes under heading 4 for
2016 which corresponds to an increase of 5,6 % compared to 2015.
2.5.1 IPA II - INSTRUMENT FOR PRE-ACCESSION ASSITANCE
Due to the late adoption of the IPA II Regulation (as well as the adoption of the related Common Implementing
Regulation for all European External action instruments) and the Strategy Papers which form the basis for the 2014
programming, the first Commission Decisions under IPA II could be adopted at the end of November and beginning of
December 2014 only.
Implementation is expected to start once the Framework Agreements between the Commission and IPA II beneficiaries
have been concluded and ratified. It is expected to have Financing Agreements with the IPA II beneficiaries concluded in
2015 whereas the final date for concluding the procurement and grant contracts is 3 years following the date of
conclusion of the Financing Agreement.
For IPA II, the focus on the medium-term is on addressing the 'fundamentals first'; i.e. strengthening the rule of law,
democracy and governance including public administration, supporting structural reforms identified in the National
Economic Reform Programmes (the Commission economic governance approach). Assistance will also continue to
sustain economic development, notably through better connectivity, in the Western Balkans in particular. In the
perspective of the mid-term review of the external action instruments and the allocation of a performance reward in 2017,
one of the priorities in 2016 will also be to ensure that outputs can already be delivered in these key sectors.
The 2016 commitments request is split as follows in terms of specific objectives:
25
26,3 % - Support for political reforms and related progressive alignment with the Union acquis;
46,8 % - Support for economic, social and territorial development and related progressive alignment with the
Union acquis ;
24 % - Strengthening regional integration and territorial cooperation.
The European Development Fund is financed outside the EU budget
2.5.2 ENI - EUROPEAN NEIGHBOURHOOD INSTRUMENT

The
objective
of
the
European
Neighbourhood policy (ENP) is to build,
together with partners, a prosperous, secure
and stable neighbourhood on the basis of
shared values and common interests.
In 2014 the ENI proved to be a flexible and
responsive instrument to accompany the
political priorities of the ENP. In the East,
this meant prioritising financial assistance
for the countries that signed the Association
Agreement with the EU in June 2014. In the
South, it meant continued engagement in
favour of democratic transition and socioeconomic reforms on one hand (Tunisia,
Morocco), and support for protracted crisis
on the other (Syrian refugees). The ENI
reacted promptly to major events unfolding
in 2014 (the crises in Ukraine and in Gaza)
with quick mobilisation of unprecedented
assistance packages.
Syria crisis: the situation in Syria has continued to deteriorate,

therefore the EU will have to deal with the challenge of adapting
its response to the crisis to larger needs within Syria and in
neighbouring countries such as Lebanon and Jordan. As a first
step, the "Madad" EU Trust Fund in response to the Syrian
crisis was set up in December 2014.
European Council Conclusions of 20/3/2014 called for swift
mobilisation of support to stabilise Ukraine's economy. As part
of a coordinated EU response (including EU macro-financial
assistance, loans from EU-based financial institutions), the ENI
contributed with an unprecedented assistance package (EUR 365
million) adopted in April 2014 with the first major instalment
(EUR 250 million) in June 2014. At the same time, the crisis in
eastern Ukraine required specific actions to assist people and
communities affected by the conflict. Part of an ongoing
programme for regional development (EUR 17 million) was
redirected to this aim, to complement EU humanitarian aid
response. Further assistance will target small business
development and quality and efficiency of public administration
to accompany the implementation of the AA/DCFTA.
Following the crisis in Gaza, the EU quickly mobilised additional support to

UNRWA (EUR 7 million), as part of the pledge announced during the Cairo
Conference on the reconstruction of Gaza (October 2014).
Besides EU trade measures to counterbalance Russia's trade pressure, ENIfunded programmes were adopted in Moldova (EUR 30 million) and Georgia
(EUR 51 million) in 2014 to accompany DCFTA implementation and reach
out to citizens and the business community on the benefits of increased trade
with the EU. Further assistance will expand investments in agriculture, open
new spaces for sector cooperation on public administration reform, and
provide direct support to civil society organisations.
The EU is supporting the democratic transition in Tunisia, in particular the
electoral process and the implementation of socio-economic and democratic
reforms (inter alia: justice sector reforms, rehabilitation of poor
neighbourhoods, recovery support programme).
Further assistance with other key partners will focus on deepening trade
relations with the EU (DCFTA negotiations with Morocco and Tunisia). In
addition, our interventions will address common security challenges for the
first time part of our cooperation agenda at both bilateral and regional level,
and continue to implement the Mobility Partnership (Jordan, Morocco and
Tunisia) with measures addressing aspects of border management and/or the
root causes of migration.
Education programmes in Syria/Jordan/Lebanon: secure access to
school/education to internally displaced and refugee children. This contributes
to preventing the risk of a lost generation and giving children better chances
for their future. These programmes have an impact on the stabilisation of the
areas where there are tensions between host communities and refugees (for
example in Lebanon, where 20% of the population is represented by
refugees). Moreover, they contribute to the prevention of extremism and
security threats.
Both in the East and in the South,

the ENI fostered also cooperation
between countries on common
challenges (such as security and
border management, environment
and connectivity) and strategic
collaboration
with
EU-based
financial
institutions
for
investments in energy efficiency,
transport and small business
development. A renewed legal
framework was established for the
17 new cross-border cooperation
(CBC) programmes that will be
launched in the coming years. A
total of EUR 2,3 billion was
committed under the ENI in 2014.
Jobs and growth in rural areas: ENPARD Georgia (European Neighbourhood Programme for Agriculture and Rural
Development): agriculture employs around half the labour force. But they are mostly very small farmers unable to
compete with importing suppliers (and benefit from increased trade opportunities of the DCFTA with the EU), unless they
team-up in business-oriented associations. Thanks to ENPARD, almost 300 new farmers' cooperatives were established;
35 received grants for capital investments; 200 received business training. In May 2014 an official survey confirmed that
67% of small farmers now understand what a cooperative is, compared to only 32% before ENPARD. The programme
also provides policy and technical advice to national and local institutions. Spent in 2014: EUR 13 million.
Engaging with civil society in the Eastern Partnership (EaP): in 2014 the EU ran a record number of consultations
with civil society in the EaP: recommendations stemming from this dialogue provided input for policy orientations and
fed into the design of new programmes. In addition, 31 new grants (average size EUR 300 thousand) were awarded from
the Eastern Neighbourhood Civil Society Facility (regional and national calls for proposals in 2013-2014). Spent in 2014
for ongoing grant contracts: EUR 7,5 million.
2.5.3 DCI - DEVELOPMENT COOPERATION INSTRUMENT

The Regulation (No 233/2014) establishing a financing instrument for development cooperation for the period 2014-2020
was adopted on 11th March 2014. EU development aid goes to around 120 countries in the world. The implementation
of aid is done with the help of the EU Delegations and offices across the world. The EU makes sure that its development
programmes follow the priorities of the partner countries. The decision of whether to invest funding in, for example,
health, schools, or roads is taken in close partnership between the EU and each government - which often then also takes
responsibility for managing the programmes and projects.
In 2014 major effort was made to finalise the Multiannual Indicative programmes for the new programming period,
which implied extensive coordination work, both on the ground and in the headquarters. Since then, local calls for
proposals and procurements have been launched by the EU Delegations.
The Regulation establishing DCI calls for measurement of the achievements of the objectives by using, inter alia, the
Millennium Development Goals. For the performance indicators, the Commission relies on the aggregated figures
provided by the UN. The 2014 figures are not available yet. eanwhile, it is expected that the ongoing negotiations led by
the United Nations on the Post-2015 Development Framework, in which the Commission is participating,26 will lead to
the definition of new Sustainable Development Goals and related new indictors.
2016 will be the third year of the implementation of the Multiannual Indicative Programmes. The funds available for
2016 amount to EUR 1,44 billion for geographic programmes (bilateral cooperation), EUR 888 million for thematic
programmes and EUR 93 million for the PanAfrican programme. The resources are targeted where they are needed most
and have most impact in terms of poverty reduction. This encompasses cooperation with developing countries at
different stages of development, including with countries graduated27 from bilateral development assistance to cover
their specific needs during the transition period between low income countries and upper middle income countries. The
bilateral assistance focusses on a limited number of sectors in each country, to deliver better results and higher impact. In
this process, there are many critical areas nutrition and sustainable agriculture, access to health care, energy and climate
change, and respect for human rights. Gender issues are also central, as women have a strong role to play in achieving a
decent life for all.
26
27
See the Communication 'A global partnership for poverty eradication and sustainable development after 201526', published in February 2015, sets
out the EU's views on a new global partnership that is needed to deliver the Sustainable Development Goals.
Regulation (EU) No 233/2014, art. 5 sets the criterion for 'graduation' of a country: not to be included in the upper middle income countries on
the OECD/DAC list of developing countries, or do not have a gross domestic product greater than one per cent of global gross domestic product.
Examples of countries that graduated: Mexico, Panama, Costa Rica, Venezuela, Chile, Uruguay, Brazil, Argentina, China, India, Indonesia,
Thailand, Kazakhstan and Maldives.
Achievement under previous period 2007-2013
EU-financed assistance for employment has benefitted 8,8 million people since 2004. The vast majority of people in
developing countries live and work within the informal economy, with little or no protection against risks. The EU
therefore assists in the development of social protection mechanisms and has helped provide Technical and Vocational
Education and Training for 7,7 million people since 2004.
Between 2004 and 2012, 46,5 million people were assisted by social transfers for food security (cash or other in-kind
benefits, provided on a regular basis to the poorest and most at risk).
The EU Food Facility (2009-2011) reached 59 million people, mainly small-holder farmers, with spill-over effects on
The conflict
in Eastern
Ukraine
an additional
93 million.
resulted
in the displacement
of
A significant
part of the support
is aimed at fighting under-nutrition, increasing food availability and improving
moreaccess
than 1tomillion
food forpeople
peopleand
who are at risk. Another important part seeks to promote inclusive growth that enables the
growing
needs
poor tohumanitarian
participate in, and
benefit from, wealth and job creation.
(over
12 900 people
wounded
Comprehensive
health
sector support to 39 developing countries in 2012, with child health as a primary target.
and
5 400 killed).
Financial
support The
to theEU's
global Fund to fight AIDS, Malaria and Tuberculosis and to the Global Alliance for
humanitarian
addressed
Vaccines funding
and Immunisation.
the
needs of18.3
themillion
affected
basic
An additional
children were vaccinated against measles between 2004-2012.
population
such
as shelter,
food,
The EU
helped
construct
or renovate more than 8 500 health facilities worldwide.
water,
healthcare,
psycho-social
Most
of the support
is delivered through bilateral cooperation, helping governments to develop and implement
assistance
andpolicies.
protection in
education
preparation
for new
winter.
As
13,7 million
pupils enrolled
in primary education, 1,2 million primary teachers trained, 37.000 schools built or
examples,
5 300 vulnerable
renovated.
families were helped through a
specific
Sources: program of cash
assistance, 20 000 school
Europeanreceived
Year of Development
2015 website: https://europa.eu/eyd2015/en/stories
children
access to safe
water
and
hygiene
supplies.
International and Development Cooperation website: https://ec.europa.eu/europeaid/projects-results-0_en.
DEVCO Annual Report is published every year at the address: https://ec.europa.eu/europeaid/annual-reports_en.
2.5.4 HA - HUMANITARIAN ASSISTANCE

The Commission has acquired high levels of
recognition as a reference donor and important
contributor to humanitarian action. It leads the
way in ensuring that humanitarian aid
allocations are needs based and that no
humanitarian crisis is overlooked in the
international humanitarian response. It is also in
a unique position to encourage other
humanitarian donors to implement effective and
principled humanitarian aid strategies and has a
comparative advantage in being able to
intervene in politically sensitive situations more
flexibly.
2014 has seen a major surge in humanitarian
crises. An unprecedented four 'Level 3'
emergencies, the highest crisis denomination
according to the United Nations standards, have
been declared (Syria, South Sudan, the Central
African Republic and Iraq). Around the world,
armed conflicts and attacks on civilians are
The outbreak of Ebola in West Africa is the largest ever

recorded, already killing over nine thousand people. The affected
countries and the humanitarian organisations are fighting to
control the spread of the disease. However, they are facing
challenging complications including infection and death of
medical workers, a lack of medical equipment, growing food
insecurity, and limited access to safe drinking water and
sanitation. As one of the first international donors to react to the
evolving crises in March 2014, the Commission, under the global
coordination of DG ECHO, since contributed more than EUR
414 million in direct aid to the countries and medical research,
bringing the total EU contribution to over EUR 1,2 billion. These
funds support the life-saving work of its humanitarian partners,
as well as providing budgetary support and strengthening the
healthcare systems of the affected countries, deploying medical
staff and mobile laboratories. The EU is also providing critical
logistics to ensure the rapid transport of equipment and experts to
the region by air and sea.
continuing, whilst natural disasters occur with increasing frequency and intensity. The number of people suffering from
conflicts, displacement, or lacking the most basic necessities, is constantly on the rise. The Ebola outbreak in West Africa
has generated new and particular types of challenges. While disaster often strikes the already impoverished parts of the
globe,
the
EU
and
its
neighbourhood has also suffered
from conflicts and emergencies.
As
the
world's
largest
The Syrian conflict continued unabated into its fourth year and remains the
humanitarian aid donor, the EU
biggest humanitarian and security crisis in the world. Tens of thousands of
people have lost their lives due to the fighting. Half of the population has been
takes centre stage in tackling the
forced away from their homes, with now close to 4 million seeking refuge in
resulting
humanitarian
neighbouring countries. Since the beginning of the crisis, the EU has made
consequences. The European
available over EUR 3 billion, making Europe the largest aid donor worldwide.
Aid has been provided in support of some 12,2 million people in need of
Commission alone provided over
humanitarian assistance inside Syria and in the neighbouring countries, as well
as the affected host-communities in the region: in the form of medical
emergency relief, protection, food-nutritional assistance, water, sanitation and
hygiene, shelter and logistics services. For example, the Commission together
with other donors provides food assistance, reaching 4 million people per
month. In Iraq, the Commission funds a programme to provide shelter support
for 1 970 households of refugees.
EUR 1,2 billion in aid in 2014 to the most vulnerable across more than 80
countries, reaching almost 121 million beneficiaries. This means in
average 100 000 beneficiaries per million spent.
87% of ECHO contracts are issued within the very fast set targets (i.e. 5
days for primary-emergency decisions, 18 days for emergency decisions and
56 days for other decisions) against 50% in 2013. In addition, DG ECHO is
committed to build capacity and resilience of vulnerable communities and
has put in place a resilience action plan for which 80% of actions are already
implemented. In addition 48% of ECHO funded operations have a Disaster
Risk Reduction Component compared to 40% in 2013.
Children account for half of the victims of conflicts across the

world and are among the most vulnerable victim groups. Since
2013, more than 270 000 children growing up in conflict are
gaining access to education thanks to the EU Children of Peace
Initiative. The programme, which was created in 2012 as a legacy
of the EU Nobel Peace Prize, received generous contributions
from a number of Member States.
The conflict in Eastern Ukraine

resulted in the displacement of
more than 1 million people and
growing humanitarian needs
(over 12 900 people wounded
and 5 400 killed). The EU's
humanitarian funding addressed
the basic needs of the affected
population such as shelter, food,
water, healthcare, psycho-social
assistance and protection in
preparation for winter. As
examples, 5 300 vulnerable
families were helped through a
specific program of cash
assistance, 20 000 school
children received access to safe
water and hygiene supplies.
It is intended that in 2016 at least EUR 465

million are spent for crises in most vulnerable
countries and EUR 126 million in forgotten
crises. In addition, the Commission will go on
ensuring that an increasing number of
vulnerable countries have a plan with country
priorities in place. The aim is to reach at least
10 countries in 2016 against 7 in 2014 and 3
in 2013.
2.5.5 Other programmes

DCI, ENI, IPA II and HA programmes consume more than 80 % of the commitment appropriations allocated for
Heading 4. However, other programmes, though much smaller in terms of budget allocation, have an important role and
ambitious objectives as well.
The Partnership Instrument has global reach. Its main objective is to advance and promote Union and mutual interests.
The actions adopted with the Annual Action Programme 2014 (with a budget of EUR 107 million) are wide ranging and
tackle various important issues at the core of the Partnership Instrument, from climate change to public procurement,
from migration to market access for European businesses, from underpinning policy dialogues to enhancing clean and
sustainable energy.
The European Instrument for Democracy and Human Rights (EIDHR) remains of central importance in projecting
European values. In particular, in 2014, the Commission launched 15 new key initiatives supporting human rights and
their defenders, in the most urgent and difficult situations, Moreover, the EIDHR small grant scheme was activated in
more than 75 cases, providing support to hundreds of Human Rights Defenders at risk. The EIDHR has also supported
other key actors and processes in 2014, in particular the Civil Society input to more than 20 EU Human Rights Dialogues
with third partners, the UN Office of the High Commissioner for Human Rights (OHCHR), the International Criminal
Court (ICC), and Human Rights Bodies of the African Union. It supported the initiation of a comprehensive global
programme to support National Human Rights Institutes (NHRIs).
Endowed with greater flexibility and an increased capacity to respond to changing circumstances, the EIDHR was part of
the EU response to crisis and contributes to EU initiatives in 2014 in countries such as Ukraine, Central African
Republic, or Syria/Iraq.
This instrument also covers Election Observation Missions undertaken in cooperation with the European Parliament and
Member States to support electoral processes around the globe by sending election observation missions, election
assessment teams and election expert missions, as well as providing technical and financial assistance to election
management bodies and to domestic observers. Ongoing efforts are being made to increase the cost-effectiveness of
election observation missions. In 2014, the EU deployed 19 missions (7 fully-fledged Election Observation Missions and
1 Election Assessment Team, 9 Election Expert Missions and 2 Election Follow-up Missions) and performed 7
Explanatory Missions. More detailed information about election observation can be found in the dedicated website:
http://eeas.europa.eu/eueom/index_en.htm.
The Instrument contributing to Peace and Stability (IcPS) and the Common foreign and security policy (CFSP) are
chiefly geared towards the world-wide preservation of peace, prevention of conflicts and strengthening of the
international security. The Crisis response part under IcSP saw 30 new actions adopted in 2014 for a total of EUR 166,4
million. It is estimated that 32 response actions in
situations of crisis or emerging crisis will be
launched in 2016.
The Union Civil Protection Mechanism (CPM)
aims at ensuring a rapid, cost-effective and
efficient mobilisation of European civil protection
assistance in case of major emergency in third
countries. The new Decision on a Union Civil
Protection Mechanism contains important new
elements to strengthen the overall approach to
disaster management within the EU, but also in
third countries, including a stronger focus on
disaster preparedness and prevention and the
creation of a voluntary pool of pre-committed
response assets that Member States declare
available in principle for EU operations. The
Emergency Response Centre (ERC), launched in
2013, ensures 24/7 operational capacity. Average
In the summer of 2014 massive floods affected over 3

million people in Bosnia and Herzegovina and in Serbia.
Shortly after the activation of the CPM, 23 countries had
offered and deployed assistance on the ground. The
Commission co-financed the transportation of the aid and
provided satellite imaging of the flooded areas to support the
operations.
In conflicts such as those in Iraq and Syria, and as part of
the comprehensive European response to the Ebola
epidemic, the CPM has provided a coordinated response to
calls for assistance and the deployment of personnel, tools
and supplies.
Since its establishment in 2001, the CPM has provided lifesaving equipment and supplies in more than150 disasters all
over the world, including 12 in 2014 alone.
speed of interventions under the EU Civil Protection Mechanism (from the acceptance of the offer to deployment) in
2014 was equal or less than 24 hours which is much faster than in 2013 ( 36 hours)28 and the target for 2020 is 12 hours
or less.
The objective of the EU Aid Volunteers Initiative (EUAV) is to express the Unions humanitarian values and solidarity
with people in need. The initiative will contribute to the strengthening the Union's capacity to respond to humanitarian
crises and to building capacity and resilience of vulnerable or disaster-affected communities in third countries. The
EUAV started with some delays due to the fact that Implementing and Delegated Regulations were only adopted by the
end of 2014 and consequently, activities could only start at the beginning of 2015. 2015, thus, sees the parallel
implementation of activities under the 2014 and 2015 Annual Work Plans. The first actions of the programme are linked
to certification of new organisations to join the programme as well as capacity building of these organisations. Thus, no
volunteers have been deployed yet in 2014 but it is expected that 500 will be provided with training and apprenticeships
and 500 or more volunteers will be deployed in 2016.
2.6.
Heading 9 Special Instruments
2.6.1 EGF- European Globalisation Adjustment Fund

The European Globalisation adjustment Fund (EGF) was set up in 2006 to address the adverse effects of globalisation, to
strengthen overall participation in the labour market and to demonstrate the EU's solidarity with the workers affected, as
the opening of trade can also have negative consequences, including redundancies in some sectors and areas of the EU.
The EGF enabled to complement national and ESF resources available for the re-integration of workers made redundant
as a consequence of trade related globalisation, providing more tailor-made support for a longer period of time, often
including measures that could not have been provided without the involvement of the EGF.
Several innovative elements have been incorporated in the EGF for 2014-2020. For instance, the categories of workers
eligible to benefit from the Fund have been broadened to include the self-employed, temporary workers and fixed-term
workers. Besides globalisation, the intervention criteria now also include global financial and economic crises.
The implementation of the EGF is progressing according to schedule. In terms of 2014-2015 applications, two cases29
were approved by the European Parliament and the Council at the end of 2014. Seven others submitted in 2014 30 are
likely to receive funding in the first part of 2015. The Commission has so far received two cases in 201531.
With relation to the previous period, the ex-post evaluation of the EGF 2007-2013, finalised in December 2014, found a
re-integration rate of 49 % across the 33 evaluated cases. This indicates that there could be a positive trend towards
reaching the desired target of 50%.
2.6.2 EUSF European Union Solidarity Fund
The European Union Solidarity Fund (EUSF) is one of the most concrete demonstrations of solidarity between Member
States, in acute times of need in the event of a major natural disaster. The European Union Solidarity Fund is an
instrument distinct from those of Cohesion policy and was set up in 2002 to grant financial assistance to Member States
and to countries negotiating their accession to the EU. From 2002 to 2013 the EUSF had a maximum ceiling of EUR 1
billion (current prices). From 2014 this amount has been reduced to EUR 500 million (in 2011 prices) plus any remaining
amounts not spent in the preceding year. The EUSF can be mobilised in the event of major and regional disasters. The
EUSF may only intervene upon application from the national authorities of the country concerned.
28
29
30
31
Source: Annual report for the EP on the implementation of the new union Civil Protection Mechanism Decision
EGF/2014/003 EL/Odyssefs Fokas and EGF/2014/010 IT/Whirlpool
EGF/2014/012 BE/ArcelorMittal, EGF/2014/014 DE/Aleo Solar, EGF/2014/011 BE/Caterpillar, EGF/2014/015 EL/Attica Publishing activities,
EGF/2014/017 FR/Mory-Ducros and EGF/2014/018/ EL/Attica Broadcasting, EGF/2014/016/IE/Lufthansa Technik
EGF/2015/001 FI/Broadcom and EGF/2015/002 DE/Adam Opel
Since its creation in 2002, the EUSF has been mobilised for a total of 63 disasters. For example in 2014, an amount if
EUR 126,7 million was approved by the Commission for disasters that occurred in Italy (flooding), Greece (Kefalonia
earthquakes), Slovenia (Ice storm), Croatia (Ice and floods), Serbia (flooding) and Bulgaria (flooding).
In April 2015, Euro 66.5 million were granted to Bulgaria, Italy and Romania following three natural disasters in 2014.
The aid - Euro 1.98 million to Bulgaria, Euro 56 million to Italy and nearly Euro 8.5 million to Romania - aims to
partially cover the emergency costs of recovery operations following floods. It will particularly help restore vital
infrastructure and services, reimburse the cost of emergency and rescue operations, and cover some of the clean-up costs
in the disaster-stricken regions.
3. Programmes financial contribution to Europe 2020
The MFF 2014-2020 budget is one of the EU levers contributing to the achievement of the Europe 2020 targets of smart,
sustainable and inclusive growth. It finances major programmes at EU level, most of which have objectives directly
linked to these targets. However, the political nature of the targets is inherent in the strategy and reflects the primary role
that national governments should play, in line with the principle of subsidiarity32. It emphasises smart, sustainable and
inclusive growth as a way to overcome the structural weaknesses in Europe's economy, improve its competitiveness and
productivity and underpin a sustainable social market economy. To make these priorities tangible, the following EU
headline targets33 have been proposed:
-
Raise the employment rate of the population aged 20-64 from the current 69 % to at least 75 %;
Achieve the target of investing 3 % of GDP in R&D, in particular by improving the conditions for R&D
investment by the private sector, and develop a new indicator to track innovation;
Reduce greenhouse gas emissions by at least 20 % compared to 1990 levels or by 30 % if the conditions are
right; increase the share of renewable energy in our final energy consumption to 20 %; and achieve a 20 %
increase in energy efficiency;
Reduce the share of early school leavers to 10 % from the current 15 %, and increase the share of population
aged 30-34 having completed tertiary education from 31 % to at least 40 %;
Reduce the number of Europeans living below nation poverty lines by 25 %, lifting 20 million people out of
poverty.
With the aim of catalysing progress at EU level, seven "Flagships initiatives" were proposed at the launch of the strategy.
They form a kind of pathways in thematic areas such as innovation, digitalisation, poverty, employment, industry, youth
and resource efficiency. The multi-dimensional character of the initiatives implies a certain thematic overlap between
different pathways. Flagships do not have a specific financial envelope; their realisation depends on effective
coordination and management of diverse stakeholders at different levels (EU, Member State, local and regional levels) so
that the related Europe 2020 targets are eventually reached.
Despite this complexity, since the adoption of Europe 2020, the methodologies to estimate financial contribution of the
spending programmes with relation to flagships were developed and introduced in the Programme Statements. The
precise allocation in terms of percentages may differ from one year to another and from one programme to another as it
depends on the particularities of each programme and on specific priorities and actions planned for the relevant budgetary
exercise. The calculation of the contribution of each action to the flagship corresponds to the best ex-ante estimations
based on commitments appropriations, as the precise tracking and calculation of actual spending on micro level34 would
not be cost-effective in terms of sound financial management.
To be noted that, as from next year, with the Europe 2020 undergoing revision the current way of calculation of the EU
budget contribution is likely to be changed35.
32
33
34
35
COM (2015) 100 "final Results of the public consultation on the Europe 2020 strategy for smart, sustainable and inclusive growth"; page 2.
The 2020 headline targets are monitored by Eurostat,( http://ec.europa.eu/eurostat/web/europe-2020-indicators/europe-2020-strategy):
i.e. at the level of individual commitments (procurements, grants)
COM (2015) 100, section 3.3 provides with feedback on the public consultation on the Europe 2020 strategy which was that the flagship
initiatives had generally served their purpose and that action in their respective areas needed to be pursued through other forms. Respondents to
the consultation argued that the flagship initiatives should be replaced by more coherently organised and over-arching policy programmes.
3.1
Main programmes contributing to Europe 2020
Education and training are at the core of Europe 2020 Strategy for smart, sustainable and inclusive growth, and of the
integrated guidelines for the economic and employment policies of the Member States. Arguably none of the Europe
2020 priorities and headline targets will be reached without a strong investment in human capital. Five of the Europe
2020 flagships depend on the modernisation of education and training: Youth on the Move, Agenda for New Skills and
Jobs, as well as the Digital Agenda, Innovation Union and the Platform against Poverty.
Beside these programmes, the European Social Fund is an important tool for offering to the unemployed persons a path
back to work. It supports policies and priorities aiming to achieve progress towards full employment, enhance quality and
productivity at work, increase the geographical and occupational mobility of workers within the Union, improve
education and training systems, and promote social inclusion, thereby contributing to economic, social and territorial
cohesion.
Contribution to one of the actions very often triggers positive changes in other areas. For example, the general objective
of Horizon 2020 is to build an economy based on knowledge and innovation across the whole Union, while contributing
to sustainable development. This programme helps to generate more sustainable growth and create new jobs in the EU
and will help raise the percentage of people employed. By contributing directly to R&D expenditure and leveraging
public and private funds towards this sector, it contributes to increasing the R&D investment in the EU. Finally, in order
to promote sustainable development, support is provided to climate change and energy research. This will ultimately
contribute towards reducing emissions, promoting renewable energy sources and increasing energy efficiency, thus
making progress towards the 20/20/20 climate/energy targets.
Meanwhile, actions related to energy, climate and sustainability supported under CEF, LIFE+, H2020 programmes and
the European Structural and Investment (ESI) funds help maintaining the quality of the environment and enhance
creation of sustainable jobs. Exploiting the potential of the single market to the full is essential since a better integrated
single market produces opportunities for growth for businesses, generates more employment, leads to knowledge
spillovers and expands the market for sustainable products and services, thereby strengthening the competitive position
of the European Union. Programmes such as COSME, CEF or Customs and Fiscalis are supporting improvements to the
single market.
Regional policy and the Rural Development pillar of the Common Agricultural Policy make a significant contribution to
several different flagships, thereby supporting the Commission's objective of strengthening growth and jobs. Regional
policys general objective is to reduce disparities between the levels of development of the various regions, and to
contribute to achieving the targets set out in the Europe 2020 strategy, and in particular towards the achievement of
quantitative headline targets identified in that strategy.
3.2
EU budget contribution
This table presents the contribution that the EU budget makes to the Europe 2020 strategy, broken down by flagship
initiative. The tracking of the financing of the Europe 2020 strategy provides for a comprehensive view on how the
Commission proposes to allocate resources to actions and programmes, with a view to achieving the Europe 2020 goals.
The updated estimates for the 2015 budget and the estimates for the 2016 draft budget as shown in the table below are
based on the currently available information, broken down to the level of the relevant budget lines. However, the
estimates for 2015 and 2016 should be seen against the background of the pending adoption of the Member States
operational programmes for the European Structural and Investment Funds and other funds under shared management
such as the Asylum, Migration and Integration Fund, which are among the major contributors to the flagship initiatives.
Based on the Commission's Draft Budget for 2016 it is estimated that EUR 88 111,8 million (58,8 % of the total Draft
Budget 2016) of commitment appropriations is linked to Europe 2020 strategy. This is a decrease of 2,5 % compared to
the 2015 Budget, and an increase of 1,2 % compared to 2014 Budget. These resources are split by flagship as follows:
(Commitment appropriations in EUR million, rounded figures at current prices)

2015 Budget Draft budget
Flagship
Programme/Action
International Thermonuclear Experimental Reactor (ITER)

The Framework Programme for Research and Innovation (Horizon 2020)
Euratom Research and Training Programme
The Union Programme for Education, Training, Youth and Sport (Erasmus+)
European Regional Development Fund (ERDF)
European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development (after transfers between EAGF and EAFRD)
European Maritime and Fisheries Fund (EMFF)
Union's action in the field of health (Health Programme)
Flagship 1 Innovation Union

European Union Programme for Employment and Social Innovation (EaSI)
160,1
4.289,1
4.147,0
187,4
202,0
13,2
36,0
7.398,9
5.818,2
278,0
285,7
16,0
16,4
0,0
15,8
12.373,7
10.681,2
197,0
188,7
1.060,1
1.141,2
20,3
2.643,3
4,5
1,0
11,7
14,7
1,9
4,5
Flagship 2 Youth on the move
4.400,2
4.013,7
1.768,2
1.632,0
Connecting Europe Facility (CEF)
91,6
140,4
Interoperability Solutions for European Public Administrations (ISA)
18,0
14,0
2.363,8
1.858,8
278,0
285,7
Justice Programme
8,9
6,6
Rights, Equality and Citizenship programme
0,2
0,2
24,6
19,0
1,3
3,0
Flagship 3 A digital agenda for Europe
4.554,6
3.959,7
1.099,2
1.133,5
2.539,3
4.273,5
9.656,8
7.593,7
Cohesion Fund (CF)
4.717,5
4.052,2
European Agricultural Guarantee Fund (EAGF)
3.272,7
3.242,9
8.464,1
8.697,0
201,2
199,7
2,4
2,2
424,5
453,4
4,5
5,0
30.382,2
29.653,2
191,1
160,1
1.057,2
848,2
Partnership instrument for cooperation with third countries (PI)

EU Aid Volunteers initiative (EUAV)


Consumer Programme

Sustainable Fisheries Partnership Agreements (SFPAs)
Programme for the Environment and Climate Action (LIFE)
Instrument of financial support for encouraging the economic development of the Turkish Cypriot community
(TCC)
Flagship 4 Resources efficient Europe
5
191,1
19,7
(TCC)
2016
3.105,3
European Social Fund (ESF)
(incl. AB 1 &
DAB 1,3, 4 &
5)

Implementation and exploitation of European satellite navigation systems (EGNOS and Galileo)
European Earth Observation Programme (Copernicus)
Programme for the Competitiveness of Enterprises and small and medium-sized enterprises (COSME)
553,9
583,6
1.089,9
1.101,0
283,4
268,4
2015 Budget Draft budget

Flagship
Programme/Action
10.859,2
8.539,2
5.455,7
4.686,3
5.833,3
5.993,8
Consumer Programme
4,3
3,5
(TCC)
7,1
7,0
162,4
165,6
25.497,4
22.356,7
322,5
320,1
421,5
448,7
Flagship 5 An industrial policy for the globalisation era
43,1
43,7
8.186,7
6.968,7
1.745,5
1.372,6
44,8
57,3
Asylum, Migration and Integration Fund (AMIF)
19,5
24,5
0,2
0,2

Instrument for Pre-accession Assistance (IPA II)
(TCC)
0,0
6,8
31,1
32,0
2,0
3,0
2,5
2,0
10.819,4
9.279,6
92,4
88,9
37,8
38,2
2.823,0
2.403,0
2.134,9
1.678,8
Flagship 6 An agenda for new skills and jobs

7
2016
Cohesion Fund (CF)
European Globalisation Adjustment Fund (EGF) (1)

6
(incl. AB 1 &
DAB 1,3, 4 &
5)
Fund for European Aid to the Most Deprived (FEAD)

523,2
533,7
3.296,0
3.386,7
19,5
24,5
0,9
0,9
0,0
11,5
(TCC)
1,5
1,5
Flagship 7 European Platform against Poverty

Total Europe 2020
Total EU Budget (Commission Section III)
Europe 2020 / EU Budget
(1)
Entered under reserve on budget article 40 02 43
8.929,4
8.167,7
96.956,9
88.111,8
158.276,0
149.758,5
61,3%
58,8%
4. Climate and biodiversity

The EU budget, albeit small relative to the overall size of the European economy, is an important tool to support the
achievement of the EUs climate and biodiversity objectives. This is reflected in the 2014-2020 EU Multi-annual
Financial Framework (MFF) which includes provisions that seek to mainstream the EUs climate and environment
objectives in all major EU policies including cohesion, agriculture, maritime and fisheries, research and innovation, and
external aid programmes. Mainstreaming is to be achieved through a range of requirements for benchmarking,
monitoring and reporting (using appropriate indicators) for all relevant EU policy instruments.
4.1 Contribution to mainstreaming of climate change
To respond to challenges and investment needs related to climate change, the EU has agreed that at least 20% of its
budget for 2014-2020 as much as EUR 180 billion should be spent on climate change-related action.
To achieve this increase, mitigation and adaptation actions will be integrated into all major EU spending programmes, in
particular cohesion policy, regional development, energy, transport, research and innovation and the Common
Agricultural Policy. The EUs development policy will also contribute to achieving the 20% overall commitment.
A common tracking methodology for climate related expenditure based on the Rio markers has been integrated in the
normal budgetary procedure for measuring performance of the EU programmes while Member States have an obligation
to report on climate spending under the five European Structural and Investment Funds according to an established
methodology36
Starting from the 2014 draft budget, these foreseen expenditures have been tracked in accordance with the methodology
developed by the Commission to ensure visible and solid mainstreaming. The progress towards reaching the 20 %
objective is being monitored on an annual basis by measuring the performance of the EU programmes in the framework
of the budgetary procedure. The aggregated information related to the mainstreaming of climate action throughout the
budget is presented in the Annex III of the Statement of estimates of the European Commission for the financial year
2016.
Based on the estimations, it is foreseen that EUR 30 824,3 million is considered as a climate related expenditure in DB
2016.
4.2 Contribution to biodiversity
Similarly to the mainstreaming of climate action, the EU has committed to halting the loss of biodiversity and the
degradation of ecosystem services in the EU by 2020 and has been tracking since 2014 efforts to mainstream biodiversity
throughout the EU budget. Efforts are needed to ensure that spendings under the EU budget have no negative impacts on
biodiversity and additionally, that it is overall supportive to achieving the biodiversity targets.
As support for this, the Commission's "Common Framework for Biodiversity proofing of the EU budget"37 provides a
practical Common Framework for Proofing the EU Budget and includes general and fund-specific guidelines to be used
by national and regional authorities as well as by the Commission services. In addition, the Commission has developed a
general approach for tracking biodiversity-related expenditure in a consistent way across the EU budget with detailed
instrument-specific guidelines38 .
The aggregated information related to the mainstreaming of biodiversity throughout the budget is presented in the Annex
III of the Statement of estimates of the European Commission for the financial year 2016.
Based on the estimations, it is foreseen that EUR 13 669,2 million is considered as a biodiversity related expenditure in
DB 2016.
III. PROGRAMMES' STATEMENTS

The following sections contain all Programme statements sorted per budgetary heading.
36
37
38
Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 215/2014 of 7 March 2014 laying down rules for implementing Regulation (EU) No 1303/2013
of the European Parliament and of the Council laying down common provisions on the European Regional Development Fund, the European
Social Fund, the Cohesion Fund, the European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development and the European Maritime and Fisheries Fund and
laying down general provisions on the European Regional Development Fund, the European Social Fund, the Cohesion Fund and the European
Maritime and Fisheries Fund with regard to methodologies for climate change support, the determination of milestones and targets in the
performance framework and the nomenclature of categories of intervention for the European Structural and Investment Funds.
http://ec.europa.eu/environment/nature/biodiversity/comm2006/pdf/cfbp%20-%20General%20Guidance.pdf
Details will be posted on the EU Biodiversity webpages: http://ec.europa.eu/environment/nature/index_en.htm
Programme Statement
DB2016
HEADING 1A - COMPETITIVENESS FOR

GROWTH AND JOBS
HEADING 1A - COMPETITIVENESS FOR GROWTH AND JOBS / 37
Programme Statement
DB2016
HEADING 1A: Competitiveness for growth and jobs
Implementation and exploitation of European satellite navigation systems

(EGNOS and Galileo)
Lead DG: GROW
1.
Financial programming
Legal Basis
Regulation (EU) No 1285/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of

11 December 2013 on the implementation and exploitation of European satellite
navigation systems and repealing Council Regulation (EC) No 876/2002 and
Regulation (EC) No 683/2008 of the European Parliament and of the Council
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
7 071,7
Financial Programming (EUR million)

2014
Administrative support
2015
DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Total
3,4
3,4
3,4
3,8
4,0
4,2
5,0
27,2
Operational appropriations
1 322,8
1 057,2
848,2
895,0
808,0
751,6
1 248,7
6 931,5
Total
1 326,2
1 060,6
851,6
898,7
812,0
755,8
1 253,7
6 958,7
2.
Implementation rates
2014
Impl.
PA
Impl.
CA
Rate
Rate
1 495,355 102,94 % 1 296,033 102,67 % 1 221,132
2015
Impl.
PA
Impl.
Rate
Rate
0,07 % 1 092,268 15,72 %
1 326,185 100,00 % 1 132,753 99,74 % 1 060,604
0,07 % 935,157 13,47 %
CA
Authorised appropriation
Authorised appropriation excluding
external earmarked revenue
This table includes all authorised appropriations (in EUR million), including assigned revenue; the execution rate is calculated on 15
April 2015 by comparing the execution of these credits to the voted appropriations (after transfers).
3.
EU added value, general objectives and contribution to Europe 2020 Strategy
EU added value
The EU right to act is based on article 172 of the Treaty on the functioning of the European Union and the GNSS
Regulation on the further implementation of the European satellite navigation programmes (EGNOS and Galileo).
Today close to7% of the EU's GDP,i.e. about EUR800 billion, rely on satellite navigation and thus currently on GPS.
This strong dependency of European economic interest on strategic systems controlled by third countries is highly
undesirable, in particular as EU's dependence on satellite navigation system will most probably further increase in the
future.
EGNOS and Galileo will furthermore provide additional benefits in combination with other GNSS, resulting from the
additional services the systems will offer and the increased performance coming from additional satellites. Galileo is also
the only Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) specifically designed for civil purposes, i.e. it aims to satisfy the
requirements and the needs of the civil sector. The total cumulative benefits are forecasted to be up to EUR130 billion
over the period of the next 20 years.
Both programmes are complex projects which exceed the financial and technical capacities of a single Member State, as
such they fully fall within EU competence. Moreover, considering their requirements in terms of security, all Member
States must be involved in those programmes.
Programme Statement
DB2016
These programmes contribute to stimulating economic activity and technological innovation. They will enable traffic
management to be optimised whether onroad, waterborne or aerial. Better managed traffic not only improves safety but
also reduces pollution since travel is more efficient. Satellite navigation also enables emergency services to better carry
out their duties (e.g. in case of fires, road accidents, mountain rescue). Another added-value is that the combined use of
GPS and Galileo signals will allow for better precision and availability and opens the door to new applications which are
not possible by using GPS alone.
Contribution to Europe 2020 Strategy
Contribution to Europe 2020 headline targets
75% of the population aged 20-64 should be employed

3% of the EU's GDP should be invested in R&D
The '20/20/20' climate/energy targets should be met (including an increase to 30% of emissions reduction if the
conditions are right)
Contribution to Flagship initiatives

Flagship
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
1 057,2
An industrial policy for the globalisation era
DB 2016
(EUR million)
848,2
Contribution to mainstreaming of climate action
Not applicable
Contribution to financing biodiversity
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: Supporting European presence in space and the development of satellite-based positioning,
navigation and timing services*
Indicator 1: Market share of EU GNSS industry in worldwide GNSS downstream market
Milestones
Baseline1
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
EGNOS present in number of
receiver models in 20122:
63%
Galileo present in number of
receiver models in 2012: 35%
2019
Target 2020
63%
75%
85%
35%
45%
70%
*According to the legal base (Regulation (EU) No 1285/2013) the specific objectives of Galileo cover the following 5 services: Open Service (OS),
Integrity monitoring Service, Commercial Service (CS), Public Regulated Service (PRS) and the Search and Rescue support Service (SAR)
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: To develop and provide global satellite-based radio navigation infrastructures and services
(Galileo) by 2020
The market share indicator is based on the percentage of Galileo and EGNOS receivers in the total number of receiver models worldwide. The
baseline for this indicator was established in 2014 and the data is included in the 2014 market report of the European GNSS Agency and will be
measured annually. The trend of the production of Galileo and EGNOS enabled model receivers suggests that receiver manufacturers are
gradually integrating Galileo and EGNOS into their products and the milestone target for this indicator is likely to be reached
Total number of receiver models in the GPS survey in 2012: 483
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 1: Galileo infrastructure-Cumulative number of operational satellites

Milestones
Baseline
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
Target 2020
2019
103
30
Indicator 2: Galileo infrastructure-New terrestrial infrastructure deployed version

Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015
2016 2017
2018
2019
No target yet
foreseen
after 2015
Version Version
1
2
Version 1 in June 2011
Target 2020
Indicator 3: Galileo services provision-Number of services implemented

Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
2017
Number of services
N/A
3
implemented
2018
Target 2020
2019
4 services
Expenditure related outputs

Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
3
588,2
Budget line
Galileo - services
02 05 01
Number of outputs foreseen (F) and produced (P)

Outputs
Galileo - services
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
3
0
3
0
F
P
Total
5
Services:
Open service (OS)
Commercial service (CS)
Public regulated service (PRS)
Integrity Monitoring Service
Search and rescue support service (SAR)
Justification of changes to the financial programming and/or to the performance information:
In 2014, the deployment of the Galileo infrastructure has continued. The development and validation phase of the
programme was successfully concluded and the Galileo satellite navigation system was validated in orbit. The
deployment phase of the programme started with the launch of two Galileo satellites in August 2014. Due to a launch
anomaly, these satellites were placed into an incorrect orbit. An independent investigation identified the root cause of the
anomaly and made recommendations for corrective measures which will be implemented by March 2015. The two
satellites have now been moved to an orbit and are being tested with very positive results. Their future use will be
decided in the course of 2015. The launches of Galileo satellites will resume in March 2015, putting the overall plan for
the deployment of the Galileo constellation back on-track.
Moreover, in order to secure a European launcher for launching Galileo satellites to space, a 511 million contract was
signed with Arianespace for the acquisition of three Ariane-5 launchers. Each Ariane-5 launcher will have a capacity to
carry four Galileo satellites into orbit per launch - as soon as technical adaptation to Galileo satellites is completed.
In parallel, preparations for the provision of Galileo services have continued, and it is expected that the Galileo early
services will be provided in the course of 2016.
Milestone adapted to new launch schedule.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 2: To provide satellite-based services* improving the performance of GPS to gradually cover the
whole ECAC (European Civil Aviation Conference) region by 2020 (EGNOS) and European neighbouring countries
Indicator 1: Progress of the EGNOS coverage extension versus agreed coverage extension
Baseline
2014
No baseline
established yet
2015
Establishment of an
updated EU
coverage extension
plan for EU-28 in
December 2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
Target 2020
2019
Coverage of EU28 with EGNOS
*According to the legal base (Regulation (EU) No 1285/2013) the specific objectives of EGNOS cover the following 3 services. Open Service (OS),
EGNOS Data Access Service (EDAS) and Safety-of-Life Service (SoL).
Indicator 2: EGNOS service availability index based on the number of airports with EGNOS-based approach
procedures with an operational status versus the total number of airports with EGNOS - based approach procedures
Milestones
Baseline:
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Total number of
Continue
airports with EGNOS Service availability
EGNOS
index:
97.72%
procedures: 150
Safety-of-Life
(2014)
service
Maintain the
provision
and
Total number of airports
Total number of
service
gradually
with EGNOS
airports with EGNOS
availability
increase the
procedures: 163
procedures with an
index
total number
(December
2014)
operational status: 150
constantly at
of airports
(2014)
least on 99%
with EGNOSbased
Total number of airports
Service availability with operational status:
approach
index: 100%
procedures
163 (December 2014)

Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
3
260,0
Budget line
EGNOS services
02 05 02

Outputs
EGNOS - services in
operation:
F
P
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
3
3
3
3
Services
Open service (OS)
EGNOS Data Access Service (EDAS)
Safety-of-life service (SoL)
Total
3
Programme Statement
DB2016
Additional performance information of EGNOS programme

In terms of EGNOS service provision, from 1 January 2014, the European GNSS Agency has successfully taken the
responsibility of the service provision activities through a contract with ESSP (European Satellite Services Provider)
which runs until 2021.
Regarding the performance, the Service Definition Documents define the expected EGNOS performance through
availability maps for the different services. For the APV-I service, availabilities over 99% of the time were provided on
average for more than 95% of the published area. In the first quarter of the year, the EGNOS performance was affected by
ionospheric activity.
In December 2014 updated versions of Service Definition Documents for all EGNOS services were published, improving
the robustness of these services.
The EGNOS coverage plan was presented to the European GNSS Programmes Committee and it is expected that it will be
finalised by mid-2015.
The implementation of the cooperation agreement with Ukraine continued, whereby 5 million have been made available
through the neighbourhood instrument for developing EGNOS in Ukraine. Furthermore, in 2014 the Council authorised
the Commission to start negotiations with the Agency for Aerial Navigation Safety in Africa and Madagascar (ASECNA)
on EGNOS extension to the ASECNA member countries.
General justification of changes to the financial programming and/or to the performance information of Galileo and
EGNOS programme
An amount of EUR 50 million (EUR 10 million per year from 2016 to 2020 is proposed to be shifted from budget line
02.0501 (Galileo activities) to 02.0502 (EGNOS activities) to allocate the management costs between Galileo and
EGNOS. In the initial financial programming, the overall management cost of the GNSS systems was fully programmed
on budget line 02.0501. Following the conclusion of the delegation agreements for EGNOS, it is appropriate to move the
part of those costs specifically concerning EGNOS (EUR 50 million) to budget line 02.0502. It is proposed to spread the
shift out over 5 years.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Lead DG: ENER
1.
Legal Basis
Council Decision of 13 December 2013 amending Decision 2007/198/Euratom

establishing the European Joint Undertaking for ITER and the Development of
Fusion Energy and conferring advantages upon it (2013/791/Euratom)
2014
Total
2.
8,9
720,9
729,8
2015
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2018
2 915,0

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
9,7
382,2
391,9
9,9
320,2
330,1
10,4
317,3
327,7
2020
Total
10,7
369,1
379,8
49,6
2 109,8
2 159,3
2014
Impl.
PA
Impl.
CA
Rate
Rate
781,640 100,33 % 114,358 100,66 % 941,404
2015
Impl.
PA
Impl. Rate
Rate
0,86 % 230,949
1,55 %
754,971 100,33 %
0,90 % 204,279
CA
87,688 100,66 % 914,734
1,28 %
3.
EU added value
The ITER project, which is part of the Strategic Energy Technology (SET) Plan, aims at building and operating an
experimental fusion reactor, a major step towards the demonstration of fusion as a sustainable energy source. Due to its
important advantages, such as the availability of large fuel reserves and the lack of CO2 emissions, fusion could greatly
contribute to the long-term EU strategy of decarbonisation of the energy system in a safe, efficient and secure way. The
risk, costs, and long-term nature of a large research projects such as ITER puts it beyond the reach of individual EU
Member States and even of the EU as such. Thus, the establishment of a global framework through an international
agreement between the European Atomic Energy Community ("Euratom") and six other Parties: China, India, Japan, Korea,
Russia and the USA was essential to undertake this large-scale scientific experiment. ITER construction started in 2007 in
Saint Paul-Lez-Durance, France. ITER project is managed by ITER International Organization (IO) and Euratom provides
about 45% of all components through the European Joint Undertaking for ITER and development of Fusion Energy
(hereinafter F4E).
Europe's support to ITER and to other activities related to ITER such as the Broader Approach activities with Japan
contributes to the strategic agenda of the European Union for clean and secure energy. In particular, it supports the first
objective of the new Commission's political agenda: 'boosting growth, jobs and investment in future high potential
technologies' as ITER is stimulating the European industrial investment in new advanced technologies for the components
of the facility and in advanced civil engineering for its construction. In the longer term, ITER is contributing to the
Research & Innovation pillar of the Energy Union.
ITER activities contribute to the Europe 2020 flagship initiatives, mainly to the Innovation Union and the Industrial policy
for the globalisation era (e.g. by involving the European high tech industry which will gain new skills and manufacturing
capabilities). As far as section 3.2.2 is concerned, it should be noted that this budgetary breakdown exercise regarding the
contribution to the flagship initiatives implies that each amount has to be allocated on the basis of exclusivity. In this
Programme Statement
DB2016
context the amount per flagship represents a rough estimation and a simplistic picture of the reality because many ITER
actions will contribute simultaneously to both flagships.


Flagship
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
191,1
191,1
382,2
Innovation Union
Total
DB 2016
(EUR million)
160,1
160,1
320,2
Not applicable
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: development of fusion as a potentially limitless, safe, sustainable, environmentally responsible
and economically competitive source of energy
Indicator 1: Reduction of greenhouse gas emissions at EU level compared to 1990
Baseline
2012
2014
2015
2016
Milestones
2017
2018
2019
21%2
18%
4.
2020
Target 20501
80-95%3
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: to provide the Euratom contribution to ITER and to the ITER related activities
Indicator 1: Percentage of Euratom's obligations discharged by the ITER Organization (IO) through the Joint
Undertaking F4E
Milestones
Baseline4
Target 2020
2014 2015 2016 2017 2018
2019
2013
13% 19% 27% 37%
6%
Results
70%
13%
1
2
3
4
Production of electricity from fusion is not foreseen before 2050.

COM(2014) 689. To be updated in the Communication from the Commission on preparing a review of the Europe 2020 strategy for smart,
sustainable and inclusive growth, expected to be adopted by end 2015.
Energy Roadmap 2050 - COM(2011)885 of 15.12.2011.
Progress in the Euratom contribution to ITER construction is measured according to credits granted by ITER Organisation to F4E according to the
ITER International Agreement.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Expenditure related output

Output
Call for funds for F4E
Budget line
32 05 01
Budget 2015
Number
EUR million
3
882,2
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
2
320,2
Justification of changes to the financial programming and/or to the performance information

Although good progress can be observed on the ITER site in Saint Paul-Lez-Durance in South of France where the ITER
device is being built, the project is facing difficult and complex challenges. Many of these challenges are linked to the
beyond-state-of-the-art state of the technology of this ambitious experimental project and the complex international
management and governance structure. This situation is affecting the current schedule adopted in 2010. For this reason,
work to develop a more realistic schedule for the ITER construction phase has started and it is expected that a new
revised schedule be presented to the ITER Council by June 2015. Due to the present schedule delays, the ITER
construction will not be completed in 2020 as planned in 2010. Consequently, the percentage of Euratom's obligations
discharged by the IO through F4E are lower than what it was expected within the current schedule. As a result, the target
has been revised from 100% down to 70 % and the milestones accordingly.
The initial amount of EUR 882,2 million 2015 commitment appropriations for ITER (budget item 08 04 01 02) will be
reduced and EUR 500 million will be reallocated in line with the Commission's proposal for the Draft Amending Budget
No 1 to the General Budget 2015 (for details see COM(2015)11 final). This reallocation can be made because the Joint
Undertaking for ITER and the Development of Fusion Energy will use a large proportion of the 2014 commitment
appropriations to cover 2015 needs and also because of the postponement of the signature of high value contracts to the
end of 2015. Therefore, the Commission can redeploy a large part of the ITER commitment appropriations authorised in
the 2015 budget for the provisioning of the EFSI guarantee fund. The Commission intends to offset the ITER reduction in
2015 by an equivalent increase in the ITER financial programming over the period 2018-2020, as foreseen in the
legislative financial statement accompanying the draft regulation.
Programme Statement
DB2016
European Earth Observation Programme (Copernicus)

Lead DG: GROW
1.
Legal Basis
Regulation (EU) no 377/2014 of the European Parliament and of the Council

of 3 April 2014 establishing the Copernicus Programme and repealing
Regulation (EU) No 911/2010
2014
Total
2.
2015
2,5
360,4
362,9
2,5
553,9
556,4
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
4 291,5

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2,6
583,6
586,2
2,8
609,8
612,6
2,9
642,7
645,6
2,9
874,0
876,9
2020
Total
3,0
19,2
647,8 4 272,2
650,8 4 291,4
2014
2015
Impl.
PA
Impl.
CA
Impl.
PA
Rate
Rate
Rate
363,223 100,08 % 245,462 99,71 % 556,815 16,51 % 514,443
Impl.
Rate
3,46 %
362,933 100,00 % 244,752 99,25 % 556,370 16,43 % 514,033
3,38 %
CA
3.
EU added value
Copernicus is a programme to be delivered under the Europe 2020 strategy for smart, sustainable and inclusive growth.
Given its benefits to a wide range of EU policies and its potential for reaching the objectives of Europe 2020,
Copernicus is included in the industrial policy flagships. The Commission identified five areas of EU legislation where
Copernicus (or GMES) is explicitly referred to, in the fields of maritime policy, civil protection, agriculture and space
debris surveillance and tracking. Besides, Copernicus continued to deliver useful data and information in 2014 for EU
policies for agriculture, environment, development and humanitarian aid. The objective is that two other fields might
rely on Copernicus by 2020. This could include for example the IT sector, or coastal surveillance and smart cities.1
The Copernicus programme cannot be realised by a Member State because it encompasses a pan-European capacity and
depends on the coordinated provision of data and services throughout all the Member States, which needs to be
coordinated at Union level. Therefore, by reason of the scale of the action, the programme will be better achieved at
Union level, and may adopt measures, in accordance with the principle of subsidiarity as set out in Article 5 of the
Treaty on European Union. In accordance with the principle of proportionality, as set out in that Article, this Regulation
does not go beyond what is necessary in order to achieve that objective, especially regarding the Commission's role as
coordinator of national activities. From an economic point of view, action at the EU level also allows economies of
scale from which public spending will benefit.
A market study will be run in 2015 in that respect.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Copernicus fosters the development of a competitive European space and services industry in the Earth Observation
market, thereby contributing significantly to the economic growth and employment targets of Europe 2020. With its
focus on monitoring the Earths environment and specific view towards understanding and charting Climate Change
through its Climate Change service, and relevant products from the Land/Atmosphere/Marine services pertaining to
energy use and energy use impacts, it centrally underpins the Europe 2020 headline targets on Climate Change and
Energy.
Based on the recent study2 investigating the economic impact of the Copernicus programme beyond the institutional
sector, with a focus on the downstream market, initial results show that Copernicus is not only a monitoring tool for
institutional needs, but can also stimulate economic growth and employment in a wide range of industrial sectors,
leading to the creation or maintenance of approximately 20.000 direct jobs in Europe by 2030, if enabling factors are put
in place. With highly skilled jobs in this sector typically impacting employment in other sectors, the economic stimulus
by Copernicus could also result in a wider economic effect, with an additional 63.000 indirect jobs secured or created by
2030. Overall the impact on employment from Copernicus is estimated at approximately 83.000 jobs in Europe by 2030.

Flagship (*)
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
553,9
DB 2016
(EUR million)
583,6
(*)The European satellite navigation and earth observation programmes support the flagship initiatives in two ways: first they boost the European
space-related industries and, secondly, they provide data for the benefit of private and commercial users. The existing space programmes are expected
to generate economic and social benefits worth around 60-90 billion over the next 20 years.

Relevant objective/output (*)
Delivering accurate and reliable data and information to

Copernicus users (Copernicus Climate Change Service)
Delivering accurate and reliable data and information (satellite
imagery, digital or printed maps) to Copernicus users (50% of
output produced relating to 3 Copernicus services on Land
monitoring, Atmosphere Monitoring and Marine Environment
Monitoring is attributed to Climate Change)
Total
Budget 2014
(EUR million
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
DB 2016
(EUR million)
2,0
25,0
32,4
15,2
30,2
24,4
17,2
55,2
56,8
(*) The Copernicus Climate Change service will provide access to several climate indicators (e.g. temperature increase, sea level rise, ice sheet
melting, warming up of the ocean) and climate indices (e.g. based on records of temperature, precipitation, drought event) for both the identified
climate drivers and the expected climate impacts.3

Relevant objective/output(*)
Budget 2014
(EUR million)
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
DB 2016
(EUR million)
Deliver accurate and reliable data and information to Copernicus

users (The Copernicus Land monitoring service will provide
information including on the dynamics of monitoring of
biodiversity: operational continuity of Land Monitoring service is
to be achieved by 2015 (30% of output produced attributed))
6,7
8,1
6,7
(*)The Copernicus land monitoring service provides geographical information on land cover and on variables related, for instance, to the vegetation
state or the water cycle. It supports applications in a variety of domains such as spatial planning, forest management, water management, agriculture and
food security, etc. The service is operational since 2012.4
2
3
http://copernicus.eu/sites/default/files/library/GMES_GIO_LOT3_PublishableExecutiveSummary_final.pdf
The Copernicus Climate Change service is under implementation. In November 2014, the European Commission signed a Delegation Agreement
with ECMWF (European Centre for Medium-Range Weather Forecasts) for the implementation of the service. The first stage of implementation
will be dedicated to the so called "proof of concept", meaning capacity building and testing of the overall architecture. The operational capacity
will be reached during the third year of operations and it will be preceded by a pre-operational stage
The global component produces data across a range of biophysical variables at a global scale (i.e. worldwide), which describe the state of
vegetation (e.g. vegetation condition index), the energy budget (e.g. land surface temperature, top of canopy reflectance) and the water cycle (e.g.
soil water index).
Programme Statement
DB2016
General objectives
General Objective 1: Monitoring the Earth to support the protection of the environment and the efforts of civil
protection and civil security
Indicator 1: Number of specific service components corresponding to users' service-level requirements to realise
that Copernicus data and Copernicus information is made available for the environment, civil protection and civil
security
Milestones
Baseline
Target
2013
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Service components5 put
0
6
5
2
0
1
0
into operations during year
Total number of Operational
0
6
11
13
13
14
14
service component = 6
General Objective 2: Maximising socio-economic benefits, thus supporting of the Europe 2020 strategy and its
objectives of smart, sustainable and inclusive growth by promoting the use of Earth observation in applications and
services
Indicator 1: Expected growth in downstream Earth Observation sector directly benefiting from Copernicus
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Employment*6
140
180
Index= 100
* The growth of downstream EO sector is measured in terms of employment figures on the sector, with baseline as measured in 2012.
General Objective 3: Fostering the development of a competitive European space and services industry and
maximising opportunities for European enterprises to develop and provide innovative Earth observation systems and
services
Indicator 1: Market penetration, including expansion of the existing markets and creation of new markets and
competitiveness of the European downstream operators
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Index=100
105
116
128
140
The Pan-European component will produce 5 high resolution data sets describing the main land cover types: artificial surfaces (e.g. roads and
paved areas), forest areas, agricultural areas (grasslands), wetlands, and small water bodies.
The local component focuses on "hotspots" which are prone to specific environmental challenges. It provides detailed land cover and land used
information (over major European cities, which are the first type of "hotspots", i.e. the Urban Atlas.
Services ready to be operational in 2015 are Emergency Mapping, Early Warning System of Floods, Pan-EU land service, EU local Land service,
Global land service, and provision of access to reference data access = 6 components responding to Copernicus Regulation Art 5(1e) and Art
5(1c). In 2016: Services on Global Hot spots, Border Surveillance, Maritime Surveillance, External Action Service, Early Warning System Forest
fires = 5 components operational. In 2017, Marine Environment, and Atmosphere service to be operational. In 2019, Climate change service to be
operational.
The downstream Earth-observation sector comprises all enterprises whose main business is to provide services based on Earth-observation data
(not only Copernicus). In Europe, the sector experiences a strong boost due in particular to smart phone applications. Examples of recent
applications developed in Europe and recognised internationally are FarmIQ and AGRAI (farming solutions via smart phones), EcoFit (which
identifies the sites with the highest potential for renewable energy), and Malevich (an application designed to support the selling of renewable
energy). The Commission will run a specific market study in 2015 in order to accurately assess the actual progress on this indicator. Every 1-2
years, the Commission is publishing calls for proposals to support the development of the downstream sector. Additional action will be considered
depending on the results of the 2015 market study.
Programme Statement
DB2016
General Objective 4: Ensuring autonomous access to environmental knowledge and key technologies for Earth
observation and geo- information services, thereby enabling Europe with independent decision-making and action
Indicator 1: Number of directives and decisions directly invoking the use of Copernicus data and Copernicus
information by Union institutions and bodies for autonomous decision-making
Milestones
Baseline
Target
2013
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
5
15
30
General Objective 5: Supporting and contributing to European policies and fostering global initiatives, such as GEOSS
Indicator 1: Percentage of Copernicus global Earth Observation data available through Global Earth Observation
System of Systems (GEOSS)
Milestones
Baseline
Target
2013
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
~10% for
40%
75%
100%
0%7
2014
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: Delivering accurate and reliable data and information to Copernicus users, supplied on a long
term and sustainable basis enabling the services referred to in Article 4(1) and responding to the requirements of
Copernicus Core Users
Indicator 1: Number of engaged users showing sustained uptake through registered data download
Baseline
2013
Milestones
2014
2015
2016
1*
2017
1.5
2018
2019
Target 2020
2
*This figure refers to an absolute value: 1.5 milestones by 2017 means a 50% increase from the baseline, the target 2 means a doubling of engaged
users.
Indicator 2: Progression in number of satisfied users * expressed by the percentage of returning and engaged users
Baseline
2013
0%
Milestones
2014
2015
20 %
2016
2017
40 %
2018
2019
Target 2020
65 %
*Users' satisfaction is expressed as percentage of Copernicus users which integrate the service products regularly into their workflows.

The Copernicus programme has already started to deliver vital services in several areas, including environmental
monitoring, emergency response, climate change understanding and civilian security. The challenge facing the
Commission for the years 2015-2020 is the increase in the uptake and exploitation of Copernicus data, products and
services by user communities and commercial players for building their business cases.
To achieve the economic benefits from Copernicus in the period 2015-2020 and longer term, it essential that the user
uptake is actively fostered and dissemination of the Copernicus data and information is further enabled to be effective
and in line with user needs..
Furthermore, although Sentinel data and environment services products do not appear to present a security- or
sensitivity-issue based on their technical characteristics, a study is currently carried out by external consultants to
contribute, in close coordination with Member States' experts, to an exhaustive analysis of Copernicus security issues.
The data for this indicator is from the yearly report provided by the European Environment Agency (EEA), the European Centre for Mediumrange Weather Forecasts (ECMWF), Mercator Ocean, Frontex and the European Maritime Safety Agency (EMSA). This data is also the basis for
the yearly implementation plan, which is line with the milestone and 2020 target, and considered realistic. DG GROW already estimates the
percentage of Copernicus data available through GEOSS at 15% in early 2015, due to the data already produced by the EEA and the MACC
project on atmosphere monitoring.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 2: Providing sustainable and reliable access to space borne data and information from an
autonomous European Earth observation capacity
Indicator 1: The accomplishment of the space infrastructure in terms of satellites deployed and data it produces for
integration into geo-information services
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Total EU autonomous
satellite capacity

Output(*)
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
1
127,0
4
334,2
461,2
Budget line
Sentinel 1A operating
Sentinel 2A,3A,1B and 5p launched and construction of next series
Total
02 06 02
02 06 02

Outputs
Construction, launch and
operation of satellites
F
P
2014
2015
2016
2017
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2018
2019
Total
2020
1
1
8
8
(*) The Copernicus satellites called Sentinels are currently being developed for the specific needs of the Copernicus
programme. The Sentinels will provide a unique set of observations for Copernicus.
Sentinel-1 will provide all-weather, day and night radar imagery for land and ocean services. The first satellite (Sentinel1A) was launched on 3 April 2014. The second one (Sentinel-1B) is planned for launch in 2015.
Sentinel-2 will provide high-resolution optical imagery for land services. It will provide for example, imagery of
vegetation, soil and water cover, inland waterways and coastal areas. Sentinel-2 will also deliver information for
emergency services. The first Sentinel-2 satellite is planned for launch in 2015.
Sentinel-3 will provide high-accuracy optical, radar and altimetry data for marine and land services. It will measure
variables such as sea-surface topography, sea- and land-surface temperature, ocean colour and land colour with high-end
accuracy and reliability. The first Sentinel-3 satellite is planned for launch in 2015.
Sentinel-5 Precursor is a satellite mission planned to launch in 2015 in order to reduce data gaps between Envisat and
Sentinel-5. (This mission is not to be counted under the Sentinel deployment, but will be an expenditure-related output
for 2015).
The other Sentinels no. 4 and 6 will be deployed after 2015.
Specific Objective 3: Providing a sustainable and reliable access to in-situ data, relying, in particular, on existing
capacities operated at European and national levels, and on global observation systems and networks
Indicator 1: Sustained availability of in-situ data for supporting Copernicus services
Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
Number of
2
4
6
6
6
Services receiving in-situ data
2019
Target
2020
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
Products supplied operationally in response to user requirements in service
component Emergency Mapping Service, European Flood Alert
system, Pan-European Land Cover, EU local land, Global land,
Access to reference data
Cross-cutting support activities and ramp-up phase of additional service
components
Total
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Number EUR million
02 06 01
29,8
02 06 01
92,6
14
122,4
The number quoted refers to the number of service components which produce operational geo-information products, or are receiving crosscutting support activities. Service components are defined in the Copernicus Work Programme and multi-annual implementation plan, and
are listed above under section 3.3.
Modes of implementation
The Copernicus services will consist of 6 thematic services as outlined in Art.5 of EU Regulation 377/2014. On 1
December 2014, the Commission and the European Environment Agency signed a delegation agreement. It covers Land
Monitoring, and reference data/in-situ data coordination. About 87 million for the period 2014-2020 will be entrusted
with the EEA to support the implementation of the Copernicus Land Monitoring Service. The latter will provide users in
the field of environment and other terrestrial applications with high quality information based on space data combined
with other sources of in-situ data. Moreover, it addresses the data and information needs of a wide range of policies,
such as environment, agriculture, regional planning, transport, energy, as well as climate change, at a European level.
For Copernicus Services, further delegation agreements have been signed with the European Medium-Range Weather
Forecasting Centre (covering Atmospheric Monitoring and Climate Change) and Mercator-Ocan (covering Marine
Environment Monitoring) for the service provision. A further two delegation agreements with the agencies EMSA
(European Maritime Safety Agency) covering Maritime Surveillance Service and FRONTEX (covering Border
Surveillance Service) are still under negotiation.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Nuclear decommissioning assistance programmes in Bulgaria and Slovakia

Lead DG: ENER
1.
Legal Basis
Period of application Reference Amount

(EUR million)
Council Regulation (Euratom) No 1368/2013 of 13 December 2013 on Union

support for the nuclear decommissioning assistance programmes in Bulgaria
and Slovakia, and repealing Regulations (Euratom) No 549/2007 and
(Euratom) No 647/2010
2014
Total
2.
2015
69,7
69,7
2014 - 2020

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
71,1
71,1
72,6
72,6
74,0
74,0
75,5
75,5
77,0
77,0
518,4
2020
78,5
78,5
Total
518,4
518,4
2014
Impl.
PA
Rate
69,737 100,00 %
0,141
CA
69,737 100,00 %
0,141
Impl.
Rate
0,00 %
0,00 %
CA
71,131
71,131
2015
Impl.
PA
Rate
0,00 %
p.m.
0,17 %
p.m.
Impl.
Rate
0,00 %
0,00 %
This table includes all authorised appropriations (in EUR million), including assigned revenue; the execution rate is
calculated on 15 April 2015 by comparing the execution of these credits to the voted appropriations (after transfers).
3.
EU added value
The necessity for intervention (subsidiarity) is due to the fact that adequate funds required for continuing safe
decommissioning can currently not be made available through the respective national decommissioning funds. Being
confronted to early closure of their plants, it was not possible for Bulgaria and Slovakia to accumulate sufficient funds
from operation of the plants.
It is therefore in the interests of the Union to provide further financial support for the seamless continuation of
decommissioning in order to reach the end state within the decommissioning process of the concerned nuclear reactor
units, in accordance with their respective decommissioning plans, while keeping the highest level of safety. This will
contribute to provide substantial and durable support for the health of workers and the general public, preventing
environmental degradation and providing for real progress in nuclear safety and security.
No direct contribution
Not applicable
Programme Statement
DB2016
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: To assist the Member States towards the decommissioning end state of Kozloduy units 1 to 4
(Bulgaria) and Bohunice VI units 1 and 2 (Slovakia), whilst maintaining the highest level of safety
Indicator 1: Number of major components and systems dismantled in all the concerned nuclear reactors in
accordance with the respective decommissioning plans
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2007 - 2003
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018 2019
Kozloduy decommissioning programme:
- Preparatory works have started for the
decontamination and dismantling
The planned
activities in turbine halls and auxiliary
completion date
buildings.
for the
- Dismantling of large components and
decommissioning
equipment in the reactor buildings not
of Kozloduy units
yet started.
1 to 4 is 2030.
- Facilities for the treatment and
conditioning of waste are being put in
place.
Bohunice decommissioning programme:
- Dismantling of V1 turbine hall has
The planned
started.
completion dates
- Dismantling of external buildings
for
(Phase 1) has started.
decommissioning
- Preparation of decontamination of V1
of BohuniceV1
primary circuits has started.
units 1 and 2 is
- Stage 1 decommissioning waste
2025.
management has started
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: (Kozloduy) Performing dismantling in the turbine halls of units 1 to 4 and in auxiliary buildings
Indicator 1: Number and type of systems dismantled
Baseline
01/01/2014
Milestones
Target 2020
2014
Total
Decontamination and
turbine hall
dismantling activities
metal
in turbine hall of units
dismantled:
1 and 2 have started
5772 t
2015
2016
2017
2018
Total turbine hall

Dismantling
metal
of building
dismantled:
DGS-1
10689 t
2019
Units 1 to 4
turbine hall fully
dismantled
Units 1 to 4
turbine hall metal
(40400 t)
dismantled

In 2014 the metal dismantled from the Units 1 to 4 turbine hall amounted to 4854 t, or 84% of the planned value.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 2: (Kozloduy) Dismantling of large components and equipment in the reactor buildings of units 1
to 4
Indicator 1: Number and type of systems and equipment dismantled
Baseline
01/01/2013
Milestones
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Start of
dismantling
activities in
reactor
building
No dismantling
activities started in
reactor building
On-going
dismantling
activities in
reactor
building

Not applicable
Specific Objective 3: (Kozloduy) Safely managing the decommissioning waste in accordance with a detailed waste
management plan
Indicator 1: Quantity and type of safely conditioned waste
Baseline
01/01/2014
2014
Free release of materials
5762 t
(tonne)
Production of
Reinforced Concrete 10 t (raw
Containers (RCC) for
waste)
final disposal
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
11318 t
39285 t
216 t (raw
waste)
Up to 2205
RCC
Quantitative milestones for waste production are fine-tuned in annual work programmes in function of the latest estimations of material
inventories in installations to be dismantled. The values for 2014 and 2015 have been correspondingly updated.

In 2014 the quantity of material released from regulatory control (free release) has reached 4971 t, or 86% of the
planned value.
In 2014 the quantity of conditioned radioactive waste into RCC containers was 10 t, or 100% of the planned value.
Specific Objective 4: (Bohunice) Performing dismantling in the turbine hall and auxiliary buildings of reactor V1
Indicator 1: Number and type of systems dismantled
Baseline
2013
Milestones
2014
Auxiliary
Circuit
Dismantling in the System for
turbine hall and
Secondary
auxiliary buildings Circuit of reactor V1 started Phase 2
100%
dismantled
2015
Electricity production
system
Auxiliary Circuit System
for Secondary Circuit
Electric Power Supply
System
Emergency Electric Power
Supply System
100% dismantled
2016
2017
2018 2019
Secondary
Circuit
Cooling
System
100%
dismantled
Target 2020
Dismantling in
the turbine hall
and auxiliary
buildings of
reactor V1
completed
Programme Statement
DB2016

In 2014 the milestone has been met: Project D3.2 (dismantling of outdoor not contaminated facilities and objects)
was completed as planned.
Specific Objective 5: (Bohunice) Dismantling of large components and equipment in the V1 reactor buildings
Indicator 1: Number and type of systems and equipment dismantled
Baseline
2013
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
Primary Circuit
Equipment
Insulation
dismantled
Reactor core and

ponds defueling
started
2018
2019
Target 2020
Nuclear Steam
Supply System
(NSSS) dismantled
Auxiliary Circuit
System for Primary
Circuit dismantled
Remote
Handled RAW
Storage System
dismantled

In 2014 the milestones have been met: The reactor core and ponds are defueled. Additionally a milestone of 2015
has been slightly anticipated: the 2nd stage licence has been issued end of December 2014.
Specific Objective 6: (Bohunice) Safely managing the decommissioning waste in accordance with a detailed waste
management plan
Indicator 1: The quantity and type of safely conditioned waste
Baseline
01/01/2014
Conventional waste
produced (tonne)
Hazardous waste
produced (tonne)
Radioactive waste
produced (tonne or
Fibre Concrete
Containers)
Milestones
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
18872 t
72061 t
169148 t
182818 t
186465 t
239577 t
362139 t
49 t
183 t
888 t
2088 t
3266 t
4393 t
4912 t
147 FCC
390 FCC
4255 t
4861 t
4861 t
4965 t
5216 t
Quantitative milestones for waste production are fine-tuned in annual work programmes in function of the latest estimations of material
inventories in installations to be dismantled. The values for 2014 and 2015 have been correspondingly updated.

Dismantling includes fragmentation and decontamination of components, and management of materials and radioactive
waste arising from it. The progress of dismantling can be measured by the number and type of systems and equipment
dismantled as well as the quantities of released conventional/hazardous waste and conditioned radioactive waste into
final waste packages. In 2014 the following results were achieved: release of 23151 tonne of conventional waste and 54
tonne of hazardous waste; and conditioning of radioactive waste into 129 final waste packages. Notably the quantity of
radioactive waste containers was below the target value; this is not necessarily a signal of underperformance because it
may result from volume optimisation (good performance) as well as from radiological characterisation (conservative
planning).
Programme Statement
DB2016
Nuclear decommissioning assistance programme in Lithuania

Lead DG: ENER
1.
Legal Basis
COUNCIL REGULATION (EURATOM) No 1369/2013 of 13 December

2013 on Union support for the nuclear decommissioning assistance programme
in Lithuania, and repealing Regulation (EC) No 1990/2006
2014
Total
2.
2015
60,6
60,6
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
450,8

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
61,9
61,9
63,1
63,1
64,4
64,4
65,6
65,6
67,0
67,0
2020
68,3
68,3
Total
450,8
450,8
2014
Impl.
PA
Rate
60,641 100,00 %
p.m.
CA
60,641 100,00 %
p.m.
Impl.
Rate
0,00 %
0,00 %
CA
61,853
61,853
2015
Impl.
PA
Rate
0,00 %
p.m.
0,00 %
p.m.
Impl.
Rate
0,00 %
0,00 %
3.
EU added value
The necessity for intervention (subsidiarity) is due to the fact that adequate funds required for continuing safe
decommissioning can currently not be made available through the respective national decommissioning funds. Being
confronted to early closure of its plant, it was not possible for Lithuania to accumulate sufficient funds from operation of
the plant.
It is therefore in the interests of the Union to provide further financial support for the seamless continuation of
decommissioning in order to reach the end state within the decommissioning process of the concerned nuclear reactor
units, in accordance with their respective decommissioning plans, while keeping the highest level of safety. This will
contribute to provide substantial and durable support for the health of workers and the general public, preventing
environmental degradation and providing for real progress in nuclear safety and security.
Not applicable
Not applicable
Programme Statement
DB2016
General objectives
General Objective 1: To assist Lithuania towards the decommissioning end state of units 1 and 2 of the Ignalina
nuclear power plant
Indicator 1: Number of major components and systems dismantled in all the concerned nuclear reactors in
accordance with the respective decommissioning plans
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2007-2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Ignalina decommissioning programme:
Unit 1 reactor core is defueled, unit 2
reactor core is partially defueled into the
spent fuel ponds.
The planned
The spent fuel ponds in units 1 and 2 are
completion date for
loaded to maximum capacity.
the decommissioning
Facilities for waste management
of Ignalina units 1 to
treatment and storage are being
4 is 2038.
constructed.
Safe maintenance is performed without
incidents.
Start of dismantling works in turbine
hall of unit 1.
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: Defueling of the reactor core of unit 2 and the reactor fuel ponds of units 1 and 2 into the dry
spent fuel storage facility
Indicator 1: Number of unloaded fuel assemblies
Baseline
2013
Unit 1 reactor core
defueled, unit 2
reactor core partially
defueled into the spent
fuel ponds; in the
ponds are used and
unloaded fuel
assemblies
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
2018
2019
Target 2020
Complete defueling
Removal of and transfer of all
spent fuel spent fuel
assemblies assemblies to the
from Unit 2 dry spent fuel
reactor core storage completed
by end 2022
Commissioning
Spent Fuel
Storage Facility
No removal of spent fuel assemblies is planned before the commissioning of the Spent Fuel Storage Facility.
Specific Objective 2: Safely maintaining the reactor units

Indicator 1: Number of registered incidents
Baseline
2013
Safe maintenance
performed without
incidents
2014
0
2015
0
Milestones
2016
2017
0
2018
0
2019
0
Target 2020
No incidents until
complete
defueling of units
1 and 2

The installation has been maintained with the highest level of safety as indicated by the absence of registered incidents in
2014.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 3: Performing dismantling in the turbine hall and other auxiliary buildings and safely managing the
decommissioning waste in accordance with a detailed waste management plan
Indicator 1: Type and number of auxiliary systems dismantled and the quantity and type of safely conditioned waste
Baseline
2013
Dismantled
equipment (tonne)
Primary processed
waste (tonne)
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
5650 t
12669 t
20569 t
40454 t
4700 t
11485 t
17407 t
45000 t
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
Quantitative milestones for waste production are fine-tuned in annual work programmes in function of the latest estimations of material inventories in
installations to be dismantled. The values for 2014 to 2016 have been correspondingly updated.

In 2014 the milestones have been met: 5790 t of equipment has been dismantled and 6250 t of waste has been processed.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Lead DG: RTD
Associated DGs: EAC, CNECT, GROW, MOVE, ENER, HOME, JRC, AGRI
1.
Legal Basis
Regulation (EU) No 1291/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council

of 11 December 2013 establishing Horizon 2020 - the Framework Programme
for Research and Innovation (2014-2020) and repealing Decision No
1982/2006/EC
Council Decision 2013/743/EU of 3 December 2013 establishing the Specific
Programme Implementing Horizon 2020 - The Framework Programme for
Research and Innovation (2014 - 2020)
Executive Agency
Joint undertaking
Other bodies
Total
2.
2014
2015
496,3
7 575,3
99,9
625,2
226,4
9 023,1
513,5
7 575,3
120,2
1 076,7
253,8
9 539,4
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
77 028,3

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
503,6
7 605,2
130,7
916,9
198,2
9 354,6
508,1
8 161,6
141,5
899,5
301,3
10 011,9
513,5
8 827,1
146,1
1 147,4
408,3
11 042,4
523,6
9 848,9
150,7
1 183,3
455,4
12 161,9
2020
536,0
10 701,5
157,1
1 282,9
509,4
13 187,0
Total
3 594,6
60 294,9
946,2
7 132,0
2 352,7
74 320,4
2014
2015
Impl.
PA
Impl.
CA
Impl.
PA
Impl.
Rate
Rate
Rate
Rate
10 111,41 % 2 472,913 137,73 %
10 17,50 % 5 732,919 25,12 %
285,988
179,383
CA
Authorised appropriation excluding 9 484,122 105,05 % 1 887,982 122,57 % 9 622,002 15,93 % 5 086,714 22,09 %
3.
EU added value
In accordance with the principles of subsidiarity and proportionality set out in Article 5 of the Treaty on European
Union, there is compelling evidence that Member States acting alone will not be able to make the required public
intervention in the research domain in terms of achieving an appropriate, "critical mass" level of investment and battling
fragmentation. Horizon 2020 play a central role in the delivery of the Europe 2020 strategy for smart, sustainable and
inclusive growth by providing a common strategic framework for the Union's research and innovation funding, thus
acting as a vehicle for leveraging private investment, creating new job opportunities and ensuring Europe's long-term
sustainable growth and competitiveness. The programme is designed to strengthen the overall research and innovation
framework, coordinate Member States' research efforts and implement cross-border research collaboration, thereby
avoiding duplication and ensuring public financing is used in an optimal way. In addition, Horizon 2020 will enable
continent-wide competition to select the best proposals, thereby raising levels of excellence and providing visibility for
leading research and innovation. Furthermore, it will support trans-national mobility, thereby improving training and
career development for researchers.
Programme Statement
DB2016


Flagship
Innovation Union
Youth on the move
A digital agenda for Europe
Resource efficient Europe
An agenda for new skills and jobs
European platform against poverty
Total
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
4 289,1
197,0
1 768,2
1 099,2
1 089,9
322,5
92,4
8 858,3
DB 2016
(EUR million)
4 147,0
188,7
1 632,0
1 133,5
1 101,0
320,1
88,9
8 611,2
Research and innovation are key factors for "Innovation Union" and other Europe 2020 flagship initiatives, notably for "a
Digital agenda for Europe", "Resource efficient Europe" and "an Industrial policy for the globalisation era", as it is
illustrated in the Table below. As far as this Table is concerned, it should be noted that this budgetary breakdown
exercise regarding the contribution to flagship initiatives implies that each amount has to be allocated on the basis of
exclusivity (i.e. on one flagship only). In this context, the amount per flagship represents a rough estimation and a
simplistic picture of the reality, as many of the 18 specific objectives of this programme contribute simultaneously to
several flagship initiatives.

Budget 2015
(EUR million)
DB 2016
(EUR million)
1. Specific Objective - European Research Council
2. Specific Objective - Future and Emerging Technologies
3. Specific Objective Marie Sklodowska-Curie actions
4. Specific Objective - Research infrastructures
75,2
72,5
5. Specific Objective - Enabling and Industrial Technologies
284,2
144,7
6. Specific Objective Access to risk finance
7. Specific Objective - SMEs
8. Specific Objective - Health
9. Specific Objective - Food
250,0
276,2
10. Specific Objective - Energy
721,7
722,9
11. Specific Objective - Transport
309,9
452,4
Industrial
Leadership
Excellence in
Science
Appropriations
Societal Challenge
Programme Statement
DB2016
123,9
149,4
61,3
Spreading
excellence
and
widening
participation
15. Specific Objective - Spreading excellence and widening

participation
Science
with
and for
society
12. Specific Objective - Resource efficient and climate change

resilient economy
13. Specific Objective - Inclusive, innovative and reflective
European societies
14. Specific Objective - Secure European societies
16. Specific Objective - Science with and for society
7,2
7,4
111,5
79,3
1944,9
1904,8
17. Specific Objective - Non-Nuclear Direct Actions of the Joint

Research Centre
18. Specific Objective - European Institute of Innovation and
Technology
TOTAL
These estimates for 2015 and 2016 have been calculated by applying the climate tracking methodology (0%, 40% and
100%), generally at the level of the specific objectives/challenges. Given that the evaluation process for 2014 calls is still
on-going, only partial information is available at this stage which might facilitate revision of estimates for 2015. For
bottom-up areas of spending (SO1, SO3, SO6, SO7), Research family DGs and related Executive Agencies are
undertaking project level tracking once the actions to be funded have been selected. However, the vast majority of 2014
bottom-up calls have not yet reached this stage. Therefore a provisional estimate of 0% has been attributed for climaterelated expenditure at this stage, which will be adjusted in future exercises once figures from the 2014 calls are available
as guidance.
For programmable areas, estimates for 2015 have been revised to take into account the experience of 2014 in those cases
where enough information is available from finalised calls. For 2016, contribution to climate objectives has been
estimated at the level of specific objectives/challenges by taking into consideration both the past experience of 2014 calls
and the first indications of topics to be included in the Work Programme.
Research family DGs will complement an initial topic level tracking with a project-to-project level tracking where
deemed necessary to refine estimates so as to give an accurate picture of the actual level of climate-related finance on the
basis of the methodology agreed jointly between CLIMA and the Research family. Revised estimates providing more
accurate figures will therefore be provided from next year onwards when the first full tracking results are available for
both programmable and bottom-up parts as described above).
Climate related Objective : To contribute to building a low-carbon, resource-efficient and climate resilient economy
Indicator: Climate-related expenditure
Baseline
2014
New approach1
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
18%
There is no comparable data for this indicator for FP7, therefore no baseline can be provided.
2019
Target 2020
> 35% of the
H2020 budget
Programme Statement
DB2016

Budget 2015
(EUR Million)
DB 2016
(EUR Million)
Societal challenges to secure sufficient supplies of safe and high quality food and
other bio-based products, by developing productive and resource-efficient primary
production systems, fostering related ecosystem services, alongside competitive and
low carbon supply chains
78,2
143,2
Societal challenges to achieve a resource efficient and climate change resilient

economy and a sustainable supply of raw materials
56,6
53,8
Non-Nuclear Direct Actions of the Joint Research Centre to provide customerdriven scientific and technical support to Union policies, while flexibly responding
to new policy demands
3,6
3,7
138,4
200,7
Relevant objective/output
Total
These estimates for 2015 and 2016 have been calculated by applying the biodiversity tracking methodology (0%, 40%
and 100%), generally at the level of the specific objectives/challenges. Given that the evaluation process for 2014 calls is
still on-going, only partial information is available at this stage which might facilitate revision of estimates for 2015.
Estimates for 2015 have been revised to take into account the experience of 2014 in those cases where enough
information is available from finalised calls. For 2016, contribution to biodiversity objectives has been estimated at the
level of specific objectives/challenges by taking into consideration both the past experience of 2014 calls and the first
indications of topics to be included in the Work Programme. Revised estimates providing more accurate figures will be
provided from next year onwards when the first full tracking results are available.
3.2.5 Mandatory target for Horizon 2020
Biodiversity related Objective : To leverage and boost engagement of industry

Indicator: Share of Horizon 2020 funds2 allocated to SMEs; of which share of funds allocated through the SME
instrument*
Baseline
Milestones
Target for
2014
2015 2016 2017
2018 2019 Horizon
2020
5%
SMEs - SME instrument
New approach1
Results
7%
5,4%
20%
SMEs - total
17,2% (June 2013)
Results
20%
19,2%
* FP7 data and implementation have been used as basis to set this indicator's milestones. Therefore, the latter might not
correspond perfectly with current and future results
Total combined budgets of the specific objective "Leadership in enabling and industrial technologies" and all Horizon 2020 specific objectives on
"societal challenges".
Programme Statement
DB2016
General objectives
General Objective 1: to build a society and an economy based on knowledge and innovation across the whole Union,
while contributing to sustainable development
Indicator 1: The Europe 2020 R&D target (3% of GDP)
Baseline
(Eurostat, 2013)
2014
2015
2,02 %
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
3 % of
GDP
2,5 %
Indicator 2: The Europe 2020 innovation headline indicator

Baseline
(2012)
2014
2015
101,63
2016
Milestones
2017
To be defined at a later
stage based on countryspecific progress of
Member States with
respect to the whole of the
indicator and its
components
2018
2019
Target 2020
To be defined at a
later stage based on
country-specific
progress of Member
States with respect to
the whole of the
indicator and its
components
Indicator 3: Share of researchers in the EU active population

Baseline
(Eurostat, 2012)
1,1 %
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
1,21 %
2018
2019
Target 2020
1,33 %
The General Objective contributes to the following Europe 2020 headline targets: By stimulating the generation of more
sustainable growth and the creation of new jobs in the EU, it helps to raise the share of population employed. By
contributing directly to R&D expenditure and leveraging public and private funds towards this sector, it helps raising the
R&D investment in the EU. Finally, in order to promote sustainable development, support is provided to climate change
and energy research. This has an impact on the reduction of emissions, the promotion of renewable energy sources and
the increase of energy efficiency, thus making progress towards the 20/20/20 climate/energy targets.
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: Excellent science - European Research Council (ERC) - strengthening frontier research
Indicator 1: Share of publications from ERC-funded projects which are among the top 1 % highly cited per field of
science
Baseline
Milestones
Target for Horizon
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
20204
New approach1
3
4
1,5
1,8
This figure is relative to the result for 2010 (year of launch of Europe 2020) taken to be a nominal 100.
The reference for this target is the year when the last actions financed under Horizon 2020 will be finished, i.e. several years after the formal end
of the programme in 2020.
Programme Statement
DB2016

DB 2016
Output (no.) EUR million
Output
Budget line 08 02 01 01 (RTD)
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Financial instruments
Experts
Others5
981
1519,3
12,0
Total
of which, Climate-related expenditure
1531,3
0

The reduction related to the EFSI proposal will affect the financial programming and therefore might have an impact on
the number of expenditure related outputs in 2016. However, since the target and milestone for this indicator are
expressed as a relative value, the impact of budget reduction cannot be reflected. Nevertheless, such a reduction might
have an impact on the results of this indicator in absolute terms.
Specific Objective 2: Excellent science - Future and Emerging Technologies - strengthening research in future and
emerging technologies
Indicator 1: Publications in peer-reviewed high impact journals
Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
New approach1
2018
22
2019
25
Target for Horizon 20204

25 publications per
EUR 10 million funding
Indicator 2: Patent applications and patents awarded in Future and Emerging Technologies
Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
New approach1
2018
2019
1

1 patent application per
EUR 10 million funding6

Output
DB 2016
Output (no.)
EUR million

Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
5
6
p.m.
For example: grants to named beneficiaries, Public-Public Partnership based on Article 185 TFEU.
No sufficient amount of meaningful data are expected for "patents awarded" before 2020, because of the time that is needed for a patent to be
awarded.
Programme Statement
Budget line 09 04 01 01 (C-NECT)

Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
Total of the Specific Objective
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Total
55
DB2016
212,8
1,0
213,8
0
55
212,8
1,0
213,8
0

Specific Objective 3: Excellent science - Marie Sklodowska-Curie actions - strengthening skills, training and career
development
Indicator 1: Cross-sector and cross-country circulation of researchers, including PhD candidates (cumulative
number)
Baseline
Milestones7
Target for Horizon
(2007-2013)
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
16 500
25 000
34 000
7 500
43 500
53 500
(~6 000
(~10 000 researchers
researchers
(~17 400
(~21 400
PhD
PhD
(~13 000
(~3 000 PhD
PhD
PhD
candidates) candidates)
PhD
candidates)
candidates)
candidates)
50 000
candidates)
65 000 researchers
researchers
Results
(~25 000 PhD
(~10 000 PhD
candidates)
Provisional:
candidates)
5 000
researchers
(~1 700 PhD
candidates)8
7
8
Cumulative figures based on EU28 budget.

Data to be revised upwards when all calls can be considered (a few are still in the grant preparation phase). Target was for 2014: 7 500 researchers
(~ 3 000 PhD candidates).
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
Budget line 15 03 01 01 (EAC)
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
DB 2016
Output (no.)
EUR million
1 500
737,3
1,6
0
738,9
0
Total

The financial programming for Marie Skodowska-Curie actions has been modified as consequence of the EFSI proposal.
Specific Objective 4: Excellent science - Research infrastructures - strengthening European research infrastructures,
including e-infrastructures
Indicator 1: Number of researchers who have access to research infrastructures through Union support
Milestones
Baseline
(FP7, 2013)
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
22 000
12 000
20 0009
Output
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
10
DB 2016
Output (no.)
EUR million
20
182,7
0,3
0,1
183.1
72,5
10
310
32,5
0,7
64,0
97,2
0
Although the overall budget for research infrastructures has increased in Horizon 2020 compared to FP7, the result for this indicator is expected to
slightly decrease since priority in Horizon 2020 will be given to the new emerging infrastructures as well as to targeting new communities
(starting communities) whose infrastructures are usually not able to provide as large an access as the advanced communities.
Specific Grant Agreements under the GEANT Framework Partnership Agreement (awarded under the Work Programme 2014-2015).
Programme Statement

Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
DB2016
30
310
Total
215,2
1,0
64,1
280,3
72,5

the number of expenditure related outputs in 2016. This reduced budget might have an impact on the results of this
indicator. If necessary, the target and milestone might be revised following the adoption of the Regulation and in the
context of the DB 2017.
Specific Objective 5: Industrial leadership - boosting Europe's industrial leadership through research, technological
development, demonstration and innovation in the following enabling and industrial technologies (information and
communication technologies; nanotechnologies; advanced materials; biotechnology; advanced manufacturing and
processing; space)
Indicator 1: Patent applications and patents awarded in the different enabling and industrial technologies
Milestones
Target for
(sum of all enabling and industrial technologies)
Baseline
4
2014 2015 2016 2017 2018
2019
2020 Horizon 2020
New approach1 (For FP7
Cooperation projects finished
by October 2013: 0,9 patent
ICT
applications per EUR 10
million funding)11
Nanotechnologies, New approach1 (For FP7
advanced materials Cooperation projects finished
and
advanced by January 2015: 2,4 patent
3 patent
manufacturing and applications per EUR 10
applications
processing
million funding)
12
per EUR 10
3
million
funding12
Biotechnology
by January 2015: 3,5 patent
million funding)
Space
11
12

by January 2015: 0 patent
million funding)
This baseline is based on an annual survey conducted by DG CONNECT on FP7 ICT projects finished by October 2013.
The target and the milestone refer to the "Leadership in enabling and industrial technologies" specific objective as a whole (i.e. all six enabling
and industrial technologies). No target has been set for each enabling and industrial technology.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: Share of participating firms introducing innovations new to the company or the market (covering the
period of the project plus three years
Target for Horizon
Milestones
Baseline
20204
2014 2015 2016 2017
2018
2019
New approach1
to be developed14 to be developed13,14
Indicator 3: Number of joint public-private publications
Baseline
2014 2015
2016
New approach1
2017
Milestones
2018
to be developed14
2019
Target for Horizon

20204
to be developed14

DB 2016
Output (no.)
EUR million
Output
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
125
500,4
10
2,0
0,1
Subtotal
Budget line 08 02 07 33 (BBI JU) Support expenditure15
Budget line 08 02 07 34 (BBI JU)15
Grants
Prizes
1 (i.e. 1 subsidy of
Procurement
the Commission to
the JTI)
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
15
23,4
23,4
23,7
350
695,8
12
16,0
6,5
Subtotal
13
14
502,5
99,3
0,3
718,3
No sufficient amount of meaningful data is expected for this indicator before 2020.
Since this is a new indicator and there are currently no comparable data for FP7, the target and the milestone will be established on the basis of the
FP7 ex-post evaluation studies and/or the first project results under H2020 taking into account the redeployment of operational appropriation from
the Horizon 2020 programme to the European Fund for Strategic Investments.
Part of the line is also included under Specific Objective 9.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Budget line 09 04 07 31 (ECSEL JU) Support
expenditure
Budget line 09 04 07 32 (ECSEL JU)
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
the Commission to
the JTI)
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
Budget line 02 04 02 01(GROW)
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5 (Delegation Agreement ESA)
0
1,0
153,1
153,1
0
55
95,5
5,5
0,2
57,2
158,4
21,7
Subtotal
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Contribution to JTIs
530
1291,3
30
23,5
6,8
57,2
177,8
1556,6
144,7
Total

Specific Objective 6: Industrial leadership - enhancing access to risk finance for investing in research and innovation
Indicator 1: Total investments mobilised via debt financing and Venture Capital investments
Baseline
New approach1
16
17
2014
2015
2016
Milestones
2017
8
2018
2019
Target for
Horizon 20204
16,17
EUR 15bn
Based on the current negotiations the contribution from other financial institutions that will be made to the SME initiative, SET Plan, Equity
Facility for R&I, Piloting Co-Investments by Business Angels in Innovative ICT Firms and TTFF is not available. Consequently the figures might
be updated as soon as they are available.
Depending on the demand and the type of operations involved.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: Number of organisations funded and amount of private funds leveraged

Baseline
2014
2015
2016
Number of organisations
funded: New approach1
Amount of private funds
leveraged: New approach1
Milestones
2017
2000 (40% of the
target)
2018
Target for
Horizon 20204
2019
500016,17
EUR 35bn16
15

DB 2016
Output (no.)
EUR million
Output
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Financial instruments DEBT
Financial instruments Equity
Experts
Others5
1
3
2
0,2
271
55,6
0,2
0,4
329,4
0
Total
Specific Objective 7: Industrial leadership - increasing innovation in SMEs

Indicator 1: Share of participating SMEs introducing innovations new to the company or the market (covering the
period of the project plus three years)
Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
New approach1
20%
50 %
Indicator 2: Growth and job creation in participating SMEs

Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
2017
New approach1
2019
Target for Horizon

20204
to be developed14
to be developed14
2018

Output
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Draft Budget 2016

Output (no.)
EUR million
2
0,2
Subtotal
1
32,8
36,0
0
Programme Statement
DB2016
Budget line 02 04 02 03 (GROW)

Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
130
35,5
0,1
Subtotal
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Total
35,6
0
132
37,5
0,2
1,1
32,8
71,6
0

Specific Objective 8: Societal challenges - improving the lifelong health and wellbeing of all
Indicator 1: Publications in peer-reviewed high impact journals in the area of health and wellbeing
Milestones
Baseline
(FP7, January 2015)
2014 2015 2016 2017 2018
2019
On
47,1 publications per EUR 10
On average, 20 per EUR
18
million funding
10million funding19
average,2019
Indicator 2: Patent applications and patents awarded in the area of health and wellbeing
Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015
2016 2017
2018
2019
Cooperation projects finished by
On average, 2 patent
On average
January 2015:1,8 patent
applications
per EUR 10
219
applications per EUR 10 million
million funding6,19
funding)18
Indicator 3: Number of prototypes and testing activities
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
Milestones
2017
2018
New approach1
Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015
2016 2017
2018
New approach1
18
19
2019
to be developed14
2019
to be developed14
Target for Horizon

20204
to be developed14

to be developed14
This figure does not include ICT projects of FP7 and CIP-ICT-PSP. As to publications the estimated baseline for ICT projects in the area of
Health and Well Being is 10 per EUR 10 million funding (the data refer to all journals). As to patents the baseline is 0,4 patents per EUR 10
million funding. These baselines are based on an annual survey conducted by DG CONNECT on FP7 ICT projects finished by October 2013.
The target and the milestone refer to the "societal challenges" specific objectives as a whole. No target has been set for each societal challenge.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
DB 2016
Output (no.)
EUR million

Grants
80
Prizes
Procurement
5
Financial instruments (Infectious Diseases Financing
75
Facility)
Experts
Others5 (e.g. EDCTP)
Subtotal
Budget line 08 02 07 31 (IMI 2JU) Support expenditure
Budget line 08 02 07 32 (IMI 2JU)
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
the Commission to
the JTI)
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
Budget line 09 04 03 01 (CNECT)
Grants
77
Prizes
Procurement
5
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
Grants
157
Prizes
Procurement
10
75
Experts
Others5
Total
327,0
0,5
50,0
1,9
142,2
521,6
0
1,2
197,8
197,8
0
89,4
1,7
0,9
25,3
117,3
0
416,4
2,2
50,0
2,8
167,5
199,0
837,9
0

To be noted that, the change in the "Grants" rubric compared to 2015 [460 down to 328 Mio] is only apparent as the
budget allocated to the European & Developing Countries Clinical Trials Partnership-EDCTP [ 136 Mio] is reported in
"Others". The increase under "Financial instruments" from 2015 to 2016 [14.7 to 49 Mio] is related to the introduction of
the Fast Track to Innovation pilot and the increase under SME topics as the first generation of phase I funded projects
will generate more costly phase II projects.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 9: Societal challenges - securing sufficient supplies of safe, healthy and high quality food and other
bio-based products, by developing productive, sustainable and resource-efficient primary production systems, fostering
related ecosystem services and the recovery of biological diversity, alongside competitive and low-carbon supply,
processing and marketing chains.
Indicator 1: Publications in peer-reviewed high impact journals in the area of food security
Milestones
Baseline
(FP7, January 2015)
2014
2015 2016 2017 2018
2019
On
On average, 20 publications
average, per EUR 10 million
million funding
2019
funding19
Indicator 2: Patent applications and patents awarded in the area of food security
Milestones
2016 2017
Baseline
2014
2015
New approach1 (For FP7 Cooperation
projects finished by January 2015: 1,2
patent applications per EUR 10
million funding)
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
New approach1
2018
2019
On
19 applications per EUR 10
average, 2
million funding6,19
Milestones
2017 2018
2019
Target for Horizon

20204
to be developed14 to be developed14

Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015 2016 2017 2018
2019
1
New approach
to be developed14
Target for Horizon

20204
to be developed14

Output
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
DB 2016
Output (no.)
EUR million
20
1
1
Subtotal
Budget line 08 02 07 33 (BBI JU) Support expenditure20
Budget line 08 02 07 34 (BBI JU)20
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
the Commission to
the JTI)
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
20
135,7
1,8
2,0
0,8
1,6
141,9
56,7
1,6
132,7
132,7
134,3
Programme Statement
DB2016
Budget line 05 09 03 01 (AGRI)

Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Total
70
204,7
8,2
212,9
85,1
90
1
1
6
340,4
1,8
2,0
8,2
0,8
1,6
134,3
489,1
276,1

Specific Objective 10: Societal challenges - making the transition to a reliable, affordable, publicly accepted,
sustainable and competitive energy system, aiming at reducing fossil fuel dependency, in the face of increasingly scarce
resources, increasing energy needs and climate change
Indicator 1: Publications in peer-reviewed high impact journals in the area of secure, clean and efficient energy
Baseline
(FP7, January 2015)
2015
Milestones
2016 2017
2015
Milestones
2016 2017
Target for Horizon

20204
On average, 20
On
publications per
average,2019 EUR 10 million
million funding 21
funding19
Indicator 2: Patent applications and patents awarded in the area of secure, clean and efficient energy
2014
Baseline
2014
New approach (For FP7

Cooperation projects finished by
January 2015: 2,9 patent
applications per EUR 10 million
funding)21
21
2018
2018
2019
2019
On average,
219
Target for Horizon

20204
applications per
EUR 10 million
funding6,19
The common result indicators under the "Societal challenges" are not relevant for the H2020 funds managed by the Directorate-General for
Energy (ENER). The following ENER specific result indicators, agreed with RTD, will be introduced as of 2017 (i.e. once they become relevant
due to the availability of data): Investments triggered by close-to-market projects in the area of Secure, clean and efficient energy. Energy savings
(GWh/year/million) triggered by projects funder under the Energy Efficiency focus area of secure, clean and efficient energy. Smart Cities:
Demonstration and up scaling of major innovative solutions combining energy, transport and ICT technologies that enable cities where they are
demonstrated to outperform EU targets on CO2, use of RES and energy efficiency.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Baseline
New approach
2014
2015
Milestones
2016 2017
2018
1,21
2019
to be
developed14
Target for Horizon

20204
to be developed14

Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2016 2017
2018
Target for Horizon

20204
2019
to be
New approach
to be developed14
developed14
Indicator 5: Share of the overall Energy challenge funds allocated to the following research activities: renewable
energy, end-user energy-efficiency, smart grids and energy storage activities
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015 2016 2017
2018
2019
85%
85%
1
New approach
Results
1,21
91%22
Output
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
DB 2016
Output (no.)
EUR million
65
Subtotal
N/A
Budget line 08 02 07 37 (FCH 2 JU)23 Support expenditure
Budget line 08 02 07 38 (FCH 2 JU)23
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
the Commission to
the JTI)
Experts
5
Others
Subtotal
Budget line 32 04 03 01(ENER)
Grants
110
Prizes
Procurement
30
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
22
23
324,9
1,0
8,1
334,0
334,0
0,3
65,7
65,7
66,0
254,0
30,0
0,5
38,4
322,9
For this calculation, signed grant agreements as well as main-listed proposals have been considered as projects. Analysis for bottom-up topics has
been done at project level. As the counting of FCH has not been clarified in the Declaration, it is counted half for the 85% target. 'Other Actions'
(e.g. procurements, grants to named beneficiaries) are not included in this analysis.
Programme Statement

Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Total
DB2016
322,9
175
578,9
30
30,0
1,5
46,5
66,0
722,9
722,9

the number of expenditure related outputs in 2016.
Specific Objective 11: Societal challenges - achieving a European transport system that is resource-efficient, climateand environmentally-friendly, safe and seamless for the benefit of all citizens, the economy and society
Indicator 1: Publications in peer-reviewed high impact journals in the area of smart, green and integrated transport
Baseline
(FP7, January 2015)
2014
2015
Milestones
2016 2017 2018

million funding
2019
On average, On average, 20 publications

2019
per EUR 10 million funding19
Indicator 2: Patent applications and patents awarded in the area of smart, green and integrated transport
Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
New approach1
(For FP7 Cooperation projects
finished by January 2015: 0,6
million funding)
Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2016 2017 2018
New approach1
2019
On average,
219

million funding6,19

2019
to be
to be developed14
developed14

Baseline
2014
New approach1
2015
Milestones
2016 2017 2018

2019
to be
to be developed14
developed14

Output
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
DB 2016
Output (no.)
EUR million
70
1
1
1
311,0
5,0
5,0
9,6
0,4
Programme Statement
DB2016
Others5
24
Subtotal
Budget line 08 02 07 35 (Clean Sky 2 JU) Support expenditure
Budget line 08 02 07 36 (Clean Sky 2 JU)
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
the Commission to
the JTI)
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
Budget line 08 02 07 37 (FCH 2 JU)24 Support expenditure
Budget line 08 02 07 38 (FCH 2 JU)24
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
the Commission to
the JTI)
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
Budget line 06 03 03 01 (MOVE)
Grants
25
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
Budgetline06 03 07 31 (SESAR 2JU) Support expenditure
N/A
Budget line 06 03 07 32 (SESAR 2JU)
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
the Commission to
the JTI)
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
Budget line 06 03 07 33 (Shift2Rail) Support expenditure
N/A
Budget line 06 03 07 34 (Shift2Rail)
Grants
the Commission to
Prizes
the JTI)
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
331,0
132,4
2,6
Grants
Prizes
420,0
5,0
95
1
194,8
194,8
197,4
0,2
36,5
36,5
36,7
109,0
0,3
109,3
43,7
0
60,0
60,0
24,0
1,6
44,0
44,0
18,2
Programme Statement
DB2016
Procurement
Experts
Others5
1
1
5,0
9,6
0,7
339,7
780
452,4
Total
Specific Objective 12: Societal challenges - achieving a resource - and water - efficient and climate change resilient
economy and society, protection and sustainable management of natural resources and ecosystems and a sustainable
supply and use of raw materials, in order to meet the needs of a growing global population within the sustainable limits
of the planet's natural resources and ecosystems
Indicator 1: Publications in peer-reviewed high impact journals in the area of climate action, resource efficiency
and raw materials
Milestones
Baseline
(FP7, January 2015)
2014 2015 2016 2017 2018
2019
On average, 20
23 publications per EUR 10
On average, 2019 publications per EUR 10
million funding
million funding19
Indicator 2: Patent applications and patents awarded in the area of climate action, resource efficiency and raw
materials
Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015
2016 2017 2018
2019
New approach1
(For FP7 Cooperation projects
finished by January 2015:0,3
On average 219
million funding6,19
million funding)
Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015 2016 2017 2018
2019
New approach1
to be developed14
to be developed14
Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015 2016 2017 2018
2019
New approach1
to be developed14
to be developed14
DB 2016
Output
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Output (no.)
EUR million
31
281,6
Subtotal
0,2
1,5
283,3
Programme Statement

Budget line 02 04 03 01 (GROW)
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
DB2016
149,4
17
72,9
1,5
0,1
0,2
74,7
0
48
352,5
4,4
0,2
0,9
358,0
149,4
Others5
Total

Specific Objective 13: Societal challenges - fostering a greater understanding of Europe, provide solutions and support
inclusive, innovative and reflective European societies in a context of unprecedented transformations and growing
global interdependencies
Indicator 1: Publications in peer-reviewed high impact journals in the area of inclusive, innovative and reflective
societies
Milestones
Baseline
Target for Horizon
(January 2015)
20204
2014 2015 2016 2017 2018
2019
19
On average, 20
On average, 20
publications per EUR
8,1 publications per EUR 10 million
10 million
funding 25
funding19Error! Bookmark
not defined.
Indicator 2: Patent applications and patents awarded in the area of inclusive, innovative and reflective societies
Milestones
Baseline
Target for Horizon
20204
2014 2015 2016 2017 2018
2019
Not applicable (Based on the experience
from the implementation of FP7, no
patent applications and therefore no
patents awarded are expected under this
Specific Objective).
Baseline
New approach1
25
Milestones
2014 2015 2016 2017 2018
2019
to be developed14
Target for Horizon

20204
to be developed14
inclusive, innovative and reflective societies is 12 per EUR 10 million funding (the data refer to all journals). This baseline is based on an annual
survey conducted by DG CONNECT on FP7 ICT projects finished by October 2013.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Milestones
2014 2015 2016 2017 2018
Baseline
New approach1
2019
to be developed14
Target for Horizon

20204
to be developed14

Output
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5 (COST Contribution)
Subtotal
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Total
DB 2016
Output (no.)
EUR million
32
3
8
77,4
2,1
7,0
1,0
24,4
111,9
0
22
32,4
1,0
0,3
2,6
36,3
0
54
3
11
109,8
2,1
8,0
1,3
27,0
148,2
0

Specific Objective 14: Societal challenges - fostering secure European societies in a context of unprecedented
transformations and growing global interdependencies and threats, while strengthening the European culture of freedom
and justice
Indicator 1: Publications in peer-reviewed high impact journals in the area of secure societies
Milestones
Baseline
(FP7, February 2015) 2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
On average, 20 per EUR 10
326 per EUR 10
On average, 2019
million funding19
million funding
26
secure societies is 8 per EUR 10 million funding (the data refer to all journals). As to patents the baseline is 0.8 patents per EUR 10 million
funding. These baselines are based on an annual survey conducted by DG CONNECT on FP7 ICT projects finished by October 2013.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: Patent applications and patents awarded in the area of secure societies
Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
New approach1
On average 219

Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
1
New approach
Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
New approach1
2019
to be developed14

On average, 2 per EUR 10
million funding 6,19
to be developed14
2019
to be developed14
to be developed14

Output
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
Budget line 18 05 03 01 (HOME)
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Total
DB 2016
Output (no.)
EUR million
30
44,8
0,4
0,3
45,5
0
56
132,0
1,0
0,5
1,5
135,0
0
86
177,1
1,4
0,8
1,5
180,8
0

Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 15: Spreading excellence and widening participation - fully exploiting the potential of Europe's
talent pool and to ensure that the benefits of an innovation-led economy are both maximised and widely distributed
across the Union in accordance with the principle of excellence
Indicator 1: Evolution of the publications in high impact journals in the relevant research fields
Milestones
Target for Horizon
Baseline
20204
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
to be
developed14Error!
1
New approach
to be developed14
Bookmark not
defined.
Output
Budget line 08 02 04 (RTD)
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5 (WIRE, COST JPI UE)
Output (no.)
DB 2016
EUR million
77,5
0,03
0,1
18,6
96,2
0
Subtotal

Specific Objective 16: Science with and for society - building effective cooperation between science and society, to
recruit new talent for science and to pair scientific excellence with social awareness and responsibility
Indicator 1: Share of research organisations funded implementing actions to promote Responsible Research and
Innovation
Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
to be developed14Error!
New approach1
to be developed14
Bookmark not defined.

Output
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Output (no.)
DB 2016
EUR million
15
42,4
6,5
Subtotal
0,6
3,8
53,3
0
Programme Statement
DB2016

Specific Objective 17: Non-Nuclear Direct Actions of the Joint Research Centre - providing customer-driven scientific
and technical support to Union policies, while flexibly responding to new policy demands
Indicator 1: Number of occurrences of tangible specific impacts on European policies resulting from technical and
scientific support provided by the Joint Research Centre
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
(2013)
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2155
22010
248
Results
23015
(*) 275
(*) Policy support impact indicators count cases where JRC's support becomes part or even the basis of European policy, i.e. cases where JRCs work
helped putting Commission priorities on a solid and robust scientific evidence base. Impacts are identified in the JRC's annual evaluation exercise
performed by an internal peer group of experts on the basis of an ISO certified evaluation methodology.
Indicator 2: Number of peer reviewed publications in high impact journals

Baseline
(average 2010 2013)
2014
46010
460
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
47015
Results
2018
Target 2020
2019
48020
(*) 465
(*) Scientific productivity indicators count the peer-reviewed articles published within a given year in (i) journals included in the ISI Science Citation
Index Expanded (SCI-e) and/or Social Science Citation Index (SSCI); and (ii) in conference proceedings published in the ISI Science Citation Index
Expanded and/or Social Science Citation Index. This indicator reflects the degree to which JRC publishes the results of its research.

Output
Budget line 10 02 01 (JRC)
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others
Policy support deliverables
Total
Output (no.)
DB 2016
EUR million
(*) 1200
(*) 1200
24,6
24,6
7,4
(*) The above value corresponds to the number of policy support deliverables (for non-nuclear actions) from the JRC's Multi-annual Work Programme
2015-2016, which are planned to be released by the JRC in the course of 2016 as a result of its direct research activities. These products and services
for EU policy makers refer to scientific and policy reports, reference materials, validated methods, technical systems, scientific information systems,
databases, etc. The EU added value of JRCs policy support work has been embodied by 1316 policy support deliverables (outputs) released by the
JRC in 2014. The JRC's Multi-annual Work Programme is a rolling work programme, reflecting Commission needs. In this sense, the number of
planned deliverables from the work programme is subject to change, since they will have to take into account forthcoming requests from the
Commission. Moreover, as indicated hereafter, the reduction in the financial programming might have an impact on the number of expenditure related
outputs in 2016.

the results of the above indicators. If necessary, the target and milestone might be revised following the adoption of the
Regulation and in the context of the DB 2017.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 18: The European Institute of Innovation and Technology - integrating the knowledge triangle of
higher education, research and innovation and thus to reinforce the Union's innovation capacity and address societal
challenges
Indicator 1: organisations from universities, business and research integrated in the Knowledge and Innovation
Communities (KICs)
Baseline
Milestones27
Target for Horizon
(2010-2012)
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
202028
600
240
450
500
(revised)
200
540
Results
(with 3 KICs)
240
Indicator 2: collaboration inside the knowledge triangle leading to the development of innovative products, services
and processes
Milestones29
Baseline
Target 202028
(2010-2012)
2014
2015
2016
2017
30
280
33 start-ups and
spin-offs
400
500 (revised)
600 start-ups and spinoffs
Results
150
Milestones29
300
800
210 innovations
1500
2200
6 000 innovations
Results
300

Output
Budget line 15 03 05 (EAC)
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others5
Subtotal
DB 2016
Output (no.)
EUR million
1 EU Subsidy
40%
198.2
198.2
79,3

The financial programming for the European Institute of Innovation and Technology has been modified as consequence
of the EFSI proposal. The initial number foreseen for the performance information has been revised in order to reflect the
inclusion of additional KICs.
27
28
29
Annual figure.
Target and milestones were revised. The initial number foreseen for the performance information has been revised in order to reflect the inclusion
of additional KICs.
Cumulative figure.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Expenditure related outputs not linked to a specific objective

DB 2016
Output (no.)
EUR million
Output
Grants
Prizes
Procurement
Experts
Others (e.g. Dissemination and EMPIR)
Total
54,7
54,5
109,2
General Justification of changes to the performance information of H2020 programme

On the 26th of November 2014 the Commission proposed "An Investment Plan for Europe" aiming at the mobilisation of
at least EUR 315 billion in additional investments over the next three years. The legislative proposal (COM (2015)10
final) for the establishment of the European Fund for Strategic Investments (EFSI) was adopted by the Commission on
the13th of January 2015. It foresees EUR 2.7 billion transfers from the Horizon 2020 Programme for the provisioning of
the guarantee fund over the period 2015-2020. This reduction will affect the financial programming and might have an
impact on the number of expenditure related outputs in 2016. Moreover, it might affect milestones and targets set for
specific objectives as highlighted in the justification under each specific objective.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Euratom Research and Training Programme

Lead DG: RTD
Associated DGs: JRC
1.
Legal Basis
Council Regulation (Euratom) No 1314/2013 of 16 December 2013 on the

Research and Training Programme of the European Atomic Energy
Community (2014-2018) complementing the Horizon 2020 Framework
Programme for Research and Innovation
2014
Total
2.
2015
115,8
169,0
284,8
114,7
187,4
302,1
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2018
1 603,3

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
114,7
202,0
316,7
115,1
226,1
341,2
115,6
240,4
356,0
2020
Total
576,0
1 024,9
1 600,9
2014
2015
Impl.
PA
Impl.
CA
Impl.
PA
Impl.
Rate
Rate
Rate
Rate
350,916 120,56 % 281,582 115,03 % 311,032 60,99 % 336,202 27,72 %
CA
292,122 102,05 % 222,590 93,49 % 304,056 60,69 % 323,056 24,81 %
3.
EU added value
The Euratom Research and Training Programme (2014-18) complements Horizon 2020 in the field of nuclear research
and training. The Euratom programme firmly focuses on the continuous improvement of nuclear safety and radiation
protection in all areas of application. It involves the promotion of scientific and technological breakthroughs in this
domain through the support to collaborative pan-European research and innovation actions and the maintenance and
further development of the necessary skills and competences at all levels, i.e. the development of a safety culture,
through dedicated training and knowledge management and transfer activities. Importantly in this respect, the Euratom
Programme supports Research and Innovation pillar of the Energy Union, one of the main objectives of the current
Commission.
In short term, Euratom fission research supports this objective by enhancing the safety record and improving the
sustainability of nuclear energy, which provides 27% of electricity in the EU and is the main low-carbon base load power
source in the European grid. Euratom research may also play a role in the security of energy supply at EU level, through
dedicated RTD work on the diversification of fuel sources, notably regarding pressurised reactors of Russian origin
operating in the EU, and on the possible optimisation of the use of resources through further investigation of the safety
and feasibility of closed fuel cycle options.
In the long term, both Euratom fission and fusion research can support the decarbonisation of the energy system by
developing magnetic confinement fusion and by improving safety aspects of new fission technologies. One of the key
actions is research to support successful ITER operation. Without such efforts from the Euratom Programme, which
include ensuring that Europe is in a position to exploit the results from ITER in order to progress to the next stage of
electricity generation from a DEMO device, the investment in ITER would be jeopardised and the opportunity of fusion
energy could be lost.
Programme Statement
DB2016
By supporting 'state of the art' fission and fusion research and facilitating transfer of technologies to industry, the
Euratom Programme contributes to the broad competitiveness and innovation objectives set out in the Europe 2020
Strategy.
The Euratom Programme for direct actions, implemented by the Joint Research Centre (JRC), provides clear added value
because of its unique European dimension. It will notably contribute to the nuclear safety research needed for safe, secure
and peaceful use of nuclear energy and other non-fission applications. The JRC will provide a scientific basis for the
relevant Union policies and, where necessary, react within the limits of its mission and competence to nuclear events,
incidents and accidents. To that effect, the JRC will carry out research and assessments provide references and standards
and deliver dedicated training and education. Synergies with relevant cross-cutting initiatives will be sought as
appropriate, with the aim of optimizing human and financial resources and to avoid duplication of nuclear research and
development in the European Union. The JRC activities in these areas will be conducted taking into account relevant
initiatives at the regional, Member State or at European Union level, within the perspective of shaping the European
Research Area.
The Euratom Programme is clearly linked to the objectives of Europe 2020 and Energy 2020 strategies. The programme
will contribute to the Innovation Union flagship initiative by supporting pre-commercial and policy-relevant research and
facilitating technology transfer between academia and industry. By putting some emphasis on training in all its activities,
boosting safety and sustainability in the existing nuclear industry and creating a new sector of high-tech industry for
fusion energy in particular, the Euratom Programme will lead to growth and new jobs in a wide range of disciplines.


Flagship
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
187,4
Innovation Union
DB 2016
(EUR million)
202,0
Not applicable
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: to pursue nuclear research and training activities with an emphasis on continuous improvement
of nuclear safety, security and radiation protection, notably to potentially contribute to the long-term decarbonisation of
the energy system in a safe, efficient and secure way
Indicator 1: Reduction of greenhouse gas emissions at EU level compared to 1990
Baseline
2012
18 %
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
1
20 %
2018
2019
Target 20201
21 %
COM(2014) 689. To be updated in the Communication from the Commission on preparing a review of the Europe 2020 strategy for smart,
sustainable and inclusive growth, expected to be adopted by end 2015.
Programme Statement
4.
DB2016
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: to support safety of nuclear systems

Indicator 1: The number of projects (joint research and/or coordinated actions) likely to lead to a demonstrable
improvement in nuclear safety practice in Europe
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2018
Euratom, 2007-2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
41
7
142(cumulative indicator)
Specific Objective 2: to contribute to the development of solutions for the management of ultimate nuclear waste
Indicator 1: The number of projects contributing to the development of safe long term solutions for the
management of ultimate nuclear waste
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2018
Euratom, 2007-2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
15
5
82 (cumulative indicator)
Specific Objective 3: to support the development and sustainability of nuclear competences at Union level
Indicator 1: Training through research - the number of PhD students and postdoctoral researchers supported
through the Euratom fission projects
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2018
Euratom, 2007-2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
1 000 (cumulative
200
500
indicator)
Indicator 2: The number of fellows and trainees in the Euratom fusion programme
Baseline
Euratom, 2007-2013
27
Milestones
2014
2015
2016
2017
303
Target 2018
50 (average per year)
Specific Objective 4: to support radiation protection and development of medical applications of radiation, including
the secure and safe supply and use of radioisotopes
Indicator 1: The number of projects likely to have a demonstrable impact on regulatory practice regarding radiation
protection and on development of medical applications of radiation
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2018
Euratom, 2007-2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
33
2
3
4
15
254
The target figure is lower compared to the baseline due to the larger average size of the projects expected in the Euratom Framework Programme
(2014-2018).
The 2015 milestone for this indicator has been reduced due to the budgetary provisions of the co-fund grant agreement with the EUROfusion
consortium.
Projects to be launched within the European Joint Programme co-fund actions concerning radiation protection.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 5: to move towards demonstration of feasibility of fusion as a power source by exploiting existing
and future fusion facilities
Indicator 1: The number of publications in peer-reviewed high impact journals
Baseline
20105
2014
Milestones
2015
800
2016
800
2017
800
Target 2018
8006 (average per year)
Specific Objective 6: to lay the foundations for future fusion power plants by developing materials, technologies and
conceptual design
Indicator 1: The percentage of the Fusion Roadmap's milestones established for a period 2014-2018 reached by the
Euratom Programme
Milestones7
Baseline
Target 2018
2014
2015
2016
2017
13%
31%
54%
75%
90 %
New approach8
Results
10%

The reporting period 2014 for the EURO fusion grant agreement only ends end of February and therefore only estimates
on the achievements of Milestones can be given by end of the first semester of 2015. There was a mismatch of the
Milestones due in 2014 with respect to the total number of Milestones (13% instead of 16%) only 9 out of 68
Milestones were due end of 2014. It is estimated that about 75% of these 9 Milestones are completed right now, which
gives 10% of the total of Milestones.
Specific Objective 7: to promote innovation and industrial competitiveness

Indicator 1: The number of spin-offs from the fusion research under Euratom Programme
Baseline9
Euratom, 2007-2013
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
Target 2018
4
5
10 (cumulative indicator)
Indicator 2: The patents applications generated and patents awarded on the basis of research activities supported by
the Euratom Programme (average number per year)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2018
Euratom, 2007-2010
2014
2015
2016
2017
3
3
4
4 patent applications10
5
6
7
8
9
10
Data from the Horizon 2020 impact assessment, SEC(2011)1427, Annex 6, page 84.
With the Euratom fusion programme's emphasis in Horizon 2020 shifting from research to technology development, this target could be lower
than expected.
Milestones have been defined in the co-fund grant agreement with the EUROfusion consortium.
Fusion roadmap was adopted by the members of the European Fusion Development Agreement (EFDA) in 2012.
Spin-offs are defined as technology transfers from the research programme. In fusion research technology transfer in previous years has already
contributed to many spin-off enterprises in areas such as high-heat flux components, super conducting magnets for medical imaging systems
(MRI), high power industrial microwaves, plasma physics software and diagnostics adaptations for semiconductor and thin-film fabrication, new
high tech textile weaving equipment and carbon-composite materials.
No sufficient amount of meaningful data are expected for "patents awarded" before 2020, because of the time that is needed for a patent to be
awarded.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 8: to ensure availability and use of research infrastructures of pan-European relevance
Indicator 1: The number of researchers having access to research infrastructures through Euratom Programme
support
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2018
2008
2014
2015
2016
2017
800
1 200
Ca. 80011
Expenditure related outputs for all specific objectives for indirect actions RTD
Output
Budget line
Output EURATOM Fission

Output EURATOM Fusion
08 03 01 02
08 03 01 01
Total
Outputs
Output EURATOM
Fission
Output EURATOM
Fusion
F
P
F
P
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
7
2
9

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
13
25
25
25
25
14
2
0
2
2
2
2
59,1
132,3
191,4
Total
113
8

In 2014 two major grant agreements have been signed for supporting fusion research a Co-Fund Grant Agreement with
the EUROfusion: the consortium establishing a European Joint Programme in Fusion Research and the New JET
Operation Contract with the Culham Centre for Fusion Energy (CCFE). For both grant agreements the Commission
decision adopting the Euratom Work Programme 2014-2015 constituted a full 5-year financing decision. For 2015 no
new contract is foreseen. For the years 2016-2018, the goal would be to complement the on-going European Joint
Programme in some selected areas such as materials, infrastructures, and international cooperation through a range of
instruments, including prizes.
Specific Objective 9: to improve nuclear safety including: nuclear reactor and fuel safety, waste management,
decommissioning, and emergency preparedness
Indicator 1: JRC policy support indicator - The number of occurrences of tangible specific impacts on Union
policies resulting from technical and scientific policy support provided by the JRC
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2018
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
121
13
Results
122
(*) 14
(*) Policy support impact indicators count cases where JRC's support becomes part or even the basis of European policy, i.e. cases where JRCs work
helped putting Commission priorities on a solid and robust scientific evidence base. Impacts are identified in the JRC's annual evaluation exercise
performed by an internal peer group of experts on the basis of an ISO certified evaluation methodology.
11
2008 figure concerns researchers using mobility scheme under Fusion Programme. Target and milestones are based on the assumption that
exploitation of Joint European Torus (JET) will continue until 2018.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: The number of peer reviewed publications

Baseline
(average 2010 2013)
2014
72
Milestones
2015
2016
724
Results
2017
Target 2018
728
(*) 90
(*) Scientific productivity indicators count the peer-reviewed articles published within a given year in (i) journals included in the ISI Science Citation
Index Expanded (SCI-e) and/or Social Science Citation Index (SSCI); and (ii) in conference proceedings published in the ISI Science Citation Index
Expanded and/or Social Science Citation Index. This indicator reflects the degree to which JRC publishes the results of its research.
Specific Objective 10: to improve nuclear security including: nuclear safeguards, non-proliferation, combating illicit
trafficking, and nuclear forensics
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2018
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
141
15
Results
142
(*) 16
(*) For additional details on policy support impact indicators, please refer to note on Specific Objective 9.

Baseline
(average 2010 2013)
2014
16
Milestones
2015
2016
161
Results
2017
Target 2018
162
(*) 20
(*) For additional details on scientific productivity indicators, please refer to note on Specific Objective 9.
Specific Objective 11: to increase excellence in the nuclear science base for standardisation
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2018
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
141
15
Results
142
(*) 10

Baseline
(average 2010 2013)
2014
58
Milestones
2015
2016
584
Results
2017
(*) 118
Target 2018
588
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 12: to foster knowledge management, education and training

Milestones
Baseline
Target 2018
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
121
13
Results
122
(*) 12
Indicator 2: JRC scientific productivity indicator - The number of peer reviewed publications
Baseline
(average 2010 2013)
2014
2015
342
35
Milestones
2016
2017
Results
Target 2018
344
(*) 20
Specific Objective 13: to support the policy of the Union on nuclear safety and security
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2018
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
61
7
Results
61
(*) 11
Indicator 2: JRC scientific productivity indicator - The number of peer reviewed publications
Baseline
2014
Milestones
2015
2016
Not applicable
2017
Results
(*) n/a
(*) No publications are foreseen for this specific objective.
Target 2018
Not applicable
Programme Statement
DB2016
Expenditure related outputs for all specific objectives for direct actions JRC
Output
Budget line
Output EURATOM Direct research- JRC:

Products and services for EU policy makers
Total
10 03 01
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
(*) 370
10,7
10,7

Outputs
Output EURATOM Direct
F
research- JRC:
Products and services for EU policy
P
makers
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
379
(*) 370
(*) 370
37050
37050
Total of
Legal basis
all 5
2014-2018
years
185910
0
750
408
(*) The above values correspond to the number of policy support deliverables (for nuclear actions) from the JRC's Multi-annual Work Programme
2015-2016, which are planned to be released by the JRC as a result of its direct research activities. These products and services for EU policy makers
refer to scientific and policy reports, reference materials, validated methods, technical systems, scientific information systems, databases, etc. The JRC's
Multi-annual Work Programme is a rolling work programme, reflecting Commission needs. In this sense, the number of planned deliverables from the
work programme is subject to change, since they will have to take into account forthcoming requests from the Commission.

The number of foreseen outputs (1859100) has been increased with respect to the figures reported previously during the
preparation of the Euratom programme (750). At that time the estimation of outputs was done on the basis of previous
years (ex-post assessment). With the introduction of the new rolling Work Programme the number of planned outputs can
be counted, ex-ante, from a central registry. Figures for 2017 and 2018 are made up in a format "baseline fluctuation
rate" to account for a number of factors that may influence the production of policy support deliverables.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Programme for the Competitiveness of Enterprises and small and medium-sized

enterprises (COSME)
Lead DG: GROW
1.
Legal Basis

of 11 December 2013 establishing a Programme for the Competitiveness of
Enterprises and small and medium-sized enterprises (COSME) (2014 - 2020)
and repealing Decision No 1639/2006/EC
2014
Executive Agency
Total
2.
2015
4,2
243,4
6,5
254,1
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
2 298,2
Financial Programming
DB2016
2017
2018
3,7
283,4
8,2
295,3
3,8
268,4
8,8
281,0
3,9
286,8
9,3
300,0
4,0
325,4
9,8
339,2
2019
4,1
348,0
9,9
362,0
2020
Total
4,1
27,8
406,4 2 161,8
10,2
62,6
420,8 2 252,2
2014
2015
Impl.
PA
Impl.
CA
Impl.
PA
Impl.
Rate
Rate
Rate
Rate
258,440 101,50 % 99,894 101,12 % 295,887 57,88 % 189,777 28,40 %
CA
254,220 99,98 %
94,318 97,10 % 295,349 57,90 % 185,683 27,86 %
3.
EU added value
The additional value for action at the Union level relies on the following five main sources:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Strengthening the Single Market, by overcoming market fragmentation in areas such as venture capital investment,
cross-border lending and credit enhancement as well as informational and organizational constraints which prevent
SMEs from taking advantage of the opportunities that the Single Market offers.
Demonstration and catalytic effects through the dissemination of industrial and policy best practices.
Economies of scale in areas where it would be difficult for individual Member States to achieve the required critical
mass. For instance, in the field of support to SMEs abroad, European added value is created by the bundling of
national efforts and, by establishing services that would lack critical mass if provided at national level (for example,
through support to IPR enforcement). Union intervention can also contribute to avoid duplication of effort, promote
cooperation between Member States and coordination with relevant non-Member States.
Coherence and consistency in national measures through the exchange of best practices at European level and
benchmarking.
The European Investment Bank (EIB) and the European Investment Fund (EIF) have gained experience in designing
and implementing SME-friendly financing schemes. The Enterprise Europe Network has achieved tangible results
by putting emphasis on promoting the internationalisation of SMEs (in the Internal Market and beyond) through
providing information on Union matters as well as the possibility to feed into the decision making process.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Flagship
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
283,4
DB 2016
(EUR million)
268,4

Budget 2014
(EUR Million)
15,4
5,82
21,22
Enterprise Europe Network
Financial instruments: venture capital
Total
Budget 2015
(EUR Million)
13,3
8,3
21,6
DB 2016
(EUR Million)
13,7
7
20,7
Method of calculation:
For the "miscellaneous actions" in support of competitiveness (less than 20% of the available allocated total budget), it is estimated exante that they do not contribute to climate targets (0% of the budget). However, tracking will be performed at work programme and
project level during the implementation phase and the annual work programme approval, whereby single actions may be identified as
climate-relevant (40% or 100% of the budget will then be accounted for, depending if climate is a main objective or not).In these cases,
specific targets will be included and monitored on climate impacts.
For the Enterprise Europe Network, both ex-ante and ex-post monitoring are and will be performed by querying the existing EEN
"profiles" database, in order to see how many "profiles" relate to climate actions. The ex-ante estimate based on the situation in 2013
shows that 27% of the 60.6 million budget in 2013 is related to climate improvement technologies (according to the OECD
classification of climate technologies).
For the financial instruments (60% of the COSME budget), tracking differs between loan guarantees and venture capital (approximately
50%-50% share). For loan guarantees, it is estimated ex-ante that they do not contribute to climate target.
For venture capital, it is assumed that the same percentage of the budget 2013 is climate-relevant in the following years. This will be
monitored at the appropriate level, with a delay of two years.
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: to strengthen the competitiveness and sustainability of the Union's enterprises, particularly SMEs
Indicator 1: Performance of SMEs as regards sustainability
Baseline
2012
26%*
2014
Share of EU SMEs producing
green products (goods and
services): 2013= 205
Milestones
2015
2016
2017
2018
Target 2020
2019
Increase the share of

Union SME
producing
30
* A new reference baseline will be established in 2016 once data from the Observatory is available
Indicator 2: Changes in unnecessary administrative and regulatory burdens on both new and existing SMEs
Baseline
2012
2014
5.4 working days to set up an 3,5 days

SME and
and EUR
EUR 372 cost of start-up
313
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
4 days
EUR 300
cost of
start-up
2018
Target 2020
2019
Marked reduction of
number of days to
set-up a new SME*
*A 2020 target of 3 days and EUR100 is mentioned in the Industrial Policy Communication COM(2014)14 of 22 January 2014.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 3: Changes in the proportion of SMEs exporting within or outside the Union
Baseline
2009
25% of SMEs export and
13% of SMEs export
outside the Union
2014
2015
2016
Milestones
2017
(*)
2018
29% of SMEs
exporting within
the EU
17.5% of SMEs
exporting outside
the EU
2019
Target 2020
Increase in the share
of SMEs exporting
andincrease in the
share of SMEs
exporting outside
the Union
(*)Up-to-date data will be available by the end of 2015 after publication of the related Eurobaromater survey.
Justification to the performance information

The objectives of COSME and of the Small Business Act (SBA) are aligned and full impacts are reached by the
coordination of spending and policy action. In line with such coordination, the 11% of the COSME budget supports
action to improve the business environment. This is an area where notable results have been achieved under the
Competitiveness and Innovation Framework Programme (CIP). Time, costs and other administrative burdens to start up a
business have steadily decreased, e.g. an estimated overall 40 billion EUR savings for enterprises has been achieved
under the CIP. Action is continued under COSME.
As regards indicator 2 the time to obtain licences to start up a company, the milestone target (2017) has already been
reached in 2014. In 2015, a Flash Eurobarometer Survey will provide additional data on licencing procedures, including
those related to protection of the environment, health and safety which typically represent a challenge for start-ups.
Action will be pursued to reach our 2020 target in this area as the programme is well on track.
General Objective 2: to encourage entrepreneurial culture and to promote the creation and growth of SMEs
Indicator 1: Changes in SME growth: Total EU turnover (Gross Value Added)
Baseline
2010
2014
2015
Annual
increase of
In 2010 SMEs provided
4% in SMEs
4%
more than 58%
Gross ValueAdded (GVA)
Indicator 2: Changes in SME growth: Employees
Milestones
2016
2017
4%
4%
2018
2019
4%
4%
Milestones
Baseline
2010
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
Total number of employees
in SMEs in 2010 = 87.5
million (67% of private
Annual growth
sector jobs in the EU)
of employees
1%
1%
1%
1%
The annual growth of
in SMEs of 1%
employees in SMEs in
2010 was -0.4% and 0.2%
in 2011
Indicator 3: Changes in the proportion of Union citizens who wish to be self-employed
Baseline
2012
37%
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
50%
2019
1%
2019
Target 2020
Increase of SME
output (value added)
Target 2020
Increase of SME
employees
Target 2020
Increase in share of
EU citizens that
would like to be
self-employed
compared to
baseline
Programme Statement
DB2016
Justification of changes to the performance information

It is important to note that since 2008 employment has increased more in SMEs than in larger companies (SMEs account
for 58% of total GVA but create more than 80% of new jobs). However annual growth has been lower than 1%. GVA
and employment indicators have been impacted by the downturn in the construction and manufacturing sectors in
particular. Stronger economic growth will be necessary to reach the milestone target on the employment related
indicators. As underlined in the 2014 Annual Report on European SMEs, heavy focus is needed on improving the
business environment to foster SME growth (please see also general objective 1 under COSME), in particular as regards
better regulation (specific objective 2 under COSME), access to finance (specific objective 1 under COSME) and
innovation in SMEs (specific objective 2 under Horizon 2020).
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: to improve framework conditions for the competitiveness and sustainability of Union enterprises,
particularly SMEs, including in the tourism sector
Indicator 1: Activities to improve competitiveness - Number of simplification measures adopted
Baseline
2013
Milestones
2016
2017
Baseline
2013
Milestones
2016
2017
Target 2020
2014
2015
2018
2019
4 in 2014 (1
postponed
3
At least 7
to early
2015)
Indicator 2: Activities to improve competitiveness - Making the regulatory framework fit for purpose
2014
Delivered in
2014:
Delivered in 2013: 3
1 Fitness Check
Evaluations
2 Cumulative Cost 1
Assessments
Legislative
1 Review
initiative
1 Legislative
2
initiative
Withdrawals
2015
1 Repeal
2 Fitness
checks
4
Evaluations
1
Cumulative
Cost
Assessment
2018
2019
1 Fitness
Check
3 Evaluations
2 Cumulative
Cost
Assessments
Target 2020
20 Fitness Check,
Evaluations,
cumulative Cost
Assessment and
Repeals to be
delivered by 2016
Indicator 3: Activities to improve competitiveness - Number of Member States using the competitiveness proofing test
Baseline
2013
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
Marked increase in
the
number
of
Member States using
the competitiveness
proofing test
Indicator 4: Activities to improve competitiveness - Resource efficiency (which may include energy, materials or
water, recycling, etc.) actions taken by SMEs
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
93% of SMEs are
A milestone
taking at least one
will be
of Union SMEs that
action to be more
defined
are taking at least one
resource efficient,
following the
action to be more
with the most
launch of the
resource efficient
common actions
European
(which may include
being to minimise
Resourceenergy, materials or
waste, save energy
Efficiency
water, recycling, etc.)
(both 67%) and
Excellence
compared to baseline
Number of Member 1 Member
States using the State
competitiveness
(November
proofing test: 0
2014)
7 Member
States by
end 2017
Programme Statement
save materials
(59%). At least
half are also
recycling by
reusing material or
waste within the
company, or by
saving water (both
51%).
DB2016
Centre in
2016
(initial measurement)
of Union SMEs that
are planning to
implement additional
resource efficiency
actions (which may
include energy,
materials or water,
recycling, etc.) every
two years compared
to baseline (initial
measurement)
Eight out of ten

SMEs are planning
additional resource
efficiency actions
in the next two
years, particularly
saving energy
(58%) and
minimising waste
(56%). Almost half
(49%) plan to save
materials, while
43% will save
water and 41% will
recycle within the
company
Indicator 5: Developing SME policy - Number of Member States using SME test
Milestones
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
Around 18
Member
15 MS
States using
19 MS
the SME
test
Indicator 6: Tourism - Participation in transnational cooperation projects
Baseline
2013
Baseline
2011
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
Marked increase in
the number of
Member States using
SME test
2019
Target 2020
Increase in the number

of Member States
4 countries
participating in
3 countries covered per project
5 countries
transnational
per project
(on
per project
cooperation projects
average)
funded by the
Programme
Indicator 7: Tourism - Number of destinations adopting the sustainable tourism development models promoted by
the European Destinations of Excellence
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
More than
More than 200
150
destinations adopting
the sustainable
tourism development
98 (on average 20
119
models promoted by
per year)
the European
Destinations of
Excellence (about 20
every year)
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 8: New Business Concepts - Number of new products/services in the market

Baseline
2014
New indicator
therefore no current
baseline
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
(*)
2018
Target 2020
2019
15
Increase in the
cumulative number of
new products/services
(initial measurement)
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
(*)No data available - monitoring procedures are currently being built up.

Output
Activities to improve European Competitiveness - Studies, impact
assessments, evaluations, conferences
Activities to develop SME policy and promote SMEs
competitiveness - Meetings,reports, databases
Tourism - Projects, prizes, surveys, events
New business concepts for consumer goods - Market replicationtype projects
Total
02 02 01
43
02 02 01
104
4,5
02 02 01
13
02 02 01
169
29,5
Outputs
2014(*) 2015
1.Activities to improve European

Competitiveness - Studies, impact
assessments, evaluations,
conferences
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Total
44
51
55
60
65
70
75
420
102
115
120
122
128
130
132
849
2.Activities to develop SME policy

and promote SMEs competitiveness
-Meetings, reports, databases
3.Tourism - Projects, prizes,

surveys, events
F
P
10
16
16
18
20
22
25
127
4.New business concepts for

consumer goods - Market
replication-type projects
11
12
12
14
15
15
87
(*) Beyond launching financial instruments under COSME, the Commission took action in 2014 to support SMEs' access
to finance, e.g. by monitoring national policies, raising awareness on the Late Payment Directive and disseminating
information on how best using the European Structural and Investment Funds (ESIF) to support SMEs (e.g. brochures for
local administrations, success stories showcased via the Business Planet programme on Euronews).
In addition, several reports on the competitiveness of enterprises across Europe, the SME Performance Review and the
SBA Factsheets have been published.
Finally, under the Green Action Plan for SMEs adopted on 2 July 2014, the Commission announced new specific actions
to be implemented as from 2015 to boost resource efficiency in SMEs, in particular a guide on how to support resource
efficiency in SMEs through ESIF and a resource efficiency self-assessment tool for SMEs which will be used to monitor
the achievement of the related result indicator.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 2: To promote entrepreneurship and entrepreneurial culture

Indicator 1: Number of Member States implementing entrepreneurship solutions based on good practice identified
through the programme
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2010
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Monitoring
under SBA
22
25
All MSs
and European
semester
Indicator 2: Number of Member States implementing entrepreneurship solutions targeting potential, young, new
and female entrepreneurs, as well as other specific target groups
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
1
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
12 Member States in the
European Network of
Mentors for Women
Entrepreneurs
12 MS
6 Member States and 2
New
implementin
regions have a specific
data on
g new
strategy for
entrepre
initiatives in
Entrepreneurship Education
neurship
Marked increase in
this area
10 Member States have
educatio
number of Member
(potential,
incorporated national
n
States
young, new
objectives related to
anticipat
and female
entrepreneurship education
ed in
entrepreneurs
in broader lifelong learning
2015
)
strategies and in 8 Member
States entrepreneurship
strategies are currently
under discussion
Output
Studies, campaigns, events
Number of exchanges
Total
02 02 01
02 02 01
Outputs
1.Studies,campaigns, events
2.Number of exchanges
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
8
3
750
3,6
6,6

2014(*) 2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
F
6
10
11
11
12
12
12
P
F
663
800 1 241 1 398
1 635 1 806
1 993
P
Total
74
9 536
(*)Measuring entrepreneurship inclination is challenging. The indicator measuring how many Member States implement entrepreneurship solutions
may vary over time, even within one Member State. Besides, many other possible indicators are not practically feasible to measure. Nevertheless, the
SBA Performance Review demonstrated that the 2013 publication of the Entrepreneurship 2020 Action Plan struck a chord with virtually all Member
States and that implementation of its many recommendations continues apace. It is why number of more specific conferences and labs were held in
2014 and are planned for the years ahead. In each case the findings are/will be as widely disseminated as possible and used as the basis for policy
recommendations at both national and European level.
The main focus of EU action in entrepreneurship is on support to entrepreneurship education, as this is one of the areas showing the best return on
investment and on Erasmus for Young Entrepreneurs (EYE). This programme gives new entrepreneurs know-how on starting and running a
business through exchanges with experienced entrepreneurs in another Member State. It offers a unique opportunity for cross-border mobility
with the goal of strengthening the business skills and knowledge of both new and experienced entrepreneurs. EYE has been evaluated positively
in 2014 and is now being ramped up.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 3: to improve access to finance for SMEs in the form of equity and debt
Indicator 1: Number of firms benefiting from debt financing
Baseline
2012
2014
As of 31 December
As of 30
2012, 13.4 billion in June 2014,
financing mobilised,
25 billion
reaching 219,000 SMEs in financing
(SMEG)2
mobilised,
reaching
346,000
SMEs
(SME
Guarantee
Facility
under CIP)
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018 2019
Value of financing
mobilised ranging
from 7 billion to
10.5 billion;
number of firms
receiving financing
which benefit from
guarantees from the
programme ranging
from 108,000 to
161,000
Target 2020
Value of financing
mobilised ranging from
14 billion to 21 billion;
number of firms receiving
financing which benefit
from guarantees from the
programme ranging from
220,000 to 330,000
(COSME Loan Guarantee
Facility3 targets)
Indicator 2: Number of venture capital investments from the COSME programme and overall volume invested
Baseline
2012
2014
As of 31 December
As of 30
2012, 2.3 billion in VC September
funding mobilised to
2014, 1.2
289 SMEs (GIF)
billion in
VC funding
As of 30 June 2014,
mobilised to
2.9 billion in VC
over 80
funding mobilised to
SMEs (GIF)
400 SMEs (High
Growth and Innovative As of 31
SME Facility under
December
CIP)4
2014
(Equity
Facility for
Growth
under
COSME)5
Indicator 3: Leverage ratio
Baseline
2012
2014
Disburseme
Leverage ratio for the
nt of
SMEG facility 1:32
financing
Leverage ratio for GIF
will start in
1:6.7
2015
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018 2019
Overall value of VC
investments ranging
from 0.7 billion to
1.1 billion; number
of firms receiving
VC investments
from the Programme
ranging from 100 to
1506
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
Target 2020
Overall value of VC
investments ranging from
2.6 billion to 3.9
billion; number of firms
receiving VC investments
from the Programme
ranging from 360 to 540
(COSME Equity Facility
for Growth7 targets)
2018 2019
Debt instrument 1:20

1:30 Equity
instrument 1:4- 1:6
Target 2020
Debt instrument 1:20
1:30
Equity instrument 1:41:68
Latest EIF quarterly report issued on 30 September 2014 for the SME Guarantee Facility (SMEG) under the 2007-2013 Competitiveness and
Innovation Programme (CIP).
The programme will run from 2014 until 2020.
Latest EIF quarterly report issued on 30 September 2014 for the High Growth and Innovative SME Facility (GIF) under the 2007-2013
Competitiveness and Innovation Framework Programme (CIP).
Delegation Agreement signed on 22/07/2014. Call for expression of interest published on 04/08/2014.
These numbers take into account that investing by VC Funds is spread over 4-5 years after commitment.
The programme will run from 2014 until 2020.
EUR 1 from the Union budget will result in EUR 20-30 in financing and EUR 4-6 in equity investments over the lifetime of the COSME
programme.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 4: Additionality of the EFG and LGF

Baseline
2012
Additionality of the
SMEG: 64% of final
beneficiaries indicated
that support was crucial
to find the finance they
needed.
Additionality of the
GIF: 62% of GIF final
beneficiaries indicated
that support was crucial
to find the finance they
needed
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
This
indicator
will be
measured as
part of the
interim and
final
evaluations
of COSME
Target 2020
2018 2019
Share of final
beneficiaries that
consider the EFG or
the LGF to provide
funding that could not
have been obtained by
other means equal to
or higher than the
baseline
Increase in the share of

final beneficiaries that
consider the EFG or the
LGF to provide funding
that could not have been
obtained by other means

Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Budget line
No. of SME beneficiaries (loan guarantees)

Loan volume (EUR million)
No. of SME beneficiaries (VC)
EUR million leveraged (VC)
02 02 02
33 230
2
55
452,28
02 02 02
92,4
71,2
Total
Outputs
1.No. of SME beneficiaries (loan F
guarantees)
P
F
2.Loan volume (EUR million)
P
F
3.No. of SME beneficiaries (VC)
P
F
4.EUR million leveraged (VC)
P
163,6

2014(*) 2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
25 385 33 231 41 077 48 462 57 231
64 615
Total
2020
74 308
344 309
1 650
2 160
2 670
3 150
3 720
4 200
4 830
22 380
41
55
67
81
93
107
122
566
343,8 452,37 555,85

9
670,0
772,0
891,3 1 008,82
4 694,14
(*)According to the 2014 SME Access to Finance Survey, 33% of European SMEs do not manage to get the bank financing they need and 13% of them
were rejected when applying to a bank. The 2014 financial year focused on a smooth transition between the financial instruments under the former
Competitiveness and Innovation Programme (CIP) and the new COSME programme. Financial instruments under the former CIP demonstrated their
European added value over 2007-2013. The financial instruments under COSME were successfully launched in 2014 and there has been a strong
demand from financial intermediaries. Financial intermediaries will now start with providing financing to SMEs which otherwise would not obtain the
financing they need. The programme is well on track to achieve the targets set for financial instruments for the programming period. In November
2014, the Commission presented the new Investment Plan, which foresees that approximately 25% of the investment fund will be used to support risk
finance for SMEs and mid-caps, leading to additional investments of approximately EUR 75 billion.
Specific Objective 4: to improve access to markets, particularly inside the Union but also at global level
Indicator 1: International Industrial Cooperation - Number of cases of improved alignment between Union and
third countries' regulations for industrial products
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018 2019
It is estimated that in
No data
4 relevant areas of
regulatory cooperation available yet
significant alignment
with main trading
3 relevant
of technical
Programme Statement
DB2016
partners (US, Japan,

areas
China, Brazil, Russia,
Canada, India) there is an
average of 2 relevant
areas of significant
alignment of technical
regulations
Indicator 2: Enterprise Europe Network - Number of partnership agreements signed
regulations with main

trading partners (US,
Japan, China, Brazil,
Russia, Canada,
India)
Milestones
Baseline
2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018 2019
2475 (2012)
No data
7 500
2295 (2013)
available yet
Indicator 3: Enterprise Europe Network - Recognition of the Network amongst SME population
Target 2020
2 500/ year
Milestones
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018 2019
Milestone to be
Increase in the
To be measured in 2015determined
recognition of the
2016
once baseline
Network amongst
has been set in
SME population
2015-2016
Indicator 4: Enterprise Europe Network - Clients satisfaction rate (% SMEs stating satisfaction, added-value of
specific service provided by the Network)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018 2019
86% rated services as
No data
80%
>82%
Good/Very good
available yet
Indicator 5: Enterprise Europe Network - Number of SMEs receiving support services
Baseline
Milestones
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018 2019
435,700
(2013)
435 000
1 400 000
500 000/ year
490,000
(2012)
Indicator 6: Enterprise Europe Network - Number of SMEs using digital services (including electronic information
services) provided by the Network
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018 2019
No data
2,3 million SMEs/
2 million SMEs
2,2 million
available yet
year
Baseline
2011

Output
Enterprise Europe Network Partnership proposals
Enterprise Europe Network SMEs receiving support services (per 1000 SMEs)
SME business support in markets outside theEU - Studies
SME business support in markets outside the EU - SME centres; SME helpdesks
SME business support in markets outside the EU - Platforms, events, promotion
activities
International Industrial Cooperation Workshops, meetings
Total
Budget line
02 02 01
02 02 01
02 02 01
02 02 01
02 02 01
02 02 01
Draft Budget 2016

Number EUR million
5798
26,2
419
22,8
12
2,5
6
4,5
7
1,2
1,2
58,4
Programme Statement
Outputs
1.Enterprise Europe Network
Partnership proposals
2.Enterprise Europe Network
SMEs receiving support services
(per 1000 SMEs
3.SME business support in
markets outside the EU - Studies
4.SME business support
inmarkets outside the EU - SME
centres; SME helpdesks
5.SME business support in
markets outside the EU Platforms, events, promotion
activities
6.nternational
Industrial
Cooperation Workshops,
meetings
F
P
F
DB2016

2014(*) 2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
5 697 5 793 5 901
6 041
6 122
6 337
2020
6 576
Total
42 467
403
418
438
458
488
508
539
3 252
10
12
15
14
15
18
20
104
10
11
12
60
10
12
14
67
10
11
12
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
63
(*) 21.5% of the COSME budget is dedicated to access to markets. More than two thirds of the COSME budget for
access to markets will be devoted to the Enterprise Europe Network (EEN), which helps SMEs to internationalise in
particular by finding business and technology partners abroad. In 2013, 2400 SMEs signed such partnerships via the
Network (the figure indicated in the table for 2013 is lower than for 2012 because it is based on intermediary reporting
while the 2012 figure is at year-end).The Network also helps SMEs making the most of the internal market by providing
information, advice and brokerage. 424,000 SMEs benefited from such services in 2013 (the figure in the table is again
lower than for 2012 because based on intermediary reporting).
The Commission considers that the targets of 2,500 agreements and 500,000 SMEs receiving support services per year
will be met
As showed by the final evaluation of the former CIP programme in 2011, the Network is a success. The 2011 evaluation
stated that overall, the Network is perceived by partners, host organisations and clients to work efficiently and to
adequately address the needs of SMEs. The satisfaction rate of SME users of the Network already exceeded the 2020
target in 2013 (86% against 82%). The new generation of the EEN as of 2015 should increase its performance and
benefits for SMEs even further. The EEN call for proposals was successfully completed in 2014 and new Network
organisations were selected to start their activities as of January 2015. The Network will increase its recognition by
SMEs though national and regional promotion (e.g. via the local media channels and social media). It will also reach
more SMEs through joint activities and stronger cooperation with local SME stakeholders. Additionally to the services
already in place, the Network will provide services to increase the innovation management capacity of SMES, including
to the beneficiaries of the SME Instrument in Horizon 2020.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Lead DG: EAC
Associated DG: EMPL
1.
Legal Basis

of 11 December 2013 establishing 'Erasmus+': the Union programme for
education, training, youth and sport and repealing Decisions No
1719/2006/EC, No 1720/2006/EC and No 1298/2008/EC
Executive Agency
Total
Erasmus+ - Contribution from
external
instruments
operational
appropriations
(Heading 4)*
Erasmus+ - Contribution from
external
instruments
to
Executive Agency (Heading 4)*
Total
contribution
from
external instruments (Heading
4)*
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
14 774,5

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2014
2015
2020
10,4
1 525,0
23,4
1 558,8
11,0
1 570,8
26,3
1 608,1
10,4
1 690,8
26,1
1 727,3
11,7
1 975,5
27,0
2 014,2
11,9
2 273,5
27,2
2 312,6
12,1
2 584,4
27,4
2 623,9
12,4
80,0
2 908,5 14 528,5
27,3
184,6
2 948,1 14 793,1
231,9
223,5
247,2
260,0
216,4
228,0
233,7 1 640,7
6,0
5,9
5,7
5,7
5,5
5,4
237,8
229,4
252,9
265,7
222,0
233,4
5,2
Total
39,4
238,9 1 680,1
*Contribution from Partnership Instrument, Development Cooperation Instrument, European Neighbourhood Instrument and
Instrument for Pre-accession Assistance
2.
2014
Impl.
PA
Impl.
CA
Rate
Rate
1 875,524 117,08 % 1 399,015 109,57 % 1 726,962
2015
Impl.
PA
Impl.
Rate
Rate
6,04 % 1 492,830 14,43 %
1 671,795 105,98 % 1 211,045 101,23 % 1 648,312
5,14 % 1 357,022 10,38 %
CA
3.
EU added value
The Programme shall support only those actions and activities which present a potential European added value and which
contribute to the achievement of the general objective. The European added value of the actions and activities of the
Programme shall be ensured in particular through their:
1. transnational character, particularly with regard to mobility and cooperation aimed at achieving a sustainable
systemic impact;
2. complementarity and synergy with other programmes and policies at national, Union and international level;
3. contribution to the effective use of Union transparency and recognition tools.
Programme Statement
DB2016
The share of early school leavers should be under 10% and at least 40% of the younger generation should have a
tertiary degree

Flagship
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
13,2
1 060,1
421,5
1 494,8
Innovation Union
Youth on the move
Total
DB 2016
(EUR million)
36,0
1 141,2
448,7
1 625,9
Not applicable
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: The Programme shall contribute to the achievement of the objectives of the Europe 2020
strategy, including the headline education target; the objectives of the strategic framework for European cooperation in
education and training (''ET 2020''), including the corresponding benchmarks; the sustainable development of partner
countries in the field of higher education; the overall objectives of the renewed framework for European cooperation in
the youth field (2010-2018); the objective of developing the European dimension in sport, in particular grassroots sport,
in line with the Union work plan for sport; and the promotion of European values in accordance with Article 2 of the
Treaty on European Union.
Indicator 1: % of 18-24 year-olds with only lower-secondary education who are not enrolled in education or training
Baseline
2013
Milestones
2016
2014
2015
2017
2018
2019
11,7 %
Latest known situation 12 %
11,4 %
11 % 10,8 % 10,5 % 10,2 %
(expected)
Indicator 2: % 30-34 year-olds with completed tertiary or equivalent education
Target 2020
10 %
Milestones
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Latest know situation 36,9 %
38 %
At least 40 %
Indicator 3: % of higher education graduates who have had a period of higher education-related study or training
(including work placements) abroad
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
In 2010 around 3,6 %
Preliminary results are
of students studied in another
expected by mid-2015
European country.
referring to the academic
17 %
20 %
2011: more than 8 % of
year 2012/13.
students enrolled came from
abroad.
Baseline
2013
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 4: % of 18-34 year-olds with an initial vocational education and training qualification who have had an
initial vocational education and training-related study or training period (including work placements) abroad
Milestones
Target 2020
1
Baseline (2011)
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
First results are expected
by mid-2015 from a pilot
2-3%
4%
6%
data collection carried out
in 2014.
Indicator 5: number of staff supported by the Programme, by country and by sector
Milestones
Baseline
2
3
2013
2015
2016
2017
2014
- higher education (HE): 46
49
50
Number in 1 000
- vocational education and
training (VET): 9
23
11
Number in 1 000
- Schools: 13
21
15
Number in 1 000
- Adult: 2
6
3
Number in 1 000
Milestones
Baseline
5
4
2013
2015
2016
2017
2014
- youth: 22
21
21
22
23
Number in 1 000
Indicator 6: number of participants with special needs or fewer opportunities
2018
Actions managed by National

Agencies (in 1000)
Projects: 11 / organisations:
32
Actions managed by
EACEA (in 1000)
2014
11 32
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
To be
defined
in 2015
Target 2020
70
15
20
5
2018
2019
24
25
Milestones
Baseline
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
6
Special needs (LLP) 8
15
9
Number in 1 000
Fewer opportunities (Youth) 477
21,6
18,7
Number in 1 000
Indicator 7: number and type of organisations and projects, by country and by action
Baseline (2014)
2019
2018
2019
Target 2020
26
Target 2020
40
37
2019
Target 2020
Estimate on available data for annual participation in VET mobility under the Leonardo Da Vinci programme and from certain countries (SWD
SEC (2011) 670 on the development of benchmarks on education and training for employability and on learning mobility).
Reporting on the performance of the programme in a specific year (n) including detailed reports (breakdown) on the indicators annexed to the
basic act will be produced by Q2 of the following year (n+1) and published on the Erasmus+ website.
Planned number of participants - Provisional data at awarded level. Definitive data will be provided based on all National Agency Yearly reports
in the second quarter of the year of writing.
Same comment as for previous output indicator.
3
4
5
6
7
8
Programme Statement
Projects: 0,8 / organisations: 4
4.
DB2016
0,8 - 4
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: to improve the level of key competences and skills, with particular regard to their relevance for
the labour market and their contribution to a cohesive society, in particular through increased opportunities for learning
mobility and through strengthened cooperation between the world of education and training and the world of work;
Indicator 1: % of participants declaring that they have increased their key competences
Milestones
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
81 %9
83 %
85 %
88 %
Indicator 2: The number of pupils, students and trainees participating in the Programme, by country, sector, action
and gender
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
10
2013
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2014
higher education (HE)11:
269
239
248
270
319
356
412
260 (in 1000)
Baseline
(2012)
Vocational education and

training (VET): 41 (in 1000)
104
70
78
80
87
99
121

Output
Individual Mobility of Staff (HE VET - Schools Adult)
Students Mobility HE
Students Mobility VET
Erasmus Mundus Joint Masters
Masters (Student loan guarantee facility)
Operating grants for National Agencies
Total
Outputs
Individual Mobility of
Staff
(HE,VET,Schools,Adult)
Students Mobility HE
Students Mobility VET
Erasmus Mundus Joint
Masters
Masters (Student loan
guarantee facility)
9
10
11
F
P
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
15 02 01 01
15 02 01 01
15 02 01 01
15 02 01 01
15 02 01 01
15 02 01 01
76 326
236 207
81 777
3 400
20 890
55

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
71 541 72 474 76 326 90 191 97 876 113 654 127 947
97,3
481,9
230,9
115,8
54,0
65,0
1 044,9
Total
650 009
99 000*
F 223 857 224 286 236 207 239 142 280 781
P 269 000*
F
77 554 77 650 81 777 87 227 99 328
P 104 000*
F
1 608 2 800
3 400
4 000
4 600
P
2 625
F
10 964 12 764 20 890 27 620 34 660
P
**
309 060 356 074
1 869 407
121 200 130 391
675 127
5 300
5 700
28 425
43 004
50 334
200 236
According to the Erasmus impact study published in September 2014, "81% of Erasmus students perceive an improvement in their transversal
skills when they come back".
HE: higher education (including Joint Master degree and Erasmus+ Student Loans), VET: vocational education and training.
Programme Statement
F
P
Operating grants for

National Agencies
55
55
55
55
55
DB2016
55
55
55
55
* Planned number of participants - Provisional data at awarded level. Definitive data will be provided based on the analysis of all
National Agency Yearly reports in the fourth quarter.
** Establishment of first guarantees planned in 2015
Specific Objective 2: to foster quality improvements, innovation excellence and internationalisation at the level of
education and training institutions, in particular through enhanced transnational cooperation between education and
training providers and other stakeholders;
Indicator 1: The number of users of Euroguidance
Milestones
Baseline (2013)12
2014
(estimated)
2 921 925 hits on

Euroguidance websites
3 561 668 visitors consulted

the Euroguidance Centre's
website
11 411 participants in
Euroguidance
seminars/workshops
7 643 participants in events;
2015 2016
2017
2018 2019
5 million web
visits
Target 2020
Not yet available

(ongoing work by
EACEA).
10 000
participants in
events;

Output
Budget line
Strategic partnerships (School, HE, VET, Adult)

Knowledge alliances/Sector Skills Alliances
Web platforms
Total
Outputs
Strategic partnerships
(School, HE, VET, Adult)
Knowledge alliances/Sector
Skills Alliances
Web platforms
F
P
F
P
F
P
15 02 01 01
15 02 01 01
15 02 01 01
15 02 01 01
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
1 863
42
4

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
1 739 1 780 1 863 3 026 3 545 3 916 4 515
1 263*
13
20
42
48
48
42
28
16
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
281,4
36,0
23,8
341,2
Total
20 384
241
4
* The number of strategic partnerships is lower than foreseen because the average grant size is higher than foreseen. Measures are
being taken to reduce the average grant size in coming years.
Specific Objective 3: to promote the emergence and raise awareness of a European lifelong learning area designed to
complement policy reforms at national level and to support the modernisation of education and training systems, in
particular through enhanced policy cooperation, better use of Union transparency and recognition tools and the
dissemination of good practices;
12
Based on 2013 final reports.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 1: % of participants who have received a certificate, diploma or other kind of formal recognition of their
participation in the Programme
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
HE 100 %
100 %
100 %
100 %
VET 65 %
68 %
70 %
75 %
Output
Budget line
Support for policy reform
15 02 01 01
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
N/A
65,0
The overall responsibility for the programme lies with EAC. As the Erasmus+ programme is an integrated programme,
its efficient implementation requires a close cooperation between EAC and EMPL. This will aim to ensure that the
programme delivers on all its objectives as foreseen by the regulation while reflecting the evolution of the policy context.
DG EMPL is responsible for the definition of priorities for the areas under its remit (vocational education and training,
adult learning, skills and qualifications). EMPL will be in the lead as regards the design of those centralised actions
which impact on these areas and will discuss with EAC proposed changes to the other actions
Specific Objective 4: to enhance the international dimension of education and training, in particular through
cooperation between Union and partner-country institutions in the field of VET and in higher education, by increasing
the attractiveness of European higher education institutions and supporting the Union's external action, including its
development objectives, through the promotion of mobility and cooperation between the Union and partner-country
higher education institutions and targeted capacity-building in partner countries;
Indicator 1: The number of partner country higher education institutions involved in mobility and cooperation
actions
Milestones13
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
14
0
(international
actions
1 000
1 100
1 200
1 300
were only launched at
the end of 2014)
Indicator 2: The number of higher education students receiving support to study in a partner country, as well as the
number of students from a partner country coming to study in a Programme country
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
15
2013
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2014
HE students and staff going
to a partner country
0
3,8
4
4,3
3,6
3
3,9
(in 1 000)
HE students and staff
coming from a partner
0
15
16
17
14
15
15
country (in 1 000)
13
14
15
These figures come from the numbers of non EU HEIs having participated in EM and Tempus from 2009 to 2013.
International actions were only launched at the end of 2014
International actions were only launched at the end of 2014
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
International Student and Staff Mobility
Degree Mobility
International HE Capacity Building
Total
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Heading 416
Heading 417
Heading 418
Heading 4
17 906
280
159
18 345
107,1
25,0
115,1
247,2

Outputs
2014
International Student and Staff

Mobility (credit mobility)
Degree mobility
International HE Capacity Building
2015
2016
F 14 363 15 718 17 906

P
0
F
228
228
280
P
0
F
135
139
159
P
0
Total
2017
2018
2019
2020
19 039
14 972
15 854
16 368
114 220
279
228
238
243
1 724
168
136
143
146
1 026

* Implementation of the actions delayed for the subsequent year due to the late adoption of the legal basis of the external
instruments.
Specific Objective 5: to improve the teaching and learning of languages and to promote the Union's broad linguistic
diversity and intercultural awareness;
Indicator 1: % of participants in long-term mobility declaring that they have increased their language skills
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
201019
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
HE: 94 %
95 %
96 %
98 %
VET: 81 %
87 %
90 %
Specific Objective 6: to promote excellence84%
in teaching and research activities in European integration through the Jean
Monnet activities worldwide
Indicator 1: Number of students receiving training through Jean Monnet activities
Baseline
2007
2014
215 000
120 000
2015
235 000
Milestones
2016
2017
260 000
285 000
2018
310 000
2019
335 000
Target 2020
360 000

Output
Jean Monnet activities
16
17
18
19
Budget line
15 02 02
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
260 000
37,1
Contribution to Erasmus+ coming from the external instruments under heading 4, budget lines 19 05 20; 21 02 20; 22 04 20;
22 02 04 02.
Contribution to Erasmus+ coming from the external instruments under heading 4, budget lines 19 05 20; 21 02 20; 22 04 20.
Contribution to Erasmus+ coming from the external instruments under heading 4, budget lines 19 05 20; 21 02 20; 22 04 20; 22 02 04 02.
In order to compare data, "long-term" mobility is considered here as from 2 months and over across all sectors.
Programme Statement
Outputs
F
P
Jean Monnet activities

(in 1000)
DB2016

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
235
260
285
310
335
360
215
000
000
000
000
000
000
215
Total
2 000
Specific Objective 7: to improve the level of key competences and skills of young people, including those with fewer
opportunities, as well as to promote participation in democratic life in Europe and the labour market, active citizenship,
intercultural dialogue, social inclusion and solidarity, in particular through increased learning mobility opportunities for
young people, those active in youth work or youth organisations and youth leaders, and through strengthened links
between the youth field and the labour market;
Indicator 1: % of participants declaring that they have increased their key competences
Milestones
Target 2020
2016
2017
2018
2019
Youth 75 %
77 %
80 %
Indicator 2: % of participants in voluntary activities declaring that they have increased their language skills
Baseline (2012)
2014
2015
Milestones
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
87 %
90 %
92 %
95 %
Indicator 3: The number of young people engaged in mobility actions supported by the Programme, by country,
action and gender
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2122
23
2012
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2014
Baseline (2010)20
Youth: 59 (in 1000)
77
70
70
77
92
107
124

Output
Participants in Youth Exchanges
Participants in European Voluntary Service projects
Youth workers participating
Total
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
15 02 01 02
15 02 01 02
15 02 01 02
15 02 01 02
62 800
7 200
21 600
91 500
41,4
50,6
16,0
108,0

Outputs
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Total
F
62 400 62 700 62 800 67 900 80 900 94 300 108 700
539 700
P 69 000*
F
7 100 7 200 7 200 9 500 11 300 13 200 15 200
70 700
Participants in European Voluntary
Service projects
P
8 000*
F
21 000 21 300 21 600 22 700 23 800 25 000 26 300
161 700
Youth workers participating
P 21 000*
* Planned number of participants - Provisional data at awarded level. Definitive data will be provided based on the
analysis of all National Agency Yearly reports in the fourth quarter.
Participants in Youth Exchanges
20
21
22
23
In order to compare data, "long-term" mobility is considered here as from 2 months and over across all sectors.
Total of outputs for two actions: Youth exchanges and European Voluntary Service.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 8: to foster quality improvements in youth work, in particular through enhanced cooperation
between organisations in the youth field and/or other stakeholders;
Indicator 1: The number of users of the Eurodesk network
Milestones
Baseline (2013)
2014
2015
2016
2017
140 000 information
140 000
enquiries answered through
140 000
140 000
140 000
(estimated)
the Eurodesk network
Total 2020
2018
2019
140 000
140 000
140 000

Output
Budget line
15 02 01 02
15 02 01 02
15 02 01 02
Web
Total
Outputs
F
P
F
P
Web
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
1 800
1
1 801
37,0
0,6
37,6

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
1 160 1 420 1 800
2040 2 280 2 530 2 760
NA*
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Total
13 990
1
* Not available at application stage, but at the end of each project by the end 2015
Specific Objective 9: to complement policy reforms at local, regional and national level and to support the
development of knowledge and evidence-based youth policy as well as the recognition of non-formal and informal
learning, in particular through enhanced policy cooperation, better use of Union transparency and recognition tools and
the dissemination of good practices;
Indicator 1: % of participants who have received a certificate 'for example a Youthpass', diploma or other kind of
formal recognition of their participation in the Programme
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2010
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
26 %
35 %
45 %
65 %
Output
Structured Dialogue projects
Operating grants to European Youth NGOs
Support to Eurodesk
European Youth Forum
Others
Total
Budget line
15 02 01 02
15 02 01 02
15 02 01 02
15 02 01 02
15 02 01 02
15 02 01 02
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
157
69
35
1
20
282
5,5
3,0
1,8
2,0
6,2
18,5
Programme Statement
Outputs
Structured Dialogue projects
Operating grants to European
Youth NGOs
Support to Eurodesk
European Youth Forum
Others
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
DB2016

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
150
153
157
160
163
166
169
NA*
66
68
69
71
72
73
75
66
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
NA*
Total
1 118
494
35
1
20
Specific Objective 10: to enhance the international dimension of youth activities and the role of youth workers and
organisations as support structures for young people in complementarity with the Union's external action, in particular
through the promotion of mobility and cooperation between the Union and partner-country stakeholders and
international organisations and through targeted capacity-building in partner countries.
Indicator 1: The number of youth organisations from both Programme countries and partner countries involved in
international mobility and cooperation actions
Milestones
Baseline (2011)
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
5 500
5 300
5 600
5 800
6 000
(estimated)
Output
Budget line
Capacity building projects
15 02 01 02
Outputs
F
P
Capacity building projects
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
103
8,6

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
82
95
103
120
138
157
176
NA*
Total
871
Specific Objective 11: to tackle cross-border threats to the integrity of sport, such as doping, match-fixing and
violence, as well as all kinds of intolerance and discrimination;
Indicator 1: % of participants who have used the results of cross-border projects to combat threats to sport
Baseline
2014
Compared with Preparatory
6,6 %
Actions 2009-2013 (36,6 %) (estimated)
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
Target 2020
2019
50 %
75 %

Output
Sport activities
Budget line
15 02 03
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
12
4,8
Programme Statement
DB2016
Outputs
Sport activities
2014
8
2015
8
2016
12
2017
13
2018
18
2019
20
Total
2020
24
103

The indicators for Sport aim at measuring the improvement that the Erasmus+ programme brings in reaching relevant
organisations, compared to the Preparatory Actions in the field of Sport (2009-2013). The baselines are therefore being
computed from the Preparatory Actions in the field of sport. The thematic areas in the Preparatory Actions were different
each year, but correspond for the whole period 2009-2013 to the specific objectives 1.7 to 1.9, which are the Erasmus+
objectives. As soon as information is available over the whole period 2009-2013, baselines will be set using a
comparable annual figure based on the yearly average of the total number of organisations having benefited from funding
over 5 years.
Specific Objective 12: to promote and support good governance in sport and dual careers of athletes;
Indicator 1: % of participants who have used the results of cross-border projects to improve good governance and
dual careers
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
9%
50 %
75 %
Actions 2009-2013 (37,6 %) (estimated)
Output
Draft Budget 2016
Budget line
Sport activities
15.02.03
EUR million
23
9,8
Outputs
F
P
Sport activities
Number
2014
14
2015
16
2016
23
2017
27
2018
35
2019
42
2020
50
Total
207
Specific Objective 13: to promote voluntary activities in sport, together with social inclusion, equal opportunities and
awareness of the importance of health-enhancing physical activity through increased participation in, and equal access
to, sport for all.
Indicator 1: % of participants who have used the results of cross-border projects to enhance social inclusion, equal
opportunities and participation rates
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
50 %
75 %
Actions 2009-2013 (80 %)
Indicator 2: Size of membership of sport organisations applying for, and taking part in, the Programme, by country
24
Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
New EU action25
24
25
Baseline, milestone(s) and target for this indicator will therefore be established across the present programme in 2015 on the basis of data within
applications received in 2014 and within past pilot projects.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
Sport activities
15 02 03
Number
EUR million
35
15,4
Outputs
Sport activities
Draft Budget 2016
Budget line
F
P
2014
21
2015
24
2016
35
2017
39
2018
54
2019
61
28
2020
75
Total
309
Programme Statement
DB2016

Lead DG: EMPL
1.
Legal Basis

of 11 December 2013 on a European Union Programme for Employment and
Social Innovation ("EaSI") and amending Decision No 283/2010/EU
establishing a European Progress Microfinance Facility for employment and
social inclusion
2014
Total
2.
2015
3,8
119,2
123,0
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
919,5

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
4,3
120,3
124,6
4,7
122,4
127,1
4,8
126,2
131,0
5,0
129,9
134,9
2020
5,1
134,0
139,1
5,1
141,5
146,6
Total
32,9
893,5
926,4
2014
CA
2015
Impl.
Rate
123,790 96,59 %
PA
Impl.
CA
Rate
22,099 85,84 % 127,574
Impl.
Rate
2,86 %
PA
Impl.
Rate
51,771 18,07 %
122,958 95,96 %
21,574 76,16 % 124,666
2,28 %
50,612 16,19 %
3.
EU added value and contribution to Europe 2020 Strategy
EU added value
The EU Programme for employment and social innovation (EaSI) provides EU funds to coordinate the implementation of
the employment and social objectives of the Europe 2020 Strategy for smart, sustainable and inclusive growth.
EaSI will provide added value to national policies by developing, coordinating and implementing modern, effective and
innovative EU employment and social policies.
It will focus on key actions with high European added value such as:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
supporting the EU policy-making process and stronger EU policy-coordination/economic governance such as in

the context of the European Semester;
focusing on the transnational dimension of employment, social, working conditions and health and safety at
work policy;
ensuring development and proper application of EU laws in the field of employment, working conditions,
health and safety at work and social protection;
promoting EU governance, mutual learning to consolidate cooperation between Member States and achieve EU
goals;
making the knowledge and expertise accessible at EU level through policy experimentation and transferring the
best practices across Member States;
promoting workers EU geographical mobility by developing services for the recruitment and placing of
workers (in particular young people and professionals) in employment through the clearance at European level
of vacancies and job applications;
Programme Statement
7.
DB2016
increasing the availability and accessibility of microfinance, as additional funding is more likely to be attracted
from third-party investors such as the European Investment Bank.

tertiary degree
20 million less people should be at risk of poverty

Flagship
Youth on the move

Budget 2015
(EUR million)
19,7
DB 2016
(EUR million)
20,3
43,1
43,7
37,8
38,2
Total
100,6
102,1
Not applicable
Not applicable
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: Support the development, implementation, monitoring and evaluation of the Union's instruments,
policies (promoting a high level of quality and sustainable employment, guaranteeing adequate and decent social
protection, combating social exclusion and poverty and improving working conditions*) and relevant law and promote
evidence-based policy-making, social innovation and social progress, in partnership with the social partners, civil
society organisations and public and private bodies (PROGRESS Axis)
*The policy field Working conditions does cover both areas of labour law and safety and health at work
Indicator 1: Declared gain of better understanding of EU policies and legislation

Latest-known result
2014
2015
2016
92% of the respondents to

the 2013Annual Survey on
PROGRESS1
Milestones
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
Maintain
results over
85%
Maintain results
over 85%
Source to be
used:EaSIsurvey every 2
years
Indicator 2: Active collaboration and partnership between government institutions of the EU and Member States
Latest-known result
91% of respondents to the
2013 annual survey on
PROGRESS2
Source to be used:
EaSIsurvey every 2 years
1
2
2014
2015
2016
Milestones
2017
2018
Maintain results
over 85%)
2019
Target 2020
Maintain results
over 85%)
Question: Would you agree or disagree (scale 1 to 5 or NA) that the event you participated in helped you gain a better understanding of EU
policies and objectives in the field that the event specifically addressed
Question: Would you agree (scale 1 to 5 or NA) that there is a sense of collaboration and partnership between your organisation and the EU
institutions?
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 3: Declared use of social policy innovation in the implementation of social CSRs and the
policy experimentation for policy making
Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
None as new area of
Will be defined
intervention. Will be
on the basis of
defined in the frame of the
the results of the
new EaSI survey.
first survey
(available first
Source to be used: EaSI
semester2015)
survey every 2 years
results of social
Target 2020
Will be defined
on the basis of
the results of
the first survey
(available first
semester2015)

Output
DB 2016
Budget line Output EUR
(no.) million
PROGRESS Sub-objective no1: Develop and disseminate high-quality comparative analytical knowledge in order to
ensure that Union employment and social policy and working conditions3 legislation are based on sound evidence and
are relevant to needs, challenges and conditions in the individual Member States and other participating countries
Analytical activities
(eg. knowledge data base, EUROMOD, policy & legal experts' network, studies,
04 03 02 01
30
17,0
skills panorama joint analysis with international organisations, preparatory studies for
impact assessment, monitoring of policies and laws )
PROGRESS Sub-objective no 2: Facilitate effective and inclusive information-sharing, mutual learning and dialogue on
Union employment and social policy and working conditions4 legislation at Union, national and international level in
order to assist the Member States and the other participating countries in developing their policies and in implementing
Union law
Mutual learning, awareness and dissemination activities (eg. PES to PES dialogue,
peer review, mutual learning seminars, joint projects with OECD, ILO, World Bank,
04 03 02 01
35
19,3
international conferences, European level events, Presidency Conferences,
Observatory on Personal and Household services)
Support for main actors (eg. exchange of Inspectors SLIC, visits, reports, European
04 03 02 01
5
3,7
Employment Observatory, Heads of Public Employment Services Network, meetings)
PROGRESS Sub-objective no 3: Provide policy-makers with financial support to test social and labour market policy
reforms, build up the main actors capacity to design and implement social experimentation, and make the relevant
knowledge and expertise accessible
04 03 02 01
4
9,6
(eg. Financial support for social experimentation projects)
Support for main actors
(eg. Research, methodological development analysis, training activities including
04 03 02 01
5
3,2
through experts networks, community of practice, digital platforms)
PROGRESS Sub-objective no 4: Provide Union and national organisations with financial support to step up their
capacity to develop, promote and support5 the implementation of Union employment and social policy and working
conditions legislation
(eg. running costs of EU NGO's networks, transnational cooperation between public
authorities, civil society organisations and other relevant actors, technical assistance to
microcredit providers)
Total
3
4
5
04 03 02 01
The policy field Working conditions does cover both areas of labour law and safety and health at work
10
21,9
89
74,7
Programme Statement
DB2016
Outputs
Number of outputs foreseen (F) and produced (P)*
*Note: output numbers below reflect the legal basis
programmed over 7 years. Output numbers for 2014
Total
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020
and 2015 were adjusted on the basis of annual 2014
programmes.
PROGRESS Sub-objective no 1: Develop and disseminate high-quality comparative analytical knowledge in order to
ensure that Union employment and social policy and working conditions6 legislation are based on sound evidence and
are relevant to needs, challenges and conditions in the individual Member States and other participating countries
(F)
29
30
30
29
30
29
30
206
(P)
26
(F)
(P)
PROGRESS Sub-objective no 2: Facilitate effective and inclusive information-sharing, mutual learning and dialogue on
Union employment and social policy and working conditions7 legislation at Union, national and international level in
order to assist the Member States and the other participating countries in developing their policies and in implementing
Union law
(F)
3
Analytic activities
(P)
31
21
35
34
35
35
36
240
Mutual learning, awareness and dissemination (F)
activities
(P)
26
(F)
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
35
(P)
4
PROGRESS Sub-objective no 3: Provide policy-makers with financial support to test social and labour market policy
reforms, build up the main actors capacity to design and implement social experimentation, and make the relevant
knowledge and expertise accessible
(F)
4
1
4
4
4
4
4
29
(P)
4
2
Mutual learning, awareness and dissemination (F)
activities
(P)
2
(F)
3
5
5
5
4
4
34
18
(P)
PROGRESS Sub-objective no 4: Provide Union and national organisations with financial support to step up their
capacity to develop, promote and support the implementation of Union employment and social policy and working
conditions9 legislation
(F)
1
(P)
(F)
10
8
10
10
10
10
10
70
(P)
10
Specific Objective 2: Promote worker's voluntary geographical mobility on a fair basis and boost employment
opportunities by developing high-quality and inclusive Union labour markets that are open and accessible to all, while
respecting workers' rights throughout the Union, including freedom of movement (EURES Axis)
Indicator 1: Number of visits of the EURES platform (monthly average in million)
Latest-known result
2013
0,7 million
Indicator measured by Google Analytics
6
7
8
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
1,5
million
2018
2019
Target 2020
2 million
2015 programming resulted in the concentration of the budget under the sub-objective 3 on one major activity aiming at providing financial
support to test social and labour market policy innovations, building up the beneficiaries' capacity to design and implement social policy
innovation, and making the relevant knowledge and expertise accessible.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: *Number of youth job placements achieved or supported under the Preparatory Action Your First
EURES Job (YfEJ) as well as under Targeted Mobility Schemes (cumulative figures)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013 and latest known results
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2013
2014 (Q3)
5 000
15 000
10
3 200
1 950
*The previously used indicator Number of placements made through the EURES Job Mobility Portal was an estimate based on a
survey carried out as part of the external evaluation of EURES between 2006 and 2008. As this information cannot be reported in a
reliable manner to the Commission, it was decided to replace this indicator by the number of youth job placements achieved under
"Your first EURES Job", a targeted mobility scheme which is now an integral part of the EURES axis and is fully implemented by
EURES organisations. As this action is monitored on a regular and reliable basis, this will better reflect the contribution of the
EURES axis in terms of job placements.
Indicator 3: Number of individual personal contacts of EURES advisers with jobseekers, job changers and
employers
Milestones
Latest-known result
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
1 400 000
1 055 936
1 200 000

DB 2016
Output (no.)
EUR million
EURES Sub-objective no 1: Ensure that job vacancies and applications, and any related information are transparent for
the potential applicants and the employers
(maintenance and development of the EURES Portal, communication
04 03 02 02
7
7,3
activities, training activities for EURES, European Job Days)
EURES Sub-objective no 2: Develop services for the recruitment and placing of workers in employment through the
clearance of job vacancies and applications at European level
Actions to promote mobility of individuals in the Union
(EURES cross-border partnership, support to EEA countries and to
04 03 02 02
10
14,8
social partners and Targeted Mobility Schemes)11
Output
Budget line
Total
17
22,1
Number of outputs foreseen (F) and produced (P)*

Outputs
*Note: output numbers for the DB
year and beyond reflect the legal
basis programmed over 7 years.
Total
2014 2015 2016 2017 2018
2019
2020
Output numbers for 2014 and 2015
were adjusted on the basis of
annual programmes.
EURES Sub-objective no 1: Ensure that job vacancies and applications, and any related information are transparent for
the potential applicants and the employers
Actions to promote mobility of
F
6
5
7
7
7
7
7
49
individuals in the Union
(maintenance and development of
the EURES Portal, communication
P
6
activities, training activities for
EURES, European Job Days)
10
11
Aggregated figure for previous years.

We adjusted this to the number of supporting activities only. Results (in terms of job placements) are reflected by the new indicator on YfEJ.
Programme Statement
DB2016
EURES Sub-objective no 2: Develop services for the recruitment and placing of workers in employment through the
clearance of job vacancies and applications at European level
Actions to promote mobility of
F
8
10
10
10
10
10
10
68
individuals in the Union
(maintenance and development of
the EURES Portal, communication
P
8
activities, training activities for
EURES, European Job Days)
Specific Objective 3: Promote employment and social inclusion by increasing the availability and accessibility of
microfinance for vulnerable people who wish to start up a micro-enterprise as well as for existing micro-enterprises,
and by increasing access to finance for social enterprises (Microfinance Axis)
Indicator 1: Number of businesses created or consolidated that have benefitted from EU support
Baseline and latest-known
result
2012: Under the European
Progress Microfinance Facility
6089 enterprises had benefitted
from a microloan in the period
from the beginning of 2011
until end of September 2012.
2014: 0 (see note 1)
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
21 000
businesses
Target 2020
41 000
businesses
500 social
1 350 social
enterprises
enterprises (see note
(see note 3)
3)
Note 1: The delegation agreement with the EIF for EaSI will be signed early 2015. Therefore no microloans have been
disbursed in 2014 under EaSI.. Milestone and target are both subject to change as the final budget, the required
leverage and the potential co-investments are unknown at this stage. The target has been based on the past experience
with the Progress Microfinance (see baseline).
Note 2: There was no such support offered by the European Commission to social enterprises in the past. The EaSI
delegation agreement with the EIF will be signed early 2015. Therefore no investments into social enterprises have
been disbursed in 2014. The milestone and the target may still be reached as planned. Both milestones and targets are
subject to change, as the final budget, the required leverage and the potential co-investments are unknown at this
stage.
Note 3: This calculation is based on the total volume of the guarantees and funded instruments funds, multiplied by the
expected leverage and divided by an average investment size of 200 000 EUR per social enterprise. For the funded
instruments, an expected co-investment of EUR 20 million was taken into account. In addition, this target is set taking
into account a slower take-off of the instruments and a more accelerated disbursement after the first three years.
Indicator 2: Proportion of beneficiaries that have created or further developed a business with EU microfinance
that are unemployed or belonging to disadvantaged groups
Milestones
Latest-known result
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2013: 59%
In September 2013, 59% of
reported recipients were
45%
50%
unemployed or inactive.
Source: Progress Microfinance
Implementation report
Social entreprises:
0 (see note 2)
Programme Statement
DB2016

DB 2016
Output (no.)
EUR million
Microfinance Sub-objective no 1: Increase access to, and the availability of, microfinance
Support to microfinance and social enterprises in particular through
04 03 02 03
6.150
12,2
the financial instruments (microloans)
Microfinance Sub-objective no 2: Build up the institutional capacity of microcredit providers
Support to microfinance in particular through funding for building up
04 03 02 03
4
2,3
capacities (no. microcredit providers supported)
Microfinance Sub-objective no 2: Support the development of social enterprises
Support to social enterprises in particular through funding and grants
04 03 02 03
95
11,1
(no. social entreprises that obtained loans/equity)
Total
25,6
Budget line
Output
Number of outputs produced

2014 2015 2016 2017 2018
2019
Microfinance Sub-objective no 1: Increase access to, and the availability of, microfinance
Support to microfinance and social F
410 2 870 6 150 8 200 9 020 8 200
enterprises in particular through the financial
P
012
instruments (microloans)
Microfinance Sub-objective no 2: Build up the institutional capacity of microcredit providers
Outputs
Support to microfinance in particular

through funding for building up capacities
(no microcredit providers supported)
Total
2020
6 150
41 000
42
297
270
202
1 350
013
Microfinance Sub-objective no 2:Support the development of social enterprises
Support to social enterprises in particular
F
13
95
203 270
through funding (no social entreprises that
P 014
obtained loans/equity)
*Please note that the yearly division and the total amount are only indicative as relevant variables such as co-investment, leverage rate
and management mode are still subject to change. This is also the reason for the discrepancy with outputs indicated inthe Commissions
proposal on the EaSI Regulation COM(2011) 609.
12
13
14
The delegation agreement with the EIF for EaSI Guarantee will be signed early 2015. Therefore no microloans have been disbursed in 2014 under
EaSI. Milestone and target are both subject to change as the final budget, the required leverage and the potential co-investments are unknown at
this stage. The target has been based on the past experience with the Progress Microfinance.
The delegation agreement with the EIF is in the process of being negotiated and signed. These targets are subject to change.
The EaSI delegation agreement with the EIF for EaSI Guarantee will be signed early 2015. Therefore no investments into social enterprises have
been disbursed in 2014. The milestone and the target may still be reached as planned. They are both subject to change, as the final budget, the
required leverage and the potential co-investments are unknown at this stage.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Action programme for customs in the European Union (Customs 2020)

Lead DG: TAXUD
1.
Legal Basis

11 December 2013 establishing an action programme for customs in the European
Union for the period 2014-2020 (Customs 2020) and repealing Decision No
624/2007/EC
2014
Total
2.
2015
0,1
66,3
66,4
Period of
application
2014 - 2020

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
0,1
68,8
68,9
0,1
71,7
71,8
0,1
74,3
74,4
0,1
77,0
77,1
0,1
80,5
80,6
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
522,9
2020
0,1
83,5
83,6
Total
0,7
522,2
522,9
2014
Impl.
PA
Impl.
Rate
Rate
67,709 100,00 % 12,310 109,69 %
CA
67,513 100,00 %
12,115 109,69 %
2015
Impl.
PA
Impl.
Rate
Rate
70,365 24,99 % 38,308 32,00 %
CA
70,058 24,99 %
38,001 31,92 %
3.
EU added value
The customs union is an exclusive competence of the Union. By transferring their powers to the Union, Member States
ipso facto agreed that actions in the customs area will be better implemented at Union level. However, the Union legal
framework in itself does not ensure sufficiently the proper functioning of the customs union. It should be complemented
by supporting measures as provided by the Customs programme in order to ensure that EU customs legislation is applied
in a convergent and harmonised way.
Many of the activities in the customs area are of a cross-border nature, involving and affecting all 28 Member States,
and therefore they cannot be effectively and efficiently delivered by individual Member States. The Customs 2020
programme, implemented by the Commission, offers Member States a Union framework to develop activities through
cooperation amongst national customs officials, on the one hand, and IT cooperation, on the other hand. This set-up is
more cost efficient than if each Member State would set up its individual cooperation framework on a bilateral or
multilateral basis.
From an economic point of view, action at EU level is much more efficient. The backbone of the customs cooperation is
a highly secured dedicated communication network. It interconnects national customs administrations in approximately
5 0001 connection points. This common IT network ensures that every national administration only needs to connect
once to this common infrastructure to be able to exchange any kind of information. If such an infrastructure were not
available, Member States would have to link 27 times to the national systems of each of the other Member States.
Customs and taxation connection points taken together.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: to support the functioning and modernisation of the customs union in order to strengthen the
internal market by means of cooperation between participating countries, their customs authorities and their officials
Indicator 1: International Logistics Performance Index (LPI)
Baseline
2010
2014
15 MSs within the top 30 15 MSs within
the top 30
9 MSs between the ranks
31-60;
12 MSs
between the
3 MSs below the rank 60 ranks 31-60;
(dimension of LPI
focused on customs and 1 MSs below
border management
the rank 60
clearance)
4.
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
Improve
the
No Member No Member No Member No Member All Member
ranking of
State below State below State below State below States within
individual
the rank 60 the rank 60 the rank 60 the rank 60 the top 50
Member
States
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: to support customs authorities in protecting the financial and economic interests of the Union and
of the Member States, including the fight against fraud and the protection of intellectual property rights, to increase
safety and security, to protect citizens and the environment, to improve the administrative capacity of the customs
authorities and to strengthen the competitiveness of European businesses
Indicator 1: the feedback from participants in actions under the Programme and users of the Programme index
(Collaboration robustness)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014*
2015
2016 2017 2018 2019
Networking (Baseline at the start of
the programme is zero):
- Network opportunity
96 %
80 %
80 %
- Lasting networking effect (at least

one contact after the end of the
programme activity).
70 %
90 %
90 %
270
(actual data, until end
of 2014)
380
380
117 (80 for customs

and 37 joint groups
between customs and
taxation)
increase the
annual
levels
increase the
annual levels
Cooperation:
Number of face to face meetings: 380
Number of on-line collaboration

groups: 40
*Figures slightly changed and updated in comparison with AAR2014.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: number of guidelines and recommendations issued by MS in their national administrations following
activities under the Programme relating to modern and harmonised approaches to customs procedures
Milestones
Baseline 2013
Target 2020
2014*
2015
2016 2017 2018 2019
Baseline at the start of the
Improve the level of
94
Improve the level of 2014
programme is zero
2014
Indicator 3: the Common Communication Network for the European Information Systems
Baseline 2013
2014
99,94 % of the time available
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
99,9%
99,9%
99,9%
99,9%
99,9%
Target 2020
2019
99,9%
99,9%
Indicator 4: the Union Law and Policy Application and Implementation Index
Milestones
Baseline 2013
Target 2020
2014*
1. Number of actions under the

Programme organised in this
area
2015
2016 2017 2018 2019
Increase in the
average score by the
end of the Customs
2020 programme
(2020).
67
2. Number of
recommendations issued
following those actions:
baseline at the start of the
programme is zero
Indicator 5: the European Information System Availability
Milestones
Baseline 2013
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Centralised IT customs applications

(including tariff systems):
99,11 % of time (business hours);
99 %
97 %
97 %
97 %
97 %
97 %
97 %
95 %
Indicator 6: Best Practices and Guideline Index
95 %
95 %
95 %
95 %
95 %
95 %
95 % (otherwise);
Milestones
Baseline 2013
1. Number of actions under the
Programme organised in this area
2. Percentage of participants that made
use of a working practice/administrative
procedure/guideline developed/shared
with the support of the Programme
Target 2020
2014*
2015
84
Improve the
level of 2014
88 %
Improve the
level of 2014
2016
2017
2018
Baseline at the start of the programme is

zero
2019
Increase compared
to 2014
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 7: Learning Index

Milestones
Baseline 2013
2014
4112 (Data
extracted in
October 2014)
1. Number of officials trained by using

common training material of the Union
2. Number of times Programme eLearning
modules were downloaded
2015
Improve the
level of
2014
2016 2017 2018 2019
Target 2020
Increase
compared to 2014
3219
Improve the
(Data extracted level of
in October 2014) 2014

zero
Indicator 8: Cooperation with third parties Indicator
Milestones
2013
Number of actions under the Programme
aiming at authorities other than Member
States' customs authorities
2014
23 actions
Target 2020
2015
2016 2017 2018 2019
Improve the
Increase or
level of
stability over the
2014
programme
lifetime

zero
Output
Budget line
Number of IT Contracts
Number of events organised
Number of training projects
Other
Total
14 02 01
14 02 01
14 02 01
14 02 01
Outputs
Number of training contracts
F
P
F
P
F
P
Number
Draft Budget 2016

EUR million
30
380
2

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
59
380
380
380
380
380
380
380
270
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
60,5
7,0
2,0
2,2
71,7
Total
210
2 660
14

In 2014, DG TAXUD has changed the management procedures and follow-up for certain types of activities under the
programme. Namely the methodology of counting for output 'event organized'. The figures have been aligned and
updated accordingly to reflect the current situation.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Action programme for taxation in the European Union (Fiscalis 2020)

Lead DG: TAXUD
1.
Legal Basis

(EUR million)

of 11 December 2013 establishing an action programme to improve the
operation of taxation systems in the European Union for the period 2014-2020
(Fiscalis 2020) and repealing Decision No 1482/2007/EC
2014
Total
2.
2015
0,1
30,8
30,9
DB2016
0,1
31,0
31,1
2014 - 2020
2017
2018
0,1
31,4
31,5
0,1
31,8
31,9
2019
0,1
32,0
32,1
0,1
32,6
32,7
223,4
2020
0,1
33,0
33,1
Total
0,7
222,7
223,4
2014
Impl.
PA
Impl.
Rate
Rate
31,644 100,30 %
7,558 126,98 %
CA
31,632 100,30 %
7,466 111,43 %
2015
Impl.
PA
Impl.
Rate
Rate
31,982 34,20 % 19,874 25,60 %
CA
31,861 34,12 %
19,754 25,48 %
3.
EU added value
Without intense cooperation and coordination between Member States, unfair tax competition and tax shopping would
increase, while fraudsters would exploit the lack of cooperation between national authorities.The added value of the
Fiscalis programme, including to the protection of the financial interests of Member States of the Union and of taxpayers,
has been recognised by the tax administrations of the participating countries. The challenges identified for the next
decade cannot be tackled if Member States do not look beyond the borders of their administrative territories or cooperate
intensively with their counterparts. The Fiscalis programme, implemented by the Commission in cooperation with the
participating countries, offers Member States a Union framework to develop activities through cooperation amongst
national tax officials, on the one hand, and IT cooperation, on the other hand. This set-up is more cost-effective than if
each Member State were to set up individual cooperation frameworks on a bilateral or multilateral basis.
The Fiscalis 2020 programme supports the highly secured dedicated communication network allowing the exchange of
information in the framework of fight against fraud, both for direct and indirect taxation. The programme as such
interconnects national tax administrations in approximately 5 0001 connection points. This common IT network ensures
that every national administration only needs to connect once to this common infrastructure to be able to exchange any
kind of information. If such an infrastructure were not available Member States would have to link 27 times to the
national systems of each of the other Member States.
Not applicable
Customs and taxation connection points taken together.
Programme Statement
DB2016
General objectives
General Objective 1: to improve the proper functioning of the taxation systems in the internal market by enhancing
cooperation between participating countries, their tax authorities and their officials
Indicator 1: ease of paying taxes
2010
2014
10 MS within the top 50
13 MS
10 MS between the ranks 51-100 13 MS
2 MS between the ranks 101-120 1 MS
5 MS below the rank of 120
1 MS
4.
Milestones
2015
2016
2017
Improve the No Member
ranking of State below
individual the rank of
Member
120
States
2018
2019
Target 2020
All Member States
within the top 100,
those Member States
which are already in the
top 100 in 2010 move
to the top 50
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: to support the fight against tax fraud, tax evasion and aggressive tax planning and the
implementation of Union law in the field of taxation by ensuring exchange of information, by supporting administrative
cooperation and, where necessary and appropriate, by enhancing the administrative capacity of participating countries
with a view to assisting in reducing the administrative burden on tax authorities and the compliance costs for taxpayers
Indicator 1: the Common Communication Network for the European Information Systems
Milestones
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
99,94 %
99,9 %
99,9 % 99,9 % 99,9 % 99,9 % 99,9 %
99,9 %
Indicator 2: the feedback from participating countries on the results of actions under the programme (collaboration
robustness)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2012
2014*
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Network opportunity
95 %
80 %
80 %
(Baseline at the start of the
programme is zero)
68 %
90 %
90 %
Lasting networking effect (at
least one contact after the end of
the programme activity)
Cooperation:
242
295
295
Baseline
2013
Number of face to face meetings: 109 (72 for

295
taxation; 37 joint increase the
groups between annual
Number of on-line groups: 30
customs and
levels
taxation).
increase the
annual levels
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
Budget line
Number of training contracts
Other
Total
14 03 01
14 03 01
14 03 01
14 03 01
Outputs
Number of training projects
F
P
F
P
F
P
Draft Budget 2016

Output (no.)
EUR million
20
295
10

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
42
295
295
295
295
295
295
295
242
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
22,8
5,3
1,1
2,2
31,4
Total
140
2 065
14
Programme Statement
DB2016
Programme to promote activities in the field of the protection of the financial

interests of the European Union (Hercule III)
Lead DG: OLAF
1.
Legal Basis

26 February 2014 establishing a programme to promote activities in the field of
the protection of the financial interests of the European Union (Hercule III
programme) and repealing Decision No 804/2004/EC
2014
Total
2.
2015
13,7
13,7
Period of
application
2014 - 2020
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
104,9

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
14,1
14,1
14,5
14,5
15,0
15,0
15,3
15,3
2020
15,9
15,9
16,4
16,4
Total
104,9
104,9
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
13,678 100,00 %
13,678 100,00 %
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
1,745 99,23 %
CA
14,067
Impl.
Rate
6,40 %
1,745 99,23 %
14,067
6,40 %
PA
Impl.
Rate
5,776 16,64 %
5,776 16,64 %
3.
EU added value
The Programme shall contribute to:
(a) developing the activities at Union level and the Member States level to counter fraud, corruption and any other illegal
activities affecting the financial interests of the Union, including the fight against cigarette smuggling and counterfeiting;
(b) an increased transnational cooperation and coordination at Union level, between Member States' authorities, the
Commission and the European Anti-Fraud Office (OLAF), and in particular to the effectiveness and efficiency of the
cross-border operations;
(c) an effective prevention of fraud, corruption and any other illegal activities affecting the financial interests of the
Union, by offering joint specialised training for staff of national and regional administrations, and to other stakeholders.
The programme creates in particular savings deriving from the collective procurement of specialised equipment and
databases to be used by the stakeholders and those derived from the specialised training.
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: To protect the financial interest of the Union thus enhancing the competitiveness of the Union's
economy and ensuring the protection of the taxpayers' money
Programme Statement
4.
DB2016
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: To prevent and combat fraud, corruption and any other illegal activities affecting the Union's
financial interest
Indicator 1: The added value and effective use of co-financed technical equipment, expressed by the users of the
equipment in their final technical report and final implementation report of the action (percentage of users that
considered the use of Hercule funded equipment added value to their activities
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
70%
75%
75%
75%
Results on baselines, milestones and targets for this indicator can only be provided once the Member States' beneficiaries will start
reporting on the results under Article 13(3) of the Hercule III Regulation. Sufficient data for this indicator is expected to be available
for the DB 2017.
Indicator 2: The number and type of trainings activities funded under the Hercule III programme, including the
amount of specialised training, and the satisfaction rate as expressed by the participants
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
(including 2
(including 2
(including 1
(including 2
(including 2 (including 2 (including 2 (including 2
specialised
specialised
specialised
specialised
specialised specialised specialised specialised
trainings)
trainings)
training)
trainings)
trainings) trainings) trainings) trainings)
60%
Satisfaction
rate
65%
satisfaction
rate
67%
satisfaction
rate
69%
70%
72%
74%
75%
satisfaction satisfaction satisfaction satisfaction
satisfaction
rate
rate
rate
rate
rate
This indicator has been elaborated for OLAFs Annual Management Plan 2014 in the light of the operational objectives in the
Hercule III Regulation.

Draft Budget 2016
Number
EUR million
10,9 *
20
Budget line
Output
1. Technical Assistance (incl. IT support)
24 02 01
2. Training and Conferences (incl. studies)

3. Other actions
Total
24 02 01
24 02 01
15
0
35
3,6**
0
14,5
*75 % of the budget line

** 25 % of the budget line
Outputs
1. Technical Assistance (incl.
IT support)
2. Training and Conferences
(incl. studies)
3. Other actions
F
P
F
P
F
P

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
Total
140
105
The Hercule III Regulation provides for three types of action: Technical Assistance (at least 70 % of the budget), Training (max: 25 %
of the budget) and Other Actions (max: 5 % of the budget). Data for produced outputs is expected to be available for DB 2017.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Exchange, assistance and training programme for the protection of the euro
against counterfeiting (Pericles 2020)
Lead DG: ECFIN
1.
Legal Basis

(EUR million)

of 11 March 2014 establishing an exchange, assistance and training
programme for the protection of the euro against counterfeiting (the Pericles
2020 programme) and repealing Council Decisions 2001/923/EC,
2001/924/EC, 2006/75/EC, 2006/76/EC, 2006/849/EC and 2006/850/EC
2014 - 2020
7,3

2014
2015
DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Total
0,9
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,1
1,1
1,2
7,3
Total
0,9
1,0
1,0
1,0
1,1
1,1
1,2
7,3
2.
CA
2014
Impl. Rate
2015
PA
0,924
95,06 %
Impl.
Rate
0,280 98,79 %
excluding external earmarked
revenue
0,924
95,06 %
0,280 98,79 %
CA
1,025
Impl.
Rate
0,00 %
1,025
0,00 %
PA
Impl.
Rate
0,610 14,90 %
0,610 14,90 %
3.
EU added value
The Programme shall actively encourage and entail an increase in transnational cooperation for the protection of the euro
inside and outside the Union and with the Union's trading partners, and with attention also being paid to those Member
States or third countries that have the highest rates of euro counterfeiting, as shown by the relevant reports issued by the
competent authorities; this cooperation shall contribute to the greater effectiveness of these operations through the sharing
of best practice, common standards and joint specialised training.
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Programme Statement
DB2016
General objectives
General Objective: To prevent and combat counterfeiting and related fraud thus enhancing the competitiveness of the
Unions economy and securing the sustainability of public finances.
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: To protect the euro banknotes and coins against counterfeiting and related fraud, by supporting
and supplementing the measures undertaken by the Member States and assisting the competent national and Union
authorities in their efforts to develop between themselves and with the European Commission a close and regular
cooperation and an exchange of best practices, also where appropriate, including third countries and international
organisations.
Indicator 1: Number of counterfeits detected
Baseline
2011
606 000 notes
157 000 coins
2014
Actual values:
838 000 banknotes
192 195 coins
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
Keep counterfeits
under control in an
average +/- 5%
compared to 2011
+/- 5% compared
to 2011
Indicator 2: Number of illegal workshops dismantled

Baseline
2011
2014
45
25
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
3% increase
compared to
2011
2018
2019
Target 2020
5% Increase
compared to 2011
Indicator 3: Number of individuals arrested

Baseline
2011
2014
2015
2 355 arrests made
6 858
(based on data
arrests/charged
from 16 MS)
Indicator 4: Number of penalties imposed
Baseline
Data not yet
available
2014
2015
Data not yet

available
Milestones
2016
2017
3% increase
compared to
2011
Milestones
2016
2017
3% increase
compared to
2011
2018
2019
Target 2020
5% increase
compared to 2011
2018
2019
Target 2020
5% increase
compared to 2011

Output
1.Pericles grant programme: Seminars
2.Pericles grant programme: Staff Exchanges
3.Pericles grant programme: Studies
4.Pericles grant programme: Purchase of
equipment
5.Procurement: Seminars
6.Procurement: Staff Exchanges
7.Procurement: Studies
Total
Budget line
01 02 04
01 02 04
01 02 04
01 02 04
01 02 04
01 02 04
01 02 04
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR
5
400 000
5
300 000
333 500
5 000
1 038 500
Programme Statement
Outputs
1.Pericles grant programme:
Seminars
Staff Exchanges
Studies
purchase of equipment
5.Procurement: seminars
6.Procurement: Staff
Exchanges
7.Procurement: Studies
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
DB2016

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
3
4
5
5
6
6
6
2
5
3
5
6
6
6
5
2
1
1
2
0
1
1
1
0
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
Total
35
2
36
2
2
2
3
24
3
Programme Statement
DB2016
Anti-Fraud Information System (AFIS)

Lead DG: OLAF
1.
Legal Basis
Council Regulation (EC) No 515/97 amended by Council Regulation (EC) No

766/2008, Regulation on mutual assistance between the administrative authorities
of the Member States and cooperation between the latter and the Commission to
ensure the correct application of the law on customs and agricultural matters
Council Decision 2009/917/JHA, Decision on the use of information technology
for customs purposes
2014
Total
2.
2015
6,4
6,4
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
51,3

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
6,9
6,9
6,6
6,6
7,2
7,2
7,7
7,7
7,2
7,2
2020
7,5
7,5
Total
49,4
49,4
2014
Impl.
PA
Impl.
Rate
Rate
6,424 99,63 %
6,613 100,59 %
CA
6,424 99,63 %
6,613 100,59 %
2015
Impl.
PA
Impl.
Rate
Rate
6,923 31,29 %
5,230 27,72 %
CA
6,923 31,29 %
5,230 27,72 %
3.
EU added value
The need for EU involvement in the context of mutual administrative assistance and customs co-operation was already
recognised by the European legislator with the adoption of Regulation 515/97. By the very nature of customs fraud,
occurring by definition among at least two countries there is a continuing necessity for centralised action at the EU level.
Effective sharing of information and wide-scale fight against breach of customs legislation cannot be conducted only by
national customs authorities at a reasonable cost. Systemic collection of the data required to analyse customs risks which
pose a threat to the EU and its Member States would constitute a disproportionate effort for 28 individual Member States
and can be achieved more effectively and efficiently by action at the EU level.
The need for enhancement of the functioning of customs risk management, particularly in relation to safety and security
risks, is recognised in Commission Communication on Customs Risk Management and Supply Chain Security (COM
(2012) 793).
Therefore, action at EU level would enable a significant improvement in risk management and the fight against customsrelated fraud, by increasing the available evidence, improving the possibilities for risk mitigation and detection and
repression of fraud and rendering the action more efficient and effective.
The Anti-Fraud Information System (AFIS) is an umbrella term for a set of anti-fraud applications operated by DG
OLAF under a common technical infrastructure aiming at the timely and secure exchange of fraud-related information
between Member States' administrations, as well as storage and analysis of relevant data. The AFIS Project encompasses
two major areas, Mutual Assistance in Customs Matters and Irregularities Management.
AFIS supports Mutual Assistance in Customs Matters with collaboration tools such as V-OCU (Virtual Operations
Coordination Unit) used for Joint Customs Operations; secure web mail (MAB-Mail), specific information exchange
modules and databases like MAB (Mutual Assistance Broker), CIS (Customs Information System) and FIDE (Customs
Investigation Files Identification Database), analysis tools like A-TIS (Anti-Fraud Transit Information System) and
Programme Statement
DB2016
electronic workflow applications like ToSMA (Tobacco Seizures Management Application) which manages the
implementation of the agreements between the EU and four major tobacco manufacturers.
AFIS facilitates secure electronic communications tools for the Member States to fulfil their obligation to report
irregularities detected in agricultural, structural, cohesion and fisheries funds as well as pre-accession aid. The
Irregularity Management System (IMS) provides a secure electronic tool for the reporting, management and analysis of
irregularities. In 2015, following the adoption of the new reporting provisions, the support of the Asylum, Migration and
Integration Fund (AMIF), the instrument for financial support for police cooperation, preventing and combating crime,
and crisis management (ISF) and the Fund for European Aid to the Most Deprived (FEAD) will be added to the IMS.
The AFIS Portal is a single and common infrastructure for the delivery of the above-mentioned services to more than 8
000 registered end-users in more than 1 200 competent services from Member States, partner third countries,
international organizations, Commission services and other EU bodies. AFIS is increasingly being used by partner third
countries, including China.
The AFIS Portal enables substantial economies of scale and synergies in the development, maintenance and operations of
such a wide and diverse set of IT services and tools.
AFIS is a programme that assists the European Commission and the Member States in the fight against fraud and the
protection of the EU financial interests. By doing this it contributes to fair competition between legally operating
traders/economic operators and reduces distortions of the internal market; as such AFIS contributes indirectly to a wide
range of objectives and EU policies although not direct link can be established with headline targets or flagship
initiatives.
General objectives
General Objective 1: To protect the financial interest of the Union thus enhancing the competitiveness of the European
economy and ensuring the protection of the taxpayers' money
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: To support Mutual Assistance in Customs Matters through the provision of secure information
exchange tools for Joint Operations and specific Customs anti-fraud information exchange modules and databases such
as the Customs Information System
Indicator 1: Number of active customs fraud cases for which information is available in the Mutual Assistance
databases
Milestones
Baseline 2013
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
8 000
12 000
20 000
30 000
Indicator 2: Number of Joint Customs Operations (JCOs) (including EU wide and regional operations)
supported/year
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
3 JCOs
4 JCOs
5 JCOs
5 JCOs
Indicator 3: Coverage of A-TIS (Anti-fraud transit information system)
Baseline
At the end of 2013,
A-TIS holds 16.5
million transit
declarations (600
000/month) covering
70% of the transit
regime.
2014
Milestones
2015
2016
2017
A-TIS to
cover 100%
Entry into of transit
New
force of the declarations. repository
reform of New
of import
Regulation repository
declarations
515/97
of export
developed
declarations
developed
2018
New
repository
of
Container
Status
Messages
(CSMs)
developed
2019
Statistical
analysis tools
for operational
coveting all
repositories
*At the end of 2014, A-TIS holds 23.1 million transit declarations.
Target 2020
A-TIS to cover
100% of
transit
declarations
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 2: To facilitate secure electronic communication tools for the Member States to fulfil their
obligation to report irregularities detected in agricultural, structural, cohesion and fisheries funds as well as preaccession aid.
Indicator 1: Availability of new irregularities reporting modules for the new programming period 2014-2020
Baseline
2013
2014
Development of new
single harmonised
module on-going.
2015
Operational launch
of new IMS
version ready for
reporting
regulations for the
MFF 2014-2020.
**
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
IMS system fully
operational in all
Member States
and candidate
countries with
reporting and
analysis tools.
Online
reporting
and
analysis
system
extended
** The new single harmonised module was put in production on 1 October 2014, introducing a single format for all existing modules
(7) to be used by all countries (Member States and (potential) candidate countries), covering all programming periods and all
regulations
Indicator 2: Number of Member States complying with obligations for reporting of fraudulent irregularities
Baseline
2013
some Member States /
Candidate Countries do
not yet fully comply
with their reporting
obligations
2014
IMS
refreshment
training
provided to
MS
Milestones
2015
2016
2017
MS have
MS use
been trained
actively IMS
and set up
reporting
to use IMS
and analysis
new
tools
modules
2018
2019
MS perform
proactive
quality control
on the data
provided
Target 2020
All Member
States comply
with the reporting
of fraudulent
irregularities.

Output
Budget line
1. AFIS Registered Users

2. JCOs organised
3. MA Cases
4. IMS Communication
Total
24 02 01
24 02 01
24 02 01
24 02 01
2. JCO's organised
3. MA Cases
4. IMS Communication
Number
EUR million
14 600
4
16 500
24 000
6,6
Outputs
1. AFIS Registered Users
Draft Budget 2016
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
P

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
12 100 13 300 14 600 16 000 17 500 19 000 21 000
8 100
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
4
10 000 13 000 16 500 20 000 23 500 26 500 30 000
10 000
21 000 22 500 24 000 25 500 27 000 28 500 30 000
23 700
Total
21 000
34
139 500
178 500
Programme Statement
DB2016

Lead DG: MOVE
Associated DGs: CNECT, ENER
1.
Legal Basis

11 December 2013 establishing the Connecting Europe Facility, amending
Regulation (EU) No 913/2010 and repealing Regulations (EC) No 680/2007 and
(EC) No 67/2010
Executive Agency
Total
Contribution from Cohesion
Fund
(06 01 06 03)
Total with contribution from
Cohesion Fund (06 01 06 03)
2.
Period of
application
Reference
Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
33 242,3

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2014
2015
2020
Total
5,8
1 958,8
11,6
1 976,2
5,3
1 415,3
14,4
1 435,0
5,0
2 041,6
15,0
2 061,6
5,7
2 365,7
15,4
2 386,7
5,8
2 566,9
14,4
2 587,1
5,9
3 907,2
14,5
3 927,7
6,1
39,5
4 251,5 18 507,0
14,9
100,2
4 272,5 18 646,8
983,0
1 217,0
2 376,5
1 593,3
1 655,1
1 700,4
1 780,6 11 305,9
2 959,2
2 652,0
4 438,1
3 980,0
4 242,2
5 628,1
6 053,1 29 952,7
2014
CA
2015
Impl.
Rate
1 995,845 100,35 %
PA
Impl.
CA
Rate
21,121 83,62 % 2 238,771
Impl.
PA
Rate
0,77 % 786,602
Impl.
Rate
2,34 %
1 993,137 100,22 %
20,491 69,80 % 2 236,046
0,77 % 784,364
2,19 %
3.
EU added value
In accordance with the principle of subsidiarity and proportionality set out in Article 5 of the Treaty on European Union,
the objective of the programme cannot be sufficiently achieved by the members States and can therefore be achieved by
the EU. By reasons of the disparities in Member States' capacity to act and in order to ensure a coherent approach to EU
project financing across the three sectors, action at EU level can better achieve the objectives pursued, by reasons of its
scale and effects. More specifically, the EU level will provide for economies of scale in the use of innovative financial
instruments by catalysing private investments in the TEN and acceleration of the implementation of strategic projects and
networks with high European added value by removing critical bottlenecks.
An integrated EU infrastructure funding framework will allow exploiting cross-sector synergies at project development
and implementation level, enabling cost savings and/or more efficient exploitation and higher returns.
Programme Statement
DB2016


Flagship

Total
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
91,6
2 539,3
2 630,9
DB 2016
(EUR million)
140,4
4 273,5
4 413,9

Budget 2015
(EUR Million)
Contributing to sustainable development and protection of the environment,

notably by fostering the integration of energy from renewable sources into
the transmission network and developing carbon dioxide networks
Transport: 857,6 2
DB 20161
(EUR Million)
Transport: 1 461
Energy: 158,08
TOTAL: 1619,08
Details on transport sector budget's contribution to the mainstream of climate action:

Methodology proposed by DG MOVE in cooperation with DG REGIO on contribution of modes of transport to
climate action objectives
Railway projects:
40%
Inland Waterway projects:
40%
Multimodal platform:
40%
Motorways of the sea/sea ports
40%
Horizontal projects (Traffic Management Systems):
40%
Road projects
0%
Reduce rail freight noise by retrofitting of existing rolling stock
0%
Freight transport services
40%
Secure parking on road core network

New technologies and innovation for all modes of transport
0%
100%
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: Developing modern and high-performing trans-European networks and creating an environment
more conducive to private, public or public-private investment
The total amount corresponds to around 40% of CEF allocation to transport sector including the contribution from the Cohesion Fund. In the field
of energy, contribution of 40% is foreseen for 2015. Finally, the telecommunication sector will not contribute to the mainstreaming of climate
action.
The total amount corresponds to around 40% of CEF allocation to transport sector including the contribution from the Cohesion Fund and to the
financial instruments, taking into account an expected transfer to the ESIF Fund.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 1: Volume of private, public or public-private partnership investment in projects of common interest
Milestones
Current situation
Target 2022
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Transport:
EUR 280
Transport: EUR 500 billion
billion, of
of investments realised on
which EUR
the entire TEN-T network,
0
140 billion on
of which EUR 250 billion on
the core
the core network
network
Energy: EUR 200 billion
3
Energy:
Indicator 2: Volume of private investments in projects of common interest achieved through the financial
instruments under the CEF Regulation
Milestones
Current situation
Target 2022
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Transport:
EUR 8 billion
of private
Transport: EUR 23 billion of
investment in
private investment in
0
projects of
projects of common interest
common
Energy: EUR 30-60 billion
interest
Energy:4
Indicator 3: Volume of private investment in fast and ultra-fast broadband internet(*)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Projection of private
investment between 2011
and 2020: up to EUR 50
n/a
n/a
billion
(Investment need until 2020:
EUR 270 billion)
(*)This is the forecast of investments made independent of and without CEF intervention.
Indicator 4: Volume of public and private investment in projects of common interest for fast and ultra-fast
broadband internet funded by CEF(*)
Milestones
Target 2020
Baseline 2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018 2019
189
Sum 2014-2017:
Sum 2014-2020: EUR 945
0
EUR 781 million
million
(*)This is the forecast for what can be achieved with CEF.
General Objective 2: To enable the Union to achieve its sustainable development targets of a minimum 20% reduction
of greenhouse gas emissions compared to 1990 levels, a 20% increase in energy efficiency and raising the share of
renewable energy to 20% by 2020
Indicator 1: Reduction of greenhouse gas emissions
Current situation
Transport: 848.586
million tonnes CO2 eq.
(1990)
1.109.629 million tonnes
5
CO2 eq. (2008) (EU28)
Energy: 18 % (2012)
3
4
5
Milestones
Transport: 884 Mt of CO2 eq (level in 2030)
(20% reduction by 2030 compared to 2008)
Energy: Greenhouse gas emissions in 2012 decreased by 18%
relative to emissions in 1990 and are expected to reduce
further by 24% and 32% in 2020 and 2030 respectively on the
basis of current policies
Long term target

Transport: 338 Mt of CO2 eq
(level in 2050)
(60% reduction by 2050
compared to 1990)
Energy: 20% (Europe 2020
target) (*)
In Energy, fixing milestones and adding figures to them would be arbitrary.

Idem above.
Excluding maritime international bunkers but including international aviation.
Programme Statement
DB2016
(*) The CEF will be contributing to this target but CEF will not be the key driver.
Indicator 2: Increase in energy efficiency

Current situation
Milestones
Transport: (*)
Transport: (*)
Energy: the "Communication on energy efficiency and its contribution
Energy: Saving of
to energy security and the 2030 Framework for climate and energy
energy of around 14.6
policy (COM(2014) 520 final) was published in July 2014.
% (2012) compared to
A Report on Member States' progress towards their indicative targets
baseline (2007)6 (***)
for 2020 is planned for the second quarter of 2015.
Target 2020
Transport: (*)
Energy: Saving of
energy by 20% (Europe
2020 target) (**)
(*) Data as regards CEFs concrete contribution not yet available as methodology still has to be developed. Figures will not be ready within the first two
years of implementation of CEF.
(**) The CEF will be contributing to this target but CEF will not be the key driver.
(***)Updated data of saving of energy for 2013 should be available from Eurostat late February
Indicator 3: Share of renewable energy

Current situation
Transport: 4.8 %
(2010, EU27)
Energy: Share of RES
in final energy
consumption7 at 15%
(2013) (***)
Milestones
Long term target 2020

Transport: 3%
Transport: (*)
Energy: Share of RES
Energy: Energy: RES in final energy consumption Trajectory with
in final energy
interim targets contained in Annex 1b of Dir. 2009/28/EC: 2011/2012:
consumption at 20%
10.8%; 2013/2014: 12%; 2015/2016: 13.7%; 2017/2018: 16%
(Europe 2020 target)
March 2015: Commission's Renewable energy progress report
(**)
(*) Data as regards CEFs concrete contribution not yet available as methodology still has to be developed. Figures will not be ready within the first two
years of implementation of CEF.
(**)The CEF will be contributing to this target but CEF will not be the key driver.
(***). Final data for 2013 should be available from Eurostat late February
4.
Specific objectives
CEF-TRANSPORT
Specific Objective 1: Removing bottlenecks, enhancing rail interoperability, bridging missing links, and improving
cross-border sections
Indicator 1: The number of new or improved cross-border connections
Milestones
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
6
14 (rising to 36 by 2030)
Indicator 2: Km of lines in service equipped with the European Railway Traffic Management System (ERTMS),
linked to TEN-T
Milestones
Baseline 2013
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
In service: 4199
km
Baseline 2013
In service +
under
construction:
9411 km
6
7
12 000 km
30 000 km
Baseline is PRIMES 2007 in 2020, which includes policies to be implemented up to 2006 with an oil price of $61 per barrel and reference year
2005. Calculated as Gross Inland Consumption minus Final Non-Energy Use Consumption. Source: Eurostat, Commission studies.
Source: Annex 1b of Dir. 2009/28/EC.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 3: The number of removed bottlenecks and sections of increased capacity for all modes on core network
corridors which have received funding from the CEF
Milestones
Baseline 2013
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
5
13
Indicator 4: The length of the inland waterway network by class in the Union
Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2030
Whole TEN-T inland waterways

reaching class IV standards or higher by
(*)
(*)
2030, except where allowed by
Regulation
Indicator 5: The length of the railway network in the EU-28 upgraded following the requirements set out in Article
45 (2) of Regulation (EU) No 1315/2013
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2030
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Whole core network complying with the
(*)
(*)
requirements
Indicator 6: Setting up of the core network corridors structures with designation of Coordinators, creation of
Corridor Forums and approval of work plans
Milestones
Baseline 2013
Target 2020
2014
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
9 core network
No corridor
corridors by end of
9 core network corridors
existing
2014
Note: indicators marked with * will be assessed in the framework of the work plans for the core network corridors. The work plans
have been presented by the European Coordinators to the Member States at the end of 2014 and will be presented to the Commission
in Q1 2015. On their basis, the Commission will need to define a baseline scenario and monitoring targets.
Specific Objective 2: Ensuring sustainable and efficient transport systems in the long run, with a view to preparing for
expected future transport flows, as well as enabling the decarbonisation of all modes of transport through transition to
innovative low-carbon and energy-efficient transport technologies, while optimising safety
Indicator 1: The number of supply points for alternative fuels for vehicles using the TEN-T core network for road
transport in the EU-28
Milestones
Baseline 2014
Target 2020 - 2025
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
CNG (Compressed
Natural Gas) public
fuelling stations
CNG: 3136 EU-wide
(EU-wide): 2482
LNG road transport: 221
LNG (Liquefied
Hydrogen: 178
Natural Gas): public
By 2020 (maritime
fuelling stations: 77
(*)
ports) and 2025 (inland
Hydrogen public
ports).
fuelling stations:
101
Indicator 2: The number of inland and maritime ports of the TEN-T core network equipped with supply points for
alternative fuels in the EU-28
Milestones
Baseline 2014
Target 2020 - 2025
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Maritime LNG
All 85 maritime ports in
supply points: 1
core network and the 54
Inland Waterway
inland ports in core
(*)
Programme Statement
DB2016
LNG supply points:

1
network to be equipped
by LNG refuelling points
by 2020 (maritime ports)
and 2025 (inland ports)
Indicator 3: Number of fatalities in road transport accidents

Baseline 2010
2014
2015
2016
Milestones
2017
2018
2019
31 500 (EU 28)
Target 2020
Max 15 750 (EU 28)
will be established by the end of 2014. At that time, a reliable baseline scenario and precise targets can be defined. The figures
presented above correspond to the financial statement accompanying the Commission proposals of 2011.
Specific Objective 3: Optimising the integration and interconnection of transport modes and enhancing
interoperability of transport services, while ensuring the accessibility of transport infrastructures
Indicator 1: The number of multimodal logistic platforms, including inland and maritime ports and airports,
connected to the railway network
Milestones
Baseline 2012
Target 2020 - 2050
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
54 (improved)
connections of
maritime ports by
41 (improved)
2020
connections of
27 maritime ports
24 (improved)
maritime ports
connected and
connections of
18 (improved)
airports by 2020
connections of
12 airports connected
All core maritime
ports connected by
airports8
2030
38 core airports
connected by 2050
Indicator 2: The number of improved rail-road terminals
Milestones
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
(*)
(*)
(*)
Indicator 3: Number of improved or new connections between ports through motorways of the sea
Baseline
Milestones
2017
2018
(*)
(*)
Indicator 4: The number of kilometres of inland waterways fitted with RIS
Baseline
Baseline 2012
8900 km of class Va+
waterways
equipped with ENC's
(Electronic navigation
charts);
4300 km of class Va+
waterways
equipped with shore
based inland AIS
8
2014
2014
2015
2016
2015
Full coverage with
ENC for Class Va+
waterways (10500km)
2020: full coverage of
class Va+ waterways
equipped with shore
based inland AIS
infrastructure
(10500km);
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
(*)
2019
Target 2020
See under column

for 2015
By improve is meant railway connections that are brought in line with the requirements of the TEN-T guidelines (for instance axle load,
electrification, deployment of ERTMS) or project that increase the capacity of railway connections to a port or an airport. Completely greenfield
projects are rather rare
Programme Statement
infrastructure;
11500 vessels equipped
with AIS
Transponders;
Electronic Reporting
operational on the
Rhine; in other regions
still in the starting phase
DB2016
All commercial
vessels equipped with
inland AIS (app.
12000vessels)
Electronic reporting
fully operational for
BtA and AtA
communication
will be established by the end of 2014. At that time, a reliable baseline scenario and precise targets can be defined. The figures
presented above correspond to the financial statement accompanying the Commission proposals of 2011.
Indicator 5: Synchronisation of the deployment process of SESAR related technology

Baseline
Milestones
2015
2016
2014
2017
2018
2019
SESAR:
Identification of the first
common project
Nomination of the ATM
deployment Manager by the
Commission
Target 2025
Development and
deployment of a new
generation ATM
system
Indicator number 5 as foreseen by article 4.2 (c) (iv) of the CEF Regulation has been divided in three table to facilitate reading by
sector.
Indicator 6: Kilometres of roads covered by (real-time) Traffic Information Services or equipped for (dynamic)
Traffic Management, including speed related ITS services (Variable Message Signs or equivalent means)
Milestones
Target 2020
Baseline 2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
15.500 km equipped with VMS
(lane control & info/warning/
rerouting)
- 200.000 km covered by Traffic
Yearly increases of
Info Services, of which 25.500 km
10%
equipped with Travel Time
Forecast systems
- Overall 250.000 km of roads
equipped with ITS Services
sector.
Indicator 7: The level of deployment of VTMIS

Baseline 2013
2014
AIS (Automatic Identification

System) positions recorded per
month: about 100 000 0009
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
VTMIS
Increase
by 10%
Target 2020
VTMIS:
Increase by 20%
sector.
The number of positions recorded thanks to VTMIS is not only dependent on the level of deployment of VTMIS, but also on the level of maritime
traffic, which is deeply linked to the economic conditions.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Expenditure related outputs for all specific objectives in the field of transport, taking into account an expected
transfer to the European Fund for Strategic Investment
The Commission has launched calls for proposals in 2014 under the Multi Annual and Annual Work Programmes for an
amount of 11 billion EUR. The call for proposals was closed in March 20015. The applications are being evaluated and
the results of the projects for grant funding are expected to be presented to the CEF Transport Committee in June 2015,
while the individual grant agreements with the beneficiaries of the Member States are expected to be signed in Q3/Q4
2015.
The below presentation of the outputs, related to the realisation of the Core Network, is purely indicative, due to the fact
that no individual grants agreements have been signed yet with the beneficiaries of the Member States.
Once the projects are in the implementation phase, it will be possible to indicate the aggregated amounts on the number
of projects per country. Identify them on the Core Network Corridors and provide the amounts of funding already
committed to these projects, therefore contributing to the achieving of the Core Network.
Corridors
Horizontal Priorities including SESAR
1. Baltic - Adriatic Corridor

2. Warszawa - Berlin - Amsterdam/Rotterdam Felixstowe - Midlands
3. Mediterranean Corridor
4.Orient-East Med Corridor
5. Scandinavian Mediterranean
6. Rhine Alpine
7. Atlantic
8. North Sea Mediterranean
9. Rhine Danube Corridor
10. Other Sections on the Core Network
11. Creating conducive environment for transport
infrastructure projects (financial instruments)
Total
Budget line
06 02 01 02
and
06 02 01 03
06 02 01 01
DB 16:
B DB 2016
Cohesion Fund Total DB with
excluding the
allocation
Cohesion Fund
Cohesion Fund
Budget line 06
allocation
allocation
02 01 04
192
474
666
77
474
551
06 02 01 01
77
474
551
06 02 01 01
06 02 01 01
06 02 01 01
06 02 01 01
06 02 01 01
06 02 01 01
06 02 01 01
06 02 01 01
77
77
77
77
77
77
77
77
06 02 01 05
316
964
77
551
77
77
77
77
551
77
474
474
316
2 372
3 652
The allocation between the corridors is indicative ex ante estimation, as the method of implementation of the CEF is based on the competitive calls
for proposals. The exact allocation will only be known after the evaluation and grant award decision.

For the purpose of the 2016 exercise, the following elements of financial programming have been taken into
consideration:
the EUR 11, 3 billion EUR from the Cohesion Fund to be transfer to the field of transport in CEF, and
expected contribution from CEF transport to the EFSI amounting to EUR 650 million in 2016.
With reference to performance, at this stage it is not possible to provide tangible performance information for the
implementation of the CEF transport sector: the calls for proposals, for an amount of EUR 11 billion, have been
launched in 2014 and closed in March 2015. The submitted proposals for grants for works and studies are being
evaluated. The results of the evaluation process are expected to be presented to the CEF Transport Committee in June
2015, while individual grant agreements with the beneficiaries of the Member States to be signed in Q3/Q4 2015.
First data are expected to be available as from 2016 when the projects will be in the implementation phase. The
Commission is committed to exploit the TETtec database used for the monitoring of the programme in order to gather
appropriate indicators and consolidate data for the purposes of reporting under these programme statements.
Programme Statement
DB2016
CEF ENERGY
Specific Objective 4: Increasing competitiveness by promoting the further integration of the internal energy market
and the interoperability of electricity and gas networks across borders
Indicator 1: The number of projects effectively interconnecting Member States' networks and removing internal
constraints
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*) Data will be available end of 2015.
General remark specific objective 4 to 6

For specific objective 4 to 6, it is to be noted that the initial list of 248 energy infrastructure projects that are of common
interest (Projects of Common Interest (PCIs)) is updated every two years and the selection of PCIs is an on-going process
in order to cater for emerging projects geared to fulfil future needs. A revised list of PCIs is expected at the end of
November 2015. The cost-benefit analysis of the PCIs with relation to the specific objectives set in the CEF regulation is
subject to the methodology whose principles are set out in Annex V of the Guidelines for trans-European energy
infrastructure. The combined approach establishing the link between each element of that analysis and the specific
criteria is established in the methodology for an energy system wide cost-benefit analysis for gas and electricity of the
ENTSOs [1]. Since the latter was only approved by the Commission on 4 February 2015 (Commission Decision C(2015)
533) the milestones for some of the indicators can only be calculated once the methodology has been applied in the
selection of projects for the updated list of PCIs (end of 2015).
Indicator 2: The reduction or elimination of Member States' energy isolation
Milestones
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
9
3
0
Indicator 3: The percentage of electricity cross-border transmission power in relation to installed electricity
generation capacity in the relevant Member States
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
26 (only Spain
and Cyprus
16
16
23
remain below
target)
Baseline
2013
(*) Wording adapted because we measure number of Member States rather than a percentage
Indicator 4: Price convergence in the gas and/or electricity markets of the Member States concerned
Baseline
2014
(*)
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
(*)
2019
Target 2020
(*)
Indicator 5: The percentage of the highest peak demand of the two Member States concerned covered by reversible
flow interconnections for gas
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
(*)
(*)
(*)
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 5: Enhancing Union security of energy supply

Indicator 1: The number of projects allowing diversification of supply sources, supplying counterparts and routes
Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
3 major supply sources

of gas10 for the EU in
addition to liquefied
natural gas (LNG)
Indicator 2: The number of projects increasing storage capacity
Baseline
2013
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
Target 2020
2019
4 (including
Southern
Min 4
Gas
Corridor)
2018
2019
Target 2020
5 (storages
implemented)
Indicator 3: System resilience, taking into account the number of supply disruptions and their duration
0
Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
Gas: 9 MS do not meet

the N-1 formula (as
defined in Regulation
(EU) No 994/2010)
2018
2019
Target 2020
Gas: N-1 is met
by 25 MS (all
except CY, IE,
MT), 2 MS (SE,
LU) will still
have exemptions
Gas: N-1 is
met by EU22
Indicator 4: The amount of avoided curtailment of renewable energy

Baseline
2014
2015
(*)
Milestones
2016
2017
(*)
2018
2019
Target 2020
Min 5
Indicator 5: The connection of isolated markets to more diversified supply sources

Baseline
2013
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
19
2018
2019
Target 2020
27
(exception: CY)
22
Indicator 6: The optimal use of energy infrastructure assets

Baseline
2014
2015
(*)
Milestones
2016
2017
(*)
2018
2019
Target 2020
(*)
(*) Data will be end of 2015.
Specific Objective 6: Contributing to sustainable development and protection of the environment, by the integration of
energy from renewable sources into the transmission network and by the development of smart energy networks and
carbon dioxide networks
Indicator 1: The amount of renewable electricity transmitted from generation to major consumption centres and
storage sites
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
(*)
(*)
(*)
10
Major supply sources: Norway, Russian Federation and Algeria.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: The amount of avoided curtailment of renewable energy

Baseline
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
(*)
2015
(*)
2018
Target 2020
2019
(*)
(*)Data will be available end of 2015.
Indicator 3: The number of deployed smart grid projects which benefited from the CEF and the demand response
enabled by them
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*): There are only 2 projects on the first Union list of PCIs, one of them will receive funding of EUR 31 735 540. There are 3 projects being candidates
for the 2015 list: the two from the first list as well as a new project from Croatia/Slovenia.
Indicator 4: The amount of CO2 emissions prevented by the projects which benefited from the CEF
Baseline
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
(*)
2015
(*)
2018
2019
Target 2020
(*)
Expenditure related outputs in the field of energy

Following the first call for proposals under the multi-annual work programme 2014-2020, a total amount of EUR
674.267.080 in grants has been awarded to 34 actions. The bulk of this amount has been allocated to actions contributing
to ending the energy isolation of the Baltic States and to improving the security of supply in the region.
Although a first work programme for the financial instruments part of CEF was adopted on 18 December 2014, the
Delegation Agreement with the EIB as the entrusted entity has not yet been signed.
Therefore the money available under the 2014 appropriation (EUR 40.771.000) has not yet been attributed to concrete
projects identified by the EIB.
An amendment to the multi-annual work programme 2014-2020 for grants has been adopted on 3 March 2015 covering
actions to be executed in 2015, i.e. two calls for proposals with a total indicative volume of EUR 650.000.00.
CEF ICT
Specific Objective 7: To contribute to the interoperability, connectivity, sustainable deployment, operation and
upgrading of trans-European digital service infrastructures and coordination at European level
Indicator 1: Citizens and businesses using public services on-line
Baseline
2010
2014
41,2% of citizens
46,7% of citizens
using public services (year: 2014; source:
on-line
Digital
agenda
scoreboard)11
Latest data:
87,7% of business
75,7% of businesses (year 2013; source:
using public services Digital agenda
on-line
scoreboard)12
Milestones
2015
2016
2017
50% of
citizens
2018
2019
85% of
businesses
Target 2020
60% of citizens using
public services on-line
100% of businesses
using public services
on-line
* Milestones are contained in the eGovernment action Plan, agreed with the Member States and ending in 2015. Concerning the reached milestone of
2017, future actions in the domain will take into account the reported changes in the data.
11
12
Individuals interacting online with public authorities.

Enterprises interacting online with public authorities.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: Availability of cross-border public services

Baseline
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
46,6%
Of crossborder
public
services
source: EC
internal
services
n/a
2018
Target 2020
2019
100% of the crossborder public services

as laid out in the
Regulation (EU)
283/2014 on the
guidelines for transEuropean networks in
the area of
telecommunications
infrastructure
80%

The implementation of the building blocks supporting the entire digital service infrastructure (DSI) was launched in 2014
with the deployment/operation of the core service platforms for Europeana, Safer Internet for Children, eID/eSignature,
eDelivery, eInvoicing, Open Data, Automated Translation and Cyber Security as well as the generic services associated
with Safer Internet and eId. In 2015 operation and further deployment of the DSI for the eHealth, Online Dispute
Resolution and eProcurement is being implemented for the building blocks deployed in 2014.
In 2016 it is planned to continue the deployment/operation of other DSI services to be selected and implemented in
accordance with the Regulation (EU) 283/2014 on the guidelines for trans-European networks in the area of
telecommunications infrastructure.
Output
Digital service infrastructures developed
and deployed across Europe
Outputs
2014
1 Digital service
(F)
infrastructures developed and
deployed across Europe with
P
the support of CEF
Year
Budget line
2015
2016
09 03 03
09 03 03
Number
Draft Budget
EUR million
11
13
56,1
103,1

2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
11
13
Total
Specific Objective 8: To contribute to the efficient flow of private and public investments to stimulate the deployment
and modernisation of broadband networks
Indicator 1: Level of fast broadband coverage (e30 Mbs)
Milestones
2014
2015
2016
2017
62% of households
66%
70%
75%
80%
Indicator 2: Level of subscription to broadband connections above 100 Mbs
Baseline
2013
Baseline
2013
3%
2014
7%
2015
11%
Milestones
2016
2017
15%
20%
2018
2019
Target 2020
100%
2018
2019
Target 2020
50%
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
Budget line
Households connected to Broadband internet
Outputs
Households connected to
Broadband internet (mio)
2014
(F)
P
112
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
09 03 02
262

2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
185
262
343
358
37,287
Total
1 148
013
Implementation mechanisms in the ICT sector:

In the area of DSI, core service platforms will be implemented primarily by the EU while generic services are to be
implemented by the parties connecting to the relevant core service platform. Investments in broadband networks will be
undertaken predominantly by the private sector, supported by a competitive and investment-friendly regulatory
framework. Public support to broadband networks is provided only where there is market failure or a sub-optimal
investment situation. In accordance with the CEF Telecom guidelines, actions contributing to projects of common
interest in the field of digital service infrastructures are mainly supported by procurement and/or grants.
The Commission is also under process to set up Debt financial instrument with the EIB as a partner institution. The
instrument will be cross-sectorial (i.e. covering transport, energy and broadband). The Delegation Agreement with the
EIB is expected to be signed in the first quarter of 2015.
In addition, a facility to be set up by the Commission with World Bank as a partner institution will provide technical
assistance, with the aim of facilitating projects promoters' access to financial instruments established under the CEF. For
this purpose, the Commission has foreseen to provide a grant of up to EUR 900.000 to the World Bank in 201514. The
expected benefit will include the provision of know-how and the sharing of best practices, in particular to project
promoters identified under the Connected Communities Initiative.
Finally, in the field of superfast broadband connections, a French project was supported under Pilot Project Bond
Initiative launched by the European Commission and the European Investment Bank (EIB) in 2012, the aim of which is
to speed up the mobilisation of private capital for European infrastructure projects, in particular the roll-out of fibre
optics in sparsely populated areas ("public initiative areas"). Although the impact of this initiative on the generation of
additional household connections could not yet be quantified, this initiative is intended to be shortly merged into the CEF
in accordance with Article 14.3 of Regulation EU/ 1316/2013. The merger is justified by the need to optimise the use of
budgetary funds allocated to the CEF and ensure continuity of the Project Bond Initiative.
General justification of changes to the performance information of CEF programme:
On the 26th of November 2014 the Commission proposed "An Investment Plan for Europe" aiming at the mobilisation of
at least EUR 315 billion in additional investments over the next three years. The legislative proposal (COM (2015)10
final) for the establishment of the European Fund for Strategic Investments (EFSI) was adopted by the Commission on
the13th of January 2015. It foresees EUR 3.3 billion transfers from the CEF Programme for the provisioning of the
guarantee fund over the period 2015-2020. This reduction will affect the financial programming and might have an
impact on the number of expenditure related outputs in 2016 and specific objectives' milestones and targets.
Nevertheless, CEF projects might also benefit from the EFSI initiative.
13
14
In view of the delay in the establishment of CEF Debt instrument, the output for 2014 has not been achieved.
Grant awarded to the World Bank on the basis of Article 190(1)(f) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1268/2012 on the rules of
application of Regulation (EU, Euratom) No 966/2012 to set up technical assistance facility for broadband.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific activities in the field of financial reporting and auditing

Lead DG: FISMA
1.
Legal Basis

3 April 2014 establishing a Union programme to support specific activities in
the field of financial reporting and auditing for the period of 2014-20 and
repealing Decision No 716/2009/EC
2014
Total
2.
2015
6,8
6,8
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
43,2

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
8,0
8,0
8,1
8,1
4,9
4,9
5,0
5,0
5,1
5,1
2020
5,2
5,2
Total
43,2
43,2
2014
Impl.
PA
Impl.
Rate
Rate
6,800 100,00 %
4,896 100,00 %
CA
6,800 100,00 %
4,896 100,00 %
CA
7,959
2015
Impl.
PA
Rate
0,00 %
6,589
7,959
0,00 %
6,589
Impl.
Rate
0,00 %
0,00 %
3.
EU added value
In a global economy, there is a need for a global accounting language. International Financial Reporting Standards
(IFRS) developed by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) are adopted and used in many jurisdictions
around the world. Such international accounting standards need to be developed under a transparent and democratically
accountable process. To ensure that global standards are of high quality and compatible with Union law, it is essential
that the interests of the Union are adequately taken into account in that international standard-setting process. Regarding
auditing it is important to make sure that the International Federation of Accountants (IFAC) standard setting activities
are properly responsive to the public interest. The Public Interest Oversight Board (PIOB) is responsible for monitoring
the due process of the standard setting process.
Not applicable.
Programme Statement
4.
DB2016
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: to improve the conditions for the efficient functioning of the internal market by supporting the
transparent and independent development of international financial reporting and auditing standards
Indicator 1: number of countries using International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
Baseline
2012
2014
In 2013 approximately 128

countries use IFRS.
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
130
2018
Target 2020
2019
130
Maintain positive trend
Indicator 2: number of Member States using International Standards on Auditing (ISA)

Milestones
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
N/A
N/A
N/A
Indicator 3: percentage of standards endorsed in the EU compared to the number of standards issued by the IASB
Baseline
Baseline
2014
On 29 October 2012, 89 % of
IFRSs was endorsed in the EU
(124 standards out of 139).
2015
96 %
Milestones
2016*
2017
2018
Target 2020
2019
96 %
100 % by 2020
*The 2016 milestone has been defined taking into account the time needed to adopt the standards in the EU.
Output
Budget line
Support to IFRS Foundation

Support to the European Financial Reporting Advisory Group (EFRAG)
Support to the Public Interest Oversight Board (PIOB)
Total
12 02 03
12 02 03
12 02 03
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
4,5
3,3
0,3
8,1

The figures on the financial programming (point1) do not include the prospective `reserve` for EFRAG for years 20172020.
EFRAG
2017
2018
2019
2020
Total
(EUR million)
3,356
3,423
3,491
3,561
13,831
Programme Statement
DB2016
Interoperability Solutions for European public administrations, businesses and

citizens (ISA2)
Lead DG: DIGIT
1.
Legal Basis
COM(2014) 367 final Proposal for a decision establishing a programme on

Interoperability Solutions for European public administrations, businesses and
citizens (ISA2)
DB2016
Total
2.
0,4
24,4
24,8
Period of
application
2016 - 2020

2017
2018
2019
2020
0,4
25,1
25,5
0,4
25,8
26,2
0,4
26,5
26,9
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
Total
0,4
27,1
27,5
2,0
128,9
130,9
Not applicable
3.
EU added value
The ISA2 Programme aim is to improve Pan-European interoperability amongst European public administrations. By
achieving this goal, it will contribute to the Digital Single Market (DSM) and to the reinforcement and implementation of
Union policies and legislation. Indeed, the Commission considers the cross-border interoperability of online services and
the digitisation of European public administrations to be important contributors to growth and increased efficiency.
Interoperability between administrations is a key enabler for more efficient and effective delivery of digital services, thus
to the modernisation of public administrations at EU, national, regional and local levels. Moreover, seeking synergies
through coordination across borders or sectors and promoting sharing and re-using existing interoperability solutions has
the potential to considerably reduce the multiplication of costs at all levels of administration.
Its added value further consists of:
- the monitoring of the European interoperability landscape in a consistent and systematic way with identification
of all existing and missing solutions;
- the sustainability of the technical services established by past and current programmes;
- the implementation and support of the common interoperable solutions that can be shared by the administrations
in different Member States;
- the operation of existing or new interoperable solutions through Union service delivery channels;
- the support of the implementation of Union policies and legislation relying on interoperability.
In order to ensure this comprehensive approach as well as a common vision, common models and a common
terminology, a horizontal action at EU level, across sectors, is fully justified since Member States acting independently
could not achieve the necessary interoperability for cross-border or cross-sector electronic public services and establish
common and shared solutions in support of the interaction between European public administrations. Furthermore,
synergies when implementing Union policies and legislation relying on interoperability could hardly, if ever, be
achieved, without Union intervention.
As underlined in the Digital Agenda for Europe (DAE), a Europe 2020 flagship initiative, interoperability is essential to
maximising the social and economic potential of ICT and, consequently, DAE can take off only if interoperability is
ensured.
At Union level, inter-service coordination will ensure that activities are aligned with those in other policy areas (e.g.
European Semester, country-specific reports/recommendations) with a view to maximising coherence and synergies.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Not applicable

Digital agenda for Europe
Amount Budget 2015

(EUR Million)
18,0
Amount in DB 2016
(EUR Million)
14,0
The amount of contribution to the DAE will be lower in 2016 since solutions developed and funded under the ISA programme (i.e. eDelivery, e-Identification, etc.) have already been taken over by other initiatives such as Connecting Europe Facility.

Not applicable
Not applicable
General objectives
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: To facilitate efficient and effective electronic cross-border or cross-sector interaction between
European public administrations and between them and citizens and businesses, in order to enable the delivery of
electronic public services supporting the implementation of Union policies and activities
Indicator 1: the number of key interoperability enablers
Milestones
Baseline
Target
2020
2016
2017
2018
2019
3*
4
6
7
8
8
Indicator 2: the number of supporting instruments for public administrations delivered to and used by European
public administrations
Milestones
Target
Baseline
2020
2016
2017
2018
2019
4*
7
9
11
13
13
* The number mentioned in the baseline for both indicators corresponds to the major actions that will be carried over to the new
programme ISA 2 and should not be confused with the amount of outputs created by the ISA programme.

Output
Key interoperability enablers
Support the effective implementation of EU legislation
Supporting instruments for European public administrations
Accompanying measures
Monitoring activities
Total
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
26 03 01
26 03 01
26 03 01
26 03 01
26 03 01
4
5
7
4
2
10,6
7,5
3,0
2,5
0,8
24,4
Programme Statement
Outputs
Key interoperability
enablers
Support the effective
implementation of EU
legislation
Supporting instruments
for European public
administrations
Accompanying
measures
Monitoring activities
F
P
F
DB2016

2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
4
6
7
8
8
Total
8
10
12
12
11
13
13
13
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
Programme Statement
DB2016
European statistical programme (ESP)

Lead DG: ESTAT
1.
Legal Basis

(EUR million)

of 17 December 2013 amending Regulation (EU) No 99/2013 on the European
statistical programme 2013-17
2014
Total
2.
2015
2,9
53,4
56,3
2013 - 2017
234,8

DB2016
2017
2,9
54,9
57,8
3,0
56,4
59,4
Total
3,1
58,0
61,1
11,9
222,7
234,6
2014
Impl.
PA
Impl.
Rate
Rate
63,750 108,08 %
33,943 111,76 %
CA
56,376 98,36 %
23,944 98,65 %
2015
Impl.
PA
Impl.
Rate
Rate
61,046 6,19 % 40,741 35,05 %
CA
57,854
5,39 %
32,539 31,27 %
3.
EU added value
Political decision-makers and actors in the market constantly need statistics in order to make their decisions and monitor
and evaluate their implementation. Statistics provide an essential infrastructure for democracies and modern economies
to function soundly and efficiently. The European Union needs a high-quality statistical information service in order to
fulfil its mission. European statistics must be reliable, timely and independent of political influence and provided in a
convenient form for users.
Together with the national statistical authorities and other national authorities responsible in each Member State for the
development, production and dissemination of European statistics, Eurostat has created a partnership collectively called
the European Statistical System (ESS). This partnership also includes the EEA countries. Member States collect data and
compile statistics for national and EU purposes.
The ESS facilitates the sharing of knowledge and best practices across Member States and the development of new
technologies, common tools and collaborative networks with a view to taking advantage of possible synergies and
avoiding duplication of effort, thus paving the way for a modern production system equipped to meet future challenges.
Efforts to harmonise, streamline and regulate can best be initiated at the European Union level, where such projects can
be carried out with optimal efficiency.
The ESP 2013-2017 is not among the Commission initiatives which have been identified as having far reaching
economic, social and environmental impacts and it is therefore not included in the Commission Work Programme. The
decisions to produce European statistics are driven by policy-making. The objective is to support policy-making by
providing European Institutions and the governments of Member States with relevant statistical information needed to
design, implement, monitor and evaluate EU policies.
Programme Statement
DB2016

See paragraph under 3.2.
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: The European Statistical System to be the leading provider of high-quality statistics on Europe.
Indicator 1: Percentage of users that rate as "Very good" or "Good" the overall quality of the data and services
provided by Eurostat
Milestones*
Baseline
Target 2017
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
71,5% targeted value 72,4% targeted value
70,6%
73,2%
74,1%
75%
Result: 69,7%
Result: 70,3%
*Milestones: it is assumed that there will be an approximately linear progression between the value of 2012 and the target for 2017. The figures are
only indicative because the indicator is based on an internet opinion survey and the level of representativeness of the sample of respondents cannot be
assessed and may vary from one year to the other.
Source: Eurostat annual User Satisfaction Survey. The full reports are available on demand.
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: To provide statistical information, in a timely manner, to support the development, monitoring
and evaluation of the policies of the Union properly reflecting priorities, while keeping a balance between economic,
social and environmental fields and serving the needs of the wide range of users of European statistics, including other
decision-makers, researchers, businesses and European citizens in general, in a cost-effective manner without
unnecessary duplication of effort.
Indicator 1: Percentage of users that rate as "Very good" or "Good" the overall quality of European statistics
Baseline
2012
62,9%
Milestones*
2013
2014
64,3% targeted value 65.7% targeted value
Result:62,6%
Result: 64,4%
2015
2016
Target
2017
67,2%
68,6%
70%
Indicator 2: Number of data extractions made by external users from Eurostat reference databases (EuroBase and
Comext) via the Eurostat website (using the Data Explorer or Easy Comext)expressed in millions
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2017
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
7,87
8,3
8,5
8,7
Result: 7,98
Result: 7,79
Target 2017 = value of 2012 +10%. It is assumed that that there will be an approximately linear progression between the value of 2012 and the target
for 2017.
Source: Monitoring reports on Eurostat electronic dissemination. Milestones: it is assumed that that there will be an approximately linear progression
between the value of 2012 and the target for 2017.
Indicator 3: Degree of achievement of the Specific Objective measured as percentage of the achievement of the
Outputs related to it
Milestones
Baseline
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
N/A-indicator 100% targeted value 100% targeted value
100%
100%
100 %
created in 2013
Result: 87,1%
Result: 92,3%
Programme Statement
DB2016
Twice a year, DG ESTATs units give a mark to each of the outputs under their responsibility. The marks are the following: "Completed", "On target",
"Emerging difficulties", "Serious difficulties". Sources: Estat.

Output
Budget line
Statistical activities-total
Of which:
Economic governance
Economic and social performance
Environmental sustainability
Business statistics
Peoples Europe
Geospatial, environmental, agriculture and other sectoral statistics
Training, innovation and research
Dissemination and communication
Total
Outputs
Outputs related to the
Statistical activities
F
P
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
29 02 01
10
18
4
15
12
47
5
15
126

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
126
126
126
126
NA
NA
NA
110
1,3
14,9
1,2
3,2
2,7
7,9
0,5
2,5
34,2
Total (2014-2017)
504
Specific Objective 2: To implement new methods of production of European statistics aiming at efficiency gains and
quality improvements.
Indicator 1: Percentage of users that rate as "Very good" or "Good" the timeliness of European statistics for their
purposes
Milestones*
Baseline
Target
2012
2017
2013
2014
2015
2016
56,3%
58,5%
59,3%
60%
Result: 55,1%
Result: 58,4%
Indicator 2: Timeliness of statistics: average number of days in advance (positive) or delay (negative), in
comparison to the legal target:
1) Principle European Economic Indicators (PEEIs): Euro Area monthly series
2) Principle European Economic Indicators (PEEIs): Euro Area quarterly series
3) Foreign trade with countries outside the EU: Comext-Extra: data sent by MS to Eurostat
Milestones
Baseline
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
0 targeted value
0 targeted value
Results:
Results:
1) -0.10
1) -0.6
1) -1.2
0
0
0
2) -10.2
2) -10.1
2) -10.5
3) +3
3) +2
3) +2
Source for PEEIS: annual Status report on information requirements in EMU to the Economic and Financial Committee. The list of PEEIs is defined in
the Communication of the Commission to the European Parliament and the council on Eurozone statistics COM/2002/661.
Source for Comext-Extra: Eurostat internal report on Comext database. More detailed information is available on demand.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Milestones
Baseline
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
N/A Indicator
100% targeted value
100% targeted value
100%
100%
100%
created in 2013
Result: 86,1%
Result: 86,4%
Twice a year, Eurostat units give a mark to each of the outputs under their responsibility. The marks are the following: "Achieved", "Not achieved",
"Output revised" (which are counted as "Not achieved"). The "ideal" target is 100% every year.
Sources: Estat.

Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Budget line
Of which:
European Statistical System (ESS) quality management
Multipurpose statistics and efficiency gains in production
Total
29 02 01
2
37
39
0,5
20,0
20,5

Outputs
Outputs related to
Statistical Activities
the
F
P
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
39
34
39
39
39
NA
NA
NA
Total (2014-2017)
156
Specific Objective 3: To strengthen the partnership within the European Statistical System and beyond in order to
further enhance its productivity and its leading role in official statistics worldwide
Indicator 1: Percentage of users that rate as "Very good" or "Good" the comparability of European statistics
among regions and countries
Milestones*
Baseline
Target
2012
2017
2013
2014
2015
2016
56,4% targeted value
56,2%
58,5%
59,3%
60%
Result: 58,0%
Result: 58,6%
*Milestones: it is assumed that that there will be an approximately linear progression between the value of 2012 and the target for 2017. The figures
are only indicative because the indicator is based on an internet opinion survey and the level of representativeness of the sample of respondents cannot
be assessed and may vary from one year to the other.
Milestones
Baseline
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
N/A indicator
100% targeted value
100% targeted value
100%
100%
100%
created in 2013
Result: 92,8%
Result: 93%
Twice a year, Eurostat units give a mark to each of the MP outputs under their responsibility. The marks are the following: "Achieved", "Not
achieved", "Output revised" (which are counted as "Not achieved"). The "ideal" target is 100% every year.
Source: ESTAT.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Budget line
Of which:
Partnership with the European Statistical System (ESS) and beyond
29 02 01
17
1,7
Total
(20132017)
68
Outputs
Outputs related to the Statistical activities
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
17
17
17
17
NA
16
2019
NA
2020
NA
Specific Objective 4*: To ensure that delivery of statistics is kept consistent throughout the whole duration of the
programme, provided that this does not interfere with the priority-setting mechanisms of the ESS.
*This Specific Objective makes reference and is related to the Specific Objective n. 1.
Indicator 1: Length of the time series of a sample of statistics: Euro Indicators (active series)*
Milestones
Indicator 1a
Baseline 2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
>40% targeted value
15 years: 41,7%
52,5%
56,3%
Result: 40,7%
Result: 44,5%
Milestones
Indicator 1b
Baseline 2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
90% targeted value
90% targeted value
10 years: 94,4%
90%
90%
Result: 94,8%
Result: 95%
Target
2017
60%
Target
2017
90%
* The indicator refers to the duration (in years) of a sample of statistics. Accordingly, there two different indicators (1a and 1b) measured.
Source: analysis of the series of the datasets included in EuroInd domain available on Eurostat website
http://epp.eurostat.ec.europa.eu/portal/page/portal/statistics/search_database

There is no specific action (budget) allocated to the objective N4.
All the actions related to it are fulfilling the specific objective N1.
Note on the performance information
The financial programming information and the indicators are based on the Outputs of the Management Plan available on
Europa website at http://ec.europa.eu/atwork/synthesis/amp/index_en.htm
Programme Statement
DB2016
Statement on Financial Intervention of the European Fund for Strategic

Investments (EFSI)
Lead DG: ECFIN
Implemented by: EIB1
DISCLAIMER:
PRELIMINARY DRAFT - TO BE REFINED AFTER THE ADOPTION OF THE REGULATION
Period of application
Reference Amount
Legal Basis2
(EUR million)
Proposal for a Regulation of the European Parliament and of the Council
2015 - 2020
on the European Fund for Strategic Investments and amending
Regulations (EU) No 1291/2013 and (EU) No 1316/2013
DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2015
Provisioning of the guarantee fund in
commitment
Operational appropriations European
Investment Advisory Hub
TOTAL
Total
1350
2030
2641
1979
8000
10
20
20
20
20
20
110
1360
2050
2661
1999
20
20
8110
EU added value
In accordance with the principles of subsidiarity and proportionality set out in Article 5 of the Treaty on European Union,
the objectives of the proposed action cannot be sufficiently achieved by the Member States and can therefore be better
achieved by the EU. By reason of the disparities in Member States' fiscal capacity to act, action at Union level can better
achieve the objectives pursued, by reason of its scale and effects. More specifically, the EU level will provide for
economies of scale in the use of innovative financial instruments by catalysing private investment in the whole EU and
making best use of the European Institutions and their expertise and knowledge for that purpose. The multiplying effect
and the impact on the ground will thus be much higher than what could be achieved by an investment offensive in a
single Member State or a Group of Member States. The Union's Single Market, together with the fact that there will be
no country-specific or sectorial project allocation, will provide for greater attractiveness for investors and lower
aggregated risks. The proposal does not go beyond what is necessary to achieve the objectives pursued.
General objectives
General Objective 1:
Supporting growth-enhancing investments in line with Union budgetary priorities, especially in the areas of:
- Strategic infrastructure (Digital and energy investments in line with the EU policies)
- Transport infrastructure in industrial centres, education, research and innovation
Investments boosting employment, in particular through SME funding and measures for youth employment
Indicator 1: The cumulative volume of funding raised
2015
Estimated volume of funding
raised
Actual volume of funding raised
2
3
2016
2017
EUR 315
billion3
2018
2019
2020
The EFSI is to be established within the EIB in order to benefit from its experience and proven track record and in order for its operations to start
to have a positive impact as quickly as possible. The work of EFSI on providing finance to small and medium enterprises and small mid-cap
companies should be channelled through the European Investment Fund ('EIF') to benefit from its experience in these activities.
Commission proposal has to be adopted under the "ordinary legislative procedure" (co-decision) by the Union legislators, the European
Parliament and Council.
The target is to mobilise by end-2017 at least EUR 315 billion for committed investment (EUR 240 billion under IIW and EUR 75 billion under
SMEW).
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 1: Increasing the number and volume of European Investment Bank (EIB) financing and
investment operations in priority areas
Indicator 1: The number of projects having received EIB financing
Number of projects financed
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2018
2019
2020
Indicator 2: The cumulative volume of funding raised for supported projects

2015
Volume of funding raised
2016
2017
Specific Objective 2: Increasing the volume of European Investment Fund (EIF) financing for small and medium
enterprises
Indicator 1: The number of projects having received EIF financing
Number of projects financed
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2018
2019
2020
Indicator 2: The cumulative volume of funding raised for supported projects

2015
Volume of funding raised
2016
2017
Specific Objective 3: To provide advisory support for investment project identification, preparation and development
to public and private counterparts, not necessarily linked to EFSI operations through the European Investment
Advisory Hub (EIAH4)5
Indicator 1: The number of projects for which the support have been requested
2015
Number of projects
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2018
2019
2020
Indicator 2: The number of projects that have received the support

2015
Number of projects
2016
2017
Indicator 3: The number events (training courses, seminars, workshops) organised by the EIAH
2015
Number of training events
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020

Draft Budget 2016
EUR million
Co-financing of the EIAH*
01 04 06
20,0
* According to the Proposal, art. 22 shall be partially financed by the Union up to a maximum amount of EUR 20
million per year during the period ending on 31 December 2020 for the additional services provided by the EIAH over
existing EIB technical assistance.
Output
Budget line
The European Investment Advisory Hub (EIAH) is a dedicated structure to be established within the EIB- building on the support of Commission
services and other relevant bodies (such as the National promotional Banks) - aiming at offering a single point of access for technical assistance
on project structuring, use of innovative financial instruments, use of PPPs and advice where appropriate on relevant issues of EU legislation.
The monitoring of the results will be based on the reporting provided by the EIB and market research
Programme Statement
DB2016
Programme Statement
DB2016
HEADING 1B ECONOMIC, SOCIAL AND

TERRITORIAL COHESION
HEADING 1B ECONOMIC, SOCIAL AND TERRITORIAL COHESION / 165
Programme Statement
DB2016
HEADING 1B: Economic, social and territorial cohesion

Lead DG: EMPL
1.
Legal Basis
Period of
application
Regulation (EU) No 1304/2013 of the European Parliament and of the

Council of 17 December 2013 on the European Social Fund and repealing
Council Regulation (EC) No 1081/2006
Total
Of which Youth Employment
initiative to up allocation
2014**
2015
11 390,7
15 023,9
1 706,6
1 504,6
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
Financial Programming (EUR million)*

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
12 015,0
12 307,6
12 633,3
12 956,6
2020
Total
13 300,6 89 627,7
3 211,2
*this overview table reflects the indicative Financial Programming, for more details refer to Doc II of the Statement of Estimates.
** this amount takes into account 2014 non-used allocation transferred to subsequent years according to Council Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2015/623
of 21 April 2015
2.
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
11 241,173 68,82 % 602,243 99,63 % 12 855,517 102,49 % 1 929,268
46,09 %
Authorised
appropriation 11 241,173 68,82 % 602,179 98,69 % 12 855,517 102,50 % 1 929,268
revenue
45,99 %
3.
EU added value
The ESF is the EU's main financial instrument to support structural reforms in the fields of employment, education and
training, with a direct link to the priorities and headline targets of the Europe 2020 strategy in terms of employment,
education and poverty. It contributes to the promotion of economic and social cohesion and social inclusion within the
EU and serves as an instrument for financial solidarity and economic integration.
The ESF brings significant and lasting effects in terms of:
Volume by increasing the resources available for employment and social inclusion policies. On average the ESF
corresponds to approximately 14.7%1of the Member States spending on active labour market measures. In all EU-12
Member States, ESF spending on active labour market policies (ALMP) represents more than half of the total ALMP
funding (54.1% 2007-20102). In the 2014-2020periodthe ESF has also received an important and more visible mission to
directly support the Youth Employment Initiative (YEI), providing additional support and matching funding to the
1
2
This is the result of the following calculation: "ESF commitments 2007-2010 / (Member States Active Labour Market Policy expenditures + ESF
commitments 2007-2010".
Source: Eurostat LMP data base.
Programme Statement
DB2016
special YEI budget line under the cohesion policy sub-heading of the MFF. This will provide a channel to intervene
directly on the young person's not in employment, education or training (NEET) target group, in the EU regions with the
highest youth unemployment rates. This highlights the role of the ESF as main EU level financial instrument to invest in
human capital and to help avoiding the emergence of a "lost generation" in Europe.
Scope by "broadening" existing action and support groups or policy areas that would not otherwise receive support. This
can be due to economic externalities or because support for these groups or policies is difficult to gain at the national
level. With regard to young people, in particular NEET, ESF support to the YEI will increase the visibility and added
value of employment measures for youth.
Role by fostering innovative projects and approaches as well as mutual learning between Member States and
stakeholders. The ESF has been instrumental in shifting from curative to preventive labour market policies, or taking up
support for integrating new target groups into work (ex-offenders, migrants, etc.).
Process by influencing Member States and actors within them and increasing the visibility or prominence of shared EU
policy objectives. The ESF has impact in terms of governance, the definition and implementation of policies, the culture
of monitoring, evaluation, innovation and mutual learning.
Recognising the particularly difficult situation of young people in certain regions and in line with the European Council
conclusions of February 2013, the Commission has proposed to create a Youth Employment Initiative (YEI)to add to
and reinforce the very considerable support already provided through the EU structural funds. This initiative is open to all
regions (NUTS3level 2) with levels of youth unemployment above 25 %. Half of the support for the initiative is financed
by a specific budget line, while at least a corresponding amount should be financed from targeted investment from the
ESF envelope.

tertiary degree

Budget 2015
(EUR million)
3 105,3
DB 2016
(EUR million)
2 643,3
8 186,7
6 968,7
2 823,0
2 403,0
Total
14 115,0
12 015,0
Flagship
Youth on the move

Not applicable
Not applicable
4.
Specific objectives
By 20/02/2015, 148 Operational Programmes (OPs) have been adopted ("Decision OK" status in SFC). 39 OPs in 10
Member States (MS) are yet to be adopted. This constitutes the base for the milestones and target' estimations included in
the present programme statement4.
For the 2014-2020 programming period, the Commission and the Member States agreed on a common set of output and
immediate results indicators on which MS will report annually (Annual Implementation Reports) as from 2016. The
reporting will be done at programme's level covering the thematic objectives on employment, education, social inclusion
and institutional capacity.
3
4
Nomenclature of territorial units for statistics (NUTS).

By May 2015, 152 OPs were adopted 35 OPs in 9 Member States (MS) are yet to be adopted.
Programme Statement
DB2016
In terms of setting targets, Managing Authorities were free to use programme-specific indicators or common indicators in
the OPs (except for YEI result indicators). So far, approximately half of Member States in which at least one OP is
already adopted chose to set targets for programme-specific indicators only. The information on common indicators
available to estimate EU targets is therefore partial at this stage. However, as all MS will report on all common indicators
as from 2016, the Commission should have a more complete picture to update the targets and milestones currently set.
Unless stated otherwise, the target for 2023 expressed in percentages in the following tables derive from the information
on common indicators encoded by the Member States, following a first plausibility check. They relate to the 148
operational programmes only. Once all operational programmes are adopted and on the basis of the first reporting by all
MS on common indicators (2016), the related figures on targets and milestones will be updated in so far as possible.
Concerning YEI, by 20/02/2015, 28 OPs in 15 Member States have been adopted and 6 OPs are yet to be adopted.
Targets have been set systematically for common result indicators and therefore there is a higher level of confidence in
these targets. However limitations still remain and these targets may not reflect the figures which shall be reached.
Calculations for the target 2018 are based on the information on common indicators gathered from the 28 adopted OPs by
February 2015 and extrapolated to 34 OPs whilst milestones are derived from the 2018 target on the basis of an expected
phasing of implementation5. Once all operational programmes are adopted, the related figures on target and milestones
will be updated in so far as possible.
In the regions eligible for the Youth Employment Initiative, 4.2 million NEETs are eligible for support.
Specific Objective 1: Promoting sustainable and quality employment and supporting labour mobility6
Indicator 1: Number of participants benefiting from ESF under this thematic objective
Baseline (period 2007-2013)
21,7 million cumulative
Milestone 2018
Target 2023
Note 1: Due to the multiannual nature of the programme and the large annual variances, comparing to a full
programming period is the most relevant indicator. Target is therefore to reach a number of participants that is at least
equal to the 2007-2013 figures. This indicator will be revised on the basis of the first reporting by all MS on common
indicators (2016).
Note 2: Because of the limitations mentioned above, DG EMPL currently keeps 21.7 million as a target for 2023, based
on elements from the performance of the 2007-2013 programming period. The figures on targets and milestones will be
updated once all OPs are adopted, also taking into account specific indicators.
Note 3: "Number of participants" measures the number of participations per operation. Over 10 years (7 years of the
programming period + 3) one person can participate in several ESF operations and be counted more than once. For YEI
the period is limited to 5 years (2 + 3).
Indicator 2: Participants (unemployed or inactive) in employment, including self-employment, upon leaving
5
6
Baseline
Milestone 2018
Target 2023
No data available from the previous

period
24%
24%
By May 2015, 33 OPs in 20 Member States have been adopted and 1 OP is yet to be adopted.
It should be noted that the output indicator 1 "Number of participants" cover participants benefitting from ESF under this thematic objective only
whilst indicator 2 covers all actions under all thematic objectives.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 2: Promoting social inclusion, combating poverty and any discrimination7
Indicator 1: Participants considered as part of disadvantaged groups that are reached by the ESF8
Latest-known result9
Milestone 2018
(Disabled, Migrants, Minorities & Others)
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
18.4%
17% 21.2% 19.2% 20.3%
24%
24%
Target 2023
20%
20%
Note 1:
Only a very limited number of OPs have targets set specifically for these categories of disadvantaged groups, although
the actual number of supported disadvantaged people is likely to be larger given the range of ESF interventions.
Considering the ratio of all disadvantaged groups over total participants (9.2%), the ratio of participants to the thematic
objective (TO9) that addresses issues of social exclusion, poverty and discrimination (24.2%) and based on previous
results from the 2007-2013 programming period, DG EMPL keeps 20% as the target for 2023. This will be updated after
the adoption of all Operational Programmes. The related figures on targets and milestones will be updated once all
operational programmes are adopted.
Note 2:
Data related to the disadvantaged situation of participants is considered sensitive data in the sense of Article 8 of the
Directive on the protection of individuals with regard to the processing of personal data and on the free movement of data
(OJ No L 46, 20.11.1995). Hence recording these data is subject to very stringent data protection standards. Therefore,
the data sets submitted for these indicators are likely to be underreported.
Indicator 2: Inactive participants engaged in job searching upon leaving
Baseline
No data available from the previous period
Milestone 2018
Target 2023
27%
27%
Indicator 3: Participants above 54 years of age.

Baseline
2007
6.1%
2008
4.4%
2009
5.5%
2010
5.9%
2011
7.1%
2012
6.2%
Milestone 2018
Target 2023
6% of all ESF participants
6% of all ESF
participants
2013
5.8%
Only a very limited number of OPs have targets set specifically for this category. The target set for 2023 is therefore
based on the results of the indicator "Older people (55-64 years)" from the 2007-2013 programming period. The related
figures on targets and milestones will be updated once all operational programmes are adopted.
7
8
It should be noted that these indicators cover all actions under all thematic objectives.
Migrants, participants with a foreign background, minorities (including marginalised communities such as the Roma); Participants with
disabilities; Participants who live in a single adult household with dependent children; Participants who live in jobless households; Other
disadvantaged. These will be broken down by the different categories. Persons may cumulate several disadvantages.
Annual Implementation Reports 2013.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 3: Investing in education, training and vocational training for skills and life-long learning10
Indicator 1: Number of participants benefiting from ESF under this thematic objective
Baseline
Milestone 2018
15,9 million cumulative (2014-2018)
Target 2023
Note 1: Due to the multiannual nature of the programme and the large annual variances, comparing to a full programming
period is the most relevant indicator. Target is therefore to reach a number of participants that is at least equal to the 20072013 figures. This indicator will be revised on the basis of the first reporting by all MS on common indicators (2016).
Note2: Because of the limitations mentioned above the available information based on common indicators is only partial
and is not likely to reflect the figures which shall be reached. DG EMPL therefore keeps 23.8 million as a target for 2023,
based on elements from the performance of the 2007-2013 programming period. These figures are indicative and will be
revised once all Operational Programmes are adopted.
Indicator 2: Participants gaining a qualification upon leaving
Baseline
Milestone 2018
Target 2023
No data available from the previous period
48%
48%
Specific Objective 4: Enhancing institutional capacity of public authorities and stakeholders and efficient public
administration
Indicator 1: Number of projects targeting public administrations or public services at national, regional or local level
Baseline
Milestones 2018
Target 2023
185 projects per year
900 projects (cumulative 2014-2018)
2250 projects
Note: The baseline provided is based on some Programmes of the 2007-2013 programming period. The related figures on
targets and milestones are calculated on the basis of the 148 adopted OPs and extrapolated to the 187 OPs. They will be
updated once all operational programmes are adopted.
Specific Objective 5: Promoting specific support to young NEETs (15-24)11

Indicator 1: Number of participants aged 15-24 benefiting from ESF
aseline
Milestone 2018
Target 2023
3 million per year
15,5 million cumulative (2014-2018)
Note: Because of the limitations mentioned above the available information based on common indicators is only partial
and is not likely to reflect the figures which shall be reached. DG EMPL therefore keeps 23.1 million as a target for 2023,
based on elements from the performance of the 2007-2013 programming period. The figures are indicative and will be
revised once all Operational Programmes are adopted.
Indicator 2: Unemployed participants who complete the YEI supported intervention
10
11
Baseline
Milestone 2016
Target 2018
No baseline
894 thousand
2,1 million
It should be noted that the output indicator 1 "Number of participants" cover participants benefitting from ESF under this thematic objective
whilst indicator 2 covers all actions under all thematic objectives.
It should be noted that the output indicator 1 cover participants benefitting from ESF under all thematic objective whilst the other indicators (2 to
5) refer exclusively to the YEI supported actions. In compliance with art 16 of the ESF Regulation (EU) No 1304/2013, Member States may
decide to extend the YEI target group to include young persons under the age of 30.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 3: Unemployed participants in education/training, gaining a qualification or in employment, including

self-employment, upon leaving the YEI supported intervention12
Baseline
Milestone 2016
Target 2018
No baseline
420 thousand
980 thousand
Indicator 4: Inactive participants not in education or training who complete the YEI supported intervention
Baseline
Milestone 2016
Target 2018
No baseline
295 thousand
694 thousand
Indicator 5: Inactive participants not in education or training in education/training, gaining a qualification or in

employment, including self-employment, upon leaving the YEI supported intervention13
Baseline
Milestone 2016
Target 2018
No baseline
150 thousand
353 thousand

Output
Budget line
Number of participants / year benefiting directly from

an ESF investment
04 02 60
04 02 61
04 02 62
04 02 64
Outputs (annual reporting starting

from 2016)
DB '16
Output (no.)
EUR million
10 million
12 015,0
Number (million) of outputs foreseen (F) and

produced (P)*
Total(million)
2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

Number of participants / year F
benefiting directly from an ESF
investment*
P
10
15
15
15
15
77
* Figures based approximately on the outputs produced in the programming period 2007-2013. The figures are indicative
and will be revised once all Operational Programmes are adopted.
12
13
This indicator is not a direct subset of indicator 2 as it may also include participants who did not complete the intervention.
This indicator is not a direct subset of indicator 4 as it may also include participants who did not complete the intervention.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Programmes' implementation 2014-2020

Thematic objectives of the Common
Strategic Framework
1.Promoting
employment
mobility*
sustainable and
and supporting
quality
labour
Payments
Commitments Payments
end
EUR million end Year N
(2)/(1)%
Year N + 1
(1)
(2)
(3)
30 967,6
2.Promoting social inclusion, combating

poverty and any discrimination
21 129,2
3. Investing in education, training and

vocational training for skills and life-long
learning
27 043,6
4. Enhancing institutional capacity of

public authorities and stakeholders and
efficient public administration
3 641,1
5. Promoting specific support to young

NEETs (15-24) **
3 211,2
Technical Assistance***
3 635,0
TOTAL ****
Interim payments
executed
by Commission (4)/(1)%
end Year N + 1
(4)
89 627,7
* Corresponding to Thematic Objective 8 in the Common Strategic Framework (CSF) although excluding the YEI
specific allocation which is shown on a separate line (5.)
** These appropriations do relate to the YEI specific allocation only. This objective was created to plan and report on the
YEI results in the Management Plans and Annual Activity Reports although it does not exist in the CSF (part of
Thematic Objective 8 in the CSF).
*** Technical assistance of the Member States as foreseen by Article 119 of the Common Provisions Regulation (CPR Regulation (EU) No 1303/2013)
**** Data is based on all OPs (adopted and in draft). The figures in the above table are estimates due to the fact that all
OPs have not been adopted yet. Data concerning payments to be provided only after the first year of significant interim
payments.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Lead DG: REGIO
Associated DGs: NEAR
1.
Legal Basis
Period of
application
Regulation (EU) no 1301/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council

of 17 December 2013 on the European Regional Development Fund and on
specific provisions concerning the Investment for growth and jobs goal and
repealing Regulation (EC) No 1080/2006
2014***
Total
2015
17 090,4
33 267,6
2014 - 2020
Financial Programming (EUR million)*/**

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
26 952,1
Reference
Amount
(EUR million)
2020
Total
28 702,6 29 529,8 30 421,4 31 273,3 197 237,2
*This overview table reflects the indicative Financial Programming, for more details refer to Doc II of the Statement of Estimates.
** The amounts include contribution to the IPA II and ENI programmes. For more details, refer to DOC II of the Statement of Estimates.
*** This amount takes into account 2014 non-used allocation transferred to subsequent years according to Council Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2015/623
of 21 April 2015.
2.
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
24 988,908 46,50 % 681,656
99,81 32 421,176 87,57 % 5 751,457 37,75 %

%
Authorised appropriation excluding 24 988,908 46,50 % 681,506

99,03 32 421,176 87,58 % 5 751,442 37,71 %

%
3.
EU added value
To be able to deliver greater European added value, the structural programmes need to both: a) concentrate their support
on EU priorities and b) coordinate with other EU policies and financial instruments. The Europe 2020 Strategy provides a
clear set of common objectives, including headline targets and flagship initiatives, as a clear framework for identification
of funding priorities. There is broad consensus among stakeholders on the role of the different policies (cohesion policy,
rural development policy and maritime and fisheries policy) in contributing to the achievement of the Europe 2020
Strategy.
Concentrating funding on a smaller number of priorities better linked to the Europe 2020 Strategy, focusing on results,
monitoring progress towards agreed objectives, supported by a more coordinated approach between the European
Structural Investment funds, increased use of conditionalities and simplified delivery are among the major hallmarks of
the new cohesion policy. This is why, the Regulation as in the Commission proposal determines the scope of intervention
of the ERDF, defines investment priorities for each of the thematic objectives and also defines a negative list of
investments which will not be eligible for support.
Programme Statement
DB2016
In addition to ensuring the alignment of spending to EU priorities, other reasons justify an EU-level intervention to fulfil
the long-term cohesion policy objectives. The main advantages of Cohesion Policy as compared to resources being spent
solely by Member States are the following:
1.
Promotion of transparency and good governance, through systematic checks on public procurement, strict
monitoring and audit standards, publication of beneficiaries on websites.
2.
Building of managerial capacity, thanks to the multi-annual dimension of programming which creates a learning
cycle and influences institutional reforms and administrative practices in many MS.
3.
Increasing intensity of interregional links and of exchange of experience across cohesion policy, where
programmers are encouraged to "think outside their region" (or nation).
4.
Involving civil society for its own sake and for better and more efficient programming, thanks to the
mobilisation of local knowledge
Contribution to Europe 2020 headline targets*

*The ERDF directly contributes to the five headline targets related to employment, research &development investment, reduction of greenhouse gas
emission, renewable energy and energy efficiency. Indirectly, it also contributes to the reduction of poverty target (a decrease of 20 million people at
risk of poverty).

Flagship
Innovation Union
Total
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
7 398,9
2 363,8
9 656,8
10 859,2
1 745,5
2 134,9
34 159,1
DB 2016
(EUR million)
5 818,2
1 858,8
7 593,7
8 539,2
1 372,6
1 678,8
26 861,3
The results of a first estimation of the ERDF contribution to the Commission flagship initiatives based on the 2014-2020
operational programmes are illustrated above. The calculation is based on a table of correspondence between the thematic
objectives of the Common Strategic Framework (and the commitment amounts for ERDF associated with them, which
are still provisional, the negotiations of 2014-2020 operational programmes being still ongoing) and the flagship
initiatives. For this purpose, each thematic objective has been linked to the flagship initiative to which it is expected to
contribute the most. The allocation of thematic objectives resulting from this exercise is the following:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Innovation Union: Thematic objective 11;

A digital agenda for Europe: Thematic objective 22;
Resource efficient Europe: Thematic objectives 4, 5 and 63;
An industrial policy for the globalisation era: Thematic objectives 3 and 74;
An agenda for new skills and jobs: Thematic objectives 8 and 105;
European Platform against poverty: Thematic objective 96.
"Strengthening research, technological development and innovation".
"Enhancing access to, and use and quality of, information and communication technologies".
"Supporting the shift towards a low-carbon economy in all sectors", "Promoting climate change adaptation, risk prevention and management" and
"Preserving and protecting the environment and promoting resource efficiency".
"Enhancing the competitiveness of small and medium-sized enterprises" and "Promoting sustainable transport and removing bottlenecks in key
network infrastructures".
"Promoting sustainable and quality employment and supporting labour mobility" and "Investing in education, training and vocational training for
skills and lifelong learning".
"Promoting social inclusion, combating poverty and any discrimination".
Programme Statement
DB2016
The figures concerning 2015 above have also been recalculated in line with the methodology illustrated above.
It should however be recalled that this picture of the ERDF contribution to the flagship initiatives is an approximation, as
the projects concretely financed within a given thematic objective could actually contribute to several flagship initiatives.
The actions developed and promoted by the Commission in relation to above selected flagship initiatives of Europe 2020
can be described as follows:
1.
"Innovation Union": For the 2014-20 period the requirement to develop smart specialisation strategies was
integrated as an ex-ante conditionality into the new regulations governing the 2014-2020 period. To facilitate the
development of such strategies the Commission provides expert support to MS and regions (currently over 100
such contracts) while providing conceptual guidance and peer-learning possibilities, including by setting up the
Smart Specialisation Platform (hosted by the JRC-IPTS) in the form of analytical support and peer-reviews. It is
expected that over 150 smart specialisation strategies at national and/or regional level will be developed.
Moreover, the Commission supports the Innovation Union's objective to increase investments in research and
innovation through thematic concentration provisions in the adopted ESIF regulations (80% of ERDF allocations
for research, innovation, ICT investments, SME competitiveness and low carbon investments in the more
developed and transition regions, 50% in the less developed regions) and built increased possibilities for
synergies between Horizon2020 and ESIF investments into the CPR regulation. This is a major contribution to
the ambition of the Innovation Union to involve all EU regions in its implementation.
2.
"A digital agenda for Europe": For the 2014-20 period, and as proposed by the Commission, the ICT take-up
and high-speed broadband roll-out are promoted through the inclusion of related ex-ante conditionalities into the
ESIF regulations (Next Generation Access Plans / Networks and digital growth strategies that can be part of
smart specialisation strategies), provision of guidance (e.g. guide on broadband investments) and support for the
preparation and analysis of major projects for broadband.
3.
"Resource efficient Europe": In 2016 the Commission will carry on supporting Member States and regions in
a number of key sectors for improved resource efficiency. 2016 will notably be the first full year of
implementation for most of the 2014-2020 programmes, for which a much stronger emphasis on the shift to a
low-carbon economy has been set, particularly energy efficiency and resource efficiency which is now one of the
thematic objectives of regional policy.
4.
"An industrial policy for the globalisation era": For the 2014-2020 period, the Commission will support the
implementation through the inclusion of support for SME competitiveness (including better access to finance for
SMEs, internationalisation) and for removing bottlenecks in key network infrastructures in the thematic
concentration. The Commission will also promote the development and deployment of energy-efficient solutions
while offering incentives and support for the increased use of financial engineering instruments.
5.
An agenda for new skills and jobs: For the 2014-2020 period, the Commission will continue to support the
creation of new jobs, notably by the co-financing of educational/training infrastructures.
6.
The "European platform against poverty and social exclusion" is designed to help EU countries reach the
headline target of lifting 20 million people out of poverty and social exclusion. The Platform is based on five
areas for action: 1) delivering actions across the whole policy spectrum such as the labour market, minimum
income support, healthcare, education, housing and access to basic banking accounts; 2) better use of EU funds
to support social inclusion; 3) promoting robust evidence of what does and does not work in social policy
innovations; 4) working in partnership with civil society to support more effectively the implementation of social
policy reforms; 5) enhanced policy coordination among EU countries.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Budget 2015
(EUR Million)
Supporting the shift towards a low-carbon economy in all sectors
DB 2016
(EUR Million)
4 108,6
3 328,6
Promoting sustainable transport and removing bottlenecks in key

network infrastructures
821,7
665,7
Promoting climate change adaptation, risk prevention and

management
489,0
396,2
Preserving and protecting the environment and promoting resource

efficiency
349,3
283,0
Enhancing the competitiveness of SMEs, of the agricultural sector

(for the EAFRD) and of the fishery and aquaculture sector (for the
EMFF)
176,3
142,9
All other thematic objectives
179,7
145,5
6 124,6
4 961,9
Total
An accurate estimation of the contribution of ERDF to the mainstreaming of climate action can be done globally, through
the Member States' funding priorities as reflected by the categories of intervention, and expressed as a percentage of the
budget to be made available in 2016 (18%). This tracking methodology covers climate and biodiversity objectives, in line
with regulatory requirements.
Estimating the contribution for both objectives at the level of thematic objectives is more challenging, as no direct and
univocal correspondence can be established in all cases between categories of intervention and thematic objectives.
However, for the sole purpose of providing an indicative estimate, a split by thematic objective resulting from a review of
correspondence between categories of intervention and thematic objectives is presented above.
The estimations concerning 2015 have also been revised, in line with the above methodology.
Budget 2015
(EUR Million)
DB 2016
(EUR Million)
Preserving and protecting the environment and promoting resource efficiency
685,3
555,2
Promoting climate change adaptation, risk prevention and management
212,9
172,5
Promoting sustainable and quality employment and supporting labour mobility
20,0
16,2
10,0
8,1
Other thematic objectives: SMEs, sustainable transport, social inclusion and

institutional capacity
6,7
5,4
934,8
757,4
Total
An accurate estimation of the contribution of ERDF to financing biodiversity can be done globally, through the Member
States' funding priorities as reflected by the categories of intervention, and expressed as a percentage of the budget to be
made available in 2016 (2,7%). This tracking methodology covers climate and biodiversity objectives, in line with
regulatory requirements.
Programme Statement
DB2016
General objectives
General Objective 1: To reduce disparities between the levels of development of the various regions, in particular for
rural areas, areas affected by industrial transition, and regions which suffer from severe and permanent natural or
demographic handicaps and to contribute to achieving the targets set out in the Europe 2020 strategy of smart,
sustainable and inclusive growth, and in particular towards the achievement of quantitative headline targets identified
in that strategy
Indicator 1: Employment rate by sex, age group 20-64
Current situation*
68,4% (2013)
Target 2020
75% of the population aged 20-64 should be employed by 2020
Indicator 2: Gross domestic expenditure on R&D (GERD)

Current situation*
Target 2020
2,02% (2013, estimate)

3% of the EU's GDP should be invested in R&D by 2020
Indicator 3: Greenhouse gas emissions, base year 1990
Current situation*
Target 2020
82,14 (2012)
Reduction of the greenhouse gas emissions by 2020by 20% (or even30%, if the
(index 1990 =100)
conditions are right) compared to 1990
Indicator 4: Share of renewables in gross final energy consumption
Current situation*
Target 2020
Increase in the share of renewable energy sources in final energy consumption to 20%
by 2020
Indicator 5: Energy intensity of the economy (proxy indicator for Energy savings, which is under development)
14,1% (2012)
Current situation*
12,1% (2012)
Target 2020
20% of savings by 2020
Indicator 6: Early leavers from education and training by sex; Tertiary educational attainment by sex, age group
30-34
Current situation*
12% (2013)
36,9% (2013)
Target 2020
The share of early school leavers should be under 10% and at least 40% of the
younger generation
Indicator 7: People at risk of poverty or social exclusion

Current situation*
122 649 000
(2013, estimate)
*Source:
Target 2020
20 000 000 less than the 2005 baseline (124 329 000)
Eurostat http://epp.eurostat.ec.europa.eu/portal/page/portal/europe_2020_indicators/headline_indicators
Programme Statement
DB2016
Simulations based on economic models (namely HERMIN model) suggest a positive and significant impact of cohesion
policy interventions on GDP and employment during and after the implementation of operational programmes. In the
EU-12, programmes of the 2007-2013 period are expected to increase the level of GDP by 2,7% per year between 2007
and 2016 and employment by around 735 000 units. Programmes of the 2014-2020 period are expected to increase the
level of GDP by 1,7% per year between 2014 and 2023 in the EU-12.
However, it must be noted that the estimates of impact delivered are to a large extent dependent on the assumptions built
into these models.
4.
Specific objectives
The performance information resulting from the indicators associated with ERDF specific objectives is presented below
according to the following methodology:
The information related to the 2007-2013 and to 2014-2020 programming period is presented in two separate
rows.
For 2014-2020, the performance information presented (notably target values) only results from adopted (and
carried-over) operational programmes.
Information extracted from the programmes' Performance Framework (milestones and targets) is presented in
italic. The figures provided only relate to common output indicators included by programme authorities in the
Performance Framework (PF) tables. They therefore provide only a partial picture of performance. This is
notably due to the fact that 1) output indicators in the PF relate to "the majority" of expenditure and that 2) the
use of common indicators for the PF was not obligatory. In addition, it is to be noted that only quantitative
milestones associated with positive values were considered (data from December 2014).
The figures referred to milestones can be compared to the related target figures (in italic) in order to obtain an indicative
picture of the expected progress in 2018 for each indicator.
NB: It is also to be noted that information in relation to milestones is only provided if the representativeness is
considered satisfactory (i.e. if the corresponding target value represents at least 33% of the global target).
It will however not be possible to draw any general conclusions about programme performance as a result of this
exercise.
Specific Objective 1: Strengthening research, technological development and innovation

Indicator 1: Number of new researchers in supported entities
Baseline
Target
2007-2015
2016
Milestones 2014-2020
2017
2018
2019
16 882 (2013)7
26 442
0 (2014)
Indicator 2: Number of enterprises cooperating with research institutions
Baseline
Target
2007-2015
2016
2020
23 252
2017
2018
2019
2020
22 251 (2013)8
26 419
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 3: Number of researchers working in improved research infrastructure facilities
Baseline
0 (2014)
7
8
2016
2017
2018
Target 2023
2019
10 488
Target 2023
39 984
2020
Target
2023
56.096
35.716
This value refers more precisely to the research job created under the 2007-2013 programming period reported by programmes for which a
target had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs.
This value represents the cumulated value of achievements reported by programmes under the 2007-2013 programming period for which a target
had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 4: Private investment matching public support in innovation or R&D projects

2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 5: Number of enterprises supported to introduce new to the market products
Baseline
2018
2019
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 6: Number of enterprises supported to introduce new to the firm products
Baseline
Baseline
2016
2016
0 (2014)
2017
2017
2018
*
2019
2020
Target 2023
7 186 422 126
2020
Target 2023
20 034
2020
Target 2023
35 499
* Milestone figures concerning indicators 1, 2, 4, 5 and 6 associated with specific objective 1 are not disclosed in the
tables above, as their representativeness is presently below 33%.
Specific Objective 2: Enhancing access to, and use and quality of, information and communication technologies
Indicator 1: Additional households with broadband access of at least 30 Mbps
Baseline
Target
2007-2015
3.961.689 (2013)9
7 097 599
2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
2020
Target 2023
10 759 508
9 065 161
3 392 852
Specific Objective 3: Enhancing the competitiveness of small and medium-sized enterprises

Indicator 1: Number of enterprises receiving support
Baseline
Target
2007-2015
198 067 (2013)10
214 948
2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
2020
Target 2023
795 490
275 834
91 710
Indicator 2: Number of enterprises receiving grants

2018
2019
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 3: Number of enterprises receiving financial support other than grants
Baseline
Baseline
2016
2016
2017
2017
2018
2019
2020
222 645
2020
11 486
Indicator 4: Number of enterprises receiving non-financial support
0 (2014)
9
10
2016
2017
2018
*
Target 2023
153.030
72 718
0 (2014)
Baseline
Target 2023
2019
2020
Target 2023
392 750
This reported value refers to the Additional population covered by broadband access' (and not to Additional households with broadband access
of at least 30 Mbps') under the 2007-2013 programming period as regards programmes for which a target had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs.
This value refers more precisely to the SMEs receiving support under the 2007-2013 programming period as regards programmes for which a
target had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 5: Number of new enterprises supported

Baseline
Target
2007-2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
86.647 (2013)11
81 604
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 6: Private investment matching public support to enterprises (grants)
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 7: Private investment matching public support to enterprises (non-grants)
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 8: Employment increase in supported enterprises
Target
Baseline
2007-2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
507 058 (2013)12
899 229
*
0 (2014)
2020
Target 2023
99 481
2020
Target 2023
18 500 954 958
2020
Target 2023
5 885 281 059
2020
Target 2023
337 470
Indicator 9: Increase in expected number of visits to supported sites of cultural and natural heritage and attractions
Baseline
Target 2023
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
23 626 532
0 (2014)
3 264 589
7 845 352
* Milestone figures concerning indicators 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 associated with specific objective 3 are not disclosed in the
Specific Objective 4: Supporting the shift towards a low-carbon economy in all sectors
Indicator 1: Additional capacity of renewable energy production (KM/MWH)
Target
Baseline
2007-2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2.945 (2013)13
2020
4 90114
1 154,3
0 (2014)
419,5
Indicator 2: Number of households with improved energy consumption classification
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
0 (2014)
11
12
13
14
490 666 648
Target 2023
431 906
541 464
0 (2014)
168 491
Indicator 3: Decrease of annual primary energy consumption of public buildings
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2023
2020
Target 2023
3 397 638 103
1 174 783 765
This value refers more precisely to the number of start-ups supported under the 2007-2013 programming period reported by programmes for
which a target had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs
This value corresponds to the number of jobs reported by programmes under the 2007-2013 programming period for which a target had been set.
Source: 2013 AIRs
Reported target values for this indicator are considered unreliable, due to errors in measurement units in several Member States. Thus, only
information concerning global achievements is reported here. This value corresponds to the cumulated value of achievements reported by
programmes under the 2007-2013 programming period, regardless of whether or not a target had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs
This value excludes values reported by MT and UK-Gibraltar, which used a wrong measurement unit.
Programme Statement
Indicator 4: Number of additional energy users connected to smart grids

Baseline
2016
2017
2018
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 5: Estimated annual decrease of GHG
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
0 (2014)
*
DB2016
2019
2020
Target 2023
243 807
2019
2020
Target 2023
30 769 729
* Milestone figures concerning indicators 4 and 5 associated with specific objective 4 are not disclosed in the tables
above, as their representativeness is presently below 33%.
Specific Objective 5: Promoting climate change adaptation, risk prevention and management
Indicator 1: Population benefiting from flood protection measures
Target
Baseline
2007-2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
5.014.266 (2013)15
9 801 862
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 2: Population benefiting from forest fire protection measures
Target
Baseline
2007-2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
24.338.549 (2013)16
21 624 546
0 (2014)
*
2020
Target 2023
11 624 098
2020
Target 2023
9 560 372
* Milestone figures concerning indicators 1 and 2 associated with specific objective 5 are not disclosed in the tables
Specific Objective 6: Preserving and protecting the environment and promoting resource efficiency
Indicator 1: Additional waste recycling capacity
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
1 498 968
651 110
0 (2014)
253 030
Indicator 2: Additional population served by improved water supply
Target
Baseline
2007-2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
17
4 128909 (2013)
15 047 893
2020
0 (2014)
15
16
17
18
1 213 711
Target 2023
2 487 855
819 000
0 (2014)
439 400
Indicator 3: Additional population served by improved wastewater treatment
Target
Baseline
2007-2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
4 765 041 (2013)18
19 696 696
Target 2023
2020
Target 2023
1 593 277
4 827 781
This value corresponds to the cumulated value of achievements reported by programmes under the 2007-2013 programming period for which a
This value corresponds to the cumulated value of achievements reported by programmes under the 2007-2013 programming period for which a
This value corresponds to the cumulated value of achievements reported by programme authorities under the 2007-2013 programming period as
regards programmes for which a target had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs.
This value corresponds to the cumulated value of achievements reported by programme authorities under the 2007-2013 programming period as
regards programmes for which a target had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 4: Total surface area of rehabilitated land

Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2 905
25 524
0 (2014)
5 194
Indicator 5: Surface area of habitats supported to attain a better conservation status
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
*
Target 2023
2020
Target 2023
16 293 978
* The milestone figure concerning indicator 5 associated with specific objective 6 is not disclosed in the tables above, as
its representativeness is presently below 33%.
Specific Objective 7: Promoting sustainable transport and removing bottlenecks in key network infrastructures
Indicator 1: Total length of new railway line of which: TEN-T
Target
Baseline
Target 2023
2007-2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
19
293 (2013)
354
1 205 (2013) (TEN-T)
1 527 (TEN-T)20
62 km
0 (2014)
*
32 km (TENT)
Indicator 2: Total length of reconstructed or upgraded railway line of which: TEN-T
Target
Baseline
Target 2023
2007-2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2.568 (2012)21
3 539
2 239 km
0 (2014)
304 km (TEN*
T)
Indicator 3: Total length of newly built roads of which: TEN-T
Target
Baseline
Target 2023
2007-2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
3.220 (2013)22
6 746
1.597 (TEN-T)
4 177 (TEN-T)
929 km
0 (2014)
144 km (TEN*
T)
Indicator 4: Total length of reconstructed or upgraded roads of which: TEN-T
Target
Baseline
Target 2023
2007-2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
20.013 (2013)23
24 486
5 001 km
94 km (TEN-T)
0 (2014)
415,6
1 729,6 km
21,5 (TEN-T)
31,5 km (TEN-T)
19
20
21
22
23
This value refers more precisely to the km of new railway line under the 2007-2013 programming period as regards programmes for which a
This value refers to the Km of reconstructed road under the 2007-2013 programming period as regards programmes for which a target had been
set Source: 2013 AIRs.
This value refers to the Km of reconstructed rail under the 2007-2013 programming period as regards programmes for which a target had been
set. Source: 2013 AIRs.
This value refers to the Km of new road under the 2007-2013 programming period as regards programmes for which a target had been set.
Source: 2013 AIRs.
This value refers to the Km of reconstructed road under the 2007-2013 programming period as regards programmes for which a target had been
set Source: 2013 AIRs.
Programme Statement
Indicator 5: Total length of new or improved tram and metro lines

Baseline
2016
2017
2018
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 6: Total length of improved or created inland waterway
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
0 (2014)
DB2016
2019
2020
Target 2023
237 km
2019
2020
Target 2023
650 km
600 km
500
* Milestone figures concerning indicators 1, 2, 3 and 5 associated with specific objective 7 are not disclosed in the tables
Specific Objective 8: Promoting sustainable and quality employment and supporting labour mobility
Indicator 1: To be provided by DG REGIO*
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Target 2023
*Indicator 1 to be provided by DG REGIO after approval of all 2014-2020 operational programmes.
Specific Objective 9: Promoting social inclusion, combating poverty and any discrimination
Indicator 1: Population covered by improved health services
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 2: Open space created or rehabilitated in urban areas
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 3: Public or commercial buildings built or renovated in urban areas
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 4: Rehabilitated housing in urban areas
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
711
2020
Target 2023
32 713 245
2020
Target 2023
25 602 608
2020
Target 2023
1 877 577
2020
Target 2023
6 258
2 973
* Milestone figures concerning indicators 1, 2 and 3 associated with specific objective 9 are not disclosed in the tables
Specific Objective 10: Investing in education, training and vocational training for skills and lifelong learning
Indicator 1: Capacity of supported childcare or education infrastructure
Target
Baseline
Target 2023
2007-2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
24
5 394 203 (2013)
5 227 846
0 (2014)
*
5 310 442
* The milestone figure concerning indicator 1 associated with specific objective 10 is not disclosed in the table above, as
24
This value refers to the number of benefiting students under the 2007-2013 programming period as regards programmes for which a target had
been set. Source: 2013 AIRs
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 11: Enhancing institutional capacity of public authorities and stakeholders and an efficient public
administration
Indicator 1: Population living in areas with integrated urban development strategies
Baseline
Target 2023
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
0 (2014)
*
36 095 338
* The milestone figure concerning indicator 1 associated with specific objective 11 is not disclosed in the table above, as
Expenditure related outputs 2007-2013

Target value for the 2007-13
period
Latest known value

(End 2013)*
Number of RTD projects
97 414
72 920
Number of direct investment aid projects to SME
212 518
225 557
4 696
2 223
47 402
42 841
5 536
6 901
2 028
1 316
990
891
3 024
3 017
73 241
32 566
Main expenditure related outputs

R&T-D
Number of health projects

Information society
Number of information society projects
Transport
Number of transport projects
Environment
Number of waste projects
Number of projects on improvement of air quality
Number of risk prevention projects
Energy
Number of renewable energy projects
*These are aggregated figures as reported by Member States in the priorities of the programmes and verified by Work
Package 0 of the 2007-2013 ex post evaluation exercise. They cover both ERDF as well as CF allocation, because the
same programme may be funded both from ERDF and CF and the figures received by Member States relate to both
ERDF and CF, as the core indicators cannot be split by priority.
Remarks:
1. Progress was reported by Member States in 2013 compared to 2012, confirming positive long-term trends in relation
to most output indicators for ERDF, although there are considerable variations across Member States and sectors. This
is globally in line with the observed acceleration of payments in 2014.
2. There are changes in the reported values of targets and achievements, as a consequence of more rigorous plausibility
checks carried out by the Directorate General for Regional and Urban Policy in 2012 and 2013 and a
verification/correction exercise by work package 0 of the 2007-2013 ex-post evaluation.
3. Outputs remain below target notably in relation to environmental infrastructure projects, especially for the EU12. In
the environmental sector underachievement is evident in several MS, reflecting weaknesses in the environmental sector
Programme Statement
DB2016
where projects are often managed at the municipal level. These problems related to public procurement, planning
procedures and a limited capacity to manage projects.
Programmes' implementation 2007-2013 (Common Strategic Guidelines)
The table below explains the programmes' implementation through the volume of EU support allocated to projects on
the ground (after the selection process at national/regional level). The table is presented according to the headings of the
Common Strategic Guidelines adopted for the 2007-2013 programming period and relates to both ERDF and CF. CF is
included only in the first guideline: Attractive places to invest and work and the fifth: Technical Assistance.
Allocated to
Allocated to
selected projects
Planned EU
selected projects
at Member state
Guidelines
investment
at Member state level
(2)/(1) %
level
(1)
End 2012
End 2013
(2)
1
Guideline: Attractive
invest and work
places
to
165 522,1
146 964,7
166 024,4
100,3%
Rail
23 429,8
17 802,1
19 778,4
84,4%
Road
42 783,4
42 472,6
48 171,4
112,6%
Other transport
16 104,6
13 851,8
15 845,6
98,4%
Energy
11 951,8
8 547,5
10 831,5
90,6%
Broadband
2 542,6
1 705,5
1 885,3
74,2%
Environment
43 959,9
39 496,5
44 668,5
101,6%
Culture & social
24 750,0
23 088,7
24 843,7
100,4%
Guideline: Improving knowledge

and innovation for growth
80 122,9
68 070,4
78 262,2
97,7%
Innovation& RTD
47 311,9
38 978,6
45 688,7
96,6%
Entrepreneurship
5 810,6
5 033,6
5 479,0
94,3%
ICT for citizens & business
11 682,8
9 607,2
10 909,0
93,4%
Other investments in enterprise
15 317,6
14 451,0
16 185,5
105,7%
3 Guideline: More and better jobs
2 662,6
2 172,0
2 275,3
85,5%
Human capital
720,6
375,7
411,8
57,1%
Labour market
681,1
366,1
358,8
52,7%
Social Inclusion
202,5
104,2
115,8
57,2%
1 058,4
1 326,1
1 388,9
131,2%
14 487,6
14 233,0
15 867,9
109,5%
14 487,6
14 233,0
15 867,9
109,5%
Capacity Building
4 Guideline: Territorial Dimension
Territorial Dimension
Programme Statement
5 Guideline: Technical Assistance

Technical assistance
TOTAL
DB2016
7 516,3
5 658,4
6 511,3
86,6%
7 516,3
5 658,4
6 511,3
86,6%
270 311,5
237 098,5
268 941,1
99,5%
According to data from Member States, by end 2013, 99.5% of the total planned investment for the 2007-2013 period,
corresponding to close to ERU 270 billion, was allocated to projects (ERDF and CF). While these figures show progress
compared to previous years (72.4% by end of 2011 and 87.6% by end of 2012), variable trends can be observed across
themes.
Programmes' implementation 2014-2020 (Common Strategic Framework)*

Payments
Payments
Thematic objectives of the
Commitments
end Year N +
end Year N
Common Strategic Framework EUR million (1)
1
(2)
(3)
Interim
payments
executed
(2)/(1) %
by
(4)/(1) %
Commission
end Year N + 1
(4)
1.Strengthening
research,
technological
development
and innovation
Outputs:
40 964,5
2.Enhancing access to, and use

and quality of, information
and
communication
technologies
Outputs:
13 036,8
3.Enhancing
the
competitiveness of small and
medium-sized enterprises
Outputs:
34 179,8
4.Supporting the shift towards

a low-carbon economy in all
sectors
Outputs:
31 458,0
5.Promoting climate change

adaptation, risk prevention and
management
Outputs:
4 141,8
6.Preserving and protecting

the
environment
and
promoting resource efficiency
Outputs:
18 026,8
7.Promoting
sustainable
transport
and
removing
bottlenecks in key network
26 192,0
Programme Statement
Payments
Payments
Commitments
end Year N +
end Year N
Common Strategic Framework EUR million (1)
1
(2)
(3)
DB2016
Interim
payments
executed
(2)/(1) %
by
(4)/(1) %
Commission
end Year N + 1
(4)
infrastructures
Outputs:
8.Promoting sustainable and
quality
employment
and
supporting labour mobility
Outputs:
3 293,7
Thematic objectives of the Commitments

Payments
Common Strategic Framework EUR million (1) end Year N
(2)
Payments
end Year N
+1
(3)
(2)/(1) %
Interim
payments
executed
(4)/(1) %
by Commission
end Year N + 1
(4)
9.Promoting social inclusion,

combating poverty and any
discrimination
Outputs:
11 794,3
10.Investing in education,
training and vocational training
for skills and lifelong learning
Outputs:
6 350,8
11.Enhancing
institutional
capacity of public authorities
and stakeholders and an
efficient public administration
Outputs:
2 070,9
Other amounts not linked to

the 11 thematic objectives
above
5 719,6
TOTAL
197 229,0
*The data presented cover all adopted MS' Partnership Agreements, as well as all operational programmes (adopted or
not) at mid-April 2015. The adoption of outstanding programmes will in fact have no impact on the global allocations by
thematic objective, which have been defined in the PAs.
Data concerning payments to be provided only after the first year of significant interim payments.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Cohesion Fund (CF)

Lead DG: REGIO
1.
Legal Basis
Period of
application

Council of 17 December 2013 on the Cohesion Fund and repealing Council
Regulation (EC) No 1084/2006
2014 - 2020
Reference
Amount
(EUR million)
Financial Programming (EUR million)*

2014**
Total
Of which contribution to the
2015
DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Total
7 095,6
11 390,3
11 115,0
10 675,2
11 075,5
11 481,1
11 872,9 74 705,6
983,0
1 217,0
2 376,5
1 593,3
1 655,1
1 700,4
1 780,6 11 305,9
*this overview table reflects the indicative Financial Programming, for more details refer to Doc II of the Statement of Estimates.
** this amount takes into account 2014 non-used allocation transferred to subsequent years according to Council Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2015/623
of 21 April 2015
2.
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
7 964,932 67,47 %
Authorised appropriation excluding 7 964,932

67,48 %
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
218,589 99,91 %
9 136,045 85,94 % 1 667,854
45,80 %
218,530 98,98 %
9 136,045 85,95 % 1 667,848
45,76 %
3.
EU added value
To be able to deliver greater European added value, the structural programmes need to both: a) concentrate their support
on EU priorities and b) coordinate with other EU policies and financial instruments. The Europe 2020 Strategy provides a
clear set of common objectives, including headline targets and flagship initiatives, as a clear framework for identification
of funding priorities. There is broad consensus among stakeholders on the role of the different policies (cohesion policy,
rural development policy and maritime and fisheries policy) in contributing to the achievement of the Europe 2020
Strategy.
Concentrating funding on a smaller number of priorities better linked to the Europe 2020 Strategy, focusing on results,
monitoring progress towards agreed objectives, increasing the use of conditionalities and simplifying the delivery are
among the major hallmarks of the new cohesion policy.
Programme Statement
DB2016


Flagship

Total
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
4 717,5
5 455,7
10 173,2
DB 2016
(EUR million)
4 052,2
4 686,3
8 738,5
The results of a first estimation of the CF contribution to the Commission flagship initiatives based on the 2014-2020
operational programmes are illustrated above. The calculation is based on a table of correspondence between the thematic
objectives of the Common Strategic Framework (and the commitment amounts for CF associated with them, which are
still provisional, the negotiations of 2014-2020 operational programmes being still ongoing) and the flagship initiatives.
For this purpose, each thematic objective has been linked to the flagship initiative to which it is expected to contribute the
most. The allocation of thematic objectives resulting from this exercise is the following:
Resource efficient Europe: Thematic objectives 4, 5 and 61;
An industrial policy for the globalisation era: Thematic objective 72.
The figures concerning 2015 above have also been recalculated in line with the methodology illustrated above.
It should however be recalled that this picture of the ERDF contribution to the flagship initiatives is an approximation, as
the projects concretely financed within a given thematic objective could actually contribute to several flagship initiatives.
The actions developed and promoted by the Commission in relation to above selected flagship initiatives of Europe 2020
can be described as follows:
1. "Resource efficient Europe": In 2016 the Commission will carry on supporting Member States and regions in a
number of key sectors for improved resource efficiency. 2016 will notably be the first full year of implementation for
most of the 2014-2020 programmes, for which a much stronger emphasis on the shift to a low-carbon economy has
been set, particularly energy efficiency and resource efficiency which is now one of the thematic objectives of
regional policy.
2. "An industrial policy for the globalisation era": For the 2014-2020 period, the Commission will support the
enhancing of transport connections and the removal of bottlenecks in key network infrastructures to provide better
access to the internal market and in this way support growth and competiveness. The Commission will also promote
the development and deployment of energy efficiency solutions, and give incentives and support for the increased
use of financial engineering instruments.
Budget 2015
(EUR Million)
DB 2016
(EUR Million)
Promoting sustainable transport and removing bottlenecks in key network

infrastructures
1 194,4
1 025,9
997,0
856,4
382,5
328,5
219,7
188,8
2 793,6
2 399,6
Total
1
2
"Supporting the shift towards a low-carbon economy in all sectors", "Promoting climate change adaptation, risk prevention and management" and
"Preserving and protecting the environment and promoting resource efficiency".
"Promoting sustainable transport and removing bottlenecks in key network infrastructures".
Programme Statement
DB2016
An accurate estimation of the contribution of CF to the mainstreaming of climate action can be done globally, through
the Member States' funding priorities as reflected by the categories of intervention, and expressed as a percentage of the
budget to be made available in 2016 (27,5%). This tracking methodology covers climate and biodiversity objectives, in
line with regulatory requirements.
Budget 2015
(EUR Million)
DB 2016
(EUR Million)
564,6
485,0
197,4
169,5
4,1
3,5
766,1
658,0
Others: low-carbon economy and promoting sustainable transport

Total
An accurate estimation of the contribution of CF to financing biodiversity can be done globally, through the Member
States' funding priorities as reflected by the categories of intervention, and expressed as a percentage of the budget to be
made available in 2016 (7,6%). This tracking methodology covers climate and biodiversity objectives, in line with
regulatory requirements.
3.3 General objectives
General Objective 1: To reduce disparities between the levels of development of the various regions, in particular for
rural areas, areas affected by industrial transition, and regions which suffer from severe and permanent natural or
demographic handicaps and to contribute to achieving the targets set out in the Europe 2020 strategy
Indicator 1: Greenhouse gas emissions, base year 1990
Current situation*
Target 2020
82,14 (2012)
Reduction of the greenhouse gas emissions by 20% by 2020, compared to 1990

(index 1990 =100)
Indicator 2: Share of renewables in gross final energy consumption
Current situation*
Target 2020
Increase in the share of renewable energy sources in final energy consumption to 20%
by 2020
Indicator 3: Energy intensity of the economy (proxy indicator for Energy savings, which is under development)
14,1 % (2012)
Current situation*
12,1% (2012)
Target 2020
20% increase in energy efficiency by 2020
*Source: Eurostat http://epp.eurostat.ec.europa.eu/portal/page/portal/europe_2020_indicators/headline_indicators

Simulations based on economic models (namely HERMIN model) suggest a positive and significant impact of cohesion
policy interventions on GDP and employment during and after the implementation of operational programmes. In the
Programme Statement
DB2016
EU-12, programmes of the 2007-2013 period are expected to increase the level of GDP by 2.7% per year between 2007
and 2016 and employment by around 735 000 units. Programmes of the 2014-2020 period are expected to increase the
level of GDP by 1.7% per year between 2014 and 2023 in the EU-12.
However, it must be noted that the estimates of impact delivered are to a large extent dependent on the assumptions built
into these models.
4.
Specific objectives
The performance information resulting from the indicators associated with ERDF specific objectives is presented below
according to the following methodology:
The information related to the 2007-2013 and to 2014-2020 programming period is presented in two separate
rows.
For 2014-2020, the performance information presented (notably target values) only results from adopted (and
carried-over) operational programmes.
Information extracted from the programmes' Performance Framework (milestones and targets) is presented in
italic. The figures provided only relate to common output indicators included by programme authorities in the
Performance Framework (PF) tables. They therefore provide only a partial picture of performance. This is
notably due to the fact that 1) output indicators in the PF relate to "the majority" of expenditure and that 2) the
use of common indicators for the PF was not obligatory. In addition, it is to be noted that only quantitative
milestones associated with positive values were considered (data from December 2014).
The figures referred to milestones can be compared to the related target figures (in italic) in order to obtain an indicative
picture of the expected progress in 2018 for each indicator.
NB: It is also to be noted that information in relation to milestones is only provided if the representativeness is
considered satisfactory (i.e. if the corresponding target value represents at least 33% of the global target).
It will however not be possible to draw any general conclusions about programme performance as a result of this
exercise.
Specific Objective 1: Supporting the shift towards a low carbon economy in all sectors
Indicator 1: Additional capacity of renewable energy production (KM/MWH)
Target
Baseline
2007-2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
1 408 (2013)3
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 2: Number of households with improved energy consumption classification
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 3: Decrease of annual primary energy consumption of public buildings
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 4: Number of additional energy users connected to smart grids
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
300 000
2020
Target 2023
2 107
2020
Target 2023
169 745
2020
Target 2023
556 040 590
2020
Target 2023
2 029 000
1 200 000
Reported target values for this indicator related to the 2007-2013 programming period are considered unreliable, due to errors in measurement
units in several Member States. Thus, only information concerning global achievements is reported here. This value corresponds to the cumulated
value of achievements reported by programmes under the 2007-2013 programming period, regardless of whether or not a target had been set.
Source: 2013 AIRs
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 5: Estimated annual decrease of GHG

Baseline
2016
2017
0 (2014)
2018
2019
*
2020
Target 2023
4 812 269
* Milestone figures concerning indicators 1, 2, 3 and 5 associated with specific objective 1 are not disclosed in the tables
Specific Objective 2: Promoting climate change adaptation, risk prevention and management
Indicator 1: Population benefiting from flood protection measures
Target
Baseline
2007-2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2 390 933 (2013)4
6 906 1625
2020
5 398 433
2 788 799
0 (2014)
1 303 000
Indicator 2: Population benefiting from forest fire protection measures
Target
Baseline
2007-2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
24 241 864 (2012)6
21 510 7467
0 (2014)
*
Target 2023
2020
Target 2023
5 330 000
* The milestone figure concerning indicator 2 associated with specific objective 2 is not disclosed in the tables above, as
Specific Objective 3: Preserving and protecting the environment and promoting resource efficiency
Indicator 1: Additional waste recycling capacity
2016
2017
2018
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 2: Additional population served by improved water supply
Baseline
Baseline
Target
2007-2015
3 646 506 (2013)8
14 439 8939
0 (2014)
4
5
6
7
8
9
2016
2019
2017
2018
2019
544 000
2020
Target 2023
1 620 587
2020
Target 2023
4 424 242
2 040 000
This value refers more precisely to the Population benefiting from flood protection measures under the 2007-2013 programming period as
regards projects/programmes for which a target had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs.
This value refers more precisely to the Population benefiting from flood protection measures under the 2007-2013 programming period as
regards projects/programmes for which a target had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs.
This value refers more precisely to the Population benefiting from forest fire protection and other protection measures under the 2007-2013
programming period as regards projects/programmes for which a target had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs.
This value refers more precisely to the Population benefiting from forest fire protection and other protection measures under the 2007-2013
programming period as regards projects/programmes for which a target had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs.
This value refers more precisely to the Additional population served by new/renovated water projects under the 2007-2013 programming period
as regards projects/programmes for which a target had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs.
This value refers more precisely to the Additional population served by new/renovated water projects under the 2007-2013 programming period
as regards projects/programmes for which a target had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 3: Additional population served by improved wastewater treatment

Baseline
Target
2007-2015
4 289 697 (2013)10
16 773 06011
2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
2020
Target 2023
6.040.072
2 214 026
434 875
Indicator 4: Total surface area of rehabilitated land

2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 5: Surface area of habitats supported to attain a better conservation status
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
*
Baseline
2020
Target 2023
797
2020
Target 2023
326 806
* Milestone figures concerning indicators 1, 4 and 5 associated with specific objective 3 are not disclosed in the tables
Specific Objective 4: Promoting sustainable transport and removing bottlenecks in key network infrastructures
Indicator 1: Total length of new railway line
Baseline
Target
2007-2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
47 (2013)12
25313
0 (2014)
Indicator 2: Total length of reconstructed or upgraded railway line
Baseline
Target
2007-2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
1 230 (2013)14
2 37215
0 (2014)
Indicator 3: Total length of newly built roads
Baseline
3 084 (2013)16
0 (2014)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Target
2007-2015
2020
64
2020
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2023
Target 2023
2 594
2020
Target 2023
6 36817
*
1 400
This value refers more precisely to the Additional population served by new/renovated wastewater projects under the 2007-2013 programming
period as regards projects/programmes for which a target had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs.
This value refers more precisely to the Additional population served by new/renovated wastewater projects under the 2007-2013 programming
period as regards projects/programmes for which a target had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs.
This value refers more precisely to the km of new railway line under the 2007-2013 programming period as regards projects/programmes for
which a target had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs.
This value refers more precisely to the km of new railway line under the 2007-2013 programming period as regards projects/programmes for
which a target had been set. Source: 2013 AIRs.
This value refers to the Km of reconstructed rail under the 2007-2013 programming period as regards projects/programmes for which a target
This value refers to the Km of reconstructed rail under the 2007-2013 programming period as regards projects/programmes for which a target
This value refers to the Km of new road under the 2007-2013 programming period as regards projects/programmes for which a target had been
This value refers to the Km of new road under the 2007-2013 programming period as regards projects/programmes for which a target had been
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 4: Total length of reconstructed or upgraded roads

Baseline
Target
2007-2015
19 796 (2013)18
23 87419
2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
2020
Target 2023
623
262
98
Indicator 5: Total length of new or improved tram and metro lines

2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (2014)
*
Indicator 6: Total length of improved or created inland waterway
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
*
0 (2014)
Baseline
2020
Target 2023
273
2020
Target 2023
297
* Milestone figures concerning indicators 1, 2, 3, 5 and 6 associated with specific objective 4 are not disclosed in the
Specific Objective 5: Enhancing institutional capacity of public authorities and stakeholders and an efficient public
administration
Indicator 1: Number of projects targeting public administrations or public services at national, regional or local level
Target 2023
Baseline
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
0 (2014)
To be provided by DG REGIO after approval of all 2014-2020 operational programmes.

Target value for the 2007-13
period
Latest known value

(End 2013)*
760
1.033
Number of waste projects
1.376
1.249
Number of projects on improvement of air quality
1.513
19
854
563
2.510
657
Main expenditure related outputs

Transport
Number of transport projects
Environment
Number of risk prevention projects

Energy
Number of renewable energy projects
* These are aggregated figures as reported by Member States in the priorities of the programmes and verified by Work
Package 0 of the 2007-2013 ex-post evaluation exercise. They cover both CF as well as ERDF allocation, because the
18
19
This value refers to the Km of reconstructed road under the 2007-2013 programming period as regards projects/programmes for which a target
This value refers to the Km of reconstructed road under the 2007-2013 programming period as regards projects/programmes for which a target
Programme Statement
DB2016
same programme may be funded both from ERDF and CF and the figures received by Member States relate to both
ERDF and CF, as the core indicators cannot be split by priority.
Remarks:
1. Progress was reported by Member States in 2013 compared to 2012, confirming positive long-term trends in relation to
most output indicators for CF, although there are considerable variations across Member States and sectors. This is
globally in line with the evolution of payments in 2014, although this needs to compensate for the initial slow start of the
programmes. This is notably true for the Cohesion Fund, where infrastructure projects take longer to complete than
ERDF projects in other sectors - in general Cohesion Fund results are slower than ERDF.
2. There are changes in the reported values of targets and achievements, as a consequence of more rigorous plausibility
checks carried out by the Directorate General for Regional and Urban Policy in 2012 and 2013 and a
verification/correction exercise by work package 0 of the 2007-2013 ex post evaluation.
3. Outputs remain below target notably in relation to most environmental infrastructure and railway projects, especially
for the EU12. In the environmental sector, underachievement is evident in several MS, reflecting weaknesses in the
environmental sector where projects are often managed at the municipal level. These problems related to public
procurement, planning procedures and a limited capacity to manage projects. Low achievements in relation to railway
projects are in line with the low level of financial execution registered by CF countries, generally below the EU average.
Actions targeted at addressing these difficulties, also due mainly to poor administrative capacity in the area of public
procurement, have in most cases already been defined and are being implemented by the relevant geographical desks,
with the help of DG Regional and Urban Policy's competence centre dedicated to administrative capacity, thus improving
the overall progress towards the set targets.
Programmes' implementation 2007-2013 (Common Strategic Guidelines)
The table below explains the programmes' implementation through the volume of EU support allocated to projects on the
ground (after the selection process at national/regional level). The table is presented according to the headings of the
Common Strategic Guidelines adopted for the 2007-2013 programming period and relates to both ERDF and CF. CF is
included only in the first guideline: Attractive places to invest and work and the fifth: Technical Assistance.
Allocated to
selected projects
End 2013
(million)
(2)
(2)/(1)%
Guidelines
Planned EU
investment
(1)
Guideline: Attractive places to

invest and work
138 229,5
122 170,5
139 295,4
100,8%
Rail
23 429,8
17 802,1
19 778,4
84,4%
Road
42 783,4
42 472,6
48 171,4
112,6%
Other transport
16 104,6
13 851,8
15 845,6
98,4%
Energy
11 951,8
8 547,5
10 831,5
90,6%
43 959,9
39 496,5
44 668,5
101,6%
Broadband
Environment
Culture & social
2
Allocated to
selected projects
End 2012
(million)
Guideline: Improving knowledge

and innovation for growth
Innovation & RTD
Entrepreneurship
Programme Statement
ICT for citizens & business
Other investments in enterprise
DB2016
3 Guideline: More and better jobs

Human capital
Labour market
Social Inclusion
Capacity Building
4 Guideline: Territorial Dimension

Territorial Dimension
5 Guideline: Technical Assistance
TOTAL
7 516,3
5 658,4
6 511,3
86,6%
7 516,3
5 658,4
6 511,3
86,6%
145 745,8
127 828,9
145 806,7
100,0%

Interim
payments
executed
Payments
Commitments
Thematic objectives of the Common
EUR million
Strategic Framework
(1)
Payments
end
end
Year N + 1
Year N (2)
(3)
(2)/(1) % by Commission (4)/(1)%

end Year N + 1
(4)
1.Supporting the shift towards a low

carbon economy in all sectors
8.064,0
Outputs:
2.Promoting
climate
change
management
3.696,0
Outputs:
3.Preserving and protecting the
environment and promoting resource
efficiency
16.876,2
Outputs:
4. Promoting sustainable transport
and removing bottlenecks in key
network infrastructures
32.839,4
Outputs:
Programme Statement
5. Enhancing institutional capacity

of
public
authorities
and
stakeholders and an efficient public
administration
DB2016
0,0
Outputs:
Other amounts not linked to the 11
thematic objectives above
TOTAL
1 920,9
63.396,5
* The data presented cover all adopted MS' Partnership Agreements, as well as all operational programmes (adopted or
not) at mid-April 2015. The adoption of outstanding programmes will in fact have no impact on the global allocations by
thematic objective, which have been defined in the PAs.
Data concerning payments to be provided only after the first year of significant interim payments.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Fund for European Aid to the Most Deprived

Lead DG: EMPL
1.
Legal Basis
Period of
application

Council of 11 March 2014 on the Fund for European Aid to the Most
Deprived
2014
Total
514,3
2.
2015
525,1
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
535,6
546,3
557,2
2020
568,4
Total
579,7 3 826,6
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
514,268 97,62 %
409,527 100,00 %
537,287 102,03 % 363,501
2,75 %
Authorised
appropriation
revenue
514,268 97,62 %
409,527 100,00 %
537,287 102,03 % 363,501
2,75 %
3.
EU added value
The Europe 2020 strategy for smart, sustainable and inclusive growth is based on a balanced vision of economic growth
and social progress based on ambitious targets for employment, education and for poverty reduction. Poverty and social
exclusion are major obstacles to the achievement of the Europe 2020 objectives.
The Fund for European Aid to the Most Deprived (FEAD) will complement the existing cohesion instruments, in
particular the ESF, by providing assistance to those who are too excluded, too far from the labour market to benefit from
the activation measures of the ESF.
By addressing basic needs, the proposed instrument will help to moderate poverty and social exclusion of people who
find themselves in situations of severe deprivation. By enabling the most deprived members of the society to maintain
their dignity and human capital it will contribute to strengthening of social capital and social cohesion within their
communities.
EU-level action in this respect is necessary given the level and nature of poverty and social exclusion in the Union,
further aggravated by the economic crisis, and uncertainty about the ability of all Member States to sustain social
expenditure at levels sufficient to ensure that social cohesion does not deteriorate further and that the objectives and
targets of the Europe 2020 strategy are achieved.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Flagship
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
523,2
DB 2016
(EUR million)
533,7

Not applicable
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: To promote social cohesion, enhance social inclusion and therefore ultimately contribute to the
objective of eradicating poverty in the Union in accordance with the Europe 2020 Strategy
Indicator 1: People at risk of poverty or social exclusion
Baseline (in million)

2010 2011 2012
118,31 121,7 124,5
4.
2013
122,6
Milestones 2015
Reduce by 5 million (i.e. to 110,7)
Note: 2014 and 2015 data not yet
available.
Target 2020
At least 20 million less people should be at
risk of poverty by 2020 (i.e. 95,7)
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: Alleviating the worst forms of poverty in the Union by providing non-financial assistance to the
most deprived persons
Indicator 1: Number of persons receiving assistance from the Fund
The Commission tried to simplify the implementation of the FEAD as much as possible. This was reflected in the
requirements for the design of Operational Programmes. For instance, Operational Programmes for food and/or basic
material assistance (so-called "OP I"), prepared by 24 Member States, do not have to include indicators. Operational
Programmes covering the social inclusion of the most deprived persons (so-called "OP 2"), implemented by 4 Member
States, have to include output and result indicators with baselines and targets. But, as these indicators are programmespecific, they cannot be aggregated at EU level. However, in 2014 the Commission and the Member States agreed on a
common set of output and result indicators on which the Member States will report annually (in the Annual
Implementation Reports) from 2015 to 2022. This reporting will be done at programme level. As there is no requirement
for Member States to set targets for those common indicators, the Commission currently maintains its target to reach 2
million persons a year. This may be refined once the first set of data is delivered.
Among these common indicators, DG EMPL selected in its Management Plan 2015, the following 5 to be reported on as
from 2015:
Total number of persons receiving food support

Total number of persons receiving basic material assistance
Total number of persons receiving social inclusion assistance
Total number of meals distributed partly or totally financed by the FEAD OPs
Total number of food packages distributed partly or totally financed by the FEAD OPs
Adjusted to EU28
Programme Statement
Baseline
2014
2015
DB2016
Milestones
2016
2017
2018 2019
Target 2020
0
Note: The FEAD is a new Fund, hence with a baseline
at 0. The figures used in the framework of the existing
Food assistance programme are established through a
methodology which does not yield figures that could be
comparable to the one of the new FEAD, thus they
cannot be used as a baseline.
8 million
14 million

Output
Number of deprived persons receiving assistance from the Fund
Outputs
Number of deprived persons
receiving assistance from the
Fund
F
P
Budget line
04 06 01
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
2 million

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
million million million million million million million
533,7
Total
14 million
Not yet
reported2
Regulation (EU) No 223/2014 - Article 13.1: From 2015 to 2023, the Member States shall submit to the Commission, by 30 June of each year, an
annual implementation report for the operational programme implemented in the previous financial year.
Programme Statement
HEADING 2 SUSTAINABLE GROWTH:

NATURAL RESOURCES
HEADING 2 SUSTAINABLE GROWTH: NATURAL RESOURCES /201
DB2016
Programme Statement
DB2016
HEADING 2: Sustainable growth: natural resources
Common Agricultural Policy (CAP) including European Agricultural Guarantee

Fund (EAGF) and European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development
(EAFRD)
Lead DG: AGRI
1.
EU added value and general objectives
1.1. EU added value Common Agricultural Policy

The Common Agricultural Policy (CAP) is a policy of strategic importance to food security, the environment and
territorial balance. The aim is to promote smart, sustainable and inclusive growth for EU agriculture and rural areas in
line with the Europe 2020 strategy, notably in terms of resource efficiency, by maintaining sustainable agriculture
throughout the EU, addressing important cross border issues such as climate change and biodiversity and reinforcing
solidarity among Member States. The analysis carried out in the framework of the impact assessment for the legislative
proposals on the reform of the Common Agricultural Policy clearly shows the cost of no action in terms of negative
economic, environmental and social consequences.
The CAP is a genuinely European policy as instead of operating 28 agricultural policies, Member States pool resources to
operate a single European policy with a single European budget. Such a common policy allows for a more effective
response to transnational goals and cross border challenges, such as food security, mitigating climate change, enhancing
biodiversity and contributing to economic and social cohesion, as well as for a level playing field in the single market and
a better position in trade negotiations. This naturally means that the CAP accounts for a significant proportion of the EU
budget. However, this approach ensures both the most effective response to the policy challenges as well as the most
efficient use of budgetary resources, as the running of 28 different and competing national policies would be more costly
and less effective. At the same time, this approach also allows sufficient flexibility in implementation to cater for local
needs1.
General objectives
General Objective 1: To promote a viable food production
Indicator 1: Agricultural factor income
Current situation
In real prices: 13 293 EUR/AWU
Definition: Real net value added at factor cost per annual work unit
(AWU)2
(2013 EU28)
Indicator 2: Agricultural productivity
Current situation
104,4
(index 2005 = 100)
Indicator 3: EU commodity price variability
Current situation
Coefficient of variation
Commodity
Beef
Poultry
Pig
Soft wheat
1
2
World
Jan 2012Dec 2014
13,6%
7,0%
13,8%
13,2%
Long term target

To increase
Long term target

To increase
Long term target
EU
Jan 2012Dec 2014
2,8%
2,5%
7,9%
14,2%
For a more detailed description of the EU value added of the CAP including examples, see Commission staff working paper "The EU value added
of the EU budget" accompanying the Commission Communication "A budget for Europe 2020" (SEC(2011) 867 final, 29.6.2011, p. 25).
Change in baseline necessary in order to align the definition with the agreed method for the underlying CAP impact indicator.
Programme Statement
Maize
Barley
Butter
Cheese (Cheddar)
Skimmed milk powder (SMP)
Whole milk powder (WMP)
21,9%
13,7%
15,3%
10,6%
21,9%
24,3%
15,9%
15,0%
13,1%
7,4%
16,7%
15,8%
General Objective 2: To promote a sustainable management of natural resources and climate action
Indicator 1: Emissions from agriculture
Current situation
Long term target
Greenhouse gas
To decrease
469 104 (2012) (in 1 000 t of CO2 equivalent)
Indicator 2: Water abstraction in agriculture: volume of water applied to soils for irrigation purposes
Current situation
Long term target
39 833 622
To decrease
(2010)3
General Objective 3: To promote a balanced territorial development

Indicator 1: Rural employment rate
Current situation
Long term target
62,4%
To increase
(2013 EU 28)
Data available for EU28 excluding BE and LU in 1000 m3 (Source: Eurostat SAPM 2010).
DB2016
Programme Statement
DB2016
CAP: European Agricultural Guarantee Fund (EAGF)

1.
Legal Basis
Period of
application
Regulation (EU) No 1306/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 17

December 2013 on the financing, management and monitoring of the common
agricultural policy and repealing Council Regulations (EEC) No 352/78, (EC) No
165/94, (EC) No 2799/98, (EC) No 814/2000, (EC) No 1290/2005 and (EC) No
485/2008.
Regulation (EU) No 1307/2013 of the European Parliament and of
the Council of 17 December 2013 establishing rules for direct payments to farmers
under support schemes within the framework of the common agricultural policy and
repealing Council Regulation (EC) No 637/2008 and Council Regulation (EC) No
73/2009. Regulation (EU) No 1308/2013 of the European Parliament and of the
Council of 17 December establishing a common organisation of the markets in
agricultural products and repealing Council Regulations (EEC) No 922/72, (EEC) No
234/79, (EC) No 1037/2001 and (EC) No 1234/2007. Council Regulation (EU) No
1370/2013 of 16 December 2013 determining measures on fixing certain aids and
refunds related to the common organisation of the markets in agricultural products
2014 - 2020
2014
Total
2.

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2015
Reference
Amount
(EUR million)
2020
Total
43 778,1 43 455,8 42 867,6 44 144,7 44 161,5 44 239,7 44 262,5 306 909,9

2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
45 502,491 101,18 %
45 513,773 101,17 % 45 319,587 82,92 % 45 327,546
82,88 %
Authorised appropriation 45 502,491 101,18 %

excluding
external
earmarked revenue
45 512,757 101,14 % 45 319,587 82,92 % 45 327,373
82,88 %
3.
EU added value
Direct payments support and stabilise farmers' income and contribute to the provision of environmental public goods,
while market measures allow for a safety net in times of market disturbances or crises and for maintaining market
stability and meeting consumer expectations. In addition, cross-compliance ensures applied minimum standards in the
field of the environment, food safety, animal and plant health and animal welfare throughout the EU. Hence, the EAGF
supports sustainable agriculture throughout the EU and provides the basis for the development of the agricultural sector
and rural areas towards smart, sustainable and inclusive growth, thus contributing to the CAP objectives of viable food
production, sustainable management of natural resources and balanced territorial development.
Evaluations of the different elements of the CAP are conducted on a regular basis4 and their results are incorporated in
impact assessments preparing new initiatives. The indicators defined in the context of the common monitoring and
In 2014 the following evaluations were finalised: Evaluation of the market implications of veal and young cattle meat standards; evaluation of
CAP measures for the cotton sector.
Programme Statement
DB2016
evaluation framework5 will serve as a basis for future evaluations. Based on these, in 2018 results on the performance of
the CAP will be presented in a report to the European Parliament and Council6.

Flagship
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
3 272,7
DB 2016
(EUR million)
3 242,9
Budget2015
(EUR Million)
DB 2016
(EUR Million)
To contribute to the development of sustainable agriculture through the

"green direct payment" and cross compliance8
3 272,7
8 025,0
Resource efficient Europe7


Budget2015
(EUR Million)
DB 2016
(EUR Million)
Contribute to the development of sustainable agriculture and to making the Common

Agricultural Policy more compatible with the expectations of the society through
cross-compliance. Contribute preventing soil erosion, maintaining soil organic matter
and soil structure, ensuring a minimum level of maintenance and avoiding the
deterioration of habitats, and protecting and managing water. Contribute avoiding a
massive conversion into arable land9
3 272,7
6 073,7
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: To improve the competitiveness of the agricultural sector and enhance its value share in the food
chain
Indicator 1: Share of EU agricultural exports in world market

Latest known result
18,5% (2012)
5
6
7
8
Target
Share in world market maintained
Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 834/2014 of 22 July 2014 laying down rules for the application of the common monitoring and
evaluation framework of the common agricultural policy.
Article 110 of Regulation (EU) No 1306/2013.
For financial years 2015 and 2016, the amount is established using the same methodology i.e. the Rio marker of 40% is applied to a 20% share of
the appropriations for direct payments.
As of Draft Budget 2016, with the new direct payments' schemes fully implemented, the climate action contribution is calculated accordingly:
the payment for agricultural practices beneficial for the climate and the environment (item 05 03 01 11) is split into three equal tiers, in analogy to
the three compulsory farming practices applicable. The tiers receive the following Rio marker: The Rio markers take into account the climate
contribution of the three compulsory green direct payment obligations: 1st tier 0% (crop diversification), 2nd tier 40% (ecological focus area), 3rd
tier 100% (permanent grassland);
plus a Rio marker of 40% applied to 20% of the remaining direct payments taking into account cross-compliance (i.e. 8% of budget chapter 0503
direct payments without payment for agricultural practices beneficial for the climate and the environment).
For Budget 2015, the amount was established using the following methodology: 40% of 20% = 8 % of budget chapter 05 03 Direct payments.
As of Draft Budget 2016, with the new direct payments' schemes fully implemented, the contribution to biodiversity is calculated as follows:
for the payment for agricultural practices beneficial for the climate and the environment (item 05 03 01 11) a Rio marker of 40% is applied;
plus a Rio marker of 40% is applied to 10% of the remaining direct payments taking into account cross-compliance (i.e. 4% of budget chapter
0503 Direct payments without payment for agricultural practices beneficial for the climate and the environment). For Budget 2015, the amount
was established using the following methodology: 40% of 20% = 8 % of budget chapter 05 03 Direct payments.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: Share of value added for primary producers in the food chain
Target
Latest known result

(2011 EU-27)
Value added
(in EUR billion)
Primary sector *
167
Processing sector *
227
Retail sector (including service activities) **
385
Improved situation of
producers in the food chain
primary
* Eurostat - National accounts

** Eurostat - Structural Business Statistics
Specific Objective 2: To foster market stability
Indicator 1: Export refunds Ratio of the volume of the products exported with export refunds and the total EU
production per given period
Latest known result
Target
Used only in case of market crisis (seen against market
developments)
Beef: 0% (December 2014)

Pigmeat: 0% (December 2014)
Poultry: 0% (December 2014)
Cereals, rice and sugar: 0% (December 2014)

Indicator 2: Public intervention, ratio of volume of the products bought in the intervention storage and the total
EU production of those respective products
Latest known result
Target
0% (2014)
Used only in case of market crisis (seen against market developments)
Indicator 3: Private storage, Ratio of volume of the products placed into the publicly aided private storage and the
total EU production of those respective products
Latest known result
Target
Used only in case of market crisis (seen against market developments)
Butter: 0,99% (2014)

SMP: 1,33% (2014)
Specific Objective 3: To better reflect consumer expectations

Indicator 1: EU commodity prices compared to world prices
Latest known result
Target
Data for December 2014
Prices
brought
closer
to
world prices
1. Price indices
(Jan 2000 = 100)
World (USD/ton)
Beef
Chicken Pork
276,3 195,4
223,4
Wheat
SRW
267,6
US Wheat US
Maize
HRW
260,6
192,5
Barley Butter
Cheddar SMP WMP
247,7
210,3
257,8
156,0 152,2
Programme Statement
DB2016
European Union (EUR/ton)

Beef
Chicken Pork
127,6 136,2
119,4
Soft wheat
Maize
Barley
Butter
Cheddar SMP
WMP
125,3
104,4
123,1
94,6
100,4
87,1
81,8
2. Absolute prices
World
Beef
Wheat
SRW
Chicken Pork
US
Wheat
US
Maize
HRW
Barley Butter Cheddar SMP
WMP
($/mt)
($/100kg
($/100kg
($/100kg)
)
carcass)
($/mt)
($/mt)
($/mt)
($/mt)
($/mt) ($/mt)
537,2
261,0
288,6
178,3
218,0
3
158,0 3 733,0 2 400,0 2 417,0
250,8
186,0
($/mt)
European Union
Beef
Chicken Pork
EUR/100 kg
371,1 183,2
Soft
wheat
Maize Barley Butter
EUR/mt
134,6 176,6
Cheddar
SMP
WMP
EUR/mt
146,2
160,0 2 932,6 3 170,6
1 887,4 2 369,0
Expenditure related outputs (for specific objectives 1 to 3)

Budget 2015
Number
EUR million
Fruit & vegetables: Proportion of the
Known autumn
value of production marketed through
2015
05 02 08 03
541,5
producer organisations (POs) in value
(2012: 45.7%;
10
of the total production
provisional data)
Wine: National support programmes
05 02 09 08
55 000
480
Restructuring: Number of hectares11
Wine: National support programmes
05 02 09 08
Investments and promotion: Number of
3 500
479
projects and beneficiaries12
Public intervention: Volume of
05 02
0
p.m.
intervention stocks
Private storage: Volume of private
05 02 12
159 000
0
storage in tonnes (dairy)13
Output
10
11
12
13
Budget line
DB 2016
Number
EUR million
Known autumn
2016
387
60 000
477
3 335
473
p.m.
215 000
14
The budget figures relate to appropriations and do not include the estimated assigned revenue to be available to this budget item at EUR 362,4
million for 2015 and EUR 400 million for 2016.
Outputs are based on the 2015 budget. Outputs for 2016 are pending the Member States' programmes to be notified by June 2015.
See previous footnote
The figure relates to commitment appropriations and does not include the estimated assigned revenue to be available to this budget item at EUR
14.3 million for 2015.
Programme Statement
Apiculture: National programmes for

the apicultural sector: number of
05 02 15 06
programmes (% of expenditure on
available funds previous year)
Horizontal promotion programmes:
05 02 10 01
Number of programmes accepted
School fruit scheme: Number of
beneficiaries
05 02 08 12
DB2016
28 (2015 %
execution not
available yet)
28 (92% in
2014)
31
4414
64
4715
71
144
Around 9,8 million

children
150
77
20,4 million
children and 312
706 tonnes of milk
and milk products
on which aid has
been paid (school
year 2011-12)17
75
Around 8,6
million
children16
School milk scheme: Number of
20,4 million
beneficiaries and quantity of milk and
children and 312
milk products on which aid has been
706 tonnes of
paid
milk and milk
05 02 12 08
products on
which aid has
been paid
(school year
2011-12)
31

05 02 Markets
(appropriations EUR 186 million)
Needs in 2015 budget:
EUR 2 924 million
Appropriations requested in 2015 budget:
EUR 2 401 million
Estimated assigned revenue available in 2015 budget:
EUR 524 million
EUR 2 615 million
EUR 2 215 million
EUR 400 million
The budgetary needs for market expenditure in 2016 are significantly lower than in budget 2015, which was marked by
increased market intervention in the wake of the Russian import embargo. At present it is estimated that the measures
taken so far to counter the effects of the embargo should have only a limited impact on the 2016 budget. Overall, the
outlook for most agricultural markets is rather favourable, albeit subject to considerable uncertainties related to the
duration of the Russian embargo and sluggish economic performance that could depress demand-growth for agro-food
products within and outside the EU.
The Commission has based its estimates on the aforementioned market outlook and foresees to update its estimates in an
Amending Letter to the Draft Budget 2016 in light of actual developments.
When taking into account an amount of EUR 400 million foreseen to be covered by assigned revenue, the requested
appropriations for this chapter become EUR 2 215 million, which is a decrease of EUR 186 million compared to 2015.
05 02 06 Olive oil
(appropriations - EUR 1,3 million)
Appropriations in the 2015 budget:
EUR 46,6 million
Appropriations in the 2016 DB:
EUR 45,3 million
The requested appropriations for the budget 2016 remain largely stable. A decrease of EUR 1,3 million as compared to
the level in the 2015 budget concerns mainly the quality improvement measures. No aid for private storage is foreseen in
the Draft Budget 2016.
05 02 07 Textile plants
14
15
16
17
(appropriations - EUR 0 million)
Figure for 2013.

Figure for 2014
Based on the provisional analysis of monitoring reports 2012/2013: 61 000 schools and around 8,6 million children; 24 Member States
participating in 2012/2013; School year 2011/2012: 55 000 schools, around 8,1 million children from 23 Member States.
Same as for Budget 2015. No more recent data available at present.
Programme Statement
DB2016
EUR 6 million
EUR 6 million
The requested appropriations for the budget 2016 are unchanged compared to the level in the 2015 budget and relate
primarily to the cotton restructuring programme for Spain, at the financial ceiling established by the Council and the
European Parliament.
05 02 08 Fruit and vegetables

EUR 1 306 million
EUR 836 million
EUR 469 million
EUR 1 034 million
EUR 634 million
EUR 400 million
The decrease in needs as compared to Budget 2015 is due to several factors. Firstly, the 2015 needs cover the measures
taken in the wake of the Russian import embargo estimated at EUR 219,3 million, while no expenditure for such support
measures is taken into account in the 2016 budget for this sector. Secondly, budgetary needs for the aid to producer
groups for preliminary recognition are expected to significantly decrease compared to the 2015 budget, mainly due to a
gradual phasing out of this measure in the EAGF and the revision of existing plans as indicated in the latest Member
States' communications (January 2015). Thirdly, slightly lower needs for financial year 2016 are foreseen for the aid to
producer organisations based on the most recent information from Member States and the observed trend in expenditure
of the recent years. On the other hand the appropriations for the school fruit scheme increase on account of the higher
ceiling as of the 2014/2015 school year together with a better planned implementation of the scheme in the current and
upcoming school years.
In total the needs for this sector are expected to decline by EUR 272 million. The appropriations requested in the 2016
budget decline by EUR 203 million as a lower amount of assigned revenue is estimated to be available for this article
(EUR 469 million in Budget 2015 compared to EUR 400 million in Draft Budget 2016).
05 02 09 Wine
EUR 1 095 million
EUR 1 084 million
The marginal decline in appropriations for budget article 05 02 09 is based on the estimated execution of Member States'
programmes, reflecting a slight under-execution of the overall envelope that has been observed in the previous years.
05 02 10 Promotion
(appropriations + EUR 22 million)
EUR 65 million
EUR 87 million
Budget year 2016 will be the first year of implementation of the reformed agricultural information and promotion
policy18. Appropriations requested for item 05 02 10 01 reflect the need for the financing of the Member States'
programmes. This is based on the expenditure estimated in the financial statement accompanying the Commission
proposal for the policy reform, adjusted with the implementation pattern of the recent years. Moreover, the requested
appropriations take into account the 2015 Commission decision to provide additional funding to finance promotion
programmes in the wake of the Russian import embargo.
Under item 05 02 10 02, appropriations are requested to finance the information and promotion measures, managed
directly by the Union. As from 2016 these measures will include promotion activities delegated to the executive agency
CHAFEA. For commitment appropriations, the requested appropriations are in line with the estimate in the financial
statement accompanying the Commission proposal. The requested payment appropriations take into account the payment
of pre-financing for grant agreements expected to be signed already in 2016.
05 02 11 04 POSEI
18
Regulation (EU) No 1144/2014
Programme Statement
DB2016
EUR 231 million
EUR 236 million
The appropriations requested for this item take into account the programme modifications made by Member States and a
continued higher level of execution of the overall ceilings. This evolution is also reflected in the budget lines 05 03 02 50
and 05 03 02 52.
05 02 12 Milk and milk products
Needs in the 2015 budget:
EUR 131 million
EUR 77 million
EUR 54 million
Needs in the 2016 budget:
EUR 89 million
EUR 89 million
EUR 0 million
The budgetary needs for the dairy sector in 2016 decline compared to the 2015 budget, as the targeted aid measures
granted to milk producers in the Baltic Member States and Finland to address difficulties following the Russian import
embargo and private storage aid for cheese are not expected to have any impact for financial year 2016. On the other
hand, needs are expected to increase for private storage aid of skimmed milk powder and butter following the
prolongation of the two schemes until September 2015. For the school milk scheme, the budgetary needs are expected to
slightly decrease as compared to the 2015 budget, reflecting the past level of execution.
Appropriations for the 2016 budget are higher, which is only due to the fact that the lower needs in 2016 do not
counterbalance the reduction of assigned revenue that was budgeted in 2015 to finance the crisis measures.
05 02 15 Pigmeat, eggs, poultry meat and beekeeping
EUR 41 million
EUR 31 million
The requested appropriations for this article relate solely to the aid for beekeeping, remaining stable at EUR 31 million
and in line with the past level of execution. The decrease in needs for this article relates primarily to the amount of EUR
8,8 million that was foreseen in budget 2015 to compensate poultry farmers in one Member State for the losses linked to
the outbreak of avian influenza in August 2013. This measure does not have financial implications in 2016. No private
storage aid for pigmeat is foreseen during 2016. Export refund rates for all products concerned by this article are fixed at
zero with no residual payments foreseen for 2016.
Specific Objective 4: To sustain farmers' income stability by providing direct income support
Indicator 1: Share of direct support in agricultural entrepreneurial income (family farm income)
Latest known result
Target
2014: 49%19
2013: 47%20
2012: 47%
2011: 47%
To maintain the ratio
2010: 51%
2009: 61%21
19
20
21
The calculation is based on 2013 budget execution data and 2013 farm income data.
The figures before 2013 refer to EU-27; figures for subsequent years relate to EU-28.
The share of direct payments in agricultural entrepreneurial income in 2009 was due to the economic crisis which decreased farmers' revenues of
the farmers.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 5: To promote a more market oriented agriculture, by ensuring a significant level of decoupled
income support
Indicator 1: % of total direct payments which is decoupled
Latest known result
Target
Calendar year 2013/budget year 2014: 93,54%22
Calendar year 2012/budget year 2013: 93,24%

Specific Objective 6: Contribute to the development of sustainable agriculture and to making the Common
Agricultural Policy more compatible with the expectations of the society. Contribute preventing soil erosion,
maintaining soil organic matter and soil structure, ensuring a minimum level of maintenance and avoiding the
deterioration of habitats, and protecting and managing water. Contribute avoiding a massive conversion into arable
land
Indicator 1: % of CAP payments covered by cross compliance
Latest known result
Target
Maintain the %
2014: 83,5%25
2013: 82,4%26
2012: 79,4%
2011: 80,2%
2010: 81,4%
Indicator 2: Opinion expressed by the public on cross compliance
Latest known result
Target
83% support the reduction of direct payments to farmers not Maintain the positive opinion
complying with environmental rules
84% support the reduction for non-compliance of animal
welfare rules
86% support the reduction of direct payment to farmers not
respecting food safety rules27
Indicator 3: Control rate for GAEC
Latest known result
Target
100 % - In 2013, all paying agencies fulfilled the mandatory 100% implementation of the minimum regulatory
control rate except Ireland regarding holdings receiving RD control rate
payments.28
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Execution of the Budget 2014 provisional figures.

Draft Budget 2016, based on estimated needs and excluding crisis reserve.
Budget 2015, based on estimated needs and excluding crisis reserve.
Execution of the Budget 2014 provisional figures
The calculation of the 2013 baseline indicator in the management plan was adapted.
Results of the latest Special Eurobarometer "Europeans, Agriculture and the Common Agricultural Policy" published in 2007. In the absence of
new Eurobarometer with specific questions on cross compliance, there is no new information available.
GAEC stands for Standards of Good Agricultural and Environmental Condition. GAECs form part of the requirements under Cross Compliance
and apply to anyone receiving direct payments (except under the small farmers scheme) and/or support under certain rural development schemes.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 4: The ratio of permanent pasture within a Member State in relation to the total agricultural area
Latest known result
Ratio has not decreased beyond the limit of 10%29
Target
Maintain the ratio within the limit of 10% in relation to a
reference ratio30
Indicator 5: Share of area under greening practices

Latest known result
Target
Not applicable (2015 being the first year of implementation)
Maintain the share (the share is to be established in

2015)
Expenditure related outputs (for specific objectives 4 to 6)

Output
Budget line31
Budget 2015
Number
EUR million
DB 2016
Number32 EUR million
Single Payment Scheme (number of hectares 05 03 01 01

paid):33
107 264 005
Single area payment scheme (number of 05 03 01 02

hectares paid):
41 360 000
7 806
43 644 560
4 236
Basic payment scheme (number of hectares 05 03 01 10

paid)
118 779 583
17 005
Payment for agricultural practices beneficial 05 03 01 11

for the climate and the environment (number of
hectares paid)
162 424 144
12 239
Voluntary coupled support

hectares paid)
(number of 05 03 02 60
9 464 818
4 047
Voluntary coupled support (number of heads 05 03 02 60

paid)
93 324 588
Other
TOTAL34
28 342 The scheme no 79 (Residual

longer exists in
amounts)
calendar year
2015/financial
year 2016
3 889
2 056
40 037
39 662

The financial year 2016 (corresponding to calendar year 2015 for direct payments) is the first year for the new direct
payments' schemes introduced by Regulation (EU) No 1307/2013. Three direct payments schemes applicable in calendar
year 2014 continue to exist (the single area payment scheme (SAPS), redistributive payment and the crop-specific
payment for cotton) and six new schemes will be implemented for the first time (basic payment scheme (BPS), payment
for agricultural practices beneficial for the climate and the environment, payment for areas with natural constraints,
29
30
31
32
33
34
Two MS (EL and IE) did not communicate yet the ratio for year 2014.
The maintenance of the ratio of permanent pasture means that there should not be, at national or regional level, a decrease by more than 10% of
the current ratio of permanent pasture in relation to the total agricultural area by comparison with a reference ratio reflecting this ratio at a
reference period.
The item 05 03 01 10, 05 03 01 11 and 05 03 02 60 are as from calendar year 2015/financial year 2016
Best estimate based on available information. To be confirmed in 2016.
The figures relate to appropriations (after financial discipline) and do not include the estimated assigned revenue to be available to this budget
item at EUR 1 245 million for the Single Payment Scheme in 2015 and EUR 1 202 million for the Basic Payment Scheme in 2016.
Not including measures covered under specific objective 7 for which output indicators are given and not including the amount for the reserve for
agricultural crises under Article 05 03 10.
Programme Statement
DB2016
payment for young farmers, voluntary coupled support and the small farmers scheme). Some schemes are obligatory
whereas others are voluntary for the Member States. The allocation of the national envelopes to different schemes
depends to a large extent on Member States' decisions.
Regulation (EC) No 73/2009 is repealed and the schemes no longer in force are only included in Draft Budget 2016 to
cover the needs for residual amounts.
For financial year 2016, financial discipline has to be applied to establish the crisis reserve of EUR 441,6 million, as
35
proposed by the Commission in line with the provisions of Regulation (EU) 1306/2013. Financial discipline reduction
to direct payments is only necessary to establish the crisis reserve as there is a margin of EUR 1 082 million within the
EAGF sub-ceiling of Heading 2 of the MFF.
05 03 Direct payments
Needs in 2015 budget before financial discipline (incl. crisis reserve):
EUR 42 587 million
Needs in 2015 budget after financial discipline:
EUR 42 154 million
Appropriations in 2015 budget after financial discipline:
EUR 40 909 million
EUR 1 245 million
Amount of financial discipline in 2015 budget (incl. crisis reserve):
EUR
433 million
Needs in 2016 budget before financial discipline (incl. crisis reserve):
EUR 42 280 million
EUR 41 838 million
Appropriations requested in the 2016 budget after financial discipline:
EUR 40 536 million
EUR 1 302 million
Amount of financial discipline in 2016 budget (incl. crisis reserve):
EUR 441,6 million
For direct payments (chapter 05 03), the budgetary needs decrease by EUR 316 million to an amount of EUR 41 838
million in 2016 after taking into account of the financing of the reserve for agricultural crises through application of the
financial discipline mechanism. Requested appropriations for this chapter decrease by EUR 373 million, taking into
account the reduction of revenue assigned to the BPS (until 2015 to the single payment scheme (SPS)) from EUR 1 245
million in 2015 to EUR 1 302 million in 2016. As a consequence, the requested appropriations amount to EUR 40 536
million in 2016, including the appropriations for the reserve for agricultural crises of EUR 441,6 million which are
entered into article 05 03 10. Appropriations remaining from the 2015 budget, up to the limit set out in Article 169(3) of
Regulation (EU) No 966/2012, will be carried over to the 2016 financial year and transferred to article 05 03 09 to be
reimbursed to the final beneficiaries, who will be subject to financial discipline in financial year 2016.
The decrease in needs is the effect of decisions of Member States, notified by 31 December 2013 and 1 August 2014,
36
37
concerning the transfers between the two CAP pillars and the estimated product of the reduction of payments which is
made available for the support under the European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development. The effect is partly netted
off by the increase due to the continued phasing-in of the direct payments for three Member States (Bulgaria, Croatia and
Romania) and the integration of the amount from the Croatian de-mining reserve for 2014.
The maximum amount of direct payments which a Member State may pay in a financial year (excluding the amounts
covered by Specific Objective 7) is limited by the ceiling set in Annex III to Regulation (EU) No 1307/2013. For
calendar year 2015 (financial year 2016), the total of Annex III amounts to EUR 41 488 million as compared to EUR 41
38
757 million for calendar year 2014 .
The estimate of the budgetary needs take into account information available to the Commission at the time of
establishing the Draft Budget as regards decisions and actions of the Member States to implement the reformed direct
payments schemes. Finally, the needs for direct payments are reduced by application of the financial discipline
mechanism. The amount of financial discipline taken into account for the Draft Budget 2016 relates only to the
establishment of the crisis reserve (EUR 441,6 million) similar to 2015 where the crisis reserve amounts to EUR 433
million. The need for financial discipline will be re-assessed, as appropriate, in the context of the autumn Amending
Letter to the 2016 Draft Budget.
05 03 01 Decoupled direct payments
(appropriations - EUR 2 033 million)
Needs in 2015 budget before financial discipline:
EUR 39 042 million
35
36
37
38
COM(2015)141 of 26 March 2015.

In accordance with Article 136a of Regulation (EU) No 73/2009 and Article 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1307/2013.
In accordance with Article 11 of regulation (EU) No 1307/2013.
Annex VIII to Regulation (EC) No 73/2009 after transfers to the EAFRD for Germany and Sweden under article 136 and including the amounts
for the crop-specific payment for cotton.
Programme Statement

DB2016
EUR 38 642 million

EUR 37 397 million
EUR 1 245 million
Needs in 2016 budget before financial discipline:

EUR 37 055 million
EUR 36 666 million
EUR 35 364 million
EUR 1 302 million
As regards decoupled direct payments, the estimated needs (after financial discipline) amount to EUR 36 666 million.
Requested appropriations for this article become EUR 35 364 million (- EUR 2 033 million compared to 2015) after
taking into account the reductions due to financial discipline and the expected assigned revenue to be available to this
article (EUR 1 302 million).
The decrease in the estimated needs for decoupled direct payments compared to budget 2015 should in particular be seen
in the context of the new structure of direct payments introduced by the 2013 CAP reform. The Member States'
implementation decisions result in a net transfer to Article 05 03 02 "Other direct payments".
The needs after financial discipline for the BPS, which to some extent replaces the SPS, are estimated at EUR 18 307
million (after a deduction of the estimated product of reduction according to Article 11 of Regulation (EU) No 1307/2013
and not taking into account the overbooking of BPS). This is lower than the needs for the now expired SPS in the budget
2015 (EUR 29 587 million). The needs after financial discipline for the Single Area Payment Scheme (SAPS), after a
deduction of the estimated product of reduction according to Article 11 of Regulation (EU) No 1307/2013 amount to
EUR 4 236 million and decrease by EUR 3 570 million compared to the budget year 2015
The above evolution is mainly due to the introduction of the new payment for agricultural practices beneficial for the
climate and the environment which is compulsory at the level of 30% of the national envelopes. On this basis the needs
for this scheme are estimated at EUR 12 239 million after financial discipline.
The redistributive payment was introduced in calendar year 2014 where three Member States applied it. In calendar year
2015, corresponding to financial year 2016, with eight Member States applying the scheme, the needs are consequently
increasing by EUR 811 million and amount to EUR 1 251 million after financial discipline.
The needs for two further new schemes, i.e. the payment for young farmers and the payment for areas with natural
constraints, are estimated at respectively EUR 549 million and EUR 3 million after financial discipline reflecting the
national ceilings for these schemes.
05 03 02 Other direct payments39
(appropriations + EUR 1 658 million)
Appropriations in the 2015 budget before financial discipline:
EUR 2 669 million
EUR 2 639 million
Appropriations requested in 2016 budget before financial discipline:
EUR 4 345 million
EUR 4 297 million
For the other direct payments, appropriations increase by EUR 1 658 million compared to 2015 budget.
This increase is mainly explained by the introduction of the new voluntary coupled support, which is applied by all but
one Member State. The needs for this scheme are estimated at EUR 4 047 million after financial discipline.
The reform has introduced several mechanisms of cross-financing of schemes. This applies for instance to the small
farmers scheme which is financed from the amounts available for other schemes. The appropriations needed for the small
farmers scheme cannot be determined at this stage given that the uptake of the scheme is not known until in the course of
financial year 2016.
05 03 10 Reserve for crises in the agricultural sector
(appropriations + EUR 8,6 million)
Appropriations requested in the 2015 budget:
EUR 433,0 million
Appropriations requested in the 2016 budget:
EUR 441,6 million
In accordance with Article 25 of Regulation (EU) No 1306/2013, a crisis reserve has to be established by applying, at the
beginning of each year, a reduction to direct payments with the financial discipline mechanism. For financial year 2016,
the amount of the crisis reserve corresponds to EUR 441,6 million (in current prices).
39
Not including measures covered under specific objective 7 (POSEI).
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 7: To promote local agricultural production and to ensure a fair level of prices for commodities for
direct consumption and for processing by local industries in the Outermost Regions of the EU and in the Aegean Islands
Indicator 1: Support to the Local Production (SLP) to maintain/develop the agricultural production: Utilised
agricultural area (variation with respect to the previous year)*
Latest known result
Target
40
POSEIDOM :
To maintain local agricultural production
Guadeloupe: 28 847 ha (-2,8%)
Martinique: 23 185 ha (-2,5%)
Guyane: 26 034 ha (+0,9%)
Runion: 42 554 ha (-0,2%)
POSEICAN:
Canaries: 83 221 ha (+0,7%)41
POSEIMA42:
Madeira: 5 428 ha (+41%: 2009 data)
Azores: 120 412 ha (+7,5%: 2009 data)
Smaller Aegean Islands: 294 581 ha (-6,7%)
*In their annual implementation reports for 2013, the Member States concerned (except Portugal for Madeira) have
communicated data related to the common performance indicators as requested by the Commission services. However,
the provided data may not be fully in line with the requirements of the Commission services and thus not mutually
comparable. Therefore, these indicators shall be evaluated with due caution.
Indicator 2: Specific Supply Arrangements (SSA) to ensure the supply of essential products: SSA coverage rate
(relation between quantities of products benefiting from SSA support and total quantities of the same products
introduced in the respective outermost region)
Latest known result
Target
43
POSEIDOM (all products): 49% (2012: 46%)
100%
POSEICAN (cereals only): 99,6% (2012: 99,1%)
POSEIMA
Madeira (cereals only): 98,6% ( 2012: 95%)
Azores (cereals only): 85.3% (2012: 88,1%)
Smaller Aegean Islands (animal feed stuff only): 99,61% (+9%)
Indicator 3: Indicator 3: Specific Supply Arrangements (SSA) to ensure an equitable level of prices for essential
products: comparison of prices for the consumers in the outermost regions of certain products/groups of products
covered under SSA with prices of similar products in their Member States.
Latest known result
Target
44
POSEIDOM :
Average of 4 DOM/mtropole: n/a
Reduction of the gap with mainland

prices
POSEICAN:
Canaries:
-Wheat (100kg): 1.58 (1.46 in 2012)
-milking cow's animal feed (100kg): 1.16 (1.07 in 2012)
40
41
42
43
44
The data provided by the French authorities on the utilised agricultural area in 2012 was only provisional. It was corrected in the annual report for
the year 2013 (budget year 2014). This explains the differences among the data for 2012 and 2013. The variation shown in the present document
is calculated on the latest data provided by the French authorities for 2012 (budget year 2013).
Data for 2012, data for 2013 (budget year 2014) not available yet.
In the annual report from 2010, 2011 and 2012 the Portuguese authorities communicated 2009 data. Submission of data for the annual report 2013
is ongoing.
The French authorities used in their annual report for 2013 a different methodology and data source to calculate this indicator (calculation based
on value and not quantities, data taken from customs sources and not from SSA operators).
Submission of data by the French authorities is ongoing.
Programme Statement
DB2016
-Beef cattle animal feed (100kg): 1.26 (1.14 in 2012)

POSEIMA:
Madeira (foodstuffs, indicator 2b): 1.00 (1.00 in 2012)
Azores:
-rice: 1.26 (1.25 in 2012)
-oil: 1.13 (1.11 in 2012)
-bread: 1.18 (1.14 in 2012)
Smaller Aegean Islands:
-Animal feeding stuffs: 0.60
-Flour: 1.1
Output
Budget line
Regime for outermost regions of the 05 03 02 50

EU: direct aids for banana reference
area (hectares/quantities)
Other
B 2015
Number
EUR million
ES: 371 013
tonnes
PT: 17 742
278
tonnes
FR: 251 733
tonnes
05 03 02 50
05 03 02 52
TOTAL
DB 2016
Number
EUR million
ES: 371 013
tonnes
PT: 21 204
279
tonnes
FR: 250 000
tonnes
161
154
439
433

For the support to the POSEI and Smaller Aegean Islands, the programmes are divided into two types of measures:
special supply arrangements financed under chapter 05 02 and support for the local products which are split into market
aids (chapter 05 02) and direct payments (chapter 05 03). The variations for the market-related expenditure are explained
above (see item 05 02 11 04).
For direct payments, the lower level of requested appropriations is due to the updated reallocation, as communicated by
the Member States concerned, in their programmes shifting some financing to the market aids. The requested
appropriations in the 2016 budget similarly to budget 2015 also take into account financial discipline.
Specific Objective 8: To provide the Commission with reasonable assurance that Member States have put in place
management and control systems in conformity with EU rules designed to ensure the legality and regularity of the
underlying transactions financed by the EAGF, EAFRD, SAPARD and IPARD and, where this is not the case, to
exclude the expenditure concerned from EU financing so as to protect the EU's financial interests
Indicator 1: Percentage of expenditure (EAGF+EAFRD) with statistics or 100 % check
Latest known result
Target
94% in 2012
95%
Output
Number of
satellite45
45
applications
controlled
by
Budget line
Budget 2015
Number
EUR million
05 07 01 02
380 000 km
6,8
DB 2016
Number
EUR million
522 000 km
Very High Resolution images.
9,1
Programme Statement
DB2016

In order to assist the Member States carrying out on the spot checks on aid applications, the satellite imagery acquired is
made available to the national authorities allowing them to determine the area of agricultural parcels, to identify crops
and verify their status. The requested appropriations for the Draft Budget 2016 increase by EUR 2,3 million compared to
the budget 2015, due to the additional control requirements linked to the implementation of the CAP reform in the field
of direct payments (in particular greening) and the intensified use of controls with remote sensing.
Within chapter 05 07 and under budget line 05 07 01 06, the amount of EUR 35 million is included in order to reimburse
Member States in case of accounting clearance decisions taken in their favour. Accounting clearance decisions taken for
the last four budget years involved corrections in favour of the Member States.
Specific Objective 9: To inform and increase awareness of the CAP by maintaining an effective and regular dialogue
with stakeholders, civil society, and specific target audiences
Indicator 1: Public awareness of CAP
Latest known result
Target
The Latest Eurobarometer survey (field research November
Maintain and if possible increase awareness of
December 2013) shows that 92% of Europeans believe that agriculture the CAP
and rural areas play an important role for their future and that 64%
have heard about the support that the EU gives farmers through its
CAP. There is a broad consensus on the key changes decided in the
recent CAP reform.
The next Eurobarometer survey will be conducted in the last quarter
of 2015. The results will be published in first quarter of 2016
Indicator 2: Number of page visits on AGRI Europa website
Latest known result
Target
January 2013-December 2013: 4,9 million
Maintain and if possible increase the number of
January 2014-December 2014: 5,2 million
page visits

Output
Grants awarded to third party organisations to
implement actions to improve the level of
understanding of the CAP among EU citizens
Media networking
Stakeholders:
conferences
Networking
General public events
Horizontal activities
Total
Budget line
Budget 2015
Number
EUR million
05 08 06
15
3,0
05 08 06
0,4
05 08 06
0,6
05 08 06
05 08 06
7
6
1,3
2,7
8,0
DB 2016
Number
EUR million
15
3,0
30
5,0
8,0

Budget line 05 08 06 Enhancing Public Awareness of the CAP is foreseen to finance the communication efforts of the
Commission in relation to the CAP.
The overall needs for DB 2016 for the article 05 08 06 are estimated to remain unchanged at EUR 8 million. This
includes an amount of EUR 3 million destined for grants to third party organisations. The other external communication
actions in 2016, financed under this budget item, will focus on the relevance of the CAP in particular in relation with the
growth, jobs and investments priority theme. The scope, choice and intensity of these communication actions will very
much depend on the final policy direction which, at the moment of the preparation of the DB 2016, is still to be decided.
In addition to actions such as conferences, media activities, attendance in fairs, publications, web and social media
activities, a new specific communication campaign is being considered in relation to the simplification of the CAP and its
implementation.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 10: To facilitate decision making on strategic choices for the CAP and to support other activities of
the DG by means of economic and policy analyses and studies
Indicator 1: Representativeness of information about the EU farm economic situation collected by the Farm
Accountancy Data Network (FADN)
Latest known result
Target
Farm returns collected for accounting year 2012: 83 699 Maximum number of farm returns to be collected for
accounting year 2013: 86 936.
Observed coverage of EU agricultural production for the
accounting year 2012:
Coverage of EU agricultural production for the accounting year
2013:
1.
94% coverage of the Standard Output;
2.
93% coverage of the Utilised Agricultural
1.
90% coverage of the Standard Output;
Area.
2.
90% coverage of the Utilized Agricultural Area.
Indicator 2: Adequate knowledge of Farm's structure
Baseline Latest known result
Target
Data of Farm Structure Survey 2013 are expected to be First use of the 2013 Farm Structure Survey data in internal
delivered by Member States to Eurostat by December analyses, publications and indicators of the common
2014 and made available by Eurostat to users as from monitoring and evaluation framework for the CAP 2014-2020.
first quarter 2015.
Output
Budget line
Data collection on EU Farm Accountancy Data

05 08 01
Network (FADN) data: farm returns
Data collection on structure of agricultural
05 08 02
holdings: farms surveyed
05 08 09
Other46
Total
Number
87 185
B 2015
EUR million
DB 2016
Number EUR million
15,0
86 905
15,1
19,4
1 800 000
0,2
3,7
4,8
42,9
4,4
5,7
25,4

The Farm Accountancy Data Network data are essential tools for the monitoring of agriculture income and business
which are used for the evaluation and the impact analysis of the agricultural measures. They provide support to the
decision process related to the CAP.
The appropriations requested for 2016 relate to the Farm Accountancy Data Network (EUR 14,34 million) and are
intended to finance the standard fee for FADN farm returns transmitted by the Member States (86 905 * EUR 165) and
the development and maintenance of the information system used for the collection, processing, analysis, publication and
dissemination of the farm accountancy data and analysis results (EUR 0,78 million).
Information from Farm Structure Surveys is systematically used in extended impact assessments, evaluation and policy
conception, particularly regarding the regional situation of specific sectors. The content of the surveys is regularly
adapted to answer new needs for agricultural and rural development policy and other policies (in particular regional,
social and environmental policy). As the pre-financing of commitments for the Farm Structure Survey of 2016 was paid
in 2015, then in 2016 no funds are needed for the survey itself. Only an amount of EUR 0,25 million is requested and it
will be destined for the maintenance of the Eurofarm IT tool used in the processing of these surveys.
Under other, the DB 2016 request includes an amount of EUR 2,18 million for the MARS agro-meteorological system
used for monitoring crops and forecasting yields of the main crops in Europe and its neighbourhood. In addition, EUR 2
million is destined for the maintenance, development and use of modelling tools used by the Commission in its
agricultural economic and policy analysis. Finally, an amount of EUR 1,5 million is included for setting up and
developing a coherent system for the production of harmonised supply balance sheets for 7 main crops, for the
46
This excludes appropriations for item 05 08 80 for Budget 2015.
Programme Statement
DB2016
production of harmonised data for land prices and rents and for the preparation of the new strategy for the IT architecture
and infrastructure for the farm survey system after 2016.
Programme Statement
DB2016
CAP: European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development (EAFRD)

1.
Legal Basis
Period of
application

17 December 2013 laying down common provisions on the European Regional
Development Fund, the European Social Fund, the Cohesion Fund, the European
Agricultural Fund for Rural Development and the European Maritime and
Fisheries Fund and laying down general provisions on the European Regional
Development Fund, the European Social Fund, the Cohesion Fund and the
European Maritime and Fisheries Fund and repealing Council Regulation (EC)
No 1083/2006 Regulation (EU) No 1305/2013 of the European Parliament and
of the Council of 17 December 2013 on support for rural development by the
European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development (EAFRD) and repealing
Council Regulation (EC) No 1698/2005 Regulation (EU) No 1306/2013 of the
European Parliament and of the Council of 17 December 2013 on the financing,
management and monitoring of the common agricultural policy and repealing
Council Regulations (EEC) No 352/78, (EC) No 165/94, (EC) No 2799/98, (EC)
No 814/2000, (EC) No 1290/2005 and (EC) No 485/2008 Regulation (EU) No
1310/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 17 December 2013
laying down certain transitional provisions on support for rural development by
the European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development (EAFRD), amending
Regulation (EU) No 1305/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council as
regards resources and their distribution in respect of the year 2014 and amending
Council Regulation (EC) No 73/2009 and Regulations (EU) No 1307/2013, (EU)
No 1306/2013 and (EU) No 1308/2013 of the European Parliament and of the
Council as regards their application in the year 2014
2014 - 2020
2014*
Total
2015
5 285,0
18 176,3

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
18 676,3
14 372,1
14 381,9
14 331,2
Reference
Amount
(EUR million)
2020
Total
14 334,0
99 556.8
* this amount takes into account 2014 non-used allocation transferred to subsequent years according to Council
Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2015/623 of 21 April 2015
2.
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
13 990,277
23,66 % 235,102 99,69 % 15 793,712 49,42 % 5 277,814
9,36 %
Authorised
appropriation
revenue
13 990,277
23,66 % 235,028 98,88 % 15 793,712 49,42 % 5 277,814
9,34 %
Programme Statement
3.
DB2016
EU added value
Under the second pillar of the CAP, rural development programmes make a vital contribution to the economic, social and
environmental well-being of rural areas, and the sustainability of the rural environment. Rural development contributes to
promoting the competitiveness of agriculture, to ensuring the sustainable management of natural resources and climate
action as well as to achieving a balanced territorial development of rural economies. Initiatives under the European
Innovation Partnership for agriculture, and support for diversification play an essential role to deliver on the Europe 2020
objectives as they encourage innovation and entrepreneurship and promote inclusiveness.
Evaluations of the different elements of the CAP are conducted on a regular basis1 and their results are incorporated in
the impact assessment preparing new initiatives. The indicators defined in the context of the monitoring and evaluation
framework2 will serve as a basis for future evaluations. Based on these, in 2018 results on the performance of the CAP
will be presented in a report to the European Parliament and Council.


Flagship
Innovation Union
Total
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
278,0
278,0
8 464,1
5 833,3
3 296,0
18 149,4
DB 2016
(EUR million)
285,7
285,7
8 697,0
5 993,8
3 386,7
18 648,9

Relevant specific objective/output
1. Restoring, preserving and enhancing ecosystems dependent on agriculture and
forestry
1
2
Budget2015
(EUR Million)
DB 2016
(EUR Million)
10 368,93
10 641,94
In 2014 an evaluation on investment support under Rural Development Policy was published. A synthesis of the ex-ante evaluations of Rural
Development Programmes 2014-2020 carried out by the Member States is under preparation.
Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 834/2014 of 22 July 2014 laying down rules for the application of the common monitoring and
evaluation framework of the common agricultural policy and Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 808/2014 of 17 July 2014 laying
down rules for the application of Regulation (EU) No 1305/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council on support for rural development
by the European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development (EAFRD)
For DB 2014, the calculation of 40% of the annual commitments constitutes a good approach to estimate the size of the rural development
contribution to climate action and is in line with Commission's climate markers approach. The figures for Budget 2015 are revised in line with
new methodology for calculating contribution to climate action (see following footnote) and taking into account the revised level of commitments
in accordance with Draft Amending Budget No 2 for 2015.
In accordance with Annex II to Regulation (EU) No 215/2014 of 7 March 2014 laying down rules for implementing Regulation (EU) No
1303/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council laying down common provisions on the European Regional Development Fund, the
European Social Fund, the Cohesion Fund, the European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development and the European Maritime and Fisheries
Fund and laying down general provisions on the European Regional Development Fund, the European Social Fund, the Cohesion Fund and the
European Maritime and Fisheries Fund with regard to methodologies for climate change support, the determination of milestones and targets in
the performance framework and the nomenclature of categories of intervention for the European Structural and Investment Funds. Calculation
based on the value of commitment for DB2016 and indicative allocation to focus areas taking into account 27 rural development programmes
adopted by 15 February 2015.
Programme Statement
DB2016
2. Promoting resource efficiency and supporting the shift towards a low carbon and
climate resilient economy in agriculture, food and forestry sectors
Contribution to financing biodiversity5
Relevant specific objective/output
Budget 2015
(EUR Million)
DB 2016
(EUR Million)
5 332,8
5 288,1
1. Restoring, preserving and enhancing ecosystems dependent on agriculture and

forestry
2. Promoting resource efficiency and supporting the shift towards a low carbon
and climate resilient economy in agriculture, food and forestry sectors
4.
Specific objectives
The following is relevant for indicators regarding the specific objectives 1 to 6.

Out of 118 rural development programmes 27 were adopted by 15 February. The adoption of the remaining programmes
is conditional to the adoption of the Council Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2015/623 of 21 April 2015 amending Regulation
(EU, Euratom) No 1311/2013 laying down the multiannual financial framework for the years 2014-2020 (OJ L 103,
22.04.2015, p.1) and Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/xx amending Annex I to Regulation (EU) No
1305/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L xx.xx.x.2015, p. xx). 4 of the 27 programmes that were
adopted until 15 February 2015 included 2 Framework Programmes and 2 Rural Network Programmes. Therefore the
values are aggregated from the 23 adopted rural development programmes.
For the new generation of spending programmes, for each of the specific objectives the Commission has defined resulttype "Target Indicators" in the Rural Development (RD) CMES (Common Monitoring and Evaluation System), in
accordance with Title VII of Regulation (EU) No 1305/2013. At least one Target Indicator is available for each of the 18
6
RD Focus Areas . The application of each of these indicators is mandatory for all the rural development programmes
including the corresponding focus area. For each indicator target levels are established ex-ante for year 2023 and actual
achievements will be assessed regularly during the implementation period. It is therefore possible to aggregate at the
level of the Union both their planned levels for the year 2023 and, through regular monitoring and reporting, their actual
levels of achievement year by. Therefore, these CMES Target Indicators represent an optimal way to monitor and report
on the performance of the policy.
However, the RD CMES does not prescribe the Member States to define milestones at the year 2018 in relation to target
indicators, while such milestones are requested to be made available in relation to a number of output-type indicators to
be included in a Performance Framework (PF) in accordance with Annex II of Regulation (EU) No 1303/2013. Although
the latter Annex recommends the Member States to make use of common indicators for the purpose of establishing the
PF, this choice is not mandatory. Therefore, the Commission wishes to emphasise that the aggregation at the level of the
Union of these indicators is not fully representative.
In the following tables, milestones for the year 2018 are estimated and presented only in relation to those target indicators
for which, due to their specific nature, a specific correspondence could be established with respect to relevant PF
indicators.
All values will be revised following the adoption of the remaining programmes.
The baseline and the latest know result is 0 at the start of the programming period. The information concerning the latest
known results will become available to the Commission as of the first annual implementation reports due by 30 June
2016.
In the programming period 2007-2013 most of the measures with positive biodiversity impact were part of Axis 2. Since the beginning of the
programming period 2014-2020 the calculation of 40% of the annual commitments was used as an estimate of the size of the rural development
contribution to biodiversity, which was in line with Commission's climate markers approach. Starting from DB 2016, the methodology for the
calculation of the contribution to biodiversity is the following: 100% of the annual commitment in the Priority Area 4 with exception of the
amounts for the areas facing natural constraints plus 40% of the annual commitment in the focus area 5E. Calculation based on the value of
commitment for DB2016 and indicative allocation to focus areas taking into account 27 rural development programmes adopted by 15 February
2015. For comparative reasons the figures for Budget 2015 are revised in line with new methodology and taking into account the revised level of
commitments in accordance with Draft Amending Budget No 2 for 2015.
The 6 Rural Development Specific Objectives (Priorities) are further broken down into 18 strategic Focus Areas in the Article 5 of the Regulation
(EC) No 1305/2013
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 1: Fostering knowledge transfer and innovation in agriculture forestry and rural areas (Priority 1)
Indicator 1: % of expenditure for the three measures Knowledge transfer & information action, advisory services
and cooperation in relation to the total expenditure for the RDP (Focus area 1A: Fostering innovation and the
knowledge base in rural areas)
Baseline
Latest known result
(2013)
Milestones
Target 2023
2018
Not applicable*
2.7 %
23 out of the 23 relevant adopted programmes include this Focus Area

Indicator 2: Number of cooperation operations planned under the cooperation measure (groups, networks/clusters,
pilot projects) (Focus area 1B: strengthening the links between agriculture and forestry and research and
innovation)
Baseline
Latest known result
Milestones
Target 2023
(2013)
2018
Not applicable*
2276

Indicator 3: Total number of participants trained (Focus area 1C: fostering lifelong learning and vocational
training in agriculture and forestry sectors)
Baseline
Latest known result
Milestones
Target 2023
(2013)
2018
Not applicable*
2 368 845

* For the Specific Objective 1 the indicators as set in the rural development common monitoring and evaluation system
are identified and presented with targets for 2023. The common performance framework does not apply to Specific
Objective 1, because no EAFRD budget is allocated to that cross cutting Priority. Therefore no information on the
milestones is collected from the Member States. Nevertheless, as in case of the remaining specific objectives, the
Commission will be able to collect and present the real outputs for these indicators in the future. The information
concerning the latest known results will become available to the Commission as of the first annual implementation
reports due by 30 June 2016.
Specific Objective 2: Enhancing farm viability and competitiveness of all types of agriculture in all regions and
promoting innovative farm technologies and sustainable management of forests (Priority 2)
Indicator 1: % of agricultural holdings with RDP support for investment in restructuring (Focus area 2A:
facilitating the restructuring of farms facing major structural problems, notably farms with a low degree of market
participation, market-oriented farms in particular sectors and farms in need of agricultural diversification)
Baseline
(2013)
Milestones
Latest known result
0
2018
20% of the target for 2023*

Target 2023
4,4%
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: % of agricultural holdings with RDP supported business development plan/investments for young
farmers (Focus area 2B: facilitating generational renewal in the agricultural sector)
Baseline
(2013)
Milestones
Latest known result
Target 2023
2018
2%

*) The indicative milestone, which represents an average for both Target Indicators, is based on the application of
Performance Framework proxy indicator: Number of agriculture holdings with RDP support for investment in
restructuring or modernisation and number of agricultural holdings with RDP supported business development
plan/investment for young farmers. This non mandatory indicator concerns 22 out of the 23 RDP having programmed at
least some of these types of measures.
Specific Objective 3: Promoting food chain organisation, including processing and marketing of agricultural products,
animal welfare and risk management in agriculture (Priority 3)
Indicator 1: % of agricultural holdings supported under quality schemes, local markets and short supply circuits,
and producer groups (Focus area 3A: better integrating primary producers into the food chain through quality
schemes, promotion in local markets and short supply circuits, producer groups and inter-branch organisations)
Baseline
(2013)
Milestones
Latest known result
0
2018
Target 2023
4,9%

* The indicative milestone is based on the application of Performance Framework proxy indicator: Number of
agricultural holdings supported under quality schemes, local markets/short supply circuits, and producer groups. This non
mandatory indicator concerns 9 out of the 15 RDP having programmed these types of measures.
Indicator 2: % of agricultural holdings participating in risk management schemes (Focus area 3B: supporting farm
risk management)
Baseline
(2013)
Milestones
Latest known result
0
2018
Target 2023
1,4%

* The indicative milestone is based on the application of Performance Framework proxy indicator: Number of
agricultural holdings participating in risk management schemes. This non mandatory indicator concerns 7 out of the 9
RDP having programmed these types of measures.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 4: Restoring, preserving and enhancing ecosystems related to agriculture and forestry (Priority 4)
Indicator 1:
a) % of agricultural land under management contracts contributing to biodiversity
b) Percentage of forest area under management contracts contributing to biodiversity (Focus area 4A: Restoring
and preserving biodiversity, including Natura 2000 area and high nature value farming, and the state of European
landscapes)
Baseline
(2013)
Milestones
Latest known result
Target 2023
2018
a) 0
23,6 %
b) 0
Not applicable**
2%
a) Out of the 23 relevant adopted programmes, 23 are relevant for sub-indicator

b) Out of the 23 relevant adopted programmes, 15 are relevant for sub-indicator
Indicator 2:
a) % of agricultural land under management contracts improving water management
b) percentage of forest area under management contracts improving water management (Focus area 4B: improving
water management)
Baseline
Latest known result
Milestones
(2013)
Target 2023
2018
a) 0
20 %
b) 0
Not applicable**
2.1%

Indicator 3:
a) % of agricultural land under management contracts preventing soil erosion and improving soil management
b) Percentage of forest area under management contracts preventing soil erosion and improving soil management
(Focus area 4C: improving soil management)
Baseline
(2013)
Latest known result
Milestones
Target 2023
2018
a) 0
22 %
b) 0
Not applicable**
2,6%

*) The indicative milestone, which represents an average for the three Target Indicators, is based on the application of
Performance Framework proxy indicator: Agricultural land under management contracts contributing to biodiversity (ha)
+ Agricultural land under management contracts improving water management (ha) + Agricultural land under
management contracts improving soil management and/preventing soil erosion (ha). This non mandatory indicator
concerns 20 out of the 23 RDP having programmed these types of measures.
**) No milestones are available because there is no equivalent common Performance Framework Indicators in the RD
Performance Framework.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 5: Promoting resource efficiency and supporting the shift towards a low carbon and climate resilient
economy in agriculture, food and forestry sectors (Priority 5)
Indicator 1: % of irrigated land switching to more efficient irrigation systems (Focus area 5A: increasing efficiency
in water use by agriculture)
Baseline
(2013)
Latest known result

0
Milestones
2018
Not applicable*
Target 2023
9,2%

Indicator 2: Total investment in energy savings and efficiency (Focus area 5B: increasing efficiency in energy use
in agriculture and food processing)
Baseline
(2013)
Latest known result

0
Milestones
2018
33% of the target for 2023**
Target 2023
797 841 061

Indicator 3: Total investment in renewable energy production (Focus area 5C: Facilitating the supply and use of
renewable sources of energy, of by products, wastes, residues and other non-food raw material for purposes of the
bio-economy)
Baseline
(2013)
Latest known result

0
Milestones
2018
Target 2023
1 133 656 092

Indicator 4:
a) % of LU concerned by investments in life-stock management in view of reducing the GHG and ammonia
emissions
b) % of agricultural land under management contracts targeting reduction of GHG and ammonia emissions (Focus
area 5D: Reducing nitrous oxide and methane emissions from agriculture)
Baseline
(2013)
Latest known result

a) 0
b) 0
Milestones
2018
Not applicable*
51% of the target for 2023***
Target 2023
2,6%
7%

Indicator 5: % of agricultural and forest area under management to foster carbon sequestration and conservation
(Focus area 5E: Fostering carbon sequestration in agriculture and forestry)
Baseline
(2013)
Latest known result

0
Milestones
2018
Target 2023
1,6%

*) No milestones are available because there is no equivalent common Performance Framework Indicators in the RD
Performance Framework
**) The indicative milestone, which represents an average for both Target Indicators, is based on the application of
Performance Framework proxy indicator: Number of investment operations in energy savings and efficiency () (5B) +
Programme Statement
DB2016
Number of investment operations in renewable energy production () (5C). This non mandatory indicator concerns 16
out of the 16 RDP having programmed at least some of these types of measures.
***) The indicative milestone, which represents an average for both Target Indicators, is based on the application of
Performance Framework proxy indicator: Agricultural and forest land under management to foster carbon
sequestration/conservation (ha) (5E) + Agricultural land under management contracts targeting reduction of GHG and/or
ammonia emissions (ha) (5D) + Irrigated land switching to more efficient irrigation system (ha) (5A). This non
mandatory indicator concerns 12 out of the 16 RDP having programmed at least some of these types of measures.
Although this Performance Framework Indicator also takes into account part of the Focus Area 5A operations, this
milestone is not representative for indicator 1 which has a particular implementation process compared to other
operations taken into account in this indicator.
Specific Objective 6:Promoting social inclusion poverty reduction and economic development in rural areas
(Priority 6)
Indicator 1: Number of jobs created through supported projects (outside LEADER) (Focus area 6A: Facilitating
diversification, creation of new small enterprises and job creation)
Baseline
(2013)
Latest known result

0
Milestones
2018
Not applicable*
Target 2023
30 441

Indicator 2:
a) % of rural population covered by local development strategies
b) % of rural population benefiting from new or improved services / infrastructures
c) Number of jobs created through supported projects (LEADER) (Focus area 6B: Fostering local development in
rural areas)
Baseline
(2013)
Latest known result

a) 0
b) 0
c) 0
Milestones
2018
Not applicable*
Target 2023
59,7%7
17,3%
17 533

c) Out of the 23 relevant adopted programmes, 23 are relevant for sub-indicator
Indicator 3: % of rural population benefiting from new or improved IT infrastructures ( Focus area 6C: Enhancing
accessibility to use and quality of information and communication technologies (ICT) in rural areas)
Baseline
(2013)
Latest known result

0
Milestones
2018
Target 2023
17,5%

*) No milestones are available because there is no equivalent common Performance Framework Indicators in the RD
Performance Framework
For UK EN not included.
Programme Statement
DB2016
**) The indicative milestone is based on the application of Performance Framework proxy indicator: Population covered
by Local Action groups (LEADER). This non mandatory indicator concerns 23 out of the 23 RDP having programmed
these types of measures.
***) The indicative milestone, which represents an average for both Target Indicators, is based on the application of
Performance Framework proxy indicator: Number of operations supported to improve basic services and infrastructures
in rural areas. This non mandatory indicator concerns 13 out of the 18 RDP having programmed at least some of these
types of measures.
Increase the competitiveness of agriculture, forestry and the food industry through support for restructuring,
innovation and value added quality products
Output (no.)
Main expenditure-related outputs
Situation December
2013
Target 2007-2013
2 430 000
2 774 000
Modernisation projects on farms (Number of projects)
379 000
575 000
Supported enterprises for adding value projects (Number)
22 800
34 000
Participation in quality schemes under Rural Development Programs

(Number of farms)
370 500
283 700
Training activity related to agriculture and/or forestry (Number of

participants that successfully finalised training)
Improving the environment and the countryside through support for sustainable land and forest management
with specific focus on biodiversity, organic farming, high nature value farming, water and climate change
Output (no.)
Situation December
2013
Target 2007-2013
Support under agro-environment (Number of hectares)
46 800 000
47 000 000
Support in Less Favoured Areas (Number of hectares)
55 300 000
55 500 000
Support underNatura2000 (Number of ha)
1 500 000
1 300 000
270 000
470 000
7 650 000
NA
Afforested agricultural land (Number of hectares)

Organic farming supported by agro-environmental measures in the
framework of RDP (Number of ha)
Programme Statement
DB2016
Improving the quality of life in rural areas and encouraging diversification of economic activity through the
development of new economic activities/creation of new jobs and contributing to an adequate level of services for
the rural economy
Output (no.)
Situation December
Target 2007-2013
2013

Number of new tourist actions supported
19 400
31 700
Number of villages renewed
39 000
29 000
Number of micro-enterprises supported/created
61 800
73 300
Justification of variation
For rural development programmes, commitment appropriations for budget line 05 04 60 01 (programming period 20142020) in 2016 amount to EUR 18 672 million, including the cotton transfer for Greece, the net transfer for financial year
2016 resulting from the flexibility between CAP pillars in accordance with Article 136a of Regulation (EU) No 73/2009
and Article 14 of Regulation (EU) No 1307/2013 as well as a part of the unused 2014 allocation that is transferred to
2015 and 2016 in line with the revision of the MFF. This represents an increase of 2,8% compared to the voted budget
8
2015 . Total payment appropriations amount to EUR 11 842 million, of which EUR 3 268 million relate to the
programming period 2007-2013 (05 04 05 01) and EUR 8 574 million (05 04 60 01) to period 2014-2020. Overall, it
represents an increase of 6,3% compared to the voted budget 2015.
There are no longer any commitments to be made either for the programming period 2000-2006 or for the programming
period 2007-2013. However, significant payment appropriations (EUR 3 268 million) will be necessary for the period
2007-2013 as the implementation of programmes will continue in 2016 and taking into consideration the payment
appropriations available in budget 2015. For the period 2000-2006, most of former Objective 1 and Leader+ guidance
programmes were closed and the final balance paid in 2013. No payments are foreseen for the former Guarantee
programmes.
It is foreseen that just over 55% of total EAFRD payment appropriations in 2016 will be used for annual measures, 33%
for multi-annual type measures (including 5% estimated backlog for payments expected that it will not be possible to
cover these from the 2015 budget availabilities), 4% for closure payments of the 2007-2013 period and around 8% for the
payment of advances of the new 2014-2020 programming period. The appropriations for annual measures have been
calculated taking into account the part represented by these measures in the total programming (2007-2013) and has been
split on the two budget items taking into account the evolution in implementation of programming (2007-2013) and the
foreseen implementation of the 2014-2020 programmes. For the multi-annual type measures the calculation is based on
the expected evolution of payments based on past experience, for item 05 04 05 01 in the 2000-2006 period and for item
05 04 60 01 in the 2007-2013 period.
Programme's implementation 2007-20139

Allocation
EUR million 2007-201310
Payments11
EUR million 2007-2013
Axis 1
31 571,1
23 974,7
Axis 2
43 867,5
40 161,8
Axis 3
12 680,0
8 792,0
Indicative distribution per axis
8
9
10
11
Without taking account of the Commission decision on the carry-over of appropriations from 2014 to 2015 (C(2015)827).
Programmed commitment appropriations according to national/regional programmes.
Allocations per axis taking into account de-commitments, situation February 2015.
Amounts corresponding to declarations of expenditure until Q4 2014 submitted by Member States (e.g. advances paid by the Commission not
included). The final amounts reimbursed by the Commission may vary slightly due to ineligible expenditure, exhaustion of commitment
appropriations and/or lack of sufficient payment appropriations.
Programme Statement
Others
Total (2007-13)
Distribution of Health Check and EERP funds across
the priority areas
7 961,0
5 036,9
96 079,6
77 965,4
EUR million
2009-2013
Climate change
704,2
Renewable energy
275,4
Water management
1 332,2
Bio-diversity
1 542,0
Dairy Restructuring
715,6
Innovation & new challenges
15,8
Broadband
360,4
Total (2009-13)
DB2016
4 945,6

Common Strategic Framework
1.
Strengthening
research,
technological development and
innovation
Payments
Payments
Commitments
(2)/(1)
end Year N end Year N + 1
EUR million (1)
%
(2)
(3)
Interim payments
executed
by Commission
end Year N + 1
(4)
641,2
Outputs:
2. Enhancing access to, and use and
quality of, information and
communication technologies
225,5
Outputs:
3. Enhancing the competitiveness
of the agricultural sector
9 639,6
Outputs:
4. Supporting the shift towards a
low-carbon economy
1 458,8
Outputs:
5. Promoting climate change
management
8 094,2
Outputs:
6. Protecting the environment and
8 443,9
(4)/(1)
%
Programme Statement
DB2016
promoting resource efficiency

Outputs:
7. Promoting sustainable and
quality employment and supporting
labour mobility
1 077,0
Outputs:
8. Promoting social inclusion and
combating poverty
3 843,5
Outputs:
9. Investing in education, training
and vocational training for skills
and lifelong learning
360,4
Outputs:
TOTAL
33 784,1
* As regard the 2014-2020 Programmes' implementation, out of 118 rural development programmes 9 programmes
adopted by the end of 2014 and 18 programmes adopted in February 2015. The above allocation into thematic objectives
is indicative and based on the programmes adopted so far. The amounts for Technical Assistance Measures and
Discontinued Measures are not included as they do not contribute to any of the thematic objectives.
As regards payments, the link between the priorities and expenditure will be made by Member States in the annual
implementation reports, which are first due by 30 June 2016.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Lead DG: MARE
1.
Legal Basis

May 2014 on the European Maritime and Fisheries Fund and repealing Council
Regulations (EC) No 2328/2003, (EC) No 861/2006, (EC) No 1198/2006 and (EC) No
791/2007 and Regulation (EU) No 1255/2011 of the European Parliament and of the
Council
2014*
Executive Agency
Total
3,3
856,9
0,8
120,3
2015
3,6
1 619,5
2,0
1 625,1
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
6 396,6

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
3,7
889,9
2,9
896,5
3,7
905,9
2,9
912,6
3,7
926,9
3,0
933,6
2020
3,7
935,2
3,2
942,2
Total
3,7
953,3
3,3
960,3
25,4
7 087,5
18,2
6 390,5
* this amount takes into account 2014 non-used allocation transferred to subsequent years according to Council Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2015/623 of
21 April 2015
2.
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl. Rate
861,052 10,48 %
67,752 100,36 %
912,067 10,44 % 243,137
11,34 %
Authorised
appropriation
revenue
861,052 10,48 %
67,492 98,54 %
912,067 10,48 % 243,137
11,27 %
3.
EU added value
According to TFEU the Union shall have exclusive competence in the conservation of marine biological resources and
shared competence for the rest of the CFP. In addition, the CFP manages resources that are common to Member States
and closely interconnected with marine ecosystems which do not respect national borders.
The capacity of the EU to move towards sustainable fishing taking into the account the limited successes of the CFP so
far and the progress made in this area by EU partners - will be a critical test for the EU credibility in delivering on the
Europe 2020 goals of smart, sustainable and inclusive growth .
Supporting the transition to sustainable fishing, based on maximum sustainable yields, the gradual elimination of discards
and the reduction of the impact of fisheries on the marine environment, the promotion of aquaculture with high levels of
environmental protection and an increased coordination of maritime policies leading to more sustainable use of resources
will be a key contribution of the EMFF to a resource efficient Europe.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Another priority of the EMFF is to increase employment, territorial cohesion and social inclusion in fisheries dependent
communities. The diversification of local economies, in particular towards other sectors of the maritime economy, will
create new jobs and growth opportunities in coastal areas.
The EMFF will also support product and process innovation at all levels of the production, marketing and distribution
chains of the fisheries and aquaculture sectors, increase in added value of fisheries and aquaculture products, support ecoinnovation and further development of new, innovative, cross-cutting policy tools such as Marine Knowledge, Maritime
Spatial Planning and Integrated Maritime Surveillance.


Flagship
Innovation Union
Total
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
16,0
201,2
44,8
262,0
DB 2016
(EUR million)
16,4
199,7
57,3
273,4
These forecasts are based on the execution of the relevant measure of the EFF (amounts committed by MSs at the end of
May 2014) extrapolated by using the EMFF total appropriation under shared management. It is not yet possible to use
EMFF data, as only a limited number of EMFF operational programmes have been adopted at this stage.
Budget 2015
(EUR Million)
DB 2016
(EUR Million)
68,4
53,5
1. Promoting competitive, environmentally sustainable, economically

viable and socially responsible fisheries and aquaculture
2. Fostering the development and implementation of the Union's
Integrated Maritime Policy in a complementary manner to Cohesion
policy and to the Common Fisheries Policy
3. Promoting a balanced and inclusive territorial development of fisheries
and aquaculture areas
4. Fostering the implementation of Common Fisheries Policy
These forecasts are based on the execution of the relevant measures of the EFF (amounts committed by MSs at the end of
May 2014), extrapolated by using the EMFF total appropriation under shared management and the 'Rio marker'. It is not
yet possible to use EMFF data, as only a limited number of EMFF operational programmes have been adopted at this
stage.
1. Promoting competitive, environmentally sustainable, economically
viable and socially responsible fisheries and aquaculture
2. Fostering the development and implementation of the Union's
Integrated Maritime Policy in a complementary manner to Cohesion
policy and to the Common Fisheries Policy
Budget 2015
(EUR Million)
DB 2016
(EUR Million)
199,0
201,8
Programme Statement
DB2016
3. Promoting a balanced and inclusive territorial development of fisheries

and aquaculture areas
4. Fostering the implementation of the Common Fisheries Policy
These forecasts are based on the execution of the relevant measures of the EFF (amounts committed by MSs at the end of
May 2014), extrapolated by using the EMFF total appropriation under shared management. It is not yet possible to use
EMFF data, as EMFF implementation has no yet started.
4.
Specific objectives
The EMFF regulation was adopted in May 2014. This late approval of the legal base causes delays in the approval of
operational programmes. By the end of March 2015, only five programmes representing 6% of the EMFF envelope have
been adopted (Latvia, the Netherlands, Austria, Malta and Finland). For this reason, the targets and milestones presented
in the programme statement for objectives 1 and 3 are still estimates. It is also not yet possible to provide any information
on expenditure-related outputs for the part of the EMFF implemented in shared management. It is expected that all
programmes will be adopted by the end of 2015 and we will then be in the position to provide updated 2023 targets and
contributions to flagship initiatives and to mainstreaming of climate action.
Specific Objective 1: Promoting competitive, environmentally sustainable, economically viable and socially
responsible fisheries and aquaculture
Indicator 1: Labour productivity (in terms of gross value added per employee) in the EU fisheries sector
Milestones
Baseline
2011
2014
2015
2016
2017
- EU fishing fleet:
Increase
in
38,700 /employee.
fisheries
- EU aquaculture:
sector's
44,000 /employee.
productivity:
- EU fish processing: 53,500
(%) equals or
/employee.
exceeds that of
Employment is measured in
the
EU
full time equivalents.
economy (%).
Indicator 2: Profitability of the EU fishing fleet by fleet segment
Baseline
2012
2014
2015
Net profit margin of the EU
fishing fleet: average 6%.
By main segment category:
- small scale fleet 8.0%
- large scale fleet 5.3%
- long distant water fleet
5.6%
Indicator 3: Fuel efficiency of fish capture
Baseline
2011
2014
2015
2016
Milestones
2017
2018
2019
2020
Increase in
fisheries sector's
productivity:
(%) equals or
exceeds that of
the EU economy
(%).
2018
Target 2023
2019
Net profit
margin of the
EU fishing
fleet: average
10-12%.
Net profit
margin of the EU
fishing fleet:
average 6-9%.
2016
Ratio catches to fuel

consumption: ca. 2.05 kg of
fish for 1 litre of fuel1
Milestones
2017
Target 2023
2018
2019
2020
Reduce fuel
consumption by
15%
Target 2023
Reduce fuel
consumption by
30%
Indicator 4: Volume of discards of commercially exploited species

Baseline
2010
23% of the catches is
discarded
2014
>
2015
21%
2016
Milestones
2017
10%
2018
2019
Max 5%
These values are an approximation varying on the fishing techniques used (from 0.2 to 5 litres per kg of fish).
2020
Target 2023
Discarding
eliminated, and
unwanted
Programme Statement
DB2016
catches reduced
Indicator 5: Value of aquaculture production in the EU
Baseline
2012
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
2018
2019
Target 2023
2020
EUR3,36 billion
At least + 30%
compared to the
baseline 2012
Indicator 6: Relative value or volume of products placed on the market by Producers Organisations (POs),
associations of POs or inter-branch organisations
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2023
2014
2015
2016
Lack of comparable data

across Member States.
2017
2018
2019
2020
The evolution
will be
calculated on
an annual
basis.
The baseline will be drawn

from the Member States'
ex-ante evaluation on their
EMFF operational
programmes for 2014-2020
(to be adopted by the end
of 2015)
Continuous
upward trend up
to 2023 and
increasing share
of products from
members of POs.
Milestones
for 2017 and
2019 will be
defined on
the basis of
the baseline.

Joint presentation for Specific Objectives 1 and 3
Main expenditure-related
outputs
MS concerned
Output no.
programmed in the
Operational
Programmes
2007-2013
Payments up to and
Payments
including 2014
Latest known
2016
EUR million
result
EUR million
EFF
Fleet adjustment (axis 1)

Reduction of fleet capacity UK, IT, ES, PL, GT: -731.633
by GT and kW
PT,RO, DE, BE,
kW: -519.377
NL, EL, CY
687
36
744,4
41
End 2014:
GT: -197.199
kW: -644.243
Aquaculture and processing

and marketing (axis 2)
Increase of volume and IT, ES, FR, PL, Volume:
value
of
aquaculture PT, BE, NL , DK,
+ 726,023 tons
production
EL, CY
Value:
+
EUR
163,050
million
Increase of volume and UK, IT, ES, PL, Volume:
value
of
production PT, RO, DE, DK,
+ 225,634 tons
(processing sector)
CY
Value:
+ EUR 30,920 million
Programme Statement
DB2016
Collective actions (axis 3)

Number
ports
of
665,9
36
290,3
13
87,5
2 475,1
132
modernised ES, PL, PT, RO, 556

GR, CY, DE, IT
Sustainable development of
fisheries areas (axis 4)
Number of Fisheries Local All MS with Axis Approx.
250 2014:303
Action Groups (FLAGs)
4 in their OPs
operational FLAGs
Technical assistance (axis 5)
Number of support actions All MS
in the implementation of the
programmes
N/A
Total interim payments
Advance payments (20072013) up to 31/12/2013
588,6
Total (2007-2013)
3 063,7
132
Programme's implementation 2014-2020 (Common Strategic Framework)*

Interim
Commitm
Payments Payments
payments
ents
end Year end Year N (2)/(1)
executed
Budget line
EUR
(4)/(1)%
N
+1
%
by Commission
million
(2)
(3)
end Year N + 1
(1)
(4)
Output
1.Fostering innovative, competitive

and knowledge based fisheries
11 06 60
Outputs:
1.Projects supporting innovation in
fisheries
2.Projects enhancing
competitiveness and viability of
fisheries enterprises
2.Fostering innovative, competitive
and knowledge based aquaculture
11 06 60
Outputs:
3. Projects supporting innovation in
aquaculture
4. Projects enhancing sustainability,
competitiveness and viability of
aquaculture enterprises
3.Increasing
employment
territorial cohesion
and
11 06 60
Programme Statement
DB2016
Outputs:
5. Projects that maximise the
participation of fishermen in the
sustainable development of coastal
activities
4.
Fostering
processing
marketing
and
11 06 60
*First data to be provided only after the adoption by the Commission of Member States Partnership Contracts and
programmes (end of 2015) and for payments only after the first year of significant interim payments (end of 2017).
Specific Objective 2: Fostering the development and implementation of the Union's Integrated Maritime Policy in a
complementary manner to Cohesion policy and to the Common Fisheries Policy
Indicator 1: Marine knowledge 2020 initiative: Degree of use of the European Marine Observation and Data
Network (EMODnet) measured by the number of users downloading data
Baseline
2014
Milestones
2014
2015
2016
1 212 unique visitors per

month to the central
portal.
2017
2019
2018
5 000
unique
visitors per
month.
Target 2020
17 000
unique
visitors per
month.
Indicator 2: Maritime Surveillance: Percentage of available cross-sectorial and/or cross-border data, as a

percentage of the total information gap identified in the Impact Assessment on CISE (Common Information
Sharing Environment)
Baseline
2013
Milestones
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Between 10%
and 20% of
the data gap
closed
(corresponds
to the
realisation of
25%-40% of
the CISE full
potential)
0% of the data gap closed.
Between 20% and

40% of the data
gap closed
(corresponds to
the realisation of
40%-60% of the
CISE full
potential)
Indicator 3: Percentage of the surface area of marine waters conserved through spatial protection measures in the
context of Article 13.4 of MSFD
Latest known result
(2012)
In
the
Exclusive
Economic Zone, coverage
of 5,9%.
In the 0-12 nm zone,
coverage of 10% of the
surface
has
been
exceeded in some marine
Milestones
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Exclusive
Economic
Zone:
coverage of
8%*
Target 2020
Coverage
(including
all
different kinds of
protected sites) of
10% of surface in
the
Exclusive
Economic Zone,
Programme Statement
DB2016
regions or sub-regions
(Baltic sea, Greater North
Sea,
West
Mediterranean).
20% in the 0-12

nm zone
*Commission report required by MSFD art. 16 and the related assessment of European MPA networks (to be published
in 2017)
DB 2016
Output
Budget line
1. Number of contracts concluded to construct European

Marine Observation and Data Network (EMOD net)
2. Actions supporting the exchange of information flows
relevant to the 'Common Information Sharing Environment
(CISE) for the surveillance of the EU maritime domain'.
Number
EUR Million
11 06 61
16
11 06 61
0,4
Data will be available after adoption

of EMFF Operational Programmes
11 06 60
3.Actions supporting the development of the Blue Economy in

European Sea Basins (studies, pilot project, business cases)
11 06 61
4. Studies, pilot projects and expert support for the

implementation of Maritime Spatial Planning in Member
States and across European sea basins
11 06 61
5.Actions supporting the implementation of Marine Strategy

Framework Directive
11 06 61
22
30,4
Total

Outputs
2014 2015
1.Number of contracts
concluded to construct
EMOD net
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
44
5
2. Actions supporting the
F (direct
2
2
13
12
12
6
5
exchange of information
management)
flows relevant to the CISE
F (shared
Actions in 23 MS throughout the programming
for the surveillance of the
management)
period
EU maritime domain.
P
0
3.Actions supporting the
development of the Blue
Economy in European Sea
Basins
(studies,
pilot
project, business cases)
4.Studies, pilot projects and
expert support for the
implementation
Total
52
27
14
35
of
Programme Statement
Maritime Spatial
Planning in Member States
and across
European sea basins
5.Actions supporting
the implementation
Marine
of
DB2016
35
Strategy Framework
Specific Objective 3: Promoting a balanced and inclusive territorial development of fisheries and aquaculture
Directive
Areas
Indicator 1: Number of local strategies implemented by Fisheries Local Actions Groups (FLAGs)
Baseline
2012
Milestones
Target 2023
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
303
300
The target is to keep
approximately the status
quo compared to the
milestone since there will
be some evolutions and
merging with Leader in
some Member States.
Note of caution as to the milestones and target: these provisional data will be updated in light of the data contained in the
operational programmes (that are to be provided by Member States once the EMFF regulation is adopted). Aggregated
data will be available only at the end of 2015.
See presentation under Specific Objective 1
Specific Objective 4: Fostering the implementation of the Common Fisheries Policy
Indicator 1: Number of apparent infringements of CFP rules by operators found in the framework of specific control
and inspection programmes (SCIPs), divided by the number of inspections conducted
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Number
of
apparent
infringements/number of
inspections (ratio): 18 %
15 %
10 %
Indicator 2: Number of Member States with an effective control system

Latest known result
2014
Number of Member States

having been subject to or
under an action plan to
overcome shortcomings in
their fisheries control
system: 7
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Max.
6
Member
States are
under
an
action plan.
Target 2020
No Member States are
under an action plan
meaning
that
all
Member States have
an effective control
system.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 3: Number of stocks for which the MSY fishing mortality rate is known (MSY: maximum sustainable yield)
Milestones
Target 2020
2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
Baseline
2013
Stock status
50
46
45
41
39
40
38
35
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
Northeast Atlantic & adjacent waters: number of stocks for

which the fishing mortality rate has been assessed
compared to MSY
2010
2011
2012
2013
Consistent increase in the number

of commercially exploited stocks
for which MSY rate is known.
2014
Stock status
92
100
Scientific
assessment of
MSY rate is
achieved for
all
commercially
exploited
stocks on a
progressive,
incremental
basis.
90
75
80
70
61
65
60
46
50
40
30
20
10
0
Mediterranean and Black Seas: number of stocks for

which the fishing mortality rate has been assessed
compared to MSY
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
Indicator 4: Degree of adequate responses to data calls under the data collection framework (100% minus failures to
deliver the full data set required)
Milestones
Baseline
2010
2014
92%
2015
2016
2017
2018
96%
2019
Target 2020
100%
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
Budget line
1. Projects related to the establishment and validation of

databases on control
DB 2016
Number
EUR Million
11 06 60
42*
12*
2. Number of vessels equipped in new control technologies

(CCTV and electronic devices) or subject to measurement of
engine power
11 06 60
4 750*
19*
3. Projects on traceability of all fisheries products
11 06 60
140*
16*
4. Support to operational costs incurred in the context of Specific

Control and Inspection programs or coordinated control
deployments or in the context of action plans
11 06 60
12*
24*
1*
10*
10
11 06 62 01
1,9
7. Support to the national programmes for collection of

biological, technical, environmental and socio-economic data
concerning the fisheries sector
11 06 60
27*
65*
8. Grants to Regional fisheries management organisations

(RFMOs) needed to achieve their objectives of sustainable
development of fisheries resources through, inter alia, funding of
capacity building and scientific research
11 06 62 03
24
9. Grants to Advisory Councils, allowing them to provide advice

to the Commission and Member States
11 06 62 04
11
2,75
10. Operational fully-fledged Market Observatory
11 06 62 05
5 - Number of patrol vessels or aircrafts acquired and/or 1) 11 06 60 (shared

chartered.
management)
1) Acquisition by a single Member State
2) 11 06 62 02
2) Joint acquisition by several Member States
(direct management)
6. Number of studies related
to CFP
*indicative: the allocated amount will be known only after the adoption of the EMFF Operational Programmes
Number of outputs foreseen
Outputs
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Total
1. Projects related to the

establishment and validation of
databases on control*
50
56
42
42
42
42
42
316
2. Investments in new control

technologies
(number
of
vessels equipped)*
5 000
4 250
4 750
6 750
7 500
8 750
10 000
47 000
3. Projects on traceability of all

fisheries products*
120
130
140
150
180
170
170
1 060
4. Support to operational costs

incurred in the context of
Specific
Control
and
Inspection
programs
or
coordinated
control
deployments*
10
10
12
12
12
12
12
70
Programme Statement
5. Number of patrol vessels or

aircrafts
acquired
and/or
chartered.
DB2016
25
6.Number of studies related

to CFP
12
14
16
16
18
90
7. Support to the national

programmes for collection of
biological,
technical,
environmental and socioeconomic data concerning the
fisheries sector
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
8. Grants to RFMOs needed to

achieve their objectives of
sustainable development of
fisheries resources through,
inter alia, funding of capacity
building and scientific research
16
24
24
24
24
24
24
160
9.
Grants
to
Advisory
Councils, allowing them to
provide
advice
to
the
Commission and Member
States
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
77
10. Operational fully-fledged

Market Observatory
N/A
* the number of outputs in the area of fisheries control has been revised following discussions with Member States and the final version of the EMFF
Outputs
2014
6.Number of studies related
Number of outputs produced (direct management only)

2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Total
8. Grants to RFMOs needed to

achieve their objectives of
sustainable development of
fisheries resources through,
inter alia, funding of capacity
building and scientific research
16
16
9.
Grants
to
Advisory
Councils, allowing them to
provide
advice
to
the
Commission and Member
States
10. Operational fully-fledged

Market Observatory
N/A
to CFP
Programme Statement
DB2016
Compulsory contributions to Regional Fisheries Management Organisations

(RFMOs) and other international organisations and Sustainable Fisheries
Agreements (SFAs)
Lead DG: MARE
1.
Legal Basis
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
Council Regulation (EC) No 861/2006 of 22 May 2006 establishing

Community financial measures for the implementation of the common
fisheries policy and in the area of the Law of the Sea Regulations and
Decisions concerning the conclusion of agreements and/or protocols
adopted with regard to fisheries between the Union/Community and the
governments of respective countries
2014
Total
2.
80,0
80,0
2015
151,0
151,0

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
150,5
150,5
146,0
146,0
136,0
136,0
2020
137,0
137,0
136,0
136,0
Total
936,7
936,7
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
81,290 95,80 %
77,665 96,21 %
152,570 19,98 % 151,140
17,30 %
Authorised
appropriation
revenue
81,290 95,80 %
77,665 96,21 %
152,570 19,98 % 151,140
17,30 %
3.
EU added value
A. Sustainable Fisheries Agreements
Under its exclusive competence of negotiating bilateral fisheries agreements the European Commission negotiates,
concludes and implements bilateral Sustainable Fisheries Partnership Agreements (SFPAs) between the European Union
and third countries with the objective of contributing to a regulated framework for EU long-distance fishing fleet while
ensuring a suitable exploitation of the third countries' relevant fisheries resources and supporting competiveness of the
Union's fishing fleet. Within the framework of the SFPAs, the Commission maintains a political dialogue on fisheries
related policies with third countries concerned, in coherence with the principles governing the CFP and the commitments
under other relevant European policies.
Programme Statement
DB2016
In addition the aim is to:

1.
improve scientific and technical knowledge of relevant fisheries;
2.
contribute to the fight against illegal, unreported and unregulated (IUU) fishing;
3.
foster better global governance of fisheries at financial and political level.
B. Regional Fisheries Management Organisations (RFMOs) and international organisations

Given the exclusive competence of the EU for the conservation of marine living resources and international obligations
deriving from the United Nations Convention for the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS) and the implementing UN Fish Stocks
Agreement, to which the EU is a Party, the Commission pays compulsory annual contributions deriving from EU
membership in international bodies. This includes various RFMOs where the EU has an interest and bodies set up by the
UNCLOS, namely the International Seabed Authority and the International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea. In line with
the orientations of the Commission Communication on the External Dimension of the CFP the EU will promote better
international fisheries governance and the sustainable management of international fish stocks and defend EU economic
and social interests within these organisations.
Not applicable

Flagship
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
2,4
DB 2016
(EUR million)
2,2

Not applicable
Not applicable
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: To promote, through active involvement in international organisations, sustainable development
for fisheries management and maritime governance in line with the CFP objectives, and ensure that fishery resources
are maintained above or restored above levels capable of producing maximum sustainable yield
Indicator 1: Conservation measures based on scientific advice adopted, for all species under the purview of RFMOs
to which the EU is a member
Data source on the indicator: RFMO reports.
Baseline 2012
Milestone 2017
Target 2020
49 out of 53 conservation measures 95% of the conservation measures All conservation measures adopted by
adopted by RFMOs in their annual adopted by RFMOs in their annual RFMOs in their annual meetings are in
meeting are in line with the best meetings are in line with the best line with the best available scientific
available scientific advice.
available scientific advice.
advice.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: Tools to fight IUU fishing adopted in RFMOs

Milestones
Latest known result

2012
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
IUU listing in place in all

relevant RFMOs, port state
measures adopted only in
some RFMOs, catch
documentation system in
place in CCAMLR for
tootfish and ICCAT for
Bluefin tuna
2017
2018
Gradual
introduction of Port
State Measures in
RFMOs
2019
Initial phases
of legal and
technical
development
of catch
documentation
systems
IUU listing
procedures in
place and
operational in all
RFMOs (annual),
incremental
introduction of
port state
measures in all
RFMOs in line
with the FAO Port
State Measures
until 2020,
gradual
introduction of
catch
documentation
systems for high
value species until
2020.

Draft Budget 2016
Number
EUR
million
Output
Budget line
1.Annual financial contributions to RFMOs enabling the right of full

participation in decision making in the RFMO concerned
11 03 02
14
5,3
2.Contribution to the annual budget of International Tribunal for the Law of

the Sea (ITLOS) and the International Seabed Authority (ISBA UN)
11 03 02
0,2
16
5,5
Total
Outputs
1.Annual financial
contributions to RFMOs
enabling the right of full
participation in decision
making in the RFMO
concerned
2.Contribution to the
annual budget of ITLOS and
of the ISBA UN
Total
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
12
13
14
14
14
14
14
95
12
14
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 2: To establish, through Sustainable Fisheries Agreements, a legal, economic and environmental
governance framework for fishing activities carried out by Union fishing vessels in third country waters, in coherence
with other EU policies
Indicator 1: Number of Sustainable Fisheries Agreements in force
Latest know result (2013)
10
2014
2015
2016
13
13
14
Milestones
2017
2018
2019
Target
2020
15
15
15
14
Indicator 2: Fishing possibilities for EU vessels

Milestones
Latest known result (2013)
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
210
210
210
210
210
210
Latest known result

2013
2014
2015
2016
10
13
13
14
210 tuna vessels
210 tuna vessels

170 vessels for
160 vessels for mixed SFAs
160
160
170
170
170
170
mixed SFAs
Align fishing
possibilities
granted through
the SFAs with the
needs of the EU
fleet, within the
constraints of the
sustainability of
the fishing
activities
Indicator 3: Number of matrix adopted for the follow-up of the sectoral support (matrix of objectives, indicators and
targets adopted with the third country, for each protocol in force)
Milestones
2017
Target 2020
14
2018
2019
15
15
15

Output
Budget line
1.Financial contribution to all the protocols in force providing

access for EU vessels in third countries waters
11 03 01
and reserve line
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
14
145

Outputs
1.Financial contribution
to all the protocols in
force providing access for
EU vessels in third
countries waters
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
13
13
14
14
15
15
15
13
Total
99
Programme Statement
DB2016
Programme for the Environment and Climate Action (LIFE)

Lead DG: ENV
Associated DGs: CLIMA
1.
Legal Basis

Council of 11 December 2013 on the establishment of a Programme for the
Environment and Climate Action (LIFE) and repealing Regulation (EC) No
614/2007
2014
Executive Agency
Total
2.
18,2
381,7
3,5
403,4
2015
5,0
424,5
5,6
435,1
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
3 456,7

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
4,9
453,4
4,5
462,8
5,0
483,3
5,5
493,7
5,1
512,1
6,3
523,5
2020
5,2
542,9
7,7
555,7
Total
5,3
48,6
567,5 3 365,4
8,3
41,4
581,1 3 455,4
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
407,796
100,87 %
52,790 98,75 %
435,135 69,53 % 162,491
13,14 %
Authorised
appropriation 407,769
revenue
100,87 %
52,540 55,06 %
435,108 69,54 % 162,282
7,85 %
3.
EU added value
The EU added value of the LIFE Programme derives from the specificity of its approach and focus, which makes its
interventions especially adapted to the environmental and climate needs as the only instrument with funds dedicated to
Environmental protection and Climate Action.
1.
More effective central intervention: By being the EU platform for exchange of practice and knowledge-sharing for
implementing EU legislation and policy, LIFE allows actors across the EU to learn from each other's experience in
addressing specific environmental and climate problems more effectively and efficiently. LIFE attracts partnerships
that would otherwise be difficult to set-up ensuring a more effective intervention than Member States' individual
action by an increased pooling of resources and expertise.
2.
Better distribution of solidarity and responsibility sharing: By assisting Member States that host the most
valuable EU natural capital or are confronted with transboundary or transnational environmental and climate
problems, LIFE allows for a better distribution of responsibility and solidarity in preserving the EU environmental
common good.
Programme Statement
DB2016
3.
Catalyst and leverage effects: LIFE acts as a catalyst to start-up action, providing one-off investment needed in a
specific area, eliminating initial barriers to the implementation of EU environmental and climate policy and testing
new approaches for future scaling-up. LIFE helps Member States and stakeholders to accelerate and improve the
implementation of EU legislation by creating synergies across EU Funds and national funds while levering
additional public and private sector resources.
4.
Gap filler: LIFE addresses gaps and externalities, raises awareness and demonstrates the benefits of environmental
protection and climate action ensuring the sustainability and expansion of project results. A specific instrument is
more flexible and finances projects that could not be otherwise financed by other funds (e.g., projects managed by
beneficiaries that are not eligible under other funds).
5.
Increased coherence of the EU intervention: A dedicated Environmental and Climate Action instrument allows the
Commission to better shape priorities and ensure that resources are effectively used for environmental protection
and climate action, by selecting the best projects across the EU. More homogenous implementation of EU
legislation is achieved thanks to the dissemination of best practices (e.g., methodologies that have been developed
and now are widely applied, management plans, etc.). A specific instrument would provide high visibility to EU
environmental and climate action bringing the EU closer to its citizens, showing the EU's commitment to
environmental and climate objectives and thus making those objectives more relevant.
6.
Bringing solutions to upcoming environmental and climate challenges of EU interest: Stakeholders are often
confronted with environmental and climate related problems for which no solutions have been found yet, and which,
if not addressed at an early stage, will lead to higher costs.

Flagship
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
424,5
DB 2016
(EUR million)
453,4
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
DB 2016
(EUR million)
Contributing to the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions
47,0
49,4*
Contributing to increased resilience to climate change
46,0
48,8**
Support better climate governance and information
11,5
13,4***
Contribute to a greener and more resource-efficient economy and to the

development and implementation of EU environmental policy and legislation
42,4
45,7****
Halting and reversing the biodiversity loss, including the support of the Natura 2000
network and tackling the degradation of ecosystems
62,5
66,2*****

Total
209,5
223,5
*Estimated to be the total operational budget for the priority areas climate change mitigation (budget article 34 02 01);
** Estimated to be the total operational budget for the priority areas climate change adaptation (budget article 34 02 02);
*** Estimated to be the total operational budget for the priority area climate governance and information (budget article
34 02 03);
Programme Statement
DB2016
**** Estimated to be 40% of the projects financed under the priority area resource efficiency (budget article 07 02 01
total budget for 2016 is EUR 128,8 million, out of which EUR 114,1 million are devoted to projects);
***** Estimated to be 40% of the projects financed under the priority area nature and biodiversity and 100% of the
amount for the financial instrument Natural Capital Financing Facility (NCFF), since the interventions financed by it will
contribute at the same time to climate adaptation and biodiversity objectives (budget article 07 02 02 total budget for
2016 is 157,2 million EUR, out of which EUR 150,6 million are devoted to projects, including EUR 10 million for the
NCFF).
The European Commission is obliged to track climate related expenditure in EU programmes under the MFF like the
LIFE programme1. The tracking methodology has been largely based on an existing OECD methodology (Rio
markers), adapted to provide for quantified financial data. Expenditures have been marked in one of the three categories:
climate related only (100 %); significantly climate related (40 %); and not climate related (0 %).
As a consequence, with the aim to have comparable data, the figures for 2015 have been adapted accordingly and the
updated figures for 2014 show that the total contribution of the LIFE programme to mainstreaming climate action is EUR
190,9 million.
Some expenditure under the LIFE sub-programme for environment and the LIFE sub-programme for climate action, such
as the expenditures for the NCFF, contribute to both biodiversity and climate objectives, especially given the desired
synergies between them. Thus each of the tracking exercises has to be seen separately, and the total funds tracked as
being related to one of the objectives has to be seen independently and cannot be added to the funds related to the other
objective.
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
DB 2016
(EUR million)
Contribute to a greener and more resource-efficient economy and to the development

and implementation of EU environmental policy and legislation
42,4
45,7*
147,8
157,2**
10,0
21,5
221,7
11,0***
23,0****
236,9
Halting and reversing the biodiversity loss, including the support of the Natura 2000
network and tackling the degradation of ecosystems
Support better environmental governance and information at all levels
Contributing to increased resilience to climate change
Total
* Estimated to be 40% of the projects financed under the priority area resource efficiency (budget article 07 02 01 total
budget for 2016 is EUR 128,8 million, out of which EUR 114,1 million are devoted to projects);
** Estimated to be the 100% total operational budget for the priority area nature and biodiversity (budget article 07 02
02);
*** Estimated to be 100% of the projects focused on nature and biodiversity financed under the priority area governance
and information (budget article 07 02 03 - total budget for 2016 is EUR 55,5 million, out of which EUR 19,2 million are
devoted to projects, out of which EUR 11 million are for projects focused on nature and biodiversity). In the past, the
calculation was done in the same way, but expressed in percentage of the total budget line rather than of the amount
devoted to projects focused on nature and biodiversity;
**** Estimated to be 40% of the total operational budget for the priority areas climate change adaptation devoted to
projects and 100% of the amount for the financial instrument Natural Capital Financing Facility (NCFF), since the
interventions financed by it will contribute at the same time to climate adaptation and biodiversity objectives (budget
article 34 02 02 - total budget for 2016 is EUR 48,8 million, out of which EUR 42,6 million are devoted to projects,
including EUR 10 million for the NCFF).
The European Commission is under the obligation to track biodiversity related expenditure pursuant to Article 27 and
Recital 40 of the LIFE Regulation (Regulation N.1293/2013). At present a system for tracking biodiversity related
According to the conclusions of the European Council on 7-8 February 2013 climate action objectives will represent at least 20% of EU spending
in the period 2014-2020 and therefore be reflected in appropriate instruments [..]. http://data.consilium.europa.eu/doc/document/ST-3-2013INIT/en/pdf.
Programme Statement
DB2016
expenditure has been developed at project level. It is expected that project-level information will be available starting
from 2016 and the system will be fully operational for the second LIFE Multi-annual work programme 2017-2020.
As a consequence, with the aim to have comparable data, the figures for 2015 have been adapted accordingly and the
updated figures for 2014 show that the total contribution of the LIFE programme to financing biodiversity is EUR 198,8
million.
Therefore, the tracking methodology is largely based on an existing OECD methodology (Rio markers), adapted to
provide for quantified financial data. Expenditures have been thus marked in one of the three categories: biodiversity
related only (100 %); significantly biodiversity related (40 %); and not biodiversity related (0 %). Some expenditure
under the LIFE sub-programme for environment and the LIFE sub-programme for climate action, such as the
expenditures for the NCFF, can contribute to both biodiversity and climate objectives, especially given the desired
synergies between them. Thus, each of the tracking exercises has to be seen separately and the total funds tracked as
being related to one of the objectives has to be seen independently and cannot be added to the funds related to the other
objective.
General objectives
General Objective 1: To contribute to the shift towards a resource-efficient, low-carbon and climate-resilient economy,
to the protection and improvement of the quality of the environment and to halting and reversing biodiversity loss,
including the support of the Natura 2000 network and tackling the degradation of ecosystems
Indicator 1: Attributable environmental and climate improvements
Baseline
0
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
80% of
ongoing/
finalised
projects
progress
towards
environmental
and/or climate
improvements
2018
Target 2020
2019
80% of
ongoing
projects
progress
towards/ of
finalised
projects
achieved
environmental
and/or climate
improvements
This includes all interventions funded under the LIFE programme, not only replicable/transferable projects.
Indicator 2: Percentage of the Natura 2000 network targeted by LIFE projects restored or brought to adequate
management
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
10% of the
12% of
Natura 2000
theNatura2000
network
network
targeted by
targeted by
ongoing/
ongoing
finalised
projects are
projects are
progressing
progressing
towards/ of
towards
finalised
restoration/
projects
adequate
achieved
management
restoration/
adequate
management
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 3: Percentage of surface and type of ecosystems targeted by LIFE projects restored
Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
10% of
ecosystem
surfaces and
type targeted
by ongoing/
finalised
projects are
progressing
towards an
improvement/
restoration
2018
2019
Target 2020
10% of
ecosystem
surfaces and
type targeted
by ongoing
projects are
progressing
towards/ of
finalised
projects
achieved an
improvement/
restoration
Indicator 4: Percentage of types of habitats and of species targeted with improving conservation status
Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
10% of
ecosystem
surfaces and
type targeted
by ongoing/
finalised
projects are
progressing
towards an
improvement/
restoration
2018
2019
Target 2020
10% of
ecosystem
surfaces and
type targeted
by ongoing
projects are
progressing
towards/ of
finalised
projects
achieved an
improvement/
restoration
General Objective 2: To improve the development, implementation and enforcement of Union environmental and
climate policy and legislation, and to act as a catalyst for, and promote, the integration and mainstreaming of
environmental and climate objectives into other Union policies and public and private sector practice, including by
increasing the public and private sector's capacity
Indicator 1: Number of interventions developed or undertaken that implement plans, programmes or strategies
pursuant to Union environmental or climate policy or legislation
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
27 IPs
2019
70 IPs
*Although many LIFE interventions will implement plans, programmes or strategies pursuant to Union environmental or
climate policy or legislation, integrated projects (IPs), which are new under the LIFE programme, are specifically
designed for this and are therefore used as the reference de minimis indicator.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: Number of LIFE interventions (projects, measures, approaches) suitable for being replicated or
transferred
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
360 of ongoing/finalised
900 of ongoing
projects implement
projects/ of finalised
replicable/transferable
projects implement
actions
replicable/transferable
0
actions
* Projects within the meaning of Articles 2 and 18 (a), (b), (c) and (h) Regulation No 1293/2013will be specifically
assessed for their potential replicability/transferability and are therefore used as the reference indicator. It is expected that
80% of these projects implement replicable/transferable actions.
Indicator 3: Number of interventions achieving synergies with or mainstreamed into other Union funding
programmes, or integrated into public or private sector practice
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
27 IPs*
70 IPs*
*Although all projects should to a certain degree promote synergies and integration into practice, integrated projects
(IPs), which are new under the LIFE programme, are specifically designed for this and are therefore used as the reference
indicator
General Objective 3: To support better environmental and climate governance at all levels, including better
involvement of civil society, NGOs and local actors
Indicator 1: Number of interventions to ensure better governance, dissemination of information and awareness of
environmental and climate aspects
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
420
800
interventions*
interventions*
* Although all interventions contain an information, dissemination and awareness raising element, governance and
information interventions, whether funded through grants or procurement, are specifically designed to address this
objective and are therefore used as the reference indicator.
General Objective 4: To support the implementation of the 7th Environment Action Programme
Indicator 1: Number of interventions to support the implementation of the 7th Environment Action Programme
Baseline
0
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
1 300
interventions*
2018
2019
Target 2020
1 700
interventions*
* All LIFE interventions, whether funded through grants, procurement or financial instruments, support the
implementation of at least one of the priority objectives of the 7thEnvironment Action Programme.
Programme Statement
4.
DB2016
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: Contribute to a greener and more resource-efficient economy and to the development and
implementation of EU environmental policy and legislation (Environment and Resource Efficiency priority area)
Indicator 1: Number of water bodies covered by projects and thus progressing towards or having reached an
improved ecological status
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
100 water bodies are
covered by ongoing
or finalised projects
and progress
towards an
improved ecological
status
170 water bodies are

covered by ongoing
projects which progress
towards or finalised
projects which achieved
an improved ecological
status
* LIFE contribution is calculated taking into account an estimated total of 138 000 water bodies and the fact that 43% of
water bodies already achieved good ecological status according to the Commission Communication, A Blueprint to
Safeguard Europe's Water Resources COM(2012) 673 final.
Indicator 2: Population benefiting from improved air quality
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
Milestones
2017
1 million persons
are covered by
ongoing/ finalised
projects which
progress towards
improved air quality
2018
2019
Target 2020
1.4 million persons are

covered by ongoing
projects which
progress towards or
finalised projects
which achieved
improved air quality
Indicator 3: Percentage of regions covered by waste IPs and thus progressing towards or having reached adequate
waste management
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2% of regions Union
3% of regions are
wide are covered by
covered by waste IPs
0
waste IPs and
and progress towards
progress towards
or achieved adequate
adequate waste
waste management
management.
Indicator 4: Percentage of River Basin Districts (RBD) covered by IPs and thus progressing towards or having
reached adequate management
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
3% of RBD are
covered by IPs and
progress towards
adequate
management
5% of RBD are
covered by IPs and
progress towards or
achieved adequate
management
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 5: Number of interventions to improve the knowledge base for Union environmental policy and legislation,
and for assessing and monitoring factors, pressures and responses having an impact on the environment
Milestones
Target 2020
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
300 interventions
680 interventions
* Estimated to be 100% of the interventions financed by the 07 02 01

Output
Budget line
Number
Draft Budget 2016

EUR million
1. Action grants (projects)
07 02 01
57
114,1
2.Public Procurement (contracts)
07 02 01
49
14,7
106
128,8
Total
Outputs
2014
F
1. Action grants (Projects)

2.
Public
(contracts) *
Procurement
P
F
P

2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
50
57
60
65
69
2020
74
0
47
Total
375
0
49
49
51
58
60
55
70
384
55
* Above 100 000 EUR.

The LIFE programme covers a wide variety of environment and climate related goals. The bulk of the funds (about 80%)
is spent on the basis of a bottom-up, demand-driven approach.
The targets/milestones linked to absolute figures are therefore conditional to the actual uptake corresponding to the
thematic priority concerned.
Furthermore, the programme disposes of a small budget, which was further reduced during the negotiations, in particular
with respect to some project types that are more focused by nature (e.g. integrated projects, preparatory projects) and
priority areas. In particular for the priority area "environment and resource efficiency", there is no guarantee that all
specific objectives will be targeted by a sufficient number of fundable proposals.
In addition, the environment and climate impacts expected from the financial instruments foreseen under the LIFE
multiannual work programme for 2014-2017 could be further clarified as soon as the results of these pilot initiatives are
available.
The first projects selected under the new LIFE programme are scheduled to start in 2015 and only very few projects are
expected to be finished by 2017. Therefore the milestones for 2017 are defined with respect to on going projects and they
will be only partially achieved by 2020. The targets for 2020 will need to be adjusted on the basis of the mid-term
evaluation of the programme, scheduled for 2017.
New project types, priority areas and thematic priorities and new performance indicators were introduced by the
Regulation 1293/2013. To ensure a homogenous approach and to facilitate a coherent evaluation, the baselines are set to
0.
Programme Statement
DB2016
In comparison to the programme statement for 2014, the budget available for some project types and priority areas has
decreased considerably, while the scope of areas covered remained the same. This explains the lower estimates regarding
some of the milestones and targets.
Moreover, the objectives and indicators have been adjusted to correspond to those laid down in Regulation No
1293/2013.
Specific Objective 2: Halting and reversing the biodiversity loss, including the support of the Natura 2000 network and
tackling the degradation of ecosystems (Biodiversity priority area)
Indicator 1: Percentage of surface and type of ecosystems targeted by LIFE projects restored
Milestones
Target 2020
2017
2018
2019
10% of ecosystem
10% of ecosystem
surfaces and types are
surfaces and types
targeted by ongoing/
targeted by ongoing
finalised projects
projects progress
0
which progress
towards/ by finalised
towards improvement/
projects achieved
.
restoration
improvement/ restoration
Indicator 2: Percentage of habitats targeted progressing towards or improving conservation status as a consequence
of LIFE interventions
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
10% of habitats
finalised projects
progress towards
improved
conservation status
10% of habitats
targeted by ongoing
projects progress
towards/ of finalised
projects achieved
improved conservation
status
Indicator 3: Percentage of species targeted progressing towards or improving conservation status as a consequence
of LIFE interventions
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
10% of species
finalised projects
progress towards
improved
conservation status
10% of species targeted

by ongoing projects
progress towards/ of
finalised projects
achieved improved
conservation status
Indicator 4: Percentage of the Natura 2000 sites covered by nature IPs and thus progressing towards the
implementation of prioritised actions frameworks
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
4% of the Natura 2000
6% of the Natura 2000
sites are targeted by
sites are targeted by
nature IPs and
nature IPs and progress
progress towards the
towards or achieved the
0
implementation of
implementation of
prioritised actions
prioritised actions
.
frameworks
frameworks
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 5: Number of interventions to improve the knowledge base for Union nature and biodiversity policy and
legislation and for assessing and monitoring factors, pressures and responses having an impact on nature and
biodiversity
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
300 interventions (*)
700 interventions (*)
0
* Estimated to be 100% of the interventions financed by the 07 02 02 plus the number of Nature projects and 1/3 of the
operating grants financed under 07 02 03
Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Budget line
07 02 02
55
140,6
07 02 03
10
11,0
2. Financial instrument operations (projects) *
07 02 02
1,5
10,0
3. Public Procurement (contracts) **
07 02 02
22
6,6
88,5
168,2
Total
* For the financial instrument Natural Capital Financing Facility (NCFF) , the number identifies the interventions at final
recipients' level.
** Above 100.000 EUR
Outputs
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
64
65
70
75
80
90
2.
Financial
instrument
operations (projects) *
3.
Public
(contracts) **
20
19
Procurement
Total
444
0
1.5
4,5
0
22
22
25
29
34
39
191
19
* The financial instrument Natural Capital Financing Facility (NCFF) is funded half through 07 02 02 and half through
34 02 02. Half of the operations financed under the instrument are included here.
** Above 100.000 EUR
Specific Objective 3: Support better environmental governance and information at all levels (Environmental
Governance and Information priority area)
Indicator 1: Number of stakeholders and citizens participating in awareness raising activities in the framework of
LIFE interventions
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
500 000 stakeholders
1 000 000 stakeholders or
0
or citizens
citizens
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: Number of interventions to support communication, management and dissemination of information in

the field of environment and to facilitate knowledge sharing
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
420 interventions
800 interventions
* Although all interventions contain an information, dissemination and awareness raising element, governance and
information interventions, whether funded through grants or procurement, are specifically designed to address this
objective and are therefore used as the reference indicator.
Indicator 3: Percentage of projects promoting and contributing to a more effective compliance with and enforcement
of Union environmental law
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
5%* of ongoing
5%* of governance
governance and
and information
information projects
projects progress
progress towards/ of
0
towards improved
finalised projects
compliance and
achieved improved
enforcement of Union
compliance and
environmental law
enforcement of Union
environmental law
* It is expected that information and governance projects focusing on enforcement and compliance promotion will
significantly increase awareness of relevant public bodies and civil society, leading in some projects that progress
towards or reach actual improvements.
Indicator 4: Percentage of increase in the participation of NGOs in consultations on EU environmental policy
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
Milestones
2017
12% increase*
2018
2019
Target 2020
12% increase*
*All NGO's funded by operating grants are expected to increase their participation in consultations on EU environmental
policy.
Output
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
07 02 03
8,2
2. Public Procurement (contracts) *
07 02 03
57
29,5
3. Operating grants (work programmes of nonprofit making entities/NGOs
07 02 03
16
7,0
81
44,7
Total
* Above 100.000 EUR
Programme Statement

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Outputs

2.Public
(contracts)
DB2016
Procurement
3. Operating grants (work

programmes of non-profit
making entities/NGOs
44
44
15
10
11
Total
12
65
0
50
57
60
64
51
40
366
44
16
16
16
16
16
16
96
0
Specific Objective 4: Reduction of EU greenhouse gas emissions and development and implementation of EU climate
policy and legislation (Climate Change Mitigation priority area)
Indicator 1: Number and coverage of climate change mitigation strategies or action plans developed or implemented
through LIFE
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
In 2012 less than
10% of the climate
mitigation project
proposals submitted
in LIFE+ concerned
development of
mitigation strategies
and action plans.
Support development
and/or
implementation of at
least 1 climate change
mitigation strategy or
action plan in 13
different geographical
regions
Support development
and/or
implementation of at
least 1 climate change
mitigation strategy or
action plan per Member
State
Indicator 2: Tons of greenhouse gases reduced by new technologies, systems, methods or instruments and/or other
best practice approaches developed and taken up following LIFE examples
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Relative reduction in
tons of greenhouse
gasses per project of
at
least
20%
compared to project
baseline.
Data not available
80% of the projects

funded in climate
change
mitigation
priority area 20142017 should promote
innovative
technologies and/or
other best practice
solutions for the
reduction
of
greenhouse
gas
emissions
Relative reduction in tons

of greenhouse gasses per
project of at least 20%
compared to project
baseline.
80% of the projects
funded in climate change
mitigation priority area
should
promote
innovative technologies
and/or other best practice
solutions
for
the
reduction of greenhouse
gas emissions
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 3: Number of interventions to improve the knowledge base for Union climate policy and legislation, and
for assessing and monitoring factors, pressures and responses having an impact on the climate (cf. Article 14(b)
Regulation 1293/2013)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
80% of IPs and
30% of the
100% of IPs and 25% of
traditional projects
the traditional projects
Data not available
funded in climate
change mitigation
mitigation priority area
priority area 20142017
Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Budget line
34 02 01
16
24,0
2.Financial instrument operation (projects)
34 02 01
350
20,0
34 02 01
16
5,4
382
49,4
Total
Estimated to be 100% of the interventions financed by the 34 02 01
For the financial instrument Private Finance for Energy Efficiency (PF4EE), the number identifies the interventions at
final recipients level.
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Outputs
2.
Financial
instrument
operation (projects)
3.
Public
(contracts)
Procurement
22
27
15
16
18
26
27
Total
27
129
0
50
350
400
400
400
100
1 700
0
18
16
18
22
14
17
127
27
(**) The loans of the 2014 commitment will be contracted with final recipients in 2015-2017, the loans of the 2015
commitment will be contracted with final recipients in 2015-2018, the loans of the 2016 commitment will be contracted
with final recipients in 2016-2019.
Specific Objective 5: Increased resilience of the EU to climate change (Climate Change Adaptation priority area)
Indicator 1: Number and coverage of climate change adaptation strategies or action plans developed or implemented
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
February 2014: 16
All MS are effectively
All MS have adopted
Member States have
implementing their
a national adaptation
adopted an
national adaptation
strategy
adaptation strategy.
strategies.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: Attributable climate resilience, broken down by sector, due to the demonstrated new technologies,
systems, instruments and/or other best practice approaches developed and taken up following LIFE examples
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Under the 2012 call

of the LIFE+
regulation, only
15% of climate
project proposals
submitted were on
adaptation.
Increased climate
Increased attributable
resilience due to LIFE
climate resilience per
funded projects in
sector.
vulnerable areas as
identified in the EU
adaptation
80% of funded projects
strategy.80% of
promoting innovative
funded projects
policy approaches and/or
promoting innovative
other best practice
policy approaches
solutions for more
and/or other best
climate resilience.
practice solutions for
more climate
resilience
Indicator 3: Number of interventions to improve the knowledge base for Union climate policy and legislation, and
for assessing and monitoring factors, pressures and responses having an impact on the climate resilience (cf. Article
15(b) Regulation 1293/2013)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
80% of IPs and

30% of the traditional
projects funded in
climate change
adaptation priority area
2014-2017
Data not available
100% of IPs and 25% of

the traditional projects
adaptation priority area

Output
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
34 02 02
19
32,6
2.Financial instrument operation (projects)
34 02 02
1,5
10,0
34 02 02
11
6,2
31,5
48,8
Total
Estimated to be 100% of the interventions financed by the 34 02 02.
For the financial instrument Natural Capital Financing Facility (NCFF), the number identifies the interventions at final
recipients level.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Outputs
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
16
19
22
27
28
28
2.Financial
instrument
operation (projects)
2.Financial
instrument
operation (projects) *
3.Public
(contracts)
Procurement
Total
140
0
1,5
4,5
0
10
11
12
12
13
13
79
8
* The financial instrument Natural Capital Financing Facility (NCFF) is funded half through 34 02 02 and half through
07 02 02. Half of the operations financed under the instrument are included here.
Specific Objective 6: Support better climate governance and information at all levels (Climate Governance and
Information priority area)
Indicator 1: Number of stakeholders and citizens participating in awareness raising activities in the framework of
LIFE interventions
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
70 000 stakeholders or
140 000 stakeholders or
citizens
citizens
Indicator 2: Number of interventions to support communication, management and dissemination of information in
the field of climate change mitigation and adaptation and to facilitate knowledge sharing
0
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
In 2012 less than 5%

of the traditional
climate project
proposals submitted
related to climate
awareness raising
activities at local,
regional, national or
cross-border levels*
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
10% of climate
projects are targeted
to specific climate
governance,
awareness raising or
information activities
at local, regional,
national or crossborder levels.
All LIFE projects
under the priority area
climate governance
and information
achieve knowledge
sharing.
To be set in the second

MAWP.
All LIFE projects under
the priority area climate
governance and
information achieve
knowledge sharing.
*Although all interventions contain an information, dissemination and awareness raising element, governance and
information interventions, whether funded through grants or procurement, are designed to address this objective and are
therefore used as the reference indicator.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 3: Share of projects promoting and contributing to a more effective compliance with and enforcement of
Union climate law
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
More than 5% of
5% of governance and
governance and
progress towards
0
progress towards
improved compliance
improved compliance
and enforcement of
and enforcement of
Union climate law
Union climate law
Indicator 4: Number of interventions emanating from NGOs funded by LIFE with an impact on EU policy
Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015
Under the 2012 call

of the LIFE +
Regulation, the
work programme of
6 specific climate
NGO's proposals
plus a number of
environmental
NGO's that also
have a climate focus
were co-funded.
2016
Target 2020
2017
2018
2019
Stable level of
operating grants to
NGO's with climate
related work
programmes.
Stable level of
operating grants to
NGO's with climate
related work
programmes.

Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Budget line
34 02 03
7,0
34 02 03
21
4,4
3. Operating grants (work programmes of non-profit making

entities/NGOs
34 02 03
2,0
32
13,4
Total
Estimated to be 100% of the interventions financed by the 34 02 03
Number of outputs foreseen (F) and produced

(P)
2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020
Outputs
F
10
3. Operating grants (work programmes of non-profit F

making entities/NGOs
P
1.Action grants (projects)
Total
36
0
11
21
22
17
25
27
133
8
36
0
Programme Statement
263
DB2016
Programme Statement
DB2016
HEADING 3 SECURITY AND CITIZENSHIP
HEADING 3 SECURITY AND CITIZENSHIP / 264
Programme Statement
DB2016
HEADING 3: Security and citizenship

Lead DG: HOME
1.
Legal Basis

Council of 16 April 2014 establishing the Asylum, Migration and
Integration Fund, amending Council Decision 2008/381/EC and
repealing Decisions No 573/2007/EC and No 575/2007/EC of the
European Parliament and of the Council and Council Decision
2007/435/EC
2014*
Total
2,2
228,4
230,5
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
3 137,0

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2015
2,2
552,9
555,0
2,3
710,0
712,3
2,5
557,1
559,6
2,5
457,0
459,5
2020
2,5
483,3
485,8
Total
2,5
16,6
493,8 3 482,4
496,3 3 499,0
* this amount takes into account 2014 non-used allocation transferred to subsequent years according to Council Regulation (EU,
Euratom) 2015/623 of 21 April 2015
2.
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
408,783 11,11 %
8,950 85,43 % 607,338 97,92 % 221,290
22,46 %
Authorised appropriation excluding 408,783 11,12 %

8,908 72,61 % 607,338 97,93 % 221,290
22,38 %
3.
EU added value
The management of migration flows presents challenges which cannot be dealt with by the Member States acting alone.
This is an area where there is obvious added value in mobilising the EU budget.
Some Member States bear a heavy burden due to their specific geographic situation and the length of the external borders
of the Union that they have to manage. The principle of solidarity and the fair sharing of responsibilities between
Member States is therefore at the heart of the common policies on asylum and immigration. The EU budget provides the
means to address the financial implications of this principle.
In relation to the external dimension of home affairs, it is clear that the adoption of measures and the pooling of resources
at EU level will increase significantly the EU leverage necessary to convince third countries to engage with the EU on
those migration related issues which are primarily in the interest of the EU and the Member States.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Flagship
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
19,5
19,5
39,0

Total
DB 2016
(EUR million)
24,5
24,5
49,0

Not applicable
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: to contribute to the efficient management of migration flows and to the implementation,
strengthening and development of the common policy on asylum, subsidiary protection and temporary protection and
the common immigration policy, while fully respecting the rights and principles enshrined in the Charter of
Fundamental Rights of the European Union
Indicator 1: Effectiveness of return policy as reflected by the ratio between the number of irregular migrants
returned to their country of origin compared to return decisions issued
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
39,2 % (166 975 effected
returns / 425 875 issued
Increased
Increased ratio
with a return decision)
ratio
(source: Member States)
Indicator 2: Ratio voluntary/forced return
Milestones
Target 2020
2016
2017
2018
2019
45,5 %
Increased
Increased ratio
(source: Member States)
ratio
Indicator 3: Difference in employment rates of third-country national (TCN) compared to that of EU nationals
Baseline
2012
2014
2015
Baseline
2011
2014
Employment rate of nonGradual
EU citizens has decreased
approximation
from 54,9% in 2011 to
of employment
52,6% in 2013, whilst the
rates of TCNs
employment rate for EU
and EU
nationals remains stable at
nationals.
64,5% (Eurostat data)
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
Gradual
approximation
of employment
rates of TCNs
and EU
nationals
2019
Target 2020
Gradual
approximation of
employment rates
of TCNs and EU
nationals.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 4: Convergence of recognition rates for international protection by Member States for asylum applicants
from the same third country
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
The standard deviation in the Similar

recognition rates in the Member States standard
for asylum seekers from Afghanistan deviation:
based on 2013 figures) is 22,71 (the 22,4
higher the standard deviation, the
(actual data)
higher the difference between MS's
recognition rate in comparison to the
average recognition rate)
2015
2016
2017
Lower (increased
convergence)in
the
Member
States for asylum
seekers
from
Afghanistan
based on 2013
figures)
2018
2019
Lower
(increased
convergence)
Calculations based on Eurostat data

4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: to strengthen and develop all aspects of the Common European Asylum System, including its
external dimension
Indicator 1: Number of target group persons provided with assistance through projects in the field of reception and
asylum systems supported under the Fund*
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Estimation on the basis of corrected
provisional figures in AMIF draft
national
programmes
on
10/02/2015.
140 000
140 000
2014 data are not available yet (will

become available in April 2016).
(*) Breakdown of this information, according to Annex IV of the Regulation, will be provided in the annual implementation report.
Indicator 2: Capacity (i.e. number of places) of new reception accommodation infrastructure set up in line with the
common requirements for reception conditions set out in the Union acquis and of existing reception accommodation
infrastructure improved in accordance with the same requirements as a result of the projects supported under the
Fund and percentage in the total reception accommodation capacity2
Milestones
Target
Baseline
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Estimation on the basis of
corrected provisional figures
in AMIF draft national
programmes on 10/02/2015.
4 755
2014 data are not available

yet (will become available in
April 2016).
1
2
For Member States with at least 100 decisions regarding asylum seekers from Afghanistan.
Member States will report on these percentages for the first time in March 2016, and then annually.
4 755
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 3: Number of persons trained in asylum-related topics with the assistance of the Fund, and that number as
a percentage of the total number of staff trained in those topics*
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
Estimation on the basis of corrected provisional
figures in AMIF draft national programmes on
10/02/2015.
300
300
2014 data are not available yet (will become

available in April 2016).
* Member States will report on these percentages for the first time in March 2016, and then annually.
Indicator 4: Number of country-of-origin information products and fact-finding missions conducted with the
assistance of the Fund
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
provisional figures in AMIF draft national
10 394
10 394

Indicator 5: Number of projects supported under the Fund to develop, monitor and evaluate asylum policies in
Member States
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
provisional figures in AMIF draft national
20
20

Indicator 6: Number of persons resettled with support of the Fund
Baseline
2012
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
Target
(2014-2020)
2019
0
Estimates based on MS pledging for 2014- 7 269
2015 (updated 16/04/2015).
9 769
8 500
6 000
2 500
2 500
41 538

Draft Budget 2016
Output
Budget line
Projects aiming at improving reception and asylum

systems.
Projects aiming at improving Member States' capacity
Number
EUR million
18 03 01 01
450
119,8
18 03 01 01
20
8,8
Programme Statement
DB2016
to develop, monitor and evaluate their asylum policies.

Persons pledged for resettlement with the lump sum.
18 03 01 01
8 500
88,6
Projects under Union actions aiming at strengthening

and developing the Common European Asylum
System.
18 03 01 01
12
20,9
Total
238,1

Outputs
Total
Projects aiming at improving

reception and asylum systems.
Projects aiming at improving
Member States' capacity to develop,
monitor and evaluate their asylum
policies.
Persons pledged for resettlement
with the lump sum.
Projects under Union actions aiming
at strengthening and developing the
Common European Asylum System.
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
81
240
450
500
500
500
500
20
7 269
7 269
10
20
20
20
20
20
20
9 769
8 500
6 000
2 500
2 500
5 000
10
12
10
10
10
10
2 771
140
41 538
72

The financial programming of the AMIF in the 2016 Draft Budget is different from the initial financial programming in
the legislative financial statement accompanying the COM proposal for the AMF (COM (2011) 751).
Indeed, the initial financial programming was reflecting the linear distribution as in the COM proposal (COM (2011) 398
final), whereas the current financial programming reflects the Commission' proposal COM(2015) 15 of 20.01.2015
concerning the re-profiling exercise carried out in 2015 corresponding to the reallocation over 2015, 2016 and 2017 of
non-committed amounts for 2014.
The performance indicators and the funds allocation per specific objective and outputs are based on the information
provided in the draft national programmes.
Under shared management, there were no outputs produced (P) in 2014, because no national programmes were adopted
under the Asylum, Migration and Integration Fund as of 31.12.2014.
Specific Objective 2: to support legal migration to the Member States in accordance with their economic and social
needs, such as labour market needs, while safeguarding the integrity of the immigration systems of Member States, and
to promote the effective integration of third-country nationals
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 1: Number of target group persons who participated in pre-departure measures supported under the Fund
Baseline
2014
0
Estimation on the basis of corrected provisional figures
in AMIF draft national programmes on 10/02/2015.
2014 data are not available yet (will become available
in April 2016).
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
33 000
Target 2020
33 000
Indicator 2: Number of target group persons assisted by the Fund through integration measures in the framework of
national, local and regional strategies3
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014 2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
in April 2016).
263 000
263 000
Indicator 3: Number of local, regional and national policy frameworks/measures/tools in place for the integration of
third-country nationals and involving civil society and migrant communities, as well as all other relevant
stakeholders, as a result of the measures supported under the Fund
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014 2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
2014 data are not available yet (will become available in
April 2016).
305
305
Indicator 4: Number of cooperation projects with other Member States on the integration of third-country nationals
supported under the Fund
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014 2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
April 2016).
Indicator 5: Number of projects supported under the Fund to develop, monitor and evaluate integration policies in
Member States
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014 2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
April 2016).
17
Breakdown of this information, according to Annex IV of the Regulation, will be provided in the annual implementation report.
17
Programme Statement
DB2016

Draft Budget 2016
Output
Budget line
Number
EUR million
Projects aiming at facilitating legal migration and

increasing the number and quality of pre-departure
measures.
18 03 01 02
14,3
Projects related to integration measures, both at local and

regional level.
18 03 01 02
450
98,0
Projects aiming at increasing the capacity of Member

States to support legal migration to the Union and to
promote the effective integration third-country nationals.
18 03 01 02
80
20,7
Projects under Union actions within Asylum and Migration

Fund aiming at supporting legal migration to the Union and
promoting the effective integration of third-country
nationals.
18 03 01 02
10
4,6
Total
137,6

Outputs
Total
2014
Projects aiming at facilitating legal migration and F

increasing the number and quality of pre-departure
measures.
P
81
Projects aiming at increasing the capacity of Member F

States to support legal migration to the Union and to
promote the effective integration third-country
P
nationals.
27
Projects under Union actions aiming at supporting legal F

migration to the Union and promoting the effective
integration of third-country nationals.
P
10
Projects related to integration measures, both at local

and regional level.
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

7
10
59
240
450
500
500
500
500 2 771
45
80
100
100
100
100
552
10
10
10
10
10
10
70

Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 3: to enhance fair and effective return strategies in the Member States which contribute to
combating illegal immigration, with an emphasis on sustainability of return and effective readmission in the countries of
origin and transit
Indicator 1: Number of persons trained on return-related topics with the assistance of the Fund
Baseline
2014
0
in April 2016).
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
3 700
Target 2020
3 700
Indicator 2: Number of returnees who received pre or post return reintegration assistance co-financed by the Fund
Baseline
2014
0
April 2016).
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
25 000
Target 2020
25 000
Indicator 3: Number of returnees whose return was co-financed by the Fund, persons who returned voluntarily and
persons who were removed
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014 2015 2016
2017
2018 2019
0
Estimation on the basis of corrected provisional
figures in AMIF draft national programmes on
0
10/02/2015.
95 000
Of which:
63000 voluntary
returns and
32000 forced
returns
95 000
Of which:
63000 voluntary
returns and 32000
forced returns
Indicator 4: Number of monitored removal operations co-financed by the Fund

Baseline
2014
0
in April 2016).
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
10
2018
2019
Target 2020
10
Indicator 5: Number of projects supported under the Fund to develop, monitor and evaluate return policies in
Member States
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014 2015 2016
2017
2018
2019
0
0
27
27
April 2016).
Programme Statement
DB2016

Draft Budget 2016
Output
Budget line
Number
EUR million
Projects aiming at increasing the number and quality of

measures accompanying return procedures.
18 03 01 02
50
40,2

return measures.
18 03 01 02
85
90,0
Projects aiming at increasing the practical cooperation

between Member States and the capacity of Member States
to develop effective and sustainable return policies.
18 03 01 02
22
4,1
Projects under Union actions aiming at enhancing fair and

effective return strategies in the Member States.
18 03 01 02
10
4,6
Total
138,9

Outputs
Total
2014
F
40
54
Projects aiming at increasing the practical cooperation F

between Member States and the capacity of Member
States to develop effective and sustainable return
P
policies.
14
10

measures accompanying return procedures.

return measures.
Projects under Union actions aiming at enhancing fair

and effective return strategies in the Member States.
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

45
50
60
60
60
60
375
70
85
100
100
100
100
609
18
22
27
27
27
27
162
10
10
10
10
10
10
70

Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 4: to enhance solidarity and responsibility-sharing between the Member States, in particular with
those most affected by migration and asylum flows, including through practical cooperation
Indicator 1: Number of applicants and beneficiaries of international protection transferred from one Member State
to another with support of the Fund
Milestones
Target
Baseline
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017 2018 2019
0
30 2 030 25 020 13 020
20
20
20
Estimates based on MS pledging for 2014-2015 (updated
16/04/2015).
Indicator 2: Number of cooperation projects with other Member States on enhancing solidarity and responsibility
sharing between the Member States supported under the Fund
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
0
Estimation on the basis of corrected provisional figures in
AMIF draft national programmes on 10/02/2015.
2014 data are not available yet (will become available in April
2016).
Draft Budget 2016
Output
Budget line
Number
EUR million
Projects addressing relocation.
18 03 01 01
0,3
Persons pledged for relocation with the lump sum.
18 03 01 01
25 020
150,1
Emergency actions addressing migratory pressure.
18 03 01 01
14
45,0
Total
195,4

Outputs
Total
2014
Persons pledged for relocation with the

lump sum.
30
30
Emergency actions addressing migratory

pressure.
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Projects addressing relocation.
2 030 25 020 13 020
14
20
20
20 40 160
56
Programme Statement
DB2016

Programme Statement
DB2016
Internal Security Fund (ISF)

Lead DG: HOME
1.
Legal Basis
Regulation (EU) No 515/2014 OF the European Parliament and of the

Council of 16 April 2014 establishing, as part of the Internal Security
Fund, the instrument for financial support for external borders and visa
and repealing Decision No 574/2007/EC
2014*
Total
2,2
127,3
129,5
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
3 764,0

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2015
2,2
538,7
540,8
2,3
528,8
531,1
2,5
554,2
556,7
2,5
590,4
592,9
2020
2,5
637,9
640,4
Total
2,5
16,6
735,9 3 713,2
738,4 3 729,8
* this amount takes into account 2014 non-used allocation transferred to subsequent years according to Council Regulation (EU,
Euratom) 2015/623 of 21 April 2015
2.
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
399,360 16,60 %
3,980 72,98 % 457,338 30,78 % 198,350
7,59 %

3,852 39,47 % 457,338 30,78 % 198,350
7,55 %
3.
EU added value
The management of migration flows and security threats present challenges which cannot be dealt with by the Member
States acting alone. These are areas where there is obvious added value in mobilising the EU budget.
Some Member States bear a heavy burden due to their specific geographic situation and the length of the external borders
of the Union that they have to manage. The abolition of internal border controls must be accompanied by common
measures for the effective control and surveillance of the Union's external borders. The principle of solidarity and the fair
sharing of responsibilities between Member States is therefore at the heart of the common policies on asylum,
immigration and external borders. The EU budget provides the means to address the financial implications of this
principle. In the area of security, serious and organised crime, terrorism and other security-related threats are increasingly
cross-border in nature. Transnational co-operation and coordination between law enforcement authorities is essential to
successfully prevent and fight these crimes, for example through the exchange of information, joint investigations,
interoperable technologies and common threat and risk assessments.
Dealing with migration flows, the management of the EU's external borders and the security of the EU requires
substantial resources and capabilities from the Member States. Improved operational co-operation and coordination
involving the pooling of resources in areas like training and equipment creates economies of scale and synergies thereby
Programme Statement
DB2016
ensuring a more efficient use of public funds and reinforcing solidarity, mutual trust and responsibility sharing for
common EU policies among Member States. This is particularly relevant in the area of security, where financial support
for all forms of cross-border joint operation is essential to enhance cooperation between police, customs, border guards
and judicial authorities.
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: to contribute to ensuring a high level of security in the Union
Indicator 1: Number of irregular migrants apprehended at the EU external borders
Baseline
2012
73 042
Source: Frontex Risk Analysis Network
2014
283 532
(actual data)
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
250 000*
Target 2020
250 000*
*A forecast is difficult to make because of the high volatility of the relevant external factors (political situation in the third countries
considered as sources of irregular migration) which are very difficult to predict and control.
Indicator 2: Volume of terrorism in the EU expressed by the number of failed, foiled or completed terrorist attacks in
the EU
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2012
2014
2015 2016
2017
2018 2019
219 attacks
152 attacks
170 attacks
Below 120 attacks
17 deaths
7 deaths
0 death
0 death
This target has been defined
Europol TE-SAT, 2013
Europol TE-SAT,
to cut by half the number of
2014
terrorist incidents in Europe
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: Supporting a common visa policy to facilitate legitimate travel, provide a high quality of
service to visa applicants, ensure equal treatment of third-country nationals and tackle illegal immigration
Indicator 1: Cumulative number of consular cooperation activities developed with the help of the Instrument.
Broken down in co-locations, common application centres, representations, others1
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
No data
available
in 2014
15
35
Realistic target established in consideration of MS
moderate willingness to embark on consular
cooperation activities
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: Cumulative number of staff trained and number of training courses in aspects related to the common
visa policy with the help of the Instrument
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
No data
available
in 2014
2000 staff trained, 100 regional

training courses
1000 staff trained,

50 regional
training courses
Indicator 3: Cumulative number of specialised posts in third countries supported by the Instrument. Broken down by
ILOs, others*
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
30 (Source: MS
No data
information from the available in
45
60
National Programmes)
2014
* Breakdown of this information, according to Annex IV of the Regulation, will be provided in the annual implementation report.
Indicator 4: Percentage and number of consulates developed or upgraded with the help of the Instrument out of the
total number of consulates
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
No data
200
100
0 available
Target consists in equipping/ securing/enhancing 10% out of
in 2014
the +/- 2000 consular posts issuing Schengen visas)
Draft Budget 2016
Output
Budget line
Number
EUR million
projects supporting and expanding the existing capacity at national level in

visa policy
18 02 01 01
36
25,7
projects ensuring the correct and uniform application of the Union acquis
on visas in response to weaknesses identified at Union level, as shown by
results established in the framework of the Schengen evaluation and
monitoring mechanism
18 02 01 01
16
1,8
projects supporting the further development of the management of

migration flows by consular and other services of the Member States in
third countries, including the setting up of consular co-operation
mechanisms with a view to facilitating legitimate travel in accordance with
Union law or the law of the Member State concerned and preventing illegal
immigration into the Union
18 02 01 01
11
4,2
projects under specific actions for visas policy and consular cooperation
18 02 01 01
2,6
projects under Union and emergency actions for visas policy and consular
cooperation
18 02 01 01
8,8
Operating support Visas
18 02 01 01
19,1
Technical assistance (as part of the national programme, 100% EU
18 02 01 01
4,8
Programme Statement
DB2016
contribution)
Total
67,0

Outputs
Total
2014
F
33
projects ensuring the correct and uniform application of F

the Union acquis on visas in response to weaknesses
identified at Union level, as shown by results
established in the framework of the Schengen evaluation P
and monitoring mechanism
15
projects supporting the further development of the F

management of migration flows by consular and other
services of the Member States in third countries,
including the setting up of consular co-operation
mechanisms with a view to facilitating legitimate travel
P
in accordance with Union law or the law of the Member
State concerned and preventing illegal immigration into
the Union
10
projects supporting and expanding the existing capacity

at national level in visa policy
projects under specific actions for visas policy and

consular cooperation
projects under Union actions for visas policy and

consular cooperation
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

36
36
30
30
33
33
231
15
16
15
15
15
15
106
10
11
11
11
11
11
75
11
46

At the beginning of 2015, no national programme has been adopted. Nevertheless, a substantial number (25 out of 30) of
ISF national programmes have been submitted.
The above mentioned figures are based on the content of the national programmes received so far. In particular, with the
information received from Member States, it is now clearer to see how the available funding will be allocated by Member
States to the different priorities. Numbers of projects, which is linked to the amounts allocated to each objective, have
been adjusted accordingly.
The nomenclature chosen to classify the outputs reflects the different priorities set out in the ISF legal basis.
It must be underlined that the overall amount allocated to this specific objective (together with the Borders objective) has
been reduced by 6,6 M in order to transfer additional funds (20M) to the Frontex Agency to reinforce its budget to carry
out joint operations in the Mediterranean sea, as this was done under the 2015 Budget.
Specific Objective 2: Supporting integrated border management to ensure, on one hand, a uniform and high
level of control and protection of the external borders, and on the other hand, the smooth crossing of the external
borders in conformity with the Schengen acquis, while guaranteeing access to international protection for those
needing it, in accordance with the obligations contracted by the Member States in the field of human rights
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 1: Number of staff trained and number of training courses in aspects related to border management with
the help of the Instrument
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015 2016
2017
2018 2019
1 500 staff trained, 50 training courses
0
No information
available in 2014
750 staff trained,

25 training courses
Target defined by extrapolating data

gathered from the EBF 2012-2013
annual programmes
Indicator 2: Number of border control (checks and surveillance) infrastructure and means developed or upgraded
with the help of the Instrument. Broken down by infrastructure, fleet (air, land, sea borders), equipment, others2
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014 2015 2016
2017
2018
2019
This indicator can only be computed once the
Commission will have received all National
Programme from the MS
N/A
N/A
Indicator 3: Number of gates funded and number of border crossings of the external borders through ABC gates
supported from the Instrument out of the total number of border crossings
Milestones
Baseline 2013
Target 2020
2014
2015 2016
2017
2018 2019
No
information
available in
0 gates funded
2014.
100 gates
45 gates
2 million
crossings out of
820 million
25 million crossings out of 950 million
Target defined by extrapolating current

data on border crossings and existing
ABC gates
Indicator 4: Number of national border surveillance infrastructure established/further developed in the framework
of EUROSUR. Broken down by National Coordination Centres, Regional Coordination Centres, Local Coordination
Centres, other types of coordination centres*
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015 2016
2017
2018 2019
19 National
Coordination Centres
Source:
Eurosur Regulation**
30 National
and other
infrastructure/upgrade
30 National
and other
infrastructure/upgrade
30 National
Coordination
Centres and other
infrastructure/upg
rade
**The 19 MS having an external border to the east and to the south were required by the Eurosur Regulation to set up their NCCs by
December 2013. All the NCCs were set up by December 2014.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 5: Number of incidents reported by Member States to the European Situational Picture. Broken down by
illegal immigration, including incidents relating to a risk to the lives of migrants, cross-border crime, crisis
situations*
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
EUROSUR entered into force only on
02/12/2013. Relevant indicators, data
and their evolution can be assessed and
quantified only from 2015 onwards.
N/A
N/A
Draft Budget 2016
Output
Budget line
Number
EUR million
projects developing the European Border Surveillance system

(EUROSUR)
18 02 01 01
61,6
projects supporting and expanding the existing capacity at

national level in the management of the external borders
18 02 01 01
125
67,6
projects reinforcing integrated border management by testing

and introducing new tools, interoperable systems and working
methods which aim to enhance information exchange within
the Member State or to improve inter-agency co-operation
18 02 01 01
12
15,3
developing projects with a view to ensuring a uniform and

high level of control of the external border in accordance with
common Union standards and aiming at increased
interoperability of border management systems between
Member States
18 02 01 01
75
Projects supporting actions, after consulting the Frontex

Agency, aimed at promoting further harmonisation of border
management and in particular technological capabilities, in
accordance with common Union standards
18 02 01 01
Projects ensuring the correct and uniform application of the

Union acquis on border control in response to weaknesses
identified at Union level, as shown by results established in
the framework of the Schengen evaluation and monitoring
mechanism
18 02 01 01
8,5
projects building the capacity to face upcoming challenges,

including present and future threats and pressures at the
external borders, taking into account in particular the analyses
carried out by relevant Union agencies
18 02 01 01
4,1
projects under specific actions for border management

including the purchase of equipment to be put at disposal of
Frontex
18 02 01 01
15,9
Programme Statement
DB2016
projects under Union and emergency actions for border

management
18 02 01 01
22,5
Operating support for the Special Transit Scheme
18 02 01 01
35,9
Operating support Borders
18 02 01 01
Technical Assistance (as part of the national programme,

100% EU contribution)
18 02 01 01
55,5
9,4
Total
304,3

Outputs
Total
2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020
F
projects supporting and expanding the existing

capacity at national level in visa policy and in the
management of the external borders
119
projects reinforcing integrated border management

by testing and introducing new tools, interoperable
systems and working methods which aim to enhance
information exchange within the Member State or to
improve inter-agency co-operation
10
developing projects with a view to ensuring a

uniform and high level of control of the external
border in accordance with common Union standards
and aiming at increased interoperability of border
management systems between Member States
interoperability of border management systems
between Member States
75
Projects supporting actions, after consulting the

Frontex Agency, aimed at promoting further
harmonisation of border management and in
particular technological capabilities, in accordance
with common Union standards
Projects ensuring the correct and uniform application

of the Union acquis on border control in response to
weaknesses identified at Union level, as shown by
results established in the framework of the Schengen
evaluation and monitoring mechanism
projects building the capacity to face upcoming

challenges, including present and future threats and
pressures at the external borders, taking into account
in particular the analyses carried out by relevant
Union agencies
projects developing the European

Surveillance system (EUROSUR)
Border
36
110
125
100
96
90
80
736
11
12
12
12
12
77
70
75
70
60
60
30
440
29
29
29
Programme Statement
projects under specific actions for border

management including the purchase of equipment to
be put at disposal of Frontex
Projects under
management.
Union
actions
for
border
DB2016
10
10
42
47
Operating support for the Special Transit Scheme

At the beginning of 2015, no national programme has been adopted. Nevertheless, a substantial number (25 out of 30) of
ISF national programmes have been submitted.
The above mentioned figures are based on the content of the national programmes received so far. In particular, with the
information received from Member States, it is now clearer to see how the available funding will be allocated by member
States to the different priorities. Numbers of projects, which is linked to the amounts allocated to each objective, have
been adjusted accordingly.
The ISF Borders Fund finances actions under two specific objectives: Visa policy and Borders management. The
nomenclature chosen to classify the outputs reflects the outcome of the negotiation on the ISF Borders which took place
in December 2013. In particular, the final text of the legal base has set minimum amounts to be allocated by Member
States on the categories of the above outputs table.
Specific Objective 3: Crime prevention, combating cross-border, serious and organised crime including terrorism, and
reinforcing coordination and cooperation between law enforcement authorities and other national authorities of Member
States
Indicator 1: Cumulative number of joint investigation teams (JITs) and European Multidisciplinary Platform
against Criminal Threats (EMPACT) operational projects supported by the Instrument, including the participating
Member States and authorities. Broken down by Leader (Member State), Partners (Member State), participating
authorities, participating EU Agency (Eurojust, Europol), if applicable*
Milestones(cumulative number)
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
0
1 285
No information
available for
2014
820
Figures are based on the first experiences with

EMPACT actions under the policy cycle.
*Breakdown of this information, according to Annex II of the Regulation, will be provided in the annual implementation report.
Indicator 2: Cumulative Number of law enforcement officials trained on cross-border-related topics with the help of
the Instrument, and the duration of their training (person days). Broken down by type of crime (Art. 83 TFEU), and
horizontal area of law enforcement*
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020**
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Officials trained: 0 No data available
for 2014
Person days: 0
20 000
39 200
40 000
78 400
* Breakdown of this information, according to Annex II of the Regulation, will be provided in the annual implementation report.
Programme Statement
DB2016
**Targets are based on Cepol training statistics: in 2012 about 5.600 officers participated in Cepol courses and the number of officers
trained under the national programmes should basically equal this amount. In addition, assuming that the training intensity should
increase over the years, after 2017 the numbers should be higher. The figure on person-days is based on the assumption that the
average duration of a training course is two days
Indicator 3: Number and financial value of projects in the area of crime prevention. Broken down by type of crime
(Art. 83 TFEU)*
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018 2019
This indicator can only be computed once the
No data
Commission will have received all National
available
N/A
N/A
Programme from the MS and when they are approved for 2014
* Breakdown of this information, according to Annex II of the Regulation, will be provided in the annual implementation report.
Indicator 4: Number of projects supported by the Instrument, aiming to improve law enforcement information
exchange which are related to Europol data systems, repositories or communication tools. Broken down by type of
crime (Art. 83 TFEU)*
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020**
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
43
0
No data available for 2014
24
* Breakdown of this information, according to Annex II of the Regulation, will be provided in the annual implementation
report. All MS national programmes should be adopted by mid-2015 at latest. Many MS wait for the programme
approval before launching any activities.
**In 2013, 13 MS had a data loader in place to upload data to EIS; the extent to which national authorities are connected
to SIENA differs from MS to MS. SIENA and EIS are the most relevant systems/ tools regarding this indicator. Within
the life span of the fund all MS should establish data loaders and all should improve the connection to SIENA or conduct
alternative projects in line with the aim mentioned in the indicator. This sums up to at least 43 projects.
Draft Budget 2016
Output
Budget line
Number EUR million
Projects aiming at strengthening Member States' capability to prevent crime and

18 02 01 02
combat cross-border, serious and organised crime.
107
52,6
projects aiming at coordination, cooperation, mutual understanding and the

exchange of information among Member States' national authorities, relevant 18 02 01 02
Union bodies, third-countries and international organisations.
68
24,5
Projects aiming at training schemes in implementation of European training

policies, including through specific Union law enforcement exchange 18 02 01 02
programmes.
25
7,7
Projects aiming at measures and best practices for the protection and support of
18 02 01 02
witnesses and victims of crime, including victims of terrorism.
3,5
Union projects aiming at preventing and combating cross-border, serious and

organised crime, and reinforcing coordination and cooperation between law 18 02 01 02
enforcement authorities
60
32,0
Total
120,3
Programme Statement
DB2016

Outputs
Total
2014
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020
projects aiming at strengthening Member States' F

capability to prevent crime and combat cross-border,
serious and organised crime.
P
99
projects aiming at coordination, cooperation, mutual F

understanding and the exchange of information among
Member States' national authorities, relevant Union
P
bodies, third-countries and international organisations.
63
projects aiming at training schemes in implementation F

of European training policies, including through specific
Union law enforcement exchange programmes.
P
25
projects aiming at measures and best practices for the F

protection and support of witnesses and victims of
crime, including victims of terrorism.
P
Union projects aiming at preventing and combating F

cross-border, serious and organised crime, and
reinforcing coordination and cooperation between law
P
enforcement authorities
57
107
107
107
107
97
99
693
63
68
70
63
63
63
441
25
25
25
25
25
25
175
35
60
60
57
57
57
57
399

At the beginning of 2015, no national programme was adopted.
As a result, the number of projects to be implemented by Member States is very difficult to forecast. The total number of
projects is based on past experience gained with CIPS/ISEC. The distribution of the projects in the different categories
has been made on the basis of the draft national programmes already received.
Specific Objective 4: Enhancing the capacity of Member States and the Union for managing effectively securityrelated risks and crises, and preparing for and protecting people and critical infrastructure against terrorist
attacks and other security-related incidents
Indicator 1: Number and tools put in place and/or further upgraded with the help of the Instrument to facilitate the
protection of critical infrastructure by Member States in all sectors of the economy
Milestones
Target
Baseline
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
Indicator 2: Cumulative number of projects relating to the assessment and management of risks in the field of
internal security supported by the Instrument
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0 (Source:
No data available for
Commissio
2014
n)
30
45
60
75
80
105
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 3: Number of expert meetings, workshops, seminars, conferences, publications, websites and online
consultations organised with the help of the Instrument. Broken down by relating to critical infrastructure
protection, and relating to crisis and risk management*
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
15
20
*Breakdown of this information, according to Annex II of the Regulation, will be provided in the annual implementation report.
All MS national programmes should be adopted by mid-2015 at latest. Many MS wait for the programme approval before launching
any activities.

Draft Budget 2016
Output
Budget line
Number
EUR million
projects aiming at strengthening Member States' capability to protect

critical infrastructure
18 02 01 02
30
13,8
projects aiming at securing links and effective coordination between

existing sector-specific early warning and crisis cooperation actors at
Union and national level
18 02 01 02
9,1
projects aiming at strengthening capacity of the Member States and the

Union to develop threat and risk assessments
18 02 01 02
6,4
Union projects aiming at enhancing the capacity of Member States and the
Union for managing effectively security-related risks and crisis
18 02 01 02
14
8,0
Total
37,3

Outputs
Total
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
projects aiming at strengthening Member F

States' capability to protect critical
infrastructure
P
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
210
projects aiming at securing links and F

effective coordination between existing
sector-specific early warning and crisis
cooperation actors at Union and national P
level
63
projects aiming at strengthening the capacity F

of the Member States and the Union to
develop threat and risk assessments
P
28
Union projects aiming at enhancing the P

capacity of Member States and the Union for
managing effectively security-related risks
F
and crisis
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
98
Programme Statement
DB2016

At the beginning of 2015, no national programme was adopted.
As a result, the number of projects to be implemented by Member States is very difficult to forecast. The total number of
projects is based on past experience gained with CIPS/ISEC. The distribution of the projects in the different categories
has been made on the basis of the draft national programmes already received.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Justice Programme
Lead DG: JUST
Associated DGs: HOME
1.
Legal Basis

Council of 17 December 2013 establishing a Justice Programme for the
period 2014 to 2020
2014
Total
2.
1,2
45,8
47,0
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
377,6

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2015
1,2
48,1
49,3
1,2
50,2
51,4
1,2
52,6
53,8
1,2
55,0
56,2
2020
1,2
57,5
58,7
1,2
60,0
61,2
Total
8,4
369,2
377,6
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
47,012 99,28 %
9,359 92,61 %
49,251 90,10 %
26,057
2,76 %

47,012 99,28 %
9,329 90,90 %
49,251 90,16 %
26,055
2,23 %
3.
EU added value
The Programme shall finance actions with European added value which contribute to the further development of a
European area of justice. To that end, the Commission shall ensure that the actions selected for funding are intended to
produce results with European added value.
The European added value of actions, including that of small-scale and national actions, shall be assessed in the light of
criteria such as their contribution to the consistent and coherent implementation of Union law and to wide
publicawareness about the rights deriving from it, their potential to develop mutual trust among Member States and to
improve cross-border cooperation, their transnational impact, their contribution to the elaboration and dissemination of
best practices or theirpotential to create practical tools and solutions that address cross-border or Union-wide challenges.

The share of early school leavers should be under 10% and at least 40% of the younger generation should have a tertiary
degree
Programme Statement
DB2016

Flagship
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
8,9
DB 2016
(EUR million)
6,6

Not applicable
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective: to contribute to the further development of a European area of justice based on mutual recognition
and mutual trust, in particular by promoting judicial cooperation in civil and criminal matters
Indicator 1: cumulative number of legal professionals receiving training (not only through the Programme) on EU
law or law of another Member State, including Civil Justice, Criminal Justice and Fundamental Rights
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
239 000
420 000
490 000
700 000
(Source: DG Justice)
Indicator 2: share of citizens that consider that it is easy to access civil justice in another Member State
Baseline
2010
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
14 %
(Source: Eurobarometers)
4.
2018
30 %
2019
Target 2020
50 %
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: to facilitate and support judicial cooperation in civil and criminal matters
Indicator 1: average time of the surrender procedure (time between the arrest and the decision on the surrender of
the person sought) under the European Arrest Warrant in cases where the person consents to the surrender
Milestones
Baseline 2005-2013
Target 2020*
2014
2015 2016
2017*
2018
2019
14-20 days1
(source: DG Justice from
national reports to Council)
the annual average

should
remain
stable, in the range
of 14 to 20 days
the annual average

should remain stable,
in the range of 14 to
20 days
*The range of the milestone and target is updated taking into account the evolution in 2013.
The average of the 9 yearly averages. Data are missing for some Member States and years as follows: 2005 - 2 MS (BE, DE); 2006 - 3 MS (BE,
DE, IT); 2007 - 4 MS (BE, BG, DK, IT); 2008 - 6 MS (BE, BG, IT, NL, PT UK); 2009 - 2 MS (BG, IT); 2010 - 5 MS (IE, IT, PT, NL and AT);
2011 - 9 MS (BE BG, EL, IT, HU, NL, AT, RO, FI,) 2012 - 9 MS (BG, EL, IT, LV, HU, NL, RO, SI, UK); 2013 6 MS (BG, EL, IT, LU, HU,
UK)
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: number of exchanges of information in the European Criminal Records Information System (ECRIS)
Baseline 2012
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
1 250 000
300 000
(source: DG Justice)
2018
Target 2020
2019
2 400 000
(actual figures)
3 500 000
The 2017 Milestone and the 2020 Target are updated taking into account the current situation. The number of active Member States,
the number of interconnected Member States and the volume has increased steadily since the start. In December 2014, there were 25
Member States active, 496 interconnections and more than 110 000 messages exchanged. Based on the steady expansion of the ECRIS
network, and the assumption that all 28 Member States are interconnected, the total volume of messages by 2020 should be around 3
500 000.

Draft Budget 2016
Number
EUR million
Output
Budget line
Analytical activities (e.g. studies, evaluations, collection of data and

statistics, etc)
33 03 02
1,5
Mutual learning, cooperation, awareness-raising and dissemination
33 03 02
44
12,0
Support to key actors
33 03 02
1,1
60
14,6
Total

Outputs
Total
2014*
Analytical activities (e.g. studies, evaluations, collection F

of data and statistics, etc)
P
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

9
10
11
11
11
69
42
44
46
48
50
52
322
55
Mutual learning, cooperation, awareness-raising and F

dissemination
P
40
*The 2014 produced outputs reflect only the current implementation. Implementation of the 2014 activities is still ongoing in 2015.
Full view of the produced outputs will be available in 2016.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 2: to support and promote judicial training, including language training on legal terminology,
with a view to fostering a common legal and judicial culture
Indicator 1: the number and percentage of members of the judiciary and judicial staff that participated in training
activities, staff exchanges, study visits, workshops and seminars funded by the Programme
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
0
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Milestones and Targets will be set based on experience from the first year implementation of
the Programme. The implementation of the 2014 activities is still ongoing. Milestones and
targets will be set in 2016.

Draft Budget 2016
Output
Budget line
Number
EUR million

statistics, etc)
33 03 01
Training activities
33 03 01
40
7,0
33 03 01
1,6
33 03 01
8,8
46
17,4
Total

Outputs
Total
2014*
Analytical activities (e.g. studies, evaluations, collection

28
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

1
10
36
40
39
40
42
43
268
24
Training activities
Mutual learning, cooperation, awareness-raising and

dissemination
*The 2014 produced outputs reflect only the current implementation. Implementation of the 2014 activities is still ongoing in 2015.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 3: to facilitate effective access to justice for all, including to promote and support the rights of
victims of crime, while respecting the rights of the defence
Indicator 1: Number of hits on the e-justice portal
Baseline
2012
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
630 000 2 320 100

(Source: DG Justice) (actual data)
2018
Target 2020
2019
3 000 000
5 000 000
Indicator 2: Number of Victim Support Organisations with national coverage (implementation of Directive
2012/29/EU)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2012
2014
2015 2016
2017
2018 2019
28 VSO (at least one per MS).
10
(Source:
DG Justice)
28 VSO at least one

VSO in each MS
fulfilling the quality
standards/indicators**
20 VSO
Actual data*
At least 20 of these VSO fulfilling

the quality standards/indicators**
*Source: FRA report on Victims of crime in the EU: the extent and nature of support for victims
** The indicators should be developed by the VSO and/or MS and should include inter alia an appropriate geographical coverage of
the country and a necessary training of the staff.
The milestones and target are updated taking into account the latest available information for 2014.

Draft Budget 2016
Number EUR million
Output
Budget line

statistics, etc)
33 03 01
0,8
33 03 01
44
12,9
33 03 01
2,1
56
15,8
Total

Outputs
Total
2014*


dissemination
38
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

9
10
10
10
62
41
44
47
50
53
56
329
32
Programme Statement
DB2016
* The 2014 produced outputs reflect only the current implementation. Implementation of the 2014 activities is still ongoing in 2015.
Specific Objective 4: to support initiatives in the field of drugs policy as regards judicial cooperation and crime
prevention aspects closely linked to the general objective of the Programme, insofar as they are not covered by the
Internal Security Fund or by the Health for Growth Programme
Indicator 1: number of new psychoactive substances assessed (including through testing, if necessary) to enable the
EU or the Member States to take appropriate action to protect consumers, depending on the type and level of risk
that they may pose when consumed by humans
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
68
85
95
Indicator 2: % of problem opioid users that are in drug treatment

Baseline
2011
2014
2015
2016
Milestones
2017
50 %
(Source: EMCDDA)
2018
Target 2020
2019
55 %
60 %

Draft Budget 2016
Output
Budget line
Number
EUR million

18 06 01
statistics, etc)
0,4
2,1
18 06 01
Total
2,5

Outputs
Total
2014*


dissemination
F 2
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

2
21
59
P 0
F 8
P 0
* The 2014 produced outputs reflect only the current implementation. Implementation of the 2014 activities is still ongoing in 2015.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Common indicators to the Programme

Indicator 1: the number of persons reached by awareness-raising activities funded by the Programme
Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
(01.01.2014) 0
Since the indicator refers to Milestones and targets will be based on the experience from the first year implementation of
the achievements of the the Programme. The implementation of the 2014 activities is still ongoing. Milestones and
Programme the baseline is
targets will be set in 2016
set to 0.
Indicator 2: the improvement in the level of knowledge of Union law and policies in the groups participating in
activities funded by the Programme compared to the entire target group
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
(01.01.2014) 0
Since the indicator refers to
Milestones and targets will be based on feedback received from the first finalised projects
the achievements of the
(foreseeably in 2017/2018 upon receipt of the first final reports from implemented projects).
set to 0.
Indicator 3: the number of cases, activities and outputs of cross-border cooperation, including cooperation by means
of information technology tools and procedures established at Union level
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
(01.01.2014) 0
set to 0.
Indicator 4: participants' assessment of the activities in which they participated and of their (expected) sustainability
Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
(01.01.2014) 0
set to 0.
Indicator 5: the geographical coverage of the activities funded by the Programme
Baseline
On 01.01.2014: 0 %
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
100% of the
participating
countries
2018
2019
Target 2020
100% of the
participating
countries
Programme Statement
DB2016
Rights, Equality and Citizenship programme (REC)

Lead DG: JUST
1.
Legal Basis

Council of 17 December 2013 establishing a Rights, Equality and
Citizenship Programme for the period 2014-2020
2014
Total
2.
1,1
54,2
55,3
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
439,5

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2015
1,1
56,3
57,4
1,1
58,9
60,0
1,1
61,5
62,6
1,1
64,3
65,4
2020
1,1
67,1
68,2
1,1
70,1
71,2
Total
7,7
432,3
440,0
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
55,334 99,31 %
3,706 102,61 %
57,447 88,57 %
28,840
3,18 %

55,280 99,21 %
3,691 71,04 %
57,391 89,32 %
28,812
2,75 %
3.
EU added value
The Programme shall finance actions with European added value. To that end, the Commission shall ensure that the
actions selected for funding are intended to produce results with European added value.
The European added value of actions, including that of small-scale and national actions, shall be assessed in the light of
criteria such as their contribution to the consistent and coherent implementation of Union law, and to wide public
awareness about the rights deriving from it, their potential to develop mutual trust among Member States and to improve
cross-border cooperation, their transnational impact, their contribution to the elaboration and dissemination of best
practices or their potential to contribute to the creation of minimum standards, practical tools and solutions that address
cross-border or Union-wide challenges.

The share of early school leavers should be under 10% and at least 40% of the younger generation should have a tertiary
degree
Programme Statement
DB2016

Flagship
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
0,2
0,2
0,9
1,3

Total
DB 2016
(EUR million)
0,2
0,2
0,9
1,3

Not applicable
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective: to contribute, to the further development of an area where equality and the rights of persons as
enshrined in the Treaty on European Union, in the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union, in the Charter of
Fundamental Rights of the European Union and in the international human rights conventions to which the Union has
acceded, are promoted, protected and effectively implemented.
Indicator 1: progress towards equal participation in the labour market: (a) female employment rate 20-64 age group
(b) employment rate of people with disabilities (c) the gender pay gap (d) the percentage of women among nonexecutive directors on boards of listed companies
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015 2016
2017
2018 2019
(a) 62,4 % (2012)
(a) 63,5% (actual data)
(a) 68 %
(a) 75 %(for both women
and men): Europe 2020
(b) 47,9% (2012) EU-SILC
(b) Not available
(b) 50 %
headline target; 71 % for
women
(c) 16,4% (2013)
(c) Not available
(c) 15 %
(b) 55 %
(d) 16,2 % (2011)
(d) 20,2% (actual data)
(d) 30 %
(c) 14 %
Source:
European Commission
(d) 40 %
Indicator 2: percentage of Europeans who consider themselves as well or very well informed of the rights they enjoy
as citizens of the Union
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2010
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
32 %
45 %
51 %
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: to promote the effective implementation of the principle of non -discrimination on grounds of
sex, racial or ethnic origin, religion or belief, disability, age or sexual orientation, and to respect the principle of nondiscrimination on the grounds provided for in Article 21 of the Charter
Indicator 1: share of persons aware of their rights if they fall victims of discrimination
Baseline
2012
2014
37 %
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
45 %
2018
2019
Target 2020
55 %
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: the number of Member States that set up structural co-ordination mechanisms with all stakeholders,
including Roma, on the implementation of the National Roma Integration Strategies
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
no
Member
States
(source: national reporting to DG Justice)
13
20*
(actual data)
28
*Due to the positive trend in setting up structural co-ordination mechanisms, the 2017 milestone of 14 Member States is updated to 20
Member States
Indicator 3: the number of applications and grants related to this specific objective
Baseline
2014(*)
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
Target 2020
2019
(01.01.2014) 0
Since the indicator refers Milestones and targets will be based on the experience from the first year implementation of
to the achievements of the the Programme (The implementation of the 2014 activities is still ongoing. Milestones and
targets will be set in 2016).
set to 0.
(*) Only partial information is available at the time being
Indicator 4: the level of funding requested by applicants and granted in relation to this specific objective
Baseline
2014(*)
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
Target 2020
2019
(01.01.2014) 0
Since the indicator refers Milestones and targets will be based on the experience from the first year implementation of
to the achievements of the the Programme (The implementation of the 2014 activities is still ongoing. Milestones and
targets will be set in 2016).
set to 0.

Draft Budget 2016
Number EUR million
Output
Budget line
1. Analytical activities (e.g. studies, evaluations, collection of data and

statistics, etc.)
33 02 02
2,1
2. Training activities
33 02 02
0,5
3. Mutual learning, cooperation, awareness-raising and dissemination
33 02 02
30
7,0
4. Support to key actors
33 02 02
4,8
Total
14,4
Programme Statement
DB2016

Outputs
Total
2014
1. Analytical activities (e.g. studies, evaluations,

collection of data and statistics, etc.)
28
10
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

3
23
10
33
30
33
36
39
42
241
10
10
10
10
66
3. Mutual learning, cooperation, awareness-raising and

dissemination
Specific Objective 2: to prevent and combat racism, xenophobia, homophobia and other forms of intolerance
Indicator 1: the percentage of unreported incidents of hate crime and hate speech
Baseline 2012
2014
57 % - 74 % of incidents of assault or threat

suffered by members of minority or migrant
groups in the EU were not reported to the
police by their victims (FRA)
75% - 90% of incidents of serious harassment
were not reported to the police (FRA)
2015
Milestones
2016 2017 2018 2019
Target 2020
50 % - 70 %
40 % - 60 %
70 % - 85 %
60 % - 75 %
Baseline
2014(*)
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
(01.01.2014) 0
set to 0.
Baseline
2014(*)
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
(01.01.2014) 0
set to 0.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
Budget line

statistics, etc.)
Total
Draft Budget 2016

Number EUR million
33 02 02
33 02 02
33 02 02
33 02 02
0
17
0
0
6,1
0
6,1

Outputs
Total
2014

2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

0
17
12
14
16
18
91
21

dissemination

Outputs
Total
2014

18
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

1
11
11
12
14
75
50

dissemination statistics, etc.)

The 2014 produced outputs reflect only the current implementation. Implementation of the 2014 activities is still ongoing
in 2015. Full view of the produced outputs will be available in 2016.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 3: to promote and protect the rights of persons with disabilities
Indicator 1: employment rate of people with disabilities
Baseline
2012
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
2018
2019
47,9 %
50 %
(Source: EU-SILC)
Baseline
2014(*)
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
Target 2020
55 %
2018
2019
Target 2020
(01.01.2014) 0
set to 0.
Baseline
2014(*)
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
2018
2019
Target 2020
(01.01.2014) 0
set to 0.
Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number EUR million
Budget line

statistics, etc.)
Total
33 02 02
1,1
33 02 02
33 02 02
33 02 02
1
6
8
0,3
2,0
2,6
6,0

Specific Objective 4: to promote equality between women and men and to advance gender mainstreaming
Indicator 1: female employment rate 20-64 age group
Baseline
2012
62,4 %
(Source: Eurostat)
2014
63,5 %
(actual data)
Milestones
2015 2016 2017
68 %
2018
Target 2020
2019
75 % (for both women and men): Europe

2020 headline target
71 % for women
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: the percentage of women among non-executive directors on boards of listed companies
Baseline
2012
2014
17 %
20,2 %
(actual data)
Indicator 3: the gender pay gap
Baseline
2013
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
30 %
2015
40 %
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
16,4 %
15 %
(Source: Eurostat)
Baseline
2014(*)
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
14 %
2019
Target 2020
(01.01.2014) 0
set to 0.
Baseline
2014(*)
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
(01.01.2014) 0
set to 0.
Draft Budget 2016
Number EUR million
Output
Budget line

statistics, etc.)
33 02 02
0,6
33 02 02
33 02 02
23
5,2
33 02 02
1,3
Total
7,1
Programme Statement
DB2016

Outputs
Total
2014

19
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

2
18
10
21
23
25
27
29
31
175
17

Specific Objective 5: to prevent and combat all forms of violence against children, young people and women, as well
as violence against other groups at risk, in particular groups at risk of violence in close relationships, and to protect
victims of such violence
Indicator 1: percentage of people that consider that domestic violence against women is unacceptable
Baseline
2010
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
Target 2020
2019
84 %
90 %
Baseline
2014(*)
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
100 %
Target 2020
2019
(01.01.2014) 0
set to 0.
Baseline
2014(*)
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
(01.01.2014) 0
set to 0.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Draft Budget 2016
Number
EUR
million
Output
Budget line

statistics, etc.)
33 02 01
0,2
33 02 01
33 02 01
45
13,0
33 02 01
1,3
Total
14,5

Outputs
Total
2014

40
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

0
44
45
52
56
60
64
361
35

Specific Objective 6: to promote and protect the rights of the child
Indicator 1: the percentage of children aware that they enjoy specific rights
Baseline
2009
2014
2015
2016
65 %
Milestones
2017
2018
2019
70 %
Target 2020
75 %
Baseline
2014(*)
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
(01.01.2014) 0
Milestones and targets will be based on the experience from the first year
Since the indicator refers to the
implementation of the Programme. The implementation of the 2014 activities is still
achievements of the Programme the
ongoing. Milestones and targets will be set in 2016.
baseline is set to 0.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Baseline
2014(*)
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
Target 2020
2019
(01.01.2014) 0
set to 0.
Draft Budget 2016
Number
EUR million
Output
Budget line
Analytical activities (e.g. studies, evaluations, collection of

data and statistics, etc.)
33 02 01
Training activities
33 02 01
33 02 01
15
3,8
33 02 01
0,5
Mutual learning,
dissemination
cooperation,
awareness-raising
and

Total
4,3

Outputs
Total
2014

of data and statistics, etc.)
10
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

0
28
12
15
14
14
16
16
97
20
Training activities

dissemination

Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 7: to contribute to ensuring the highest level of protection of privacy and personal data
Indicator 1: number of complaints received by data protection authorities from individuals relating to data
protection
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
68 569
(Sources: DG Justice)
55 000
60 000
Baseline
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
2018
Target 2020
2019
(01.01.2014) 0
set to 0.
Baseline
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
2018
Target 2020
2019
(01.01.2014) 0
achievements of the Programme
the baseline is set to 0.
Draft Budget 2016
Number
EUR million
Output
Budget line

statistics, etc.)
33 02 01
1,0
33 02 01
0,5
Total
1,5

Outputs
Total
2014

dissemination
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

3
29
29
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 8: to promote and enhance the exercise of rights deriving from citizenship of the Union
Indicator 1: awareness of the Citizenship of the Union and of the rights attached to it: (a) share of the population
that knows the meaning of Citizenship of the Union (b) share of the population considering themselves as well or
very well informed of the rights they enjoy as citizens of the Union
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
(a) 46 %
50 %
53 %
(b) 36 %
(source: Eurobarometers)
45 %
51 %
Indicator 2: awareness of the right to vote and to stand as candidate in European election in the Member State of
residence, without having the nationality of that Member State
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
72 %
76 %
80 %
Baseline
2014(*)
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
(01.01.2014) 0
set to 0.
Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
(01.01.2014) 0
set to 0.
Draft Budget 2016
Number
EUR million
Output
Budget line

statistics, etc.)
33 02 01
33 02 01
10
3,0
Total
3,0
Programme Statement
DB2016

Outputs
Total
2014
Analytical activities (e.g. studies, evaluations, collection F

P
F
Training activities
P
F
dissemination
P
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020
2
0
18
10
58
0
7
4

Specific Objective 9: to enable individuals in their capacity as consumers or entrepreneurs in the internal market to
enforce their rights deriving from Union law, having regard to the projects funded under the Consumer Programme
Indicator 1: the perception of consumers of being protected
Baseline
2011
2014
2015
71 %
60 %
(source: Eurobarometers) (actual data)
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
65 %
Target 2020
70 %
Indicator 2: consumer and retailer awareness of rights and obligations: (a): percentage of consumers who are
aware of their right to keep the unordered product sent to them together with an invoice (b): percentage of retailers
in the EU who know that including invoices with marketing material (for unordered products) is prohibited1
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2011
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
(a) 35 %
(a) 32 %
37 %
39 %
(b) <51 %
(b) 55 %
56 %
60 %
Indicator 3: level of consumer confidence in cross-border online shopping, as measured by the percentage of
consumers who feel confident purchasing via internet from retailers/service providers from another country2
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
36 %
39 %
45 %
50 %
Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
(01.01.2014) 0
1
2
This indicator has been changed to reflect questions that will be maintained in the future Eurobarometers.
This indicator has been changed to reflect questions that will be maintained in the future Eurobarometers.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Baseline
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
2018
Target 2020
2019
(01.01.2014) 0
Draft Budget 2016
Number
EUR million
Output
Budget line

statistics, etc.)
33 02 01
2,0
33 02 01
Total
2,0

Outputs
Total
2014
F
Mutual learning, cooperation, awareness-raising and F

dissemination
P

2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

9
46
40

Common indicators to the Programme

Indicator 1: the number and percentage of persons in a target group reached by the awareness-raising activities
funded by the Programme
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
(01.01.2014) 0
Indicator 2: the number of stakeholders participating in, inter alia, training activities, exchanges, study visits,
workshops and seminars funded by the Programme
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
(01.01.2014) 0
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 3: the improvement in the level of knowledge of Union law and policies and, where applicable, of rights,
values and principles underpinning the Union, in the groups participating in activities funded by the Programme
compared to with the entire target group
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
(01.01.2014) 0
set to 0.
Indicator 4: the number of cases, activities and outputs of cross-border cooperation
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
(01.01.2014) 0
set to 0.
Indicator 5: participants' assessment of the activities in which they participated and of their (expected) sustainability
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
(01.01.2014) 0
set to 0.
Indicator 6: the geographical coverage of the activities funded by the Programme
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
On 01.01.2014: 0 %
100 % of the
participating
countries
100 % of the
participating
countries
Programme Statement
DB2016
Union Civil Protection Mechanism (UCPM)

Lead DG: ECHO
1.
Legal Basis
Decision No 1313/2013/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council

of 17 December 2013 on a Union Civil Protection Mechanism
2014
Total
2.
28,2
28,2
2015
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
223,8

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
29,3
29,3
30,6
30,6
31,9
31,9
33,2
33,2
2020
34,6
34,6
36,0
36,0
Total
223,8
223,8
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
29,216
101,75 %
11,822 103,59 %
30,268 11,19 %
19,158
5,74 %
Authorised
appropriation
revenue
28,369
98,75 %
11,403 100,00 %
29,408
18,615
2,96 %
8,25 %
3.
EU added value
Based on the new Treaty Article 196 for civil protection policy, the aim of the Mechanism is to support, coordinate and
supplement the actions of the Member States in the field of civil protection with a view to improving the effectiveness of
systems for preventing, preparing for and responding to natural and man-made disasters.
The EU's added value comes in the form of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
reducing the loss of human life, environmental, economic and material damage caused by disasters through a
comprehensive approach covering disaster prevention, preparedness and response;
an improved understanding in Member States of disaster risks through cooperation on risk assessment and
planning, and the gradual development of a European culture of disaster prevention;
an improved preparedness for disasters through training, exercises, exchange of best practices and similar
activities;
improved coordination of the response to disaster by bringing together and facilitating Member States' offers of
assistance;
increased cost-effectiveness through the pooling of assistance, the sharing of transport capacities, the
identification of complementarities and the avoidance of duplication;
a coherent predictable and more visible response to disasters through the set-up of a European Response
Capacity ready to help everywhere in the EU and in third countries when needed.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Not applicable
Not applicable
Budget 2015
(EUR Million)
DB 2016
(EUR Million)
7,5
6,0
To achieve a high level of protection against disasters by preventing or reducing

their effects and by fostering a culture of prevention
The figure for 2015 and 2016 linked to climate represents around 20% of the total budget including prevention projects, studies,
preparedness projects, peer reviews and support for early warning. 2015 budget initial estimate was too high since it was obviously
made well before we had an estimated breakdown for the work programme. This is nevertheless still within the range (20 +/- 8) set in
the legislation for the prevention share of the overall budget.

Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: The Union Civil Protection Mechanism shall aim to strengthen the cooperation between the
Union and the Member States and to facilitate coordination in the field of civil protection in order to improve the
effectiveness of systems for preventing, preparing for and responding to natural and man-made disasters.
Indicator 1: Economic damage caused by natural disasters (Source: As recorded in the EM-DAT database)
Baseline
Milestones
Target 2020
Annual average 2010-2012
Annual average 2014 2019* (USD
(USD Billion)
(USD Billion)
Billion)
16
13
13
* Estimate based on the average of annual economic damage of the past 10 years
The 2014 result was at USD 4 billion.
A very important part of the result of this indicator is depending of external factors that are not under the
Commission's control. Nevertheless, ECHO's impact will be reviewed in 2016 during the interim evaluation of the
Union Civil Protection Mechanism.
Following 2015 adoption of the Sendai Framework for Disaster Risk Reduction - including a target on reducing economic loss from
disasters in relation to Global GDP the above mentioned target will be revised to be in line with the Sendai methodology.
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: To achieve a high level of protection against disasters by preventing or reducing their effects by
fostering a culture of prevention and by improving cooperation between the civil protection and other relevant services.
Indicator 1: Number of Member States that have made available to the Commission a summary of their risk
assessments. (Source: Annual report for the EP on the implementation of the new union Civil Protection Mechanism
Decision)
Milestones
Baseline
Target
2013
2020
Result 2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
14
17
21
25
28
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: Number of Member States that have made available to the Commission an assessment of their risk
management as referred to in Article 6 of the Decision.
Milestones
Baseline
Target
2013
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
0
0
0
0
28
28
28
Indicator 3: Number of projects financed for prevention within the Union
Baseline
2013
7
2014
10
(result: 15*)
2015
10
Milestones
2016
2017
12
13
2018
2019
Target
2020
14
15
15
*In 2014, it was possible to co-finance more prevention projects than estimated 10 (15 projects financed in total), as additional funds were made
available through the transfer from other activities and the call for proposals for prevention projects provided a sufficient number of good quality
projects that fulfilled relevant criteria.

Output
Budget line
Grant agreements
Number of contracts
Total
23 03 01 01
23 03 01 01
Outputs
Grant agreements
Number of contracts
F
P
F
P
Number
Draft Budget 2016

EUR million
10-12
1-2
3,0
2,6
5,6

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
10
10
11
11
11
12
12
15
2
3
6
6
6
6
7
2
Total
73
36
Specific Objective 2: To enhance preparedness at Member State and Union level to respond to disasters.
Indicator 1: Number of response capacities included in the voluntary pool in relation to the capacity goals
Baseline
2013
0
2014
Result: 3
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
15
2018
30
2019
Target
2020
50
Regarding the result of the above indicator, the registration of assets to the voluntary pool as well as of modules and
other response capacities in CECIS is dependent on Member States. In particular, the voluntary pool of assets is a new
element established by the recently adopted Civil Protection legislation. Registration of assets to the voluntary pool has
only been possible as from October 2014 after the adoption of Implementing Rules to the new Civil Protection
legislation.
Indicator 2: Number of standard response units (modules) registered in the EU's Common Emergency
Communication and Information System (CECIS) (Source: Annual report for the EP on the implementation of the
new union Civil Protection Mechanism Decision)
Milestones
Baseline
Target
2013
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
160
150
160
175
180
(result:160)
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 3: Number of projects financed for preparedness

Target
2020
Milestones
Baseline
2011
2014
10
(result: 13*)
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
10
12
13
14
15
15
*A larger number of grant agreements was signed in 2014, caused by good quality projects that could be co-financed through transfer from other
actions.

Output
Grant agreements and contracts
Number of administrative arrangements
Total
Outputs
Grant agreements and
contracts
Number of administrative
arrangements
F
P
F
P
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
23 03 01 01
23 03 01 01
26-28
5
21,4
2,4
23,8

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
24
26
28
30
30
32
32
28
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
4
Total
204
33
Specific Objective 3: To facilitate rapid and efficient response in the event of disasters or imminent disasters.
Indicator 1: Average speed of interventions under the EU Civil Protection Mechanism (from the acceptance of the
offer to deployment). (Source: Annual report for the EP on the implementation of the new union Civil Protection
Mechanism Decision)
Milestones
Baseline
2013
Target 2020
2014
36 hours 24 hours
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
18 hours
12 hours
Quantitative response indicators will depend entirely on the number of future disasters, which are unpredictable. This is
reflected in the fact that a separate implementing decision on disaster response was adopted (C(2013) 9085 final) which
contains no indicators: Commission Implementing Decision of 18.12.2013 on financing emergency response actions
under the Union Civil Protection Mechanism in 2014 from the general budget of the European Union.
Output
Number of contracts
Grant agreement / service contract
Total
Budget line
23 03 02 01
23 03 02 01
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
1
2
0,3
0,9
1,2
Programme Statement
Outputs
Number of contracts
Grant agreement / service
contract
F
P
F
P

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
5*
DB2016
Total
7
14
* Predictability of transport grants is very difficult to assess since depending on occurrence of disasters. In 2014, there were a higher number of grants
than foreseen, mainly due to forest fire season (forest fires in Greece and Sweden).
Specific Objective 4: To increase public awareness and preparedness for disasters.

Indicator: The level of awareness of Union citizens of the risks in their region.
In 2015, a Eurobarometer has been launched, in cooperation with DG COM and external contractor. The results should
be available in April-May 2015. The survey is being conducted in all 28 Member States.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Europe for Citizens

Lead DG: HOME
1.
Legal Basis
Council Regulation (EU) No 390/2014 of 14 April 2014 establishing the

Europe for Citizens programme for the period 2014-2020
2014
Executive Agency
Total
2.
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
185,5

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2015
0,2
23,3
2,1
25,6
Period of
application
2014 - 2020
0,2
21,9
2,2
24,2
0,2
23,0
2,2
25,3
0,2
24,1
2,2
26,4
0,2
25,2
2,2
27,6
2020
0,2
26,3
2,2
28,7
0,2
27,3
2,3
29,8
Total
1,2
171,0
15,5
187,7
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
26,097 100,63 %
15,531 100,35 %
24,907 40,98 %
14,271
35,89 %

25,941 100,58 %
15,317 99,26 %
24,751 40,98 %
14,110
35,61 %
3.
EU added value
The Union added value of the proposed "Europe for Citizens" Programme can be demonstrated at the level of the
individual actions of the new Programme:
In the case of "European remembrance" (strand 1), the programme supports activities that encouragereflection on
European cultural diversity and on common values in the broadest sense. Funds may be made available for initiatives to
reflect on the causes oftotalitarian regimes in Europe's modern history and to commemorate the victims of their crimes.
This strand also encompasses activities concerning other defining moments and reference points in recent European
history. In particular, it gives preference to actions which encourage tolerance, mutual understanding, intercultural
dialogue and reconciliationas a means of moving beyond the past and building the future, in particular with a view to
reaching the younger generation.
In the case of "Democratic engagement and civic participation" (strand 2), the programme supports activities that cover
civic participation in the broadest sense, and focuses in particular on structuring methods to ensure that funded activities
have a lasting effect. It gives preference to initiatives and projects with a link to the Union political agenda. This strand
may also cover projects and initiatives that develop opportunities for mutual understanding, intercultural dialogue,
solidarity, societal engagement and volunteering at Union level.The aim is to increase the democratic participation of
young people and the participation of women in political and economic decision-making.
In the case of "Valorisation", this covers horizontal dimension of the programme as a whole. It focuses on the analysis,
dissemination, communication and valorisation of the project results from the above-mentioned two strands. Common
Programme Statement
DB2016
tools are needed to collect best practices and ideas about how to strengthen remembrance, European citizenship and civic
participation and facilitate the transnational exchange.
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective: to contribute to citizens' understanding of the Union, its history and diversity, to foster European
citizenship and to improve conditions for civic and democratic participation at Union level
Indicator 1: Percentage of EU citizens feeling European
Baseline
Milestones
2015 2016
2014
59 % of EU citizens now feel

60% (EB82 Autumn 2014)
European (EB80 Autumn 2013)
4.
2017
2018 2019
Stable at 59 %
Target 2020
Stable at 59 %
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: to raise awareness of remembrance, the common history and values of the Union and the Union's
aim, namely to promote peace, the values of the Union and the well-being of its peoples, by stimulating debate,
reflection and the development of networks
Indicator 1: the number of participants who are directly involved
Baseline
2014
Baseline based on 2013

survey:
100 000
2015
2016
100
000
Milestones
2017
2018
2019
100 000
Target
2020
100 000
Indicator 2: the number of persons indirectly reached by the Programme

Baseline
2014 2015
Baseline based on 2013
165
survey: 150 000
000
Indicator 3: the number of projects
2016
Milestones
2017
20 % increase:
180 000
2018
2019
Target
2020
35 % increase:
202 500
Milestones
Target
2020
2014 2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Baseline 2013: 31
36
48
55
Indicator 4: the quality of the project applications and the degree to which the results of selected projects can be
further used, transferred
Milestones
Target
Baseline
2020
2014 2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Baseline
2013 lowest score obtained

by a retained project: 80
84,5
Baseline*1,02:81,6
Baseline*1,02:
83,2
Number
of
organised: 50
Baseline*1,7: 85
Baseline*1,9: 95
events 84
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 5: Percentage of first time applicants

Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2017
2016
2013 percentage of firsttime applicants to the 43 %

programme: 40 %
2018
Target 2020
2019
-5 %<40 %<+5 %
-5 %<40 %<+5 %

Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Budget line
Structural support -Framework partnerships (4 years)
18 04 01
1,4
Structural support Framework partnerships (3 years)
18 04 01
Remembrance projects
18 04 01
45
3,4
Total
4,8

Outputs
Total
2014
Structural
support
partnerships (4 years)
Structural
support
partnerships (3 years)
Framework
Framework
2015
65
36
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
29
24
42
45
48
49
52
55
356
Remembrance projects

The number of outputs foreseen from 2015 to 2020 has been revised in order to take into account the revised
average/project delivered in 2014 (1st year of the programme).
Specific Objective 2: to encourage the democratic and civic participation of citizens at Union level, by developing
citizens' understanding of the Union policy making-process and promoting opportunities for societal and intercultural
engagement and volunteering at Union level
Indicator 1: the number of participants who are directly involved
Baseline
Baseline based on
survey: 1 000 000
2014
2013
1 000 000
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
1 000 000
2018
2019
Target 2020
1 000 000
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: the number of persons indirectly reached by the Programme

Baseline
2014
2015
Baseline based on 2013 survey

1 100 000
1 000 000
Indicator 3: the number of participating organisations
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
20 % increase:
1 200 000
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
Baseline*1,4:
Baseline 2013: 1 000
1 100
1 400
Indicator 4: the perception of the Union and its institutions by the beneficiaries
Baseline
Baseline
In 2012, 77 % feel more
European as a result of their
participation in the "Europe
for Citizens" programme.
2014
2015
2014
2015
77 %
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
35 % increase:
1 350 000
2019
2019
stable at 77 %
Target
2020
Baseline*1,7:
1 700
Target
2020
stable at 77 %
Indicator 5: the quality of project applications

Baseline
2013 lowest score obtained by
a retained project: 71
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Baseline*1,02:
72,4
53
Target
2020
Baseline*1,02:
73,9
Indicator 6: the percentage of first time applicants

Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
2013 percentage of first-time

-5 %<40 %<+5
applicants to the programme
40 %
%
40 %
Indicator 7: the number of transnational partnerships including different types of stakeholders
Baseline
2014
2015
2013 average number of types

1,6
stakeholders: 1,3
Indicator 8: the number of networks of twinned towns
Baseline
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
At least 2 types of
stakeholders
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
-5 %<40 %<+5 %
Target 2020
At least 2 types of
stakeholders
2018
2019
Target 2020
Baseline 2013: 41
35
49
56
Indicator 9: the number and quality of policy initiatives following-up on activities supported by the Programme at the
local or European level
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018 2019
0
0
2
2
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 10: the geographical coverage of the activities1

Baseline
Milestones
2015
2016 2017
2014
2018 2019
Target 2020
Baseline 2013: number of Member States with

appropriate national coverage (NC):
- submitting as a lead partner: 13
16
19
23
- selected as a lead partner: 12
15
17
20
- submitting as a lead partner orco-partner: 18
20
24
26
- selected as a lead partner or co-partner: 15
17
19
22

Output
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Citizens meetings
18 04 01
338
4,3
Networks TT
18 04 01
46
4,2
Civil society projects
18 04 01
36
3,1
18 04 01
29
5,5
Structural support Framework partenerships (3 years)
18 04 01
Peer reviews
18 04 01
0,2
Studies and communication services
18 04 01
Support structures in the Members states
18 04 01
33
0,9
Total
18,2

Outputs
Total
2014
F
430
252
103
35
39
29
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

312
338
363
373
395
415 2 626
43
46
49
50
54
56
401
33
36
39
40
43
45
275
Citizens' meetings
Networks TT
Civil society projects
Geographical coverage at EU level = number of Member States for which 90 % < NC < 110% ;NC= National coverage = % of projects
submitted(or selected) per member State as a lead partner (or co-partner) / % of its population in the total population of the EU.
Programme Statement
26
29
33
25
DB2016
29
29
29
29
142
32
32
32
96
14
33
33
33
33
33
33
231
Structural support Frameworkpartnerships (3 years)
Peer reviews
Studies and communication services
Support structures in the Members States

The change under indicator 5 is due to the specific context of the previous year. The late adoption of the programme,
then the necessary adjustments in the selection calendar, resulted in the global decrease of the number of applications
(e.g. thus last year for the 1st phase of TT we received 418 applications (against 747 applications for the 1st phase in 2013
and today we have 802 projects on the tables). Considering the budget to be consumed in 2014 and the number of
applications received, it was decided, as an exception, to finance some projects having a lower score than initially
targeted.
The number of outputs foreseen from 2015 to 2020 has been revised in order to take into account the revised
average/project delivered in 2014 (1st year of the programme) against the average/project foreseen.
N.B.: The valorisation action (peer reviews, studies and communication services, and support structures in the Member
States) is defined for the programme overall and be applicable to both objectives.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Food and Feed

Lead DG: SANTE
1.
Legal Basis

15 May 2014 laying down provisions for the management of expenditure
relating to the food chain, animal health and animal welfare, and relating to plant
health and plant reproductive material, amending Council Directives 98/56/EC,
2000/29/EC and 2008/90/EC, Regulations (EC) No 178/2002, (EC) No
882/2004 and (EC) No 396/2005 of the European Parliament and of the Council,
Directive 2009/128/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council and
Regulation (EC) No 1107/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council
and repealing Council Decisions 66/399/EEC, 76/894/EEC and 2009/470/EC
2014
Executive Agency
Total
2.
1,5
250,7
1,2
253,4
Period of
application
Reference
Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
1 891,9

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2015
1,5
255,9
1,2
258,5
1,5
261,4
1,2
264,1
1,5
267,8
0,9
270,2
1,5
274,3
0,9
276,7
2020
1,5
280,3
0,9
282,7
Total
1,5
10,5
283,9 1 874,4
0,9
7,1
286,3 1 891,9
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
256,968 98,52 %
26,474 100,94 % 265,843 76,60 % 189,785
5,18 %

26,428 95,92 % 265,843 76,60 % 189,770
5,15 %
3.
EU added value
Outbreaks of serious animal and plant diseases may cause major direct losses to agriculture and potentially enormous
indirect losses to the European economy. Such problems can rapidly spread between Member States and involve the
entire EU market. The recent occurrence of Bluetongue in much of Europe, which caused substantial losses, is an
important reminder of the unpredictability and severity of animal disease outbreaks. In the plant health area, the pine
wood nematode exemplifies the need to protect the EU plant and forest resources against highly damaging pests.
The EU intervention is needed in order to minimise the impact on human, animal and plant health and markets and to
reduce risks all along the food chain through preventive actions and the management of crises.
An EU contribution is made towards national programmes aimed at improving animal health or eradicating those
diseases that affect people or whose presence can cause major social, economic and political impacts. Eradication,
Programme Statement
DB2016
control and surveillance programmes are necessary to reduce this risk for public and/or animal health to an acceptable
level. EU wide surveillance is also carried out for diseases such as avian influenza and transmissible spongiform
encephalopathies (TSE). Moreover, co-financing is also envisaged towards programmes for diseases which risk to be
introduced and or reintroduced in the EU from third countries and that have impact on animal health, taking into
consideration their potential spread and morbidity and mortality rates in the animal population (e.g. African swine fever).
An EU contribution is also made to national survey programmes for organisms harmful to plants, ensuring early
detection and eradication of outbreaks. These organisms impact agricultural crops, forests and public and private green.
They have a wider impact on industry in general because of the possible impact of some plant harmful organisms on
wood and wood packaging material (e.g. pallets). Programmes targeting the outermost regions of Member States are also
financed.
Financial support for emergency measures (emergency fund) is available to assist Member States in dealing with animal
disease and plant pest outbreaks and vaccine banks have been established and are kept stocked to maintain a supply of
vaccines for emergency use.
In addition a network of European Union Reference Laboratories is funded to ensure better preparedness and to provide
scientific support at EU level to the Commission and the Member States. This contributes to the harmonisation of the
diagnostic practices at EU level. The action also comprises a training programme (BTSF Better Training for Safer Food
programme) for staff of competent authorities, both within and outside the EU to ensure the proper implementation of EU
standards.
Not applicable
Not applicable
Budget 2015
(EUR Million)
DB 2016
(EUR Million)
The appearance and spread of bluetongue all over the EU is very much
climate linked (specific objective 2)
18,5
20
Blue Tongue (BT) is an insect-borne, viral disease of ruminants caused by the several serotypes of Bluetongue virus
(BTV) transmitted by Culicodes insects. The occurrence of this kind of disease is unpredictable and originates usually
from infected third countries bordering the EU. The evolution of BT in the south-east part of the EU has deserved a
particular attention from the summer 2014 when BTV-4 outbreaks were notified by Greece, Bulgaria and Romania. A
first outbreak of BTV serotype 4 (BTV-4) occurred in Greece on 30/05/2014, with 3143 outbreaks notified at
31/12/2014. Bulgaria faced BT4 on 11/07/2014, with 2324 outbreaks notified at the end 2014, and BTV4 occurred in
Romania on 22/08/2014 with 1884 outbreaks notified at the end 2014. Since the outbreak of BTV-4 in Greece, BT has
been discussed in the PAFF regulatory Committee 8 times, the Commission has provided urgent technical support to the
MSs by dispatching the CVET (Community Veterinary Emergency Team) in 4 MS (BG, RO, HR and SI). The CVET
highlighted the importance of a vaccination strategy in the concerned Member States and strongly recommended to
implement vaccination as soon as possible in preparation of the next vector season. Some MSs have decided to vaccinate
their herds against BTV and amended consequently their veterinary programmes for 2015. The Commission has
consequently increased its financial support to 18.5 M in 2015 in order to co-finance the main planned measures
foreseen in those programmes, and in particular the vaccination campaign against bluetongue in the affected MSs and in
those at risk.
Not applicable
Programme Statement
DB2016
General objectives
General Objective: contributing to a high level of health for humans, animals and plants along the food chain and in
related areas, by preventing and eradicating diseases and pests and by ensuring a high level of protection for consumers
and the environment, while enhancing the competitiveness of the Union food and feed industry and favouring the
creation of jobs
Indicator 1: Incidence of main food-borne disease in the EU (BSE and Salmonella)
Baseline
2012
2014
2015
2016
Milestones
2017
2018
BSE:
18
BSE
cases
(including 11 classical BSE
cases)
10 cases (less than

5 classical BSE
cases)
Salmonella:
90
000
confirmed cases of human
salmonellosis
67 000 confirmed
cases of human
salmonellosis
4.
2019
Target 2020
Less than 5 classical BSE
cases per annum
60 000 cases; continuous

reduction of 3 to 5 % per
year - no eradication
possible
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: to contribute to a high level of safety of food and food production systems and of other products
which may affect the safety of food, while improving the sustainability of food production
Indicator 1: the reduction in the number of cases of diseases in humans in the Union which are linked to food safety
or zoonoses
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014 2015 2016 2017
2018
2019
67 000 confirmed cases
60 000 cases; continuous
2012: 90 000 confirmed
of human salmonellosis
reduction of 3 to 5% per
cases
of
human
year / no eradication
salmonellosis
possible
Source: EFSA and ECDC1
Specific Objective 2: to contribute to achieving a higher animal health status for the Union and to support the
improvement of the welfare of animals
Indicator 1: the increase in the number of Member States or their regions which are free from animal diseases in
respect of which a financial contribution is granted
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014 2015 2016
2017
2018 2019
Bovine brucellosis: 16 MS and 23
19 MS and 30 regions
Eradication except
regions officially free (2013)
officially free
1 MS
Bovine tuberculosis: 15 MS and 14
regions officially free (2013)
officially free
Eradication except
2 MS
Melitensis: 19 MS and 18 regions

officially free (2013)
Source: annual report submitted by MS
to the Commission/ ADNS notification
DG SANTE
officially free
Eradication except
1 MS and 5 regions
"The European Union Summary Report on Trends and Sources of Zoonoses, Zoonotic Agents and Food-borne Outbreaks in 2012" by European
Food Safety Authority (EFSA) and European Centre for Disease Prevention and Control (ECDC).
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: an overall reduction of disease parameters such as incidence, prevalence and number of outbreaks
Baseline*
2014 2015
2016
Bluetongue: 6196 outbreaks in

2013
Classical swine fever: 0
outbreaks in 2013 in domestic
pigs (42 in wild boar)
African swine fever: 109
outbreaks in domestic pigs and
67 in wild boar in 2013
Swine vesicular disease: 25
outbreaks in domestic pigs in
2013
Milestones
2017
Eradication subject
to vector, climate
change,
and
vaccination
0 outbreaks
domestic pigs
2018
in
Target 2020
2019
Eradication subject to
vector, climate change,
and vaccination
0 outbreaks in domestic
pigs
10 outbreaks in
domestic pigs and
2 in wild boar
pigs
0 outbreaks
domestic pigs
pigs
in
BSE: 7 positive animals in

2013
Less
than
5
positive animals
Less than 5 positive

animals (long incubation
period)
Scrapie (sheep and goats) 17%

prevalence in 2013.
14% of prevalence
8% of prevalence
200 outbreaks in
wild animals
0 outbreaks of
HPAI in domestic
animals2
100 outbreaks in wild

animals
Rabies: 679 outbreak in wild

animals in 2013
Avian influenza: no outbreak in
poultry and wild birds of HPAI
0 outbreaks of HPAI in
domestic animals
*For all the data above, source of information is the annual report submitted by MS to Commission/ ADNS notification DG SANTE.
Output
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Number EUR million
Bovine brucellosis
170401
10,0
Bovine tuberculosis
170401
60,0
Ovine/caprine brucellosis
170401
16,0
Bluetongue
170401
15
20,0
Salmonella
170401
24
19,0
Swine diseases
170401
13
6,0
Avian influenza
170401
28
2,0
TSE,BSE and scrapie
170401
28
18,0
Rabies
170401
10
26,0
133
177,0
Otherveterinary
vaccines/antigens
measures,
animal
welfare
and
Total
Subject to changes in the wild birds epidemiological situation
Programme Statement
DB2016

Outputs
Total
2014
number of bovine brucellosis eradication

programmes
number of bovine tuberculosis
eradication programmes
number of ovine/caprine brucellosis

eradication programmes
number of bluetongue
eradication/monitoring programmes
number of salmonella control

programmes
number of swine disease (CSF, ASF and

SVD) control programmes
number of avian influenza survey

pogrammes
number of TSE monitoring and

BSE/scrapie eradication programmes
number of rabies eradication

programmes
18
18
25
25
10
10
28
28
28
28
13
13
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
28
35
36
15
15
12
12
10
10
92
24
24
24
24
24
24
169
14
13
10
10
15
77
26
28
28
28
28
28
194
28
28
20
20
20
18
162
13
10
10
10
10
10
76
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 3: to contribute to the timely detection of pests and their eradication where those pests have entered
the Union
Indicator 1: the coverage of the Union territory by surveys for pests, in particular for pests not known to occur in the
Union territory and pests considered to be most dangerous for the Union territory
Milestones
Target
Baseline
2020
2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Percentage of EU territory covered
by surveys for pests, in particular
for pests not known to occur in the
Union territory3:
5% coverage
Percentage of EU territory covered
by surveys for pests considered to
be most dangerous4:
100% coverage
10%
50%
60%
70%
80%
90%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
Source: DG SANTE
The 10% figure for 2014 for the percentage of EU territory covered by survey for pests, in particular for pests not known to occur in
the Union territory, is an expected one as there is not yet information available for 2014.
The 100% figure for 2014 for the percentage of EU territory covered by surveys for pests considered to be most dangerous is an actual
one.
Indicator 2: the time and success rate for the eradication of those pests
Milestones
Baseline
2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
Time to eradicate pests not known to occur in
8 days
8 days
6 days
4 days
the Union, number of days between finding
and notification: 10 days
Success rate in eradicating pests not known to
occur in the Union: at this stage it is not
measurable
60 %
2018
2019
3 days
Target
2020
3 days
3 days
95 %
95 %
Source: DG SANTE
8 days is the actual figure for the number of days between finding and notification for pests not known to occur in the Union for 2014.

Output
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Survey programmes (Art.20)
170402
20
13,8
Outhermost regions (Art.25)
170402
0,2
23
14,0
Total
3
4
Listed as such in Annexes IAI and IIAI of Council Directive 2000/29.

Pests covered by emergency measures under Directive 2000/29/EC; to be replaced by priority pests in future.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Outputs
Total
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
17
20
20
24
27
31
144
21
Survey programmes (Art.20)
Outermost regions (Art.25)

There were no outputs produced for the Survey programs in 2014 (0 figure) as there were no approved survey programs
for 2014 due to the late adoption of Regulation (EU) No 652/2014.
There was 1 Outermost Regions program carried out in 2014.
Specific Objective 4: to contribute to improving the effectiveness, efficiency and reliability of official controls and
other activities carried out with a view to the effective implementation of and compliance with the Union rules
Indicator 1: a favourable trend in the results of controls in particular areas of concern carried out and reported on
by Commission experts in the Member States
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015 2016
2017
2018
2019
2013:
Percentage
of
FVO
recommendations
following
74 % of all
audits
that
MS
have recommendations
95 % of all
satisfactorily addressed with
from the
recommendations
corrective action: 60% of reporting years
addressed
recommendations
from
addressed
reporting cycles 2010-2012
74 % figure for 2014 is an actual one.

Output
Laboratories
BTSF
national experts FVO
Computerised systems + IT
Communication
Data collection
Studies and evaluations
Total
Budget line
170403
170403
170403
170403
170403
170403
170403
Draft Budget 2016

Number EUR million
43
170
125
7
8
6
10
307
16,0
16,0
0,5
11,2
1,4
2,3
3,0
50,4
Programme Statement
DB2016

Outputs
Total
2014
45
44
95
180
125
115
15
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
43
43
43
50
50
50
324
170
170
175
175
180
180
770
125
125
125
125
125
125
875
49
10
10
10
10
64
49
10
10
10
12
12
13
74
Laboratories and centres
BTSF
National experts FVO
Computerised systems
Communication
Data collection
Studies andevaluations

BTSF outputs represent number of training workshops organized for EU MS in a given year. Program developments and
actual deliverables for 2014 indicate that the initial number of outputs was underestimated; hence, we have revised the
number of planned outputs for the upcoming years accordingly.

Emergency measures related to animal and plant health
Output
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Animal diseases
170404
10
10,0
Plant pests
170404
10
10,0
20
20,0
Total
Programme Statement
DB2016
Union action in the field of health (Health Programme)

Lead DG: SANTE
1.
Legal Basis

Council of 11 March 2014 on the establishment of a third Programme for
the Union's action in the field of health (2014-2020) and repealing
Decision No 1350/2007/EC
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
449,4

2014
Executive Agency
Total
2.
2015
DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Total
1,5
1,5
1,5
1,5
1,5
1,5
1,5
10,5
52,9
54,0
56,5
59,0
60,8
62,6
64,0
409,7
4,2
4,2
4,2
4,0
4,1
4,2
4,2
29,2
58,6
59,8
62,2
64,5
66,4
68,3
69,7
449,4
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
60,749 103,38 %
8,977 103,26 %
61,696
9,45 %
34,269
21,44 %

58,982 100,37 %
8,499 86,89 %
59,936
8,65 %
33,304
17,37 %
3.
EU added value
As stated in Article 168 of the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union, EU action must complement national
policies and encourage cooperation between Member States. The programme should contribute only where Member
States can not act individually or where coordination is the best way to move forward.
The programme puts forward actions in areas where there is evidence of EU added-value on the basis of the following
criteria: fostering best practice exchange between Member States; supporting networks for knowledge sharing or mutual
learning; addressing cross-border threats to reduce risks and mitigate their consequences; addressing certain issues
relating to the internal market where the EU has substantial legitimacy to ensure high-quality solutions across Member
States; unlocking the potential of innovation in health; actions that could lead to a system for benchmarking; improving
economies of scale by avoiding waste due to duplication and optimising the use of financial resources.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Flagship
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
Innovation Union
24,6
DB 2016
(EUR million)
15,8
19,0
6,8
11,5
53,1
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
DB 2016
(EUR million)
0,5
0,8
24,6
Total
Identify and develop coherent approaches and promote their
implementation for better preparedness and coordination in health
emergencies.
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective: to complement, support and add value to the policies of the Member States to improve the health of
Union citizens and reduce health inequalities by promoting health, encouraging innovation in health, increasing the
sustainability of health systems and protecting Union citizens from serious cross- border health threats
Indicator 1: Number of Healthy Life Years at birth
Baseline 2010
(data 2012)
2014
Males: 61,9 (61,5)
Data to be released
Females: 62,7 (62,1) at the end of April
Source: Eurostat
2016
4.
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
Increase
by 2 years
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: identify, disseminate and promote the uptake of evidence-based and good practices for costeffective health promotion and disease prevention measures by addressing in particular the key lifestyle related risk
factors with a focus on the Union added value
Indicator 1: number of Member States involved in health promotion and disease prevention, using evidence-based
and good practices through measures and actions taken at the appropriate level in Member States
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
21 MS (actual data)
MS having a national initiative on (16 MS were expected)
reduction of saturated fat.
18 MS
20 MS
22 MS
24 MS
25 MS
28 MS
Baseline 2012: 12.

MS in which the European
accreditation scheme for breast
cancer services is implemented
establishment of the scheme.
10 MS
Baseline 2012: 0
28 MS
Programme Statement
DB2016

Draft Budget 2016
Number
EUR million
Output
Budget line
number of actions granted that plan to deliver validated best practices

for cost effective prevention measures
17 03 01
3,0
number of grants and contracts provided contributing to promoting

health and fostering supportive environments
17 03 01
14
4,9
Total
7,9

Outputs
Total
2014
number of actions granted that plan to

deliver validated best practices for cost
effective prevention measures
number of actions granted that plan to

deliver validated best practices for cost
effective prevention measures
35
35
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
32
25
14
25
25
25
25
174
Specific Objective 2: identify and develop coherent approaches and promote their implementation for better
preparedness and coordination in health emergencies
Indicator 1: number of Member States integrating coherent approaches in the design of their preparedness plans
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2013 0 MS
0 MS
4 MS
8 MS
14 MS
18 MS
20 MS
24 MS

Output
Budget line
number of grants and contracts provided to protect citizens from

serious cross-border health treats
17 03 01
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
2
0,8

Outputs
Total
2014
number of grants and contracts provided

to protect citizens from serious crossborder health treats
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
35
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 3: identify and develop tools and mechanisms at Union level to address shortages of resources, both
human and financial, and to facilitate the voluntary uptake of innovations in public health intervention and prevention
strategies
Indicator 1: advice produced and the number of Member States using the tools and mechanisms identified in order
to contribute to effective results in their health systems
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
Advice produced, in particular the number of 11 (actual data)

Health Technology Assessments produced per
(6 were expected)
year Baseline 2012: 2
Number of Member States using the tools and

mechanisms identified in order to contribute to
effective results in their health systems: patient
summaries data/ ePrescription in line with the
EU guidelines.
10
20
40
50 annually
12
17
22
28

Draft Budget 2016
Number
EUR million
Output
Budget line
number of grants and contracts to address shortages of resources, both

human and financial, and to facilitate the voluntary uptake of innovations
in public health intervention and prevention strategies
17 03 01
11
22,4
Others of horizontal nature1
17 03 01
47
8,9
Total
17 03 01
31,3

Outputs
Total
number of grants and contracts provided

concerning obj. 3
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
19
16
11
10
20
40
50
19
166
Specific Objective 4: increase access to medical expertise and information for specific conditions beyond national
borders, facilitate the application of the results of research and develop tools for the improvement of healthcare quality
and patient safety
Indicator 1: number of European reference networks established in accordance with Directive 2011/24/EU
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0
10
10
10
22
22
Networks can only be formally established as provided in Commission Implementing Decision 2014/287/EU setting out criteria for
establishing and evaluating European Reference Networks and their Members. The implementing decision was adopted later than
1
This output is not related to one specific objective and includes the costs of communication activities, conferences, IT licenses, dissemination of
results relating to the Health programme.
Programme Statement
DB2016
forecasted in 2013 (when the goals where defined in the Health programme) and therefore the milestones and goals should be adapted
to reality. The establishment of ERNs is a complex procedure which involves several steps and tools. The first call for ERN is
expected to be launched in Dec 2015. Only after this call and the assessment process and approval of Networks by the ERN Board of
MS, Networks would be formally established. During 2014-15 several steps and tools have been either developed or are still ongoing
or in preparation (e.g. Call for tender and development of the assessment manual and toolbox contract signed in Dec 2014,
deliverables for Dec 2015 ; establishment of the ERN board of MS; FMC for the Independent Assessment bodies- expected call for
April 2015). As the steps are consecutive to each other, DG SANTEs forecast is that approved Networks will be established not
earlier than September 2016.
Indicator 2: number of healthcare providers and centres of expertise joining European reference networks
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
0
2015
2016
2017
120
2018
150
2019
170
240
266
A yearly call for membership to join the approved Networks will be launched. That will imply a yearly increase in the number of
Members while the number of Networks remains the same.
Indicator 3: number of Member States using the tools developed

Milestones
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
2017
0
2018
18
Target 2020
2019
20
24
28
Estimations have been revised downwards for the years 2014-2016, as there is some delay with the implementation

Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Budget line
number of functioning European Reference Networks
17 03 01
10
5,7
number of grants and contracts to facilitate access to better and safer

healthcare for Union citizens
17 03 01
22
10,8
Total
17 03 01
16,5

Outputs
Total
2014
number of functioning
Reference Networks
European
number of grants and contracts to

facilitate access to better and safer
healthcare for Union citizens
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
10
10
10
22
22
22
10
22
14
14
14
14
97
Programme Statement
DB2016
Consumer Programme
Lead DG: JUST
1.
Legal Basis

Council of 26 February 2014 on a multiannual consumer programme for
the years 2014-20 and repealing Decision No 1926/2006/EC
2014
Executive Agency
Total
2.
1,1
21,3
1,7
24,1
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
188,8
DB2016
2017
2018
2015
1,1
21,9
1,7
24,7
1,1
23,1
1,7
25,9
1,1
24,4
1,4
26,9
1,1
25,5
1,4
28,0
2019
2020
1,1
26,8
1,4
29,3
1,1
27,5
1,5
30,1
Total
7,7
170,4
10,7
188,8
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
24,794 102,64 %
4,917 94,83 %
25,401 52,59 %
16,454
41,98 %

24,072 99,64 %
4,648 78,94 %
24,676 49,78 %
16,008
38,17 %
3.
EU added value
EU consumer policy places consumers at the heart of the internal market, allowing them to fully enjoy the internal
market whilst protecting their economic rights and interests. Consumers that trust the internal market can unlock
significant economic growth through increased spending, stimulate competitiveness, and support sustainable and
resource-efficient growth.
Ensuring that products circulating on the internal market are safe for consumers is both a basic objective and a critical
challenge for consumer policy. This is why EU supports a coordinated and coherent approach to safety across the EU.
Linked to product safety is a high degree of market surveillance: unsafe products have no place on the EU market.
Another area of consumer policy financed through the consumer programme is consumer evidence. Developing modern
evidence on how markets work for consumers and businesses notably through the Consumer Markets and Consumer
Conditions Scoreboards helps to identify areas where the EU is not delivering fully for the internal market, and
contributes to better policy making.
Enhancing knowledge also entails making sure that consumers are informed of their rights, supporting consumer
education, and building the capacity of consumer organisations, especially in Member States with weaker consumer
cultures.
Programme Statement
DB2016
To unlock the full potential of the Single Market, consumers need to be confident that their rights are effectively and
efficiently enforced both domestically and cross-border. Across the EU, enforcement efforts seek to ensure that citizens
feel adequately protected from unsafe products and unfair commercial practices, and that businesses and industry can
operate in open and fair markets. EU consumer policy also aims to boost consumer trust by giving them access to more
efficient and cost-effective means of out of court redress, notably through alternative dispute resolution (ADR) and
online dispute resolution (ODR) mechanisms. The role of the European Consumer Centres (ECCs) is also relevant in this
respect.
Actions funded under the EUs consumer programme contribute to preserving and enhancing the rights and economic
interests of European citizens along the above-mentioned objectives. Their added value lies in their capacity to tackle
issues that could not be addressed as effectively by EU countries acting alone, for example, issues linked to the
increasing volume of cross-border shopping. Such challenges require a coordinated and coherent response across the EU.
Not applicable

Flagship

Total
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
1,3
4,3
5,6
DB 2016
(EUR million)
3,0
3,5
6,5

Not applicable
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective: to ensure a high level of consumer protection, to empower consumers and to place the consumer at
the heart of the internal market, within the framework of an overall strategy for smart, sustainable and inclusive growth
Indicator 1: Consumer conditions index
Baseline
2011
62 (on a scale of 100)1
Source: Consumer
Conditions Scoreboard
2014
N/A
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
65
2019
Target 2020
67
The Consumer Condition Index provides an overview of the key indicators describing the consumer environment at national level, as measured
through surveys of perceptions, attitudes and experiences of consumers in particular. As part of the ongoing revision of the Consumer
Scoreboards, there will be changes to the computing of the Consumer Conditions Index (effective as of the 2015 edition of the Consumer
Conditions Scoreboard). As a consequence, the data for 2014 will only be reported in September 2015. A revised target and milestone will be
proposed in the 2016 Management Plan.
Programme Statement
4.
DB2016
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: Safety: to consolidate and enhance product safety through effective market surveillance
throughout the Union
Indicator 1: % of RAPEX (rapid alert system for dangerous consumers products) notifications entailing at least one
reaction (by other Member States)
Baseline
Milestones
Target 2020
2010
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
43 % (843 notifications)
42 %
Source: RAPEX
Increase of 10 % (to
47,5 %), compared
to the 2010 value
Increase to 45 %
Indicator 2: Ratio number of reactions / number of notifications (serious risks)

Baseline
2010
2014
1,07*
Source: RAPEX
2015
1,28
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
Target 2020
2019
Increase of 15
compared to 2010
Increase to 1,15
%,
(to 1,23)
*A notification can trigger several reactions from authorities of other Member States

Output
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Output (no.)
EUR million
scientific advice
33 04 01
0,3
market surveillance and enforcement actions
33 04 01
3,5
cosmetics portal and database
33 04 01
0,5
Total
4,3

Outputs
Total
2014
F
6*
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

1
48
14
scientific advice
market surveillance and enforcement actions
cosmetics portal and database
* In 2014, appropriations to contribute to the further development and maintenance of the OECD's product safety recall portal and the
product safety inventory could not be spent after clarification that no financing mode for such an action would be in line with the
applicable financial rules.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 2: Consumer information and education, and support to consumer organisations: to improve
consumers' education, information and awareness of their rights, to develop the evidence base for consumer policy and
to provide support to consumer organisations, including taking into account the specific needs of vulnerable consumers
Indicator 1: Number of complaint bodies and number of countries submitting complaints to the European Consumer
Complaints Registration system (ECCRS).
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018 2019
33 complaint bodies from
37 complaint bodies
7countries.
from 13 countries
Source: ECCRS
50
complaint
bodies from 14
countries
70
complaint
bodies from 20
countries by 2020

Output
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Output (no.)
EUR million
evidence base
33 04 01
3,2
support to consumer organisations
33 04 01
2,0
consumer information
33 04 01
1,0
consumer education
33 04 01
0,8
Total
7,0

Outputs
Total
2014
F
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

3
21
21
49
14
evidence base
support to consumer organisations
consumer information
consumer education
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 3: Rights and redress: to develop and reinforce consumer rights in particular through smart
regulatory action and improving access to simple, efficient, expedient and low-cost redress including alternative dispute
resolution
Indicator 1: % of those cases dealt with by European Consumer Centres (ECCs) and not resolved directly with
traders which were subsequently referred to Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR).
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2010
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
9%
Source: Annual ECC report
16,2 %
40 %
75 %
Indicator 2: Number of cases dealt with by a Union-wide online dispute resolution system
Baseline
2010
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
17 500 (complaints received by ECCs related to

e-commerce
transactions) 25 384
Source: ODR platform 2
2018
2019
Target 2020
50 000
100 000
Indicator 3: % of consumers who took action in response to a problem encountered in the past 12 months.
Baseline
2012
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
83
%3
N/A
Source: Consumer Conditions Scoreboard
2018
Target 2020
2019
86 %
90 %

Output
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Output (no.)
EUR million
preparation of legislation
33 04 01
1,1
coordination and monitoring of ADR
33 04 01
3,0
Total
4,1

Outputs
Total
2014
F
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

5
35
14
preparation of legislation
coordination and monitoring of ADR
2
3
ODR Platform will become operational in January 2016.

The 2014 data will be reported in the 2015 Consumer Conditions Scoreboard.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 4: Enforcement: to support enforcement of consumer rights by strengthening cooperation between
national enforcement bodies and by supporting consumers with advice
Indicator 1: Level of information flow and cooperation within the Consumer Protection Cooperation (CPC) Network
Baseline*
2014
number of requests to exchange information

between CPC authorities = 129
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
132
number of requests for enforcement measures

between CPC authorities = 142
2018
Target 2020
2019
increase
to 156
increase of 30 %
(to 167)
increase
to 172
increase of 30 %
(to 185)
increase
to 76
increase of 30 %
(to 82)
130
number of alerts within the CPC network = 63
35
Source: CPC Network Database (CPCS)
* Current situation: annualised averages 2007-10
Indicator 2: % of enforcement requests handled within 12 months within the CPC Network
Baseline
2007-2010
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
50 %
Source:
CPC
Database (CPCS)
Network
51 %
55 %
60 %
Indicator 3: % of information requests handled within 3 months within the CPC Network
Baseline
2007-2010
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
33 %
Source:
CPC
Database (CPCS)
Network
34 %
37 %
50 %
Indicator 4: Number of contacts with consumers handled by the European Consumer Centres (ECC).
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2010
2014 2015 2016
2017
2018 2019
71 000
Source: ECC report
83 425
Increase of 50% (to 106 500), compared

to 2010
Increase to 88 750
Indicator 5: Number of visits to the website of the ECCs.

Milestones
Baseline 2013 (revised with
latest data)*
2014 2015 2016
2017
3 000 000
4
Source: ECC-Net Evaluation N/A
Report
2018
2019
Increase to
3 900 000
Target 2020
Increase of 70 % (to 4 500 000),

compared to 2013
* The data for this indicator has been revised because the target for 2020 set by the Consumer Programme has already been achieved
in 2013.
The 2014 data will be reported at a later stage.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Output (no.)
EUR million
coordination of enforcement actions
33 04 01
1,1
support to the European Consumer Centres
33 04 01
6,6
Total
7,7
Outputs
Total
2014
F
2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020

4
28
14
coordination of enforcement actions
support to the European Consumer Centres
Programme Statement
DB2016
Creative Europe Programme

Lead DG: EAC
Associated DGs: CNECT
1.
Legal Basis

Council of 11 December 2013 establishing the Creative Europe
Programme (2014 to 2020) and repealing Decisions No 1718/2006/EC, No
1855/2006/EC and No 1041/2009/EC
2014
Executive Agency
Total
2.
2,1
167,6
12,2
181,9
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
1 462,7

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2015
2,2
163,3
12,2
177,7
2,2
177,4
12,2
191,8
2,3
192,4
12,2
206,9
2,4
208,3
12,3
223,0
2020
2,6
225,2
12,3
240,1
Total
2,7
16,6
229,4 1 363,6
12,6
86,0
244,7 1 466,1
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
191,025 104,42 % 112,313 102,10 % 185,563 14,00 % 134,746
13,10 %
Authorised appropriation excluding 183,671 100,80 % 106,983 98,14 % 179,818 11,51 % 129,741
10,54 %
3.
EU added value
Recognising the intrinsic and economic value of culture, the Programme shall support actions and activities with a
European added value in the cultural and creative sectors. It shall contribute to the achievement of the objectives of the
Europe 2020 Strategy and its flagship initiatives.
European added value shall be ensured through one or more of the following:
(a) the transnational character of actions and activities which complement regional, national, international and other
Union programmes and policies, and the impact of such actions and activities on the cultural and creative sectors as well
as on citizens and on their knowledge of cultures other than their own;
(b) the development and promotion of transnational cooperation between cultural and creative players, including artists,
audio-visual professionals, cultural and creative organisations and audiovisual operators, focused on stimulating more
comprehensive, rapid, effective and long-term responses to global challenges;
(c) the economies of scale and critical mass which Union support fosters, creating a leverage effect for additional funds;
Programme Statement
DB2016
(d) ensuring more level playing field in the European cultural and creative sectors by taking account of low production
capacity countries and/or countries or regions with a restricted geographical and/or linguistic area.
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: to safeguard, develop and promote European cultural and linguistic diversity and to promote
Europe's cultural heritage
Indicator 1: the number of people accessing European cultural and creative works, including, where possible, works
from countries other than their own
Milestones
Target 2020
Baseline
2013
2014 2015 2016 2017
2018
2019
To be assessed
Increase of 2 %
Europeans declaring that they benefited from the
during mid-term
in comparison
following items from another European country:
evaluation on
to 2017 results
data until 2017
1. 160 million read a book (31 %);
2.
140 million watched or listened to a cultural

programme on TV/radio (27 %);
3.
98 million visited a historical monument or

site (19 %);
4.
67 million went to a musical performance

(13 %);
5.
52 million attended a performance, festival,

etc (10 %);
6.
31 million saw a ballet, dance performance,

or opera (6 %);
7.
21 million went to a theatre performance

(4 %)
Source: Special Eurobarometer 399 on Cultural Access and Participation (2013).The population used for extrapolating the number of people covers the
EU28 as well as CH, NO and IS i.e.: 516,8 million people.
General Objective 2: to strengthen the competitiveness of the European cultural and creative sectors, in particular of
the audiovisual sector, with a view to promoting smart, sustainable and inclusive growth
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 1: the cultural and creative sectors' level, change in and share of employment and share of gross domestic
product
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2010
2014
2015 2016 2017
2018
2019
In 2010 between 3 % and 3,3 % of EU's active
4 % of the total
3,8 % of the total
population (TERA
European workforce;
European workforce
consultants 20141 )
In view of
3.8 % of EU workforce
economic
(Ernst and Young
crisis,
In 2010 between 3,3 %
France 20142 )
to safeguard
and 4,5 % of total
2010 figures
4,8 % of total European
European GDP
4,2 % of EU GDP
GDP;
(TERA
consultants
2014);
4,4 % of EU GDP (Ernst
and Young France 2014)
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: to support the capacity of the European cultural and creative sectors to operate transnationally
and internationally
Indicator 1: the scale of international activities of cultural and creative organisations and the number of
transnational partnerships created
Milestones
Baseline
2012
2014
2015
2016
7 000 transnational partnerships

available as of
involving at least 3 countries,
2017-18
latest known result at end 2012
Target 2020
2017
2018
2019
Creation
of
8
000
transnational partnerships
involving at least 3
countries
7 600
Indicator 2: the number of learning experiences and activities supported by the Programme which have improved
the competences and increased the employability of cultural and creative players, including audiovisual
professionals
Milestones
Target 2020
Baseline
2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
140 000 professionals
with
learning
experiences
240 000 professionals with

learning
190 000
experiences

Draft Budget 2016
Output
Budget line
Number
EUR million
MEDIA Sub-Programme:
New skills and networking: number of courses/workshops/events
09 05 01
48
7,0
Development of audiovisual projects (including TV production): number of
09 05 01
350
33,0
1
2
http://www.teraconsultants.fr/en/issues/The-Economic-Contribution-of-the-Creative-Industries-to-EU-in-GDP-and-Employment
http://www.creatingeurope.eu/en/wp-content/uploads/2014/11/study-full-en.pdf
Programme Statement
DB2016
projects
Support to co-production funds: number of co-production funds supported
09 05 01
1,4
Audiovisual markets, promotion tools and stands: number of projects
09 05 01
56
9,2
Total
50,6
CULTURE Sub-Programme:
Cooperation measures, such as activities stimulating peer learning + Support to
Project selection
15 04 02
27
12,0
European networks,such as those providing capacity building
15 04 02
31
3,0
European platforms, such as those providing a structure for international

professional development
15 04 02
0,9
Special actions, such as Prizes, ECOC, European Heritage label
15 04 02
1,9
Total
17,8
TOTAL
68,4

Outputs
Total
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
45
50
48
53
54
55
57
362
59
Development of audiovisual projects

(including TV production): number of
projects
359
345
350
361
371
377
391
2 554
345
Support to
number of
supported
41
51
64
56
67
68
70
72
448
48
40
48
27
44
49
53
53
314
22
10
31
10
10
10
10
81
10
New skills and networking: number of
courses/workshops/events
co-production
co-production
funds:
funds
Audiovisual markets, promotion tools

and stands: number of projects
Cooperation
measures, such
activities stimulating peer learning
as
European networks, such as those

providing capacity building
Programme Statement
European platforms, such as those

providing a structure for international
professional development
Special actions*, such as Prizes, ECOC,
European Heritage label
DB2016
27
45
* In the special action output, the Melina Mercouri Prize (1,5 EUR Million) will be awarded each year to the European Capitals of
Culture- ECOC.

Media: The change in the number of output is due to a slight increase in the budget for training and a decrease for coproduction funds as well as to applications on average for a higher amount than expected for development and market
access.
Culture: The slight change in the number of outputs results from a lower than expected number of supported cooperation
projects (mostly due to quality reasons). The same goes for Special Actions, in particular the sites who received the
European Heritage Label (it should be recalled that this was the first selection under this relatively new action).
Specific Objective 2: to promote the transnational circulation of cultural and creative works and transnational mobility
of cultural and creative players, in particular artists, as well as to reach new and enlarged audiences and improve access
to cultural and creative works in the Union and beyond, with a particular focus on children, young people, people with
disabilities and under-represented groups
Indicator 1: MEDIA Sub-programme: the number of admissions for non-national European films in Europe and
European films worldwide (10 most important non-European markets) in cinemas
Milestones
Baseline
2009
2014
120
million
Europe;
117
worldwide3
2015 2016
2017
Target 2020
2018
2019
in
Available
as of June
million 2015
135 million in Europe,
150 million in Europe,

165 million worldwide
135 million worldwide
Indicator 2: MEDIA Sub-programme: the percentage of European audiovisual works in cinemas, on television and
on digital platforms
Milestones
Baseline
2009&2010
59 % for cinemas
2014
Not
available
until June
48,2 % for digital
2015
platforms
66,4 % for TV
2015
2016
2017
Target 2020
2018
Maintain 59 % for
cinemas and 66,4 % for
TV, raise to 55 % for
digital platforms
2019
60 % for cinema, 67 % for
TV, 67 % for digital
platforms
The definition of the indicator as defined by the legal basis specifies the meaning of "worldwide" (=10 most important non-European markets).
Although the size of the market worldwide may be bigger, the circulation of European films beyond European boarders is so much lower than in
Europe that the number of admissions may be higher in Europe than worldwide in the 10 most important non-European markets.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 3: MEDIA Sub-programme: the number of people in the Member States accessing non-national European
audiovisual works and the number of people in the countries participating in the Programme accessing European
audiovisual works
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2009
2014 2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
122 million people in the EU
130 million in the
145 million in
accessing non-national European
EU and 320
the EU and 350
audiovisual works
million in the
million in the
296 million people in the
participating
participating
participating countries accessing
countries
countries
European audiovisual works4
Indicator 4: MEDIA Sub-programme: the number of European video games produced in the Union as well as in the
countries participating in the Programme
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
in EU 21,3bn; in 5 biggest
in EU 25bn; in 5
in EU 30bn; in 5
markets 13,35bn5
biggest markets
biggest markets
14,5bn
16bn
Indicator 5: Culture Sub-programme: the number of people directly and indirectly reached through projects
supported by the Programme
Milestones
Target 2020
Baseline
2014
2015
No baseline, first known

results (2017) available in
2018 for the first time
2016
2017
2018
2019
To be assessed during
mid-term evaluation on
data until 2017
Increase of 5 % in
comparison to 2017
results
Indicator 6: Culture Sub-programme: the number of projects addressed to children, young people and underrepresented groups and the estimated number of people reached
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
No baseline, first known
To be assessed
Increase of 7 % in
results (2017) available in
during mid-term
comparison to
2018 for the first time
evaluation on
2017 results
data until 2017
In contrast to previous programmes, the design of the new application e-forms and final reports will make it possible under Creative Europe to collect
this information for the 4 measures under the Culture Sub-programme.

Draft Budget 2016
Output
Budget line
Number EUR million
MEDIA Sub-programme:
Distribution campaigns of European Non National films: number of projects
09 05 01
677
29,7
Network of cinemas screening majority of European films: number of cinema

networks
09 05 01
10,0
4
5
The second figure covers both national and non-national European audiovisual works. In addition to EU Member States, two third countries
participate in the sub-programme MEDIA for the time being i.e. Norway and Iceland.
The turn-over of the video-game sector is the best available proxy for this indicator. The number of video-games produced in Europe is currently
unavailable. Considering that the tasks related to the development and production of one single game are usually split across several countries
within and outside the EU, there is no accepted definition of what should be considered as a European video-game. Furthermore being the video
game industry highly competitive, data such as the geographical spread of the workforce are not accessible.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Film festivals and events: number of festivals and events
09 05 01
77
2,9
Film literacy initiatives: number of projects
09 05 01
14
2,1
New marketing and advertising tools: number of projects establishing e.g. film
community platforms
09 05 01
17
5,4
Total
50,1
CULTURE Sub-programme:
Cooperation measures, such as those supporting international touring
15 04 02
43
22,2
European networks, such as those promoting audience building
15 04 02
1,3
European platforms, such as those fostering international careers
15 04 02
2,5
Literary translations and promotional support
15 04 02
60
3,2
Special actions, such as Prizes, ECOC, European Heritage label
15 04 02
5,8
Total
35,0
TOTAL
85,1

Outputs
Total
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
820
754
677
789
811
825
856
5 532
1 077
72
87
77
92
94
96
99
617
85
10
13
14
14
14
15
15
95
16
11
13
17
14
14
15
15
99
17
60
71
43
66
73
79
79
471
Distribution campaigns of European
Non National films: number of projects
Network of cinemas screening majority
of European films: number of cinema
networks
Film festivals and events: number of
festivals and events
Film literacy initiatives: number of

projects
New marketing and advertising tools:
number of projects establishing e.g.
film community platforms
Cooperation measures, such as those
Programme Statement
supporting international touring
European networks, such as those

promoting audience building
European platforms, such as those

fostering international careers
Literary translations and promotional

support
Special actions, such as Prizes, ECOC,

European Heritage label
42
15
12
59
74
DB2016
15
15
15
37
101
12
48
63
60
45
43
45
45
360
11
11
11
14
70

MEDIA
For the other actions, the change in the number of output is due to reallocations of budget as well as to applications
on average for a lower (especially the automatic distribution scheme) or higher amount than expected.
CULTURE
The slight change in the number of outputs results from a lower than expected number of supported cooperation projects
(mostly due to quality reasons). The same goes for Special Actions, in particular the sites who received the European
Heritage Label (it should be recalled that this was the first selection under this relatively new action).
Regarding literary translations, projects applied on average for a lower amount than expected and therefore more of them
could be supported.
Specific Objective 3: to strengthen the financial capacity of SMEs and micro, small and medium-sized organisations in
the cultural and creative sectors in a sustainable way, while endeavouring to ensure a balanced geographical coverage
and sector representation
Indicator 1: the volume of loans guaranteed in the framework of the Guarantee Facility, categorised by national
origin, size and sectors of SMEs and micro, small and medium-sized organisations
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
20 million EUR guaranteed
loans (MEDIA Production
Guarantee
Fund,
end
2013)6
180 million
EUR
0,5 billion
EUR
Breakdowns by national origin, size and sectors of SMEs or organisations and by participating financial intermediaries categorised by national
origin are provided in the annual report from the European Investment Fund.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: the volume of loans granted by participating financial intermediaries, categorised by national origin
Milestones
Target 2020
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
35
million
EUR
guaranteed
loans
(MEDIA
Production
Guarantee Fund, end
2013)7
2017
2018
2019
Higher by 30 %
than
the
milestone
set
for the previous
indicator
Higher by 30 % compared
to the target set for the
previous indicator
Indicator 3: the number and geographical spread of participating financial intermediaries

Milestones
Target 2020
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
2 financial institutions
from 2 Member States
(MEDIA
Production
Guarantee Fund, end
2012)
2017
2018
2019
7
financial
institutions from
5 Member States
10 financial institutions
from 10 Member States
Indicator 4: the number of SMEs and micro, small and medium-sized organisations benefiting from the Guarantee
Facility, categorised by national origin, size and sectors
Milestones
Target 2020
Baseline
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
1
500
beneficiaries
from 5 subsectors, from 7
par
ticipating
countries
48 beneficiaries from
audiovisual sector from 8
Member States (MEDIA
Production
Guarantee
8
Fund, end 2013)
7 000 beneficiaries from

5 sub-sectors, from 15
Member States
Indicator 5: the average default rate of loans

Baseline (2011)9
Milestones
2016
2017
Target 2020
2018
2019
10 % (estimated)
9%
8%
Indicator 6: the achieved leverage effect of guaranteed loans in relation to the indicative leverage effect (1:5,7)
Baseline (2011)10
1:5,7 (estimated)
7
8
9
10
2014
2014
2015
2015
Milestones
2016
to be launched in 2016;
results available as of 2017
2017
1:5,7
2018
2019
Target 2020
1:6
Breakdowns by national origin are provided in the annual report from the European Investment Fund.
Breakdowns by national origin, size and sectors of SMEs or organisations are provided in the annual report from the European Investment Fund.
There is no EU wide financial instrument for the sector. An estimated 10% according to the ex-ante impact assessment of the Creative Europe
programme.
There is no EU wide financial instrument for the sector. An estimated ratio of 1:5,7 according to the ex-ante impact assessment for the Creative
Europe programme.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Draft Budget 2016
Output
Budget line
Number
EUR million
Number of loans provided by banks to operators
15 04 01
281
13,3
Number of capacity building workshops
15 04 01
1,5
Total
14,8

Outputs
Total
Number of loans provided by banks to

operators
Number of loans provided by banks to

operators
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
281
705
1 198
1 771
2 335
6 290
28
Specific Objective 4: to foster policy development, innovation, creativity, audience development and new business and
management models through support for transnational policy cooperation
Indicator 1: the number of Member States making use of the results of the open method of coordination in their
national policy development
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
10 Member States
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
Indicator 2: the number of new initiatives and policy outcomes

Baseline
2012
N/A11
11
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
20
2018
2019
Target 2020
20
Initiatives or policy outcomes defined as the number of deliverables funded under the cross-sectorial strand of the programme. As this strand did
not exist before, there can be no baseline applicable. The milestone is an estimate of the results of the first call.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Draft Budget 2016
Output
Budget line
Number EUR million
Network of Creative Europe desks
15 04 01
28
4,8
Studies, evaluations and policy analysis (includes also the subsidy for
the European Audiovisual Observatory)
15 04 01
1,1
Transnational exchanges and networking
15 04 01
1,0
Testing new cross-sectoral approaches
15 04 01
1,0
Conferences, seminars and policy dialogue
15 04 01
1,1
Total
9,0

Outputs
Total
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
196
28
37
32
Network of Creative Europe desks (EAC)
Studies, evaluations and policy analysis

(This also includes the European
audiovisual observatory) (co-manage)
Transnational
exchanges
networking(co-manage)
and
Testing new cross-sectoral approaches

(CNECT)
Conferences,
seminars
dialogue(co-manage)
and
policy
Programme Statement
DB2016
Statement on Financial Intervention of the Communication Policy Area

Lead DG: COMM
1.
Legal Basis
Period of
application
Reference
Amount
(EUR million)
Task resulting from the Commissions prerogatives at institutional level, as

provided for in Article 54(2) of Regulation (EU, Euratom) No 966/2012 of the
European Parliament and of the Council of 25 October 2012 on the financial
rules applicable to the general budget of the Union and repealing Council
Regulation (EC, Euratom) No 1605/2002 (OJ L 298, 26.10.2012, p. 1)
2014
Administrative
support
Heading 3
Heading 3
Heading 5 appropriations
Total
2.

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2015
2020
Total
1,2
1,2
1,0
1,1
1,1
1,2
1,3
8,1
61,0
64,1
69,0
70,0
73,2
76,6
79,9
493,8
8,8
71,0
9,0
74,3
9,0
79,0
8,8
79,8
8,8
83,2
8,8
86,5
8,8
89,9
61,8
563,8
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
56,142 100,72 %
62,100 102,60 %
58,903 47,53 %
53,755
31,67 %

56,142 100,72 %
62,039 99,23 %
58,903 47,58 %
53,755
31,21 %
3.
EU added value
Through its audio-visual communication tools the Commission offers citizens possibilities to inform themselves and find
out about the political and legislative process of the EU, its results and how EU policy directly impacts on their daily
lives.
The Commission intends to bring the EU closer to the citizens, multipliers, media, politicians and other stakeholders by
providing them, at local level, but from a European perspective, with clear information on the EU. The actions are
implemented in partnership with the European Parliament and the Member States, and the 515 Europe Direct Information
Centres and through the 37 EC Representations and Regional Offices in Member States.
Institutional communication on the key political messages and achievements of the EU and the Commission is essential
to attract new multipliers, for example through the visits service, and to disseminate information about the EU policy
outcomes through multi-lingual online and written information and via a variety of communication tools.
Polling and analysis of the public opinion and media monitoring provides the Commission with data comparable across
the EU that can in turn feed upstream - into the policy making process feedback, as the systematic media analysis
contributes to the coherent, well-targeted long-term media relations strategy.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective: Citizens perceive that the EU is working to improve their lives and engage with the EU. They feel
that their concerns are taken into consideration in European decision making process and they know about their rights in
the EU.
Indicator 1: Percentage of EU citizens having a positive, neutral or negative image of the EU
Current situation
Long
term
target
Milestones
To
contribute
to
improving
and
maintaining
Positive
a Positive
image
image
of
of the
the EU in
EU
the media
50 %
and among
citizens.
40 %
2017
4.
in
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: A simple, clear, understandable message is communicated to citizens explaining the direct impact
of EU policies on their life.
Indicator 1: Percentage of the top press releases consulted in EN with more than 10 000 online hits
Baseline 2013
43 %
Source: Rapid reporting DG
COMM
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
60 %
2018
2019
Target
2020
60 %
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: Number of multimedia productions downloads

Milestones
2016
2017
Baseline 2012
2014
2015
2018
96 143
1
146 094
Source: AV Analytics and
120 000
150 000
(actual data)
Web Analytics
Indicator 3: Satisfaction rate on queries replied by the EUROPE DIRECT Contact centre
Baseline 2013
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
200 000
2019
13,2 / 16
Source: Ratings extracted
13,42
from the EDCC citizens'
13,3 / 16
(actual data)
enquiries database and
submitted in monthly reports
Indicator 4: Percentage of visitors to the Commission very satisfied with the visits
Baseline 2012
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
Target
2020
Target
2020
13,4 / 16
2018
2019
Target
2020
69 %
80 %
Source: forms filled in by
80 %
80 %
(actual data)
each visiting group
Indicator 5: Percentage of participants at Representations and European Public Spaces events agree that the event
improved their knowledge of EU issues
Milestones
Target
Baseline 2014
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
71 %
Source: based on responses to
71 %3
63 %
65 %
questionnaires distributed (actual data)
after events
Indicator 6: Total number of visits to EUROPA website
Baseline 2013
2014
2015
392 million
475 million*
Source: SAS Analytics
(actual data)
(corporate data collection
tool)
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
525 million 587 million 652 million 711 million 773 million 835 million
* Foreseen data was 432 million

Indicator 7: Growth in number of followers/fans/subscribers of the EU Commission social media corporate accounts
including the Representations
Milestones
Target
Baseline 2013
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Twitter: 172 000
319 700
500 000
606 567
678 283 750 000
391 417
463 133
Facebook: 230 000
417 500
700 000
672 500
736 250 800 000
Google+: 711 000
1 211 500
1 500 000 1 603 833 1 701 917 1 800 000
481 250
545 000
LinkedIn: 174 5914
174 591
350 000
441 530
508 265 575 000
1 309 583 1 407 667
EUTube: 22 500
28 100
40 000
43 000
46 000
50 000
241 326
308 061
Representations:
31 000
35 000
Twitter 88 000
164 000
200 000
500 000
Facebook 150 000
251 000
350 000
700 000
1
2
3
4
In view of positive development, milestones and target 2020 might be reviewed in the future.
In view of positive development, milestones and target 2020 might be reviewed in the future.
In 2015, DG COMM started collecting the satisfaction rate in the Representations through the events and actions questionnaire. Due to this new
way of measuring, data for 2017 and 2020 are still indicative.
The LinkedIn account was created recently, hence the baseline is for 2014.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Source: Engagor (corporate (actual data)

social media monitoring tool)
and the data available on the
social
media
platforms
themselves
Indicator 8: Percentage of participants agreeing that the Citizens' Dialogue event improved their knowledge on EU
issues
Milestones
Target
Baseline
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Start in 2015
Source: Based on information
collected on the site through
n/a
30 %
40 %
50 %
55 %
57 %
60 %
voting devices or on
responses to questionnaires
distributed after events
Output
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
RAPID
16 03 02 03
0,5
Audio-visual productions and multimedia projects for the general public
16 03 01 02
150
0,7
TV uptakes from Europe by Satellite (in minutes)
16 03 01 02
85 000
3,1
Media library: conservation and availability to the public of audiovisual material (audio, video and photo ), web development
16 03 01 02
50 000
1,6
Meetings with the media/HQ
16 03 01 02
0,1
Information events for journalists/REPs
16 03 01 02
580
0,5
Management of audio-visual technical facilities (number of AV

products provided to the College - messages, interviews, statements,
clips)
800
5,6
16 03 02 02
Visits to the Commission
16 03 02 01
1 700
3,8
Number of Europe Direct Information Centres (EDICs)
16 03 01 03
518
14,6
Organisation of events under the 10 priorities of the Junckers

Commission and information events by the Representations
(Events&Actions database)
3 000
14,0
16 03 01 04
Communication actions on budget focused on results
16 03 01 04
European Public Spaces organise information events (Events&Actions

database) (Heading 5)
16 03 01 05
European Public Spaces (Heading 5)
16 03 01 05
19
Number of consultations kids corner and teachers corner (Heading 5)
16 03 02 04
15 000 000
0,5
Publications, including Commissions General Report (Heading 5)
16 03 02 04
50
1,7
0,3
1 300
1,2
Programme Statement
DB2016
Operation of EDCC
16 03 02 03
Electronic/paper publications (REPs)
16 03 02 03
50
4,6
Local social media profiles regularly updated (REPs)
16 03 02 03
80
1,0
Number of Citizens' Dialogues
16 03 01 06
25
1,8
Management of EUROPA websites5
16 03 02 03
n/a
8,4
House of European History (DG EAC)
6,2
16 03 04
0,8
Outputs
F
RAPID
P
Audio-visual productions and multimedia projects for F
the general public
P
TV uptakes from Europe by Satellite (in minutes)
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
1
1
176
75
150
200
200
200
64
F 40000 85000 85000 85000 85000 85000 85000
Media library (in thousands): conservation and F

availability to the public of audio-visual material
P
(audio, video and photo ), web development
28,5
540
540
Management of audio-visual technical facilities F

(number of AV products provided to the College P
messages, interviews, statements, clips)
900
1700
1733
Number of Europe Direct Information Centres F

(EDICs)
P
500
Organisation of events under the 10 priorities of the F

Junckers Commission and information events by the
P
Representations (Events&Actions database)
N/A
European Public Spaces organise information events F

(Events&Actions database)
P
1200
18
18
Number of consultations kids corner and teachers F

corner (in millions)
P
10,8
Information events for journalists/REPs
Visits to the Commission
European Public Spaces
200 1 201
P 80091
Meetings with the media/HQ
Total
550
000
50,0
50,0
50,0
50,0
50,0
50,0 328,5
560
580
600
620
630
650 3 550
800
800
800
800
800
850 5 750
1700
1700
1700
1700
1700
1700
11
900
515
518
518
518
518
518
518
3000
3000
2500
2500
2000
13
000
1200
1300
1350
1400
1450
1600 9 500
18
19
20
21
22
23
23
13,5
15,0
16,5
18,2
19,0
19,0
112
47,0
1
780
507
N/A
1000
11,8
Concerns top level pages of EUROPA and other websites managed by DG COMM, as well as the corporate web management systems.
Programme Statement
Publications, including Commissions General Report F

P
50
50
50
67
67
N/A
N/A
Operation of EDCC
Electronic/paper publications (REPs)
Local social media profiles regularly updated (REPs)
Number of Citizens' Dialogues
DB2016
50
50
50
50
50
50
350
50
50
50
50
50
50
350
70
90
90
90
90
90
587
10
25
30
30
35
35
165
50

In 2015 Representation organise information events increase in the Events and actions database due to a better
penetration of the E&A tool. It covers meetings, workshops, conferences, seminars, debates, meetings organised with
educational establishments, cultural events, fairs and exhibitions, and other public events organised by the
Representation. The aim is to focus gradually on smaller number but bigger scale events.
Specific Objective 2: A coherent and effective corporate communication is developed and maintained.
Indicator 1: Digital Transformation / Number of Commission websites and webpages (content) cut
Baseline 2012
2014
133
websites
547 websites;
cut for all
DGs 3 000 000 web pages for all
925,070
DGs
webpages
cut
Source: Commission sites
inventory
(actual
data)
Milestones
2016
2017
Target 2020
2018
2019
One
One
One
coherent
coherent
coherent
web
web
web
1 class
4 classes
8 classes
presence for presence for presence for
transitioned transitioned transitioned
the entire
the entire
the entire
50 %;
100 %;
100 %;
Commission, Commission, Commission,
3 classes
3 classes
7 classes
to be
to be
to be
transitioned transitioned transitioned
continuously continuously continuously
25 %
50 %
60 %
improved
improved
improved
and
and
and
maintained maintained maintained
2015

Output
Budget line
Commission's new web presence (15 content classes)/number

of content classes online
16 03 02 03
Outputs
Commission's new web presence (15
content classes)/number of content
classes online
2014
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
4 classes transitioned
100 %, 3 classes
transitioned 50 %
5,6

2015 2016
2017
20186
2019
2020
20 %
20 %
8 One
2018-2020: Continuous improvement and maintenance.
One
One
Total
One
Programme Statement
DB2016

Change of indicator from 2014-2015: the digital transformation programme aims to create one single coherent, relevant
and cost effective web presence for the entire Commission by the end of 2017. From 2015 the project requires a change
of indicator, as it shifts from the rationalisation and research phase to the phase of building the new platform. The new
web presence will be thematic and will be organised by groupings called 'classes'. The content of the current web
presence will be gradually transitioned to the new web presence 'class by class'. This is reflected in the new indicators
above.
Specific Objective 3: Country specific information & analysis are fed into College's decision making process
Indicator 1: Number of political and economic reports and analysis produced
Baseline 2012
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
2018
2019
Target 2020
940
9407
Source: Political reporting
(actual data)
500
tool and statistics on ESO
reports (DG COMM)
Indicator 2: Eurobarometer results handed out / discussed in College meeting
Baseline 2013
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
12
12
Source: DG COMM (actual data)
Indicator 3: Satisfaction rate on the media monitoring services
Baseline 2013
n/a
DG COMM Survey to be
conducted by the end of 2015
2014
n/a
2018
2019
Target 2020
12
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
500
60 %
12
2018
Target
2020
2019
70 %
75 %

Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Budget line
Production of media monitoring and other media analysis products*
16 03 02 05
50
1,3
Production of Eurobarometer public opinion surveys**
16 03 02 05
5,3

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Outputs
Production of media monitoring and other F
media analysis products***
P
60
Eurobarometer public F
Production of
opinion surveys
Total
50
50
50
50
50
50
360
49
51

*
The variation in 2015 is due to a shift in focus of the analysis carried out that will result in the production of
comprehensive reports incorporating subjects previously analysed seperately.
**
In addition to the 7 surveys conducted by DG COMM, 36 surveys are conducted by other Commission services.
***
Includes in-house reports produced on the basis of outsourced reports.
7
Following a change of setup for political reporting, 2015 data, once available, will serve as reference for future projections.
Programme Statement
359
DB2016
Programme Statement
HEADING 4 GLOBAL EUROPE
HEADING 4 GLOBAL EUROPE / 360
DB2016
Programme Statement
DB2016
HEADING 4: Global Europe
Instrument for Pre-accession Assistance (IPA II)

Lead DG: NEAR
Associated DGs: EAC, EMPL, REGIO, AGRI
1.
Legal Basis

Council of 11 March 2014 establishing an Instrument for Pre-accession
Assistance (IPA II)
Executive Agency
Total
Of which contribution
Erasmus+
2.
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
11 698,7

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2014
2015
50,7
1 426,8
1,0
1 478,6
41,7
1 532,2
0,9
1 574,8
41,8
1 582,6
0,8
1 625,3
47,0
1 667,0
0,8
1 714,7
48,0
1 702,1
0,7
1 750,9
49,2
1 720,2
0,7
1 770,1
30,3
32,0
32,9
33,9
31,0
33,0
to
2020
Total
50,3
328,7
1 728,7 11 359,7
0,6
5,6
1 779,6 11 693,9
33,0
226,0
2014
CA
2015
Impl.
Rate
PA
1 492,490
92,47 %
64,727 97,05 %
1 689,506 10,68 % 403,304
7,84 %
Authorised
appropriation 1 490,425
revenue
92,52 %
63,004 91,09 %
1 688,222 10,94 % 401,463
7,59 %
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
3.
EU added value
The purpose of assistance under the Instrument for Pre-Accession Assistance (IPA II) is to support the Enlargement
policy of the Union. Enlargement policy itself is part of the external action of the Union and contributes to meeting the
common objectives in terms of global challenges, global response and global leadership. The Enlargement policy
contributes to ensuring stability, security and prosperity in the immediate neighbourhood of the Union.
The successive enlargement of the EU is by its very nature common task which can be pursued only at EU level. Only
the Member States acting together can decide on the accession requests by new candidates. The pre-accession assistance
provided through the EU budget is designed to help candidate countries/potential candidates prepare for future
membership: IPA is built to give IPA II beneficiaries a test run of obligations of membership before accession (such as
putting in place institutions for managing post-accession EU funds, and/or adopting the acquis and EU standards).
Granting pre-accession assistance under one single instrument on the basis of a single set of criteria is more efficient than
granting assistance from multiple sources (including the national budgets of the Member States) following different
procedures and priorities.
Pre-accession assistance is designed to help the beneficiaries listed in Annex I of the IPA II-Regulation coming closer to
the accession benchmarks. By its very nature, IPA II is an enabling instrument which helps the beneficiaries in
Programme Statement
DB2016
implementing the necessary reforms and achieving their respective targets related to the 1993 Copenhagen accession
criteria as well as Stabilisation and Associations conditions. The success of pre-accession assistance is therefore to be
measured against the criterion how effective the assistance was to enhance the capability of the beneficiaries to come
closer to the accession benchmarks.
Not applicable

Budget 2015
(EUR million)
31,1
DB 2016
(EUR million)
32,0
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
DB 2016
(EUR million)
8 % of the investments funded in 2016 from IPA contribute to the

attainment of EU goals on climate related expenditure
76,5
126,3
Flagship
IPA II supports the beneficiaries in their efforts to align to the EU2020 Strategy, which includes increasing energy
efficiency in the industry, in transport and housing and increasing the share of renewable energy sources. Support in this
area is channelled to the beneficiaries in particular through financial instruments; in the first instance the Western Balkan
Investment Framework (WBIF) and the Green for Growth Fund (GGF).
The estimated amount for climate related expenditure for 2016 is based on the analysis of the climate related expenditure
under IPA II (2014) and the climate-related expenditure indicatively planned for the coming years, as presented in the
indicative allocation tables of the IPA II strategy papers. It is foreseen to gradually increase the current level of climaterelated expenditure in line with the progressive alignment of the beneficiaries to Union acquis and objectives.
It is expected that most climate-related expenditure will be linked to Specific Objective 2 (Support for economic, social
and territorial development). However, climate-related expenditure might contribute also to achieving Specific Objective
3 (Strengthening the ability of the beneficiaries to fulfil the obligations stemming from Union membership) as well as
Specific Objective4 (Strengthening regional integration and territorial cooperation).
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: The Instrument for Pre-accession Assistance ("IPA II") shall support candidate countries and
potential candidates in adopting and implementing the political, institutional, legal, administrative, social and
economic reforms required by the beneficiaries listed in Annex I to comply with Union values and to progressively
align to Union rules, standards, policies and practices with a view to Union membership. Through such support, IPA II
shall contribute to stability, security and prosperity in the beneficiaries.
Programme Statement
Indicator 1: Overall assessment provided by the progress report

Milestones
Baseline
2010
2014 2015 2016
2017
Candidate countries: early
Candidate countries meet
stage
many (political and
economic) accession
criteria.
DB2016
2018
Target 2020
2019
Candidate countries meet

the majority of (political
and economic) accession
criteria and are well
advanced with the
implementation of the EU
acquis.
Potential candidates: early
Potential candidates are
Potential candidates are
stage
sufficiently advanced to be
sufficiently advanced to be
granted candidate status.
granted candidate status.
A revision of the methodology used for the enlargement package is underway. The new approach, first to be applied in
the 2015 Enlargement package, will take into account at the same time the readiness for accession (cumulative progress)
and progress made in the previous year. Since the new methodology was not reflected in the 2014 Enlargement Package,
no assessment has been made for the year 2014. Furthermore, both milestones and targets might need to be updated to
reflect this methodological change following the 2015 package. The footnote also applies to the other indicators related
to the Enlargement package.
Candidate countries- Turkey, the former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, Montenegro, Serbia and Albania
Potential candidates- Bosnia and Herzegovina, Kosovo (*)
*This designation is without prejudice to positions on status, and is in line with UNSCR 1244 and the International Court of Justice
(ICJ) Opinion on the Kosovo declaration of independence.
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: Support for political reforms.

Indicator 1: Overall assessment provided by the Progress report on the political reforms
Baseline
2010
Western Balkans: early
stage
Turkey: early stage
2014
2015
2016
Milestones
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
some progress
further progress
some progress
further progress
Indicator 2: Weighted score based on 8 external sources taken in three groups, each weighted one third 1.
[Corruption Index (Transparency International) and Control of Corruption (World Bank); 2. Press Freedom
(Reporters without Borders) and Freedom of Press (Freedom House); 3. Government Effectiveness (World Bank),
Rule of Law (World Bank), Regulatory Quality (World Bank) and Voice and Accountability (World Bank)]*
Milestones
Baseline
Target
2010
2020
2013*
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Western Balkans: 51.4
50.8
>52
>55
Turkey: 52.1
53.3
>53
>55
*The 2014 results of some indicators are not yet available at the time of PS preparation.
Values: 1 (Worst) - 100 (Best). Based on:
Corruption Index (Transparency International) -http://www.transparency.org/country
Control of Corruption (World Bank )-http://web.worldbank.org
Press Freedom (Reporters without Borders )https://rsf.org/index2014
Freedom of Press (Freedom House )-http://www.freedomhouse.org/
Government Effectiveness (World Bank )-http://web.worldbank.org
Rule of Law (World Bank )-http://web.worldbank.org
Regulatory Quality (World Bank )-http://web.worldbank.org
Voice and Accountability (World Bank )] -http://web.worldbank.org
Programme Statement
DB2016

Expenditure related output covering: Specific Objective 1 - Support for political reforms AND relevant part for Specific
Objective 3 - Support for progressive alignment with, and adoption, implementation and enforcement of, the Union
acquis, including preparation for management of Union Structural Funds, the Cohesion Fund and the European
Agricultural Fund for Rural Development.
DB '2016
Output
Budget line
22 02 01 01
1.Western Balkans, of which
Output (no.)
EUR million
N/A
188,0
Albania
12,7
Bosnia and Herzegovina
18,0
Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia
35,6
Kosovo1
31,0
Montenegro
12,8
Serbia
77,9
22 02 03 01
2. Turkey
N/A
Total
240,3
428,3
Specific Objective 2: Support for economic, social and territorial development, with a view to a smart, sustainable and
inclusive growth.
Indicator 1: World Bank's "Distance to frontier" (Doing Business) score*
Baseline
2010
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
66
68.66
1. Western Balkans: 60.5**

2. Turkey: 63.1**
2018
2019
Target
2020
67
68
70
72
* The indicator shows the distance of each economy to the frontier, that means the highest performance observed on
each of the indicators across all economies: 1 (Worst) - 100 (Best)
Source: http://www.doingbusiness.org/data/distance-to-frontier.
** The last DB Report has updated the methodology: values for 2010 have been revised to 60.1 (from 60.5) for the WB and to 66.02 (from 63.1) for
Turkey
Indicator 2: Average of exports and imports of goods and services/ GDP - % (Source: Eurostat)
Baseline
Milestones
2010
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Western Balkans: 44.52
Turkey: 24
48.57*
29**
52
32
Target
2020
55
35
* Excluding Kosovo; data refer to 2012

** Data refer to 2013
This designation is without prejudice to positions on status, and is in line with UNSCR 1244 and the ICJ Opinion on the Kosovo Declaration of
Independence.
Programme Statement
Indicator 3: GDP per capita (current prices-PPS) as % of EU level (Source: Eurostat)*

Baseline
Milestones
2010
2013 2014*** 2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Western Balkans: 32.5%
33.43%
38%
**
Turkey: 50%
55%
60%
DB2016
Target
2020
43%
65%
*The indicator shows the degree of economic convergence of Enlargement countries towards the European average
** Excluding Kosovo
*** 2014 data not yet available
Indicator 4: Number of economic entities benefitting from IPA II assistance performing modernisation projects in
agri-food sector
Milestones
Target 2020**
2014*
2017
1. Western Balkans
520
5 200
2. Turkey
120
1 115
Indicator 5: Overall investment in physical capital in agri-food and rural development (EUR) implemented by
beneficiaries of IPA II assistance
Milestones
Target 2020**
2014 *
2017
1. Western Balkans
52 600 000
737 200 000
2. Turkey
200 000 000
1784 000 000
General comments related to the indicators measuring the IPA II assistance in the agriculture and rural
development.
IPA resources for modernisations and upgrading of farms and food companies are very limited compared to the sector
size in respective countries and therefore targets are set only for the supported projects financed from the budget and not
for the sector
All targets below for rural development programmes have been modified as compared to the Programme Statement 2014 to take into account
programmes that were recently adopted.
The specific contracts in IPA II agriculture and rural development assistance are implemented in accordance with the N+3 rule which means that a
given budget allocation in this programme is actually implemented (contracted and paid to projects) within a period of 3 years following year N.
Therefore:
* in 2014 in line with N+3 no effective expenditure made/projects implemented;
** the target for budget year 2020 will be actually implemented as output by the end of 2023.

Expenditure related outputs covering: Specific Objective 2 - Support for economic, social and territorial development
AND the relevant part from Specific Objective 3 - Support for progressive alignment with, and adoption, implementation
and enforcement of, the Union acquis, including preparation for management of Union Structural Funds, the Cohesion
Fund and the European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development.
Programme Statement
DB2016
DB '2016
Output
Budget line
1.Western Balkans, of which
Output (no.)
EUR million
22 02 01 02
N/A
327,0
05 05 03 02
N/A
43,0
Albania
77,0
Bosnia and Herzegovina
24,7
Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia
56,0
Kosovo
57,7
Montenegro
24,7
Serbia
130,0
2.Turkey
22 02 03 02
N/A
321,5
05 05 04 02
N/A
69,0
Total
760,5
Specific Objective 3: Strengthening of the ability of the beneficiaries listed in Annex I of the IPA II-Regulation to
fulfil the obligations stemming from Union membership by supporting progressive alignment with, and adoption,
implementation and enforcement of, the Union acquis, including preparation for management of Union Structural
Funds, the Cohesion Fund and the European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development
Indicator 1: Overall assessment provided by the Progress report on the degree of alignment on the acquis
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2010
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
1. Western Balkans: early stage
some progress
further progress
3. Turkey: early stage
some progress
further progress
Indicator 2: Number of economic entities progressively upgrading towards EU standards in agri-food sector
Milestones
Target 2020**
2014*
2017
1. Western Balkans
330
2 800
2. Turkey
100
1 000
* and ** - see explanations under indicator 3 and 4 of the SO 2.

The Expenditure related outputs designated for Specific Objective 3 - Support for progressive alignment with and
adoption, implementation and enforcement of, the Union acquis, including preparation for management of Union
Structural Funds, the Cohesion Fund and the European Agricultural Fund for Rural Development are split in the
Expenditure related outputs of the following specific objectives, depending on their relevance:
Specific Objective 1 - Support for political reforms
Specific Objective 2 - Support for economic, social and territorial development
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 4: Strengthening regional integration and territorial cooperation involving the beneficiaries listed in
Annex I of the IPA II-Regulation, Member States and, where appropriate, third countries within the scope of
Regulation (EU) No 232/2014 of the European Parliament and of the Council.
Indicator 1: Number of cross-border cooperation programmes concluded among IPA and between IPA/ EU
beneficiaries
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2010
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
IPA-IPA beneficiaries: 8
10
10
IPA-EU MS: 12
12
12
Total CBC programmes: 20
22
22
Expenditure related outputs*

Output
Budget line
DB '2016
EUR million
Multi-country programmes, regional integration and territorial cooperation**
22 02 04 01
326,7
Contribution to Erasmus+
22 02 04 02
32,0
Contribution to the Energy Community for South-East Europe
22 02 04 03
4,9
Cross-border cooperation (CBC) Contribution from Heading 4
13 05 63 02
25,0
Participation of candidate countries and potential candidates in ERDF ETC

Contribution from Heading 4 (IPA II)
13 03 64 02
5,2
Total
393,8
* Expenditure related outputs include communication, monitoring, evaluation and audit actions.
** Multi-country programmes include contributions by the Union budget to financial instruments.
Explanatory note
Pre-accession assistance is intended to support the Enlargement policy of the Union, i.e. to prepare candidate countries
and potential candidates with a European perspective for joining the Union. In this context, the assistance pursues four
specific objectives which are equally valid for all beneficiaries listed in Annex I of IPA II Regulation since they aim to
put them in a position to cover the remaining ground separating them from accession. However, the assistance needs to
be tailored to the specific situation of the individual IPA II beneficiary, depending on its current state of preparedness and
the foreseeable further path to accession. There will therefore be a different mix of measures to provide the assistance and
some of the specific objectives of the instrument will be more relevant for one IPA II beneficiary than for another.
The assistance is provided on the basis of a thorough analysis of the needs and capacities of the individual IPA II
beneficiary. These needs and capacities are described in the Country Strategy Paper: a high level planning document
valid for the years 2014-2020. This document describes the priorities for assistance and the sequencing of measures. The
Assistance is also provided partially in the frame of national programmes and partially in the form of regional
programmes covering the needs of several beneficiaries. Programmes normally have a time horizon of several years since
they are intended to support sector reform plans in the beneficiary country; such reforms usually take several years to
bear fruit.
Pre-accession assistance under IPA II is to be provided to the beneficiaries following a holistic approach, based on the
needs and capacities of the beneficiaries. The Country Strategy Papers outline the support in the five policy areas
identified in the basic legal act. In line with the coordinated and comprehensive approach to managing pre-accession
assistance, all allocations for IPA II is therefore initially brought under the same budget Title 22.02.
There is, however, one major exception. In the policy area "agriculture and rural development", assistance includes
management by DG AGRI in the beneficiaries which are already operating under indirect (decentralised) management or
which are preparing for indirect management. Given the complexity of the rules and the size of the Union acquis,
Programme Statement
DB2016
preparations for the implementation of the Common Agricultural Policy and shared management of related Union Funds
need to start very early in the accession process; these preparations are best led by the competent service of the
Commission, i.e. DG AGRI. This justifies bringing the necessary amounts under Title52. In addition, cross-border cooperation between enlargement countries and Member States continues to be managed by DG REGIO.
Overall, agriculture and rural development policy area will seek to contribute to security and safety of food supply as
well as competitive, sustainable and efficient agriculture and maintenance of diversified and viable farming systems in
vibrant rural areas of the Western Balkans and Turkey, whilst strengthening their ability in the agricultural sector to fulfil
the obligations stemming from membership. Rural development programmes under the agriculture and rural development
policy area aim to, in line with Union priorities for rural development, by the means of development of human and
physical capital, increase ability of the agri-food sector to cope with competitive pressure and market forces as well as to
progressively align with the Union standards, while pursuing economic, social and environmental goals imbalanced
territorial development of rural areas. Investment support will be channelled through management and control systems
which correspond to the good governance standards and the principles of modern and efficient public administration, and
resemble these respective structures with functions established in the EU Member States for similar purposes.
Preparations for shared management of Structural Funds in the in policy areas "regional development" and "employment, social policies and
human resources development" should start only when the accession negotiations are well advanced and the beneficiary country is already
relatively close to the date of likely accession (with the exception of cross-border co-operation with Member States that continues to be
managed by DG REGIO in Title 13). DG REGIO and DG EMPL will set up and manage specific programmes to prepare the beneficiary
countries for shared management of EU funds, once the pre-defined trigger point is met. At that moment, the necessary allocations shall be
transferred from Title 22 to the respective Title 4 or 13.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Instrument of financial support for encouraging the economic development of the

Turkish Cypriot community and amending Council Regulation (EC)
No 2667/2000 on the European Agency for Reconstruction
Lead DG: REGIO
1.
Legal Basis
Council Regulation (EC) No 389/2006 of 27 February 2006 establishing an
instrument of financial support for encouraging the economic development of the
Turkish Cypriot community and amending Council Regulation (EC) No 2667/2000 on
the European Agency for Reconstruction
2014
Total
2.
2015
31,5
31,5
2014 - 2020

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
30,6
30,6
31,2
31,2
31,8
31,8
32,5
32,5
2020
33,1
33,1
33,8
33,8
Total
224,5
224,5
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
34,700
104,70 %
21,356 115,67 %
32,344
0,00 %
19,069
13,80 %
Authorised
appropriation
revenue
34,700
104,70 %
21,356 115,67 %
32,344
0,00 %
19,069
13,80 %
3.
EU added value
The programme is the only EU funding for the Turkish Cypriots, who are EU citizens. There is very little assistance from
individual Member States due to difficult legal and political circumstances in the de facto divided island. The overall aim
of the programme is to facilitate the reunification of Cyprus by encouraging the economic development of the Turkish
Cypriot community. The EU programme supports reunification efforts and prepares the Turkish Cypriots for the lifting
of the suspension of the application of the acquis in those areas of the Republic of Cyprus in which the Government of
the Republic of Cyprus does not exercise effective control. Following the restart of settlement talks in 2014, the
reunification process is in a critical phase and the support available under the Aid Programme can facilitate the technical
processes with agreement of both communities. The EU contribution, both in supporting the political process, the
economic integration and to improved living standards will be vital. Economic development of the Turkish Cypriot
community is mentioned very prominently in the Aid Regulation. The aid programme contributes significantly in the area
with private sector development schemes, facilitating involvement of the World Bank and the European Bank for
Reconstruction and Development, as well as human capital development. Measures to be financed under the Aid
Programme are of an exceptional and transitional nature and are intended, in particular, to prepare and facilitate, as
appropriate, the full application of the EU acquis in the areas where the Government of the Republic of Cyprus does not
exercise effective control, in view of the withdrawal of its suspension in accordance with Article 1 of Protocol No 10 to
the Act of Accession, following a solution to the Cyprus problem.
Programme Statement
DB2016

tertiary degree

Flagship
Youth on the move

Total
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
4,5
4,5
7,1
2,0
1,5
19,6
DB 2016
(EUR million)
1,0
5,0
7,0
3,0
1,5
17,5
Budget 2015
(EUR Million)
0
0,5
3,6
4,1
DB 2016
(EUR Million)
5,0
5,0
3,0
13,0

Waste water re-use
Renewable energy
Solid waste recycling
Total
Not applicable
4.
General objective
Objective 1: To facilitate the reunification of Cyprus by encouraging the economic development of the Turkish
Cypriot community with particular emphasis on the economic integration of the island, on improving contacts between
the two communities and with the EU, and on preparation for the acquis communautaire.
Indicator 1: Technically and politically support settlement process and to prepare for the application of the acquis
to the whole island after the achievement of the settlement
Milestones
Baseline
Target 20201
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Political stalemate;
social/economic
separation
Substantive
progress in
political and
technical
processes
In case of early settlement the planning will be revised (MFF Regulation Article 22).
Social and economic

integration,
advanced
acquis alignment
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: GDP per capita gap between the government-controlled areas of the Republic of Cyprus and the
northern part of Cyprus in process of progressive reduction
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
TCC GDP/cap as %
of that of government
55%
59%2
controlled area: 53%
Indicator 3: Cross-green-line trade volume in process of progressive increase
Baseline
2013
2014
EUR 4 311,615
EUR2 899,923
Milestones
2016
2015
2017
2018
EUR 6 500,000
Target 2020
2019
EUR 8 500,000
Indicator 4: Public perceptions "very good or rather good" (Source: Eurobarometer)

Baseline
2013
1.Household finances: 57%
2. Life satisfaction: 49%
3. Life satisfaction
12mth outlook: 27%
2014
58
52
2015
59
54
29
30
Milestones
2016
2017
60
61
56
60
31
2018
2019
Target 2020
63
75
32
35

Output
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
1. development of infrastructure
13 07 01
12,5
2 .social/economic development
13 07 01
10
9,7
3. reconciliation, confidence building
13 07 01
3,1
4. bringing TCs closer to the Union
13 07 01
1,6
5/6. preparation for acquis
13 07 01
2,5
7. horizontal
13 07 01
1,9
29
31,2
TOTAL

There are no changes on strategy. The Aid programme to Turkish Cypriot community will continue to target all six
objectives of the Aid Regulation 389/2006 and aim for social and economic development. The Aid programme must be
ready to support the political settlement process as it evolves and undertake revisions as needed to enhance confidence
building or bi-communal actions and to prepare and facilitate, as appropriate, the full application of the acquis
communautaire following a solution of the Cyprus problem. The budget for reconciliation and confidence building
includes the Committee on Missing Persons and Cultural Heritage Protection, but other initiatives will be encouraged in
addition.
Indicator 2 milestone for 2017 has been increased as compared to the Programme Statement 2015 as a newer baseline
figure (2012) is available. Indicator 4.3 has been modified since the baseline figure used in previous edition of the
Programme Statement was incorrect.
Slow approximation is foreseen.
Programme Statement
DB2016
European Neighbourhood Instrument (ENI)

Lead DG: NEAR
Associated DGs: EAC, REGIO
1.
Legal Basis
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)

Council of 11 March 2014 establishing a European Neighbourhood
Instrument
2014 - 2020
15 432,6
Executive Agency
Total
Erasmus+
2.
to

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2014
2015
57,5
2 254,7
2,8
2 315,0
44,6
1 988,4
3,0
2 036,0
45,4
2 087,3
2,6
2 135,2
46,8
2 097,6
2,4
2 146,8
47,4
2 179,9
2,3
2 229,6
48,0
2 294,9
2,1
2 345,1
103,3
93,6
98,0
104,8
82,0
86,7
2020
Total
48,6
338,4
2 382,6 15 285,5
2,1
17,2
2 433,3 15 641,1
90,3
658,7
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
2 358,842 101,86 %
469,543 99,91 % 2 040,914 11,33 % 630,642
15,52 %
Authorised
appropriation
excluding external earmarked 2 347,346 101,39 %
revenue
462,162 98,36 % 2 035,997 11,35 % 620,488
14,90 %
3.
EU added value
The EU has a strategic interest in seeing greater prosperity, economic development and better governance in its
neighbourhood and in promoting stability and security in the region. Although the responsibility for this lies primarily
with the countries themselves, the EU can effectively encourage and support their reform and modernisation efforts. The
objective of the European Neighbourhood policy (ENP) is to build, together with partners, a prosperous, secure and
stable neighbourhood on the basis of shared values and common interests. By acting at the Union level and by
streamlining financial resources the EU has greater leverage to achieve a common goal: prevent the emergence of new
dividing lines between the enlarged EU and its neighbours. The EU provides financial resources to support partners own
reforms and thus stimulates their transition and modernisation programmes. In addition, the EU has a leading role in
bringing together donors, including major actors outside the EU, to work together on providing a comprehensive
response to the new challenges in the region.
At the regional level, the EU pursues its objectives within the overall framework provided by the Union for the
Mediterranean (strengthened Euro-Mediterranean Partnership), launched in 2008, and the Eastern Partnership,
established in 2009.
Programme Statement
DB2016
The two Joint Communications of the European Commission and the High Representative of the EU for Foreign Affairs
and Security Policy published in March1 and May2 2011 aim to respond to the changing situation in the Neighbourhood.
In particular, they set down a differentiated approach based on mutual accountability and positive incentives, whereby
the EU offers increased support to partner countries which show real commitment to, and progress in, democratic reforms
(principle of more for more).
Not applicable
Not applicable
Specific objective 4
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
135,4
DB 2016
(EUR million)
170,4
27,5
162,9
31,6
202,0
Total*
*The amount constitutes 10% of the geographic programmes allocation (i.e. operational credits excluding Erasmus+).
The estimation of the contribution from bilateral programmes and Neighbourhood Investment Facility (NIF) is based on
the priorities set in the programming documents. Actions aiming to mitigate climate change and adapt to its effects are an
integral part of the programming for the 2014-2020 period and the percentage of the contribution to mainstreaming of
climate action may gradually rise over time towards the Europe 2020 target of 20%.
The majority of actions contributing to mitigation of climate change are reported under specific objective 4. For regional
programmes (specific objective 6) actions in the fields of energy and environment are indicatively planned.
Calculations are based on the assumption that 100% of measures in the environment sector may indicatively contribute to
climate action; 40% of measures related to agriculture and rural development may indicatively contribute to climate
action; 100% of measures related to energy efficiency and renewable energy may indicatively contribute to climate
action.
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
DB 2016
(EUR million)
20,0
56,0
31,3
9,6
Total*
51,3
65,6
*The amount constitutes around 3% of the geographic programmes allocation (i.e. operational credits excluding Erasmus+).
The estimation of the contribution from bilateral programmes and Neighbourhood Investment Facility (NIF) is based on
the priorities set in the programming documents. Biodiversity is targeted through various actions foreseen in the
programming for the 2014-2020 period.
The majority of actions contributing to biodiversity are reported under specific objective 4.
Calculations are based on the assumption that 100% of measures in the environment sector may indicatively contribute to
biodiversity; and 40% of measures related to agriculture and rural development may indicatively contribute to
biodiversity.
1
2
'A partnership for democracy and shared prosperity with the Southern Mediterranean', COM(2011)200 of 8 March 2011.
'A new response to a changing Neighbourhood', COM(2011)303 of 25 May 2011.
Programme Statement
DB2016
General objectives
General Objective 1: Establishing an area of shared prosperity and good neighbourliness involving the Union and the
partner countries by developing a special relationship founded on cooperation, peace and security, mutual
accountability and shared commitment to universal values of democracy, the rule of law and respect for human rights
in accordance with the Treaty on EU.
Indicator 1: Number of comprehensive agreements and individual ENP Action Plans in place with interested
neighbouring countries
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2012
2014
2015 2016
2017
2018 2019
The negotiations and
16 Association or
Neighbourhood East:
Neighbourhood
conclusions of
similarly
East:
agreements and ENP
comprehensive
1.Five Partnership and
action plans show a
Agreements in force
Cooperation Agreements in 3
Association
positive trend.
and 16 Action Plans
force, one Association
Agreements
or similar documents
Agreement (Ukraine)
signed (Ukraine,
adopted by 2020.
initialled on 30.03.2012
Georgia
and
2.Negotiations for
Moldova)
Association Agreements
ongoing with 4 countries:
NB: This level of
Republic of Moldova
target comes from
(launched in January 2010),
the objectives of
Armenia, Azerbaijan &
European
Georgia (July 2010).
Neighbourhood
3.Five Action Plans in force.
Policy and takes into
4. Eleven ENPI CBC
account the 16
Programmes
Neighbourhood
Neighbourhood
countries (10 in the
South:
South and 6 in the
New EU-Egypt
East).
Neighbourhood South:
Action Plan in place
5.Association agreements in
(to be started in
force with 8 of the 10
2015)
southern partners (i.e.
excluding Libya and Syria). Neighbourhood
Decision taken on
6. Three First generation
South:
down-grading/
Action Plans (or equivalent
updating/ upgrading
documents) adopted or in ENP action plans
the Action Plan with
adopted with
place: Israel, Egypt and
IL (suspended since
Algeria, Jordan,
Palestine
2009)
Lebanon,
7.Second generation action
The Deep and
Morocco,
plans for Jordan and
Comprehensive Free
Palestine and
Morocco approved.
Trade Area
Political agreement on the Tunisia.
(DCFTA) with
second generation of the
Morocco and
Pursuit of
Tunisia and Lebanon
Tunisia will have
negotiations on
Action Plans but formal
been concluded and
the EU-Algeria
adoption by Council
possibly ratified.
ENP
Action
Plan
pending.
8.Since 2012 negotiations
The EU-Algeria
Comment:
with Algeria on an ENP
ENP Action Plan
Libya:
action plan.
will have been
Discussions on
adopted.
Comment:
the negotiations
CBC: 900 projects
Libya: Discussions ongoing for a Framework
Resumption
of
implemented by ENI
Agreement are
on possibility to re-start
negotiations on the
CBC programmes
stalled
due
to
the
negotiations for a Framework
EU Libya
(there are 950
crisis
situation
Agreement. Ratification of
Framework
projects financed
since
June
2014
Association Agreement with
Programme Statement
Syria suspended.
9.
DB2016
Agreement.
under the current

ENPI CBC)
2 ENPI CBC Programmes

CBC: adoption
of ENI CBC
implementing
rules
Indicator 2: GDP per capita: number of countries with a growing/stable GDP per capita (source: World Bank)
Baseline
Period 2008-2011
2014
9 out of 16 countries present
*
a stable/positive trend in
GDP per capita in the period
2008-2011
2015
2016
Milestones
2017
2018
10 out of 16 countries
present a stable/positive
trend in GDP per capita in
the period 2012-2017
2019
Target 2020
11 out of 16
countries present a
stable/positive
trend in GDP per
capita in the period
2017-2020
*The values for 2014 are not yet available at the time of Programme Statement preparation.
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: Promoting human rights and fundamental freedoms, the rule of law, principles of equality and
fight against discrimination in all its forms, establishing deep and sustainable democracy, promoting good governance,
fight against corruption, strengthening institutional capacity at all levels and developing a thriving civil society
including social partners.
Indicator 1: Progress made in achieving political reforms, as assessed by the Progress reports
Milestones
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Some
Some
Further
Eastern Partnership countries
Progress
Progress
progress
Southern Mediterranean
Some
Some
Further
countries
Progress
Progress
progress
The indicator assesses how the ENP partner countries progress in implementing the political reforms agreed in the
bilateral action plans/Associations agendas and in other bilateral legal frameworks. It also measures how candidate
countries progress in dealing with bilateral disputes among themselves and between them and EU Member States.
The target is coherent with 2014-2020 programming period and is based on the past trend, the baseline value and the
benchmarks.
Source: Progress reports (Joint Communication on the implementation of the ENP).
Baseline
2013
Indicator 2: Weighted score based on eight external sources (Corruption Perception (Transparency International),
Press Freedom (Reporters without Borders), Freedom of Press (Freedom House), Government Effectiveness (World
Bank), Control of Corruption (World Bank), Rule of Law (World Bank), Voice and Accountability (World Bank)
and Regulatory Quality (World Bank))
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2010
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
East and South: 38
**
> 42
> 44
The indicator is a weighted score based on 8 external sources taken in three groups, each weighted one third after
normalisation: 1. [Corruption Index (Transparency International) and Control of Corruption (World Bank); 2. Press
Freedom (Reporters without Borders) and Freedom of Press (Freedom House); 3. Government Effectiveness (World
Bank), Rule of Law (World Bank), Regulatory Quality (World Bank) and Voice and Accountability (World Bank)]
Values: 1 (Worst) - 100 (Best); EU benchmark: 76.99.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Source:
Corruption Index (Transparency International) - http://www.transparency.org/country
Control of Corruption (World Bank ) - http://web.worldbank.org
Press Freedom (Reporters without Borders ) https://rsf.org/index2014
Freedom of Press (Freedom House ) - http://www.freedomhouse.org/
Government Effectiveness (World Bank ) - http://web.worldbank.org
Rule of Law (World Bank ) - http://web.worldbank.org
Regulatory Quality (World Bank ) - http://web.worldbank.org
Voice and Accountability (World Bank )] - http://web.worldbank.org
** The values for 2014 are not yet available at the time of Programme Statement preparation.
Draft Budget 2016
Output
Budget line
1a. Measures supporting rule of law and good

governance - South
1b. Measures supporting rule of law and good
governance -East
2a. Measures supporting civil society and promotion
of human rights and fundamental freedoms - South
2b. Measures supporting civil society and promotion
of human rights and fundamental freedoms - East
3. Countries benefiting from umbrella programme*
22 04 01 01
22 04 01 04
Number
3 programmes adopted
1 programme adopted
EUR million
27,0
10,0
22 04 02 01
157,7
22 04 01 01
46,0
22 04 02 01
15,0
22 04 03 03
6 countries
189,5
Total
445,2

*Proposed
change in performance information for the umbrella programme: from 'number of measures funded' as it was
indicated in the Programme Statement 2015 to 'number of beneficiary countries'. This performance information reflects
better the functioning of the umbrella programme: additional funding is allocated to selected countries on the basis of
progress towards deep and sustainable democracy and implementation of agreed reform objectives contributing to the
attainment of that goal. Additional funding granted through this mechanism will be used in line with the co-operation
priorities of each beneficiary country. In line with the ENI Regulation, the total funding for the umbrella programmes is
set in the range of 10% of the operational budget.
Specific Objective 2: Achieving progressive integration into the Union internal market and enhanced sector and crosssectoral cooperation including through legislative approximation and regulatory convergence towards Union and other
relevant international standards and improved market access including through deep and comprehensive free trade
areas, related institution building and investments, notably in interconnections.
Indicator 1: Value of ENI countries export to EU-28 in relation to baseline data in year 2010 (Eurostat figures).
Baseline
2010 (EU-27)
East:
EUR 25 billion
South:
EUR 62 billion.
2014
East:
EUR 32,4 billion
South:
EUR 84,6 billion
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
East:
EUR 29 billion.
South:
EUR 83 billion.
2018
2019
Target 2020*
East:
EUR 32 billion.
South:
EUR 101 billion.
Integration into the Union internal market can only be measured on a real basis by studying the evolution of ENI countries export to EU-28. Increase of
the real value of ENI countries products exported to EU-28 internal market would show progress in terms of market integration.
* For the Neighbourhood East the target is based on an estimation of a 2.5% growth per year, which is above the average rate registered in the period
2000-2010, as expectations are that trade flows with the East will slightly increase over the period; for Neighbourhood South the target is based on
an estimation of a 5% growth per year, which is the average rate registered in the period 2000-2010).
To be noted that many factors will impact this indicator, in particular EU economic growth and unfolding crisis situations in the region.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: Number of Deep and Comprehensive Free Trade Agreements (DCFTA) and Agreements on
Conformity Assessment and Acceptance of industrial products (ACAA)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2010
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
East:
3 AA/DCFTAs
3 DCFTA in
DCFTA in place
0 signed (DCFTA)
signed (June 2014)
place
with all interested
0 (ACAA);
of which 2 (Georgia
ENI countries
4 DCFTA and
and Moldova)
0
ACAA
under provisionally applied
negotiation
as of 1/9/2014
South:
1 DCFTA in
2 DCFTA in
4 DCFTA in place;
0 DCFTA;
negotiations and 2
place and 2 in
5 ACAA in place;
1 ACAA;
under preparation; 1
negotiations;
2 Agreements on
0 Agreements on ACAA in place and
1 ACAA in place
liberalisation of
liberalisation of trade 1 being prepared and
and 4 in
trade in agriculture
in agriculture;
negotiated; 4
negotiations;
in place;
0 Agreements on Air
Agreements on
2 Agreements on
1 Agreement on
Transport;
liberalisation of trade
liberalisation of
Air Transport in
1MoUon Energy
in agriculture in
trade in
place;
place ; 3 Agreements
agriculture in
2MoUon Energy in
on Air Transport in
place;
place
place and 2 under
1 Agreement on
negotiations; 1 MoU
Air Transport in
on Energy
place;
2MoUon Energy
in place
Output
DB 2016
Number
EUR million
Budget line
1a. Measures supporting the Association Agreements ,

approximation and institution building South
1b. Measures supporting the Association Agreements,
approximation and institution building - East
2. TAIEX and SIGMA South & East
22 04 01 02
38,0
22 04 02 02
39,3
22 04 01 02
22 04 02 02
1 programme adopted
Total
3,5
3,5
84,3
Specific Objective 3: Creating conditions for the better organisation of legal migration and the fostering of well
managed mobility of people, for the implementation of existing or future agreements concluded in line with the Global
Approach to Migration and Mobility, and for promotion of people-to-people contacts, in particular in relation to
cultural, educational, professional and sporting activities.
Indicator 1: Number of Mobility Partnerships in place
Baseline
2012
East:
3 Mobility Partnerships in
place and none under
negotiation.
South::
Mobility Partnership signed
with one country in 2013.
Preparatory discussions
launched with two countries.
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target 2020
4 Mobility
Partnerships in
place
1 under
negotiation
4 Mobility
Partnerships in
place
3 Mobility
Partnerships in
place (of which 2
signed in 2014)
2 in place
2 under
negotiation
4 in place
Programme Statement
DB2016
Mobility Partnerships (MP) declarations are the instrument through which the EU and its partners in the Neighbourhood
intend to set a framework to manage migration flows with commonly agreed objectives and programmes. MP's follow
the Global Approach to Migration and Mobility guidelines. Thus, they are a good measure of the achievements in this
field.
Source: information from DG Home.
Indicator 2: Number of readmission/visa facilitation agreements and Visa Liberalisation Action Plans (VLAP) in
place
Milestones
Baseline 2008
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
5 Visa Facilitation
3
4 VLAPs
Agreements + 5
readmission/
East:
readmission
visa
1 readmission/visa
Agreements
facilitation
facilitation agreements in
signed; 1 VLAP
agreements in
place and 2 under
completed (visaplace
negotiation;
free regime granted
2 VLAP in place
to Moldova as of
28-4-2014); 2
VLAP ongoing
No
2
5 readmission/visa
South:
readmission/visa
readmission/v
facilitation
No agreements/VLAP in
facilitation
isa facilitation
agreements in
place
agreements in
agreements in
place
place
place
Based on visa facilitation/ liberalisation agreements, both the EU and the non-EU citizens benefit from facilitated
procedures for issuing visas. Visa facilitation/liberalisation agreements are linked to readmission agreements which
establish the procedures for the return to the EU or to the partner non-EU country of persons (own or third country
nationals or stateless persons) in irregular situation. Readmission and visa facilitation/liberalisation agreements are key
elements to assess progress regarding mobility and the promotion of people to people contacts.
[Remark: visa liberalisation is not based on an agreement signed with a third country (unlike visa facilitation). It is a
process/dialogue, based on an action plan (visa liberalisation action plan) handed over to the third country. At the end of
this process, the Commission may propose to abolish visa requirements for citizens holding a biometric passport (by
transferring the country to the list of third countries whose nationals are exempt from visa requirements). See recent case
of Moldova: http://europa.eu/rapid/press-release_STATEMENT-14-137_en.htm]
Source: information from DG Home.
DB 2016
Output
Budget line
Number
EUR million
1a. Measures supporting mobility and border management - South
22 04 01 01
1 programme
adopted
40,0
1b. Measures supporting mobility and border management - East
22 04 02 01
0,0
2. Erasmus + South & East (excluding administrative credits)
22 04 20
Total
95,4
135,4
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 4: Supporting smart, sustainable and inclusive development in all aspects; poverty reduction,
including through private-sector development and reduction of social exclusion; promotion of capacity building in
science, education and in particular higher education, technology, research and innovation; promotion of internal
economic, social and territorial cohesion; rural development; public health; environmental protection, climate action
and disaster resilience.
Indicator 1: Inequality-Adjusted Human Development Index (source: UNDP)
Baseline
2011
East: 2 countries with

indicator equal or above
0.655 on the scale of 1
(between high and very high
human development).
South: 1 country with
indicator equal or above
0.590 on the scale of 1 (high
human development).
Countries with no data
considered below threshold.
Milestones
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
**
4 countries
equal or
above
0.655
5 countries equal
or above 0.655
**
2 countries
equal or
above
0.590
4 countries equal
or above 0.590
The Inequality-Adjusted Human Development Index takes into account not only the average achievements of a country
on health, education and income, but also how those achievements are distributed among its population. In this sense, the
inclusiveness of development can be measured.
Indicator 2: Ease of doing business index (1=most business-friendly regulations) (source: World Bank)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Number of countries
East 6
East 5
ranking among the first
out of 6)
(out of 6)
East 6
100:
South 3
South 4
South 5
East 5 (out of 6)
(out of
(out of 10)
South 3 (out of 10)
10)
The sustainability of development highly depends on the capacity of our countries to facilitate the creation of a
productive tissue, i.e. the creation of local business that can ignite a virtue circle of economic growth on a sustainable
basis.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
Budget line
1a. Measures supporting employment, education and training

- South
1b. Measures supporting employment, education and training
- East
2a. Measure supporting territorial and social cohesion, social
protection and rural development - South
2b. Measure supporting territorial and social cohesion, social
protection and rural development - East
3a. Measures supporting inclusive economic development
(including NIF) - South
3b. Measures supporting inclusive economic development
(including NIF) - East
4a. Measures contributing to reforms in the fields of
environment, energy and management of natural resources South
4b. Measures contributing to reforms in the fields of
environment, energy and management of natural resources East
Total
DB 2016
Number
EUR million
22 04 01 02
57,5
22 04 02 02
0,0
22 04 01 02
197,0
22 04 02 02
109,7
22 04 01 02
22 04 01 04
22 04 02 02
1 programme adopted
155,9
15,0
72,6
22 04 01 02
22 04 01 04
1 programme adopted
140,0
15,0
22 04 02 02
1 programme adopted
20,0
782,7
Specific Objective 5: Promoting confidence building, good neighbourly relations and other measures contributing to
security in all forms and the prevention and settlement of conflicts, including protracted conflicts.
Indicator 1: Political stability and absence of violence: number of countries in a percentile rank above 0-10 (lowest
rank)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2011
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
East: 4 countries in a
percentile rank above 06
**
5 countries
30 (Armenia, Belarus,
countries
Moldova, Ukraine).
South: 6 countries in a
8 countries
percentile rank above 09
(6 +
10 (Jordan, Morocco,
**
countries
Algeria,
Tunisia, Libya, Egypt,
(8+ Syria)
Lebanon)
Israel)
This indicator measures perceptions of the likelihood that the government will be destabilized or overthrown by
unconstitutional or violent means, including politically-motivated violence and terrorism. Higher values in percentile
rank indicate better governance ratings.
Source: Worldwide Governance Indicators (WGI) project (WB group).
Output
Budget line
1a. Measures supporting confidence building and settlement of

22 04 01 03
conflicts (including support to refugees) - South
1b. Measures supporting confidence building and settlement of
22 04 02 03
conflicts (including support to refugees) - East
2. Measures supporting Palestine
22 04 01 04
Total
DB 2016
Number
EUR million
101,0
1 programme adopted
8,0
232,1
341,1
Programme Statement
DB2016

Under specific objective 5 it is envisaged to finance actions (inter alia) in response to the Syrian crisis and improvement
of the living condition of Palestinian refugees. This specific objective will also cover the continuous support to Palestine,
in particular the direct financial support to the Palestinian Authority and UNRWA and the needs of East Jerusalem and
Area C. In order to continue to effectively support the needs of the Palestinian population, it is important to keep the
budget allocated to Palestine in line with the past years allocations.
The amount requested on budget line 22 04 01 03 under this specific objective brings the total request of the ENI
operational budget for 2016 EUR 65 million beyond the amount foreseen for the MFF. The additional funds requested
are to be sourced from the financial framework for the Syria/Iraq crisis in 2016 attached to the Syria /Iraq
Communication of March 2015 by Commission/EUHR. It is anticipated that the amount in question will be sourced from
the funds made available by DG ECFIN (originally intended to cover loan guarantees).
In the Eastern Partnership, support for confidence building and settlement of conflicts will be mainly mainstreamed in
sector programmes.
Specific Objective 6: Enhancing sub-regional, regional and Neighbourhood wide collaboration as well as CrossBorder Cooperation.
Indicator 1: Number of Cross-Border Cooperation programmes in place
Baseline
2012
13
ENPI
CBC
programmes
adopted
and implemented
Milestones
2014
2015
2016
2017
Target 2020
2018
All ENI CBC

programmes (17)
are adopted.
2019
All 17 programmes
foreseen in the CBC
Programming Document
are fully under
implementation and all
available funds are
committed.
The indicator shows the progress in building cooperation among EU Member States on one side and Neighbourhood
partner countries and the Russian Federation on the other side, in border regions.
Relevance of the indicator: Given that these CBC cooperation programmes are agreed among the EU member States and
the partner countries, the adoption and implementation of the programme is a good indicator of the willingness of all
parties to cooperate in the border regions. Each CBC programme contains a multiplicity of smaller projects benefiting the
socio-economic development of the area's population.
The ENI CBC Programming Document, adopted on 8 October 2014, identifies for the entire period 2014-2020 thematic
objectives supporting an enhanced focus in view of achieving a higher impact in strategic sectors. 17 ENI CBC
programmes are identified with their respective ENI and ERDF contributions. These 17 programmes will be prepared by
Joint Programming Committees in which the participating countries are equally represented. It is their formal
responsibility to agree on the specific priority areas and to propose joint operational programmes to the EU, covering the
entire period 2014-2020. The selected specific priority areas must be in line with the thematic objectives established in
the ENI CBC Programing Document.
The submission to the EC services of the Joint Operational Programmes is expected for the summer. The compliance of
programmes with the applicable regulatory framework as well as their coherence with other Union-financed programmes
and with national and regional strategies and policies will be assessed. They will also be submitted to the Commission
services concerned for consultation before being adopted in late 2015/beginning 2016.
Source: based on the number of programmes identified in the CBC Programming Document.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: Number of on-going regional technical policy dialogues supported in the Southern Neighbourhood
countries
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
32
30
40
50*
(actual value)
This indicator is in line with the ENI Regional South Strategy Paper (2014-2020) and Multiannual Indicative Programme (2014-2017)
Indicator 3: Number of on-going regional technical policy dialogues supported in the Eastern Neighbourhood
countries
Baseline
2013
80
Milestones
2014
2015
2016
76
(actual value)
2017
2018
2019
85
Target 2020
90*
*Target set in comparison with previous years.

This indicator is in line with the ENI Regional East Strategy Paper (2014-2020) and Multiannual Indicative Programme (2014-2017)

Output
1. CBC programmes, including European Regional
Development Fund European Territorial Cooperation
Contribution from Heading 4
2. Measures enhancing regional co-operation in the
southern Neighbourhood
3. Measures enhancing regional co-operation among

Eastern Partnership countries
Budget line
DB 2016
Number
22 04 03 01
13 03 64 03
84,9
1 programme adopted
40
22,0
45,0
15,0
18,0
22,0
80,0
11,7
298,6
22 04 01 01
22 04 01 02
22 04 01 03
22 04 03 04
22 04 02 01
22 04 02 02
22 04 03 04
Total
EUR million
Under specific objective 6 it is envisaged that regional programmes will continue to focus on domains like, inter alia,
energy, environment, border management, transport, private sector development, support to the Partnership for peace
process in the Middle-East, Union for the Mediterranean, functioning of regional cooperation frameworks (Northern
Dimension and Black Sea Synergy) and the multilateral track of the Eastern Partnership.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Development Cooperation Instrument (DCI)

Lead DG: DEVCO
Associated DGs: EAC
1.
Legal Basis
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)

Council of 11 March 2014 establishing a financing instrument for
development cooperation for the period 2014-2020
2014 - 2020
19 661,6
Executive Agency
Total
Erasmus+
2.

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2014
2015
99,9
2 243,0
2,1
2 345,0
77,9
2 365,6
2,0
2 445,5
83,9
2 527,7
2,3
2 613,9
85,0
2 695,7
2,5
2 783,2
86,1
2 877,5
2,5
2 966,0
87,1
3 068,2
2,6
3 157,9
96,0
92,1
107,3
111,4
97,4
101,2
to
2020
Total
88,2
608,2
3 161,7 18 939,3
2,5
16,5
3 252,4 19 564,0
101,9
707,4
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2 386,461
Authorised
appropriation
2 378,582
revenue
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
100,69 % 125,438 98,55 % 2 450,781
8,54 % 827,135
11,25 %
100,64 % 119,340 90,54 % 2 446,754
8,61 % 820,735
11,00 %
3.
EU added value
The EU is in a uniquely neutral and impartial position to deliver on external action on behalf of and with Member States,
giving enhanced credibility in the countries where it works. The EU alone has the critical mass to respond to global
challenges, such as poverty reduction and climate change. Thanks to its large scale and the existing network of
international agreements, it can deliver help to the poor in some of the world's most remote areas, both implementing aid
and coordinating.
In its role as a promoter of inclusiveness and multilateralism, the Union can do more than other international
organisation.
Acting as one, the Union can have greater impact and more leverage in policy dialogue and donor cooperation.
Working with the EU is also more cost effective, with lower administrative costs than the average.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Not applicable
Not applicable
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
DB 2016
(EUR million)
Poverty reduction and fostering sustainable economic, social and environmental

development*.
474,9
505,5
*Actions aiming to mitigate climate change and adapt to its effects are an integral part of the programming for the 2014-2020 period and the percentage
of the contribution to mainstreaming of climate action is expected to reach the 20% target seen over the full 2014-2020 period.
Methodology for calculation of the amounts: 20 % of [operational chapter 21 02 BL 21 02 40 Commodities agreements BL 21 02 30 Agreement
with the Food and Agriculture Organisation (FAO) and other United Nations bodies]

Budget 2015
(EUR million)
DB 2016
(EUR million)
Poverty reduction and fostering sustainable economic, social and environmental

development
165,8
175,9
* Based on the analysis of the 2014-2017 Multiannual Indicative Programming Documents for DCI (geographic and thematic).
Methodology for calculation of the amounts: 7,26 % of [operational chapter 21 02 BL 21 02 40 Commodities agreements BL 21 02 30 Agreement
with the Food and Agriculture Organisation (FAO) and other United Nations bodies BL 21 02 20 Erasmus+ Contribution from the development
cooperation instrument (DCI)]
General objectives
General Objective 1: Fostering the sustainable and inclusive development in partner countries and regions and the
promotion of democracy, the rule of law, good governance and respect for human rights, as foreseen in the TEU, with
the primary aim of eradicating poverty.
Indicator 1: Millennium Development Goal 1.1 Proportion of population living below 1.25 dollar (PPP) per day *
Baseline
1990
Milestones
Target 2020
2014
43.1% (1.9 billion people)
2015**
2016
2017
2018
2019
15.5%
(0.97 million
people)1
To be
determined
post 2015
*Indicator coming from Millennium Declaration signed in September 2000 and from further agreement by member states at the 2005 World Summit.
**Objective of the MDG 1.1 is to Halve, between 1990 and 2015, the proportion of people whose income is less than a dollar1.25 dollars a day".
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: Poverty reduction and fostering sustainable economic, social and environmental development.
Indicator 1: Millennium Development Goal 1.2: Poverty gap ratio at 1,25$ a day (2005 PPP), percentage*
Baseline
2008
Least
Developed
Countries (LDCs): 18.3
1
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
13,5
Based on current economic projections, the target is reached in all regions except the Sub-Saharan Africa.
2019
Target
2020
To be
determined *
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: Millennium Development Goal 1.5: Employment-to-population ratio, percentage (Least Developed
Countries)*
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2011
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Least Developed
Increasing
To be
Countries (LDCs): 69,0
trend
determined*
Indicator 3: Millennium Development Goal 3.1: Ratio of girls to boys in primary, secondary, tertiary education
(developing countries)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2010
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Primary level - 97
To be
Secondary level - 96
100
determined*
Tertiary level - 98
Indicator 4: Millennium Development Goal 2.2: Proportion of pupils starting grade 1 who reach last grade of
primary (developing countries)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2010
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
72.7% in 2011
To be
Girls: 73.84%
100%
determined*
Boys: 71.6%
Indicator 5: Millennium Development Goal 4.1: Under-five mortality rate (deaths per 1000 alive births) (for
developing regions)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2010
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
To
be
Developing regions: 63
32,3
determined*
Indicator 6: Millennium Development Goal 5.1: Maternal Mortality Ratio (for developing regions)
[Measured as number of deaths during pregnancy/ child birth per 100,000 live births.]
Baseline
2011
2014
2015
Developing regions: 240
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
110
Target 2020
To be
determined*
Note: The 2014 results, aggregated by the UN, are not yet available at the time of the PS preparation.
Indicators will substantially change in 2016 once the negotiations led by the United Nations on the Post-2015
Development Framework and the set of new Sustainable Development Goals will be finalised.
Source: MDG Report Statistical Annex 2013: Millennium Development Goals, Targets and Indicators, 2013
(http://mdgs.un.org/unsd/mdg/Host.aspx?Content=Products/ProgressReports.htm
Indicator 7: Prevalence of stunting of children under-five years of age percentage (developing regions) (source:
World Health Organisation)
Milestones
Baseline
Target
2012
2020*
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
For LDC:372
(data for all developing
25,4**
24,4
23,6
22,6
21,7
20,8
20
regions not available)
*Target for 2025: The EU committed to meet at least 10% of the World Health Assemblys global target to reduce stunting of 70 million children by
2025, pledging to reduce this number by at least 7 million.
**The information about the actual value for 2014 is not yet available at the time of PS preparation.
http://www.childinfo.org/malnutrition_status.html
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 8: Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC): CO2 equivalent emission reduction by 2020 in
the context of global action to keep the global temperature rise below 2C
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2009
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Developing
Developing
Developing countries:
countries: 27-31
countries:26-32
29.7 GtCO2 equivalent
GtCO2 equivalent
GtCO2 equivalent
Globally: 50.1 GtCO2
Globally: 46 GtCO2
Globally: 44 GtCO2
equivalent
equivalent
equivalent
Justification: The goal is that the emission reductions delivered in the developing (beneficiary) countries, as supported by
EU programmes, are contributing to bring the global emission levels in 2020 down to levels consistent with a likely
chance of achieving the least cost pathway towards meeting the below 2C target (keeping the global mean temperature
rise below 2C relative to pre-industrial levels). According to the IPCC's Fourth Assessment Report, deviations of 1530% by developing countries below business as usual and by 25-40% below 1990 levels by developed countries would
make it feasible to deliver on this target.
According to UNEP's estimations, staying on track to the below 2C goal would require reducing global emissions by
10% below 2010 levels by 2020, i.e. to around 44 GtCO2equivalent. And according to UNEP's overview of currently
available business as usual projections, 15 to 30% deviation from business as usual levels would take developing
countries' emissions in the range of 26-32 GtCO2equivalent.
1Source: UNEP, The Emissions Gap Report, 2013.JRC/PBL, EDGAR 4.2 FT2010, 2012.IPCC, Fourth Assessment
Report: Climate Change, 2007.
Draft Budget 2016
Number EUR million
Output
Budget line
Cooperation actions aiming at poverty reduction and fostering sustainable

economic, social and environmental development in Latin America
21 02 01
13
219.3
Projects and programmes Asia, focusing on a.o. capacity building, rural

development, education
21 02 02
35
531,6
Projects and programmes Central Asia, focusing on a.o. capacity building,

rural development, education
21 02 03
115,7
Projects and programmes Middle East, focusing on a.o. sustainable economic

development and education
21 02 04
24,5
Projects and programmes Afghanistan, focusing on a.o. capacity building,

rural development, education
21 02 05
109,4
South Africa Employment Sector Reform Programme and Education and

innovation programmes
21 02 06
45,0
Global Public Goods and Challenges programme and projects focusing on

21 02 07 01
Environment and Climate Change
19
155,6

21 02 07 02
Sustainable Energy
77,58

21 02 07 03
Human Development
12
126,6

21 02 07 04
Food Security, Nutrition and sustainable agriculture
110,0
Programme Statement
DB2016

21 02 07 05
Migration and asylum
20,0
Programme to enhance the role of civil society organisations
21 02 08 01
135,7
Programme to enhance the role of local authorities
21 02 08 02
45,3
21 02 09
63,47
Pan-African Programme support to agriculture (CAADP) and environmentrelated projects

Total
1 778,15
Specific Objective 2: Consolidating and supporting democracy, the rule of law, good governance, human rights and
the relevant principles of international law.
Indicator 1: Average score in the Rule of law as measured by the World Bank's Worldwide Governance Indicator
(DCI countries eligible for geographic cooperation)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
Average 2007-2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
-0.88
-0,83
-0,82
-0,81
-0,80
-0,79
-0,78
-0,77
The Rule of Law indicator is one of the six aggregate indicators of the World Bank Worldwide Governance Indicators
(WGI). It captures perceptions of the extent to which agents (i.e. firms, individuals and public officials) have confidence
in and abide by the rules of society, and in particular the quality of contract enforcement, property rights, the police, the
courts, as well as the likelihood of crime and violence. The dedicated webpages of the World Bank provide information
about the methodology used for the World Bank WGIs (http://info.worldbank.org/governance/wgi/index.aspx#doc) and
updated annually Country Data Reports (http://info.worldbank.org/governance/wgi/index.aspx#countryReports). Based
on the above, DG DEVCO monitors information for the countries available for DCI geographic funding under the Multi
Financial Framework 2014-2020 (29 countries). The data shows the average index score for these countries. The index
ranges from -2.5 (worst possible score) to +2.5 (best possible score) where "0" means average score (across all the
countries where the index is measured).
Indicator 2: Number of projects funded from the DCI to promote democracy, the rule of law, good governance and
respect for human rights in the DCI beneficiary countries
Baseline
Milestones
Average
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2010-2012
70
70
(96* actual
70
75
80
85
90
100
value)
Source: CRIS Data Warehouse
In 2014, 96 projects were signed under the DCI excluding CSO&LA, on the DAC codes corresponding to democracy, rule of law, governance and
respect of human rights (15100, 15110, 15111, 15112, 15113, 15130, 15150, 15151, 15152, 15153, 15160).
Indicator 3: Millennium Development Goal 3.3: Proportion of seats held by women in national parliaments
Baseline
2011
19% worldwide*
2014
2015
21.9% at
1/12/2014
Milestones
2016
2017
*Source: Inter Parliamentary Union (IPU) http://www.ipu.org/wmn-e/world.htm

Data to be updated later on for development countries, based on the EU results framework.
2018
2019
Target 2020
To be
determined*
Programme Statement
DB2016

Draft Budget 2016
Number EUR million
Output
Budget line
Cooperation actions aiming at consolidating and supporting democracy, rule

of law, good governance, human rights and principles of international law in
Latin America
21 02 01
101,7
Projects and programmes Asia, focusing on a.o. strengthening democratic

government, human rights, judicial reform, civil society
21 02 02
10
135
21 02 03
13
21 02 04
42
Projects and programmes Central Asia, focusing on a.o. rule of law and border
management
Projects and programmes Middle East focusing on a.o. rule of law and human
rights
Projects and programmes Afghanistan, focusing on a.o. strengthening
democratic government, human rights, judicial reform, civil society
South Africa Public administration and legislative support programmes
21 02 05
2
15

21 02 07 01
Environment and Climate Change
19

21 02 07 02
Sustainable Energy

21 02 07 03
Human Development
35,0
21 02 07 04
77,5
21 02 07 05
25,3
21 02 08 01
45,2
21 02 08 02
15,0
21 02 09
30

Food Security, Nutrition and sustainable agriculture, and more specifically on
strengthened governance approaches for food and nutrition security at the
global, continental and regional level
Migration and asylum
Programme to enhance the role of civil society organisations
Programme to enhance the role of local authorities
Pan-African support to the fight against organised-crime and support to pan
African Union
21 02 06
90
Total
643,7

The changes to the programming concern:
1. a frontloading of EUR 15 million in 2016 in favour of Latin America, to be used in favour of the Upper Middle
Income Countries Peru, Colombia and Ecuador, for which the bilateral cooperation allocation should be entirely
committed in 2016-2017 (more details to be found in the executive summary). The funds will be compensated with a
lower allocation for Latin America in 2018. To stay within the annual ceiling of DCI, this frontloading was made against
the Pan African Programme, where infrastructure some projects could be delayed from the period 2014-2017 to 20182020.
2. To ensure the continuity of the programme aiming to facilitate the student mobility in Africa, a politically very visible
programme in the framework of the EU-African Union Partnership, the Agency EAC will implement part of the
appropriations foreseen under this programme. To this end, the Agency will receive an annual subsidy from the
Commission, which is to be financed from the Pan Africa appropriations. This will allow the continuation of the
programme Intra-ACP Mobility, financed until 2013 through the 10th European Development Fund.
Programme Statement
DB2016
3. An amount of EUR 3 million was transferred in 2016 from Middle East to Erasmus+ for actions in favour of Iran, as
foreseen in the Erasmus+ MIP. The total programming does not change, as the funds are added back to Middle East in
2017-2020.
Executive Summary
21 02 01 Latin America
On the basis of policy orientations, the Commission initially proposed for the geographical part of DCI covering the
period 2014-2020, that those countries considered as Upper Middle Income Countries (UMIC) in the Official
Development Assistance (ODA) recipients list of the OECD/DAC, would graduate from countries receiving bilateral
development cooperation funds. According to this principle, only 6 out of the 17 Latin America countries would have a
bilateral envelop for the period 2014-2020.
During the legislative process for a new DCI Regulation, the European Parliament and some EU Member States,
proposed and exerted pressure for an exception to this principle, in order to keep bilateral cooperation with five UMICs,
of which four in Latin America: Peru, Colombia, Ecuador and Cuba. The rationale was to conduct a smooth phasing out
of our bilateral cooperation in the Andean countries. This would imply the commitment of a new bilateral cooperation
allocation for these countries, in its entirety, during the first three years of the MFF, before definitely graduating during
the 2016-2017 period. Cuba would have a complete programming cycle of 7 years. This proposal was finally accepted.
For this reason, DG DEVCO request for commitment credits under this budget line in the first years of the Framework is
higher than initially expected and, therefore, the need to reach the maximum MFF ceiling.
21 02 02, 03, 04, 05 Asia, Central Asia, Middle East and Afghanistan
In accordance with the DCI Regulation countries like China, India and several other Asian countries (6 in total) have
graduated from bilateral assistance. In Central Asia, Kazakhstan is no longer eligible for bilateral support.
Eligible for bilateral programming remain 12 countries in Asia, 4 in Central Asia and 2 in the Middle East. In addition,
regional support will be provided in both Asia and Central Asia under regional programmes (as well as thematic support).
As in the period 2014-2020 more funds are available than in the previous cycle and there are less countries eligible, the
amount per country has increased considerably. Commitment allocations per country have been made on the basis of a
computer model that took into account various variables such as GNI, the size of the population, the 'Human Asset
Index', the 'Economic Vulnerability index', and World Governance Indicators.
Given the nature of the activities and given the nature of the countries concerned various risks may impact the
implementation of commitments, such as the impact that elections may have, the human rights situation, or other issues
of governance (notably when the implementation modality is sector budget support). However, in order to be able to
support positive developments in the countries concerned it is vital to have the planned amounts available in time.
The European Commission and the High representative presented on 09/02/2015 to the Foreign Affairs Council a Joint
Communication for an EU regional strategy for Syria and Iraq as well as the Da'esh threat. This strategy brings together
ongoing and planned initiatives of the EU with 1 billion in funding for 2015 and 2016. In 2016, DCI will contribute to
this strategy by providing a financial support of 50 million EUR to Iraq.
21 02 06 South Africa
South Africa is among the countries that are graduated from bilateral EU development cooperation, mainly based on
quantitative considerations (GDP, etc.), in line with the principles of the "Agenda for Change". However, the quantitative
model needed to be mitigated by some limited but necessary qualitative adjustments represented by the specific and
critical South African circumstances. In fact, the country's Upper Middle-Income status masks the many problems it
faces in terms of poverty (about 40% or the population live below the poverty line of ZAR 419 about EUR 30 per
month); inequality (with a Gini coefficient of 0.7); and unemployment (around 25%). In addition, South Africa's
apartheid history is very much felt in terms of the distribution of wealth, unemployment or educational performance.
These specific challenges and circumstances called for an exception to the principles of graduation for South Africa. The
country therefore remained eligible for bilateral cooperation as an exceptional case but was allocated a considerably
reduced envelope of EUR 241 million, down from EUR 980 million from in previous period. Moreover, the Commission
has proposed to increase commitment appropriations in 2016 and 2017 so as to concentrate the bulk of the allocation (in
the order of 80%) over the first four years in view of phasing out.
21 02 09 Pan-African
The Pan African Programme derives from the conclusions of the Lisbon and Tripoli Summits, where Africa and the EU
took the commitment at the highest political level to implement the Joint Africa EU Strategy (JAES) through an
ambitious agenda. The PanAf will be dedicated to support the JAES, as the first EU programme treating "Africa as one".
Programme Statement
DB2016
All policy areas and sectors proposed fall under the scope of the Joint Africa-EU Strategy and the overall EU-Africa
cooperation and are consistent with the European Agenda for Change and the EU's overall objectives for external action
of promoting democracy, peace, solidarity, stability, prosperity and poverty reduction and helping safeguard global
public goods.
The PanAf will contribute directly or indirectly to poverty eradication through actions at trans-regional, continental and
global level, targeting inclusive and sustainable growth. Within the specificity of the PanAf, Millennium Development
Goals (MDGs) and possible post 2015 new development targets will be mainstreamed in priority areas such as:
- the intensification of exchanges through increased economic integration and in particular the development of agriculture
[through Comprehensive Africa Agriculture Development Programme (CAADP)] will contribute to progress on MDG 1
for the eradication of extreme poverty and hunger;
- Issues linked to Gender and Youth (MDG 2 and 3) will be mainstreamed in all components, with a special attention in
the areas of governance, Human Rights and Migration & mobility;
- Actions in the area of environment will contribute to achieve MDG 7.
The main focus of actions to be adopted as part of the financing decision for 2016 will target agriculture. Some of the
actions will be adopted as part of the financing decision for 2015 and will be budgeted over the budgets 2015 and 2016
(multi-annual).
Global Public Goods and Challenges
21 02 07 01 - Environment and Climate Change
The programme enhances the environmental and climate change dimensions of development at all levels in order to
promote sustainability and to support transformation towards an inclusive green economy and strong international
environmental and climate governance. This seeks to ensure people-centred inclusive sustainable development within the
limits of planetary boundaries.
To achieve this, four main components complement work done at regional and national levels:
1.
Climate change adaptation and mitigation support to the transition to climate-resilient, low-carbon societies;
2.
Valuation, protection, enhancement and sustainable management of ecosystems;
3.
Transformation towards an inclusive green economy and mainstreaming of environmental sustainability, climate
change and disaster risk reduction;
4.
International environmental and climate governance in respect of the above priority areas.
A sound balance of implementation modalities is ensured, as appropriate, including calls for proposals.
Programme implementation to date and success stories:
Implementation of the programme is progressing well with activities planned and coordinated with other donors and
partners. All activities are being carried out according to schedule.
Spending of the EU budget in this area is successful with real benefits being felt on the ground. For example, the Chololo
village in Dodoma province is located in semi-arid drylands, one of three ecosystems targeted for support by the
Tanzania Global Climate Change Alliance (GCCA) project. The Chololo Ecovillage project (2011-2014) worked with
the community to identify, introduce and evaluate new approaches in agriculture, livestock, water, energy and forestry. It
proved a great local success and a source of learning on climate adaptation for other communities and regional and
national decision-makers. Its strategies are being shared widely.
Furthermore, as indicated in the strategy and multi-annual indicative programme of the GPGC programme, multidimensional flagship programmes which seek to go beyond traditional project and programme approaches in order to
maximise the sustainable development impact of EU policies are being developed. In the area of environment and climate
change, two flagship programmes (the Global Climate Change Alliance + (GCCA+) and the Forest Law Enforcement,
Governance and Trade (FLEGT) flagships) are building upon previous successes in these areas. The EU Biodiversity for
Life (B4Life) flagship was launched in 2014, the SWTICH TO GREEN flagship will be launched in 2015 and discussion
on a climate change mitigation flagship is underway. The flagships provide added value in increasing visibility of EU
action through response to specific global issues and challenges, in improving policy coherence and coordination and in
enhancing effectiveness and impact. These thematic flagship programmes are considered trademarks of innovative,
coherent and effective EU development cooperation.
Objectives and priorities for 2016:
Managing and implementing the SWITCH TO GREEN flagship and developing and implement the
recommendations of the Staff Working Document on Green Economy adopted in 2015;
Programme Statement
DB2016
Mainstreaming of environment and climate change in order to achieve the 20% climate target and the doubling
of biodiversity expenditure;
Supporting the implementation of the EU Action Plan on Forest Law Enforcement, Governance and Trade
(FLEGT) and efforts to promote sustainable land use and to tackle the drivers of deforestation and forest degradation,
with particular focus on promoting the participation of civil society organisations and strengthening independent
observation of forest and land use;
Managing and further implementation of the EU Biodiversity for Life (B4LIFE) initiative, taking advantage of
the strong linkages between ecosystems and livelihoods in view of contributing to poverty eradication;
Supporting the EUs contribution to the UNFCCC negotiations and the follow-up to the new Global Climate
Protocol to be adopted at COP 21 in Paris in December 2015 (in particular on adaptation and on climate finance).
Supporting Disaster Risk Reduction priority actions identified in the context of GCCA+ flagship initiatives and/or the EU
Action plan on Resilience in crisis prone countries 2014-2020, such as the Making Cities Resilient and the Disaster Risk
Financing programs already proposed in the AAP 2015
Supporting the implementation of the second phase of the Global Climate Change Alliance and launch at least 4
new country programmes.
21 02 07 02 - Sustainable energy
Energy is a key driver for sustainable and inclusive growth in Agenda for Change. Under the component dedicated to
sustainable energy within the programming for 2014-2020 efforts focus on the SE4All objectives.
Main priorities are: increasing/ensuring energy access (emphasis on rural electrification to address to those categories of
energy poor that risk being left behind, but also on supporting an integrated approach for planning and investing in
sustainable energy infrastructure in poor urban and semi-urban communities), fostering the use of renewable energy,
improving energy efficiency (including through working with municipalities on developing modalities to increase energy
efficiency), developing business models, stimulating and accelerating public and private investments in energy sector,
building strategic alliances with other donors/partners for facilitating dialogue and coordination.
Implementation modalities to be used in this area include a wide range of instruments and initiatives that can guarantee
active involvement of the private sector as well as feasibility, long-term sustainability and leverage through the use of
innovative financial arrangements. This targets a large group of beneficiaries and implementing partners.
The programme ensures complementarity with all geographical programmes: at both country and regional level projects
are to be identified together with EU Delegations and geographical services concerned.
21 02 07 03 - Human Development
The Human Development part of the programme covers seven priorities:

1.
Health
The programme targets support to the crucial elements of an effective and comprehensive health system that are best
addressed at a supra-national level. It addresses infectious diseases control, development of public health policies to deal
with the changing disease burden (non-communicable diseases and environmental risk factors), translation of medical
knowledge into products and policies, and shaping global markets to improve access to essential health supplies and
services, especially for sexual and reproductive health.
With the objective of controlling communicable diseases, it is of crucial importance that the EU continues its support to
the Global Fund to Fight AIDS, Tuberculosis and Malaria (GFATM) and GAVI, which has allowed the EU to play a key
role in shaping the global health policy agendas as well as contributing to progress on the MDGs at country level.
Therefore, the programme provides annual support to the GFATM and GAVI, with contributions of 33,6 and 10 million
respectively in 2016.
Within the second global objective of the health component of the GPGC, i.e. translating knowledge into health policies
and products, key domains for action are the design and management of health systems that offer universal and equitable
access with the necessary inputs (financing, human resources, supplies, information technology, governance, etc.),
effective multi-sectoral health promotion and public health interventions for improved population outcomes, and the
national adaptation of globally agreed health policies and regulations. Within GPGC, the EU invests in interventions that
require a collective approach to improving evidence-based health policymaking and analysis at country level. To this end,
the programme supported in 2015 the EU-WHO programme on Universal Health Coverage to improve policy planning
and implementation in key partner countries. Further support under this objective is planned in 2017.
2.
Education
The program aims to achieve three mutually reinforcing objectives on access, quality and equity in education. By
supporting the MDGs and education for all (EFA) goals, the EU is focusing its efforts in equitable education for all
children and youth, with girls making up 54% of the total out-of-school population. The EU is supporting policies to
Programme Statement
DB2016
accelerate progress while addressing imbalances in the system, particularly in support to reaching the most disadvantaged
children. Attention is given to enhancing education opportunities in fragile and conflict affected countries and contexts
where half of the worlds out-of-school children live. The programme also promotes knowledge generation and
dissemination, policy-relevant research, use of evidence in policy-making and systemic approaches. In this context, the
EU support to the Global Partnership for Education (GPE) is critical and the programme provides annual support to the
GPE, with an intended amount of 20 million in 2016. Knowledge generation and research activities are provisionally
foreseen to be supported by 7 million in 2016.
3.
Gender, women empowerment, protection of women and girls' rights
Gender equality and womens empowerment (GEWE) are at the centre of the European development policy since 2005,
when the European Consensus on Development defined them the key to all development and a core part of all policy
strategies, as well as a common value. The new programme continues to promote women and girls enjoyment of human
rights, the gender equality and women empowerment. In particular the focus will be on the fight against all forms of
violence and discrimination perpetrated against women and girls; the free and universal access for women and girls to
essential services (like health, education, etc.) but also access to and control over productive resources (for instance credit,
knowledge, technology, land). A specific focus finally will be done to the participation, representation and leadership of
women in all decision making processes, at all level (family, community , regional and national levels) as well as in all
spheres (economic, social, political sphere).
4.
Children, youth, non-discrimination
The Agenda for Change indicates children as one of the vulnerable groups which must benefit from European cooperation
activities. Indeed they are targeted by several programmes, like education, the fights against child mortality, food security
and nutrition. In addition, this programme aims at combating all forms of violence against and abuse of children,
including against harmful practices which lead to FGM and child marriage. In addition, it promotes the implementation of
policies that take into consideration the particular vulnerability and potential of children and young people, protection of
their rights, including the right to a legal identity (via registration at birth) and to participation in decision making process
and empowerment as actors for development.
This component of Human Development will not be covered in 2016, as yearly appropriations have been grouped for
more effective use of resources and impact.
5.
Employment, skills, social protection and social inclusion
The EU has made decent work a high priority of the political agenda under development cooperation, as reflected in the
GPGC, and stated in a range of high level policy documents such as the Agenda for Change. It is therefore more than
urgent to initiate/sustain progress in all the areas related to the decent work agenda in particular for the most vulnerable.
In that respect, the GPGC has established 3 priorities:
i. Supporting high levels of productive and decent employment, with a particular focus on youth, and including support
for skills development and vocational education and training, taking into account the informal economy and the Decent
Work Agenda;
ii. The extension of social protection coverage through the establishment of nationally-defined social protection systems
and floors;
iii. Strengthening social inclusion and promoting non-discrimination through the empowerment of people suffering from
marginalisation and exclusion, respect for their rights and equitable access to basic services and employment.
6.
Growth, jobs and private sector:
Actions financed through the programme include testing and disseminating of new approaches where private sector and
trade can have a positive contribution to development, support and participation in global platforms for knowledge
development and sharing in that field, build the capacity of relevant actors and facilitate the development and scaling up
of promising initiatives. The programme mainly focuses on the following three areas for which action at global level
through the GPGC programme are considered essential to complement interventions at regional and national levels:
Private Sector for Development: the Commission adopted on 13 May a Communication on "A Stronger Role of the
Private Sector in Achieving Inclusive and Sustainable Growth in Developing Countries" that sets out the future
direction of EU policy and support for private sector development in partner countries. In line with the Agenda for
Change, it also introduces private sector engagement as a new dimension in EU development policy and
cooperation. It proposes an ambitious set of actions to be operationalized from this budget line, as well as from
other development instruments. In particular actions aim at catalysing private sector engagement for development
Trade for Development: To further unfold the GPGC's objective to strengthen the nexus between trade and
sustainable and inclusive growth, a new action in collaboration with the International Trade Center (ITC) will be
assessed. The ITC is a joint agency from the UN and the WTO. Its joint mandate combines a focus on expanding
trade opportunities with the aim of fostering sustainable development. The new action would focus on the
Programme Statement
DB2016
continuation and expansion of successful ITC public goods, open to everyone, facilitating local economies and
developing countries integrate and benefit from the global trading system.
Resource transparency/Conflict minerals initiative: in March 2014, the Commission and the HR/VP proposed the
integrated EU approach (JOIN(2014)8 based on a Communication and a draft Regulation to tackle the problem of
trade in certain minerals in conflict and high risk areas. The Communication outlines a set of measures
accompanying the Regulation, including within our development cooperation with 3rd countries. Certain
accompanying measures could be funded from this budget line to increase the transparency, accountability and
good governance of extractive industries in eligible developing countries..
7.
Culture
The aim of the program is to support cultural production and industry as an important contribution to socio-economic
development and to promote culture as a vector for democracy and human rights. Global platforms for dialogue and
initiatives may also be strengthened through the instrument. Special attention is given to particular situations of "fragile"
countries. The Culture programme soughs complementarity with other programmes, namely the Instrument for Stability,
and is also mainstreamed through other thematic programmes.
A scoping study was initiated in 2015 to support identification of possible scenarios for funding actions from the Culture
programme. EUR 10 million will be used in 2016 following recommendations of the study once completed and
responding to one or both of the 2 following areas i) Support to intercultural dialogue, cultural diversity and respect for
equal dignity of all cultures; ii) Support to Culture as a promising economic sector for development growth.
Within the Human Development part of GPGC, a sound balance of implementation modalities is ensured, as appropriate,
including calls for proposals where relevant.
21 02 07 04 - Food Security, Nutrition and sustainable agriculture
In the area of food and nutrition security and sustainable agriculture, the overall objective is to improve food security for
the poorest and most vulnerable, to help eradicate poverty and hunger for current and future generations, and to better
address under-nutrition thereby reducing child mortality. This objective is pursued in line with the EU policy will focus
on enhancing the incomes of smallholder farmers, the resilience of vulnerable communities and on helping partner
countries reducing the number of stunted children by 7 million by 2025. As food security is a global challenge, the GPGC
programme focuses on activities and approaches to address global public goods and challenges that provide strong
multiplier to the agricultural, livestock and fisheries sector, to the food and nutrition security situation of households, to
the rural economy and food systems, and the resilience of the most vulnerable households to shocks and stresses This
complements and adds value to the support provided through geographical programmes.
The following three components are included in the theme:
1. Generating and exchanging knowledge and fostering innovation, and apply new knowledge to the challenges of food
and nutrition security mainly at international and continental levels. This component works with existing global and
regional initiatives, but also envisages new partnerships that are needed to ensure that knowledge generated by research is
used by beneficiaries to improve their income and livelihoods;
In 2014, 2015 and 2016, the focus is placed in particular in reinforcing the dissemination to and application of research
results by small holder farmers, communities and families in view of increasing their food security and livelihood. For
example, the action "Putting Research into Use for Nutrition, Sustainability And Resilience" aims to develop and test
innovative approaches that impact positively on the livelihoods, nutrition or resilience of pilot rural communities and
smallholder farmers and to generate lessons for scaling up and it provides support to selected CGIAR (Consultative Group
on International Agricultural Research) research programmes.
The action "Capacity Development for Agricultural Innovation Systems" is ensuring that agricultural innovation systems
are efficient and sustainable in meeting demands of smallholder farmers, agri-business and consumers. It is establishing a
sustainable global partnership on capacity development in agricultural innovation systems, with needs assessed and
approaches validated in 8 pilot countries.
The specific objective of the action "Fortified foods" is to strengthen beneficiary countries' Institutional and technical
capacities related to food fortification through technical support on specific subjects such as legal issues, economic
analysis, evidence based policy guidance on nutrition. The first step has been to mobilise Technical assistance to assist
beneficiary countries preparing programmes on food fortification to be developed in at country level possibly within the
geographical programmes.
Programme Statement
DB2016
The African Insects Science for Food and Health (icipe) received a grant for a four year research programme whose
objective is to contribute to increasing production, productivity, incomes and nutrition among poor small holder agropastoral households and nomadic pastoralist communities.
2. Strengthening and promoting governance and capacity at the global, continental, regional and national level, for all
relevant stakeholders. This component will support international initiatives addressing food and nutrition security,
including land, sustainable fisheries, and improve the effectiveness of dialogue on food and nutrition security issues. It
will also foster a coordinated international effort to generate reliable, accessible and timely information and analytical
capacity to support evidence-based policy making and to strengthen and/or set up sustainable regional and national
information systems for food security (ISFS) institutions. This component may also support capacity development
initiatives of stakeholders such as, CSOs, farmers' organizations and other inter-professional groups along the value chain;
In 2014 2015 and 2016 the focus is placed on increasing governments' ability to design and implement effective policies
for food security. This is done by making available evidence based scientific advice and technical assistance services, by
disseminating and reinforcing information systems, and by working along the agricultural value chains.
For example, the International Commission for the Conservations of Atlantic Tunas (ICCAT) is providing evidence based
scientific advices to developing costal states to ensure sustainable management of tropical tuna resources in the Atlantic
Ocean and in turn contribute to their food security and economic growth.
The action "Information for Nutrition, Food Security, Resilience Decision Making" (INFORMED) aims at strengthening
the most common and largely used food and nutrition security assessment tools and at creating a reliable resilience
measurement index. These tools will assist governments and technical and financial partners to take appropriate and
timely decisions. The governments' capacity building and knowledge sharing are at the core of the program. The action is
implemented with FAO and with UNDP for the central American component.
The goal of the action "ASEAN Farmers' Organisations' Support Programme" (AFOSP) is to improve the livelihoods and
food security of smallholder farmers and rural producers in ASEAN countries through strengthened capacity of farmers
and their organizations to influence national government and ASEAN policies impacting on the livelihoods of poor
producers, and to provide effective services to members..
3. Supporting the poor and food and nutrition insecure to react to crises and strengthen resilience. This component will
provide support to countries where there will not be bilateral programmes under geographical programming, to countries
which suffer from the consequences from a major unforeseen crisis and/or shock, including natural and man-made
disasters, epidemics and major economic shocks, as well as to countries where the situation has deteriorated significantly
due to a crisis. To address the root causes of food and nutrition crises in fragile and food crisis prone countries, this
component will also support innovative approaches to strengthen prevention and to build resilience. Where relevant,
interventions will be also designed in order to enhance synergies and complementarities between humanitarian and
development interventions. Joint analysis of the situation performed by humanitarian and development stakeholders will
be encouraged.
In 2014 DEVCO developed a mechanism to identify situations needing intervention and to prioritise the actions called
PRO ACT which allows to exclude the less relevant requests. For example in 2015 according to the Integrated Phase
Classification (IPC) a total of 41.5 million people were in crises or emergency (phase 3 or 4) in terms of food and
nutrition security. These people were the main target of PRO-ACT in 2015. Since the needs are wider than the available
resources, PRO-ACT criteria for prioritisation have been applied and the situations considered as requiring urgent
interventions were: the negative impact of the Ebola outbreak on the food security situation in West Africa, in particular
Liberia and Sierra Leone, the political/military crises in Syria (including affected population in Iraq), the protracted crises
in Burundi and Sudan, the multifactor crises cumulating chronic food insecurity with one shot events in DPR Korea (food
spikes, food production decrease), Gambia (Ebola indirect effects, weather extremes, crop failures due to birth attacks)
and Nigeria (terrorism, political instability, localized crop failure), the climatic crisis in Cape Verde.
21 02 07 05 - Migration and Asylum
The GPGC migration and asylum programme aims to enhance the governance of migration in and by developing
countries, placing particular attention on maximising the positive impact and minimising the negative impact of
migration and mobility on development in low- and middle-income countries of origin and destination. The programme
puts specific emphasis on the need to promote the benefits of migration for migrants themselves and for their
communities of origin, while supporting their integration into hosting communities, by following a migrant centred
approach. Protection of the human rights of migrants, in particular vulnerable categories of migrants, and support for EU
commitments to ensure Policy Coherence for Development on migration is pursued as crosscutting objectives. The
majority of actions launched simultaneously cover more than one of the components mentioned below.
The programme supports the implementation of the Commission's May 2013 Communication on 'Maximising the
Development Impact of Migration' (COM(2013)292 final). In addition, in coordination and complementarity with the
Programme Statement
DB2016
geographical external cooperation instruments (such as the European Neighbourhood Instrument) and other funding
strands, such as the Asylum, Migration and Integration Fund managed by DG HOME, it provides support to the
implementation of the EU's Global Approach to Migration and Mobility (GAMM).
The programme focuses mainly on initiatives at global level as well as multi-regional level (e.g. to support cooperation
along South-South or South-North migratory routes). A limited number of national projects to support new cooperation
activities with priority countries for the EU external migration policy may also be launched.
The main priorities are:
1.
Promotion of effective governance of migration and mobility and improved management of migratory flows in
all their dimensions
2.
Enhance the positive impact of the increased regional and global migration and mobility of people on economic,
social and environmental development
3.
Improving a common understanding of the migration and development nexus
Close attention across the different components is given to the cross-cutting priority of promoting a migrant-centred and
rights-based approach.
21 02 08 01, 02 Civil society and Local authorities in development
The objective of this Programme is to strengthen civil society organisations and local authorities; this is articulated around
the two core pillars of the Agenda for Change, acknowledging that governance and sustainable and inclusive growth are
deeply intertwined and mutually reinforcing.
Accordingly, the Programme pursues the objective of improving governance and accountability through inclusive policymaking by empowering citizens and populations, through the voicing and structuring of their collective demands, to
contribute to tackle injustice and inequality.
Three main priorities are pursued, for which in 2016 support will focus on the activities described below under each
priority:
1. Focus on country level: enhancing CSOs' and LAs' contributions to governance and development processes.
Support will be provided to:
I. Enhance CSOs' contributions to governance and development processes:
a. by supporting initiatives promoting improved governance and accountability at country level and with public
authorities, such as independent budget analysis, expenditure tracking, monitoring the implementation of policies and
laws, anti-corruption initiatives, integrity pacts, participatory budgeting, participatory audits, procurement monitoring and
public access to information legislation, and promoting judicial reform. Special attention will be paid to capacity building,
research and knowledge dissemination, networking and structuring of networks, and mentoring opportunities for CSOs.
b. by supporting CSOs actions aimed at improving population access to (and benefit from) quality social services,
notably in testing innovations and improving responsiveness of social policies to populations' needs, contributing to the
improvement of service quality by contributing to policy work, stimulating informed demand and social accountability
initiatives, including using Information and Communication Technologies, improving capacities to participate in multiactor partnerships, within sound organisational arrangements agreed with public authorities (including outsourcing
schemes where public authorities share selected functions and tasks with CSOs and the private sector, etc.), providing
social services where public authorities, including LAs, do not have the capacity or the resources to effectively deliver
services to populations.
c. by supporting CSO actions aimed at promoting inclusive and sustainable growth such as stimulating policy innovation
and improving responsiveness of economic policies to populations' needs, through advocacy and participation to policy
dialogue in relevant sectors, improving capacities to participate in multi-actor partnerships with the private sector and
public authorities, supporting social-economic initiatives aimed at wealth and job creation, targeting populations with
limited opportunities for economic empowerment, including affordable innovations, reinforcing service provision for
productive activities and access to productive resources (e.g. , business support, market access, opportunities for
integration of the informal economy, micro credit) to populations with limited access to such means to enhance their
livelihoods, contributing to the improvement of business practices and economic services' quality highlighting governance
and corporate social responsibility by stimulating informed demand and structuring feedback mechanisms, notably using
Information and Communication Technologies.
II. Enhance LAs' contributions to governance and development processes:
a. support will aim at building local technical expertise and develop capacities of politicians and civil servants at local
level, while encouraging participation of women in the local administration, support actions enhancing the accountability
of LAs, including their self-governing capacity and their accountability as public institutions, enhance their institutional
and operational capacities in performing their main functions.
Programme Statement
DB2016
b. the programme will support LAs in mobilising relevant stakeholders to ensure service provision, including the
establishment of public-private and public-civil society partnerships for service delivery, even in consideration of the
challenges imposed by rapid urbanisation phenomena. The programme will also support actions to strengthen the capacity
of ALAs at country level to provide their members with assistance, advice and sharing of knowledge in relation to policy
dialogue and service provision to local communities.
2. Reinforcing regional and global CSO Networks and Associations of LAs.
By supporting initiatives of the CSOs networks and ALAs to jointly act as strategic partners for key policy
makers, through contributions to (1) the formulation of policies/policy-making processes; (2) the implementation of
policies and agreements on topics particularly related to the post-2015 Development Agenda as well as to regional process
of integration and (3) monitoring policies and agreements implementation.
By strengthening capacities and representativeness of CSOs networks to effectively link local realities and
communities to regional and global debates;
By improving the institutional and operational capacities of ALAs to ensure the execution of their functions vis-vis their members and facilitating the role that ALAs play in raising awareness about decentralisation reform, local and
urban development as well as in shaping the international/regional development agenda with a focus on the interests of
local communities;
By facilitating experience and knowledge sharing within and among CSOs networks and ALAs, particularly with
the view to enhance their members capacities;
3. Develop and support Education and Awareness Raising (DEAR) initiatives fostering EU citizens' awareness of and
mobilization for development issues.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Partnership instrument for cooperation with third countries (PI)

Lead DG: FPI
Associated DGs: EAC
1.
Legal Basis
Reference Amount
(EUR million)

Council of 11 March 2014 establishing a Partnership Instrument for
cooperation with third countries
2014 - 2020
954,8
Executive Agency
Total
Of which contribution to
Erasmus+
2.
2014
4,3
115,4
0,3
119,9
2015
4,0
114,4
0,2
118,6
8,2
11,7

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
5,0
5,0
5,1
5,5
120,4
128,5
138,0
148,5
0,2
0,2
0,1
0,0
125,6
133,7
143,2
154,0
14,7
15,6
11,5
12,5
2020
5,8
156,4
0,0
162,3
Total
34,7
921,6
1,0
957,3
13,7
88,0
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
120,489
100,20 %
5,195
63,07 % 119,160
2,99 % 56,207
3,60 %
Authorised
revenue
99,73 %
4,880
62,29 % 118,813
3,42 % 55,618
3,60 %
3.
EU added value
The Partnership Instrument (PI) has been designed to advance and promote EU and mutual interests abroad by supporting
the external dimension of EU policies, in particular the "Europe 2020" strategy, and by addressing major global
challenges, both at bilateral and at multilateral level. Contrary to many traditional financing instruments, the PI promotes
peer to peer relationships globally, although with a specific focus on EU's designated strategic partners1. The PI also
intends to improve market access and develop trade and business opportunities for EU companies through economic
partnerships, business and regulatory cooperation. Finally, the PI is intended to enhance widespread understanding and
visibility of the Union on the world scene by means of public diplomacy, education/academic cooperation & outreach
activities.
The EU has numerous international agreements with partner countries all over the world, not matched by individual
Member States, which gives to all of them influence in virtually all fields of international relations. By combining the
weight of all Member States acting within common policies and strategies, only the EU has the critical weight to respond
Programme Statement
DB2016
to global challenges. The EU as a global player has the credibility and the neutrality which is not available to individual
Member States. The EU is also in a unique position to promote EU norms and turn them into global standards through
international cooperation.
1. The EU has signed Strategic Partnership agreements with Brazil, Canada, China, India, Japan, Mexico, Republic of Korea, Russian
Federation and USA. When referring below to 9 strategic partners, it is being referred to these countries.
N.B.: South Africa signed a Strategic Partnership with the EU in 2007, however it is still benefitting from bilateral development
assistance under the DCI. The PI being an instrument of "last resort" is not planning major operations in South Africa, therefore it is
not counted in the baselines, milestones and targets of the instrument, as reflected below.
See specific objectives 1 and 2 (Section 4). One of the specific objectives of the PI is to implement the international
dimension of the 'Europe 2020'. Headline targets set by the 'Europe 2020' strategy are relevant for the EU-28, hence PI
contributes to the achievement of these targets in an indirect manner, by facilitating the reduction of greenhouse gas
emissions, increasing energy efficiency and promoting the use of energy from renewables at the global level. In addition,
through actions implemented under specific objective 3, the PI can indirectly contribute to the achievement of the
headline target on employment.

Flagship
Budget 2015
EUR million
11,7
Youth on the move
DB 2016
EUR million
14,7
The precise budgetary allocations will be confirmed upon adoption of the Annual Action Programme
Contribution to mainstreaming of climate action*

Budget 2015
(EUR million)
DB 2016
(EUR million)
21,0
23,0
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
7,0**
DB 2016
(EUR million)
4,0***
Specific objectives 1, 2 and 3

Contribution to financing biodiversity*
Methodology
**
The figure of EUR 7 million related to 2015 corresponds to the natural Capital Accounting and Valuation of Ecosystem Services, one of the
programmes (Action fiches) that has been included in the AAP 2015.
*** With regard to 2016, in the light of the MIP programing indicative financial allocations and previous experience with AAP 2014 and AAP 2015
referred to above, FPI estimate that EUR 4 million will constitute biodiversity expenditure in 2016
*FPI has used the RIO markers -as developed by DG DEVCO- to estimate the percentage of the 2016 budget that will be
allocated to mainstreaming climate action and biodiversity. The annual reporting should confirm the contribution
amounts entered in the Programme Statement.
The amounts indicated as contribution to mainstreaming of climate action and to financing biodiversity result from the
indicative financial allocation whereby a maximum of 20% of the PI budget for the period 2014-2020 should be
dedicated to Global Challenges (climate change, energy security and the protection of the environment).
Programme Statement
DB2016
General objectives
General Objective 1: The Partnership Instrument shall support measures that respond in an effective and flexible
manner to objectives arising from the Union's bilateral, regional or multilateral relationships with third countries and
address challenges of global concern, or ensure an adequate follow-up to decisions taken at multilateral level.
Indicator 1: Number of negotiations processes launched, agreements concluded (e.g. FTAs, PCAs, MoUs, TTIP,
etc.), and legislation adopted and/or amended by the key partner countries
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014*
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Relevant existing instruments
A mid-term review
At least 1 new
(e.g. agreements, declarations,
will be carried out to
relevant agreement
action plans) and negotiation
measure
the
or
negotiation
processes ongoing with EUs
contribution of PI
process launched
strategic partners, regional
towards the 2020
per strategic partner
organisations and at
target
multilateral level
* Data sources:
PI website: http://ec.europa.eu/dgs/fpi/what-we-do/partnership_instrument_en.htm
Under "instruments", the term covers mainly agreements, but also declarations and action plans are counted. The EU has
to date signed Strategic Partnership agreements with 10 countries: Brazil, Canada, China, India, Japan, Mexico, Republic
of Korea, Russian Federation, South Africa and USA.
In the framework of the Strategic Partnership agreement, or in addition to it, the EU often concludes bilateral agreements
with these countries. Bilateral agreements traditionally contain three pillars: cooperation, trade and economic relations
and political dialogue. These agreements vary in scope, content and level of ambition/engagement: Free Trade
Agreements, Partnership and Cooperation Agreements, Association Agreements, visa liberalisation agreements, etc. The
PI will facilitate the implementation of such agreements, often materialised through Memoranda of Understanding, letters
of intent, joint strategies and action plans, etc.,
Information on developments in the negotiation and conclusion of these processes will be obtained directly from EU
internal sources (i.e. EEAS and Commission services involved) and from data sources relevant for the strategic partners,
including relevant websites.
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: To support the Union's bilateral, regional and inter-regional cooperation partnership strategies, by
promoting policy dialogues and by developing collective approaches and responses to challenges of global concern.
Indicator: Progress made by key partner countries in the fight against climate change or in promoting the
environmental standards of the Union, as measured by the following sub-indicators:
Sub-indicator 1a - Operating Emissions Trading Schemes for greenhouse gas mitigation (ETS) outside the EU/EEA (at
city, regional, country or multi-country level)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014*
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
17
18
20
21
22
24
* Data source: https://icapcarbonaction.com/component/attach/?task=download&id=152 (data extracted on 6 February 2015)
26
Programme Statement
DB2016
Sub-indicator 1b - Share of renewables in total energy production in the 9 strategic partners

Baseline
2014*
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2015
Brazil: 46%
Canada: 11%
China: 12%
India: 36%
Japan: 66%
Republic of Korea: 5%
Mexico: 8%
Russian Federation: 1%
USA: 7%
Increase
in share
%
Target 2020
2019
Increase Increase Increase Increase Increase in share by at

least 10% in each
in share in share in share in share
strategic partner
%
%
%
%
* Data source: http://energyatlas.iea.org/?subject=-1076250891 (data extracted on 6 February 2015. Last data available 2012)
Sub-indicator 1c - CO2 emissions from fuel combustion in the 9 strategic partners

Baseline
2014*
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
2018
Reduction Reduction Reduction Reduction Reduction

by 1%
by 2%
by 3%
by 4%
by 5%
20,113 Mt CO2
Target 2020
2019
Reduction by 6%
* Data source: http://energyatlas.iea.org/?subject=1378539487 (data extracted on 6 February 2015. Last data available 2012)
Sub-indicator 1d - Number of local and regional authorities signing the Covenant of Mayors
Baseline
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
6,279
7,000
7,600
Target 2020
2018
2019
8,100
4,000 new cities in at

least 30 countries have
joined the cooperation
9,000
in the field of
sustainable energy
(Global Covenant)
* Data source: http://www.covenantofmayors.eu/index_en.html (data extracted on 6 February 2015)

The Covenant of Mayors is a mainstream European movement in the field of climate change with a focus on sustainable energy. It involves local and
regional authorities voluntarily committing to increasing energy efficiency and use of renewable energy sources on their territories.

Output
Budget line
Actions funded in the field of global challenges and policy

support under the Annual Action Programme*
19 05 01
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
7*
49,0*
* The precise number of actions and budget will be confirmed upon adoption of the Annual Action Programme.
Output
Actions funded in the field of global F
challenges and policy support under
the Annual Action Programme*
P

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
7
Total
49
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 2: Implementing the international dimension of "Europe 2020 - A strategy for smart, sustainable
and inclusive growth".
Indicator 1: Uptake of the "Europe 2020" strategy by key partner countries, as measured by the following subindicators:
Sub-indicator 1a - Number of cities that have signed new bilateral or multilateral agreements on sustainable urban
development
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014*
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
At least 84 cities in at
0
0
6
25
47
64
least 7 strategic
partners
* Data source: PI monitoring reports
Sub-indicator 1b - Number of regions that have signed new bilateral or multilateral agreements on innovation
Baseline
2014*
2015
2016
Milestones
2017
2018
2019
11
15
Target 2020
At least 18 regions
/provinces worldwide
* Data source: PI monitoring reports
Sub-indicator 1c - Number of international agreements on Migration and Mobility signed with the strategic partners
Baseline
2014*
2015
15
15
2016
15
Milestones
2017
17
Target 2020
2018
17
2019
19
20
* Data source: https://myintracomm.ec.europa.eu/dg/home/policy/legal/Pages/International-agreements.aspx (data extracted on 6 February

2015)
Sub-indicator 1d - Average worldwide level of implementation of international safety standards in civil aviation
Baseline
2014*
2015
2016
Milestones
2017
2018
2019
61%
61%
61%
62%
63%
63%
Target 2020
Increase by at least
5%
* Data source: http://www.icao.int/safety/Documents/ICAO_2014%20Safety%20Report_final_02042014_web.pdf (data extracted on 6 February 2015.

Last data available 2014)

Output
Budget line
Actions funded in support of Europe 2020 strategy and/or to

support the externalisation of EU internal policies under the Annual
Action Programme*
19 05 01
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
3*
23,0*

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Output
Actions funded in support of Europe F
2020 strategy and/or to support the
externalisation of EU internal policies P
under the Annual Action Programme*
Total
20
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 3: Improving access to third country markets and boosting trade, investment and business
opportunities for European companies, while eliminating barriers to market access and investment, by means of
economic partnerships, business and regulatory cooperation.
Indicator 1: EU share in foreign trade in goods and services of 9 strategic partners
Milestones
Baseline*
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2008: 19,6%
2009: 19,1%
Possible
2010: 17,8%
Maintain Maintain
Maintain Maintain
increase in
2011: 17,4%
share
share
share
share
share
2012: 17,1%
2013: 17,0%
2019
Target 2020
Possible
Overall increase
increase in
in share
share
*EU share in Brazil, Mexico, US, Canada, Russian Federation, India, China, Japan and Republic of Korea total foreign
trade in goods and services (imports + exports) (N.B.: these figures don't measure these countries' share in EU foreign
trade). Data for baseline extracted on 26 March 2015.
For data on trade in goods, the reporter is EU-28.
For data on trade in services, the reporter before 2010 was EU-27 and from 2010 it is EU-28. From 2012, the data for
trade in services is calculated according to BMP6 (Balance of Payments and International Investment Position Manual)
methodology.
Data source: COMEXT/IMF (http://ec.europa.eu/eurostat/web/international-trade/data/database) for trade in goods - first
data published approximately in July of year n+1. WTO/EUROSTAT for trade in services first WTO data published in
April of year n+1, preliminary EUROSTAT data published approximately in June of year n+1 and complete EUROSTAT
data published approximately in December of year n+1.
Indicator 2: EU investments flows from/to 9 strategic partners
Milestones
Baseline 2013*
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
EU Foreign Direct
Investment
Possible
- Inward flows: 468 billion Maintain Maintain
Maintain Maintain
increase in
EUR
FDI flows FDI flows FDI flows FDI flows
FDI flows
- Outward flows: 324
billion EUR
2019
Possible
increase in
FDI flows
Target 2020
Increase FDI
flows in
parallel with
global
economic
growth
*Until 2012 the reporter was the EU-27 and the data were calculated according to BMP5 (Balance of Payments and
International Investment Position Manual) methodology. The figures as from 2013 use the reporter of EU-28 and are
calculated according to BPM6. Data for baseline extracted on 13 February 2015.
Data
source:
EUROSTAT
(http://ec.europa.eu/eurostat/statisticsexplained/index.php/Foreign_direct_investment_statistics), preliminary data for selected countries published in June of
year n+1; data with complete geographical breakdown are foreseen in December of year n+1.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
Budget line
Actions funded to support and increase EUs position on the world

scene in terms of trade and foreign investment
19 05 01
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
5*
23,0*
Output
2014
Actions funded to support and F

increase EUs position on the
world scene in terms of trade
P
and foreign investment

2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
5
Total
31
The Partnership Instrument will build on the experience gained with the ICI to support EU trade overall objectives by
financing measures to improve market access and develop trade, investment and business opportunities. With its global
reach, the PI supports in particular the opportunities arising from the Free Trade Agreements (FTAs) negotiated and the
ones under negotiation. It will be instrumental in supporting trade policy (COM/2010/612 - "Trade, Growth and World
Affairs - Trade policy as a core component of the EU's 2020 Strategy"), in particular as regards the strategic economic
partners.
Specific Objective 4: Enhancing widespread understanding and visibility of the Union and its role on the world scene
by means of public diplomacy, people to people contacts, education/academic/think tank cooperation and outreach
activities to promote the Union's values and interests.
Indicator 1: Number of opinion surveys and/or evaluations
Milestones
Target 2020
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Mid-term review: opinion
In progress*
tbd
tbd
surveys and/or evaluation
tbd
tbd
tbd
results
* A study on the perception of the EU in different areas of the world has been launched in 2014. The study will provide
an overview of the perception of Europe and of the EU in the following regions and strategic partners: North America
(with particular focus on Canada and the US), Latin America and the Caribbean (with particular focus on Brazil and
Mexico), ASEAN and the Pacific (with particular focus on China, India, Japan and the Republic of Korea), the Russian
Federation and South Africa. The results of the study are expected in the course of 2015.
Baseline
2014

Output
Budget line
1. Education / academic cooperation (covered by a PIspecific "Erasmus +" Multi-annual Indicative Programme)
19 05 20
2. Actions funded in the area of public diplomacy, people to

people contacts and outreach activities
19 05 01
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
See
Programme
Statement
for
14,7
"Erasmus +"
At least 4*
Total
10.7*
25,4

Due to the late adoption of the legal base and the delays inherent to the strategic dialogue and the multi-annual
programming, the AAP 2014 was adopted in October 2014 with programme and actions being contracted and
implemented in 2015. Therefore the actions cannot be evaluated in terms of results/achievements. The first results will be
available in 2017: a strategic evaluation on the Partnership Instrument will be launched at the end of 2016, in view of the
mid-term review.
Programme Statement
DB2016
European Instrument for Democracy and Human Rights (EIDHR)

Lead DG: DEVCO
Associated DGs: FPI
1.
Legal Basis
Reference Amount
(EUR million)

Council of 11 March 2014 establishing a financing instrument for
democracy and human rights worldwide
2014 - 2020
1 332,8
2014
Total
2.
2015
11,0
173,2
184,2
10,4
171,4
181,8

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
10,6
174,9
185,5
10,8
178,2
189,0
11,1
181,7
192,8
2020
11,3
185,3
196,7
Total
11,6
76,8
189,7 1 254,4
201,3 1 331,2
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
187,930
101,67 %
34,396 99,52 %
182,531 52,77 %
78,508
9,80 %
Authorised
revenue
100,59 %
31,776 90,42 %
182,161 53,10 %
76,906
8,81 %
3.
EU added value
Given its accomplishments in conflict resolution, peace building and the creation of prosperity, the EU is in an excellent
position to deliver on external action, on behalf of and with its Member States, generally enjoying high credibility in the
countries where it works. It is well placed to take on the role of a global leader on behalf of its citizens, in particular in its
support and promotion of democracy and human rights. European added value is much larger than suggested by purely
balance sheet approach: contributing to peace building worldwide, assisting the world's poorest people and supporting
democracy and respect for human rights are indisputable demonstrations of how the EU adds value through its work
every day.
Due to its scale and remit, the EU can deliver help in the world's most remote areas, hereby enhancing the strategic reach
of Member States, especially in cases when their presence is limited and therefore the capacity to act is reduced.
Election Observation Missions (EU EOMs) contribute to projecting EU values like democracy and rule of law outside of
the European Union. Electoral missions aim at building confidence, enhancing the reliability and transparency of
democratic electoral processes, and discouraging irregularities, abuse and electoral violence. They have therefore become
an important flagship of the EU foreign policy. Furthermore, EOMs constitute an example of inter-institutional
cooperation between the European Commission, the European External Action Service (EEAS) and the European
Parliament. The EEAS is responsible for all programming and political aspects, whereas the European Commission is in
charge of the operational, logistical and security-related aspects of the election observation. EU EOMs are led by a Chief
Programme Statement
DB2016
Observer (Member of the European Parliament, MEP). Furthermore, a Delegation of the European Parliament composed
of MEPs is deployed to the partner country to observe the Election Day and is fully embedded in the EOM. The EU
Member States also play a crucial role as they are, via their respective Focal Points for election observation, responsible
for the pre-selection of the EU Observers. Furthermore, the EU Member States are also consulted on the establishment of
the yearly priority list for election observation.
Not applicable
Not applicable
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
Support to environmental human rights defenders
DB 2016
(EUR million)
6,1*
5,0
* Amount estimated based on 2014 activities; an increasing number of human rights defenders fighting against violations
of environmental rights, or the defence of activists involved in fields such as land grabbing, water pollution, or nonrespect of laws by building or extraction industries, are victims of human rights violations. The EIDHR supports those
human rights defenders that contribute to the defence of the environment.
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: Enhancing the respect for and observance of human rights and fundamental freedoms, as
proclaimed in the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and other international and regional human rights
instruments, and strengthening their protection, promotion, implementation and monitoring, mainly through support to
relevant civil society organisations, human rights defenders and victims of repression and abuse.
Indicator 1: Level of implementation of United Nations Universal Periodic Review* recommendations which have
been accepted by states in percentage
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2012
2014***
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
33.7%**
33.8%
33.9%
34.2%
34.5%
34.8%
35%
35.3%
* These data are monitored by the UN OHCHR and the UNHRC. Reports can be found through UN OHCHR web site.
**
Data
from
all
developing
countries;
david_frazier_paper_upr_implementation_2011-2.pdf.
source:
http://www.upr-info.org/sites/default/files/general-document/pdf/-
*** The actual value for 2014 is not yet available at the time of the Programme Statement preparation.
General Objective 2: Supporting, developing and consolidating democracy in third countries, by enhancing
participatory and representative democracy, strengthening the overall democratic cycle, in particular by reinforcing an
active role for civil society within this cycle, the rule of law and improving the reliability of electoral processes, in
particular by means of election observation missions.
Indicator 1: Number of electoral processes and democratic cycles supported, observed, and followed
Baseline
2012
2014
20
2015
25
(24 actual value)
25
Milestones
2016
2017
25
25
2018
Target 2020
2019
25
25
175
(25 per year)
Programme Statement
DB2016
This indicator builds on the number of electoral process at national level that have been established by partner countries
own constitutional calendars.
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: Support to Human Rights and Human Rights Defenders in situations where they are most at risk.
Indicator 1: Number of Human Rights Defender individuals who have received EU support (being protected
politically, legally and/or physically and pulled out of their position of abuses)
Milestones
Baseline
Target
2013
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
230
300
(Result:421)
300
300
300
300
300
300*
Source: CSO networks and small grants allocated.

* Target set on the basis of our experience from the last programming period. For the 2014-2020 programming, it was
decided in the light of the results achieved between 2007 and 2013 to strengthen EU support to Human rights and Human
Rights Defenders (HRD), who play a vital role in the promotion and protection of human rights. The success and
performance of this programme considered as a flag ship of the EIDHR activities turns into an increasingly number of
requests. The EU comprehensive Human Rights Defenders Mechanism (worth EUR 15 million in the 2014 budget, to be
launched mid 2015) addressing the most difficult human rights situations faced by human rights defenders worldwide
will confirm this trend. This mechanism will be additional to the EU support to human rights defenders in cases of urgent
need through ad-hoc grants of up to EUR 10 000 as well as to the existing support to HRDs provided under previous
EIDHR calls for proposals.
Indicator 2: Number of crisis response projects implemented under the EIDHR
Baseline
2012
2014
2015
10
15**
15
Milestones
2016
2017
15
15
2018
2019
Target
2020
15
15
15*
*Target set on the basis of our experience from the last programming period
**The 2014 milestone was realised as follows: 9 in country projects (most difficult situations as Belarus, Syria, Ukraine)
and 6 global projects were deployed offering a global coverage and compiling a mix of in-country and multi-country
projects (most difficult type of HR violation and/or categories of defenders at risk) activities.
Draft Budget 2016
Output
Budget line
Projects related to situation where Human Right Defenders

are most at risk
21 04 01
Number
EUR million
52
34,7

2014
Projects related to situation

where Human Right
Defenders are most at risk
52
86*
2015
52
2016
52
2017
52
2018
52
* 86 projects were financed for an amount of EUR 14,76 million.
2019
52
2020
52
Total
364
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 2: Support to other priorities of the Union in the fields of human rights
Indicator 1: Number of EIDHR projects in line with EU Guidelines*
Baseline
2012
150
2014
250
(Result: 271)
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target
2020
250
250
250
250
250
250
*http://eeas.europa.eu/human_rights/guidelines/index_en.htm
EU guidelines are not legally binding, but because they have been adopted at ministerial level, they represent a strong
political signal that they are priorities for the Union. Guidelines are pragmatic instruments of EU Human Rights policy
and practical tools to help EU representations in the field better advance our Human Rights policy. They also serve as
priorities for defining activities in order to put into practice the political orientation.
There are 10 Human Rights Guidelines we are delivering on:
1. Death penalty (2013)
2. Torture and other cruel, inhuman or degrading treatment or punishment (2012)
3. EU Guidelines on the promotion and protection of freedom of religion or belief (2013)
4. Guidelines to promote and protect the enjoyment of all Human Rights by lesbian, gay, bisexual, transgender and
intersex (LGBTI) persons (2013)
5. Human Rights dialogues with third countries (2009)
6. Children and armed conflict (2008)
7. Human Rights defenders (2008)
8. Promotion and Protection of the Rights of the Child (2008)
7. Violence against women and girls and combating all forms of discrimination against them (2008)
10. International Humanitarian Law
11. EU Human Rights Guidelines on Freedom of Expression Online and Offline
Despite the fact that the indicator is output oriented, the number of EIDHR projects is an important element, for such a
financial instrument, as it should be highlighted that having a human rights project in place in some countries is an
achievement by itself. For this reason part of the EIDHR projects are classified confidential. As example under the
Country Based Support Scheme (CBSS), it was officially possible to support activities in China and Eritrea in 2014, the
official support for activities in Cuba is still under negotiation and the activities in Egypt are likely to be abandoned.
Indicator 2: Number of Human Rights victims benefitting from EIDHR projects

Baseline
2012
2014
4 000
3 000
Milestones
2016
2017
4 000
4 000
2015
4 000
2018
4 000
Target
2020
2019
4 000
4 000*
*Target set based on experience from the previous programming period.

Output
Projects
Budget line
21 04 01
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
160
43,6
Programme Statement
DB2016

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Outputs
F
250 250
Projects
P
250
250
250
250
Total
250
1 250
271*
* estimated, to be fine-tuned by the end of 2015 when the contractualisation on 2014 commitment appropriations will have been finalised.
Specific Objective 3: Support to Democracy.

Indicator 1: The percentage of countries belonging to the Democracy Pilot Countries which have improved their VDEM Electoral Democracy Index*
Milestones
Baseline
Target
2012
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
0%
15%
30%
50%
65%
75%
90%
100%
*Source: The V-DEM Electoral Democracy Index can be found at V-DEM net (https://v-dem.net/about).
V-DEM for Varieties of Democracy is a new approach to conceptualizing and measuring democracy. It is a collaboration among more than 50 scholars
worldwide which is co-hosted by the Department of Political Science at the University of Gothenburg, Sweden, and the Kellogg Institute at the
University of Notre Dame, USA.
Indicator 2: The percentage of actions of the democracy support action plans implemented
Baseline
2014*
0
Milestones
2016
2017
15%
25%
2015*
0
2018
45%
2019
60%
Target
2020
75%
* Democracy action plans should be adopted during 2015 and thus their implementation will start after 2015

Output
Budget line
Projects
21 04 01
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
160
34,7

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Outputs
F
160
120*
160
160
160
160
160
160
Total
1 120
Projects
* estimated 120 projects were financed for an amount of EUR 55,6 million; to be fine-tuned by the end of 2015 when the contractualisation on 2014
commitment appropriations will have been finalised
Specific Objective 4: EU Election Observation Missions

Indicator 1: Number of Election Follow-up Missions (post-election expert missions) deployed in countries after an
Election Observation Mission to assess the implementation of recommendations.
Target
Milestones
Baseline
2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2
2
3
4
4
4
4
5
[Result: 2]
Programme Statement
DB2016
The aim of Election Follow-up Missions is to take stock of the state of implementation of the EOM/EAT
recommendations).
Election follow-up missions have been implemented since 2013 (baseline). In 2013 2 EMS took place: in Bolivia and
Mozambique.
In 2014 2 EFMs took place (in Nigeria and DRC).
Indicator 2: EU capacity to support and assess democratic and electoral processes expressed in number of experts
trained
Target
Milestones
Baseline
2020
2009 2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Average number of
experts and observers
130
trained per year during
(Result: 101)
130
140
150
150
160
160
the training
programme (NEEDS)
in 2009-2012: 130
The EC funds a project (Election Observation and Democracy Support, EODS) for support to methodology and training
of observers and electoral experts (EODS is the successor of NEEDS). In recent years EODS organised seven training
sessions for the Core Team experts and Long Term Observers (LTOs) with a total of 101 trainees from 27 EU Member
States. EODS, funded by the EC, also reinforced cooperation with the African Union (AU) in 2014, helping develop a
curriculum and tools for LTOs training and a core team methodology. EODS helped the AU train 57 LTOs, and 26
Election/Legal analysts for either French or English speaking missions.
Indicator 3: Number of electoral processes and democratic cycles supported, observed, and followed by means of
Election Observation Missions, Election Assessment Teams and Election Experts Missions proposing
recommendations to the host country
Milestones
Baseline
Target
2010 - 2013
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
17
19
[Result: 17]
21
23
23*
23
24
25
* In 2017 a mid-term review will be performed to assess the format and size of missions deployed and their impact.
The indicator takes into consideration:
the EU Election Observation Missions (EOM - fully-fledged election observation missions),

the EU Election Assessment Team missions (EAT - limited observation or assessment missions in
countries with particularly difficult security situation),
the EU Election Expert Missions (EEM - small scale missions of assessment of the election process).
The baseline is the average for 2010-2013 period: 17
2010: 18 (8 EOM, 2 EAT, 8 EEM
2011: 14 (7 EOM and 7 EEM)
2012: 15 (4 EOM, 1 EAT, 10 EEM)
2013: 22 (9 EOM, 11 EEM)
Result:
2014: 17 (7 EOM, 1 EAT, 9 EEM)
The total number of processes observed and assessed by the EU depends on:
the political agenda defined by the High Representative/Vice President,

the changes (postponements/cancellations) of the corresponding electoral calendars/processes,
the annual budget available,
the EU capacity to deploy electoral missions.
Programme Statement
DB2016
The number of electoral missions is important "per se" because Election observations contribute to strengthening
democratic institutions, build public confidence in electoral processes and help deter fraud, intimidation and violence.
Election observation also serves to reinforce other key European Union foreign policy objectives.
Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Budget line
1. EU Election Observation Missions and EU

Election Assessment Team Missions
2. EU Election Expert Missions
3. Follow-up missions
4. Experts and observers trained
19 04 01
11
40,2
19 04 01
19 04 01
19 04 01
12
4
140
2,9
0,5
1,0
44,6
Total
Output
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
11
11
11
11
12
12
78
12
12
12
12
12
13
84
26
130
140
150
150
160
160
1 020
1. EU Election Observation
Missions and EU Election
Assessment Team Missions
10
2. EU Election Expert
Missions.
11
F
P
F
P
2
2
130
101
3. Follow-up Missions
4. Experts and observers
trained
Total
2014
EU Election Observation Missions and EU Election Assessment Team Missions are grouped together as they
follow the same operational logic.
More detailed information about election
http://eeas.europa.eu/eueom/index_en.htm.
observation
can
be
found
in
the
following
website:
Specific Objective 5: Support to targeted key actors and processes, including international and regional human rights
instruments and mechanisms.
Indicator 1: Number of States that have signed and ratified international & regional Conventions and related
optional Protocols
Milestones
Baseline
Target
2013
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
5
10
(Result: 34 **)
10
10
10
10
Source: OHCHR Treaty Bodies.

* Target set on the basis of our experience from the last programming period
** Between January and December 2014, 34 countries have ratified one of the 18 International Human Rights Treaties
10
10*
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 2: Number of key actors supported, in particular international, regional and national organisations
Baseline
2013
2014
2015
15
10
Milestones
2016
2017
(Result: 15**)
15
15
2018
2019
15
15
15
Target 2020
15*
Source: OHCHR, HR CSO and networks.

*Target set on the basis of our experience from the last programming period
**15 key actors were supported in 2014 as follows: OHCHR - Office of the High Commissioner for Human Rights, EIUC - European Inter-University
Centre for Human Rights and Democratisation, National Human Rights Institutes, ICC - International Criminal Court, International Organization for
Migration.

Output
Budget line
1. Projects
2. Support to UN OHCHR
3. Support to EIUC/ Network
4.Support to regional mechanism
Outputs
1. Projects
2. Support to UN OHCHR
3. Support to EIUC/ Network
4. Support
mechanism
to
regional
F
P
F
P
F
P
F
P
21 04 01
21 04 01
21 04 01
21 04 01
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
70
3
7
1
Total
Number of outputs foreseen (F)and produced (P)

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
120
70
70
70
70
70
70
120*
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4,4
6,0
5,9
1,0
17,3
Total
490
14
49
* 120 projects were financed for an amount of EUR 14,75 million.

Slight changes were made to the performance information as compared to the EiDHR Programme Statement 2015 in
order to align it with the Multiannual Indicative Programme (2014-2017) for the Instrument for Democracy and Human
Rights Worldwide, adopted by the means of the Commission Implementing Decision of the 21 October 2014.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Instrument contributing to Stability and Peace (IcSP)

Lead DG: FPI
Associated DGs: DEVCO
1.
Legal Basis

Council of 11 March 2014 establishing an instrument contributing to
stability and peace
2014
Total
2.
2015
9,1
267,7
276,8
8,6
311,6
320,1
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
2 338,7

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
8,8
317,9
326,6
9,2
324,1
333,3
9,5
330,5
340,0
2020
9,7
337,1
346,7
Total
9,9
64,6
343,9 2 232,8
353,8 2 297,4
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
279,581
100,96 %
39,099 99,15 % 320,246
6,72 % 137,706
23,35 %
Authorised
revenue
100,30 %
36,407 92,82 % 320,146
7,18 % 135,026
21,84 %
3.
EU added value
The Treaty on the European Union, under Article 21, has defined common overarching principles and objectives for the
Union's external action, such as to: "preserve peace, prevent conflicts and strengthen international security". Responding
to this particular challenge requires a collective effort based on a strong partnerships with other States, civil society
actors, multilateral and regional partners. As a global player, the EU has credibility and a perception of neutrality that
provides a competitive advantage to intervene in many conflict areas to avoid escalation or to offer assistance in
preventing conflicts. An impact is achieved when the response is provided at EU level, as combined efforts provide
increased leverage over authorities and international partners. Crisis response actions at EU level maximise the coherence
of response and aid efficiency. Synergies and cooperation are increasingly needed at international level, as donors are
facing similar problems in terms of scarce resources. In this regard, it should be noted that a very limited number of EU
Member States operate a crisis response or peace-building facility comparable in scope to the Instrument contributing to
Stability and Peace.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Not applicable
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
DB 2016
(EUR million)
Specific objective: Addressing global and trans-regional effects of climate

change having a potentially destabilising impact.
5,0*
0,0**
* The total amount for 2014-2015 constitutes 4% of Article 5 (Assistance in addressing global and trans-regional threats and emerging threats, Budget
line: 210501- Global, trans-regional and emerging threats) of the Instrument contributing to Stability and Peace and is planned for commitment in 2015.
** There is no additional commitment planned for 2016.

Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: To provide direct support for the Union's external policies by increasing the efficiency and
coherence of the Union's actions in the areas of conflict prevention, crisis preparedness and crisis response and peacebuilding, and in addressing global and transregional threats.
Indicator 1: Number of conflicts worldwide*
Baseline
2012
Total: 405
Wars: 19
Limited wars: 25
Violent crises: 177
Non-violent crises: 85
Disputes: 99
2014
424
21
25
177
89
112
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
402
2018
2019
Target
2020
399
*Source: Conflict Barometer published annually by the Heidelberg Institute for International Conflict Research;
http://hiik.de/en/index.html
Note: This indicator is used on a trial basis and will need to be evaluated over a longer time period whether it is
appropriate for the assessment of the EUs impact on global crises.
The indicator is based on the Conflict Barometer of the Heidelberg Institute for International Conflict Research (HIIK)
which measures the number of crises in the world and quantifies crises by intensity of conflict as: wars (level 5); limited
wars (level 4); violent crises (level 3); non-violent crises (level 2); disputes (level 1).
The indicator has the merit of establishing a global picture of the situation on a year per year basis, thus making it
possible to tracking conflicts over time based upon empirical evidence. However, no causal link can be established
between CFSP or IcSP interventions and any particular outcome as regards the overall global level of conflict or in
relation to the country/region concerned by the intervention. A direct link between outcomes and specific EU
interventions is difficult to ascertain: for example, IcSP responses often require a collective effort based on partnerships
with other donors, civil society actors, multilateral and regional partners.
Moreover, the EU does not intervene in all conflicts and therefore no correlation can be established between IcSP
interventions and the number of conflicts. The evolution of a specific conflict, as measured by the Conflict Barometer in
terms of intensity, depends on factors which go beyond the results and the scope of a specific EU intervention. These
Programme Statement
DB2016
interventions have to be seen as a contribution to the ultimate goal of either a de-escalation of a conflict or avoiding its
escalation, in light of the EUs comprehensive approach and the efforts of the international community.
Nonetheless, this may be a useful indicator of the EUs global impact as a stabilising force. As a global player, the EU
often has certain credibility and is perceived as a more neutral actor, lending it a competitive advantage when intervening
in many conflicts to offer assistance in preventing conflict or avoiding escalation. Thus, an impact can be achieved when
a response is provided at EU level, as a combined effort provides increased leverage over local authorities and
international partners.
Situation in 2013 was adjusted retrospectively according to the 2013 Conflict Barometer data.
Situation in 2012 (total 405):
1.
2.
3.
44 highly violent conflicts (level 5: 19 wars and level 4: 25 limited wars)

177 violent conflicts (level 3)
184 non-violent conflicts (level 2: 85 non-violent crisis and level 1: 99 disputes)
Situation in 2013 (total 414) as reported in 2013 Conflict Barometer:

4.
5.
6.

193 non-violent conflicts (level 2: 75 non-violent crisis and level 1: 118 disputes)
Nota bene: the 2014 Conflict Barometer has retrospectively revised the 2013 figures as follows:
Total 418: 51 highly violent conflicts (level 5: 31 wars and level 4: 20 limited wars); 178 violent conflicts (level 3); 189
non-violent conflicts (level 2: 82 non-violent crisis and level 1: 107 disputes).
Situation in 2014 (total 424):
7.
8.
9.

201 non-violent conflicts (level 2: 89 non-violent crises and level 1: 112 disputes)
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: In a situation of crisis or emerging crisis, to swiftly contribute to stability by providing an
effective response designed to help preserve, establish or re-establish the conditions essential to the proper
implementation of the Union's external policies and actions in accordance with Article 21 TEU.
Indicator 1: Percentage of projects adopted within 3 months of a crisis context (date of presentation to PSC).
Baseline
2011 - 2013
69 %
Milestones
2014
68 %
[actual value]
2015
2016
2017
70 %
Target 2020
2018
2019
75 %
The indicator measures swift mobilization of resources to implement projects for short-term crisis response and conflict
prevention where other financial instruments are not available and/or where the IcSP needs to contribute to a
comprehensive response.
Total number of IfS actions adopted in 2011 was 47 of which 26 were adopted (COM Decision) within 3 months of a
crisis context (presentation to PSC), which constitutes a percentage rate of 57%. Total number of IfS actions adopted in
2012 was 37 of which 29 were adopted (COM Decision) within 3 months of a crisis context (presentation to PSC), which
constitutes a percentage rate of 78%.
In 2013, the percentage rate was 72%. Therefore, the average percentage rate for the last three years amounts to 69 %.
The objective is to reach a percentage rate of 75 % by 2020. Of the 39 projects adopted in 2013, 32 respond to situations
of crisis or emerging crisis with the remaining 7 responding to situations adopted via Comitology as Interim Response
Programmes in line with Article 7 (6) of the IcSP Regulation.
In 2014, out of the 30 projects adopted, 28 respond to situations of crisis or emerging crisis (whereas the remaining 2
relate to situations adopted via Comitology as Interim Response Programmes in line with Article 7 (6) of the IcSP
Regulation). 68% of IcSP actions were adopted within 3 months of a crisis context.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
Budget line
Number of estimated response actions in situations of

crisis or emerging crisis.
19 02 01
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
32
226,5

Outputs
2014
Number of estimated response

actions in situations of crisis or
emerging
crisis
(projects
launched)*.
32
30
2015
32
2016
32
2017
32
2018
2019
32
32
2020
32
Total
224
The IcSP component crisis response is not programmable. However, based on previous experience, some 32 response
actions are launched per year. The financing will remain flat over the 2014-2020 period.
Specific Objective 2: To contribute to the prevention of conflicts and to ensuring capacity and preparedness to address
pre- and post-crisis situations and build peace.
Indicator 1: Number of processes and entities with strengthened capacity attributable to IcSP funding
Baseline
2012*
Processes: 734
Entities: 449
Total: 1 183
2014*
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target
2020
512
861
1 373
1 200
1 500
*Results stemming from the contracting of the year n-1Annual Action Programme.
The indicator measures the strengthened capacity of EU and beneficiaries of EU assistance to prevent conflicts, address
pre- and post-crisis situations and to build peace. It refers to the annual number of processes (for example: mediation
processes, community-based dialogues, training and coaching) and entities (local communities, regional organisations,
NGOs, media outlets) benefiting from strengthened capacity, attributable to IcSP funding in conflict prevention, crisis
preparedness and peace-building through the so-called Peace Building Partnership.
In 2012, following a revised compilation methodology, the figure was 1183, composed respectively of 734 processes and
449 entities with strengthened capacity attributable to IcSP funding in relation to a budget of EUR 22 million.
In 2013, the figure was 1373, composed respectively of 512 identified processes and 861 entities with strengthened
capacity attributable to IcSP funding in relation to a budget of EUR 24 million.
Examples of processes include the organisation of dialogue meetings between EU policy makers and civil society (EU
and third country-based) on approaches to conflict prevention and peace-building as well as provision of in-country
training for third country stakeholders (principally in Africa) on implementation of international due diligence guidelines
on responsible trade in minerals while the entities covered include inter alia civil society and community-based
organizations, private sector operators and local government authorities.
Increased investment in cooperation with civil society across all geographical regions coupled with a marginal increase in
the annual budget accounts for the marked increase in activities and impact measured in 2013 as opposed to 2012. If
continued, this trend will result in over-reaching the 2020 target by 2017.
The impact and policy value of investment is further evidenced by the results of the 2014 evaluation:
http://ec.europa.eu/dgs/fpi/documents/pbp_evaluation_2014_report_en.pdf
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
Budget line
Number of actions launched under the Annual Action

Programme.
19 02 02
Output
2014
Number of actions launched F

under the Annual Action
Programme.
P
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
5

2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
27,0
Total
35
Specific Objective 3: To address specific global and trans-regional threats to peace, international security and
stability.
Indicator 1: EU contribution towards tackling global and transregional threats, measured as:
Baseline*
2012
1.1. Number of former weapon

scientists talents redirected to
18 150
peaceful activities (Moscow
and Kiev): 18.000**
18 300
18 600
12
and
2018
2019
Target 2020*
2015
Global
threats
2016
Milestones*
2017
2014
trans-regional
1.2. Number of facilities

upgraded to
international
standard level: 2
1.3. Number of partner

countries benefitting from the
assistance of the EC acting in
multilateral framework: 15
45
60
70
1.4. Number of partner

countries covered by the
countering terrorism activities
financed by the EU: 8
12
16
20
1.5. Number of major drug

smuggling routes tackled by
activities supported by the EU:
2
1.6. The number of countries

covered by protection of
critical infrastructure activities:
4
11
14
14
* Cumulative
** Including TACIS period (from1994)
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
1. Number of countries involved /projects covered in the
chemical, biological, radiological and nuclear (CBRN)
Centres of Excellence initiative
2. Number of countries/regional organisations covered by
critical infrastructure activities
3.Number of major drug smuggling routes covered by the
organised crime activities
4. Number of countries covered by counter terrorism
activities
5. Climate change project
6. Export Support Facility project
Total
5. Climate change projects

6. Export Support Facility projects
21 05 01
50/55
20,0
21 05 01
14
11,0
21 05 01
11,0
21 05 01
16
14,6
21 05 01
21 05 01
5
10
5,0
2,8
64,4

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
40/40 45/48 50/51 55/54 57/57 59/60
60/60
48/42
10
11
F
P
F
P
F
P
12
12
0
0
6
6
Outputs
1. Number of countries / projects
involved in the Centres of
Excellence initiative
2. Number of countries/regional
organisations covered by critical
infrastructure activities
3.Number of major drug smuggling
routes covered by the organised
crime activities
4. Number of countries covered by
counter terrorism activities
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Budget line
Total
366/370
12
14
14
14
14
14
92
14
14
16
16
16
16
16
106
33
10
14
18
22
26
30
126

The programming 2016-2020 has been updated in line with the adopted legal basis, which foresees that the specific
objective 3 should represent up to 21% of the total appropriations.
The 2015 Annual Action Programme will be the second annual programme under the new Regulation and will continue
to reflect important changes as concerns global and trans-regional as well as emerging threats, in particular linked to
counter terrorism, organised crime and risks and threats from chemical, biological, radiological and nuclear (CBRN)
materials or agents. In addition to these elements, newly introduced focus areas, such as climate change, cybercrime and
aviation security will require increased efforts in 2015.
Note:
Gender is a key cross-cutting issue for the IcSP: it is integrated into all actions, both non-programmable crisis response
measures under Article 3 and programmable actions on conflict prevention, peace-building and crisis preparedness under
Article 4. Due attention is paid to the relevant provisions of the legal basis particularly those related to combating genderbased violence and promoting the participation of women in peace-building. In this regard, key priority is given to
ensuring that all actions contribute to delivering on EU commitments on Women, Peace and Security (WPS) based on the
Comprehensive EU Approach to the Implementation of UNSCR 1325 and 1820 on WPS (2008).
To this end, in 2014 a one year IcSP Gender Facility was put in place to support and strengthen the capacity of staff at
Headquarters and in Delegations to mainstream gender more systematically and to address Women, Peace and Security
(WPS) issues more efficiently in all IcSP actions. Services available include ad hoc guidance and technical assistance to
Programme Statement
DB2016
improve project design, conduct of baseline studies for particular sectors or geographic regions to improve project
effectiveness and the development of indicators in the areas of gender and WPS for monitoring and evaluation purposes.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Humanitarian aid
Lead DG: ECHO
1.
Legal Basis
Regulation No 1257/96, Regulation concerning humanitarian aid
2014
Total
2.
2015
9,0
1 072,7
1 081,7
9,1
919,7
928,8
2014 - 2020

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
9,0
923,7
932,8
9,2
936,2
945,4
9,4
949,9
959,4
2020
9,6
969,1
978,7
Total
9,8
65,2
971,6 6 742,9
981,4 6 808,1
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
1 152,614
101,97 % 1 430,419 101,06 %
980,606 83,20 % 983,193
21,96 %
Authorised
appropriation 1 084,697
revenue
100,26 % 1 362,340 99,83 %
931,230 77,99 % 926,277
21,50 %
3.
EU added value
The aim of the humanitarian aid policy as defined in article 214 of the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union
and the Council Regulation 1297/96 is to provide ad hoc assistance, relief and protection to people in third countries who
are victims of natural or man-made disasters, in order to meet the humanitarian needs resulting from these situations.
Over the years, the EU has acquired high levels of recognition as a reference donor and important contributor to
humanitarian action. The EU leads the way in ensuring that humanitarian aid allocations are needs based and that no
humanitarian crisis is overlooked in the international humanitarian response. It is also in a unique position to be able to
encourage other humanitarian donors to implement effective and principled humanitarian aid strategies and has a
comparative advantage in being able to intervene in politically sensitive situations more flexibly.
Furthermore, the EU is well positioned to rapidly complement as required EU Member States' bilateral contributions in
response to crises. A share of the annual EU humanitarian aid budget is pre-allocated to on-going crises (in some cases,
the Commission being the only donor, namely in "forgotten crisis") and for prevention/preparedness measures, while the
rest is deployed to respond to new crisis or deterioration of existing ones.
Not applicable
Programme Statement
DB2016
Not applicable
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
DB 2016
(EUR million)
Disaster preparedness activities funded through the Humanitarian Aid budget

(budget line 23 02 02) aim to increase the resilience of local communities to
withstand climate related disasters
37,3
37,9

Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: The aim of the humanitarian aid policy as defined in article 214 of the Treaty on the Functioning
of the European Union and the Council Regulation 1297/96 is to provide ad hoc assistance and relief and protection for
people in third countries who are victims of natural or man-made disasters, in order to meet the humanitarian needs
resulting from these different situations.
Indicator 1: Number of deaths due to natural disasters (Source: As recorded in the EM-DAT database)
Baseline
Milestones
2014-2019*
Target 2020*
98 689
100 000
100 000
* Estimate based on the average of the annual deaths of the past 10 years
Following 2015 adoption of the Sendai Framework for Disaster Risk Reduction 2015-20301 which includes a target on
reducing mortality from disasters expressed in terms of per 100 000 population the above mentioned target will be
revised in 2015 to be in line with the Sendai methodology.
The 2014 result was 15.733 deaths. This is a sharp decrease compared to target and past trend which is difficult to
analyse or to attribute to DG ECHO alone. All geographical Humanitarian Aid evaluations (~15) planned for coming
years will address this General objective 1 by assessing ECHOs contribution to improving the situation of crisis affected
people. The aim to measure contribution reflects the limited influence of ECHO on the objective due to the many and
significant external factors such as the general political and economic stability, the number and scale of conflicts and
disasters.
Indicator 2: No. of countries 11 in the EU's Global Vulnerability and Crisis (final) Index (Source: Global
Vulnerability and Crisis (final) Index)
Baseline
Milestones
Target 2020
2013
19
15
14
Source: http://echo-global-vulnerability-and-crisis.jrc.ec.europa.eu/
The Index identifies and ranks all countries according to their vulnerability. Above a certain quote (11), these are
considered as extremely vulnerable and top priority for action through humanitarian funding. Target is defined as an aim
to reduce the number of countries facing such extreme vulnerability.
There is a major decrease between the baseline 2013 and 2014 result from 19 to 15. This is due to changes in the GVCA
methodology. For the GVCA 2014 release, the methodological decision was made that evaluation of conflict situation
will be based on common data sources in order to have consistent and measurable assessment across all countries, rather
than on the assessment of conflict by country desks as was the case in 2013. The data used for this purpose is the Conflict
Barometer of the Heidelberg Institute for International Conflict2 (HIIK). This approach provides a common definition of
conflict the HIIK intensity indicator that is considered in the GVCA represents situations of violent conflict. The
1
2
http://www.wcdrr.org/preparatory/post2015.
HIIK: http://www.hiik.de/en/.
Programme Statement
DB2016
methodological change to using this international standardised approach to conflict assessment using the HIIK triggered
shifts in the GVCA ranking for certain countries, which partly resulted in a steeper decline of the number of countries
with 11 GVCA score in 2014.
This more consistent approach to assessing conflict will allow for a smooth transition to the Index for Risk Management
(INFORM) for the analytical phase of the Annual Aid Strategy exercise 2015 2016. In order to reflect these changes,
the related targets have been changed with milestone of 15 for 2015-2019 (instead of 18 as it was presented in PS 2015)
and 14 for 2020 (instead of 17).
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: Provide needs based delivery of EU assistance to people faced with natural and manmade
disasters and protracted crises.
Indicator 1: % of contracts issued under following targets for number of days elapsed from decision to contracting:
Primary Emergency Decisions: 5 days, Emergency Decisions: 18 days, Other Decisions: 56 days (Source: ECHO
benchmark report)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
75%
50%
95%
(result: 87%*)
* Despite the problems with the payment appropriations, DG ECHO was able to achieve and even exceed the expected results.
Indicator 2: Total number of beneficiaries of Commission's interventions (Source: Hope database)

Baseline
Milestones
Target 2020
2013
2014 - 2019
106 million beneficiaries for a budget of 1,277
billion => 72,4 million when prorating to 2014
73 million
77 million
HUMA budget of EUR 872 million
The number of beneficiaries disclosed should be better viewed as a number of beneficiaries per million EUR spent in
order to get a fair comparison basis.
Commissions intention is to ensure it can reach 83 000 beneficiaries per million EUR spent during the whole
programming period, despite the negative effects of the inflation and the current rising trend of prices of humanitarian
items, mainly food.
In 2014, 105 million beneficiaries were reached for a total budget of around EUR 1,2 billion.
Indicator 3: % of EU HA funds for specific crisis spend in most vulnerable countries (Source: 'Category 3 countries'
in the Commission Global Vulnerability and Crisis Assessment)
Milestones
Baseline
Target
2013
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
50%
56%
53%
55%
56%
The reference is provided by the 13 countries with both Vulnerability and Crisis Index at 3 (category 3 countries). The
projection for 2014 was 56%. The reality of 2014 is 51% (EUR 511 million out of EUR 1 071 million). For 2016, 2018
and 2020 the projections were 61%, 63 and 65% respectively. Considering that for 2015, using the same reference, at
initial allocation we have 48% (EUR 348 million out of EUR 726 million overall initial allocations); the projections for
2016, 2018 and 2020 have been lowered down as compared to the information presented in the PS 2015. The impact of
the Syria crisis, coupled with the fact that the allocations for Sahel are not counted (though Mali and Chad are category 3
countries, but they have their own individual allocations), explains the lower than anticipated percentage.
Indicator 4: % of projects meeting quality standards in food, nutrition, health, shelter and water / sanitation /
hygiene intervention sectors (Source - ECHO's key results indicators introduced in project single form)
Milestones
Baseline
Target
2013
2020
Actual 2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
N/A - new
73%
90%
92%
93%
95%
Indicator 5: % of EU HA initial budget for specific crises spent in forgotten crises (Source 'Forgotten crises
Programme Statement
DB2016
countries based on the Commission' Forgotten Crisis Assessment - as explained and described in the yearly
Operational Priorities document of DG ECHO)
Milestones
Baseline
Target
2013
2020
Actual 2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
18,3%
15%
18%
19%
20%
Output
Draft Budget 2016

(EUR million)
467
128
291
886
Budget line
HA funds for specific crisis in most vulnerable crisis

HA funds for forgotten crisis
HA funds for other crisis
Total
23 02 01
23 02 01
23 02 01
Outputs foreseen (F) and produced (P)

Outputs
HA funds for specific crisis
spend in most vulnerable
countries (EUR million)
HA funds for forgotten crisis
(initial HA budget EUR
million excluding reserve
20%)
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
481*
450
467
476
501
511
522
511
129
127
Total
3 406
511
106
128
129
138
141
149
918
127
*EUR 481 million is from adopted initial budget but EUR 600 million when taking final 2014 budget after several
reinforcements received through Emergency Aid Reserve, EDF funds etc.
Specific Objective 2: Build the capacity and resilience of vulnerable or disaster affected communities.
Indicator 1: Number of persons benefiting from DIPECHO actions in disaster prone regions (Source: Hope
database)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
18 million beneficiaries 18 million* 18 million 18 million 18 million 18 million 18 million 19 million
* In 2014, 16 million beneficiaries were reached. This is slightly below target but there is no major event that can
explain this achievement. Funding is stable but the mix of the countries where funding goes is unfavourable when
compared to 2012 and 2013. This does not mean that ECHO funding is less efficient but just that the financed
programmes/countries are going to less populated areas in 2014.
Indicator 2: No of vulnerable countries with country resilience priorities in place (Source: EU Del, MIPs, CSPs)
Baseline
2013
N/A New
2014
2015
3
(result: 7*)
Milestones
2016
2017
10
* In 2014, 7 countries put the country resilience priorities in place.
2018
2019
Target 2020
20
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 3: % of actions 'on track' of Resilience Action Plan. (Source: Transition Interservice Working Group on
Resilience)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
70%
N/A New
80%
90%
(result: 80%*)
*In 2014, 80% of actions were on track
Indicator 4: % of ECHO funded operations in which Disaster Risk Reduction has been mainstreamed
(Source: ECHO DRR metrics E-single form)
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
45%
40%
45%
45%
45%
45%
45%
50%
(Result:48%)
The milestones and targets have been increased from 40% as presented in the PS 2015 to 45% and 50% to reflect the growing importance of the DRR
in ECHO operations.
The 2014 result is 48%

Output
Draft Budget 2016

(EUR million)
37,9
Budget line
Operational budget having a DRR component*
23 02 02
*In addition to the budget line 23 02 02 allocation, approximately EUR 100 million, from budget line 23 02 01 is also considered as having a DRR
component.
Outputs
ECHO
operational
funds
including a DRR component
(in EUR million)*
2014
F
n/a
new
122**
Outputs foreseen (F) and produced (P)

2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
137
146
138
140
142
* Objectives have been set at 15% of initial HA funding

** 2014 result i.e. 13% of the initial funding
*** includes 2014 actuals
145
Total
2014-2020
970***
Programme Statement
DB2016
Common foreign and security policy (CFSP)

Lead DG: FPI
1.
2014
Total
2.
2015
0,4
300,8
301,1
0,2
320,5
320,8

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
0,5
326,8
327,3
0,5
333,4
333,9
0,5
340,0
340,5
2020
0,5
346,9
347,4
Total
0,5
3,1
353,9 2 322,3
354,4 2 325,4
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
348,453 101,30 %
286,471 107,79 %
364,846
7,97 % 292,390
36,00 %
Authorised
appropriation 348,453 101,30 %
revenue
286,471 107,63 %
364,846
7,97 % 292,390
35,98 %
3.
EU added value
The Treaty on the European Union (article 21) has defined common overarching principles and objectives for the
external action of the Union, in particular to "preserve peace, prevent conflicts and strengthen international security".
The EUs Common Foreign and Security Policy (CFSP) is intended to safeguard the common values of the Union, to
strengthen its security, to preserve peace and strengthen international security, to promote international cooperation and
to develop democracy and the rule of law, respect for human rights and fundamental freedoms.
With 28 Member States acting within common policies and strategies, the EU alone has the critical mass to respond to
global challenges, whereas the action of Member States may be limited and fragmented, with projects which are often too
small to make a sustainable difference in the field. This critical mass also puts the EU in a better position to conduct
policy dialogue with partner governments.
The EU is in a uniquely neutral and impartial position to deliver on external action on behalf of and with Member states,
lending enhanced credibility in the countries in which it works. It is best placed to take the role of global leader on behalf
of its citizens.
Not applicable
Not applicable
Programme Statement
DB2016

Not applicable
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: Contribute to the implementation of the Lisbon Treaty (Article 21 (2) (c) which seeks to
preserve peace, prevent conflicts and strengthen international security, in accordance with the purposes and principles
of the United Nations Charter, with the principles of the Helsinki Final Act and with the aims of the Charter of Paris.
Indicator 1: Number of highly violent conflicts worldwide*
Baseline
2012
44 highly violent
conflicts worldwide
(19 wars and
25 limited wars).
Milestones
Target 2020
2014 2015 2016
2017
Result:
46 (21
wars
and 25
limited
wars)
2018
2019
Contribution to the stabilization

Stabilization or decrease
or decrease in the number of
in the number of highly
highly violent conflicts and/or
violent conflicts and/or
their intensity in
their intensity in
countries/regions where the most
countries/regions where
substantial CSDP missions and
the most substantial
EU Special Representatives
CSDP missions and
(EUSRs) are deployed.
EUSRs are deployed.
* Source: Conflict Barometer published annually by the Heidelberg Institute for International Conflict Research;
http://hiik.de/en/index.html
Notes:
- The indicator has the merit of establishing a global picture of the situation on a year per year basis, thus making
possible tracking conflicts over time on a factual basis. However, the use of this indicator does not mean that there is
link of cause and effect between the CFSP operations and any particular outcome in the area/country/region in which
they are implemented. Also, the EU does not intervene in all the conflicts and therefore no correlation can be
established between CFSP operations and the number of conflicts. The evolution of a specific conflict, as measured by
the Conflict Barometer in terms of intensity, depends on factors which go beyond the results and the scope of a specific
EU intervention. These interventions have to be seen as a contribution to the ultimate goal of either a de-escalation of
a conflict or avoiding its escalation, in light of the EUs comprehensive approach and the efforts of the international
community.
- CDSP missions and EUSRs usually have annual mandates. The milestones and targets have been identified on the
assumption that these actions will be extended until 2020, while keeping the same objectives.
- According to the Treaties, the evaluators of the CFSP achievements are the European External Action Service (EEAS)
and the Council.
Programme Statement
4.
DB2016
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: Support to preservation of stability through substantial CSDP missions and EUSRs mandates
Indicator 1:
Indicator 1a: Degree of achievement of the objectives as defined in the respective Council Decision / Joint Action
Indicator 1b: Intensity of the conflicts assessed according to the Conflict Barometer (when relevant) (1- dispute; 2non-violent crises; 3 - violent crises; 4 - limited war; 5 - war)
2014
1) Georgia
Council Joint Action

2008/736/CFSP of 15
September 2008 on the
European Union
Monitoring Mission in
Georgia, EUMM
Georgia.
Average conflict
intensity: 2 (2013
result: 2,5)
Target **
2020
Milestones *
Baseline
2016
- Parties to the conflict
comply with the SixPoint Agreement of 12
August 2008.
- Security situation on
the ground remains
stable, number of
incidents remain low.
- Situation is
increasingly
normalised, including
freedom of movement
across the
Administrative
Boundary Lines for
populations.
- Confidence has
improved between
parties to the conflict,
through increased
interactions and
confidence building
measures, including
the meetings of the
Incident Prevention
and Response
Mechanism both in
the Abkhazia and
South Ossetia theatre,
and through
compliance of the
Georgian authorities
with the MoU
between the Mission
and the Georgian
MoIA and MoD; new
Confidence Building
Measures are in place.
- European policy
informed by the
Mission's reporting in
view of a political
solution for Georgia.
2017
200 monitors are sent
by EU Member States
to monitor compliance
with the August 2008
Six Point Agreement.
Result: 2
Human rights are

respected, including
freedom of movement
and rights of internally
displaced people and
refugees.
1,75
Contribution to long
term stability in
Georgia and the
surrounding region.
1,5
Programme Statement
EULEX Kosovo
War crimes, terrorism,
ahead of end of
organised crime,
current mandate 14
corruption, interJune 2016 is aiming
ethnic crimes,
for results according
financial and
to four lines of
economic crimes and
operation:
other serious crimes
1) To further assist the
are properly
development of
investigated,
Kosovo's rule of law
prosecuted,
capacity through
adjudicated and
monitoring, mentoring
enforced.
and advising key
strategic institutions;
2) To deliver
Cooperation and
executive rule of law
coordination
services including
structures
between
fight against
police
and
prosecution
corruption and
organised crime until authorities are created.
the performance of
local authorities has
Kosovo Antireached a level where
Corruption
Strategy
executive functions
and
Anti-Corruption
can be transitioned;
Action Plan are
3) Assisting in
developed and
restoring the rule of
implemented.
law throughout the
north of Kosovo
through providing
structured monitoring,
mentoring and
advising and
maintaining a Formed
Police Unit for public
order operations. Also
monitoring and
assisting Kosovo
Border Police in
setting up and running
the necessary
structures for control;
4) Continue support to
the EU facilitated
structured dialogue
between Serbia and
Kosovo by monitoring
and facilitating
implementation on
reached agreements.
2) Serbia (Kosovo)
Council Decision
2012/291/CFSP of 5
June 2012 amending
and extending Joint
Action 2008/124/CFSP
on the European Union
Rule of Law Mission in
Kosovo.
Average conflict
intensity: 3
DB2016
Result: 1
2,5
Kosovo has an
independent and
multi-ethnic justice
system and a multiethnic police and
customs service.
(Result 2013: 1)
3) Libya
Council Decision
Due to the
continuously
deteriorating security
situation in the host
Implementation of the
The cross ministerial
outcome of the
working group on
Interim Strategic
border management is
Review (ISR) process
set up and continues
that is expected to
A national Integrated
Border Management
Strategy is developed
and implemented by
Libyan authorities.
Programme Statement
2013/233/CFSP of 22
country EUBAM
begin mid-April 2015.
May 2013 on the
Libya was relocated to
European Union
Tunis on 31 July
Integrated Border
2014. All operational
Management
activities were stalled
Assistance Mission in by end of the year.
Libya (EUBAM
Libya).
Average conflict
intensity: 3,5
Result: 4
DB2016
working.
The Tripoli Action
Plan on border
security is
implemented.
Training policies and
curricula are adopted
by border
management agencies
The roles and tasks of

law enforcement
agencies working in
border management
are defined.
The strategic review
in 2015 could reduce
or modify the targets.
3
.3,25
(Result 2013: 3.5)

Implementation of the - Palestinian Civilian
The strategic and
outcome of the
Police (PCP) reform regulatory framework
Strategic Review (SR) and development is of Palestinian Civilian
process that is
supported by the
Police (PCP) is
adoption of the
reviewed in line with
COUNCIL DECISION expected to begin as
of July 2015
relevant legislation in
international
2013/354/CFSP
line with the
standards.
of 3 July 2013 on the
international
European Union Police
standards.
Mission for the
New legislation on
- MoI capacity is
Palestinian Territories
criminal justice is
strengthened.
(EUPOL COPPS).
drafted.
- Criminal Justice
system of the
Palestinian Authority
is strengthened.
4) Palestinian
Territories
Sustainable and
effective policing
arrangements are
established under
Palestinian ownership.
A sustainable criminal
justice sector
compliant with
international standards
is set up under
Palestinian ownership.
- Police-prosecution
interaction is
improved.
Average conflict
intensity: 3,5
Result: 3.7
3,4
3,3
(Result 2013: 3)
5) Afghanistan
COUNCIL DECISION
2013/240/CFSP
of 27 May 2013
amending Decision
2010/279/CFSP on the
European Union Police
Mission in Afghanistan
(EUPOL
AFGHANISTAN).
1) Ministry of
Interior's institutional
reform in the areas
relevant to civilian
policing is supported:
- improved leadership
and management
skills;
- increased capacity to
produce/revise
legislation and to
develop and
implement policies
and strategies;
- increased capacity to
manage force
resourcing;
- gender issues
increasingly
incorporated into
policies and those
Training management
is handed over to
Afghans following
training provided to
10700 police officers.
Sustainable and
effective policing
arrangements are
established under
Afghan ownership,
which will ensure
appropriate interaction
with the wider
An Afghan-led Policecriminal justice
Prosecutor
system.
Cooperation Manual
is developed and in
use following training
provided to 1000
prosecutors and police
officers.
Police districts are

reformed into a more
community-based
Programme Statement
policies being
implemented;
- increased Afghan
ownership and
leadership in
coordinating
international support
to police reform and
increased cooperation
of the MoI with the
Attorney General's
Office (AGO).
2) Afghan National
Police civilian
policing approach is
strengthened:
- Community policing
concept further
developed and
implemented;
- Improved capacities
in intelligence-led
policing and crime
investigation;
- Sustainable
recruitment and
retention of female
police officers is in
place;
- Increased
cooperation between
ANP and AGO;
- Increased command
and control
capabilities and
performance;
- Capacity to run and
manage training
institutions has
advanced; Enforced
Code of Conduct
within ANP is in
place.
Average conflict
intensity: 4
DB2016
policy model.
Around 260 police

plans and policies are
developed and
implemented.
Result: 3.5
3,8
(Result 2013: 3.5)
3,6
Programme Statement
Approval of new
legal and/or
regulatory
framework in the
area of human
resources and
training for the
internal security
forces.
6) Mali
COUNCIL DECISION
(CFSP) 2015/76 of 19
January 2015 launching
the European Union
CSDP mission in Mali
(EUCAP Sahel Mali)
and amending Decision
2014/219/CFSP
Average conflict
intensity: 5
(Result 2013: 4)
7) Ukraine
COUNCIL DECISION
2014/486//CFSP of 22
July 2014 on the
European Union
advisory for civilian
security sector reform
in Ukraine (EUAM
Ukraine)
Training strategies
for the Police,
Gendarmerie and
Garde Nationale are
defined.
Result: 3.5
All staff of the

security forces are
registered4.5
in his/her
relevant base and
database
As the updated
civilian
- On national and
daily
bysector
staff duly
security
reform
regional level, support
trained.
strategy
is being
and advice to the
developed,
sufficient
Training of
2000
authorities on a
resources
have
been
members
of
the
coherent interagency
made
available
for the
internal
security
implementation of the
elaboration
forces. of
agreed civilian
concrete coordinated
Security Sector
plans for its
Reforms (SSR).
implementation.
- As a part of the
The SSR Vision and
overall reform
Strategy, plans and
process, to continue
implementation are
support in
disseminated to the
implementation of the
public and to relevant
anti-corruption
public employees.
strategy in the area of
the civilian security
The Mission
sector.
participates in relevant
- To support and
international fora in
advise the authorities
Ukraine.
in the final stage of
Ukrainian
the establishment of a
mechanisms for
comprehensive HR
effective coordination
policy (including a
and cooperation are
vetting process) for
included within
civilian security sector
Ukrainian SSR.
and to advise on
elaboration of a
roadmap for its
implementation.
- To support the
authorities to establish
routine processes for
identifying and
effectively absorbing
civilian SSR
designated
DB2016
The operational
efficacy of the
internal security
forces is improved
and the hierarchical
chains reestablished
The role of the
judicial and
administrative
authorities with
regard to the
management and
supervision of their
missions authorities
is reinforced
4
The redeployment
to
the Northern part of
the country is
Create
a conceptual
facilitated.
framework for
planning and
implementing reforms
that result in
sustainable security
services delivering the
rule of law, in a
manner that
contributes to
enhancing their
legitimacy and to
increased public
confidence and trust,
in full respect for
human rights and
consistent with the
constitutional reform
process;
Reorganise and
restructure the security
services in a way
which permits
recovering control and
accountability over
them.
Programme Statement
DB2016
international
assistance (identifying
project proposals and
potential donors).
Average conflict
intensity: 3
(new 2013). Most likely
4 in 2014 further to the
illegal annexation of
Crimea by Russia and
the further conflict in
eastern Ukraine.
8) EUCAP SAHEL
Niger
COUNCIL DECISION
2012/392/CFSP of 16
July 2012 on the
European Union CSDP
mission in Niger
(EUCAP Sahel Niger).
Result: 4.5
2.5
1) Interoperability: all
Nigerian security
Regional Joint Centres
joint regional
forces are able to
are operational.
command centres are
interoperate.
operational
(refurbished and
Criminal investigation
Members of the
equipped rooms,
capacities are
country's internal
trained staff, some
developed in line with
security forces are
contingencies plans
the criminal justice
trained.
drafted); Gendarmerie
system.
Operational Centre
(COG) in Niamey,
Sustainability of
Police are able to
Agadez and Zinder
human resources and
carry
out
forensics
are operational;
logistics of Nigerian
investigations.
2) Technical
security forces is
competencies:
achieved.
training on
intelligence gathering
and analyzing, border
management skills
(for police staff
deployed along the
border with Nigeria),
intervention technics,
forensic, Human
rights and gender (for
Municipal police
staff);
3) Sustainability:
Human resources
strategies for all forces
conceived and
approved ; training for
trainers and pedagogic
supports conceived,
approved by local
endorsement
committee and in use
in Nigerien Security
Forces training
centres;
Logistic: improve the
logistic capacities (the
management of
weapons and vehicles)
of Nigerien Security
Programme Statement
9) EUCAP Nestor
COUNCIL DECISION
2012/389/CFSP of 16
July 2012 on the
European Union
Mission on Regional
Maritime Capacity
Building in the Horn of
Africa (EUCAP
NESTOR).
DB2016
Forces; refurbished
garages are
operational;
4) Coordination: a
fully locally
appropriated
coordination
mechanism for all the
actors in the field of
security is in place.
1) Progress in the
Training courses are
Maritime capacities,
reconstruction of the
delivered to coast
including maritime
Somalia Federal
guards in Djibouti,
security agencies, are
Government
Seychelles and
efficiently organised,
indigenous maritime
Tanzania.
and have achieved
law enforcement
self-sustainability in
capacity in Mogadishu
The legal and
training.
and development of regulatory framework
the legal framework in on the judiciary and
the field of maritime
land-based coastal
Somalian coastal
security.
police capability is
police
capabilities are
2) Setting up of
revised or established
developed.
coordination
in Somalia.
mechanisms in the
field of maritime
National legislation
security.
and
the rule of law are
3) Implementation of
strengthened
in
a Somaliland Joint
relation
with
the
Action Plan (SLJAP)
international maritime
for reconstruction of
law.
indigenous maritime
law enforcement
capacity in
Somaliland.
4) Development of
legal and regulatory
framework and
subsequent related
capacity building
activities for the landbased coastal police
capability in Puntland.
5) Phasing out
bilateral programmes
in Tanzania, Djibouti
and the Seychelles.
* The milestones are based on the respective Council Decisions or Joint Actions of the missions and on public
information about the mission's activity (Mission Factsheet). The milestones might need to be modified following
changes in the planning documents (CONOPS and OPLAN). Given the qualitative nature of monitoring, mentoring and
advising activities it proved difficult to identify quantitative milestones.
** The targets are based on the respective Council Decisions or Joint Actions. The ultimate target for each of the
missions is the contribution to the decrease in the intensity of the conflict, taking into account the size of the mission and
the caveats mentioned under the General Objective. For each CSDP Mission, the final target is the achievement of the
objectives foreseen in the Council Decisions establishing them. The Strategic Reviews of the respective missions and
Assessments of the respective actions under the political guidance of the HR and of the Council constitute appropriate
milestones for each mission.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
Budget line
Draft Budget 2016

Number EUR million
1. CSDP Mission: EU Monitoring Mission in Georgia
19 03 01 01
19,0
2. CSDP Mission: EU Rule of Law Mission in Kosovo (EULEX Kosovo)
19 03 01 02
70,0
3. CSDP Mission: EUPOL (EU Police Mission) Afghanistan
19 03 01 03
p.m.
4. CSDP Mission: EUCAP Sahel Mali
19 03 01 04
12,0
5. CSDP Mission: EUCAP Sahel Niger
19 03 01 04
10,0
6. CSDP Mission: EU Police Mission for the Palestine Territories (EUPOL

COPPS)
19 03 01 04
9,0
7. CSDP Mission: EUCAP Nestor
19 03 01 04
18,0
8. CSDP Mission: EUBAM Ukraine
19 03 01 04
13,0
9. Other CSDP Missions
19 03 01 04
86,8
10. Emergency measures (including reserve for the financing of staff and
other costs in support of the EUSRs based outside the EU)
19 03 01 05
37,0
11. Preparatory and follow-up measures
19 03 01 06
15
8,0
12. EU Special Representatives
19 03 01 07
25,0
307,8
The number of outputs (number of CSDP missions and EU Special Representatives) is not programmed over the period
2014-2020 as it depends on the evolution of the international security environment in the various regions of the world.
Compared to the initial financial programming, the DB 2016 figures for the main budget lines have changed following
the CFSP budgetary orientations for 2015-2016 presented by the High Representative to the Council in March 2015:
1) the missions EUMM Georgia and EULEX Kosovo will be slightly reduced and therefore budget items 19.030101 and
19.030102 have been decreased.
2) the budgetary item 19.030104 "Other measures and operations" has been increased following the need to have a
sufficient margin to launch new CFSP actions. This margin could cover, if the Council decides so, three to four middlesized missions.
Specific Objective 2: Support the implementation and promotion of: 1) strategy on non-proliferation of weapons of
mass destruction in order to increase security in this area (WMD); 2) strategy on combating illicit accumulation and
trafficking of Small Arms and Light Weapons (SALW) as well as measures against illicit spread and trafficking of
other conventional weapons; 3)EU's policies in the field of conventional arms exports, in particular on the basis of
Common Position CFSP/944/2008
Indicator 1: Number of countries having ratified the treaties mentioned in the baseline
Baseline
2012
2014
1) Comprehensive Nuclear-Test-Ban
Result:
Treaty Organization, CTBTO: number
163
of countries having ratified 159
Milestones
2015 2016
2017
164
2018
2019
Target
2020
165
Programme Statement
DB2016
2) UN Resolution 1540:
Actions supporting the

improvement in national
implementation efforts
of UNSCR 1540 (2004),
in line with EU WMD
Strategy.
Improvement
in
national
implementation efforts of UNSCR
1540 (2004), in line with EU WMD
Strategy
3) Nuclear security assistance

provided to 100 countries by IAEA
Assistance
provided to
up to 120
countries.
Nuclear security in
selected
countries
strengthened.
100
4) Arms Trade Treaty: number of Result:

ratifications Ratified: 0
61
150
NB: entered into force on 24/12/2014
CTBTO website: http://www.ctbto.org/the-treaty/status-of-signature-and-ratification/

UN Resolution 1540 website: http://www.un.org/en/sc/1540/
IAEA website: https://www.iaea.org/Publications/index.html
Arms Trade Treaty website: http://www.un.org/disarmament/ATT/
Progress in other monitoring reports will be followed: Chemical Weapons Convention (CWC), Biological convention,
Otawa Convention, Global Threat Reduction Initiative (GTRI), Non-Proliferation Treaty, Biological and Toxin Weapons
Convention (BTWC), Hague Code of Conduct, Outerspace activities, Wassemar arrangement, Comprehensive NuclearTest-Ban Treaty (CTBT) with the aim of having an increased number of signatories of those Treaties and better
preparation of the countries to implement the clauses of the treaties.
Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number EUR million
Budget line
1. Projects in the area of non-proliferation of weapons of mass distruction

2. Projects in the area of non-proliferation of Small Arms and Light Weapons
Total:
19 03 02
19 03 02
5
3
8
12,0
7,0
19,0

Outputs
1. Projects in the area of nonproliferation of weapons of mass
distruction.
2. Projects in the area of nonproliferation of Small Arms and
Light Weapons.
Total
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
39
24
Programme Statement
DB2016
Instrument for Nuclear Safety Cooperation (INSC)

Lead DG: DEVCO
1.
Legal Basis
Council Regulation (Euratom) No 237/2014 of 13 December 2013

establishing an Instrument for Nuclear Safety Cooperation
2014
Total
2.
2015
1,2
29,3
30,5
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
225,3

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
1,4
59,7
61,2
1,4
70,4
71,8
1,4
60,9
62,3
1,5
31,5
33,0
2020
1,5
32,2
33,6
1,5
31,4
32,9
Total
9,9
315,4
325,3
2014
Impl.
Rate
CA
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
30,703
100,00 %
1,587 113,92 %
61,159
1,55 %
39,503
1,73 %
Authorised
appropriation
revenue
30,703
100,17 %
1,551 84,78 %
61,159
1,65 %
39,503
1,54 %
3.
EU added value
The promotion of the highest level of nuclear safety is crucial for the safety and the security of the population and the
environment of the EU. The Fukushima Daichii accident in 2011 after the Chernobyl disaster in 1986 showed that any
accident has trans-boundary effects and impacts the international community widely. The access to nuclear or radioactive
materials is a security concern for the global world with proven evidence that non-state actors are trying to have access to
such materials. The Instrument for Nuclear Safety Cooperation has successfully contributed to the reduction of both
risks by providing support especially to regulatory authorities and the priority will be given to Accession Countries
(Turkey and Balkan Countries) and countries in the European Neighbourhood area (ENP East: Armenia, Belarus,
Georgia and Ukraine; ENP South: Egypt, Jordan, Morocco and Iraq) engaged in nuclear power generation. It also
contains health and ecological measures directed to the population that suffered from the Chernobyl accident in Ukraine
and Belarus.
New challenges have appeared over the years that could not be addressed before by the TACIS and the previous INSC
programmes:
The increasing cases of uncontrolled movement of radioactive or nuclear materials as shown in the Illicit
Trafficking Database of the International Atomic Energy Agency. The number of incidents involving radioactive sources
used in medical and industrial application also needs to be addressed through extra safety and security measures.
The European Union has at various occasions expressed its support to remediate the radiological situation in
Central Asia due to the legacy of former uranium mining and milling activities. There the international community is
Programme Statement
DB2016
engaging in the development of ambitious remediation projects. This will drastically improve the health of the population
and the environmental conditions (clean water). It will also reduce the risk of malevolent use of contaminated materials.
The Commission will build on the results of previously EU funded feasibility studies and environmental impact
assessments and fund direct remediation activities.
A similar uranium mining legacy exists in many African countries. Moreover, mining activities are fast
developing there and call for the establishment of a strong safeguards system to control possible diversion of the uranium
produced. This work will continue.
These new challenges have to be addressed in addition to the on-going European Union actions aiming at establishing or
enhancing independent and competent regulatory authorities that will guarantee the safe use of nuclear energy and
promoting sound safeguards systems to enforce the non-proliferation regime. Emergency preparedness systems need to
be put in place. Training and tutoring are essential to ensure adequate management of nuclear power generation.
In all these domains, the EU added value lies in its long experience in nuclear safety and security, as well as the use of
the highest safety standards. Moreover, there is a need to further extend the acquis communautaire in the field of nuclear
energy to third countries, especially with respect to the carrying out of the stress tests in the EU neighbourhood and
abroad.
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: The Union shall finance measures to support the promotion of a high level of nuclear safety,
radiation protection, and the application of efficient and effective safeguards of nuclear material in third countries
Indicator 1: Number of countries benefiting from EU support in developing of a culture of safety for nuclear
energy
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
The countries currently embarking in
5 countries
8 countries
nuclear energy are: Bangladesh,
supported
covered
Belarus, Egypt, Indonesia, Jordan,
Mongolia, Morocco, Nigeria, the
Philippines Thailand, Turkey and
Vietnam
Programme Statement
4.
DB2016
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: The promotion of an effective nuclear safety culture and implementation of the highest nuclear
safety and radiation protection standards, and continuous improvement of nuclear safety.
Indicator 1: Number of important issues identified during relevant IAEA peer review missions * (projects funded by
the EC to respond to the issues identified and eligible)
Milestones
Baseline
Total
2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020 2014- 2020
4
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
* The International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) performs, when requested, nuclear safety review missions in its
signatory countries, assessing the national situation related to nuclear safety. The outcome of such missions is a list of
issues to be addressed to enhance the global safety regime of the state. These issues are classified according to their
relevance for safety on a scale from 1 to 4 (1 most urgent issue, 4 less critical). These IAEAs reports are dealt with by
the national regulatory authority that needs support in acquiring necessary capacities to efficiently perform their
corresponding licensing duties. Depending on the importance and the geographical eligibility, corresponding projects are
funded under the Instrument.
Output
Budget line
1.number of regulations and/or guidance in nuclear safety

benefitting of the transfer of EU expertise
2. number of staff trained in the beneficiary countries
3. EC additional contribution to EBRD for the Chernobyl
Shelter Fund*
Total
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
21 06 01
17,5
21 06 01
100
3,7
21 06 02
40,0
61,2

Outputs
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
90
100
120
120
100
80
700
29,58
41,43
34,45
N/A
N/A
N/A
100,0
1. number of regulations
and/or guidance in nuclear
safety benefitting of the
transfer of EU expertise
5**
2. number of staff trained in

the beneficiary countries
90
291***
3. EC additional contribution
to EBRD for the Chernobyl
Shelter Fund (EUR million)*
N/A
2020
Total
2014
* Additional appropriations amounting to EUR 100 million are mobilised under the INSC to continue EU's contribution
to the Chernobyl Shelter Fund. This relates to the funding gap of around EUR 615 million identified for the Chernobyl
Shelter Implementation Plan, which is managed by the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development (EBRD). As
the G7 and EU are expected to contribute EUR 165 million to funding the gap, an additional contribution of EUR 100
million is expected from the INSC. This amount is expected to be paid over 3 years (2015, 2016 and 2017) in instalments
of EUR 30 million, EUR 40 million and EUR 30 million, respectively.
** The five major documents are regulations and guidance produced in the beneficiary countries under the INSC funded
projects. These are:
Support in the development of the self-assessment final report (implementation of the stress tests at the Armenian
Nuclear Power Plant): this report is of major importance as it summarises the findings of the European stress tests
applied to the Armenian Nuclear Power Plant and the corresponding safety upgrades.
Severe accident management guidelines (SAMG) for Angra 2 nuclear power Plant in Brazil: this regulation describes
the procedure to manage a potential severe accident at the Brazilian nuclear power plant.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Cabinet of Minister of Ukraine order on the approval of the plan concerning transparency and accessibility of
information related to nuclear use and growth of safety culture level in atomic energetics: this document is the
Ukrainian law on nuclear transparency based on EU standards.
Adaptation for Ukraine of the EURATOM procedure on the supervision and control of trans-boundary shipments of
radioactive waste and spent fuel: this transfer of EURATOM expertise is part of the EU acquis aommunautaire that
Ukraine starts to adopt in its national legislation.
Review of the Ukrainian regulation on decommissioning: general provisions on the nuclear power plants and research
reactors safety during decommissioning: this project has produced a report on the existing Ukrainian legislation on
decommissioning with corresponding recommendations to issue a revised version in line with the EU standards.
** The number of trainees under the Training and Tutoring programme amount to 291 + 14 tutees in 2014. It reflects
the attractiveness and efficiency of the programme that corresponds to an identified need in the beneficiary countries.
This increased value (compared to the foreseen output) is due to the cumulative effect of the projects that are running in
parallel (Annual Action Programme 2010 and 2011).
Specific Objective 2: Responsible and safe management of spent fuel and radioactive waste, namely transport, pretreatment, treatment, processing, storage and disposal, and the decommissioning and remediation of former nuclear
sites and installations.
Indicator 1: Status of development of the spent fuel, nuclear waste and decommissioning strategy (number of
national strategy document for spent fuel, nuclear waste management and decommissioning activities)
Milestones
Baseline
Total
2012
20142020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
5
Indicator 2: Number of waste management and remediation documents developed with EU support
Total
Milestones
Baseline
20142012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2020
4
2*
2
1
1
0
0
6
*The main documents are:
National strategy for management of radioactive waste and spent fuels in Mexico
Survey and strategic assessment of Georgian waste disposals and interim storage sites

Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Budget line
Number of regulatory document issued benefitting of the

transfer of the EU expertise
21 06 01
9,2

Outputs
2014
Number of national strategies

developed with EU support
Number of regulatory
document issued benefitting
of the transfer of the EU
expertise
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Total
2020
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 3: The establishment of frameworks and methodologies for the application of efficient and
effective safeguards for nuclear material in third countries.
Indicator 1: Number of important issues identified in relevant IAEA nuclear safeguards reports* (projects funded
by the EC to respond to the report)
Milestones
Baseline
2012
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Total
2014-2020
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
3
* The IAEA performs nuclear safeguards evaluation of the countries that are party to the Non Proliferation Treaty. The
outcome of such missions is a list of issues to enhance the compliance of the country with the international framework.
Depending on the importance and the geographical eligibility corresponding projects are funded under the Instrument.
Draft Budget 2016
Output1
Budget line
Support to regional safeguards systems
EUR million
21 06 01
Outputs
Support to regional
safeguards systems
Number
2014
F
P
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Total
The Commission implementing decision C(2014)3763 of 13 June 2014 on a strategy for a Community cooperation on nuclear safety (2014
2020) defines the split of the budget between the three priorities. For safeguards, 10% (EUR 22 million) is allocated for the 7 years period. Due to
the limited budget, the safeguards projects are programmed every two years only to get the necessary critical mass for impact and sustainability.
Thus the number of output set to zero for 2014, 2016, 2018 and 2020 where no safeguards projects are planned.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Macro Financial Assistance (MFA)

Lead DG: ECFIN
1.
DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2014
2015
38,3
78,0
79,7
30,8
42,1
Total
38,3
78,0
79,7
30,8
42,1
2.
2020
Total
83,8
84,0
436,6
83,8
84,0
436,6
2014
2015
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl. Rate
38,300
99,69 %
0,193 93,16 %
77,955
0,00 %
74,218
17,56 %
Authorised
appropriation
revenue
38,300
99,69 %
0,193 93,16 %
77,955
0,00 %
74,218
17,56 %
3.
EU added value
The financial assistance provided under MFA operations and the policy measures attached to them aim at supporting the
EU agenda vis--vis the recipient countries, notably by promoting macroeconomic and political stability in the EUs
neighbourhood. The policy measures associated with MFA cover selected provisions related, where applicable, to the
accession-related agreements, Stabilisation and Association Agreements, Partnership and Cooperation Agreements and
European Neighbourhood Policy Action Plans or equivalent documents. They also cover other conditions aimed at
fostering a sustainable balance of payments and budgetary position, raising potential growth, promoting integration and
regulatory convergence with the EU and strengthening public finance management. When using loans, MFA operations
increase the effectiveness of the EU budget through the leverage effect. MFA operations allow the EU as a whole to
bundle financial resources and negotiate with recipient countries on modalities of the assistance and policy conditions as
a unified actor.
By complementing the resources made available by the IFIs and other donors, EU MFA contributes to the overall
effectiveness of the financial support agreed by the international donor community.
Not applicable
Not applicable
Programme Statement
DB2016

Not applicable
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective: Restoring a sustainable external finance situation for countries facing external financing
difficulties
Indicator 1: Countries benefiting from macro-financial assistance achieve a sustainable macro-economic
situation
Baseline
Target 2020
The global financial crisis has continued to challenge the economic stabilisation
Benefiting countries have seen a
and external and internal sustainability in a number of countries. Some of these sustainable increase in their official
countries may require Financial support in the near future.
exchange reserves.
The detailed line-up of MFA programmes is presented below.
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective: Providing macro-financial assistance to third countries in resolving their balance of payment
crises and restoring external debt sustainability
General note:
*The instrument of MFA is by nature a short-term crisis related instrument spanning over 2 to 3 years maximum. This
means that it is not possible to quantify its specific objectives in terms of indicators/milestones beyond the horizon of
the MFA operations themselves or, at most, of the beneficiary countries' programmes agreed (or to be agreed) with the
IMF. Therefore, for years going beyond the MFA operation or the IMF projections, the figures reflect the latest figure
available, and are marked with an asterisk.
Indicator 1: Current account balance (% of GDP)
Baseline
Countries
2014
2013
(estimated)
Jordan
-10.3
-7.1
Kyrgyzstan
-14.8
-14.2
Georgia
-5.7
-8.5
Tunisia
-8.3
-7.9
Ukraine
-9.2
-4.1
Indicator 2: External debt (% of GDP)
Countries
Jordan
Kyrgyzstan
Georgia
Tunisia
Ukraine
*Milestones
Baseline
2014
2013
(estimated)
26.4
30.6
44.8
46.8
81.8
82.3
54.0
54.4
78.6
110.0
Target 2020
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
-8.1
-14.8
-7.9
-6.4
-2.8
-4.1
-13.3
-7.0
-5.0
-2.3
-3.8
-10.2
-6.4
-4.1
-2.7
-3.8
-7.1
-6.0
-3.3
-3.0
-2.5
-6.6
-5.0
-3.2
-3.2
-2.5*
-6.6*
-5.0*
-3.2*
-3.5
*Milestones
2015
2016
2017
2018
201
Target
2020
31.3
47.7
81.0
60.5
145.0
29.8
46.8
79.8
62.2
132.5
29.5
43.8
77.6
61.5
128.0
27.3
41.9
75.6
60.6
124.0
26.3*
40.1
73.3
59.8
118.0
25.4*
40.1*
73.3*
59.8*
110.0
Programme Statement
DB2016
Indicator 3: Official foreign exchange reserves in months' imports of goods and services
Countries
Jordan
Kyrgyzstan
Georgia
Tunisia
Ukraine
Baseline
2014
2013
(estimated)
5.0
6.2
3.9
3.5
3.4
3.1
3.4
3.4
3.1
1.4
*Milestones
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Target
2020
6.4
3.6
3.3
4.4
2.0
6.6
4.1
3.7
4.4*
2.5
7.1
4.6
4.3
4.4*
2.8
7.5
4.8
4.6
4.4*
3.2
8.1*
4.9
4.9
4.4*
3.4
8.1*
4.9*
4.9*
4.4*
3.8

Output
Budget 2015
Number
EUR million
Budget line
MFA grant commitments to third

countries
Operational assessments, PEFA*
studies and ex post evaluations
Total
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
01 03 02
78,0
80
01 03 02
0,2
0,3
78
80,3
* Public Expenditure and Financial Accountability
The below tables summarize the MFA operations foreseen in 2015 and 2016.
Draft Budget 2016, forecast disbursements of MFA grants and loans
Commitments for grants 2014-2016 (tentative) - in million EUR
Total 20142014
2015
2016
2016
M FA Kyrgyz Republic
15
15
M FA Georgia
23
23
New M FA operations
78
80
158
Total
38
78
80
196
Payments for grants 2014-2016 (tentative) - in million EUR
2014
M FA Georgia
New M FA operations
Total
2015
15
23
36
74
2016
80
80
Total 20142016
15
23
116
154
MFA loans disbursements in 2014-2016 (tentative) - in million EUR

Total 20142014
2015
2016
2016
M FA I Ukraine
360
250
610
M FA II Ukraine
1.000
1.000
M FA III Ukraine
1.200
600
1.800
M FA Georgia
23
23
M FA Jordan
180
180
M FA Tunisia
200
100
300
15
15
New M FA operations
50
460
510
Total 1.360
1.918
1.160
4.438
Programme Statement
DB2016
Explanatory note
Currently, the pipeline of MFA programmes includes six programmes for which the Commission' legislative proposals
have been adopted by the co-legislators but which have not yet been (fully) implemented:
1.
Ukraine I (EUR 610 million in loans, combination of two decisions approved in 2002 and 2010). The first two
tranches under this MFA I operation (EUR 100 million and EUR 260 million) were disbursed in May and
November 2014, respectively. Should the IMF programme remain on track and the Ukrainian authorities comply
with the MFA conditions, the last tranche (EUR 250 million) could be disbursed in April 2015.
Georgia (EUR 46 million, including EUR 23 million in grants). The budgetary commitment of the full amount
of the assistance was done in 2014. The disbursement of the first grant element (EUR 13 million) was done in
January 2015, and the disbursement of the first loan element (EUR 10 million) is foreseen around March 2015.
The disbursement of the second tranche is foreseen in mid-2015.
Jordan (EUR 180 million in loans). The MFA decision for Jordan was adopted by the co-legislators in
December 2013. The first tranche of EUR 100 million was disbursed on 10 February 2015, while the second
tranche of EUR 180 million is foreseen to be disbursed in mid-2015.
Tunisia (EUR 300 million in loans).The MFA Decision was adopted in May 2014. The first two tranches (of
each EUR 100 million) would be disbursed in 2015, while the third tranche (also of EUR 100 million) would be
disbursed in 2016.
The Kyrgyz Republic (EUR 30 million, including EUR 15 million in grants). The budgetary commitment of
the full amount of the assistance was done in 2014, and the disbursement of both tranches is foreseen in 2015.
Ukraine III (EUR 1.8 billion in loans). The MFA Decision was adopted on 15 April 2015. At this stage, this
MFA III operation with Ukraine is foreseen to be disbursed in three tranches, each of EUR 600 million. The first
two tranches would be disbursed in 2015, while the third tranche would be disbursed in 2016.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In addition, the European Commission may launch new MFA operations in both the Southern and the Eastern
neighbourhoods in 2015, 2016 and beyond, in view of the deteriorated economic environment in several of the countries
in these areas as a result of, among other things:
conflicts in some countries, which have a large negative impact on the economy, notably through
refugees/internally displaced persons (IDPs);
geopolitical and economic destabilization (through the trade and remittances channels) induced in some
countries as retaliation measures for these countries' rapprochement with the EU (signature of Association
Agreement/DCFTA);
terrorist attacks in some countries, which have a direct impact on some sectors of the economy and overall on
economic sentiment, business environment and level of investment;
deterioration of the economy of the major economic partner(s) of some EU neighbouring countries, which have
a negative economic impact through the remittances, the trade and the currency/monetary channels (depreciation
of the local currency, use of reserves to defend the currency);
lower oil/gas prices
internal shocks in some countries (e.g. banking crisis) and/or structural weaknesses translating into high fiscal
deficit and/or current account deficit.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Union Civil Protection Mechanism - Heading 4

Lead DG: ECHO
1.
Legal Basis
Decision No 1313/2013/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council

of 17 December 2013 on a Union Civil Protection Mechanism
2014
Total
2.
2015
14,9
14,9
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
144,7

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
16,9
16,9
17,6
17,6
20,7
20,7
21,1
21,1
2020
21,5
21,5
21,4
21,4
Total
134,3
134,3
2014
Impl.
Rate
CA
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
15,791
102,95 %
4,773 96,67 %
17,438 69,59 %
13,537
3,88 %
Authorised
appropriation
revenue
15,204
99,03 %
4,593 92,52 %
16,940 66,65 %
13,152
0,94 %
3.
EU added value
Based on the new Treaty Article 196 for civil protection policy, the aim of the Mechanism is to support, coordinate and
supplement the actions of the Member States in the field of civil protection with a view to improving the effectiveness of
systems for preventing, preparing for and responding to natural and man-made disasters.
The EU's added value comes in the form of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
reducing the loss of human life, environmental, economic and material damage caused by disasters through a
comprehensive approach covering disaster prevention, preparedness and response;
an improved understanding in Member States of disaster risks through cooperation on risk assessment and
planning, and the gradual development of a European culture of disaster prevention;
an improved preparedness for disasters through training, exercises, exchange of best practices and similar
activities;
improved coordination of the response to disasters by bringing together and facilitating Member States' offers of
assistance;
increased cost-effectiveness through the pooling of assistance, the sharing of transport capacities, the
identification of complementarities and the avoidance of duplication;
a coherent, predictable and more visible response to disasters through the set-up of a European Response
Capacity ready to help everywhere in the EU and in third countries when needed.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Not applicable
Not applicable
Budget 2015
(EUR Million)
DB 2016
(EUR Million)
2,1
2,13
To achieve a high level of protection against disasters by preventing or

reducing their effects and by fostering a culture of prevention.
In 2016, it is planned to continue with prevention actions in third countries, namely through the prevention call and through the continuation of
exchange of experts programme that also covers prevention activities, with total amount of app. 1.7 MEUR (1.5 MEUR for prevention projects, 0.2
MEUR for exchange of experts). .Other actions, such as "Improving the knowledge base for disaster prevention" and activities in the area of early
warning should also contribute to preventing disasters in eligible third countries (app. 0.43 MEUR should be dedicated for these actions).

Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: The Union Civil Protection Mechanism shall aim to strengthen the cooperation between the
Union and the Member States and to facilitate coordination in the field of civil protection in order to improve the
effectiveness of systems for preventing, preparing for and responding to natural and man-made disasters in Third
countries.
Indicator 1: Economic damage caused by natural disasters (Source: As recorded in the EM-DAT database)
Baseline
Milestones
Target 2020
Annual average 2014 2019* (USD Billion)
(USD Billion)
(USD Billion)
155
93
93
* Estimate based on the average of annual economic damage of the past 10 years
The 2014 result was at 85 billion $ which is more or less in line with expected target.
A very important part of the result of this indicator is depending of external factors that are not under the Commission's control. Nevertheless, ECHO's
impact will be reviewed in 2016 during the interim evaluation of the Union Civil Protection Mechanism.
Following 2015 adoption of the Sendai Framework for Disaster Risk Reduction - including a target on reducing economic loss from disasters in relation
to Global GDP the above mentioned target will be revised to be in line with the Sendai methodology.
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: To achieve a high level of protection against disasters by preventing or reducing their effects by
fostering a culture of prevention and by improving cooperation between the civil protection and other relevant services.
Indicator 1: Number of projects financed for prevention in Third countries covered by the Instrument for PreAccession Assistance and the European Neighbourhood Policy (including exchange of experts)
Baseline
2013
N/A New
Milestones
Target 2020
Result
2014
2015
4
2016
4
2017
5
2018
7
2019
7
In the work programme 2014, it was finally decided to put less money to prevention and preparedness projects and more
to exercises. Indeed, with a 1 000 000 EUR budget, it was not possible to finance more than 4 prevention/exchange of
experts projects. The available amounts should be higher as from 2016.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
Budget line
Grant agreements
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
23 03 01 02
Outputs
F
P
Grant agreements
2-3
1,7

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3*
Total
18
3
*One additional prevention project was co-financed in 2014, due to transfer of funds from another action on the same budget line.
Specific Objective 2: To enhance preparedness in Third countries to respond to disasters.

Indicator 1: Number of projects financed for preparedness (including training and exercises, workshops and
exchanges of experts) in Third countries covered by the Instrument of Pre-Accession and the European
Neighbourhood Policy
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
Result
2013
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2014
N/A New
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
Output
Budget line
Grant agreements and contracts
23 03 01 02
Outputs
Grant agreements and
contracts
F
P
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
5
3,9

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
4
5
6
8
10
10
12
5
Total
55
5
Specific Objective 3: To facilitate rapid and efficient response in the event of disasters or imminent disasters.
Indicator 1: Average speed of interventions under the EU Civil Protection Mechanism (from the acceptance of the
offer to deployment). (Source: Annual report for the EP on the implementation of the new union Civil Protection
Mechanism Decision)
Baseline
2013
Milestones
2014
36 hours 24 hours
2015
2016
2017
18 hours
2018
2019
Target 2020
12 hours
Remark: Quantitative response indicators will depend entirely on the number of future disasters, which are unpredictable.
This is reflected in the fact that a separate implementing decision on disaster response was adopted (C(2013) 9085 final)
which contains no indicators: Commission Implementing Decision of 18.12.2013 on financing emergency response
actions under the Union Civil Protection Mechanism in 2014 from the general budget of the European Union.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
Budget line
Number of contracts
Grant agreement/ service contract
Total
Outputs
Number of contracts
Grant agreement/ service
contract
F
P
F
P
23 03 02 02
23 03 02 02
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
1
70
71

2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
60
60
70
75
80
85
90
91*
2
10
12
Total
7
520
*As many of grant requests related to Ebola in the Western Africa were received by the Commission in 2014, there were
more grant agreements finalised in 2014 than foreseen (58 grants related to the transport of assistance to the Western
Africa).
Taking into consideration the development of the civil protection voluntary pool of assets, which entails a higher cofinancing rate for transport operations, data from 2014 (91 grant agreements) as well as the current high level of grant
requests in 2015 (a total of 35 already), we propose to increase the number of foreseen grant agreements for 2016 from
60 to 70, and thereafter project a steady increase until the end of the programming period.
Specific Objective 4: To increase public awareness and preparedness for disasters.

The Union Civil Protection Mechanism strengthens cooperation and coordination between Member States in preventing,
preparing for and responding to natural and man-made disasters. While response actions are foreseen anywhere in the
world, the prevention and preparedness actions are limited to Member States, accession candidates and potential
candidates, and European neighbourhood countries. According to Article 20(d) Mechanism Decision, public information,
education and awareness raising and associated dissemination actions are limited to Union citizens. Therefore, the
progress in increasing public awareness and preparedness will be measured only inside the Union.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Lead DG: ECHO
1.
Legal Basis

Council of 3 April 2014 establishing the European Voluntary
Humanitarian Aid Corps (EU Aid Volunteers initiative)
Executive Agency
Total
2.
2014
12,1
0,5
12,7
2015
13,9
0,9
14,8
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
147,9

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
16,9
21,0
25,2
25,5
1,0
1,0
1,1
1,2
17,9
22,0
26,3
26,8
2020
26,2
1,3
27,5
Total
140,9
7,0
147,9
2014
2015
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
12,677
99,41 %
2,888 15,72 %
14,765
6,08 %
13,335
1,91 %
Authorised
appropriation
revenue
12,677
99,41 %
2,888 15,72 %
14,765
6,08 %
13,335
1,91 %
3.
EU added value
The EU added value comes in the form of:
a) the European and transnational character of the EU Aid Volunteers bringing together Union citizens from different
Member States for joint contributions in humanitarian aid operations;
b) fostering transnational cooperation of humanitarian aid organisations and stakeholders in implementation of the
actions of the initiative;
c) allowing for economies of scale and effects through complementarities and synergies with other relevant national,
international and Union programmes and policies;
d)providing for a tangible expression of the European values in general and in particular the solidarity of the Union and
its citizens with the people who are most vulnerable and in need;
e)contributing to reinforcing active European Union citizenship by empowering Union citizens of a different age and
from different social, educational and professional background to engage in humanitarian aid activities.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Flagship
Youth on the move

Total
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
1,9
2,5
4,4
DB 2016
(EUR million)
4,5
2,0
6,5
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
DB 2016
(EUR million)
2,8*
3,4*

Training, capacity building and deployments will focus amongst other on
disaster risk reduction and prevention of climate related disasters.
* The amount earmarked constitutes 20% of total appropriations for the EUAV based on the assumption that the whole
project cycle from selection, training and deployment and 20% of all volunteer placements are foreseen for activities to
do with disaster risk reduction, prevention etc. This has been confirmed by experience of pilot projects.
Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: To contribute to strengthening the Union's capacity to provide needs-based humanitarian aid
aimed at preserving life, preventing and alleviating human suffering and maintaining human dignity and to
strengthening the capacity and resilience of vulnerable or disaster-affected communities in third countries, particularly
by means of disaster preparedness, disaster risk reduction and by enhancing the link between relief, rehabilitation and
development. That objective shall be attained through the added value of joint contributions of EU Aid Volunteers,
expressing the Union's values and solidarity with people in need and visibly promoting a sense of European
citizenship.
Indicator 1: The number of people reached by humanitarian aid provided through the EU Aid Volunteers initiative
and the average costs per person reached
Milestones
Baseline
Target
N/A*
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Number of people reached
Costs (in EUR) / person
reached
n/a
17 500
25 000
30 000
35 000
42 500
50 000
n/a
845
716
733
751
631
550
Estimation at 50 beneficiaries directly reached / volunteer

2014 figures have been updated based on the fact that in 2014 no volunteers are deployed throughout the 2014-2020 MFF
funding. This will start as from 2015 budget. The 70 volunteers previously mentioned in the documents referred to the
pilot volunteers that are not relevant for this programme statement.
Programme Statement
4.
DB2016
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: Contribute to increasing and improving the capacity of the Union to provide humanitarian aid.
Indicator 1: Number of EU Aid Volunteers deployed or ready for deployment with the required qualifications
Baseline
N/A*
2014
Milestones
2016
2017
2015
350
n/a
500
2018
600
Target
2020
2019
700
850 1.000
* New programme
Indicator 2: Number of EU Aid Volunteers who have completed their contract of deployment
Baseline
2013
N/A new programme
2014
n/a
2015
315
Milestones
2016
2017
450
540
2018
Target
2020
2019
630
765
900
*Based on 90% rate of completed contracts of deployment

Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Budget line
Training of volunteers and apprenticeships

Deployment
Total
23 04 01
23 04 01
500
500
1 000
4,0
9,0
13,0

Outputs
Training of volunteers and

apprenticeship placements
No of volunteers deployed
2014
F
P
F
P
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
540
825
1.025
1.225
1.400
1.700
350
500
600
700
850
1 000
Total
6.715
0
4 000
0
Tables cover expenditure related outputs of objective 1 and 2.

2014 figures have been updated based on the fact that in 2014 no volunteers are deployed throughout the 2014-2020 MFF
funding. This will start as from 2015 budget. The volunteers previously mentioned in the documents referred to the pilot
volunteers that are not relevant for this programme statement.
Specific Objective 2: Improvement of the skills, knowledge and competences of volunteers in the field of
humanitarian aid and the terms and conditions of their engagement.
Indicator 1: The degree of satisfaction of the EU Aid Volunteers trained and deployed, of the sending and hosting
organisations with regard to the quality of the training, level of knowledge and competences of volunteers, the
fulfilment and adequacy of the standards and procedures for management of candidate and EU Aid Volunteers
(overall satisfaction rate out of 100%)
Milestones
Baseline
Target
2013
2020
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
N/A new programme
n/a
75
80
80
85
85
85
(see Objective 1).
Programme Statement
DB2016
Specific Objective 3: Building the capacity of hosting organisations and foster volunteering in third countries.
Indicator 1: Number of third country staff and volunteers participating in the capacity building actions
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
1.450
300
700
Baseline
2013
N/A new programme
700
2018
2019
Target
2020
600
550
550

Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Budget line
Capacity building and technical assistance
23 04 01
700
3,4
Outputs
No of participants to capacity building F
and technical assistance actions
P
2014
2015
2016
1.450
N/A
300
700
2017
2018
700
2019
600
2020
550
550
Total
4.850
Tables cover expenditure related outputs of objectives 3 and 5.
Specific Objective 4: Communication of the Union's humanitarian aid principles as agreed in the European Consensus
on Humanitarian Aid.
Indicator 1: Number, type and costs of information, communication and awareness-raising actions
Baseline*
2014
2
500 000*
N/A new programme

Costs per action (in EUR)
Milestones
2016
2017
4
5
187 500 280 000**
2015
3
166 667
2018
4
187 500
2019
4
187 500
Target 2020
4
165 000
* Higher costs per beneficiary / action in year 2014 are due to the cost of set-up at the beginning of the initiative that
would be amortised over the years thereafter (leading to lower costs / action and beneficiary).
** Higher costs due to revision and upgrade of online system
Draft Budget 2016
Output
Budget line
Support measures (Awareness raising events, platform,

networking)
23 04 01
Number
EUR million
0,5

Outputs
Overall information platform

produced and maintained
during the programme
Awareness raising conference
and seminars
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
Total
2020
1 (maintained over
the project period
1
and reviewed in
2017)
18
Programme Statement
DB2016

A need for more information and dissemination activities has been identified in 2015 in order to make the programme
known widely.
Specific Objective 5: Enhancement of coherence and consistency of volunteering across Member States in order to
improve opportunities for Union citizens to participate in humanitarian aid activities and operations.
Indicator 1: Number of (newly) certified sending organisations applying the standards and procedures for
deployment and management of European volunteers
Milestones
Baseline
Target 2020
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
N/A new programme
n/a
10
10
8
8
8
8
See objective 3
General information about the changes in the performance information
The EUAV started with some delays due to the fact that Implementing and Delegated Regulations were only adopted by
the end of 2014 and consequently, activities could only kick at the start of 2015. 2015, thus, sees the parallel
implementation of activities under the 2014 and 2015 Annual Work Plans. As a consequence, we are not yet in a position
to report back on whether targets under the 2014 work programme have been reached.
The first actions of the programme are linked to certification of new organisations to join the programme as well as
capacity building of these organisations. Thus, no volunteers were deployed yet in 2014 (instead, there were still 70
volunteers from the pilot phase deployed). Targets for capacity building have been increased at this early stage of the
programme. Later in the programme the focus will be more on the growing numbers of volunteers.
Programme Statement
DB2016
Cooperation with Greenland

Lead DG: DEVCO
1.
Legal Basis
Council Decision 2014/137/EU of 14 March 2014 on relations between

the European Union on the one hand, and Greenland and the Kingdom of
Denmark on the other
2014
Total
2.
2015
0,2
24,6
24,8
Period of
application
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020
217,8

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
0,2
30,7
30,9
0,2
31,1
31,4
0,3
31,6
31,9
0,3
32,1
32,4
2020
0,3
32,6
32,9
0,3
33,2
33,5
Total
1,8
216,0
217,8
2014
2015
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
24,818
99,99 %
10,868 99,52 %
Authorised
appropriation
revenue
24,818
99,99 %
10,868 99,11 %
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
30,943 99,46 %
33,974
26,93 %
30,943 99,60 %
33,974
26,93 %
3.
EU added value
The EU-Greenland partnership allows for the continuation of strong relations between the partners and responds to the
global challenges, allowing for the development of a proactive agenda and the pursuit of mutual interests. The
partnership shall, in particular, define the framework for policy dialogue on issues of common interest for either partner,
providing the basis for broad cooperation and dialogue in areas such as:
(a) global issues concerning, inter alia, energy, climate change and environment, natural resources, including raw
materials, maritime transport, research and innovation; and
(b) Arctic issues
As the EU is the only donor besides the Kingdom of Denmark, the support allocated through the new partnership will
bring an EU perspective to the development of Greenland and will contribute to the strengthening of close and long
lasting ties with that territory.
Greenlanders enjoy the citizenship of the Member State to which they are constitutionally linked (Denmark), and
subsequently hold EU citizenship, making for the corresponding parts of the Treaty to apply to them. The EU support
strengthens the position of Greenland as an advanced outpost of the EU, based on the common values and history which
links the two partners
Programme Statement
DB2016
The financial support from the Union, allocated through the new partnership, brings a European perspective to the
development of Greenland and contributes to the strengthening of close and long lasting ties with that territory, while
strengthening the position of Greenland as an advanced outpost of the Union, based on the common values and history
which links the two partners.
Not applicable
Not applicable
Budget 2015
(EUR Million)
7,4
EU support for the sustainable development of Greenland*
DB 2016
(EUR Million)
6,8
*This contribution is based on the following assumptions:

1.
that around 15% of the overall Greenland Education Budget is spent on building equivalent to EUR 35 million
per year in 2014,
that the current EU programme contributes around 50% to the overall budget of the GEP,
that the EU contribution allows the heavy investments in the buildings and housing
that most building activity under the GEP replaces old school buildings and especially old dormitories that the
new buildings are 50% more energy efficient.
2.
3.
4.

Not applicable
General objectives
General Objective 1: The EU/Greenland partnership aims to preserve the close and lasting links between the partners,
while supporting the sustainable development of the Greenlandic society.
Indicator 1: Percentage of trade balance in GDP
Baseline
2012
Milestones
2014
2015
2016
2017
-19%
2018
2019
-19%
Target
2020
-18%
No significant change in the trade balance for 2015 is forecasted as no new mining activities will have started up during that year. Source: Statistics
Greenland; www.stat.gl, data have been extracted from the Greenland Figures 2014 (pamphlet provided by the Statistical Bureau of Greenland on
an annual basis).
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective 1: To support and cooperate with Greenland in addressing its major challenges in particular the
sustainable diversification of the economy, the need to increase the skills of its labour force, including scientists, and
the need to improve the Greenlandic information systems in the field of Information and Communication
Technologies.
Indicator 1: Completion rate at high school, VET and higher education
Milestones
2014
2015
2016
2017
51,1%
54%
Indicator 2: Share of age group outside education system
Baseline
2013
2018
2019
Target 2020
60%
Programme Statement
Baseline
2013
2014
DB2016
Milestones
2016
2017
57%
2015
61,6%
Indicator 3: Percentage of fisheries in total exports
2018
2019
40%
Milestones
Baseline
2013
2014
2015
89,8%
2016
Target
2020
2017
2018
2019
89%
Target 2020
83%
No significant change in the percentage of fisheries in total exports for 2015 is forecasted as no new mining activities
will have started up during that year. In fact, recent developments showed that fisheries will maintain the leading position
in the economy and their share will possibly even increase in the following years. Source: Statistics Greenland;
www.stat.gl, data have been extracted from the Greenland Figures 2014 (pamphlet provided by the Statistical Bureau of
Greenland on an annual basis).
Output
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
Budget line
Support to the Greenland Education Programme Phase II
21 07 01
31,1

Outputs
2014
Support to the Greenland F

Education Programme Phase II
P
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
Total
Specific Objective 2: To contribute to the capacity of the Greenlandic administration to formulating and implementing
national policies in particular in new areas of mutual interest as identified in the PDSD referred to in Article 4(1).
Indicator 1: Number of administrative staff completing training (participant days)
Milestones
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
1350
1500
Indicator 2: Percentage of civil servants that are (long-term) residents in Greenland
Baseline
2013
Baseline
2013
2014
2015
2016
Milestones
2017
2018
2019
Target
2020
1500
2019
Target
2020
87,2%
The definitions of the 2 indicators were changed with the new programming document, leading to modification of the
baselines. In order to provide more specific information on trainings, the definition of indicator 1 was re-formulated in
the programming document from number of persons having completed training (as per legal base), to number of
participant days to training (one participant day is defined as one person participating in one day of training).
Indicator 2 measures the civil servants with at least 5 years of residence in Greenland and the short term residents which
were born in Greenland. Milestones and targets for indicator 2 have not been established as this indicator is not directly
influenced by the EU support. Data on this indicator are monitored and provided by Statistics Greenland.
The EU support is focused on Specific Objective 1 only.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Following the Council Decision 2014/137/EU of 14 March 2014 on relations between the European Union on the one
hand, and Greenland and the Kingdom of Denmark on the other, the Commission agreed with the Government of
Greenland the "Programming document for the sustainable development of Greenland 2014-2020" which was signed on
28/10/2014. The objectives and indicators follow those in the Council decision, complemented by indicators on
education, taken from the programming document.
Executive summary:
The EU continues to provide financial support to the Greenland Education Sector through the implementation of a
budget-support Sector Reform Contract. The overall objective of the new programme adopted in 2014 is to contribute to
a higher standard of living through improved education, skills development and knowledge. This will ensure Greenlands
continuous economic progress in the increasingly globalised world economy through provision of a critical mass of
qualified, flexible people and a competitive workforce. Increased productivity in the working age population will reduce
the growing pressure on the public finances resulting from the growing share of elderly people in the population.
Furthermore, a highly educated and skilled labour force will reduce the economic dependence on single sectors and is a
prerequisite for development and inclusive growth in emerging sectors.
During Greenland Education Programme phase 1 (running from 2006 to 2013 and supported by EU), attendance
increased by 43% (from 2700 in 2005 to 3862 in 2013) on average over all levels of post-elementary education.
Subsequently, this resulted in an increase in the number of pupils graduating of 59.7% (from 581 in 2005 to 928 in 2013),
which can be considered a crucial increase in the education level of the population1. 56% of the cohort that turned 35 in
2012 completed an education above elementary level. However, the drop-out rates have not decreased since the start of
the programme, and the completion rate of the youth education programmes remains at approximately 50%. Since the
attendance has increased the schools are now recruiting from a broader part of the population, which partly explains this
lack in progress in the field of drop-out.
Whereas GEP phase 1 resulted in an increased capacity of the education system and a related improved general access to
education, the emphasis during phase 2 will be on
increasing initiatives to reduce the dropout rate, including in vocational education and training (VET)2,
improving the quality of the education system,
the ability of the system to accommodate and include students who are in need of special attention
improvements in the transitions between different stages in the education system.
For 2016 one of the main priorities will continue to be the improvement of elementary schools, which will be done
through the education and up-skilling of school staff, on the basis of an external evaluation of the elementary school
system. Furthermore, the EU funded study on dropout from vocational education and training programmes, examining
the causes of and solutions to the substantial dropout rates from these programmes, will provide recommendations for
each school, as well as overall recommendations for central policy making.
1
2
Source: Statistics Greenland, indicator matrices delivered to the Ministry of Education, Church, Culture and Gender Equality.
VET is a priority area for the Government. In addition to reduced dropout, securing increased access and easier transition to VET are important
focal areas in the Greenland Education Programme II. The Governments initiatives include addressing the limiting factor of apprenticeships,
making VET available to a broader part of the population through short-term VET programmes and specialisations, and making the transition to
VET easier by introductory courses.
Programme Statement
457
DB2016
Programme Statement
SPECIAL INSTRUMENTS
SPECIAL INSTRUMENTS / 458
DB2016
Programme Statement
DB2016
Special Instruments
European Globalisation Adjustment Fund (EGF)

Lead DG: EMPL
1.
Legal Basis

December 2013 on the European Globalisation Adjustment Fund (2014-2020) and
repealing Regulation (EC) No 1927/2006
2014 - 2020
2014
Total
2.

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
2015
0,3
120,1
120,4
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
162,4
162,4
165,6
165,6
168,9
168,9
172,3
172,3
2020
175,7
175,7
Total
0,3
179,3 1 144,3
179,3 1 144,6
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
146,718 28,06 %
69,072 219,69 % 202,662
7,66 %
67,971 48,97 %
Authorised
appropriation
revenue
146,718 28,06 %
69,072 216,24 % 202,662
7,67 %
67,971 48,97 %
3.
EU added value
The opening of economies to international competition brings new opportunities in terms of competitiveness and the
creation of high-quality jobs. However, the opening of trade can also have negative consequences, including redundancies
in some sectors and areas of the EU. As the EU takes external trade decisions, it is logical that it should assume some
responsibility for workers who lose their jobs due to more open trade by providing support to reintegrate them into the
labour market. The EU set up the European Globalisation adjustment Fund (EGF, under shared management) in 2006 to
address the adverse effects of globalisation, to strengthen overall participation in the labour market and to demonstrate the
EU's solidarity with the workers affected.
The scope of the fund has been broadened to include support for workers made redundant as a consequence of a global
financial and economic crisis, fixed-term and temporary agency workers, self-employed workers and also under certain
circumstances NEETs1.
Union involvement through the EGF allows it to complement national and ESF resources available for the re-integration
of workers made redundant as a consequence of trade related globalisation and a global financial and economic crisis.
Experience so far with the EGF indicates that Union involvement makes it possible to provide more tailor-made support,
for a longer period of time, often including measures that could not have been provided without the involvement of the
EGF.
The opening of economies to international competition brings new opportunities in terms of competitiveness and the
creation of high-quality jobs. However, the opening of trade can also have negative consequences, including redundancies
1
Young people not in education, employment or training.
Programme Statement
DB2016
in some sectors and areas of the EU. As the EU takes external trade decisions, it is logical that it should assume some
responsibility for workers who lose their jobs due to more open trade by providing support to reintegrate them into the
labour market. The EU set up the European Globalisation adjustment Fund (EGF, under shared management) in 2006 to
address the adverse effects of globalisation, to strengthen overall participation in the labour market and to demonstrate the
EU's solidarity with the workers affected.
The scope of the fund has been broadened to include support for workers made redundant as a consequence of a global
financial and economic crisis, fixed-term and temporary agency workers, self-employed workers and also under certain
circumstances NEETs2.
Union involvement through the EGF allows it to complement national and ESF resources available for the re-integration
of workers made redundant as a consequence of trade related globalisation. Experience so far with the EGF indicates that
Union involvement makes it possible to provide more tailor-made support, for a longer period of time, often including
measures that could not have been provided without the involvement of the EGF.


Flagship
Budget 2015
(EUR million)
162,4
DB 2016
(EUR million)
165,6
Not applicable
Not applicable
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective: To contribute to smart, inclusive and sustainable economic growth and to promote sustainable
employment in the Union by enabling the Union to demonstrate solidarity towards and to support workers made
redundant and self-employed persons whose activity has ceased as a result of major structural changes in world trade
patterns due to globalisation, as a result of a continuation of the global financial and economic crisis addressed in
Regulation (EC) No 546/2009, or as a result of a new global financial and economic crisis
Indicator 1: Proportion of redundant workers reintegrated into employment following EGF supported measures
Baseline
(2012)
4 7% (*)
2014
2015
Milestones
2016
2017
2018
2019
49 %
Target 2020
> 50 %
(*) % of workers targeted that were re-employed at final reporting time. This is an average figure based on the five annual reports available (2008 to
2012).These results were heavily influenced by the global financial and economic crisis. The next, now biennial, report on the activities of the EGF is
due in 2015.
Young people not in education, employment or training.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Output
Budget line
Active labour market policy (ALMP) measures for workers

made redundant as a result of changes in world trade
04 04 01
Outputs
ALMP measures for workers made
redundant as a result of changes in
world trade
2014
2015
NA
NA
Draft Budget 2016

Number
EUR million
NA
Number of outputs produced

2016
2017
2018
2019
NA
NA
NA
NA
2020
NA
Max 165,6
Total
Programme Statement
DB2016
Special Instruments
European Union Solidarity Fund (EUSF)

Lead DG: REGIO
1.
Legal Basis
Period of
application
Council Regulation (EC) No 2012/2002 of 11 November 2002 establishing

the European Union Solidarity Fund, amended by Regulation (EU) No
661/2014 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 May 2014
2014
Total
2.
66,5
66,5
2015
Reference Amount
(EUR million)
2014 - 2020

DB2016
2017
2018
2019
116,5
116,5
2020
50,0
50,0
Total
233,0
233,0
2014
CA
Impl.
Rate
2015
PA
Impl.
Rate
CA
Impl.
Rate
PA
Impl.
Rate
66,500
0,00 % 400,806 267,20 %
116,500 133,00 % 116,500
57,08 %
Authorised
appropriation
revenue
66,500
0,00 % 400,806 267,20 %
116,500 133,00 % 116,500
57,08 %
3.
EU added value
The European Union Solidarity Fund (EUSF) is one of the most concrete demonstrations of solidarity between Member
States in acute times of need in the event of a major natural disaster. The European Union Solidarity Fund is an
instrument distinct from those of Cohesion policy and was set up in 2002 to grant financial assistance to Member States
and to countries negotiating their accession to the EU. From 2002 to 2013 the EUSF had an annual budget of 1 billion
(current prices). From 2014 this amount has been reduced to 500 million (in 2011 prices) plus any remaining amounts
not spent in the preceding year.
The EUSF can be mobilised in the event of major and regional disasters. A "major disaster" within the meaning of the
Regulation means any disaster resulting, in an eligible country, in damage estimated at over 3 billion in 2011 prices, or
more than 0.6 % of its gross national income (GNI), whichever is the lower. The Fund may be activated for regional
disasters, if total direct damage exceeds 1.5% of regional GDP at NUTS level 2 (1% of GDP for outermost regions). The
EUSF is a relatively simple instrument in administrative terms. It may only intervene upon application from the national
authorities of the country concerned; the Commission may not activate it upon its own initiative. Appropriations for the
EUSF are raised outside the normal EU budget, the Commission therefore cannot decide on contributions from the Fund
alone, it has to propose to the budgetary authority (Council and European Parliament) to mobilise the Fund. Following
the mobilisation of the Fund by decision of the budget authority the financial contribution from the Fund is paid 100%
upfront as a single instalment. Affected countries may however request the payment of an advance of 10% of the
expected contribution (limited to a maximum of EUR 30 million per request). For the payment of the advance, the
Regulation allows mobilising the Fund for up to EUR 50 million. Therefore commitment and payment appropriations of
EUR 50 million are requested on the EUSF budget line for the DB2016. There is neither a co-financing nor a
programming requirement. The EUSF is very efficient as a refinancing instrument for emergency operations following a
disaster. Once the financial contribution is paid out, it can re-finance emergency measures from day one of the disaster.
Programme Statement
DB2016

Not applicable
4.
Specific objectives
Specific Objective: To grant assistance to Member States or countries negotiating their accession to the EU in the
event of a major natural disaster with serious repercussions on living conditions, the natural environment or the
economy for the financing of emergency operations undertaken by the public authorities in support of the affected
population
Indicator 1: Number of population helped in overcoming a crisis situation where their living conditions have been
affected
Latest-known result
Target 2020
7 EUSF applications decided in 2014, covering 100% of the affected areas and
population for which interventions were requested by MS. Following the carry-over
procedure of the budget, payments for these cases will be executed in early 2015.
5 payments made in 2014 granting financial assistance:
100% of population affected and
1) to Croatia for the flooding event of 2012;
eligible under the EUSF
2) to Romania for the drought of fires disaster of 2012;
Regulation1upon the Member
3) to Germany, Austria and the Czech Republic for the flooding events of 2013;
States' request
for recovery measures in the areas of basic infrastructures mainly for transport (road,
rail) and water management (securing of flood protection constructions), energy,
cleaning up operations.
The combination of these measures covers 100% of the affected population.
Indicator 2: Size of disaster-stricken area where rehabilitation has been assisted
Latest-known result
Target 2020
Aid available for 100% of affected areas (choice of
100% of areas affected by the disaster and eligible under the
supported operations up to the beneficiary state)
EUSF Regulation upon the Member States' request
Budget 2014
Number
EUR
million(2)
Budget 2015
Number
EUR
million
Output
Budget line
1.Number of applications received and assessed
130601
123
~4
~5
66,5
130602
60,2
130601
06
67
66,5
130602
60,2
2.Number of award decisions adopted and

commitments done
3.Overall committed amount
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
08
126,7
Council Regulation (EC) No 2012/2002 of 11 November 2002 establishing the European Union Solidarity Fund.
For each type of output, this is the total cost of the outputs produced.
In total, 13 applications received, of which 7 were accepted in 2014 for a total amount of EUR 126,725 (IT, GR, SI, 2x HR, RS, BG), 2 cases
were rejected and 4 cases are pending.
No financial impact in 2014 (carry-over to 2015).
Since EUSF disasters are not foreseeable, we do not know at this stage whether more cases will be submitted in 2015, but this is very likely.
Amending budgets for the 7 accepted cases were only adopted in late December 2014 and commitments could not be done before the end of 2014.
Carry-over procedure to 2015.
Following the carry-over procedure covering 7 EUSF cases, award decisions, commitments and payments will be made in early 2015 for a total
amount of EUR 126,725.
EUR 400 806 million were committed in 2014 (carry-over from 2013).
Programme Statement
/464
DB2016
Europe Direct is a service to help you find answers to your questions about the European Union.
Freephone number (*): 00 800 6 7 8 9 10 11
(*) Certain mobile telephone operators do not allow access to 00 800 numbers or these calls may be billed.
A great deal of additional information on the European Union is available on the Internet.
It can be accessed through the Europa server (http://europa.eu).
European Union, 2015
Reproduction is authorised provided the source is acknowledged.
Printed in Europe
For feedback on this publication:
BUDG-MAILBOX-A01@ec.europa.eu
For more information on the EU accounts, budget, financial programming and accounting:
EU Budget:
http://ec.europa.eu/budget/index_en.cfm
Vice-President Kristalina Georgieva:
http://ec.europa.eu/commission/2014-2019/georgieva_en
Directorate-General for Budget:
http://ec.europa.eu/dgs/budget/index.htm
Designed & Printed by OIB
You can find the electronic version of this document at:

http://ec.europa.eu/budget/biblio/documents/2016/2016_en.cfm

Db2016 Wdib en

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Db2016 Wdib en

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Draft General Budget

of the European Union

Working Document Part I

COM(2015) 300 June 2015

DB 2016 Working Document Part I Programme Statements of

Draft General Budget

Working Document Part I

COM(2015) 300 - June 2015

Draft Budget Working Documents

HEADING 1B ECONOMIC, SOCIAL AND TERRITORIAL COHESION...................... 165

HEADING 2 SUSTAINABLE GROWTH: NATURAL RESOURCES .............................. 201

HEADING 3 SECURITY AND CITIZENSHIP..................................................................... 264

HEADING 4 GLOBAL EUROPE ........................................................................................... 360

SPECIAL INSTRUMENTS......................................................................................................... 458

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM

Link with the budgetary nomenclature

2. Overview of the programmes' performance

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 7

Heading 1a competitiveness for growth and jobs

allow navigating vertically when landing at an

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 8

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 9

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 10

The following H2020 novelties have been kicked

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 11

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 12

Launched in October 2014 of Online Linguistic Support (OLS)

Furthermore, the level of basic skills, the share

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 13

CEF- Energy: As a result of the first call for proposals

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 14

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 15

Heading 1B economic, social and territorial cohesion

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 16

ESF value added - period 2007-2013

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 17

ERDF - period 2007-2013

By the end of 2014, the Commission has adopted

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 18

Heading 2 sustainable growth: natural resources

The EAGF aims at improving the competitiveness of the

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 19

2.3.1 EAGF European Agricultural Guarantee Fund

The take up of investment-related support in the RDPs

The main challenge for 2016 is to offer continuous

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 20

2.3.3 EMFF European Maritime and Fisheries Fund

The European Market Observatory for fisheries

European Fisheries Fund - 2007-2013 period

concern actions in direct management.

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 21

Heading 3 security and citizenship

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 22

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 23

Heading 4 Global Europe

The European Development Fund is financed outside the EU budget

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 25

2.5.2 ENI - EUROPEAN NEIGHBOURHOOD INSTRUMENT

Syria crisis: the situation in Syria has continued to deteriorate,

Following the crisis in Gaza, the EU quickly mobilised additional support to

II. PROGRAMMES' MEMORANDUM / 26

Both in the East and in the South,

2.5.3 DCI - DEVELOPMENT COOPERATION INSTRUMENT